TUS
BOOKS VI. VII.
MERRIAM
888
H4
M57
1823
HARPER'S
CLASS AL
SERS

University of
Michigan
Libraries
18 17
ARTES
SCIENTIA VERITAS
¿
Wm. H. Bishers.
HARPER'S CLASSICAL SERIES
FOR
SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES
UNDER THE EDITORIAL SUPERVISION OF
HENRY DRISLER, LL.D.
JAY PROFESSOR OF GREEK IN COLUMBIA COLLEGE
Copyright, 1881, by HARPER & BROTHERS
THE SIXTH AND SEVENTH BOOKS
OF
HERODOTUS

Wm. W. Bienok.
WITH
A LIFE OF HERODOTUS, AN EPITOME OF HIS HISTORY
A SUMMARY OF THE DIALECT, AND
EXPLANATORY NOTES
By AUGUSTUS C. MERRIAM, PH.D.
ADJUNCT PROFESSOR OF GREEK IN COLUMBIA COLLEGE, NEW YORK
NEW YORK
HARPER & BROTHERS, FRANKLIN SQUARE
1893.
HARPER'S NEW CLASSICAL SERIES.
UNDER THE EDITORIAL SUPERVISION OF
HENRY DRISLER, LL.D.,
JAY PROFESSOR OF GREEK, COLUMBIA COLLEGE.
BASED UPON THE BEST AND MOST RECENT TEXTS, AND WITH NOTES ORIGINAL
AND SELECTED.
INITIAL VOLUMES.
THE PROTAGORAS OF PLATO. With an Introduction, and Critical and Explan-
atory Notes. By E. G. SIHLER, Ph.D., sometime Fellow in Greek in the Johns
Hopkins University. 12mo, Cloth, 75 cents.
HERODOTUS (Books VI. and VII.).
With Introduction, and Notes Critical and
Explanatory. By AUGUSTUS C. MERRIAM, Ph.D., Adjunct Professor of Greek,
Columbia College. 12mo, Cloth.
THE OLYMPIC AND PYTHIAN ODES OF PINDAR. With Introductory Essay,
Dissertation on the Metres of Pindar, and Notes Critical and Explanatory. By
BASIL L. GILDERSLEEVE, Ph.D. (Göttingen), LL.D., Professor of Greek, Johns
Hopkins University. 12mo, Cloth.
THE OFFICES OF CICERO. With Introduction, and Notes Critical and Explanatory,
from Various Sources. By Professor AUSTIN STICKNEY, A.M. 12mo, Cloth,
(In Press.)
SICILIAN EXPEDITION OF THUCYDIDES (Books VI. and VII.). With Introduc-
tion, and Notes Critical and Explanatory. By W. A. LAMBERTON, Professor of
Greek, Lehigh University. 12mo, Cloth. (In Press.)
OTHER VOLUMES IN PREPARATION.
PUBLISHED BY HARPER & BROTHERS, NEW YORK.
Any of the above works will be sent by mail, postage prepaid, to any part of
the United States or Canada, on receipt of the price.
Copyright, 1885, by HARPER & BROTHERS.
gift of
888
whbreichn
PREFACE.
H4
MET
1893
THE present work was undertaken at the request of
Professor Drisler, to form part of the Series of Greek
and Latin Classics now issuing from the press of Messrs.
Harper & Brothers, under his editorial supervision.
The text selected is that of Stein's third edition for
the Sixth Book, and fourth edition for the Seventh, in
the Haupt and Sauppe Series. Wherever any departure
has been made from these, as is done in a few cases only,
the reading of an earlier edition has been usually pre-
ferred. All changes are mentioned in the notes, if of
sufficient importance to deserve it.
The notes of Stein have also been made the basis of
the commentary; but the editions of Abicht, Krüger,
Freund, Baehr, Schweighäuser, Stein with critical appa-
ratus, Gaisford, Stocker, Blakesley, and Rawlinson, and
the histories of Grote and Curtius have been consulted
at every step, and their materials freely employed. No
attempt has been made to acknowledge this indebtedness
in the notes. The plan of the work precluded everything
except sheer results, and those stated in the concisest
form. The text is supposed to be before the reader at
every point; otherwise some of the notes may not be
easily intelligible. References to the Books of our
author not included in this text are made sparingly, and
vi
PREFACE.
only upon necessity; but within these two Books they
will be found to be copious. Conscientiously used, it is
believed that they will be found of the greatest value in
acquiring an intimate acquaintance with our historian's
style, idioms, and method of thought; neglected, they
will certainly be harmless.
The proofs have had the great advantage of passing
under the watchful eyes of Professor Drisler and Dr. E.
D. Perry, and it is with pleasure that I avail myself of
the opportunity to express my thanks for their gener-
ous kindness.
COLUMBIA COLLEGE, Jan. 1885.
AUGUSTUS C. MERRIAM.
INTRODUCTION.
LIFE OF HERODOTUS.
HERODOTUS was born at Halicarnassus in Caria about 484 E.C.
His father's name was Lyxes, his mother's Dryo or Rhoeo,
and he had a brother named Theodorus. The distinction of
his family is attested by Suidas; and its wealth must have
been considerable to have furnished our historian with the
leisure and the means for undertaking his extensive travels.
His native town was the chief seat of a small kingdom which,
at the time of his birth, owed allegiance to the Persian king,
and was ruled by the famous Queen Artemisia, whose spirit
and discernment Herodotus himself has rendered immortal.
Born amid the din of preparation for the great expedition
against Greece in those heroic days of which he was destined
to become the historian, his earliest recollections must have
been the tidings of the noble victories of his countrymen
across seas, and the ignominious failure of the proud and
haughty king in his tempt to enslave the motherland as hist
father had enslaved the colonists of the Asiatic coast. The
deep impression stamped upon his youthful mind by these.
events has been often remarked in his writings. In the edu-
cation of the day-grammar, gymnastics, and music-he must
have been carefully trained; but beyond this he shows him-
self to have been intimately acquainted with all the famous
poets who preceded him, and with not a few of the prose
writers. But it was to Homer that he owed most; and if he
did not know the Iliad and Odyssey by heart from Alpha to
Omega, like Niceratus of Athens, at all events his mind was
so thoroughly imbued with these poems that their pervading
A*
viii
INTRODUCTION.
influence appears not only in the plan and arrangement of
his work, but in countless phrases and expressions where
either direct imitation or unconscious phrasing is plainly ap-
parent. The ancients had already remarked this; Dionysius
of Halicarnassus calls him 'Ouipov nλwrne, and Longinus.
μόνος Ομηρικώτατος. In these poetic studies he must have
received much stimulus, if not actual direction and guidance,
from his uncle Panyasis, himself an epic poet, ranked by some
of the ancients next even to Homer. Two poems of Panyasis
are mentioned, an epic in fourteen books on the Labors of
Hercules, and another upon the settlement of the Ionic colonies
in Asia Minor, in both of which subjects Herodotus exhibits
the greatest interest and a special acquaintance. Panyasis
was also a reparоσkóπоç—a seer and interpreter of omens and
dreams-and to this we may trace the nephew's implicit faith
in these signs and wonders, and his frequent mention and
attempted interpretation of them, notwithstanding his scep-
ticism upon some other points of popular belief.
At what time Herodotus began his extensive travels is not
known, but his great journey into the heart of Asia appears
to have been undertaken among the first. As a Persian sub-
ject these regions would have been exceptionally open to him
in his early manhood; and from an expression in ii. 150 it
has seemed probable that his visit to Egypt was subsequent to
his Persian journey, and from ii. 30, 99, 149, iii. 91, that he
saw Egypt in undisturbed possession of the Persians. But
Egypt was in a state of revolt under Inaros, assisted by the
Athenian fleet, from 460 to 455 B.C., and our author states
(iii. 12) that he saw on the field itself the skulls of those who
were slain in the battle of Papremis, by which Inaros estab-
lished himself.
It must have been soon after the beginning of this revolt
of Inaros that Lygdamis, the grandson of Artemisia, succeeded
to the rule at Halicarnassus. His youth and inexperience.
may have led him to introduce measures bearing more harshly
upon the partisans of liberty than their spirit would tolerate,
and in the troubles that ensued Panyasis, as Suidas informs
LIFE OF HERODOTUS.
ix
us, met his death at the hands of the tyrant, and Herodotus
made his escape to the island of Samos, where he took up his
abode, though not for long. Gathering together his fellow-
exiles, of whom there were many, no doubt, and probably re-
ceiving some assistance from Athens, Herodotus returned to
Halicarnassus and succeeded in expelling Lygdamis from the
town, although the tyrant appears to have retained his sway
over some portion of the neighboring region. It is to this
condition of affairs, as it would seem,' to which we are intro-
duced by the Halicarnassian inscription discovered by Newton,
in which an agreement is entered into by the townspeople on
the one side and Lygdamis on the other, in relation to the
restoration of property that had been previously confiscated.
The latest date to which this event can be assigned is fixed
by the earliest known Tribute-list of the Delian Confederacy,
found at Athens, in which Halicarnassus appears as an ally
of Athens for the year 454 B.C.²
Though successful in restoring his native city to the free-
dom he so much loved, Herodotus was not, as he frequently
impresses upon us in his history, "happy in all things." The
apothegm attributed to Xerxes (vii. 237), πoλýrns woλiýty ev
πρήσσοντι φθονέει, seems wrung from the writer by his own
bitter experience. The jealousies and factions of Halicarnassus
soon made him willing to abandon it forever, and then or
soon after he is likely to have made his tour through Egypt.
It was towards the close of the decade following the expulsion
of Lygdamis that he spent some time at Athens, and became
acquainted with the great geniuses that made Athens at that
time the light of the world. Among them Sophocles became
his particular friend, and wrote a poem in his honor in 440, a
line and a half of which has been preserved to us by Plu-
tarch. According to Eusebius, during his stay at Athens,
about 445, Herodotus read his history, and was honored pub-
3
1 Kirchhoff, Griech. Alph.3 pp. 4-10; Roehl, I. G. A. No. 500.
2 C. I. A. i. 226; Hicks, Hist. Inser. 24.
Ὠιδὴν Ηροδότῳ τευξεν Σοφοκλῆς ἐτέων ὧν
πέντ᾽ ἐπὶ πεντήκοντα.
X
INTRODUCTION.
licly by a gift of ten talents. Another story, told in detail
by Lucian, but now regarded as improbable, gives an account.
of his reading at Olympia during the great games.
At
Athens a Halicarnassian could not obtain citizenship, and
when a colony containing some notable men was sent out
about 444 B.c. by Pericles to Thurii in southern Italy, near
the site of the ancient Sybaris, Herodotus joined its for-
tunes, transferred his allegiance to the new city, and made
it his home for the rest of his life. Continuous residence,
however, was not necessary; and from his mentioning the
Propylaea at Athens, which was not completed till 431 B.C., it
is supposed that he visited Athens about that time. The date
of his death is not known; but he mentions incidentally some
events which happened as late as 430, and possibly 424, but
nothing later. It is argued that he would have certainly
alluded to the disastrous result of the Athenian expedition to
Sicily (415) if he had lived to witness it. Hence his death
is now placed at about 424 B.C. Suidas says that he died at
Thurii, and was buried in the market-place. The following
epitaph, reputed to have been inscribed upon his tomb there,
has been preserved:
Ἡρόδοτον Λύξεω κρύπτει κόνις ἥδε θανόντα,
Ιάδος ἀρχαίης ἱστορίης πρύτανιν,
Δωριέων βλαστόντα πάτρης ἄπο· τῶν γὰρ ἄτλητον
μῶμον ὑπεκπροφυγών Θούριον ἔσχε πάτρην.
The extent of our historian's travels is only known from
passing notices in his own works, but it must have been very
remarkable for the time, and has been estimated at ten or
fifteen thousand miles. Upon his Persian journey he probably
visited Babylon, Susa, Acbatana, and the ruins of Nineveh. He
is familiar with the most of Asia Minor, Cyprus, and all the
shores of the Levant. He ascended the Nile as far as Ele-
phantine, visited Cyrene, and made the tour of the Pontus as
far north as the Crimea and as far east as Colchis. All the
islands and coasts of the Aegean, and all the cities of note in
Greece and southern Italy, were known to him from personal
observation. In these journeys he seems to have been actuated
LIFE OF HERODOTUS.
xi
simply by a desire for inquiry and for gathering information
to be embodied in his history. Notes of all his observations
must have been made upon the spot, and afterwards worked
up as suited his convenience and leisure; so that it is idle to
inquire where he composed his history. That he was making
alterations and additions to it up to the last years of his life
has been intimated already. The statement of Suidas that he
cultivated the Ionic dialect in Samos and wrote his history
there can be accepted only in a limited sense. Though Hali-
carnassus was a Dorian colony, it seems certain, from the New-
ton inscription above mentioned and a somewhat later one
from the same place more recently published,' that the dialect
was mainly Ionic. In any event the historian would have
employed the Ionic for his history, since the genealogists and
logographers who preceded him had used it habitually, and it
had become the literary medium on the Asiatic coast.
Coupled with the story of his recitation at Olympia is the
assertion that the multitude was so pleased with his work
that they gave the names of the nine Muses to his nine books,
on the spot. This, at least, must be apochryphal, for no such
division into books was known to the author, as is plain from
his manner of reference. The existing division was probably
due to the Alexandrian grammarians, and is first mentioned
by Diodorus Siculus, about the beginning of our era. The
order in which the names of the Muses appear is that of
Hesiod, Theog. 77. Our MSS. are all cursives, and the earliest
belong to the tenth century.
Besides his history as transmitted to us, Herodotus promised
(i. 106, 184) a treatise on Assyrian history, but whether it was
ever written or not is a question about which nothing can be
said with certainty.
To be called the Father of History, as Herodotus has often
been designated, is a noble distinction, and one which he
rightly deserves. Not because the Greeks had no writers
who preceded him in the art of prose history-for this art
¹ Bulletin Cor. Hellén. iv. p. 295, Dittenberger, Sylloge Inscr. 6.
xii
INTRODUCTION.
had been practised at least since the middle of the sixth
century, and many names of chroniclers and geographers
are mentioned, notably that of Hecataeus-but because he
so far surpassed all these, not only in the style and inimitable
charm of his writings, but in the largeness, variety, duration,
and epic unity of his subject, in which he did not treat of one
city or one nation merely, but of Europe, Asia, and Africa,
the whole converging towards one grand and heroic struggle
for the liberty and independence of a nation, where three con-
tinents looked on and three continents participated. His
merits as an historian have been described as unwearying dili-
gence in the acquisition of the materials for his work, unques-
tionable honesty and veracity in the use of them, extraordinary
impartiality in the treatment of delicate points, and a striking
moderation and freedom, not only from party bias, but from
national vanity, in strong contrast to the general practice of
his country inen. His defects, from a modern point of view,
are summed up as credulity or an undue love of the marvel-
lous, an over-striving after effect, and a want of critical judg-
ment and method. But critics are never weary of expatiating
upon his merits as a writer, upon what Dionysius of Halicar-
nassus would delight to call the Homeric unity of his history.
and the Homeric treatment of his episodes, his skill in the
portraiture of character, his dramatic power, his pathos, his
vividness in pictorial description, the unceasing variety of his
narrative, the childlike simplicity and unaffected candor of his
nature, and withal such qualities of winning grace and sweet-
ness that Athenaeus has ftly styled him ὁ μελίγηρυς.
"He was a mild old man, and cherished much
The weight dark Egypt on his spirit laid;
And with a sinuous eloquence would touch
Forever at that haven of the dead.
Single romantic words by him were thrown,
As types, on men and places, with a power
Like that of shifting sunlight after shower
Kindling the cones of hills and journeying on.
He feared the gods and heroes, and spake low,
That echo might not hear in her light room."
EPITOME OF HERODOTUS.
BOOK I. CLIO.
The historian proclaims at the outset that the purpose of
his work is to preserve the memory of past events, to secure
for the great actions of both Greeks and Barbarians their just
meed of renown, and especially to trace the causes and course
of the conflicts between the Asiatic and Hellenic nations
which culminated in the great Persian wars of his boyhood.
Persian authorities asserted that the antagonism began with
the abduction of Io, Europa, Medea, and Helen; but Herodotus
maintains that Croesus proved himself the real cause by his
subjugation of all the Hellenic cities settled on the coast of
Asia Minor. Hence he proceeds to give the history of Lydia
(chs. 6-92). First reigned the dynasty of the Atyadae, then
the Heraclidae, succeeded by the Mermnadae (716-546' B.C.),
consisting of Gyges, Ardys, Sadyattes, Alyattes, and Croesus.
The last extends his power over all Asia Minor west of the
Halys, is visited by Solon, loses his favorite son Atys, and
consults the Greek oracles in contemplation of a war with
Cyrus, who had deposed Astyages, king of the Medes, the
brother-in-law of Croesus. After inquiry into the condition
of Athens, now under Pisistratus, and of Sparta, now flourish-
ing under the regulations of Lycurgus, Croesus concludes.
alliance with the Spartans, fights an indecisive battle with
Cyrus on the Halys, and retreats to Sardis, closely followed
by Cyrus, who takes him prisoner after a short siege, and
treats him ever after as his intimate friend and adviser.
The marvels of Lydia and the customs of its people (chs. 93-4).
Origin of Cyrus, and early history of the Medes and Persians
(chs. 95-130):-The Medes revolt from the Assyrians, and are
ruled in succession by Deioces (709 B.C.), Phraortes, Cyaxares,
and Astyages, from whose daughter Mandane, and Cambyses,
'Stein's chronology is followed.
xiv
INTRODUCTION.
king of the Persians, Cyrus is born. Story of his birth and
bringing up. He induces the Persians to revolt from the Medes,
overthrows Astyages (558 B.C.), and founds the Persian Empire.
Persian customs and peculiarities (chs. 131-140).
Conquests of Cyrus in Asia Minor (chs. 141–176):—Upon
the fall of Sardis the Ionians and Aeolians of the coast,
offering submission to Cyrus, receive a rebuff. Account of
their settlements. They apply to Sparta for aid. Cyrus,
with larger designs, marches into Central Asia. Lydia revolts
under Pactyas, but is soon reduced by Mazares, while Harpagus,
after some stout resistance, subjugates all the Hellenic cities,
as well as Caria and Lycia.
In Central Asia, Cyrus (chs. 177-200), after bringing other
nations under his yoke, besieges Babylon, which is here de-
scribed, and an account given of its queens Semiramis and
Nitocris. The city falls. Its marvels and customs.
Expedition against the Massagetae (chs. 201-216); their
queen Tomyris. A great battle is fought, in which Cyrus is
defeated and slain. Manners of the Massagetae.
BOOK II. EUTERPE.
Cambyses (529-522 B.C.) succeeds to the throne, and pre-
pares an expedition against Egypt. This gives occasion for a
digression upon the institutions and history of Egypt, which
occupies the entire Book with the exception of the opening
chapter.
The land (chs. 5-34):-Its dimensions; its soil "the gift
of the river;" the Nile, its overflow and sources.
The people (chs. 35-98):-Their customs unlike those of the
rest of the world; sacrifices; the Egyptian and Greek Her-
cules; Greek gods and oracles derived from Egyptian; the
sacred animals; manners; embalming; Perseus worshipped
at Chemmis; inhabitants of the fen-country.
Egyptian history (chs. 99-182):-Mên, Nitocris, Moeris,
Sesostris, Pheron, Proteus (Helen's visit to Egypt), Rhampsini-
tus, Cheops and Chephren (builders of the great pyramids),
Mycerinus, Asychis, Anysis, Sabacos and the Ethiopian suprem-
EPITOME OF HERODOTUS.
XV
acy; Sethos; invasion of the Assyrians; the twelve kings;
labyrinth and lake Moeris; Psammetichus (664-610 B.C.),
Nccos (610-595 B.C.), Psammis (595-589 B.C.), Apries (589-
570 B.C.); revolt of Amasis (570 B.C.); defeat and death of
Apries; Amasis king (569-526 B.C.); his character and works;
conquers Cyprus; encourages Greek settlers; Egypt prosperous.
BOOK III. THALIA.
Expedition of Cambyses (chs. 1–38):-Causes of quarrel be-
tween Persia and Egypt. Phanes deserts to Cambyses; pas-
sage of the Arabian desert; invasion of Egypt. Psammenitus
now king. Battle of Pelusium and defeat of the Egyptians.
Capture of Memphis. The Libyans and Cyrenaeans submit.
Insults to Psammenitus and the body of Amasis. Cambyses
despatches one expedition against Ammon and another against
the Ethiopians; both fail disastrously. Cambyses insults the
Egyptian gods, and stabs the Apis; procures the death of his
brother Smerdis in Susa, and slays his sister, so that he is
thought mad.
Digression upon the tyranny of Polycrates in Samos (chs.
39-60)-Story of Polycrates and his ring. He sends some.
of his disaffected subjects with forty triremes to aid Cambyses
in Egypt, but they turn back and attack him. Defeated, they
obtain assistance from Sparta and Corinth. Story of Periander.
The combined force proves unsuccessful. Three great Samian
works-an aqueduct, a breakwater, and the temple of Hera.
Usurpation of the Pseudo-Smerdis (chs. 61-97):-The
death of Smerdis being secret, but coming to the knowl-
edge of the Magian Patizithes, who had been left in charge
of the royal household in Susa, is taken advantage of by
Patizithes, who proclaims his brother, also called Smerdis,
as king, and as the rightful Smerdis. Cambyses learns this
in Syria on his return, is wounded in leaping upon his horse,
and dies. Seven noble Persians, including Darius, discover
the Magian imposture, force their way into the royal palace,
and slay the usurper after eight months' reign. The seven
discuss three forms of government, but Darius is finally declared
xvi
INTRODUCTION.
king. He divides the kingdom into twenty satrapies, whose
position and revenues are described.
Digression upon the Indians, Arabians, Ethiopians, and the
wonders of their lands (chs. 98-117).
Reign of Darius to the taking of Babylon (chs. 118-160):
-Story of Intaphernes. Polycrates treacherously slain by the
Persian satrap. Democedes, the Crotoniat physician, at Susa;
he urges an expedition against Hellas, is sent thither with
some Persians to "spy out the land," and does not return.
Story of Syloson, brother of Polycrates, and how he was made
tyrant of Samos by Darius. Babylon revolts, but is finally
reduced by the stratagem of Zopyrus.
BOOK IV. MELPOMENE.
Scythian and Libyan expeditions of Darius.
Scythia and its people (chs. 1–82):—Origin of the Scyths.
Story of Aristeas. Nations and climate of Scythia. The
Hyperboreans. Universal geography. Circumnavigation of
Africa. Rivers, religion, obsequies, and population of Scythia.
Invasion by Darius (chs. 83–144):-Preparations made by
the king, who crosses into Europe by a bridge over the Bos-
porus. He sends the Ionian contingent by water to bridge
the Ister, marches through Thrace, and leaves the Ionians
in charge of the bridge as he advances farther, with orders
to destroy it and leave for home if he does not return
within sixty days. Some Scythian tribes described. They
divide their forces into two parts, and retire before Darius
as he advances, leaving a desert behind them. Weary of
such a land, with no one to fight, Darius reluctantly retraces
his steps, now harassed by one division of the Scyths, while
the other hastens to the Ister to persuade the Ionians to
retire, as the sixty days have passed. Miltiades, king of the
Thracian Chersonese, recommends following the advice of
the Scyths and restoring freedom to Ionia, but is successfully
opposed by Histiaeus, ruler of Miletus, on the ground that
each tyrant in that event would lose his own power. Darius
at last appears, and, marching back to the Hellespont, crosses
EPITOME OF HERODOTUS.
xvii
into Asia by the aid of his fleet, leaving Megabazus with a
considerable force in Thrace.
Expedition against Libya (clis. 145-205).
History of Cyrene:-Founding of Thera. Theraeans re-
quired by the oracle to colonize Libya. Occupation of Platea
off the coast, settlement at Aziris, and colonization of Cyrene.
Ilistory of its kings-Battus I., Arcesilaus I., Battus II., Ar-
cesilaus II., Battus III., and Arcesilaus III., who is slain by the
people of Cyrene and Barca. His mother, Pheretime, flees to
Egypt and implores the aid of its governor, Aryandes, who
sends a force by land and sea. The land and people, together
with their manners and customs, described. The Persians
besiege and capture Barca, and then return through Cyrene.
Cruelty and death of Pheretime.
BOOK V. TERPSICHORE.
Persian conquests in Thrace; Ionian revolt.
Megabazus subjugates the Thracians; their customs and
religion described. People beyond the Ister; Darius rewards
Histiacus; the Paeonians reduced and transported to Asia;
lake-dwellings; submission of Macedonia, and the story of the
ambassadors; Histiaeus taken to Susa by Darius as his friend;
Artaphernes appointed satrap of Sardis, and Otanes as suc-
cessor to Megabazus (chs. 1–27).
Causes leading to the Ionian revolt (chs. 28-54):— Ex-
iles from Naxos seeking restoration at Miletus are prom-
ised assistance by Aristagoras, son-in-law of Histiaeus, by
whom he had been appointed ruler of Miletus in his absence.
Aristagoras obtains a fleet from Artaphernes upon engaging
to pay the expenses of the expedition. A quarrel between
Aristagoras and the Persian commander ruins the success of
the enterprise, and Aristagoras returns, hard pressed by his
obligations. Fearing to lose his tyranny he begins to think
of revolt, when a slave arrives from Histiaeus bearing the
same suggestion branded on his scalp. The Milesians accede
to his designs, seize the fleet, and openly revolt. The other
Ionian cities unite with the Milesians, Aristagoras resigns the
xviii
INTRODUCTION.
tyranny, and commonwealths are established throughout the
confederacy, the tyrants being expelled. Aristagoras seeks
assistance at Sparta, where Cleomenes is king, but succeeds
neither in persuading nor in bribing him, and thence he pro-
ceeds to Athens.
Digression upon the condition of affairs at Athens (chs.
55-96):-Assassination of Hipparchus (513 B.C.) by Harmo-
dius and Aristogiton, who were descended from the Phoenicians
of Bocotia that introduced letters into Greece. The Alcinaeo-
nidae, expelled from Athens by the Pisistratidae, seek to ef-
fect a return by force without success. They gain renown
by rebuilding the Delphic temple, and bribe the priestess to
urge upon the Spartans to deliver Athens. A Spartan expe-
dition by sea is defeated by the Pisistratidae. Cleomenes is
sent with a larger force by land, and besieges the tyrants in
the Acropolis. Their children are made prisoners while be-
ing removed from the country, and to ransom them the Pisis-
tratidae abandon Athens (509 B.C.) and remove to Sigaeum
in the Troad. Athens now advances with rapid strides to
prosperity. Clisthenes alters the four tribes to ten, and in-
troduces other reforms. His opponent, Isagoras, calls in Cle-
omenes to the assistance of his party, and so procures the
banishment of Clisthenes. Cleomenes, with a small force, is
besieged in the Acropolis, but is allowed to withdraw on con-
dition of quitting the country. Clisthenes returns, and, in
anticipation of trouble from Cleomenes, envoys are sent to
Sardis to ask aid from the Persians, but they fall into deep
disgrace on their return, for promising to give earth and water
to Darius. Cleomenes advances with a combined Peloponne-
sian army from the south, and the Boeotians and Chalcidians
from the north. The Athenians march to Eleusis to attack
the Peloponnesians, but at the last moment the Corinthians
refuse to proceed further with the quarrel and withdraw, sup-
ported by the second Spartan king, Demaratus; so that Cle-
omenes is also forced to retire. The Athenians now attack
and defeat the Boeotians and Chalcidians separately, and settle
four thousand colonists in the Chalcidian territory. The
EPITOME OF HERODOTUS.
xix
Thebans obtain assistance from the Aeginetans, between whom
and the Athenians a long-standing feud had existed, and a
harassing warfare succeeds. The Spartans, discovering how
they had been tricked by the bribery of the Pythoness, as
semble deputies from the Peloponnesus, and invite Hippias
to present his case to them, hoping to restore him to Athens;
but this is successfully opposed by the Corinthian envoy, who
tells the story of Periander. Hippias returns to Asia and ex-
erts all his efforts to induce the Persians to invade Greece.
Ionian revolt to the death of Aristagoras (chs. 97–126):—
Aristagoras now arrives at Athens from Sparta, and assist-
ance is readily promised him. Twenty ships from Athens
and five from Eretria proceed to Ephesus, whence the crews
join in the raid upon Sardis, but return home after the burning
of the city, and abandon the cause of the Ionians, whose army
is badly worsted by the Persians. The Carians and the Cypri-
otes next join in the revolt. Darius, hearing of the burning
of Sardis, vows vengeance upon the Athenians, and charges
Histiaeus with being privy to the revolt, but at length allows
him to return to the coast, upon a promise to quiet the disturb-
ance. The Cypriotes are defeated on land by the Persians,
and though the Ionian fleet is at the same time victorious over
the Phoenicians of the island it returns home, and Cyprus
again falls under the sway of the Persians, who also reconquer
the Carians and some of the Aeolian and Ionian cities. Aris-
tagoras, losing heart, retires to Mycerinus in Thrace, where he
soon meets with his death in besieging a town of the Thracians.
BOOK VI. ERATO.
Suppression of the Ionian revolt; battle of Marathon.
Revolt suppressed (chs. 1-42):-Histiaeus escapes to Chios,
is rejected by the Milesians, and turns pirate at Byzantium.
The Persians besiege Miletus, where the Ionian fleet is gath-
ered. Dionysius attempts to discipline the Ionians with little
success. Battle of Lade, desertion of the Samians, and defeat
of the remaining contingent. Miletus captured and destroyed.
Some Samians sail to Sicily and gain possession of Zancle.
XX
INTRODUCTION.
Death of Histiaeus. Ionia subdued by the Persians. Man-
netting in the islands. Miltiades and his family in the Cher-
sonese. He escapes to Athens. Persians stay hostilities in
Ionia and establish a condition of security.
Expedition under Mardonius (chs. 43–47), who conquers
the Thasians and Macedonians, but returns after losing his
fleet off Athos. Darius sends heralds to Greece to demand
submission. The Aeginetans accede to his demands, and are
accused before the Spartans by the Athenians. Cleomenes
goes to Aegina to demand the rendition of the most guilty,
but meets with a rebuff, through the instigation of Demaratus.
Digression upon the kings of Sparta, and history of Cle-
omenes and Demaratus (chs. 51-93):—Origin of the double
monarchy. Prerogatives of the Spartan kings. Story of the
birth of Demaratus, and how he was deposed through the
machinations of Cleomenes. The Aeginetans deliver ten hos-
tages to the Athenians. Cleomenes goes mad and commits
suicide. His heinous deed in Argolis. The Athenians refuse
to deliver the Aeginetan hostages to Leotychides, notwith-
standing his story of Glaucus. Some details of warfare be-
tween Athens and Aegina.
Expedition of Datis and Artaphernes (chs. 94 – 120):—
These commanders are sent by Darius to bring the Athe-
nians and Eretrians into his presence. From Ionia they cross
the Aegean, enslave Naxos, respect Delos, capture Eretria, and
land at Marathon. The Athenians send to Sparta for aid, march
under the command of Miltiades to Marathon, where they are
joined by the Plataeans, engage with the enemy and defeat them.
The Persians retire to Asia, carrying with them the Eretrians.
The Alcmaconidae defended from the charge of treachery
to Athens. Origin of their wealth. Wooing of Agarista.
Miltiades conducts an expedition against Paros, is wounded,
returns, is tried for deceit, and dies of his wound. The Pe-
lasgians in Attica and Lemnos (chs. 121–140).
BOOK VII. POLYMNIA.
Expedition of Xerxes and battle of Thermopylae.
EPITOME OF HERODOTUS.
xxi
Darius prepares a more powerful armament for the invasion
of Greece, but his designs are frustrated by death (chs. 1-4).
Xerxes succeeds to the throne. Calls an assembly in which
his father's plans are discussed. His dreams. Preparations
of unexampled magnitude. Canal constructed at Athos.
March from Critalla to Sardis. The bridges of the Helles-
pont. Advance to Abydos. Conversation with Artabanus.
The bridges crossed. March to Doriscus. Numbers and de-
scription of the host. Xerxes questions Demaratus, advances
to Acanthus and thence to Therma. Visits Tempe (chs. 5-
130).
Condition of affairs in Greece (chs. 131-178):-The Thes-
salians, Bocotians, and many others medize. Athenians the
saviours of Hellas. The oracles and the wooden wall which
Themistocles explains as referring to the ships. Congress
of deputies at the Isthmus. Argos refuses to aid the cause.
No help obtained from Gelon, Corcyra, or Crete. A force is
sent to defend Tempe, but this retreats upon hearing of a
pass in the rear. The fleet sent to Artemisium, and Leonidas
with a force to Thermopylae.
Advance-guard of the Persian fleet start from Therma.
First bloodshed. Forces of Xerxes recapitulated. A storm
strikes the Persian fleet off Pelion, and destroys four hun-
dred vessels. The remainder proceed to the Pagasaean gulf.
Xerxes marches through Thessaly to Trachis. Leonidas and
his forces. They defend themselves for two days. Ephialtes
betrays the path over the mountain, by which Hydarnes
marches to the rear of the Greeks. The Spartans and Thes-
pians die at their post. Conduct of the Thebans. Monu-
ment at Thermopylae. Xerxes advised by Demaratus to send
a fleet to Cythera, but without success. Insult to the body
of Leonidas (chs. 179-239).
BOOK VIII. URANIA.
Artemisium and Salamis. Retreat of Xerxes.
Three indecisive engagements of the fleet at Artemisium.
Two hundred Persian vessels sent round Euboea destroyed in
xxii
INTRODUCTION.
a storm. The Greek fleet retires to Salamis. Xerxes marches
into Boeotia and sends a detachment against Delphi, which
fails of its purpose. The Athenians abandon their city for
Salamis and Troezene. Attica ravaged and the Acropolis taken.
Themistocles prevents the Greek fleet from withdrawing from
Salamis. Artemisia's advice to Xerxes. His fleet surrounds
Salamis. Tidings of this brought to the Greeks by Aristides.
Battle of Salamis, and defeat of the Persian fleet, which is
then despatched to the Hellespont. The Greeks pursue but a
short distance (chs. 1-106).
Xerxes leaves Mardonius with three hundred thousand
chosen troops, and proceeds overland to the Hellespont, losing
most of his force on the way. The Greeks share the spoil.
Honors to Themistocles. Xerxes' fleet watches Ionia. Mar-
donius sends Alexander of Macedon to the Athenians.
proposals spurned with noble resolution (chs. 107-144).
BOOK IX. CALLIOPE.
Plataeae and Mycale.
His
Mardonius, in the following spring, again invades Attica
and occupies Athens. After much delay the Spartans take
the field under Pausanias. Mardonius retreats into Boeotia.
The Greeks encamp near Plataeae. The auspices unfavorable,
but Mardonius resolves on giving battle. Alexander apprises
the Athenians of this decision. Amompharetus. Battle of
Plataeae. Mardonius falls, and the Persians fly to their camp,
which is stormed and taken. Anecdotes of the battle (chs.
1-89).
The Greek fleet under Leotychides advances to the Ionian
coast. The Persian squadron draws up on shore at Mycale.
The Greeks land and obtain a complete victory. They proceed
to the Hellespont. Intrigues in the court of Xerxes. Leo-
tychides finding the bridges destroyed by a storm withdraws
to Greece. The Athenians besiege and capture Sestos, and
then likewise return to their homes (chs. 90-122).
SUMMARY OF THE HERODOTEAN DIALECT.
1. k for
CONSONANT CHANGES.
in all pronominal adjectives and adverbs formed from the
stem πο: κοῖος, ὁκοῖος, κόσος, κότερος, κη, etc., except in όποδαπός.
κ for χ: δέκομαι, οὐκί.
τ for θ:
αυτις, but αὖθι in αύθιγενής.
ξ for κ:
ξυνός (more frequently κοινός).
ξ for σσ: διξός, τριξός (but never ξύν for σύν, nor er for σσ).
2. Transfer of aspiration: ἐνθαῦτα, ἐνθεῦτεν, κιθών.
3. A smooth mute remains unchanged before the rough breathing: note
this especially with the prepositions ἀντί, ἀπό, ἐπί, κατά, μετά, ὑπό,
with elision of the final vowel, and in οὐκ. Except αφήσειν (on ac-
count of the allusion to) 'Αφέται, vii. 193 (but ἀπεῖτο viii. 49, etc.),
ἔφορος.
4. Euphonic changes not made: ἴδμεν, ὀδμή. —Abridgment: γίνομαι for
γίγνομαι, γινώσκω for γιγνώσκω.
VOWEL CHANGES.
5. n (n) for ā (a): a. in the endings of the 1st decl.; here are to be in-
cluded the adverbs, λάθρῃ, λίην, πέρην.
6.
b. in the tenses of verbs in άw out of the present
system, and in their derivatives, as ἐθυμίησε,
θυμητήριον, ἀπέδρη, πειρηθῆναι.
c. for a stem a: ἄκρητος,νεηνίης, πρήσσω, Εὐφρήτης,
θώρηξ, διήκονος, τριήκοντα,λοχηγός, but ιθαγενής.
d. in derivative syllables : Σαρδιηνός, Παρνησσός,
Σπαρτιήτης.
ทุ for : πρύμνη, πρώρη,in the substantives in εια from adjectives in
ής, as ἀληθείη, υγιείη, and in those in ota from adjs. in oos, as εὐνοίη,
προνοίη.
7. e for a: ἔρσην, τέσσερες; εω for ao, απ: λεώς, Λεωνίδης, Ποσειδέων;
for θεάομαι, θηέομαι is used.
8. € for η: εσσύω (=ἡττάω, but always ἥσσων), μέν for μήν.
9. € for o: πεντηκόντερος.
B
xxiv
INTRODUCTION.
10. € for εἰ: κρέσσων, μέζων, πλέων, ἔργω, δέξω, ἐς, ἐπιτήδεος, and the
fem. of adjectives in υς ; θήλεα, ταχέα.
11. ει for €: ζειαί, εἴριον, ξεῖνος, δείρω, εἴρομαι, εἵνεκα.
12. ει for εν(γ): εἴνατος, ἐπείνυσθαι, ἐνεῖκαι.
13. α for ε: μέγαθος, τάμνω, τράπω (pres. and impf.).
14. α for η: αμφισβατέω, μεσαμβρίη, λάξομαι, λάμψομαι.
a
15. a for o:
αρρωδέω, ἀρρωδίη.
16. ι for e:
ἱστίη, ἐπίστιος.
17. ι for te:
ἱρός, τροφάντης; but ἀρχιερεύς.
18. ι for ev:
ιθύς, ἰθύνω.
19. w for € and a: πλώω (but more frequently πλέω), ζώω (also ζάω).
20. ω for αν: διαφώσκω, τρῶμα.
21. ω for on: ὀγδώκοντα. On the other hand, αλλογνώσας, ἐννώσας, ἐν-
νενώκασι, ἐνένωτο, would, on account of the accent, probably be de-
rived more correctly from the simple stem vo- (yvo-) than from voe- ;
so, also, ἔβωσα, ἐβώσθην, βεβωμένος, from for instead of Boa-.
22. w for ov: ὧν (γῶν, οὔκων).
23. ηu for αυ: νηΰς, νηυσί.
ην
24. ου for o : γούνατα, μοῦνος, νοῦσος, οὗρος (=ὅρος, but ὄρος).
25. ων for αν: θῶυμα, ἐμεωυτοῦ, ὡυτός, τώυτό.
HIATUS.
26. The external hiatus (between two words) is not avoided either by
arrangement of the words (as among the Attic writers after Isocra-
tes) or by the customary aids, except with où, which in general is
changed to the stronger οὐκ.
27. Elision and crasis are comparatively uncommon.
Peculiar changes
are ὁ & into ὡ: ὠνήρ, ώυτός; τὸ ἀ into τω: τωπό, τὠληθές.
28. v movable is lacking throughout, even in ἔνερθε, ὄπισθε, πρόσθε,
ἔμπροσθε, υπερθε, κατύπερθε, πέρηθε, in which the local sense of the
ending is nearly extinct; otherwise in general -θεν.
29. s movable is wanting in ἄχρι, μέχρι, οὕτω, not in ἀτρέμας, πολλάκις.
30. Since the distaste for internal hiatus is much less strong than in
Attic, as well in inflection as in word-formation, concurrent vowels
are often not contracted, and diphthongs are sometimes resolved
(diæeresis).
31. Contraction does not take place in-
αε: ἀέκων, ἄεθλος, ἀεθλέω (but ἀργός).
αει: ἀεικής, ἀείδω, ἀείρω.
εα: ἔαρ, ἐπεάν (but always ἦν and ἐπειδάν).
εε: ρέεθρον.
eo: in words of 2d decl. in eos, εον, as χρύσεος, ὀστέον.
σε: προέχω, δημιουργός.
2o: in words of 2d decl. in oos, as πλύος.
SUMMARY OF THE HERODOTEAN DIALECT.
XXV
32. Resolution:
οι into οΐ: ις, οιστός.
into αϊ: 'Αίδης, ἀίσσω.
η into ηι: δηιόω, χρηίζω, ληιστής.
into ωι: πατρώιος, πρωί ; but ζῷον, etc.
33. Resolution with strengthening:
αι into ηι: θρῆιξ, ῥηίδιος.
ει into ηι: κληίω, λήιτον ; in nouns in εια from verbs in εύω, as βα-
σιληίη, στρατηίη ; adjectives in είος, as ἀνδρήιος, Κήιος; neuters in
εῖον, as μαντήιον. Here belongs πολιήτης (for πολίτης).
INFLECTION.
34. The dual is not used in either declension or conjugation.
FIRST DECLENSION.
35. Final & changes to η: σοφίη, ισχυρή, μιῆς.
36. Masculines in ης form the gen. sing. in εω: νεηνίης, νεηνίεω ; those
in έης dropping the e: βορέης, βορέω.
ης,
37. In the acc. sing. the words ἀκινάκης, δεσπότης, and many proper
names in ns, waver between the endings ηv and εα: Γύγην, Γύγεα.
38. The gen. pl. changes the original άων into έων: γνωμέων. This is
also true of all fem. adjectives (except those in os), numerals, pro-
nouns, and participles, whether they have the same form as the masc.
or not: πολλέων, τουτέων, ἐουσέων. Barytones shorten εέων to έων:
θηλέων.
39. The ending of the dat. pl. is ῃσι.
SECOND DECLENSION.
40. The ending of the dat. pl. is οισι.
41. λεώς, δίμνεως, and proper names like Μενέλεως, Αμφιάρεως, follow the
Attic declension, but κάλος, λαγός, νηός, ἵλεος, πλέος, are regular.
THIRD DECLENSION.
42. While the inflection of the consonant stems docs not exhibit depart-
ures from the usual forms, it is the essential peculiarity of the vowel
stems that they do not in general contract with the vowel endings.
43. Neuters in os, as μέγαθος, μεγάθεος, -εϊ, etc. (but δέους).
44. Adjectives in ηs, as ἀληθής, ἀληθέος, -έι, etc. Proper names in κλέης
drop the e, as Θεμιστοκλέος, etc.
45. Feminines in ά and ús are formed as in Attic, except in the four ac-
cusatives, Βουτοῦν, Ἰοῦν, Λητοῦν, Τιμοῦν.
46. Nouns in is, as πόλις, πόλιος, πόλι, πόλιες, πολίων, πόλιας and πόλις.
47. Substantives in us, vos, form the acc. pl. in vas or us.
Those in us, eos, as πήχυς, -εος, -εϊ, -υν, -εες, -έων, -εσι, -εας.
χχνί
INTRODUCTION.
48. Those in eus, as βασιλεύς, νέος, -έι, -έα, -εῦ, νέες, -έων, -έας.
49. Neuters in aς: κέρας, κέρεος, -εϊ, -εα, -έων.
50. Anomalous forms: νηύς, νεός, νηί, νέα, νέες, νεῶν, νηυσί, νέας ; μείς
(for μήν), but μηνός, μηνί, etc. Instead of πολύς, except in com-
position, πολλός is uniformly found.
COMPARISON.
51. The following adjectives, which change the quantity of the vowel be-
fore the ending os, still retain the usual form of comparison: ἐπιτή-
δεος, ἐπιτηδεύτερος; οἰκήιος, ἀνδρήιος; ἱρός, ἱρώτατος. πολλός has
πλέων, neutr. πλέον and πλεῦν, πλεῦνος, πλέον, etc.
NUMERALS.
52. δύο: gen. δύο and δυῶν; dat. δύο and δυοῖσι; acc. δύο ; τέσσερες,
τέσσερα ; δυώδεκα and δύο καὶ δέκα.
53. Personal:
PRONOUNS.
Sing. gen. ἐμέο and έμεν, enclitic μου.
στο
wanting,
σεν,
66
σευ.
εύ.
Dat. σοί,
Acc.
66
τοι.
66
μιν (= αὐτόν, ἑωυτόν).
Piur. gen. ἡμέων.
ὑμέων.
σφέων,
66
σφεων.
Dat. σφίσι (= ἑωυτοῖσι), " σφι (=αὐτοῖσι).
Acc. ἡμέας.
ὑμέας.
σφέας, σφέα,
σφεας, σφεα.
54. Reflexive: ἐμεωυτοῦ, σεωυτοῦ, ἑωυτοῦ, etc.
55. Demonstrative: ὅδε, ἥδε, form in the dat. pl. τοισίδε, τησίδε. The
article has still a demonstrative force in certain connections. Κεῖνος
occurs by the side of ἐκεῖνος, and generally with a stronger tone (as
θέλειν by the side of ἐθέλει»).
56. Relative : except ὅς, ή, οἵ, αἵ, the other cases are the same as the
article: τό, τοῦ, τῆς, τά, τῶν, etc. These initial consonant forms occur
also with such prepositions as end in consonants, ἐν, ἐκ, ἐς, πρός, σύν,
and with περί, which then always suffers anastrophe, τοῦ πέρι, while
πρό, υπέρ, do not happen to occur with the relative. But after those
prepositions whose final vowel can be elided, the relative is regular-
ly the Attic οὗ, ἧς, ὧν, etc., and also in the temporal phrases ἐν ᾧ, ἐς ὅ,
ἐξ οὗ, and the local ἐς ὅ, μέχρι ού. Yet, while ἐκ is found eighteen
times before τοῦ, τῆς, τῶν, ἐξ appears nine times before οὗ, ἧς, ὧν.
SUMMARY OF THE HERODOTEAN DIALECT. xxvii
σTis has nowhere the initial T. Corresponding to the pron. TIS,
there are formed ὅτευ, ὅτεῳ, ὅτεων, ὁτέοισι, and ἅσσα.
57. Interrogative: τίς, τεῦ, τέῳ, also τίνι, τέων, τέοισι, and similar forms
of the indefinite, except in accent.
CONJUGATION.
AUGMENT.
58. The not uncommon iterative imperfects and aorists in σkov, σkóµŋv,
σκον, σκόμην,
remain wholly without augmerat, as ποιέεσκον, λάβεσκον, ἔχεσκον.
59. The syllabic augment falls away only in a small number of pluperfects,
as αναβεβήκεε, καταλέλειπτο. κτᾶσθαι makes the perf. ἔκτημαι.
plupf. ἐκτήμην. χρῆν is more frequent than ἐχρῆν. βούλομαι and
μέλλω augment with e, δύναμαι oftener with e than η.
€
The
60. In the use of the temporal augment great inequality prevails, which
probably only in part falls to the charge of the transcribers.
majority of verbs beginning with a vowel are augmented—
a. With some, the augment is wanting throughout: aipéw, iw, etc.
b. With others, only in particular forms: ayш, ëλкш, ëπw, etc.
c. Others, still, fluctuate between augmented and unaugmented
forms: ἀγγέλλω, ἐπίσταμαι, ἔργω, etc.
61. Peculiarities: ôpéw, impf. pwv, ëwba, èópyee, oîka. Instead of the
temporal augment, αἱρέω takes the Attic reduplication in ἀραίρηκα,
ἀραίρημαι.
ENDINGS.
62. The plupf. act. has in the sing. ea (eas), ee, in the pl. éate: ¿ŵ◊ɛa,
ἐπεπόμφεε, συνηδέατε.
63. Besides the ending cav (3d pl. opt. aor.), alev occurs very rarely,
never ais, αι, for ειας, ειε. In the passive, eínoav interchanges
frequently with εεν.
64. The endings of the fut. of liquid verbs remain uncontracted, as onµa-
vέw μevioμev; likewise the following endings eat, ao, eo of the 2d
sing. pass. and mid.: φαίνεαι, ἐδέξαο, εἴρεο, ἐγένεο. But by the side
of to the contraction ev also occurs, especially in the imperative:
εἵλευ, πύθεν. Further, in the aor. subj. pass. éw, éwµev, éwσt, re-
main open. On the other hand, the Attic fut. usually has contracted
forms, or changes ou into ev: νομιοῦμεν, κομιεύμεθα.
65. The v of the opt. endings oɩvтo, aɩto, is changed regularly to a:
ἀγοίατο, πειρψατο.
66. Similarly, the 3d pl. perf. and plupf. pass., instead of being formed
periphrastically in labial and palatal stems, adds the personal endings
xxviii
INTRODUCTION.
directly to the stem, with the change of νται, ντο, το αται, ατο,
and aspirate the final consonant of the stem: τεθάφαται, ἐτετάχατο.
The aspiration fails only in the forms belonging to ἱκνέομαι, as ἀπί-
καται. ἀγωνίζω, χωρίζω, σκευάζω make ἀγωνίδαται, κεχωρίδαται,
ἐσκευάδατο, since their stems end in δ.
67. The same change of the nasal is found also in pure verbs, but a final
stem η then becomes €: ἡγέαται, ἐκτέατο ; according to the same
analogy, we have κατέαται (for κάθηνται), ἐκέατο (for ἔκειντο).
FORMATION OF THE TENSES.
68. Verbs in ίζω form, as in Attic, a contracted fut. in ιῶ, ιοῦμαι, in which
εν often appears for ου: νομιοῦμεν, κομιεύμεθα. Similarly the verbs
in άζω: ἀποδοκιμα, δικᾶν ; and analogically, ἐλῶ, ἐλᾷς, ἐλᾷ, ἐλῶσι,
ἐλῶν.
69. Verbs in άw lengthen a in the fut. and following tenses to n, even
though t, e, p precede: θεήσεαι, πειρήσομαι.
70. Liquid verbs have η instead of a: ἀποξηρῆναι, ἐκέρδηνε.
VERBS IN έω, άω, όω.
71. Verbs in έω remain in general uncontracted: ποιέω, ποιέη. Excep-
tions: ἐθηεῖτο, τιθεῖ; varying: δεῖ, δεῖν, δέει, δέειν.
εο : ποιεῦσι, ἐποίουν.
But ev often for
The imperative ending éeo is shortened to éo: airéo, poßéo. The
pres. opt. act. ends in οιμι : ποιέοιμι ; only vi. 35, ποιοίη.
72. Polysyllabic verbs in άw in the Ionic assume the inflection of verbs in
έω, in the forms άω, αο, άου, e. g. ὁρέω, δρέοντες, ὁρέουσιν, which then
remain uncontracted. Still this change is limited mainly to a few
verbs: e. g. εἰρωτάω, κομάω, μηχανάομαι, ὁράω, ὁρμάομαι, σταθμάο-
μαι, τολμάω, φοιτάω; and in these with exceptions: eo sometimes
changes to εv : εἰρώτευν. χράομαι has in some editions εw for eo, as
ἐχρέωντο, χρεώμενος (but the texts vary greatly).
73. The verbs in άw retain everywhere as in Attic the contracted vowel
ā, which otherwise in the Ionic dialect is changed to ŋ. This is the
case even in χρᾶν, χρᾶσθαι, κνᾶν, σμᾶται; cf. § 5. b. Yet διψήν,
ζῆν are written. The pres. opt. has ῴην, ώμην.
74. Verbs in ów follow the contraction of the Attic, only that ou not in-
frequently passes into εν, except in the infinitive: ἐδικαίου, ἐλευθεροῦν,
ἐδικαίου.
VERBS IN μια
75. Besides the inflections peculiar to these verbs, several forms occur, in
part predominating, which are made from a present in έω, άω, όω, ύω.
76. τίθημι: τιθεῖ, τιθεῖσι, ἐτίθεα, ἐτίθεε; opt. aor. mid. προσθέοιτο, ὑποθέοιτο.
ἵημι forms as from a pres. ἵω: ἵει, impf. ἵει, subj. ἀπίῃ, ἀπιέωσι;
SUMMARY OF THE HERODOTEAN DIALECT. xxix
the compl. μετίημι makes the perf. ptc. μεμετιμένος, as if from μετίω.
πίμπλημι: ἐμπιπλεῖ, vii. 39; elsewhere regular, as πίμπλαμεν, πιμ-
πλᾶσι, etc.
77. ἵστημι: ἱστᾷ and ἵστησι, ἱστᾶσι, impf. ἵστα and ἵστη, Perf. ἑστᾶσι,
ptc. έστεώς (as τεθνεώς, though έστηκότων vi. 140; cf. viii. 79), ἑστῶσα
and ἑστηκυῖα, ἑστηκός (but τεθνεός), inf. ἑστάναι. κίρνημι; κιρνᾷ.
78. δίδωμι: διδοῖς, διδοῖ (rarely δίδωσι), διδοῦσι, ἐδίδουν.
79. δείκνυμι: δεικνῦσι (as ἀπολλῦσι, κατεργνῦσι, συρρηγνῦσι, besides the
rarer δεικνύουσι), ἐδείκνυε.—ζεύγνυμι: ζευγνύων, ἐζεύγνυον, as ἀπολ
λύεις, from ἀπόλλυμι.
80. In the 3d pl. pass. and mid. of the pres. and impf. of these verbs, as in
those formed analogously, v of the ending νται, ντο, often passes
into a: τιθέαται, ἐτιθέατο, ἐδεικνύατο. ανται, αντο, also change to
έαται, έατο: ἱστέαται, ἱστέατο, ἐπιστέαται, ἐπιστέατο, δυνέαται, ἐδυ-
νέατο.
81. The 2d aor. subj. act. remains uncontracted: θέω, θέωμεν, θέωσι.
82. εἰμί, εἷς, εἰμέν, subj. ἔω, ᾖς, ᾖ, ἔωσι, opt. εἴησαν and εἶεν (once ἐνέοι,
vii. 6), ptc. ἐών, ἐοῦσα, ἐόν, impf. ἔα, ἔατε, more frequently ἔσκε, ἔσκον,
otherwise iv.
83. είμι, impf. ἤια, ἤιε, ἤισαν.
84. οἶδα, οἶδας, οἴδαμεν and ἴδμεν (especially in the formula τῶν ἡμεῖς
ἴδμεν), ἴσασι, subj. εἰδέω, εἰδέωμεν, εἰδέωσι, opt. εἰδείησαν and εἰδεῖεν,
impf. ᾔδεα, δεε, ἠδέατε, ἔδεσαν, fut. εἰδήσω.
}
HERODOTUS.
BOOK VI.
Histiaeus in Sardis; his Flight to Chios.
Ο
Αρισταγόρης μέν νυν Ἰωνίην ἀποστήσας οὕτω τε-1
λευτᾷ. Ἱστιαῖος δὲ ὁ Μιλήτου τύραννος μεμετιμένος
ὑπὸ Δαρείου παρῆν ἐς Σάρδις. ἀπιγμένον δὲ αὐτὸν ἐκ
τῶν Σούσων εἴρετο 'Αρταφέρνης ὁ Σαρδίων ὕπαρχος
κατὰ κοϊόν τι δοκέοι Ἴωνας ἀπεστάναι. ὁ δὲ οὔτε εἰδέ- 5
ναι ἔφη ἐθώυμαζέ τε τὸ γεγονὸς ὡς οὐδὲν δῆθεν τῶν
παρεόντων πρηγμάτων ἐπιστάμενος. ὁ δὲ ᾿Αρταφέρνης
ὁρέων αὐτὸν τεχνάζοντα εἶπε, εἰδὼς τὴν ἀτρεκείην τῆς
ἀποστάσιος, “ οὕτω τοι, Ἱστιαῖε, ἔχει κατὰ ταῦτα τὰ
πρήγματα· τοῦτο τὸ ὑπόδημα ἔρραψας μὲν σύ, ὑπερή- 10
σατο δὲ ᾿Αρισταγόρης.” Αρταφέρνης μὲν ταῦτα ἐς τὴν 2
ἀπόστασιν ἔχοντα εἶπε. Ιπτεαῖος δὲ δείσας ὡς συνιέν
των Αρταφέρνεα ὑπὸ τὴν πρώτην ἐπελθοῦσαν νύκτα
ἀπέδρη ἐπὶ θάλασσαν, βασιλέα Δαρεῖον ἐξηπατηκώς·
ὃς Σαρδὼ νῆσον τὴν μεγίστην ὑποδεξάμενος κατεργά- 5
σασθαι ὑπέλυνε τῶν Ἰώνων τὴν ἡγεμονίην τοῦ πρὸς
Δαρεῖον πολέμου. διαβὰς δὲ ἐς Χίον ἐδέθη ὑπὸ Χίων,
καταγνωσθεὶς πρὸς αὐτῶν νεώτερα πρήσσειν πρήγματα
ἐς αὐτοὺς ἐκ Δαρείου. μαθόντες μέντοι οἱ Χῖοι τὸν
πάντα λόγον, ὡς πολέμιος εἴη βασιλέι, ἔλυσαν αὐτόν. 10
ἐνθαῦτα δὴ εἰρωτεόμενος ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰώνων ὁ Ἱστιαῖος 3
κατ' ὅ τι προθύμως οὕτω ἐπέστειλε τῷ ᾿Αρισταγόρῃ
Τ
Ο
1
2
HERODOTUS.
ἀπίστασθαι ἀπὸ βασιλέος καὶ κακὸν τοσοῦτον εἴη Ἴω-
νας ἐξεργασμένος, τὴν μὲν γενομένην αὐτοῖσι αἰτίην οὐ
5 μάλα ἐξέφαινε, ὁ δὲ ἔλεγέ σφι ὡς βασιλεὺς Δαρείος
ἐβουλεύσατο Φοίνικας μὲν ἐξαναστήσας ἐν τῇ Ἰωνίῃ
κατοικίσαι, Ἴωνας δὲ ἐν τῇ Φοινίκῃ, καὶ τούτων εἵνεκα
ἐπιστείλειε. οὐδέν τι πάντως ταῦτα βασιλέος βουλευ-
σαμένου ἐδειμάτου τοὺς Ἴωνας.
Ο
Ο
•
Εν
Intrigues of Histiaeus; he Turns Pirate at Byzantium.
4 Μετὰ δὲ ὁ Ἱστιαῖος δι' ἀγγέλου ποιεύμενος Ερμίπ-
που ἀνδρὸς 'Αταρνείτεω τοῖσι ἐν Σάρδισι ἐοῦσι Περ-
σέων ἔπεμπε βιβλία, ὡς προλελεσχηνευμένων αὐτῷ
ἀποστάσιος πέρι. ὁ δὲ Ἕρμιππος πρὸς τοὺς μὲν ἀπε-
5 πέμφθη οὐ διδοῖ, φέρων δὲ ἐνεχείρισε τὰ βυβλία 'Αρ-
ταφέρνει. ὁ δὲ μαθὼν ἅπαν τὸ γινόμενον ἐκέλευε τὸν
Ερμιππον τὰ μὲν παρὰ τοῦ Ἱστιαίου δοῦναι φέροντα
τοῖσί περ ἔφερε, τὰ δὲ ἀμοιβαῖα τὰ παρὰ τῶν Περσέων
ἀντιπεμπόμενα Ιστιαίῳ ἑωυτῷ δοῦναι. τούτων δὲ γε-
10 νομένων φανερῶν ἀπέκτεινε ἐνθαῦτα πολλοὺς Περσέων
ὁ ᾿Αρταφέρνης.
5 Περὶ Σάρδις μὲν δὴ ἐγίνετο ταραχή. Ιστιαῖον δὲ
ταύτης ἀποσφαλέντα τῆς ἐλπίδος Χῖοι κατήγον ἐς Μίσ
λητον, αὐτοῦ Ἱστιαίου δεηθέντος. οἱ δὲ Μιλήσιοι, ἄστ
μενοι ἀπαλλαχθέντες καὶ ᾿Αρισταγόρεω, οὐδαμῶς πρό-
5 θυμοι ἦσαν ἄλλον τύραννον δέκεσθαι ἐς τὴν χώρην, οἷα
ἐλευθερίης γευσάμενοι. καὶ δὴ νυκτὸς γὰρ ἐούσης βίῃ
ἐπειρᾶτο κατιὼν ὁ Ἱστιαῖος ἐς τὴν Μίλητον, τιτρώσκε
ται τὸν μηρὸν ὑπό τευ τῶν Μιλησίων. ὁ μὲν δὴ ὡς
ἀπωστὸς ἐκ τῆς ἑωυτοῦ γίνεται, ἀπικνέεται ὀπίσω ἐς
10 τὴν Χίον· ἐνθεῦτεν δέ, οὐ γὰρ ἔπειθε τοὺς Χίους ὥστε
ἑωυτῷ δοῦναι νέας, διέβη ἐς Μυτιλήνην καὶ ἔπεισε Λεσ
Ο
BOOK VI.
3
βίους δοῦναί οἱ νέας. οἱ δὲ πληρώσαντες ὀκτὼ τρι-
ήρεας ἔπλεον ἅμα Ιστιαίῳ ἐς Βυζάντιον, ἐνθαῦτα δὲ
ἱζόμενοι τὰς ἐκ τοῦ Πόντου ἐκπλεούσας τῶν νεῶν ἐλάμ
βανον, πλὴν ἢ ὅσοι αὐτῶν Ἱστιαίῳ ἔφασαν ἕτοιμοι εἶναι 15
πείθεσθαι.
The Persians before Miletus; Ionian Fleet; Secret Overtures.
Ἱστιαῖος μέν νυν καὶ Μυτιληναῖοι ἐποίευν ταῦτα. 6
ἐπὶ δὲ Μίλητον αὐτὴν ναυτικὸς πολλὸς καὶ πεζὸς ἦν
στρατὸς προσδόκιμος· συστραφέντες γὰρ οἱ στρατηγοί
τῶν Περσέων καὶ ἓν ποιήσαντες στρατόπεδον ἤλαυνον
ἐπὶ τὴν Μίλητον, τἆλλα πολίσματα περὶ ἐλάσσονος 5
ποιησάμενοι. τοῦ δὲ ναυτικοῦ Φοίνικες μὲν ἦσαν προ-
θυμότατοι, συνεστρατεύοντο δὲ καὶ Κύπριοι νεωστὶ κατ
εστραμμένοι καὶ Κίλικές τε καὶ Αἰγύπτιοι. ͵ οἱ μὲν δὴ
ἐπὶ τὴν Μίλητον καὶ τὴν ἄλλην Ιωνίην ἐστρατεύοντο.
Ἴωνες δὲ πυνθανόμενοι ταῦτα ἔπεμπον προβούλους σφέ-
ων αὐτῶν ἐς Πανιώνιον. ἀπικομένοισι δὲ τούτοισι ἐς
τοῦτον τὸν χῶρον καὶ βουλευομένοισι ἔδοξε πεζὸν μὲν 5
στρατὸν μὴ συλλέγειν ἀντίξοον Πέρσῃσι, ἀλλὰ τὰ τεί-
χεα ῥύεσθαι αὐτοὺς Μιλησίους, τὸ δὲ ναυτικὸν πληροῦν
ὑπολιπομένους μηδεμίαν τῶν νεῶν, πληρώσαντας δὲ
συλλέγεσθαι τὴν ταχίστην ἐς Λάδην προναυμαχήσον-
τας τῆς Μιλήτου. ἡ δὲ Λάδη ἐστὶ νῆσος σμικρὴ ἐπὶ 10
τῇ πόλι τῇ Μιλησίων κειμένη. μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα πεπλη- 8
ρωμένῃσι τῇσι νηυσὶ παρῆσαν οἱ Ἴωνες, σὺν δέ σφι καὶ
Αἰολέων ὅσοι Λέσβον νέμονται. ἐτάσσοντο δὲ ὧδε.
τὸ μὲν πρὸς τὴν ἠὼ εἶχον κέρας αὐτοὶ Μιλήσιοι, νέας
παρεχόμενοι ὀγδώκοντα· εἴχοντο δὲ τούτων Πριηνέες 5
δυώδεκα νηυσὶ καὶ Μυήσιοι τρισὶ νηυσί, Μνησίων δὲ
Τήιοι εἴχοντο ἑπτακαίδεκα νηυσί, Τηίων δὲ εἴχοντο Χίοι
4
HERODOTUS.
!!
0
ΤΕ
ἑκατὸν νηυσί· πρὸς δὲ τούτοισι Ερυθραῖοί τε ἐτάσσοντο
καὶ Φωκαέες, Ερυθραῖοι μὲν ὀκτὼ νέας παρεχόμενοι,
10 Φωκαέες δὲ τρεῖς· Φωκαέων δὲ εἴχοντο Λέσβιοι νηυσὶ
ἑβδομήκοντα· τελευταῖοι δὲ ἐτάσσοντο ἔχοντες τὸ πρὸς
ἑσπέρην κέρας Σάμιοι ἑξήκοντα νηυσί, πάντων δὲ τού-
των ὁ σύμπας ἀριθμὸς ἐγένετο τρεῖς καὶ πεντήκοντα καὶ
9 τριηκόσιαι τριήρεες. αὗται μὲν Ιώνων ἦσαν, τῶν δὲ
βαρβάρων τὸ πλῆθος τῶν νεῶν ἦσαν ἑξακόσιαι. ὡς δὲ
καὶ αὗται ἀπίκατο πρὸς τὴν Μιλησίην καὶ ὁ πεζός σφι
ἅπας παρῆν, ἐνθαῦτα οἱ Περσέων στρατηγοὶ πυθόμενοι
5 τὸ πλῆθος τῶν Ἰάδων νεῶν καταρρώδησαν μὴ οὐ δυνα-
τοὶ γένωνται ὑπερβαλέσθαι, καὶ οὕτω οὔτε τὴν Μίλητον
οἷοί τε ἔωσι ἐξελεῖν μὴ οὐκ ἐόντες ναυκράτορες, πρός
Δαρείου κινδυνεύσωσι κακόν τι λαβεῖν. ταῦτα ἐπιλε-
γόμενοι, συλλέξαντες τῶν Ἰώνων τοὺς τυράννους, οἳ
10 ὑπ' Αρισταγόρεω μὲν τοῦ Μιλησίου καταλυθέντες τῶν
ἀρχέων ἔφευγον ἐς Μήδους, ἐτύγχανον δὲ τότε συστρα
τευόμενοι ἐπὶ τὴν Μίλητον, τούτων τῶν ἀνδρῶν τοὺς
παρεόντας συγκαλέσαντες ἔλεγόν σφι τάδε· ἄνδρες
Ἴωνες, νῦν τις ὑμέων εὖ ποιήσας φανήτω τὸν βασιλέος
15 οἶκον· τοὺς γὰρ ἑωυτοῦ ἕκαστος ὑμέων πολιήτας πει-
ράσθω ἀποσχίζων ἀπὸ τοῦ λοιποῦ συμμαχικοῦ. προϊ
σχόμενοι δὲ ἐπαγγείλασθε τάδε, ὡς πείσονταί τε ἄχαρι
οὐδὲν διὰ τὴν ἀπόστασιν, οὐδέ σφι οὔτε τὰ ἱρὰ οὔτε τὰ
ἴδια ἐμπεπρήσεται, οὐδὲ βιαιότερον ἕξουσι οὐδὲν ἢ πρό-
20 τερον εἶχον. εἰ δὲ ταῦτα μὲν οὐ ποιήσουσι, οἱ δὲ πάντως
διὰ μάχης ἐλεύσονται, τάδε ἤδη σφι λέγετε ἐπηρεάζον-
τες, τά περ σφέας κατέξει, ὡς ἑσσωθέντες τῇ μάχῃ ἐξαν-
δραποδιεῦνται καὶ ὥς σφεων τοὺς παῖδας ἐκτομίας ποιή-
σομεν, τὰς δὲ παρθένους ἀνασπάστους ἐς Βάκτρα, καὶ
10 ὡς τὴν χώρην ἄλλοισι παραδώσομεν.” οἱ μὲν δὴ ἔλεγον
BOOK VI.
5
τάδε, τῶν δὲ Ἰώνων οἱ τύραννοι διέπεμπον νυκτὸς ἕκα-
στος ἐς τοὺς ἑωυτοῦ ἐξαγγελλόμενος. οἱ δὲ Ἴωνες, ἐς
τοὺς καὶ ἀπίκοντο αὗται αἱ ἀγγελίαι, ἀγνωμοσύνῃ τε
διεχρέοντο καὶ οὐ προσίευτο τὴν προδοσίην, ἑωυτοῖσι 5
δὲ ἕκαστοι ἐδόκεον μούνοισι ταῦτα τοὺς Πέρσας ἐξαγ
γέλλεσθαι.
Speech of Dionysius and its Result.
Ταῦτα μέν νυν ιθέως ἀπικομένων ἐς τὴν Μίλητον 11
τῶν Περσέων ἐγίνετο· μετὰ δὲ τῶν Ἰώνων συλλεχθέν
των ἐς τὴν Λάδην ἐγίνοντο ἀγοραί, καὶ δή κού σφι καὶ
ἄλλοι ἠγορόωντο, ἐν δὲ δὴ καὶ ὁ Φωκαεὺς στρατηγὸς
Διονύσιος λέγων τάδε· “ ἐπὶ ξυροῦ γὰρ ἀκμῆς ἔχεται 5
ἡμῖν τὰ πρήγματα, ἄνδρες Ἴωνες, ἢ εἶναι ἐλευθέροισι
ἢ δούλοισι, καὶ τούτοισι ὡς δρηπέτῃσι· νῦν ὧν ὑμεῖς
ὴν μὲν βούλησθε ταλαιπωρίας ἐνδέκεσθαι, τὸ παραχρῆ
μα μὲν πόνος ὑμῖν ἔσται, οἷοί τε δὲ ἔσεσθε ὑπερβαλό
μενοι τοὺς ἐναντίους εἶναι ἐλεύθεροι· εἰ δὲ μαλακίῃ 10
τε καὶ ἀταξίῃ διαχρήσησθε, οὐδεμίαν ὑμέων ἔχω ἐλ
πίδα μὴ οὐ δώσειν ὑμέας δίκην βασιλέι τῆς ἀποστά-
σιος. ἀλλ᾽ ἐμοί τε πείθεσθε καὶ ἐμοὶ ὑμέας αὐτοὺς
ἐπιτρέψατε· καὶ ὑμῖν ἐγώ, θεῶν τὰ ἴσα νεμόντων, ὑπο-
δέκομαι ἢ οὐ συμμίξειν τοὺς πολεμίους ἢ συμμίσγον- 15 -
τας πολλὸν ἐλασσωθήσεσθαι.” ταῦτα ἀκούσαντες οἱ 12
Ἴωνες ἐπιτράπουσι σφέας αὐτοὺς τῷ Διονυσίῳ. ὁ δὲ
ἀνάγων ἑκάστοτε ἐπὶ κέρας τὰς νέας, ὅκως τοῖσι ἐρέτῃ-
σι χρήσαιτο διέκπλοον ποιεύμενος τῇσι νηυσὶ δι' ἀλλη-
λέων καὶ τοὺς ἐπιβάτας ὁπλίσειε, τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς ἡμέρης 5
τὰς νέας ἔχεσκε ἐπ᾽ ἀγκυρέων, παρείχέ τε τοῖσι Ἴωσι
πόνον δι' ἡμέρης. μέχρι μέν νυν ἡμερέων ἑπτὰ ἐπεί-
θοντό τε καὶ ἐποίευν τὸ κελευόμενον· τῇ δὲ ἐπὶ ταύτῃ
6
HERODOTUS.
σι οἱ Ἴωνες, οἷα ἀπαθέες όντες πόνων τοιούτων τετρυ
10 μένοι τε ταλαιπωρίῃσί τε καὶ ἡλίῳ, ἔλεξαν πρὸς ἑωυτοὺς
τάδε
“τίνα δαιμόνων παραβάντες τάδε ἀναπίμπλα-
μεν; οἵτινες παραφρονήσαντες καὶ ἐκπλώσαντες ἐκ τοῦ
νόου ἀνδρὶ Φωκαέι ἀλαζόνι, παρεχομένῳ νέας τρεῖς, ἐπι-
τρέψαντες ἡμέας αὐτοὺς ἔχομεν. ὁ δὲ παραλαβὼν
· 15 ἡμέας λυμαίνεται λύμῃσι ἀνηκέστοισι, καὶ δὴ πολλοὶ
μὲν ἡμέων ἐς νούσους πεπτώκασι, πολλοὶ δὲ ἐπίδοξοι
τὠυτὸ τοῦτο πείσεσθαί εἰσι, πρό τε τούτων τῶν κακῶν
ἡμῖν γε κρέσσον καὶ ὅ τι ἂν ἄλλο παθεῖν ἐστι, καὶ τὴν
μέλλουσαν δουληίην ὑπομεῖναι ἥτις ἔσται, μᾶλλον ἢ τῇ
20 παρεούσῃ συνέχεσθαι. φέρετε, τοῦ λοιποῦ μὴ πειθώ-
μεθα αὐτοῦ.” ταῦτα ἔλεξαν, καὶ μετὰ ταῦτα αὐτίκα
πείθεσθαι οὐδεὶς ἤθελε, ἀλλ᾽ οἷα στρατιὴ σκηνάς τε πη-
ξάμενοι ἐν τῇ νήσῳ ἐσκιητροφέοντο καὶ ἐσβαίνειν οὐκ
ἐθέλεσκον ἐς τὰς νέας οὐδ᾽ ἀναπειρᾶσθαι.
Treachery of the Samians; Battle of Lade.
13 Μαθόντες δὲ ταῦτα τὰ γινόμενα ἐκ τῶν Ἰώνων οἱ
στρατηγοὶ τῶν Σαμίων ἐνθαῦτα δὴ παρ' Αἰάκεος τοῦ
Συλοσῶντος κείνους τοὺς πρότερον ἔπεμπε λόγους ὁ
Αἰάκης κελευόντων τῶν Περσέων, δεόμενός σφεων ἐκλι-
5 πεῖν τὴν Ἰώνων συμμαχίην· οἱ Σάμιοι ὧν ὁρέοντες ἐοῦ.
σαν ἅμα μὲν ἀταξίην πολλὴν ἐκ τῶν Ἰώνων ἐδέκοντο
τοὺς λόγους, ἅμα δὲ κατεφαίνετό σφι εἶναι ἀδύνατα
τὰ βασιλέος πρήγματα ὑπερβαλέσθαι, εὖ δὲ ἐπιστάμε
νοι ὡς εἰ καὶ τὸ παρεὸν ναυτικὸν ὑπερβαλοίατο [τὸν
10 Δαρείον], ἄλλο σφι παρέσται πενταπλήσιον· προφάσιος
ὧν ἐπιλαβόμενοι, ἐπείτε τάχιστα εἶδον τοὺς Ἴωνας οὐ
βουλομένους εἶναι χρηστούς, ἐν κέρδει ἐποιεῦντο περι-
ποιῆσαι τά τε ἱρὰ τὰ σφέτερα καὶ τὰ ἴδια. ὁ δὲ Αἰάκης,
BOOK VI.
7
παρ' ὅτευ τοὺς λόγους ἐδέκοντο οἱ Σάμιοι, παῖς μὲν ἦν
Συλοσῶντος τοῦ Αἰάκεος, τύραννος δὲ ἐὼν Σάμου ὑπὸ 15
τοῦ Μιλησίου 'Αρισταγόρεω ἀπεστέρητο τὴν ἀρχὴν
κατά περ οἱ ἄλλοι τῆς Ἰωνίης τύραννοι. τότε ὢν ἐπεὶ 14
ἐπέπλεον οἱ Φοίνικες, οἱ Ἴωνες ἀντανῆγον καὶ αὐτοὶ τὰς
νέας ἐπὶ κέρας. ὡς δὲ καὶ ἀγχοῦ ἐγίνοντο καὶ συνέμι-
στον ἀλλήλοισι, τὸ ἐνθεῦτεν οὐκ ἔχω ἀτρεκέως συγγρά-
ψαι οἵτινες τῶν Ἰώνων ἐγίνοντο ἄνδρες κακοὶ ἢ ἀγαθοὶ 5
ἐν τῇ ναυμαχίῃ ταύτῃ· ἀλλήλους γὰρ καταιτιῶνται·
λέγονται δὲ Σάμιοι ἐνθαῦτα, κατὰ τὰ συγκείμενα πρὸς
τὸν Αἰάκεα, ἀειράμενοι τὰ ἱστία ἀποπλῶσαι ἐκ τῆς
τάξιος ἐς τὴν Σάμον, πλὴν ἕνδεκα νεῶν· τουτέων δὲ οἱ
τριήραρχοι παρέμενον καὶ ἐναυμάχεον ἀνηκουστήσαν- 10
τες τοῖσι στρατηγοῖσι· καί σφι τὸ κοινὸν τῶν Σαμίων
ἔδωκε διὰ τοῦτο τὸ πρῆγμα ἐν στήλῃ ἀναγραφῆναι πα
τρόθεν ὡς ἀνδράσι ἀγαθοῖσι γενομένοισι, καὶ ἔστι αὕτη
ἡ στήλη ἐν τῇ ἀγορῇ. ιδόμενοι δὲ καὶ Λέσβιοι τοὺς
προσεχέας φεύγοντας τὠυτὸ ἐποίευν τοῖσι Σαμίοισι· 15
ὡς δὲ καὶ οἱ πλευνες τῶν Ἰώνων ἐποίευν τὰ αὐτὰ ταῦτα.
Fate of the Chians and of Dionysius.
Τῶν δὲ παραμεινάντων ἐν τῇ ναυμαχίῃ περιέφθησαν 15
τρηχύτατα Χῖοι ὡς ἀποδεικνύμενοί τε ἔργα λαμπρὰ καὶ
οὐκ ἐθελοκακέοντες. παρείχοντο μὲν γάρ, ὥσπερ καὶ
πρότερον εἰρέθη, νέας ἑκατόν, καὶ ἐπ᾽ ἑκάστης αὐτέων
ἄνδρας τεσσεράκοντα τῶν ἀστῶν λογάδας ἐπιβατεύον. 5
τας· ὁρέοντες δὲ τοὺς πολλοὺς τῶν συμμάχων προδι-
δόντας οὐκ ἐδικαίευν γίνεσθαι τοῖσι κακοῖσι αὐτῶν
ὅμοιοι, ἀλλὰ μετ' ὀλίγων συμμάχων μεμουνωμένοι διεκ-
πλέοντες ἐναυμάχεον, ἐς ὃ τῶν πολεμίων ἑλόντες νέας
συχνὰς ἀπέβαλον τῶν σφετερέων τὰς πλεῦνας. Χλοι 16
8
HERODOTUS.
μὲν δὴ τῇσι λοιπῇσι τῶν νεῶν ἀποφεύγουσι ἐς τὴν ἑων-
τῶν· ὅσοισι δὲ τῶν Χίων ἀδύνατοι ἦσαν αἱ νέες ὑπὸ
τρωμάτων, οὗτοι δὲ ὡς ἐδιώκοντο καταφυγγάνουσι πρὸς
5 τὴν Μυκάλην. νέας μὲν δὴ αὐτοῦ ταύτῃ ἐποκείλαντες
κατέλιπον, οἱ δὲ πεζῇ ἐκομίζοντο διὰ τῆς ἠπείρου. ἐπει-
δὴ δὲ ἐσέβαλον ἐς τὴν Ἐφεσίην κομιζόμενοι οἱ Χίοι,
νυκτός τε γὰρ ἀπίκατο ἐς αὐτὴν καὶ ἐόντων τῇσι γυναιξὶ
αὐτόθι θεσμοφορίων, ἐνθαῦτα δὴ οἱ Ἐφέσιοι, οὔτε προα-
10 κηκοότες ὡς εἶχε περὶ τῶν Χίων ἰδόντες τε στρατὸν ἐς
τὴν χώρην ἐσβεβληκότα, πάγχυ σφέας καταδόξαντες
εἶναι κλῶπας καὶ ἰέναι ἐπὶ τὰς γυναῖκας, ἐξεβοήθεον
πανδημεὶ καὶ ἔκτεινον τοὺς Χίους.
17
18
Οὗτοι μὲν τοίνυν τοιαύτῃσι περιέπιπτον τύχῃσι·
Διονύσιος δὲ ὁ Φωκαεὺς ἐπείτε ἔμαθε τῶν Ἰώνων τὰ
πρήγματα διεφθαρμένα, νέας ἑλὼν τρεῖς τῶν πολεμίων
ἀπέπλεε ἐς μὲν Φώκαιαν οὐκέτι, εὖ εἰδὼς ὡς ἀνδραπο
5 διεῖται σὺν τῇ ἄλλῃ Ἰωνίῃ· ὁ δὲ ἰθέως ὡς εἶχε ἔπλεε ἐς
Φοινίκην, γαύλους δὲ ἐνθαῦτα καταδύσας καὶ χρήματα
λαβὼν πολλὰ ἔπλεε ἐς Σικελίην, ὁρμεόμενος δὲ ἐνθεῦτεν
ληιστὴς κατεστήκεε Ελλήνων μὲν οὐδενός, Καρχηδονίων
δὲ καὶ Τυρσηνῶν.
Fall of Miletus; Sympathy of the Athenians.
Οἱ δὲ Πέρσαι ἐπείτε τῇ ναυμαχίῃ ἐνίκων τοὺς Ἴωνας,
τὴν Μίλητον πολιορκέοντες ἐκ γῆς καὶ θαλάσσης, καὶ
ὑπορύσσοντες τὰ τείχεα καὶ παντοίας μηχανὰς προσφέ
ροντες, αἱρέουσι κατ᾽ ἄκρης ἕκτῳ ἔτει ἀπὸ τῆς ἀποστά
5 σιος τῆς ᾿Αρισταγόρεω καὶ ἠνδραποδίσαντο τὴν πόλιν,
ὥστε συμπεσεῖν τὸ πάθος τῷ χρηστηρίῳ τῷ ἐς Μίλητον
19 γενομένῳ. χρεομένοισι γὰρ Αργείοισι ἐν Δελφοῖσι περὶ
σωτηρίης τῆς πόλιος τῆς σφετέρης ἐχρήσθη ἐπίκοινον
BOOK VI.
9
ΤΟ
χρηστήριον, τὸ μὲν ἐς αὐτοὺς τοὺς ᾿Αργείους φέρον, τὴν
δὲ παρενθήκην ἔχρησε ἐς Μιλησίους. τὸ μέν νυν ἐς τοὺς
᾿Αργείους ἔχον, ἐπεὰν κατὰ τοῦτο γένωμαι τοῦ λόγου, 5
τότε μνησθήσομαι· τὰ δὲ τοῖσι Μιλησίοισι οὐ παρεούσι
ἔχρησε, ἔχει ὧδε,
ΤΟ
10
καὶ τότε δή, Μίλητε, κακῶν ἐπιμήχανε ἔργων,
πολλοῖσιν δεῖπνόν τε καὶ ἀγλαὰ δῶρα γενήσῃ,
σαὶ δ᾽ ἄλοχοι πολλοῖσι πόδας νίψουσι κομήταις,
νηοῦ δ᾽ ἡμετέρου Διδύμοις ἄλλοισι μελήσει.
τότε δὴ ταῦτα τοὺς Μιλησίους κατελάμβανε, ὁκότε ἄν-
δρες μὲν οἱ πλεῦνες ἐκτείνοντο ὑπὸ τῶν Περσέων ἐόντων
κομητέων, γυναῖκες δὲ καὶ τέκνα ἐν ἀνδραπόδων λόγῳ
ἐγίνοντο, ἱρὸν δὲ τὸ ἐν Διδύμοισι καὶ ὁ νηός τε καὶ τὸ 15
χρηστήριον συληθέντα ἐνεπίμπρατο. τῶν δ᾽ ἐν τῷ ἱρῷ
τούτῳ χρημάτων πολλάκις μνήμην ἑτέρωθι τοῦ λόγου
ἐποιησάμην. ἐνθεῦτεν οἱ ζωγρηθέντες τῶν Μιλησίων 20
ἤγοντο ἐς Σοῦσα. βασιλεὺς δέ σφεας Δαρείος κακὸν
οὐδὲν ἄλλο ποιήσας κατοίκισε ἐπὶ τῇ Ἐρυθρῇ καλεομένη
θαλάσσῃ, ἐν ῎Αμπῃ πόλι, παρ᾽ ἣν Τίγρης ποταμὸς πα-
ραρρέων ἐς θάλασσαν ἐξίει. τῆς δὲ Μιλησίων χώρης 5
αὐτοὶ μὲν οἱ Πέρσαι εἶχον τὰ περὶ τὴν πόλιν καὶ τὸ πε-
δίον, τὰ δὲ ὑπεράκρια ἔδοσαν Καρσὶ Πηδασεῦσι ἐκτῆ
σθαι.
Παθοῦσι δὲ ταῦτα Μιλησίοισι πρὸς Περσέων οὐκ 21
ἀπέδοσαν τὴν ὁμοίην Συβαρῖται, οἳ Λαόν τε καὶ Σκίδρον
οἴκεον τῆς πόλιος ἀπεστερημένοι· Συβάριος γὰρ ἁλού-
σης ὑπὸ Κροτωνιητέων Μιλήσιοι πάντες ἡβηδὸν ἀπεκεί-
ραντο τὰς κεφαλὰς καὶ πένθος μέγα προσεθήκαντο· 5
πόλιες γὰρ αὗται μάλιστα δὴ τῶν ἡμεῖς ἴδμεν ἀλλήλῃσι
ἐξεινώθησαν. οὐδὲν ὁμοίως καὶ ᾿Αθηναῖοι· 'Αθηναίοι
μὲν γὰρ δῆλον ἐποίησαν ὑπεραχθεσθέντες τῇ Μιλήτου
Τ
1*
10
HERODOTUS.
ἁλώσι τῇ τε ἄλλῃ πολλαχῇ, καὶ δὴ καὶ ποιήσαντι
10 Φρυνίχῳ δράμα Μιλήτου ἅλωσιν καὶ διδάξαντι ἐς δά-
κρυά τε ἔπεσε τὸ θέητρον, καὶ ἐζημίωσάν μιν ὡς ἀνα-
μνήσαντα οἰκήια κακὰ χιλίῃσι δραχμῇσι, καὶ ἐπέταξαν
μηκέτι μηδένα χρᾶσθαι τούτῳ τῷ δράματι.
Samians in Sicily; Betrayal of Zancle; Scythes.
22 Μίλητος μέν νυν Μιλησίων ἠρήμωτο· Σαμίων δὲ
τοῖσί τι ἔχουσι τὸ μὲν ἐς τοὺς Μήδους ἐκ τῶν στρατη-
γῶν τῶν σφετέρων ποιηθὲν οὐδαμῶς ἤρεσκε, ἐδόκεε δὲ
μετὰ τὴν ναυμαχίην αὐτίκα βουλευομένοισι, πρὶν ἢ σφι
5 ἐς τὴν χώρην ἀπικέσθαι τὸν τύραννον Αἰάκεα, ἐς ἀποι-
κίην ἐκπλέειν μηδὲ μένοντας Μήδοισί τε καὶ Αἰάκεϊ
δουλεύειν. Ζαγκλαῖοι γὰρ οἱ ἀπὸ Σικελίης τὸν αὐτὸν
χρόνον τοῦτον πέμποντες ἐς τὴν Ἰωνίην ἀγγέλους ἐπε-
καλέοντο τοὺς Ἴωνας ἐς Καλὴν ἀκτήν, βουλόμενοι
10 αὐτόθι πόλιν κτίσαι Ἰώνων. ἡ δὲ Καλὴ αὕτη ἀκτὴ
καλεομένη ἔστι μὲν Σικελῶν, πρὸς δὲ Τυρσηνίην τε
τραμμένη τῆς Σικελίης. τούτων ὢν ἐπικαλεομένων οἱ
Σάμιοι μοῦνοι Ἰώνων ἐστάλησαν, σὺν δέ σφι Μιλη-
σίων οἱ ἐκπεφευγότες. ἐν ᾧ τοιόνδε δή τι συνήνεικε γε-
23 νέσθαι. Σάμιοι γὰρ κομιζόμενοι ἐς Σικελίην ἐγίνοντο
ἐν Λοκροῖσι τοῖσι Επιζεφυρίοισι, καὶ Ζαγκλαῖοι αὐτοί
τε καὶ ὁ βασιλεὺς αὐτῶν, τῷ οὔνομα ἦν Σκύθης, περικατ
έατο πόλιν τῶν Σικελῶν ἐξελεῖν βουλόμενοι. μαθών
5 δὲ ταῦτα ὁ Ρηγίου τύραννος ᾿Αναξίλεως, ὥστε τότε ἐὼν
διάφορος τοῖσι Ζαγκλαίοισι, συμμίξας τοῖσι Σαμίοισι
ἀναπείθει ὡς χρεὸν εἴη Καλὴν μὲν ἀκτήν, ἐπ᾽ ἣν ἔπλεον,
ἐᾶν χαίρειν, τὴν δὲ Ζάγκλην σχεῖν ἐοῦσαν ἔρημον ἀν-
δρῶν. πειθομένων δὲ τῶν Σαμίων καὶ σχόντων τὴν
10 Ζάγκλην, ἐνθαῦτα οἱ Ζαγκλαῖοι, ὡς ἐπύθοντο ἐχομένην
Π
BOOK VI.
11
Ο
Ο
τὴν πόλιν ἑωυτῶν, ἐβοήθεον αὐτῇ καὶ ἐπεκαλέοντο Ιπ.
ποκράτεα τὸν Γέλης τύραννον· ἦν γὰρ δή σφι οὗτος
σύμμαχος. ἐπείτε δὲ αὐτοῖσι καὶ ὁ Ἱπποκράτης σὺν
τῇ στρατιῇ ἧκε βοηθέων, Σκύθην μὲν τὸν μούναρχον τῶν
Ζαγκλαίων ὡς ἀποβαλόντα τὴν πόλιν ὁ Ἱπποκράτης 15
πεδήσας καὶ τὸν ἀδελφεὸν αὐτοῦ Πυθογένεα ἐς Ἴνυκα
πόλιν ἀπέπεμψε, τοὺς δὲ λοιποὺς Ζαγκλαίους κοινολο-
γησάμενος τοῖσι Σαμίοισι καὶ ὅρκους δοὺς καὶ δεξάμενος
προέδωκε. μισθὸς δέ οἱ ἦν εἰρημένος ὅδε ὑπὸ τῶν Σα-
μίων, πάντων τῶν ἐπίπλων καὶ ἀνδραπόδων τὰ ἡμίσεα 20
μεταλαβεῖν τῶν ἐν τῇ πόλι, τὰ δ᾽ ἐπὶ τῶν ἀγρῶν πάντα
Ιπποκράτεα λαγχάνειν. τοὺς μὲν δὴ πλεῦνας τῶν Ζαν-
κλαίων αὐτὸς ἐν ἀνδραπόδων λόγῳ εἶχε δήσας, τοὺς δὲ
κορυφαίους αὐτῶν τριηκοσίους ἔδωκε τοῖσι Σαμίοισι και
τασφάξαι· οὐ μέντοι οἵ γε Σάμιοι ἐποίησαν ταῦτα. 25
Σκύθης δὲ ὁ τῶν Ζαγκλαίων μούναρχος ἐκ τῆς Ινυκος 24
ἐκδιδρήσκει ἐς Ιμέρην, ἐκ δὲ ταύτης παρῆν ἐς τὴν Ασίην
καὶ ἀνέβη παρὰ βασιλέα Δαρεῖον. καί μιν ἐνόμισε
Δαρείος πάντων ἀνδρῶν δικαιότατον εἶναι, ὅσοι ἐκ τῆς
Ἑλλάδος παρ᾽ ἑωυτὸν ἀνέβησαν· καὶ γὰρ παραιτησά- 5
μενος βασιλέα ἐς Σικελίην ἀπίκετο καὶ αὖτις ἐκ τῆς
Σικελίης ὀπίσω παρὰ βασιλέα, ἐς ὃ γήραϊ μέγα ὄλβιος
ἐὼν ἐτελεύτησε ἐν Πέρσῃσι. Σάμιοι δὲ ἀπαλλαχθέντες
Μήδων ἀπονητὶ πόλιν καλλίστην Ζάγκλην περιεβε
βλέατο.
Ο
10
Aeaces Rewarded; Histiaeus and the Chians; Portents.
Μετὰ δὲ τὴν ναυμαχίην τὴν ὑπὲρ Μιλήτου γενομέ- 25
νην Φοίνικες κελευσάντων Περσέων κατῆγον ἐς Σάμον
Ανάκεα τὸν Συλοσῶντος, ὡς πολλοῦ τε ἄξιον γενόμενον
σφίσι καὶ μεγάλα κατεργασάμενον· καὶ Σαμίοισι μού
12
HERODOTUS.
26
5 νοισι τῶν ἀποστάντων ἀπὸ Δαρείου διὰ τὴν ἔκλειψιν
τῶν νεῶν τὴν ἐν τῇ ναυμαχίῃ οὔτε ἡ πόλις οὔτε τὰ ἱρὰ
ἐνεπρήσθη. Μιλήτου δὲ ἁλούσης αὐτίκα Καρίην ἔσχον
οἱ Πέρσαι, τὰς μὲν ἐθελοντὴν τῶν πολίων ὑποκυψάσας,
τὰς δὲ ἀνάγκῃ προσηγάγοντο.
0
Ταῦτα μὲν δὴ οὕτω ἐγίνετο. Ιστιαίῳ δὲ τῷ Μιλή
σίῳ ἐόντι περὶ Βυζάντιον καὶ συλλαμβάνοντι τὰς Ἰώνων
ὁλκάδας ἐκπλεούσας ἐκ τοῦ Πόντου ἐξαγγέλλεται τὰ
περὶ τὴν Μίλητον γενόμενα. τὰ μὲν δὴ περὶ Ἑλλήσ
5 ποντον ἔχοντα πρήγματα ἐπιτράπει Βισάλτῃ Απολλο
φάνεος παιδὶ ᾿Αβυδηνῷ, αὐτὸς δὲ ἔχων Λεσβίους ἐς Χίον
ἔπλεε, καὶ Χίων φρουρῇ οὐ προσιεμένῃ μιν συνέβαλε ἐν
Κοίλοισι καλεομένοισι τῆς Χίης χώρης. τούτων τε δὴ
ἐφόνευσε συχνούς, καὶ τῶν λοιπῶν Χίων, οἷα δὴ κε-
10 κακωμένων ἐκ τῆς ναυμαχίης, ὁ Ἱστιαῖος ἔχων τοὺς
Λεσβίους ἐπεκράτησε, ἐκ Πολίχνης τῆς Χίων ὁρμεό-
27 μενος. φιλέει δέ κως προσημαίνειν, εὖτ᾽ ἂν μέλλῃ με-
γάλα κακὰ ἢ πόλι ἢ ἔθνεῖ ἔσεσθαι· καὶ γὰρ Χίοισι
πρὸ τούτων σημήια μεγάλα ἐγένετο. τοῦτο μέν σφι
πέμψασι ἐς Δελφοὺς χορὸν νεηνιέων ἑκατὸν δύο μοῦνοι
5 τούτων ἀπενόστησαν, τοὺς δὲ ὀκτώ τε καὶ ἐνενήκοντα
αὐτῶν λοιμὸς ὑπολαβὼν ἀπήνεικε· τοῦτο δὲ ἐν τῇ πόλι
τὸν αὐτὸν τοῦτον χρόνον, ὀλίγον πρὸ τῆς ναυμαχίης,
παισὶ γράμματα διδασκομένοισι ἐνέπεσε ἡ στέγη, ὥστε
ἀπ᾽ ἑκατὸν καὶ εἴκοσι παίδων εἰς μοῦνος ἀπέφυγε. ταῦ
10 τα μέν σφι σημήια ὁ θεὸς προέδεξε, μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα ἡ
ναυμαχίη ὑπολαβοῦσα ἐς γόνυ τὴν πόλιν ἔβαλε, ἐπὶ δὲ
τῇ ναυμαχίῃ ἐπεγένετο Ιστιαῖος Λεσβίους ἄγων· κεκα-
κωμένων δὲ τῶν Χίων, καταστροφὴν εὐπετέως αὐτῶν
ἐποιήσατο.
BOOK VI.
13
Death of Histiaeus.
Ἐνθεῦτεν δὲ ὁ Ἱστιαῖος ἐστρατεύετο ἐπὶ Θάσον ἄγων 28
Ἰώνων καὶ Αἰολέων συχνούς. περικατημένῳ δέ οἱ
Θάσον ἦλθε ἀγγελίη ὡς οἱ Φοίνικες ἀναπλέουσι ἐκ τῆς
Μιλήτου ἐπὶ τὴν ἄλλην Ἰωνίην. πυθόμενος δὲ ταῦτα
Θάσον μὲν ἀπόρθητον λείπει, αὐτὸς δὲ ἐς τὴν Λέσβον 5
ἠπείγετο ἄγων πᾶσαν τὴν στρατιήν. ἐκ Λέσβου δὲ λιμαι-
νούσης οἱ τῆς στρατιῆς πέρην διαβαίνει, ἐκ τοῦ ᾿Αταρ-
νέος ὡς ἀμήσων τὸν σῖτον τόν τε ἐνθεῦτεν καὶ τὸν ἐκ
Καΐκου πεδίου τὸν τῶν Μυσῶν. ἐν δὲ τούτοισι τοῖσι
χωρίοισι ἐτύγχανε ἐὼν "Αρπαγος ἀνὴρ Πέρσης στρατη- 10
γὸς στρατιῆς οὐκ ὀλίγης· ὅς οἱ ἀποβάντι συμβαλὼν
αὐτόν τε Ιστιαῖον ζωγρίῃ ἔλαβε καὶ τὸν στρατὸν αὐτοῦ
τὸν πλέω διέφθειρε. ἐζωγρήθη δὲ ὁ Ἱστιαῖος ὧδε. ὡς 29
ἐμάχοντο οἱ Ἕλληνες τοῖσι Πέρσῃσι ἐν τῇ Μαλήνῃ τῆς
Αταρνείτιδος χώρης, οἱ μὲν συνέστασαν χρόνον ἐπὶ
πολλόν, ἡ δὲ ἵππος ὕστερον ὁρμηθεῖσα ἐπιπίπτει τοῖσι
Ἕλλησι. τό τε δὴ ἔργον τῆς ἵππου τοῦτο ἐγένετο, καὶ 5
τετραμμένων τῶν Ἑλλήνων ὁ Ἱστιαῖος ἐλπίζων οὐκ
ἀπολέεσθαι ὑπὸ βασιλέος διὰ τὴν παρεοῦσαν ἁμαρτάδα
φιλοψυχίην τοιήνδε τινὰ ἀναιρέεται· ὡς φεύγων τε κατ
ελαμβάνετο ὑπὸ ἀνδρὸς Πέρσεω καὶ ὡς καταιρεόμενος
ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἔμελλε συγκεντηθήσεσθαι, Περσίδα γλῶσσαν 10
μετεὶς καταμηνύει ἑωυτὸν ὡς εἴη Ιστιαῖος ὁ Μιλήσιος.
εἰ μέν νυν, ὡς ἐζωγρήθη, ἄχθη ἀγόμενος παρὰ βασιλέα 30
Δαρεῖον, ὁ δὲ οὔτ᾽ ἂν ἔπαθε κακὸν οὐδὲν δοκέειν ἐμοί,
ἀπῆκέ τ' ἂν αὐτῷ τὴν αἰτίην· νῦν δέ μιν αὐτῶν τε τού-
των εἵνεκα καὶ ἵνα μὴ διαφυγὼν αὐτις μέγας παρὰ βα-
σιλέι γένηται, Αρταφέρνης τε ὁ Σαρδίων ὕπαρχος καὶ 5
ὁ λαβὼν "Αρπαγος, ὡς ἀπίκετο ἀγόμενος ἐς Σάρδις, τὸ
Ο
14
HERODOTUS.
μὲν αὐτοῦ σῶμα αὐτοῦ ταύτῃ ἀνεσταύρωσαν, τὴν δὲ
κεφαλὴν ταριχεύσαντες ἀνήνεικαν παρὰ βασιλέα Δα-
ρεῖον ἐς Σούσα. Δαρεῖος δὲ πυθόμενος ταῦτα καὶ
10 ἐπαιτιησάμενος τοὺς ταῦτα ποιήσαντας ὅτι μιν οὐ
ζώοντα ἀνήγαγον ἐς ὄψιν τὴν ἑωυτοῦ, τὴν κεφαλὴν
τὴν Ιστιαίου λούσαντάς τε καὶ περιστείλαντας εὖ ἐνε-
τείλατο θάψαι ὡς ἀνδρὸς μεγάλως ἑωυτῷ τε καὶ Πέρ-
σῃσι εὐεργέτεω.
31
Εν
The Persians Enslave Ionia and the Hellespontine Region.
Τὰ μὲν περὶ Ἱστιαῖον οὕτω ἔσχε. ὁ δὲ ναυτικὸς
στρατὸς ὁ Περσέων χειμερίσας περὶ Μίλητον, τῷ δευ-
τέρῳ ἔτει ὡς ἀνέπλωσε, αἱρέει εὐπετέως τὰς νήσους τὰς
πρὸς τῇ ἠπείρῳ κειμένας, Χίον καὶ Λέσβον καὶ Τένε-
5 δον. ὅμως δὲ λάβοι τινὰ τῶν νήσων, ὡς ἑκάστην αί-
ρέοντες οἱ βάρβαροι ἐσαγήνευον τοὺς ἀνθρώπους. σαγη-
νεύουσι δὲ τόνδε τὸν τρόπον· ἀνὴρ ἀνδρὸς ἁψάμενος
τῆς χειρὸς ἐκ θαλάσσης τῆς βορηίης ἐπὶ τὴν νοτίην
διήκουσι, καὶ ἔπειτα διὰ πάσης τῆς νήσου διέρχονται
10 ἐκθηρεύοντες τοὺς ἀνθρώπους. αἵρεον δὲ καὶ τὰς ἐν
τῇ ἠπείρῳ πόλιας τὰς Ἰάδας κατὰ ταὐτά, πλὴν οὐκ
32 ἐσαγήνευον τοὺς ἀνθρώπους· οὐ γὰρ οἷά τ᾽ ἦν. ἐνθαῦ
τα Περσέων οἱ στρατηγοὶ οὐκ ἐψεύσαντο τὰς ἀπειλὰς
τὰς ἐπηπείλησαν τοῖσι Ἴωσι στρατοπεδευομένοισι ἐναν
τία σφίσι. ὡς γὰρ δὴ ἐπεκράτησαν τῶν πολίων, παϊδάς
5 τε τοὺς εὐειδεστάτους ἐκλεγόμενοι ἐξέταμνον καὶ ἐποίευν
ἀντὶ εἶναι ἐνόρχιας ευνούχους, καὶ παρθένους τὰς καλ
λιστευούσας ανασπάστους παρὰ βασιλέα· ταῦτά τε δὴ
ἐποίευν καὶ τὰς πόλιας ἐνεπίμπρασαν αὐτοῖσι τοῖσι
ἱροῖσι· οὕτω τε τὸ τρίτον Ἴωνες κατεδουλώθησαν, πρώ
10 τον μὲν ὑπὸ Λυδῶν, δὶς δὲ ἐπεξῆς τότε ὑπὸ Περσέων.
Τ
Y
BOOK VI.
15
αι
᾿Απὸ δὲ Ἰωνίης ἀπαλλασσόμενος ὁ ναυτικὸς στρα-33
τὸς τὰ ἐπ' ἀριστερὰ ἐσπλέοντι τοῦ Ἑλλησπόντου αἵρεε
πάντα· τὰ γὰρ ἐπὶ δεξιὰ αὐτοῖσι τοῖσι Πέρσῃσι ὑποχεί
ρια ἦν γεγονότα κατ᾽ ἤπειρον. εἰσὶ δὲ αἱ ἐν τῇ Εὐρώπη
αἵδε τοῦ Ἑλλησπόντου, Χερσόνησός τε, ἐν τῇ πόλιες συχ- 5
ναὶ ἔνεισι, καὶ Πέρινθος καὶ τὰ τείχεα τὰ ἐπὶ Θρηίκης
καὶ Σηλυμβρίη τε καὶ Βυζάντιον. Βυζάντιοι μέν νυν καὶ
οἱ πέρηθε Καλχηδόνιοι οὐδ᾽ ὑπέμειναν ἐπιπλέοντας τοὺς
Φοίνικας, ἀλλ᾽ οἴχοντο ἀπολιπόντες τὴν σφετέρην ἔσω
ἐς τὸν Εὔξεινον πόντον, καὶ ἐνθαῦτα πόλιν Μεσαμβρίην 10
οἴκησαν. οἱ δὲ Φοίνικες κατακαύσαντες ταύτας τὰς χώ-
ρας τὰς καταλεχθείσας τράπονται ἐπί τε Προκόννησον
καὶ ᾿Αρτάκην, πυρὶ δὲ καὶ ταύτας νείμαντες ἔπλεον αὖ
τις ἐς τὴν Χερσόνησον ἐξαιρήσοντες τὰς ἐπιλοίπους τῶν
πολίων, ὅσας πρότερον προσσχόντες οὐ κατέσυραν. ἐπὶ 15
δὲ Κύζικον οὐδὲ ἔπλωσαν ἀρχήν· αὐτοὶ γὰρ Κυζικηνοί
ἔτι πρότερον τοῦ Φοινίκων ἐσπλόου τούτου ἐγεγόνεσαν
ὑπὸ βασιλέι, Οἰβάρεϊ τῷ Μεγαβάζου ὁμολογήσαντες
τῷ ἐν Δασκυλείῳ ὑπάρχῳ.
Σ
Miltiades' Family in the Chersonese.
Τῆς δὲ Χερσονήσου, πλὴν Καρδίης πόλιος, τὰς ἄλλας 34
πάσας εχειρώσαντο οἱ Φοίνικες. ἐτυράννευε δὲ αὐτέων
μέχρι τότε Μιλτιάδης ὁ Κίμωνος τοῦ Στησαγόρεω,
κτησαμένου τὴν ἀρχὴν ταύτην πρότερον Μιλτιάδεω τοῦ
Κυψέλου τρόπῳ τοιῷδε. εἶχον Δόλογκοι Θρήικες τὴν 5
Χερσόνησον ταύτην. οὗτοι ὧν οἱ Δόλογκοι πιεσθέντες
πολέμῳ ὑπὸ ᾿Αψινθίων ἐς Δελφοὺς ἔπεμψαν τοὺς
βασιλέας περὶ τοῦ πολέμου χρησομένους. ἡ δὲ Πυθίη
σφι ἀνεῖλε οἰκιστὴν ἐπάγεσθαι ἐπὶ τὴν χώρην τοῦτον
ὃς ἂν σφεας ἀπιόντας ἐκ τοῦ ἱροῦ πρῶτος ἐπὶ ξείνια 10
αν
16
HERODOTUS.
ΤΟ
καλέσῃ. ἰόντες δὲ οἱ Δόλογκοι τὴν ἱρὴν ὁδὸν διὰ Φω-
κέων τε καὶ Βοιωτῶν ἤισαν· καί σφεας ὡς οὐδεὶς ἐκά-
35 λεε, ἐκτράπονται ἐπὶ ᾿Αθηνέων. ἐν δὲ τῇσι Αθήνησι
τηνικαῦτα εἶχε μὲν τὸ πᾶν κράτος Πεισίστρατος, ἀτὰρ
ἐδυνάστευέ γε καὶ Μιλτιάδης ὁ Κυψέλου ἐὼν οἰκίης
τεθριπποτρόφου, τὰ μὲν ἀνέκαθεν ἀπ᾿ Αἰακοῦ τε καὶ
5 Αἰγίνης γεγονώς, τὰ δὲ νεώτερα Αθηναῖος, Φιλαίου
τοῦ Αἴαντος παιδὸς γενομένου πρώτου τῆς οἰκίης ταύ-
της Αθηναίου. οὗτος ὁ Μιλτιάδης κατήμενος ἐν τοῖσι
προθύροισι τοῖσι ἑωυτοῦ, ὁρέων τοὺς Δολόγκους παρι-
όντας ἐσθῆτα ἔχοντας οὐκ ἐγχωρίην καὶ αἰχμὰς προσε
10 βώσατο και σφι προσελθοῦσι ἐπηγγείλατο καταγωγὴν
καὶ ξείνια. οἱ δὲ δεξάμενοι καὶ ξεινισθέντες ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ
ἐξέφαινον πᾶν τὸ μαντήιον, ἐκφήναντες δὲ ἐδέοντο αὐ
τοῦ τῷ θεῷ μιν πείθεσθαι. Μιλτιάδεα δὲ ἀκούσαντα
παραυτίκα ἔπεισε ὁ λόγος οἷα ἀχθόμενόν τε τῇ Πεισισ
15 τράτου ἀρχῇ καὶ βουλόμενον ἐκποδὼν εἶναι. αὐτίκα
δὲ ἐστάλη ἐς Δελφούς, ἐπειρησόμενος τὸ χρηστήριον
εἰ ποιοίη τά περ αὐτοῦ οἱ Δόλογκοι προσεδέοντο.
36 κελευούσης δὲ καὶ τῆς Πυθίης, οὕτω δὴ Μιλτιάδης ὁ
Κυψέλου, Ολύμπια ἀναραιρηκώς πρότερον τούτων τε-
θρίππῳ, τότε παραλαβὼν Αθηναίων πάντα τὸν βου-
λόμενον μετέχειν τοῦ στόλου ἔπλεε ἅμα τοῖσι Δολόγκοι-
~ 5σι καὶ ἔσχε τὴν χώρην· καί μιν οἱ ἐπαγαγόμενοι τύ-
ραννον κατεστήσαντο. ὁ δὲ πρῶτον μὲν ἀπετείχισε τὸν
ἰσθμὸν τῆς Χερσονήσου ἐκ Καρδίης πόλιος ἐς Πακτύην,
ἵνα μὴ ἔχοιεν σφέας οἱ ᾿Αψίνθιοι δηλέεσθαι ἐσβάλλον
τες ἐς τὴν χώρην. εἰσὶ δὲ οὗτοι στάδιοι ἕξ τε καὶ τριή
10 κοντα τοῦ ἰσθμοῦ· ἀπὸ δὲ τοῦ ἰσθμοῦ τούτου ἡ Χερ-
σόνησος ἔσω πᾶσα ἐστὶ σταδίων εἴκοσι καὶ τετρακοσίων
3 τὸ μῆκος. ἀποτειχίσας ἂν τὸν αὐχένα τῆς Χερσονήσου
Ο
BOOK VI.
17
ὁ Μιλτιάδης καὶ τοὺς ᾿Αψινθίους τρόπῳ τοιούτῳ ὠσά-
μενος, τῶν λοιπῶν πρώτοισι ἐπολέμησε Λαμψακη-
νοισι· καί μιν οἱ Λαμψακηνοί λοχήσαντες αἱρέουσι
ζωγρίῃ. ἦν δὲ ὁ Μιλτιάδης Κροίσῳ τῷ Λυδῷ ἐν 5
γνώμῃ γεγονώς· πυθόμενος ὧν ὁ Κροῖσος ταῦτα,
πέμπων προηγόρευε τοῖσι Λαμψακηνοῖσι μετιέναι
Μιλτιάδεα· εἰ δὲ μή, σφέας πίτυος˙ τρόπον ἀπείλε
ἐκτρίψειν. πλανωμένων δὲ τῶν Λαμψακηνῶν ἐν τοῖ-
σι λόγοισι τὸ θέλει τὸ ἔπος εἶναι τό σφι ἀπείλησε 10
ὁ Κροῖσος, πίτυος τρόπον ἐκτρίψειν, μόγις κοτὲ μα
θὼν τῶν τις πρεσβυτέρων εἶπε τὸ ἐόν, ὅτι πίτυς
μούνη πάντων δενδρέων ἐκκοπεῖσα βλαστὸν οὐδένα
μετίει ἀλλὰ πανώλεθρος ἐξαπόλλυται. δείσαντες ὧν οἱ
Λαμψακηνοί Κροῖσον, λύσαντες μετῆκαν Μιλτιάδεα. 15
οὗτος μὲν δὴ διὰ Κροῖσον ἐκφεύγει, μετὰ δὲ τελευτῷ 38
ἄπαις, τὴν ἀρχήν τε καὶ τὰ χρήματα παραδοὺς Στησα-
γόρῃ τῷ Κίμωνος ἀδελφεοῦ παιδὶ ὁμομητρίου. και
οἱ τελευτήσαντι Χερσονησῖται θύουσι ὡς νόμος οἰκιστῇ,
καὶ ἀγῶνα ἱππικόν τε καὶ γυμνικὸν ἐπιστᾶσι, ἐν τῷ 5
Λαμψακηνῶν οὐδενὶ ἐγγίνεται ἀγωνίζεσθαι. πολέμου
δὲ ἐόντος πρὸς Λαμψακηνοὺς καὶ Στησαγόρεα κατέλαβε
ἀποθανεῖν ἄπαιδα, πληγέντα τὴν κεφαλὴν πελέκει ἐν
τῷ πρυτανηίῳ πρὸς ἀνδρὸς αὐτομόλου μὲν τῷ λόγῳ
πολεμίου δὲ καὶ ὑποθερμοτέρου τῷ ἔργῳ. τελευτήσαν.39
τος δὲ καὶ Στησαγόρεω τρόπῳ τοιῷδε, ἐνθαῦτα Μιλ
τιάδεα τὸν Κίμωνος, Στησαγόρεω δὲ τοῦ τελευτήσαντος
ἀδελφεόν, καταλαμψόμενον τὰ πρήγματα ἐπὶ Χερ-
σονήσου ἀποστέλλουσι τριήρεϊ οἱ Πεισιστρατίδαι, οἵ 5
μιν καὶ ἐν ᾿Αθήνῃσι ἐποίευν εὖ ὡς οὐ συνειδότες δῆθεν
τοῦ πατρὸς Κίμωνος αὐτοῦ τὸν θάνατον, τὸν ἐγὼ ἐν
ἄλλῳ λόγῳ σημανέω ὡς ἐγένετο. Μιλτιάδης δὲ ἀπικό-
πι
18
HERODOTUS.
μενος ἐς τὴν Χερσόνησον εἶχε κατ' οἴκους, τὸν ἀδελ
10 φεὸν Στησαγόρεα δηλαδὴ ἐπιτιμέων. οἱ δὲ Χερσονησί-
ται πυνθανόμενοι ταῦτα συνελέχθησαν ἀπὸ πασέων
τῶν πολίων οἱ δυναστεύοντες πάντοθεν, κοινῷ δὲ στόλῳ
ἀπικόμενοι ὡς συλλυπηθησόμενοι ἐδέθησαν ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ.
Μιλτιάδης τε δὴ ἴσχει τὴν Χερσόνησον, πεντακοσίους
15 βόσκων ἐπικούρους, καὶ γαμέει Ολόρου τοῦ Θρηίκων
βασιλέος τὴν θυγατέρα Ηγησιπύλην.
Miltiades and the Scyths; his Flight to Athens.
40 Οὗτος δὲ ὁ Κίμωνος Μιλτιάδης νεωστὶ μὲν ἐληλύ
θεε ἐς τὴν Χερσόνησον, κατελάμβανε δέ μιν ἐλθόντα
ἄλλα τῶν καταλαβόντων πρηγμάτων χαλεπώτερα. τρί-
τῳ μὲν γὰρ ἔτεῖ πρὸ τούτων Σκύθας ἐκφεύγει· Σκύθαι
5 γὰρ οἱ νομάδες ἐρεθισθέντες ὑπὸ βασιλέος Δαρείου συνε-
στράφησαν καὶ ἤλασαν μέχρι τῆς Χερσονήσου ταύτης.
τούτους ἐπιόντας οὐκ ὑπομείνας ὁ Μιλτιάδης ἔφευγε
Χερσόνησον, ἐς ὃ οἵ τε Σκύθαι ἀπαλλάχθησαν καὶ
ἐκεῖνον Δόλογκοι κατήγαγον ὀπίσω. ταῦτα μὲν δὴ
10 τρίτῳ ἔτεϊ πρότερον ἐγεγόνεε τῶν τότε μιν κατεχόντων.
41 τότε δὲ πυνθανόμενος εἶναι τοὺς Φοίνικας ἐν Τενέδῳ,
πληρώσας τριήρεας πέντε χρημάτων τῶν παρεόντων
ἀπέπλεε ἐς τὰς ᾿Αθήνας. καὶ ὥσπερ ώρμήθη ἐκ Καρ-
δίης πόλιος, ἔπλεε διὰ τοῦ Μέλανος κόλπου· παραμεί
5 βετό τε τὴν Χερσόνησον καὶ οἱ Φοίνικές οἱ περιπίπτου-
σι τῇσι νηυσί. αὐτὸς μὲν δὴ Μιλτιάδης σὺν τῇσι
τέσσερσι τῶν νεῶν καταφεύγει ἐς Ἴμβρον, τὴν δέ οἱ
πέμπτην τῶν νεῶν κατεῖλον διώκοντες οἱ Φοίνικες. τῆς
δὲ νεὸς ταύτης ἔτυχε τῶν Μιλτιάδεω παίδων ὁ πρεσβύ
10 τατος ἄρχων Μητίοχος, οὐκ ἐκ τῆς Ὀλόρου τοῦ Θρήι-
κος ἐὼν θυγατρὸς ἀλλ᾽ ἐξ ἄλλης· καὶ τοῦτον ἅμα τῇ νηὶ
Ο
BOOK VI.
19
εἷλον οἱ Φοίνικες, καί μιν πυθόμενοι ὡς εἴη Μιλτιά-
δεω παῖς ἀνήγαγον παρὰ βασιλέα, δοκέοντες χάριτα
μεγάλην καταθήσεσθαι, ὅτι δὴ Μιλτιάδης γνώμην
ἀπεδέξατο ἐν τοῖσι Ἴωσι πείθεσθαι κελεύων τοῖσι Σκύ- 15
θῃσι, ὅτε οἱ Σκύθαι προσεδέοντο λύσαντας τὴν σχε-
δίην ἀποπλέειν ἐς τὴν ἑωυτῶν. Δαρεῖος δέ, ὡς οἱ
Φοίνικες Μητίοχον τὸν Μιλτιάδεω ἀνήγαγον, ἐποίησε
κακὸν μὲν οὐδὲν Μητίοχον, ἀγαθὰ δὲ συχνά· καὶ γὰρ
οἶκον καὶ κτῆσιν ἔδωκε καὶ Περσίδα γυναῖκα, ἐκ τῆς 20
οἱ τέκνα ἐγένετο τὰ ἐς Πέρσας κεκοσμέαται. Μιλτιάδης
δὲ ἐξ Ἴμβρου ἀπικνέεται ἐς τὰς ᾿Αθήνας.
Ionia again Tributary; Mardonius in Thrace.
Καὶ κατὰ τὸ ἔτος τοῦτο ἐκ τῶν Περσέων οὐδὲν ἐπὶ 42
πλέον ἐγένετο τούτων ἐς νεῖκος φέρον Ἴωσι, ἀλλὰ τάδε
μὲν χρήσιμα κάρτα τοῖσι Ἴωσι ἐγένετο τούτου τοῦ
ἔτεος. Αρταφέρνης ὁ Σαρδίων ὕπαρχος μεταπεμψάμε
νος ἀγγέλους ἐκ τῶν πολίων συνθήκας σφίσι αὐτοῖσι 5
τοὺς Ἴωνας ἠνάγκασε ποιέεσθαι, ἵνα δοσίδικοι εἶεν καὶ
μὴ ἀλλήλους φέροιέν τε καὶ ἄγοιεν. ταῦτά τε ἠνάγκασε
ποιέειν, καὶ τὰς χώρας μετρήσας σφέων κατὰ παρα-
σάγγας, τοὺς καλέουσι οἱ Πέρσαι τὰ τριήκοντα στάδια,
κατὰ δὴ τούτους μετρήσας φόρους ἔταξε ἑκάστοισι, οἳ 10
κατὰ χώρην διατελέουσι ἔχοντες ἐκ τούτου τοῦ χρόνου
αἰεὶ ἔτι καὶ ἐς ἐμὲ ὡς ἐτάχθησαν ἐξ ᾿Αρταφέρνεος·
ἐτάχθησαν δὲ σχεδὸν κατὰ ταὐτὰ τὰ καὶ πρότερον εἶχον.
καί σφι ταῦτα μὲν εἰρηναῖα ἦν· ἅμα δὲ τῷ ἔαρι, τῶν 48
ἄλλων καταλελυμένων στρατηγῶν ἐκ βασιλέος, Μαρ-
δόνιος ὁ Γοβρύεω κατέβαινε ἐπὶ θάλασσαν, στρατὸν
πολλὸν μὲν κάρτα πεζὸν ἅμα ἀγόμενος πολλὸν δὲ
Ο
ναυτικόν, ἡλικίην τε νέος ἐὼν καὶ νεωστὶ γεγαμηκὼς 5
20
HERODOTUS.
βασιλέος Δαρείου θυγατέρα Αρτοζώστρην· ἄγων δὲ τὸν
στρατὸν τοῦτον ὁ Μαρδόνιος ἐπείτε ἐγένετο ἐν τῇ Κι-
λικίῃ, αὐτὸς μὲν ἐπιβὰς ἐπὶ νεὸς ἐκομίζετο ἅμα τῇσι
ἄλλῃσι νηυσί, στρατιὴν δὲ τὴν πεζὴν ἄλλοι ἡγεμόνες
10 ἦγον ἐπὶ τὸν Ἑλλήσποντον. ὡς δὲ παραπλέων τὴν
Ασίην ἀπίκετο ὁ Μαρδόνιος ἐς τὴν Ἰωνίην, ἐνθαῦτα
μέγιστον θῶυμα ἐρέω τοῖσι μὴ ἀποδεκομένοισι Ελλή-
νων Περσέων τοῖσι ἑπτὰ Ὀτάνεα γνώμην ἀποδέξασθαι
ὡς χρεὸν εἴη δημοκρατέεσθαι Πέρσας· τοὺς γὰρ τυ
15 ράννους τῶν Ἰώνων καταπαύσας πάντας ὁ Μαρδόνιος
δημοκρατίας κατίστα ἐς τὰς πόλιας. ταῦτα δὲ ποιήσας
ἠπείγετο ἐς τὸν Ἑλλήσποντον. ὡς δὲ συνελέχθη μὲν
χρῆμα πολλὸν νεῶν συνελέχθη δὲ καὶ πεζὸς στρατὸς
πολλός, διαβάντες τῇσι νηυσὶ τὸν Ἑλλήσποντον ἐπο-
20 ρεύοντο διὰ τῆς Εὐρώπης, ἐπορεύοντο δὲ ἐπί τε Ἐρέ-
44 τριαν καὶ ᾿Αθήνας. αὗται μὲν ὧν σφι πρόσχημα ἦσαν
τοῦ στόλου· ἀτὰρ ἐν νόῳ ἔχοντες ὅσας ἂν πλείστας
δύνωνται καταστρέφεσθαι τῶν Ἑλληνίδων πολίων, τοῦ
το μὲν δὴ τῇσι νηυσὶ Θασίους οὐδὲ χεῖρας ἀνταειραμέ
5 νους κατεστρέψαντο, τοῦτο δὲ τῷ πεζῷ Μακεδόνας πρὸς
τοῖσι ὑπάρχουσι δούλους προσεκτήσαντο· τὰ γὰρ ἐντὸς
Μακεδόνων ἔθνεα πάντα σφι ἣν ἤδη ὑποχείρια γεγο-
νότα. ἐκ μὲν δὴ Θάσου διαβαλόντες πέρην ὑπὸ τὴν
ἤπειρον ἐκομίζοντο μέχρι ᾿Ακάνθου, ἐκ δὲ ᾿Ακάνθου ὁρ-
10 μεόμενοι τον Αθων περιέβαλλον. ἐπιπεσὼν δέ σφι
περιπλέουσι βορέης ἄνεμος μέγας τε καὶ ἄπορος κάρτα
τρηχέως περιέσπε, πλήθεῖ πολλὰς τῶν νεῶν ἐκβάλλων
πρὸς τὸν Αθων. λέγεται γὰρ κατὰ τριηκοσίας μὲν τῶν
νεῶν τὰς διαφθαρείσας εἶναι, ὑπὲρ δὲ δύο μυριάδας
15 ἀνθρώπων. ὥστε γὰρ θηριωδεστάτης ἐούσης τῆς θα
λάσσης ταύτης τῆς περὶ τὸν "Αθων, οἱ μὲν ὑπὸ τῶν
BOOK VI.
21
θηρίων διεφθείροντο ἁρπαζόμενοι, οἱ δὲ πρὸς τὰς πέτρας
ἀρασσόμενοι· οἳ δὲ αὐτῶν νέειν οὐκ ἐπιστέατο καὶ
κατὰ τοῦτο διεφθείροντο, οἱ δὲ ῥίγεϊ. ὁ μὲν δὴ ναυ- 45
τικὸς στρατὸς οὕτω ἔπρησσε, Μαρδονίῳ δὲ καὶ τῷ
πεζῷ στρατοπεδευομένῳ ἐν Μακεδονίῃ νυκτὸς Βρύγοι
Θρήικες ἐπεχείρησαν· καί σφεων πολλοὺς φονεύουσι οἱ
Βρύγοι, Μαρδόνιον δὲ αὐτὸν τρωματίζουσι. οὐ μέντοι 5
οὐδὲ αὐτοὶ δουλοσύνην διέφυγον πρὸς Περσέων· οὐ γὰρ
δὴ πρότερον ἀπανέστη ἐκ τῶν χωρέων τουτέων Μαρδό
νιος πρὶν ἢ σφεας ὑποχειρίους ἐποιήσατο. τούτους
μέντοι καταστρεψάμενος ἀπῆγε τὴν στρατιὴν ὀπίσω,
ἅτε τῷ πεζῷ τε προσπταίσας πρὸς τοὺς Βρύγους καὶ 10
τῷ ναυτικῷ μεγάλως περὶ ῎Αθων. οὗτος μέν νυν ὁ στό-
λος αἰσχρῶς ἀγωνισάμενος ἀπαλλάχθη ἐς τὴν Ασίην.
The Thasians Reduced; their Mines.
0
Δευτέρῳ δὲ ἔτεϊ τούτων ὁ Δαρεῖος πρῶτα μὲν Θασί- 46
ους, διαβληθέντας ὑπὸ τῶν ἀστυγειτόνων ὡς ἀπόστασιν
μηχανῴατο, πέμψας ἄγγελον ἐκέλευέ σφεας τὸ τεῖχος
περιαιρέειν καὶ τὰς νέας ἐς Αβδηρα κομίζειν. οἱ γὰρ
δὴ Θάσιοι, οἷα ὑπὸ Ἱστιαίου τε τοῦ Μιλησίου πολι- 5
ορκηθέντες καὶ προσόδων ἐουσέων μεγαλέων, ἐχρέον
το τοῖσι χρήμασι νέας τε ναυπηγεύμενοι μακρὰς καὶ
τεῖχος ἰσχυρότερον περιβαλλόμενοι. ἡ δὲ πρόσοδός σφι
ἐγίνετο ἔκ τε τῆς ἠπείρου καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν μετάλλων. ἐκ
μέν γε τῶν ἐκ Σκαπτησύλης τῶν χρυσέων μετάλλων 10
τὸ ἐπίπαν ὀγδώκοντα τάλαντα προσήιε, ἐκ δὲ τῶν ἐν
αὐτῇ Θάσῳ ἐλάσσω μὲν τούτων, συχνὰ δὲ οὕτω ὥστε
τὸ ἐπίπαν Θασίοισι ἐοῦσι καρπῶν ἀτελέσι προσήιε ἀπό
τε τῆς ἠπείρου καὶ τῶν μετάλλων ἔτεος ἑκάστου διηκό-
σια τάλαντα, ὅτε δὲ τὸ πλεῖστον προσῆλθε, τριηκόσια. 15
T
22
HERODOTUS.
47 εἶδον δὲ καὶ αὐτὸς τὰ μέταλλα ταῦτα, καὶ μακρῳ ἦν
αὐτῶν θωυμασιώτατα τὰ οἱ Φοίνικες ἀνεῦρον οἱ μετὰ
Θάσου κτίσαντες τὴν νῆσον ταύτην, ἥτις νῦν ἀπὸ τοῦ
Θάσου τούτου τοῦ Φοίνικος τὸ οὔνομα ἔσχε. τὰ δὲ
5 μέταλλα τὰ Φοινικικὰ ταῦτα ἐστὶ τῆς Θάσου μεταξὺ
Αἰνύρων τε χώρου καλεομένου καὶ Κοινύρων, ἀντίον
δὲ Σαμοθρηίκης, ὄρος μέγα ἀνεστραμμένον ἐν τῇ ζη-
τήσι. τοῦτο μέν νυν ἐστὶ τοιοῦτον. οἱ δὲ Θάσιοι τῷ
βασιλέι κελεύσαντι καὶ τὸ τεῖχος τὸ σφέτερον κατεῖλον
10 καὶ τὰς νέας τὰς πάσας ἐκόμισαν ἐς "Αβδηρα.
48
Heralds Demand Submission from Hellas; Action of Aegina.
Μετὰ δὲ τοῦτο ἀπεπειρᾶτο ὁ Δαρεῖος τῶν Ἑλλήνων
ὅ τι ἐν νόῳ ἔχοιεν, κότερα πολεμέειν ἑωυτῷ ἢ παραδι-
δόναι σφέας αὐτούς. διέπεμπε ὢν κήρυκας ἄλλους ἄλλῃ
τάξας ἀνὰ τὴν Ἑλλάδα, κελεύων αἰτέειν βασιλέι γῆν
ὅτε καὶ ὕδωρ, τούτους μὲν δὴ ἐς τὴν Ἑλλάδα ἔπεμπε,
ἄλλους δὲ κήρυκας διέπεμπε ἐς τὰς ἑωυτοῦ δασμοφό
ρους πόλιας τὰς παραθαλασσίους, κελεύων νέας τε μα
49 κρὰς καὶ ἱππαγωγὰ πλοῖα ποιέεσθαι. οὗτοί τε δὴ παρ-
εσκευάζοντο ταῦτα, καὶ τοῖσι ἥκουσι ἐς τὴν Ἑλλάδα
κήρυξι πολλοὶ μὲν ἠπειρωτέων ἔδοσαν τὰ προΐσχετο αὐ-
τέων ὁ Πέρσης, πάντες δὲ νησιῶται ἐς τοὺς ἀπικοίατο
5 αἰτήσοντες. οἵ τε δὴ ἄλλοι νησιῶται διδοῦσι γῆν τε καὶ
ὕδωρ Δαρείῳ καὶ δὴ καὶ Αἰγινῆται. ποιήσασι δέ σφι
ταῦτα ιθέως 'Αθηναῖοι ἐπεκέατο, δοκέοντές τε ἐπὶ σφί
σι ἔχοντας τοὺς Αἰγινήτας δεδωκέναι ὡς ἅμα τῷ Πέρ-
ἐπὶ σφέας στρατεύωνται, καὶ ἄσμενοι προφάσιος ἐπε-
10 λάβοντο, φοιτέοντές τε ἐς τὴν Σπάρτην κατηγόρεον τῶν
Αἰγινητέων τὰ πεποιήκοιεν προδόντες τὴν Ἑλλάδα.
50 πρὸς ταύτην δὲ τὴν κατηγορίην Κλεομένης ὁ ᾿Αναξαν
ση
0
BOOK VI.
23
δρίδεω βασιλεὺς ἐὼν Σπαρτιητέων διέβη ἐς Αἴγιναν,
βουλόμενος συλλαβεῖν Αἰγινητέων τοὺς αἰτιωτάτους.
ὡς δὲ ἐπειρᾶτο συλλαμβάνων, ἄλλοι τε δὴ ἐγίνοντο
αὐτῷ ἀντίξοοι τῶν Αἰγινητέων, ἐν δὲ δὴ καὶ Κριὸς ὁ 5
Πολυκρίτου μάλιστα, ὃς οὐκ ἔφη αὐτὸν οὐδένα ἄξειν
χαίροντα Αἰγινητέων· ἄνευ γάρ μιν Σπαρτιητέων τοῦ
κοινοῦ ποιέειν ταῦτα, ὑπ᾽ Αθηναίων ἀναγνωσθέντα χρή
μασι· ἅμα γὰρ ἄν μιν τῷ ἑτέρῳ βασιλέι ἐλθόντα συλ-
λαμβάνειν. ἔλεγε δὲ ταῦτα ἐξ ἐπιστολῆς τῆς Δημαρή- 10
του. Κλεομένης δὲ ἀπελαυνόμενος ἐκ τῆς Αἰγίνης εἴρετο
τὸν Κριὸν ὅ τι οἱ εἴη τὸ οὔνομα· ὁ δέ οἱ τὸ ἐὸν ἔφρασε.
C
0
ΤΟ
ὁ δὲ Κλεομένης πρὸς αὐτὸν ἔφη· “ ἡ δὴ νῦν καταχαλκοῦ,
ὦ κριέ, τὰ κέρεα, ὡς συνοισόμενος μεγάλῳ κακῷ.”
Origin of the Spartan Kings, and the Double Royalty.
Ἐν δὲ τῇ Σπάρτῃ τοῦτον τὸν χρόνον ὑπομένων Δη- 51
μάρητος ὁ ᾿Αρίστωνος διέβαλλε τὸν Κλεομένεα, ἐὼν
βασιλεὺς καὶ οὗτος Σπαρτιητέων, οἰκίης δὲ τῆς ὑπο-
δεεστέρης, κατ᾿ ἄλλο μὲν οὐδὲν ὑποδεεστέρης (ἀπὸ γὰρ
τοῦ αὐτοῦ γεγόνασι), κατὰ πρεσβυγενείην δέ κως τετί- 5
μηται μᾶλλον ἡ Εὐρυσθένεος. Λακεδαιμόνιοι γὰρ ὁμο- 52
λογέοντες οὐδενὶ ποιητῇ λέγουσι αὐτὸν ᾿Αριστόδημον τὸν
Αριστομάχου τοῦ Κλεοδαίου τοῦ Ὕλλου βασιλεύοντα
ἀγαγεῖν σφέας ἐς ταύτην τὴν χώρην τὴν νῦν ἐκτέαται,
ἀλλ᾽ οὐ τοὺς ᾿Αριστοδήμου παῖδας. μετὰ δὲ χρόνον οὐ 5
πολλὸν ᾿Αριστοδήμῳ τεκεῖν τὴν γυναῖκα, τῇ οὔνομα εἶ.
ναι 'Αργείην θυγατέρα δὲ αὐτὴν λέγουσι εἶναι Αὐτε.
σίωνος τοῦ Τισαμενοῦ τοῦ Θερσάνδρου τοῦ Πολυνεί
κεος· ταύτην δὴ τεκεῖν δίδυμα, ἐπιδόντα δὲ τὸν ᾿Αρι-
στόδημον τὰ τέκνα νούσῳ τελευτᾶν. Λακεδαιμονίους 10
δὲ τοὺς τότε ἐόντας βουλεῦσαι κατὰ νόμον βασιλέα τῶν
του
24
HERODOTUS.
παίδων τὸν πρεσβύτερον ποιήσασθαι. οὔκων δή σφεας
ἔχειν ὁκότερον ἕλωνται ὥστε καὶ ὁμοίων καὶ ἴσων ἐόν-
των· οὐ δυναμένους δὲ γνῶναι, ἢ καὶ πρὸ τούτου, ἐπει-
15 ρωτἂν τὴν τεκοῦσαν, τὴν δὲ οὐδὲ αὐτὴν φάναι δια
γινώσκειν. εἰδυῖαν μὲν καὶ τὸ κάρτα λέγειν ταῦτα,
βουλομένην δὲ εἴ κως ἀμφότεροι γενοίατο βασιλέες.
τοὺς ὧν δὴ Λακεδαιμονίους ἀπορέειν, ἀπορέοντας δὲ
πέμπειν ἐς Δελφοὺς ἐπειρησομένους ὅ τι χρήσωνται τῷ
20 πρήγματι. τὴν δὲ Πυθίην κελεύειν σφέας ἀμφότερα τὰ
παιδία ἡγήσασθαι βασιλέας, τιμᾶν δὲ μᾶλλον τὸν γε-
ραίτερον. τὴν μὲν δὴ Πυθίην ταῦτά σφι ἀνελεῖν, τοῖσι
δὲ Λακεδαιμονίοισι ἀπορέουσι οὐδὲν ἧσσον ὅκως ἐξεύ
ρωσι αὐτῶν τὸν πρεσβύτερον, ὑποθέσθαι ἄνδρα Μεσο
25 σήνιον τῷ οὔνομα εἶναι Πανίτην· ὑποθέσθαι δὲ τοῦτον
τὸν Πανίτην τάδε τοῖσι Λακεδαιμονίοισι, φυλάξαι τὴν
γειναμένην ὁκότερον τῶν παιδίων πρότερον λούει καὶ
σιτίζει· καὶ ἢν μὲν κατὰ ταὐτὰ φαίνηται αἰεὶ ποιεῦσα,
τοὺς δὲ πᾶν ἕξειν ὅσον τι καὶ δίζηνται καὶ θέλουσι
30 ἐξευρεῖν, ἢν δὲ πλανᾶται καὶ ἐκείνη, ἐναλλάξ ποιεῦσα,
δῆλά σφι ἔσεσθαι ὡς οὐδὲ ἐκείνη πλέον οὐδὲν οἶδε,
ἐπ' ἄλλην τε τραπέσθαι σφέας ὁδόν. ἐνθαῦτα δὴ τοὺς
Σπαρτιήτας κατὰ τὰς τοῦ Μεσσηνίου ὑποθήκας φυλά
ξαντας τὴν μητέρα τῶν ᾿Αριστοδήμου παίδων λαβεῖν
35 κατὰ ταὐτὰ τιμῶσαν τὸν πρότερον καὶ σίτοισι καὶ λου-
τροῖσι, οὐκ εἰδυῖαν τῶν εἵνεκεν ἐφυλάσσετο. λαβόντας
δὲ τὸ παιδίον τὸ τιμώμενον πρὸς τῆς γειναμένης ὡς
ἐὸν πρότερον τρέφειν ἐν τῷ δημοσίῳ· καί οἱ οὔνομα
τεθῆναι Εὐρυσθένεα, τῷ δὲ Προκλέα. τούτους ἀνδρω-
40 θέντας αὐτούς τε ἀδελφεοὺς ἐόντας λέγουσι διαφόρους
εἶναι τὸν πάντα χρόνον τῆς ζόης ἀλλήλοισι, καὶ τοὺς
ἀπὸ τούτων γενομένους ὡσαύτως διατελέειν.
απ
BOOK VI.
25
Ταῦτα μὲν Λακεδαιμόνιοι λέγουσι μοῦνοι Ελλήνων· 53
τάδε δὲ κατὰ τὰ λεγόμενα ὑπ᾽ Ἑλλήνων ἐγὼ γράφω,
τούτους τοὺς Δωριέων βασιλέας μέχρι μὲν δὴ Περσέας
τοῦ Δανάης, τοῦ θεοῦ ἀπεόντος, καταλεγομένους ὀρθῶς
ὑπ᾽ Ἑλλήνων καὶ ἀποδεικνυμένους ὡς εἰσὶ Ἕλληνες· 5
ἤδη γὰρ τηνικαῦτα ἐς Ἕλληνας οὗτοι ἐτέλεον. ἔλεξα
δὲ μέχρι Περσέος τοῦδε εἵνεκα, ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἀνέκαθεν ἔτι
ἔλαβον, ὅτι οὐκ ἔπεστι ἐπωνυμίη Περσέι οὐδεμία πατρὸς
θνητοῦ, ὥσπερ Ηρακλέι Αμφιτρύων. ἤδη ὢν ὀρθῷ
λόγῳ χρεομένῳ μέχρι Περσέος ὀρθῶς εἴρηταί μοι· ἀπὸ 10
δὲ Δανάης τῆς ᾿Ακρισίου καταλέγοντι τοὺς ἄνω αἰεὶ
πατέρας αὐτῶν φαινοίατο ἂν ἐόντες οἱ τῶν Δωριέων
ἡγεμόνες Αἰγύπτιοι ιθαγενέες. ταῦτα μέν νυν κατὰ τὰ 54
Έλληνες λέγουσι γεγενεηλόγηται· ὡς δὲ ὁ παρὰ Περσέ-
ων λόγος λέγεται, αὐτὸς ὁ Περσεὺς ἐὼν Ασσύριος ἐγένετο
Ελλην, ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ οἱ Περσέος πρόγονοι· τοὺς δὲ ᾿Ακρι-
σίου γε πατέρας ὁμολογέοντας κατ' οἰκηιότητα Περσέι 5
οὐδέν, τούτους δὲ εἶναι, κατά περ Ἕλληνες λέγουσι,
Αἰγυπτίους. καὶ ταῦτα μέν νυν περὶ τούτων εἰρήσθω. 55
ὅ τι δὲ ἐόντες Αἰγύπτιοι καὶ ὅ τι ἀποδεξάμενοι ἔλαβον
τὰς Δωριέων βασιληίας, ἄλλοισι γὰρ περὶ αὐτῶν εἴρη-
ται, ἐάσομεν αὐτά· τὰ δὲ ἄλλοι οὐ κατελάβοντο, τούτων
μνήμην ποιήσομαι.
ő
Prerogatives of the Spartan Kings.
5
Γέρεά τε δὴ τάδε τοῖσι βασιλεῦσι Σπαρτιῆται δεδώ- 56
κασι, ἱρωσύνας δύο, Διός τε Λακεδαίμονος καὶ Διὸς
οὐρανίου, καὶ πόλεμον ἐκφέρειν ἐπ᾽ ἣν ἂν βούλωνται
χώρην, τούτου δὲ μηδένα εἶναι Σπαρτιητέων διακωλυ-
τήν, εἰ δὲ μή, αὐτὸν ἐν τῷ ἄγεϊ ἐνέχεσθαι. στρατευο-
μένων δὲ πρώτους ἰέναι τοὺς βασιλέας, υστάτους δὲ
5
2
26
HERODOTUS.
ἀπιέναι. ἑκατὸν δὲ ἄνδρας λογάδας ἐπὶ στρατιής
φυλάσσειν αὐτούς· προβάτοισι δὲ χρᾶσθαι ἐν τῇσι
ἐξοδίῃσι οκόσοισι ἂν ὧν ἐθέλωσι, τῶν δὲ θυομένων
10 πάντων τὰ δέρματά τε καὶ τὰ νῶτα λαμβάνειν σφέας.
5% ταῦτα μὲν τὰ ἐμπολέμια, τὰ δὲ ἄλλα τὰ εἰρηναῖα κατὰ
τάδε σφι δέδοται. ἢν θυσίη τις δημοτελὴς ποιέηται,
πρώτους ἐπὶ τὸ δεῖπνον ἵζειν τοὺς βασιλέας, καὶ ἀπὸ
τούτων πρῶτον ἄρχεσθαι διπλήσια νέμοντας ἑκατέρῳ
στὰ πάντα ἢ τοῖσι ἄλλοισι δαιτυμόνεσι· καὶ σπονδαρ-
χίας εἶναι τούτων καὶ τῶν τυθέντων τὰ δέρματα.
νεομηνίας δὲ ἀνὰ πάσας καὶ ἑβδόμας ἱσταμένου τοῦ
μηνὸς δίδοσθαι ἐκ τοῦ δημοσίου ἱρήιον τέλεον ἑκατέρῳ
ἐς Απόλλωνος καὶ μέδιμνον ἀλφίτων καὶ οἴνου τετάρ-
10 την Λακωνικήν, καὶ ἐν τοῖσι ἀγῶσι πᾶσι προεδρίας
ἐξαιρέτους. καὶ προξείνους ἀποδεικνύναι τούτοισι προσ-
κεῖσθαι τοὺς ἂν ἐθέλωσι τῶν ἀστῶν, καὶ Πυθίους αἱρέ-
εσθαι δύο ἑκάτερον. οἱ δὲ Πύθιοι εἰσὶ θεοπρόποι ἐς
Δελφούς, σιτεόμενοι μετὰ τῶν βασιλέων τὰ δημόσια.
15 μὴ ἐλθοῦσι δὲ τοῖσι βασιλεῦσι ἐπὶ τὸ δεῖπνον ἀποπέμ
πεσθαί σφι ἐς τὰ οἰκία ἀλφίτων τε δύο χοίνικας ἑκα-
τέρῳ καὶ οἴνου κοτύλην, παρεοῦσι δὲ διπλήσια πάντα
δίδοσθαι· τὠυτὸ δὲ τοῦτο καὶ πρὸς ἰδιωτέων κληθέν-
τας ἐπὶ δεῖπνον τιμᾶσθαι. τὰς δὲ μαντηίας τὰς γινο-
20 μένας τούτους φυλάσσειν, συνειδέναι δὲ καὶ τοὺς Πυ
θίους. δικάζειν δὲ μούνους τοὺς βασιλέας τοσάδε μοῦ
να, πατρούχου τε παρθένου πέρι, ἐς τὸν ἱκνέεται ἔχειν,
ἢν μή περ ὁ πατὴρ αὐτὴν ἐγγυήσῃ, καὶ ὁδῶν δημοσιέων
πέρι. καὶ ἤν τις θετὸν παῖδα ποιέεσθαι ἐθέλῃ, βασι-
25 λέων εναντίον ποιέεσθαι. καὶ παίζειν βουλεύουσι
τοῖσι γέρουσι, ἐοῦσι δυῶν δέουσι τριήκοντα· ἦν δὲ μὴ
ἔλθωσι, τοὺς μάλιστά σφι τῶν γερόντων προσήκοντας
BOOK VI.
27
ἔχειν τὰ τῶν βασιλέων γέρεα, δύο ψήφους τιθεμένους,
τρίτην δὲ τὴν ἑωυτῶν.
Honors after Death; Customs Similar to Persian and
Egyptian.
ἱππέες
Ταῦτα μὲν ζῶσι τοῖσι βασιλεῦσι δέδοται ἐκ τοῦ 58
κοινοῦ τῶν Σπαρτιητέων, ἀποθανοῦσι δὲ τάδε.
περιαγγέλλουσι τὸ γεγονὸς κατὰ πᾶσαν τὴν Λακωνικήν,
κατὰ δὲ τὴν πόλιν γυναῖκες περιιοῦσαι λέβητα κροτέ-
ουσι. ἐπεὰν ὧν τοῦτο γίνηται τοιοῦτο, ἀνάγκη ἐξ οἰκίης 5
ἑκάστης ἐλευθέρους δύο καταμιαίνεσθαι, ἄνδρα τε καὶ
γυναῖκα· μὴ ποιήσασι δὲ τοῦτο ζημίαι μεγάλαι ἐπικέαται.
νόμος δὲ τοῖσι Λακεδαιμονίοισι κατὰ τῶν βασιλέων τοὺς
θανάτους ἐστὶ ὡυτὸς καὶ τοῖσι βαρβάροισι τοῖσι ἐν τῇ
Ασίῃ· τῶν γὰρ ἂν βαρβάρων οἱ πλεῦνες τῷ αὐτῷ νόμῳ 10
χρέονται κατὰ τοὺς θανάτους τῶν βασιλέων. ἐπεὼν
γὰρ ἀποθάνῃ βασιλεὺς Λακεδαιμονίων, ἐκ πάσης δεῖ
Λακεδαίμονος, χωρὶς Σπαρτιητέων, ἀριθμῷ τῶν περιοί-
κων ἀναγκαστοὺς ἐς τὸ κῆδος ἰέναι. τούτων ὧν καὶ
τῶν εἱλωτέων καὶ αὐτῶν Σπαρτιητέων ἐπεὰν συλ-15
λεχθέωσι ἐς τὠυτὸ πολλαὶ χιλιάδες σύμμιγα τῇσι γυ-
ναιξί, κόπτονταί τε τὰ μέτωπα προθύμως καὶ οἰμωγῇ
διαχρέονται ἀπλέτῳ, φάμενοι τὸν ὕστατον αἰεὶ ἀπογενό-
μενον τῶν βασιλέων, τοῦτον δὴ γενέσθαι ἄριστον. ὃς
δ᾽ ἂν ἐν πολέμῳ τῶν βασιλέων ἀποθάνῃ, τούτῳ δὲ 20
εἴδωλον σκευάσαντες ἐν κλίνῃ εὖ ἐστρωμένῃ ἐκφέρουσι.
ἐπεὰν δὲ θάψωσι, ἀγορὴ δέκα ἡμερέων οὐκ ἵσταταί
σφι οὐδ᾽ ἀρχαιρεσίη συνίζει, ἀλλὰ πενθέουσι ταύτας
τὰς ἡμέρας.
Συμφέρονται δὲ ἄλλο οὗτοι τόδε τοῖσι Πέρσησι. 59
ἐπεὰν ἀποθανόντος τοῦ βασιλέος ἄλλος ἐνίστηται βα-
28
HERODOTUS.
σιλεύς, οὗτος ὁ ἐσιὼν ἐλευθεροῖ ὅστις τι Σπαρτιητέων τῷ
βασιλέι ἢ τῷ δημοσίῳ ὤφειλε· ἐν δ᾽ αὖ Πέρσῃσι ὁ κατ-
5 ιστάμενος βασιλεὺς τὸν προοφειλόμενον φόρον μετίει
60 τῇσι πόλισι πάσῃσι. συμφέρονται δὲ καὶ τάδε Αίγυ
πτίοισι Λακεδαιμόνιοι. οἱ κήρυκες αὐτῶν καὶ αὐληταὶ
καὶ μάγειροι ἐκδέκονται τὰς πατρωίας τέχνας, καὶ αὐλη-
τής τε αὐλητέω γίνεται καὶ μάγειρος μαγείρου καὶ κῆρυξ
5 κήρυκος· οὐ κατὰ λαμπροφωνίην ἐπιτιθέμενοι ἄλλοι
σφέας παρακληίουσι, ἀλλὰ κατὰ τὰ πάτρια ἐπιτελέουσι.
61
Story of Ariston and the Birth of Demaratus.
0
Ταῦτα μὲν δὴ οὕτω γίνεται. τότε δὲ τὸν Κλεομέ-
νεα ἐόντα ἐν τῇ Αἰγίνῃ καὶ κοινὰ τῇ Ἑλλάδι ἀγαθὰ
προεργαζόμενον ὁ Δημάρητος διέβαλε, οὐκ Αἰγινητέων
οὕτω κηδόμενος ὡς φθόνῳ καὶ ἄγῃ χρεόμενος. Κλεο-
5 μένης δὲ νοστήσας ἀπ᾿ Αἰγίνης ἐβούλευε τον Δημάρη-
τον παῦσαι τῆς βασιληίης, διὰ πρῆγμα τοιόνδε ἐπίβα-
σιν ἐς αὐτὸν ποιεύμενος. Αρίστωνι βασιλεύοντι ἐν
Σπάρτῃ καὶ γήμαντι γυναῖκας δύο παῖδες οὐκ ἐγίνοντο.
καὶ οὐ γὰρ συνεγινώσκετο αὐτὸς τούτων εἶναι αἴτιος,
10 γαμέει τρίτην γυναῖκα· ὧδε δὲ γαμέει. ἦν οἱ φίλος τῶν
Σπαρτιητέων ἀνήρ, τῷ προσεκέετο τῶν ἀστῶν μάλιστα
ὁ ᾿Αρίστων. τούτῳ τῷ ἀνδρὶ ἐτύγχανε ἐοῦσα γυνὴ καλ-
λίστη μακρῷ τῶν ἐν Σπάρτῃ γυναικῶν, καὶ ταῦτα μέν
τοι καλλίστη ἐξ αἰσχίστης γενομένη. ἐοῦσαν γάρ μιν
15 τὸ εἶδος φλαύρην ἡ τροφὸς αὐτῆς, οἱα ἀνθρώπων τε ὀλ-
βίων θυγατέρα καὶ δυσειδέα ἐοῦσαν, πρὸς δὲ καὶ ὁρέου-
σα τοὺς γονέας συμφορὴν τὸ εἶδος αὐτῆς ποιευμένους,
ταῦτα ἕκαστα μαθοῦσα ἐπιφράζεται τοιάδε. ἐφόρε
αὐτὴν ἀνὰ πᾶσαν ἡμέρην ἐς τὸ τῆς Ἑλένης ἱρόν. τὸ δ'
20 ἐστὶ ἐν τῇ Θεράπνῃ καλεομένῃ ὕπερθε τοῦ Φοιβηίου
BOOK VI.
29
Ο
ἱροῦ. ὅκως δὲ ἐνείκειε ἡ τροφός, πρός τε τὤγαλμα
ἵστα καὶ ἐλίσσετο τὴν θεὸν ἀπαλλάξαι τῆς δυσμορφίες
τὸ παιδίον. καὶ δή κοτε ἀπιούσῃ ἐκ τοῦ ἱροῦ τῇ τρο-
φῷ γυναῖκα λέγεται ἐπιφανῆναι, ἐπιφανεῖσαν δὲ ἐπεί-
ρεσθαί μιν ὅ τι φέρει ἐν τῇ ἀγκάλῃ, καὶ τὴν φράσαι 25
ὡς παιδίον φορέει, τὴν δὲ κελεῦσαί οἱ δέξαι, τὴν δὲ οὐ
φάναι· ἀπειρῆσθαι γάρ οἱ ἐκ τῶν γειναμένων μηδενὶ
ἐπιδεικνύναι· τὴν δὲ πάντως ἑωυτῇ κελεύειν ἐπιδέξαι.
ὁρέουσαν δὲ τὴν γυναῖκα περὶ πολλοῦ ποιευμένην ἰδέσ
θαι, οὕτω δὴ τὴν τροφὸν δέξαι τὸ παιδίον· τὴν δὲ κατα- 30
ψῶσαν τοῦ παιδίου τὴν κεφαλὴν εἶπαι ὡς καλλιστεύσει
πασέων τῶν ἐν Σπάρτῃ γυναικῶν. ἀπὸ μὲν δὴ ταύτης
τῆς ἡμέρης μεταπεσεῖν τὸ εἶδος. γαμέει δὲ δή μιν ἐς
γάμου ὥρην ἀπικομένην "Αγητος ὁ ᾿Αλκείδεω, οὗτος δὴ
ὁ τοῦ ᾿Αρίστωνος φίλος. τὸν δὲ 'Αρίστωνα ἔκνιζε ἄρα 62
τῆς γυναικὸς ταύτης ὁ ἔρως· μηχανᾶται δὴ τοιάδε.
αὐτός τε τῷ ἑταίρῳ, τοῦ ἦν ἡ γυνὴ αὕτη, ὑποδέκεται
δωτίνην δώσειν τῶν ἑωυτοῦ πάντων ἕν, τὸ ἂν αὐτὸς
ἐκεῖνος ἕληται, καὶ τὸν ἑταῖρον ἑωυτῷ ἐκέλευε ὡσαύτως 5
τὴν ὁμοίην διδόναι. ὁ δὲ οὐδὲν φοβηθεὶς ἀμφὶ τῇ γυ
ναικί, ὁρέων ἐοῦσαν καὶ ᾿Αρίστωνι γυναῖκα, καταινέει
ταῦτα· ἐπὶ τούτοισι δὲ ὅρκους ἐπήλασαν. μετὰ δὲ αὐ
τός τε ὁ ᾿Αρίστων ἔδωκε τοῦτο, ὅ τι δὴ ἦν, τὸ εἵλετο
τῶν κειμηλίων τῶν ᾿Αρίστωνος ὁ ῎Αγητος, καὶ αὐτὸς 10
τὴν ὁμοίην ζητέων φέρεσθαι παρ' ἐκείνου, ἐνθαῦτα δὴ
τοῦ ἑταίρου τὴν γυναῖκα ἐπειρᾶτο ἀπάγεσθαι. ὁ δὲ πλὴν
τούτου μούνου τὰ ἄλλα ἔφη καταινέσαι· ἀναγκαζόμενος
μέντοι τῷ τε ὅρκῳ καὶ τῆς ἀπάτης τῇ παραγωγῇ ἀπίει
ἀπάγεσθαι. οὕτω μὲν δὴ τὴν τρίτην ἐσηγάγετο γυναῖκα 63
ὁ ᾿Αρίστων, τὴν δευτέρην ἀποπεμψάμενος. ἐν δέ οἱ
χρόνῳ ἐλάσσονι καὶ οὐ πληρώσασα τοὺς δέκα μῆνας ἡ
T
Ο
30
HERODOTUS.
γυνὴ αὕτη τίκτει τοῦτον δὴ τὸν Δημάρητον. καί τίς
5 οἱ τῶν οἰκετέων ἐν θώκῳ κατημένῳ μετὰ τῶν ἐφόρων
ἐξαγγέλλει ὡς οἱ παῖς γέγονε. ὁ δὲ ἐπιστάμενός τε τὸν
χρόνον τῷ ἠγάγετο τὴν γυναῖκα καὶ ἐπὶ δακτύλων
συμβαλλόμενος τοὺς μῆνας, εἶπε ἀπομόσας, “ οὐκ ἂν
ἐμὸς εἴη.” τοῦτο ἤκουσαν μὲν οἱ ἔφοροι, πρῆγμα μέν
10 τοι οὐδὲν ἐποιήσαντο τὸ παραυτίκα. ὁ δὲ παῖς ηὔξετο,
τό
καὶ τῷ ᾿Αρίστωνι τὸ εἰρημένον μετέμελε· παῖδα γὰρ τὸν
Δημάρητον ἐς τὰ μάλιστά οἱ ἐνόμισε εἶναι. Δημάρητον
δὲ αὐτῷ οὔνομα ἔθετο διὰ τόδε. πρότερον τούτων
πανδημεί Σπαρτιῆται ᾿Αρίστωνι, ὡς ἀνδρὶ εὐδοκιμέοντι
15 διὰ πάντων δὴ τῶν βασιλέων τῶν ἐν Σπάρτῃ γενο-
64 μένων, ἀρὴν ἐποιήσαντο παῖδα γενέσθαι. διὰ τοῦτο μέν
οἱ τὸ οὔνομα Δημάρητος ἐτέθη· χρόνου δὲ προϊόντος
Αρίστων μὲν ἀπέθανε, Δημάρητος δὲ ἔσχε τὴν βασι-
ληίην. ἔδει δέ, ὡς οἶκε, ἀνάπυστα γενόμενα ταῦτα
5 καταπαῦσαι Δημάρητον τῆς βασιληίης· δι' ἃ Κλεομέ
νεϊ διεβλήθη μεγάλως πρότερόν τε ὁ Δημάρητος ἀπα-
γαγὼν τὴν στρατιὴν ἐξ Ἐλευσῖνος, καὶ δὴ καὶ τότε ἐπ᾽
Αιγινητέων τοὺς μηδίσαντας διαβάντος Κλεομένεος.
Demaratus Accused of Illegitimacy and Deposed.
65 Ορμηθείς ὧν ἀποτίνυσθαι ὁ Κλεομένης συντίθεται
Λευτυχίδῃ τῷ Μενάρεος τοῦ "Αγιος, ἐόντι οἰκίης τῆς
αὐτῆς Δημαρήτῳ, ἐπ᾽ ᾧ τε, ἢν αὐτὸν καταστήσῃ βασι-
λέα ἀντὶ Δημαρήτου, ἕψεταί οἱ ἐπ᾽ Αἰγινήτας. ὁ δὲ
5 Λευτυχίδης ἦν ἐχθρὸς τῷ Δημαρήτῳ μάλιστα γεγονὼς
διὰ πρῆγμα τοιόνδε. ἁρμοσαμένου Λευτυχίδεω Πέρκα-
λον τὴν Χίλωνος τοῦ Δημαρμένου θυγατέρα, ὁ Δημάρη-
τος ἐπιβουλεύσας ἀποστερέει Λευτυχίδεα τοῦ γάμου,
φθάσας αὐτὸς τὴν Πέρκαλον ἁρπάσας καὶ σχὼν γυναῖκα.
BOOK VI.
31
ΤΟ
κατὰ τοῦτο μὲν τῷ Λευτυχίδῃ ἡ ἔχθρη ἡ ἐς τὸν Δημά- 10
ρητον ἐγεγόνεε, τότε δὲ ἐκ τῆς Κλεομένεος προθυμίης
ὁ Λευτυχίδης κατόμνυται Δημαρήτῳ, φὰς αὐτὸν οὐκ
ἱκνεομένως βασιλεύειν Σπαρτιητέων οὐκ ἐόντα παῖδα
Αρίστωνος. μετὰ δὲ τὴν κατωμοσίην ἐδίωκε ἀνασώζων
ἐκεῖνο τὸ ἔπος, τὸ εἶπε ᾿Αρίστων τότε ὅτε οἱ ἐξήγγειλε 15
ὁ οἰκέτης παῖδα γεγονέναι, ὁ δὲ συμβαλόμενος τοὺς
μῆνας ἀπώμοσε, φὰς οὐκ ἑωυτοῦ μιν εἶναι. τούτου δὴ
ἐπιβατεύων τοῦ ῥήματος ὁ Λευτυχίδης ἀπέφαινε τὸν
Δημάρητον οὔτε ἐξ ᾿Αρίστωνος γεγονότα οὔτε ἱκνευ
μένως βασιλεύοντα Σπάρτης, τοὺς ἐφόρους μάρτυρας 20
παρεχόμενος κείνους οἳ τότε ἐτύγχανον πάρεδροί τε
ἐόντες καὶ ἀκούσαντες ταῦτα Αρίστωνος. τέλος δὲ ἐόν- 66
των περὶ αὐτῶν νεικέων, ἔδοξε Σπαρτιήτῃσι ἐπείρεσθαι
τὸ χρηστήριον τὸ ἐν Δελφοῖσι εἰ Αρίστωνος εἴη παῖς ὁ
Δημάρητος. ἀνοίστου δὲ γενομένου ἐκ προνοίης τῆς
Κλεομένεος ἐς τὴν Πυθίην, ἐνθαῦτα προσποιέεται Κλεο- 5
μένης Κόβωνα τὸν ᾿Αριστοφάντου, ἄνδρα ἐν Δελφοῖσι
δυναστεύοντα μέγιστον, ὁ δὲ Κόβων Περίαλλαν τὴν
πρόμαντιν ἀναπείθει, τὰ Κλεομένης ἐβούλετο λέγεσθαι,
λέγειν. οὕτω δὴ ἡ Πυθίη ἐπειρωτεόντων τῶν θεοπρό
πων ἔκρινε μὴ ᾿Αρίστωνος εἶναι Δημάρητον παῖδα, 10
ὑστέρῳ μέντοι χρόνῳ ἀνάπυστα ἐγένετο ταῦτα, καὶ Κό
βων τε ἔφυγε ἐκ Δελφῶν καὶ Περίαλλα ἡ πρόμαντις
ἐπαύσθη τῆς τιμῆς.
Ο
Insult to Demaratus; he Questions his Mother.
Κατὰ μὲν δὴ Δημαρήτου τὴν κατάπαυσιν τῆς βα-6
σιληίης οὕτω ἐγένετο, ἔφευγε δὲ Δημάρητος ἐκ Σπάρ-
της ἐς Μήδους ἐκ τοιοῦδε ὀνείδεος. μετὰ τῆς βασιληίης
τὴν κατάπαυσιν ὁ Δημάρητος ἦρχε αἱρεθεὶς ἀρχήν.
32
HERODOTUS.
او
5 ἦσαν μὲν δὴ γυμνοπαιδίαι, θεωμένου δὲ τοῦ Δημαρ
του, ὁ Λευτυχίδης γεγονὼς ἤδη αὐτὸς βασιλεὺς ἀντ᾽
ἐκείνου, πέμψας τὸν θεράποντα ἐπὶ γέλωτί τε καὶ λάσθῃ
εἰρώτα τὸν Δημάρητον ὁκοῖόν τι εἴη τὸ ἄρχειν μετὰ τὸ
βασιλεύειν. ὁ δὲ ἀλγήσας τῷ ἐπειρωτήματι εἶπε φὰς
10 αὐτὸς μὲν ἀμφοτέρων ἤδη πεπειρῆσθαι, κεῖνον δὲ οὔ,
τὴν μέντοι ἐπειρώτησιν ταύτην ἄρξειν Λακεδαιμονίοισι
ἢ μυρίης κακότητος ἢ μυρίης εὐδαιμονίης. ταῦτα δὲ
εἴπας καὶ κατακαλυψάμενος ἤιε ἐκ τοῦ θεήτρου ἐς τὰ
ἑωυτοῦ οἰκία, αὐτίκα δὲ παρασκευασάμενος ἔθυε τῷ
68 Διὶ βοῦν, θύσας δὲ τὴν μητέρα ἐκάλεσε. ἀπικομένῃ
δὲ τῇ μητρὶ ἐσθεὶς ἐς τὰς χεῖράς οἱ τῶν σπλάγχνων
κατικέτευε, λέγων τοιάδε. “ ὦ μήτερ, θεῶν σε τῶν τε
ἄλλων καταπτόμενος ἱκετεύω καὶ τοῦ ἑρκείου Διὸς
5 τοῦδε, φράσαι μοι τὴν ἀληθείην, τίς μευ ἐστὶ πατὴρ
ὀρθῷ λόγῳ. Λευτυχίδης μὲν γὰρ ἔφη ἐν τοῖσι νείκεσι
λέγων κυέουσάν σε ἐκ τοῦ προτέρου ἀνδρὸς οὕτω ἐλθεῖν
παρὰ ᾿Αρίστωνα· οἱ δὲ καὶ τὸν ματαιότερον λόγον
λέγοντες φασί σε ἐλθεῖν παρὰ τῶν οἰκετέων τὸν ὀνοφορ
10 βόν, καὶ ἐμὲ ἐκείνου εἶναι παῖδα. ἐγώ σε ὢν μετέρχομαι
τῶν θεῶν εἰπεῖν τὠληθές· οὔτε γάρ, εἴ περ πεποίηκάς
τι τῶν λεγομένων, μούνη δὴ πεποίηκας, μετὰ πολλέων
δέ· ὅ τε λόγος πολλὸς ἐν Σπάρτῃ ὡς Αρίστωνι σπέρμα
παιδοποιὸν οὐκ ἐνῆν· τεκεῖν γὰρ ἄν οἱ καὶ τὰς προτέρας
15 γυναίκας.”
Story of Demaratus's Mother.
69 Ὁ μὲν δὴ τοιαῦτα ἔλεγε, ἡ δὲ ἀμείβετο τοισίδε.
σε
παῖ, ἐπείτε με λιτῇσι μετέρχεαι εἰπεῖν τὴν ἀληθείην,
πᾶν ἐς σὲ κατειρήσεται τὠληθές. ὥς με ἠγάγετο 'Αρί-
στων ἐς ἑωυτοῦ, νυκτὶ τρίτῃ ἀπὸ τῆς πρώτης ἦλθέ μοι
5 φάσμα εἰδόμενον Αρίστωνι, συνευνηθὲν δὲ τοὺς στεφά
BOOK VI.
33
0
νους τοὺς εἶχε ἐμοὶ περιετίθεε. καὶ τὸ μὲν οἰχώκεε, ἧκε
δὲ μετὰ ταῦτα ᾿Αρίστων. ὡς δέ με εἶδε ἔχουσαν στεφά
νους, εἰρώτα τίς εἴη μοι ὁ δούς· ἐγὼ δὲ ἐφάμην ἐκεῖνον,
ὁ δὲ οὐκ ὑπεδέκετο. ἐγὼ δὲ κατωμνύμην φαμένη αὐτὸν
οὐ καλῶς ποιέειν ἀπαρνεόμενον· ὀλίγῳ γάρ τι πρότερον 10
ἐλθόντα καὶ συνευνηθέντα δοῦναί μοι τοὺς στεφάνους,
ὁρέων δέ με κατομνυμένην ὁ ᾿Αρίστων ἔμαθε ὡς θεῖον
εἴη τὸ πρῆγμα. καὶ τοῦτο μὲν οἱ στέφανοι ἐφάνησαν
ἐόντες ἐκ τοῦ ἡρωίου τοῦ παρὰ τῇσι θύρῃσι τῇσι αὐ
λείῃσι ἱδρυμένου, τὸ καλέουσι Αστραβάκου· τοῦτο δὲ 15
οἱ μάντιες τὸν αὐτὸν τοῦτον ἥρωα ἀναίρεον εἶναι. οὕτω,
ὦ παῖ, ἔχεις πᾶν, ὅσον τι καὶ βούλεαι πυθέσθαι· ἢ
γὰρ ἐκ τοῦ ἥρωος τούτου γέγονας, καί τοι πατήρ ἐστι
Αστράβακος ὁ ἥρως, ἢ Αρίστων· ἐν γάρ σε τῇ νυκτὶ
ταύτῃ ἀναιρέομαι. τῇ δέ σου μάλιστα κατάπτονται οἱ 20
ἐχθροί, λέγοντες ὡς αὐτὸς ὁ ᾿Αρίστων, ὅτε αὐτῷ σὺ
ἠγγέλθης γεγενημένος, πολλῶν ἀκουόντων οὐ φήσειε σε
ἑωυτοῦ εἶναι τὸν χρόνον γάρ, τοὺς δέκα μῆνας, οὐδέκω
ἐξήκειν), ἀιδρείῃ τῶν τοιούτων κεῖνος τοῦτο ἀπέρριψε
τὸ ἔπος. τίκτουσι γὰρ γυναῖκες καὶ ἐννεάμηνα καὶ 25
ἑπτάμηνα, καὶ οὐ πᾶσαι δέκα μῆνας ἐκτελέσασαι· ἐγὼ
δὲ σέ, ὦ παῖ, ἑπτάμηνον ἔτεκον. ἔγνω δὲ καὶ αὐτὸς ὁ
Αρίστων οὐ μετὰ πολλὸν χρόνον ὡς ἀνοίῃ τὸ ἔπος
ἐκβάλοι τοῦτο. λόγους δὲ ἄλλους περὶ γενέσιος τῆς
σεωυτοῦ μὴ δέκεο· τὰ γὰρ ἀληθέστατα πάντα ἀκήκοας. 30
ἐκ δὲ ὀνοφορβῶν αὐτῷ τε Λευτυχίδῃ καὶ τοῖσι ταῦτα
λέγουσι τίκτοιεν αἱ γυναῖκες παῖδας.
""
Demaratus Escapes from Sparta and Retires into Asia.
Ἡ μὲν δὴ ταῦτα ἔλεγε, ὁ δὲ πυθόμενός τε τὰ ἐβούλετο 70
καὶ ἐπόδια λαβὼν ἐπορεύετο ἐς Ηλιν, τῷ λόγῳ φὰς ὡς
2*
34
HERODOTUS..
ἐς Δελφοὺς χρησόμενος τῷ χρηστηρίῳ πορεύεται. Λακε-
δαιμόνιοι δὲ ὑποτοπηθέντες Δημάρητον δρησμῷ ἐπιχει-
5 ρέειν ἐδίωκον. καί κως ἔφθη ἐς Ζάκυνθον διαβὰς ὁ
Δημάρητος ἐκ τῆς Ἤλιδος· ἐπιδιαβάντες δὲ οἱ Λακε-
δαιμόνιοι αὐτοῦ τε ἅπτοντο καὶ τοὺς θεράποντας αὐ
τοῦ ἀπαιρέονται. μετὰ δέ, οὐ γὰρ ἐξεδίδοσαν αὐτὸν οἱ
Ζακύνθιοι, ἐνθεῦτεν διαβαίνει ἐς τὴν ᾿Ασίην παρὰ βα-
10 σιλέα Δαρείον. ὁ δὲ ὑπεδέξατό τε αὐτὸν μεγαλωστὶ καὶ
γῆν τε καὶ πόλιας ἔδωκε. οὕτω ἀπίκετο ἐς τὴν ᾿Ασίην
Δημάρητος καὶ τοιαύτῃ χρησάμενος τύχῃ, ἄλλα τε Λα-
κεδαιμονίοισι συχνὰ ἔργοισί τε καὶ γνώμῃσι ἀπολαμ
πρυνθείς, ἐν δὲ δὴ καὶ Ὀλυμπιάδα σφι ἀνελόμενος τε-
15 θρίππῳ προσέβαλε, μοῦνος τοῦτο πάντων δὴ τῶν γενο-
μένων βασιλέων ἐν Σπάρτῃ ποιήσας.
71
Fate of Leotychides; Aeginetan Hostages.
Λευτυχίδης δὲ ὁ Μενάρεος Δημαρήτου καταπαυ-
σθέντος διεδέξατο τὴν βασιληίην, καί οἱ γίνεται παῖς
Ζευξίδημος, τὸν δὴ Κυνίσκον μετεξέτεροι Σπαρτιητέων
ἐκάλεον. οὗτος ὁ Ζευξίδημος οὐκ ἐβασίλευσε Σπάρτης·
5 πρὸ Λευτυχίδεω γὰρ τελευτᾷ, λιπὼν παῖδα ᾿Αρχίδημον.
Λευτυχίδης δὲ στερηθεὶς Ζευξιδήμου γαμέει δευτέρην
γυναῖκα Εὐρυάμην τὴν ἐοῦσαν Μενίου ἀδελφεὴν Διακτο-
ρίδεω δὲ θυγατέρα, ἐκ τῆς οἱ ἔρσεν μὲν γίνεται οὐδέν,
θυγάτηρ δὲ Λαμπιτώ, τὴν ᾿Αρχίδημος ὁ Ζευξιδήμου
2 γαμέει δόντος αὐτῷ Λευτυχίδεω. οὐ μὲν οὐδὲ Λευτυχίδης
κατεγήρα ἐν Σπάρτῃ, ἀλλὰ τίσιν τοιήνδε τινὰ Δημαρήτῳ
ἐξέτισε. ἐστρατήγησε Λακεδαιμονίοισι ἐς Θεσσαλίην,
παρεὸν δέ οἱ πάντα ὑποχείρια ποιήσασθαι ἐδωροδόκησε
5 ἀργύριον πολλόν. ἐπ' αὐτοφώρῳ δὲ ἁλοὺς αὐτοῦ ἐν τῷ
στρατοπέδῳ, ἐπικατήμενος χειρίδι πλέῃ ἀργυρίου, ἔφυγε
BOOK VI.
35
4.
ἐκ Σπάρτης ὑπὸ δικαστήριον ὑπαχθείς, καὶ τὰ οἰκία οἱ
κατεσκάφη· ἔφυγε δὲ ἐς Τεγέην καὶ ἐτελεύτησε ἐν ταύτῃ.
ταῦτα μὲν δὴ ἐγένετο χρόνῳ ὕστερον· τότε δὲ ὡς τῷ 73
Κλεομένει ὡδώθη τὸ ἐς τὸν Δημάρητον πρῆγμα, αὐτίκα
παραλαβὼν Λευτυχίδεα ἤιε ἐπὶ τοὺς Αἰγινήτας, δεινόν
τινά σφι ἔγκοτον διὰ τὸν προπηλακισμὸν ἔχων. οὕτω
δὴ οὔτε οἱ Αἰγινῆται, ἀμφοτέρων τῶν βασιλέων ἡκόντων 5
ἐπ' αὐτούς, εδικαίευν ἔτι ἀντιβαίνειν, ἐκεῖνοί τε ἐπιλεξά
μενοι ἄνδρας δέκα Αἰγινητέων τοὺς πλείστου ἀξίους καὶ
πλούτῳ καὶ γένεϊ ἦγον, καὶ ἄλλους καὶ δὴ καὶ Κριόν τε
τὸν Πολυκρίτου καὶ Κάσαμβον τὸν ᾿Αριστοκράτεος, οἵ
περ εἶχον μέγιστον κράτος· ἀγαγόντες δέ σφεας ἐς γῆν 10
τὴν ᾿Αττικὴν παραθήκην κατατίθενται ἐς τοὺς ἐχθίστους
Αἰγινήτῃσι Αθηναίους.
ΕΠ
Cleomenes in Exile; his Return and Suicide.
αν
Μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα Κλεομένεα ἐπάιστον γενόμενον κακο- "4
τεχνήσαντα ἐς Δημάρητον δεῖμα ἔλαβε Σπαρτιητέων,
καὶ ὑπεξέσχε ἐς Θεσσαλίην. ἐνθεῦτεν δὲ ἀπικόμενος ἐς
τὴν ᾿Αρκαδίην νεώτερα ἔπρησσε πρήγματα, συνιστὰς
τοὺς ᾿Αρκάδας ἐπὶ τῇ Σπάρτῃ, ἄλλους τε ὅρκους προσά- 5
γων σφι ἢ μὲν ἕψεσθαί σφεας αὐτῷ τῇ ἂν ἐξηγέηται, καὶ
δὴ καὶ ἐς Νώνακριν πόλιν πρόθυμος ἦν τῶν ᾿Αρκάδων
τοὺς προεστεῶτας ἀγινέων ἐξορκοῦν τὸ Στυγὸς ὕδωρ.
ἐν δὲ ταύτῃ τῇ πόλι λέγεται εἶναι ὑπ᾽ ᾿Αρκάδων τὸ
Στυγὸς ὕδωρ, καὶ δὴ καὶ ἔστι τοιόνδε τι· ὕδωρ ὀλίγον 10
φαινόμενον ἐκ πέτρης στάζει ἐς ἄγκος, τὸ δὲ ἄγκος αἱμα-
σιῆς τις περιθέει κύκλος. ἡ δὲ Νώνακρις, ἐν τῇ ἡ πηγὴ
αὕτη τυγχάνει ἐοῦσα, πόλις ἐστὶ τῆς ᾿Αρκαδίης πρὸς
Φενεῷ. μαθόντες δὲ Κλεομένεα Λακεδαιμόνιοι ταῦτα 5
πρήσσοντα, κατήγον αὐτὸν δείσαντες ἐπὶ τοῖσι αὐτοῖσι
T
36
HERODOTUS.
ἐς Σπάρτην τοῖσι καὶ πρότερον ἦρχε
κατελθόντα δὲ
αὐτὸν αὐτίκα ὑπέλαβε μανίη νοῦσος, ἐόντα καὶ πρότερον
5 ὑπομαργότερον· ὅκως γάρ τεῳ ἐντύχοι Σπαρτιητέων,
ἐνέχρανε ἐς τὸ πρόσωπον τὸ σκῆπτρον. ποιέοντα δὲ
αὐτὸν ταῦτα καὶ παραφρονήσαντα ἔδησαν οἱ προσή
κοντες ἐν ξύλῳ· ὁ δὲ δεθεὶς τὸν φύλακον μουνωθέντα
ἰδὼν τῶν ἄλλων αἰτέει μάχαιραν· οὐ βουλομένου δὲ τὰ
10 πρῶτα τοῦ φυλάκου διδόναι ἀπείλεε τά μιν αὐτις ποιή-
σει, ἐς ὃ δείσας τὰς ἀπειλὲς ὁ φύλακος (ἦν γὰρ τῶν τις
εἱλωτέων) διδοῖ οἱ μάχαιραν. Κλεομένης δὲ παραλα-
βὼν τὸν σίδηρον ἄρχετο ἐκ τῶν κνημέων ἑωυτὸν λωβώ-
μενος· ἐπιτάμνων γὰρ κατὰ μῆκος τὰς σάρκας προέ
15 βαινε ἐκ τῶν κνημέων ἐς τοὺς μηρούς, ἐκ δὲ τῶν μηρῶν
ἔς τε τὰ ἰσχία καὶ τὰς λαπάρας, ἐς ὃ ἐς τὴν γαστέρα
ἀπίκετο, καὶ ταύτην καταχορδεύων ἀπέθανε τρόπῳ τοιού-
τῷ, ὡς μὲν οἱ πολλοὶ λέγουσι Ἑλλήνων, ὅτι τὴν Πυθίην
ἀνέγνωσε τὰ περὶ Δημάρητον λέγειν γενόμενα, ὡς δὲ
20 Αθηναίοι μοῦνοι λέγουσι, διότι ἐς Ελευσίνα ἐσβαλών
ἔκειρε τὸ τέμενος τῶν θεῶν, ὡς δὲ ᾿Αργεῖοι, ὅτι ἐξ ἱροῦ
αὐτῶν τοῦ Ἄργου Αργείων τοὺς καταφυγόντας ἐκ τῆς
μάχης καταγινέων κατέκοπτε καὶ αὐτὸ τὸ ἄλσος ἐν
ἀλογίῃ ἔχων ἐνέπρησε.
Heinous Deed of Cleomenes at Argos.
76 Κλεομένεϊ γὰρ μαντευομένῳ ἐν Δελφοῖσι ἐχρήσθη
Αργος αἱρήσειν. ἐπείτε δὲ Σπαρτιήτας ἄγων ἀπίκετο
ἐπὶ ποταμὸν Ἐρασῖνον, ὃς λέγεται ῥέειν ἐκ τῆς Στυμ
φαλίδος λίμνης· τὴν γὰρ δὴ λίμνην ταύτην ἐς χάσμα
5 ἀφανὲς ἐκδιδοῦσαν ἀναφαίνεσθαι ἐν ῎Αργεϊ, τὸ ἐνθεῦτεν
δὲ τὸ ὕδωρ ἤδη τοῦτο ὑπ᾽ Αργείων Ἐρασῖνον καλέεσθαι·
ἀπικόμενος δ᾽ ὧν ὁ Κλεομένης ἐπὶ τὸν ποταμὸν τοῦτον
BOOK VI.
37
ἐσφαγιάζετο αὐτῷ· καὶ οὐ γὰρ ἐκαλλιέρεε οὐδαμῶς δια-
βαίνειν μιν, ἄγασθαι μὲν ἔφη τοῦ Ἐρασίνου οὐ προδι-
δόντος τοὺς πολιήτας, Αργείους μέντοι οὐδ᾽ ὡς χαιρήσειν. 10
μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα ἐξαναχωρήσας τὴν στρατιὴν κατήγαγε ἐς
Θυρέην, σφαγιασάμενος δὲ τῇ θαλάσσῃ ταῦρον πλοίοισι
σφεας ἤγαγε ἔς τε τὴν Τιρυνθίην χώρην καὶ Ναυπλίην.
Αργεῖοι δὲ ἐβοήθεον πυνθανόμενοι ταῦτα ἐπὶ θάλασσαν·
ὡς δὲ ἀγχοῦ μὲν ἐγίνοντο τῆς Τίρυνθος, χώρῳ δὲ ἐν
τούτῳ τῷ κέεται ἡ Σήπεια οὔνομα, μεταίχμιον οὐ μέγα
ἀπολιπόντες ἵζοντο ἀντίοι τοῖσι Λακεδαιμονίοισι. ἐν-
θαῦτα δὴ οἱ ᾿Αργεῖοι τὴν μὲν ἐκ τοῦ φανεροῦ μάχην οὐκ 5
ἐφοβέοντο, ἀλλὰ μὴ δόλῳ αἱρεθέωσι· καὶ γὰρ δή σφι ἐς
τοῦτο τὸ πρῆγμα εἶχε τὸ χρηστήριον τὸ ἐπίκοινα ἔχρησε
ἡ Πυθίη τούτοισί τε καὶ Μιλησίοισι, λέγον ὧδε·
τό
ἀλλ᾽ ὅταν ἡ θήλεια τὸν ἄρσενα νικήσασα
ἐξελάσῃ καὶ κῦδος ἐν ᾿Αργείοισιν ἄρηται,
πολλὰς Αργείων ἀμφιδρυφέας τότε θήσει.
ὥς ποτέ τις ἐρέει καὶ ἐπεσσομένων ἀνθρώπων·
66
“ δεινὸς ὄφις τριέλικτος ἀπώλετο δουρὶ δαμασθείς.”
10
ταῦτα δὴ πάντα συνελθόντα τοῖσι Αργείοισι φόβον παρ
είχε. καὶ δή σφι πρὸς ταῦτα ἔδοξε τῷ κήρυκι τῶν 15
πολεμίων χρᾶσθαι, δόξαν δέ σφι ἐποίευν τοιόνδε· ὅκως
ὁ Σπαρτιήτης κῆρυξ προσημαίνοι τι Λακεδαιμονίοισι,
ἐποίευν καὶ οἱ ᾿Αργεῖοι τὠυτὸ τοῦτο. μαθὼν δὲ ὁ Κλεο- 78
μένης ποιεῦντας τοὺς ᾿Αργείους ὁκοῖόν τι ὁ σφέτερος
κῆρυξ σημήνειε, παραγγέλλει σφι, ὅταν σημήνῃ ὁ κῆρυξ
ποιέεσθαι ἄριστον, τότε ἀναλαβόντας τὰ ὅπλα χωρέειν
ἐς τοὺς ᾿Αργείους. ταῦτα καὶ ἐγένετο ἐπιτελέα ἐκ τῶν 5
Λακεδαιμονίων· ἄριστον γὰρ ποιευμένοισι τοῖσι Αργεί-
οισι ἐκ τοῦ κηρύγματος ἐπεκέατο, καὶ πολλοὺς μὲν
ἐφόνευσαν αὐτῶν, πολλῷ δ᾽ ἔτι πλεῦνας ἐς τὸ ἄλσος
38
HERODOTUS.
τοῦ Ἄργου καταφυγόντας περιιζόμενοι ἐφύλασσον.
79 ἐνθεῦτεν δὲ ὁ Κλεομένης ἐποίεε τοιόνδε. ἔχων αυτομό
λους ἄνδρας καὶ πυνθανόμενος τούτων, ἐξεκάλεε πέμπων
κήρυκα ὀνομαστὶ λέγων τῶν ᾿Αργείων τοὺς ἐν τῷ ἱρῷ
ἀπεργμένους, ἐξεκάλεε δὲ φὰς αὐτῶν ἔχειν τὰ ἄποινα.
5 ἄποινα δέ ἐστι Πελοποννησίοισι δύο μνέαι τεταγμέναι
κατ' ἄνδρα αἰχμάλωτον ἐκτίνειν. κατὰ πεντήκοντα δὴ
ὧν τῶν ᾿Αργείων ὡς ἑκάστους ἐκκαλεύμενος ὁ Κλεομένης
ἔκτεινε. ταῦτα δέ κως γινόμενα ἐλελήθεε τοὺς λοιποὺς
τοὺς ἐν τῷ τεμένει· ἅτε γὰρ πυκνοῦ ἐόντος τοῦ ἄλσεος,
10 οὐκ ὥρων οἱ ἐντὸς τοὺς ἐκτὸς ὅ τι ἔπρησσον, πρίν γε δὴ
αὐτῶν τις ἀναβὰς ἐπὶ δένδρος κατεῖδε τὸ ποιεύμενον.
80 οὔκων δὴ ἔτι καλεόμενοι ἐξήισαν. ἐνθαῦτα δὴ ὁ Κλεο-
μένης ἐκέλευε πάντα τινὰ τῶν εἰλωτέων περινέειν ὕλῃ
τὸ ἄλσος, τῶν δὲ πειθομένων ἐνέπρησε τὸ ἄλσος. καιο-
μένου δὲ ἤδη ἐπείρετο τῶν τινα αὐτομόλων τίνος εἴη
5 θεῶν τὸ ἄλσος· ὁ δὲ ἔφη ῎Αργου εἶναι. ὁ δὲ ὡς ἤκουσε,
ἀναστενάξας μέγα εἶπε· “ ὦ Απολλον χρηστήριε, ή μεγά-
λως με ηπάτηκας φάμενος "Αργος αἱρήσειν· συμβάλ
81 λομαι δ' ἐξήκειν μοι τὸ χρηστήριον.” μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα ὁ
Ο
Ο
Κλεομένης τὴν μὲν πλέω στρατιὴν ἀπῆκε ἀπιέναι ἐς
Σπάρτην, χιλίους δὲ αὐτὸς λαβὼν τοὺς ἀριστέας ἤιε ἐς
τὸ Ηραιον θύσων. βουλόμενον δὲ αὐτὸν θύειν ἐπὶ τοῦ
5 βωμοῦ ὁ ἱρεὺς ἀπηγόρευε, φὰς οὐκ ὅσιον εἶναι ξείνῳ
αὐτόθι θύειν. ὁ δὲ Κλεομένης τὸν ἱρέα ἐκέλευε τοὺς
εἵλωτας ἀπὸ τοῦ βωμοῦ ἀπάγοντας μαστιγώσαι, καὶ
αὐτὸς ἔθυσε· ποιήσας δὲ ταῦτα ἀπήιε ἐς τὴν Σπάρτην.
82 νοστήσαντα δέ μιν ὑπῆγον οἱ ἐχθροὶ ὑπὸ τοὺς ἐφόρους,
φάμενοί μιν δωροδοκήσαντα οὐκ ἑλεῖν τὸ ῎Αργος, παρεὸν
εὐπετέως μιν ἑλεῖν. ὁ δέ σφι ἔλεξε, οὔτε εἰ ψευδόμενος
οὔτε εἰ ἀληθέα λέγων, ἔχω σαφηνέως εἶπαι, ἔλεξε δ᾽ ὦν
Ο
BOOK VI.
39
φάμενος, ἐπείτε δὴ τὸ τοῦ ῎Αργου ἱρὸν εἷλε, δοκέειν οἱ 5
ἐξεληλυθέναι τὸν τοῦ θεοῦ χρησμόν· πρὸς ὢν ταῦτα οὐ
δικαιοῦν πειρᾶν τῆς πόλιος, πρίν γε δὴ ἱροῖσι χρήσηται
καὶ μάθῃ εἴτε οἱ ὁ θεὸς παραδιδοῖ εἴτε οἱ ἐμποδὼν ἕστηκε·
καλλιερευμένῳ δὲ ἐν τῷ Ἡραίῳ ἐκ τοῦ ἀγάλματος τῶν
στηθέων φλόγα πυρὸς ἐκλάμψαι, μαθεῖν δὲ αὐτὸς οὕτω 10
τὴν ἀτρεκείην, ὅτι οὐκ αἱρέει τὸ Αργος. εἰ μὲν γὰρ ἐκ
τῆς κεφαλῆς τοῦ ἀγάλματος ἐξέλαμψε, αἱρέειν ἂν κατ'
ἄκρης τὴν πόλιν, ἐκ τῶν στηθέων δὲ λάμψαντος πᾶν οἱ
πεποιῆσθαι ὅσον ὁ θεὸς ἐβούλετο γενέσθαι. ταῦτα δὲ
λέγων πιστά τε καὶ οἰκότα ἐδόκεε Σπαρτιήτῃσι λέγειν, 15
καὶ διέφυγε πολλὸν τοὺς διώκοντας.
τό
او
Slave-rule at Argos; Cleomenes' Intemperance.
Αργος δὲ ἀνδρῶν ἐχηρώθη οὕτω ὥστε οἱ δοῦλοι αὐ- 83
τῶν ἔσχον πάντα τὰ πρήγματα ἄρχοντές τε καὶ διέποντες,
ἐς ὃ ἐπήβησαν οἱ τῶν ἀπολομένων παῖδες. ἔπειτά σφεας
οὗτοι ἀνακτώμενοι ὀπίσω ἐς ἑωυτοὺς τὸ ῎Αργος ἐξέβα
λον· ἐξωθεύμενοι δὲ οἱ δοῦλοι μάχῃ ἔσχον Τίρυνθα. 5
τέως μὲν δή σφι ἦν ἄρθμια ἐς ἀλλήλους, ἔπειτα δὲ ἐς
τοὺς δούλους ἦλθε ἀνὴρ μάντις Κλέανδρος, γένος ἐὼν
Φιγαλεὺς ἀπ' Αρκαδίης· οὗτος τοὺς δούλους ἀνέγνωσε
ἐπιθέσθαι τοῖσι δεσπότῃσι. ἐκ τούτου δὴ πόλεμός σφι ἦν
ἐπὶ χρόνον συχνόν, ἐς ὃ δὴ μόγις οἱ Αργεῖοι ἐπεκράτησαν. 10
Αργεῖοι μέν νυν διὰ ταῦτα Κλεομένεά φασι μανέντα 84
ἀπολέσθαι κακῶς· αὐτοὶ δὲ Σπαρτιῆταί φασι ἐκ δαιμο-
νίου μὲν οὐδενὸς μανῆναι Κλεομένεα, Σκύθησι δὲ ὁμιλή
σαντά μιν ἀκρητοπότην γενέσθαι καὶ ἐκ τούτου μανῆναι.
Σκύθας γὰρ τοὺς νομάδας, ἐπείτε σφι Δαρεῖον ἐμβαλεῖν 5
ἐς τὴν χώρην, μετὰ ταῦτα μεμονέναι μιν τίσασθαι,
πέμψαντας δὲ ἐς Σπάρτην συμμαχίην τε ποιέεσθαι καὶ
40
HERODOTUS.
συντίθεσθαι ὡς χρεὸν εἴη αὐτοὺς μὲν τοὺς Σκύθας παρὰ
Φᾶσιν ποταμὸν πειρᾶν ἐς τὴν Μηδικὴν ἐσβάλλειν, σφέας
10 δὲ τοὺς Σπαρτιήτας κελεύειν ἐξ Εφέσου ὁρμεομένους
ἀναβαίνειν καὶ ἔπειτα ἐς τὠυτὸ ἀπαντᾶν. Κλεομένεα
δὲ λέγουσι ἡκόντων τῶν Σκυθέων ἐπὶ ταῦτα ὁμιλέειν
σφι μεζόνως, ὁμιλέοντα δὲ μᾶλλον τοῦ ἱκνεομένου μαθεῖν
τὴν ἀκρητοποσίην παρ' αὐτῶν· ἐκ τούτου δὲ μανῆναί
15 μιν νομίζουσι Σπαρτιῆται. ἔκ τε τόσου, ὡς αὐτοὶ λέγου-
σι, ἐπεὰν ζωρότερον βούλωνται πιεῖν, “ ἐπισκύθισον”
λέγουσι. οὕτω δὴ Σπαρτιῆται τὰ περὶ Κλεομένεα
λέγουσι· ἐμοὶ δὲ δοκέει τίσιν ταύτην ὁ Κλεομένης
Δημαρήτῳ ἐκτῖσαι.
0
66
Aeginetan Hostages; Glaucus and his Money-deposit.
85 Τελευτήσαντος δὲ Κλεομένεος ὡς ἐπύθοντο Αἰγινῆται,
ἔπεμπον ἐς Σπάρτην ἀγγέλους καταβωσομένους Λευτυ-
χίδεω περὶ τῶν ἐν ᾿Αθήνῃσι ὁμήρων ἐχομένων. Λακεδαι
μόνιοι δὲ δικαστήριον συναγαγόντες ἔγνωσαν περιυβρίσ-
5 θαι Αιγινήτας ὑπὸ Λευτυχίδεω, καί μιν κατέκριναν
ἔκδοτον ἄγεσθαι ἐς Αἴγιναν ἀντὶ τῶν ἐν ᾿Αθήνῃσι ἐχομέ
νων ἀνδρῶν· μελλόντων δὲ ἄγειν τῶν Αἰγινητέων τὸν
Λευτυχίδεα, εἶπέ σφι Θεασίδης ὁ Λεωπρέπεος, ἐὼν ἐν
Σπάρτῃ δόκιμος ἀνήρ, “ τί βουλεύεσθε ποιέειν, ἄνδρες
10 Αἰγινῆται ; τὸν βασιλέα τῶν Σπαρτιητέων ἔκδοτον
γενόμενον ὑπὸ τῶν πολιητέων ἄγειν ; εἰ νῦν ὀργῇ χρεό-
μενοι ἔγνωσαν οὕτω Σπαρτιῆται, ὅκως ἐξ ὑστέρης μή τι
ὑμῖν, ἢν ταῦτα πρήσσητε, πανώλεθρον κακὸν ἐς τὴν
χώρην ἐμβάλωσι.” ταῦτα ἀκούσαντες οἱ Αἰγινῆται
15 ἔσχοντο τῆς ἀγωγῆς, ὁμολογίῃ δὲ ἐχρήσαντο τοιῇδε,
ἐπισπόμενον Λευτυχίδεα ἐς ᾿Αθήνας ἀποδοῦναι Αἰγινή-
86 τῃσι τοὺς ἄνδρας. ὡς δὲ ἀπικόμενος Λευτυχίδης ἐς
BOOK VI.
41
τὰς ᾿Αθήνας ἀπαίτεε τὴν παραθήκην, οἱ δ' Αθηναῖοι
προφάσιας εἷλκον οὐ βουλόμενοι ἀποδοῦναι, φάντες δύο
σφέας ἐόντας βασιλέας παραθέσθαι καὶ οὐ δικαιοῦν τῷ
ἑτέρῳ ἄνευ τοῦ ἑτέρου ἀποδιδόναι· οὐ φαμένων δὲ ἀπο- 5
δώσειν τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, ἔλεξέ σφι Λευτυχίδης τάδε· “ ὦ
Αθηναῖοι, ποιέετε μὲν ὁκότερα βούλεσθε αὐτοί· καὶ γὰρ
ἀποδιδόντες ποιέετε ὅσια, καὶ μὴ ἀποδιδόντες τὰ ἐναντία
τούτων· ὁκοῖον μέντοι τι ἐν τῇ Σπάρτῃ συνηνείχθη γενέ-
σθαι περὶ παρακαταθήκης, βούλομαι ὑμῖν εἶπαι. λέγο- 10
μεν ἡμεῖς οἱ Σπαρτιήται γενέσθαι ἐν τῇ Λακεδαίμονι
κατὰ τρίτην γενεὴν τὴν ἀπ' ἐμέο Γλαῦκον Επικύδεος
παῖδα. τοῦτον τὸν ἄνδρα φαμὲν τά τε ἄλλα πάντα
περιήκειν τὰ πρῶτα, καὶ δὴ καὶ ἀκούειν ἄριστα δικαιο-
σύνης πέρι πάντων ὅσοι τὴν Λακεδαίμονα τοῦτον τὸν 15
χρόνον οἴκεον. συνενειχθῆναι δέ οἱ ἐν χρόνῳ ἱκνευμένῳ
τάδε λέγομεν. ἄνδρα Μιλήσιον ἀπικόμενον ἐς Σπάρτην
βούλεσθαί οἱ ἐλθεῖν ἐς λόγους, προϊσχόμενον τοιάδε·
εἰμὶ μὲν Μιλήσιος, ἥκω δὲ τῆς σῆς, Γλαῦκε, βουλόμενος
δικαιοσύνης ἀπολαῦσαι. ὡς γὰρ δὴ ἀνὰ πᾶσαν μὲν 20
τὴν ἄλλην Ελλάδα, ἐν δὲ καὶ περὶ Ἰωνίην τῆς σῆς
δικαιοσύνης ἦν λόγος πολλός, ἐμεωυτῷ λόγους ἐδίδουν
καὶ ὅτι ἐπικίνδυνός ἐστι αἰεί κοτε ἡ Ἰωνίη, ἡ δὲ Πελο-
πόννησος ἀσφαλέως ἱδρυμένη, καὶ διότι χρήματα οὐδαμὰ
τοὺς αὐτοὺς ἔστι ὁρᾶν ἔχοντας. ταῦτά τε ὧν ἐπιλεγο- 25
μένῳ καὶ βουλευομένῳ ἔδοξέ μοι τὰ ἡμίσεα πάσης τῆς
οὐσίης ἐξαργυρώσαντα θέσθαι παρὰ σέ, εὖ ἐξεπισταμένῳ
ὥς μοι κείμενα ἔσται παρὰ σοὶ σόα. σὺ δή μοι καὶ τὰ
χρήματα δέξαι καὶ τάδε τὰ σύμβολα σῶζε λαβών· ὃς
δ᾽ ἂν ἔχων ταῦτα ἀπαιτέῃ, τούτῳ ἀποδοῦναι.” ὁ μὲν δὴ 30
ἀπὸ Μιλήτου ἥκων ξεῖνος τοσαῦτα ἔλεξε, Γλαῦκος δὲ
ἐδέξατο τὴν παρακαταθήκην ἐπὶ τῷ εἰρημένῳ λόγῳ.
42
HERODOTUS.
Ο
τό
χρόνου δὲ πολλοῦ διελθόντος ἦλθον ἐς Σπάρτην τούτου
τοῦ παραθεμένου τὰ χρήματα οἱ παῖδες, ἐλθόντες δὲ ἐς
35 λόγους τῷ Γλαύκῳ καὶ ἀποδεικνύντες τὰ σύμβολα
ἀπαίτεον τὰ χρήματα. ὁ δὲ διωθέετο ἀντυποκρινόμενος
τοιάδε· “ οὔτε μέμνημαι τὸ πρῆγμα οὔτε με περιφέρει
οὐδὲν εἰδέναι τούτων τῶν ὑμεῖς λέγετε, βούλομαί τε
ἀναμνησθεὶς ποιέειν πᾶν τὸ δίκαιον· καὶ γὰρ εἰ ἔλαβον,
40 ὀρθῶς ἀποδοῦναι, καὶ εἴ γε ἀρχὴν μὴ ἔλαβον, νόμοισι
τοῖσι Ἑλλήνων χρήσομαι ἐς ὑμέας. ταῦτα ὦν ὑμῖν ἀνα-
βάλλομαι κυρώσειν ἐς τέταρτον μῆνα ἀπὸ τοῦδε.” οἱ μὲν
δὴ Μιλήσιοι συμφορὴν ποιησάμενοι ἀπαλλάσσοντο ὡς
ἀπεστερημένοι τῶν χρημάτων, Γλαῦκος δὲ ἐπορεύετο ἐς
45 Δελφοὺς χρησόμενος τῷ χρηστηρίῳ. ἐπειρωτέοντα δὲ
αὐτὸν τὸ χρηστήριον εἰ ὅρκῳ τὰ χρήματα ληίσηται, ἡ
Πυθίη μετέρχεται τοισίδε τοῖσι ἔπεσι·
Γλαῦκ Επικυδείδη, τὸ μὲν αὐτίκα κέρδιον οὕτω
ὅρκῳ νικῆσαι καὶ χρήματα ληίσσασθαι.
50
ὄμνυ, ἐπεὶ θάνατός γε καὶ εὔορκον μένει ἄνδρα.
ἀλλ᾽ ὅρκου πάις ἐστίν, ἀνώνυμος, οὐδ᾽ ἔπι χεῖρες
οὐδὲ πόδες· κραιπνὸς δὲ μετέρχεται, εἰς ὅ με πᾶσαν
συμμάρψας ὀλέσῃ γενεὴν καὶ οἶκον ἅπαντα.
ἀνδρὸς δ' ενόρκου γενεὴ μετόπισθεν ἀμείνων.
Ο
55 ταῦτα ἀκούσας ὁ Γλαῦκος συγγνώμην τὸν θεὸν παραιτέ-
ετο αὐτῷ ἴσχειν τῶν ῥηθέντων. ἡ δὲ Πυθίη ἔφη τὸ
πειρηθῆναι τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ τὸ ποιῆσαι ἴσον δύνασθαι.
Γλαῦκος μὲν δὴ μεταπεμψάμενος τοὺς Μιλησίους ξείνους
ἀποδιδοῖ σφι τὰ χρήματα· τοῦ δὲ εἵνεκα ὁ λόγος δε, ὦ
60 Αθηναῖοι, ὡρμήθη λέγεσθαι ἐς ὑμέας, ειρήσεται. Γλαύ
κου νῦν οὔτε τι ἀπόγονόν ἐστι οὐδὲν οὔτ᾽ ἱστίη οὐδεμία
νομιζομένη είναι Γλαύκου, ἐκτέτριπταί τε πρόρριζος ἐκ
Σπάρτης. οὕτω ἀγαθὸν μηδὲ διανοέεσθαι περὶ παρα-
καταθήκης ἄλλο γε ἢ ἀπαιτεόντων ἀποδιδόναι.”
BOOK VI.
43
Feud between Athens and Aegina.
Λευτυχίδης μὲν εἴπας ταῦτα, ὡς οἱ οὐδὲ οὕτω ἐσήκου- 8
ον οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι, ἀπαλλάσσετο· οἱ δὲ Αἰγινῆται, πρὶν
τῶν πρότερον ἀδικημάτων δοῦναι δίκας, τῶν ἐς Αθηναί-
ους ὕβρισαν Θηβαίοισι χαριζόμενοι, ἐποίησαν τοιόνδε.
μεμφόμενοι τοῖσι Αθηναίοισι καὶ ἀξιοῦντες ἀδικέεσθαι, 5
ὡς τιμωρησόμενοι τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους παρεσκευάζοντο.
καὶ ἦν γὰρ δὴ τοῖσι Αθηναίοισι πεντετηρὶς ἐπὶ Σουνίῳ,
λοχήσαντες ὢν τὴν θεωρίδα νέα εἷλον πλήρεα ἀνδρῶν
τῶν πρώτων Αθηναίων, λαβόντες δὲ τοὺς ἄνδρας ἔδησαν.
Αθηναῖοι δὲ παθόντες ταῦτα πρὸς Αἰγινητέων οὐκέτι 88
ἀνεβάλλοντο μὴ οὐ τὸ πᾶν μηχανήσασθαι ἐπ᾽ Αἰγινή-
τῃσι. καὶ ἦν γὰρ Νικόδρομος Κνοίθου καλεόμενος ἐν
τῇ Αἰγίνῃ ἀνὴρ δόκιμος, οὗτος μεμφόμενος μὲν τοῖσι
Αἰγινήτῃσι προτέρην ἑωυτοῦ ἐξέλασιν ἐκ τῆς νήσου, 5
μαθὼν δὲ τότε τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους ἀναρτημένους ἔρδειν
Αἰγινήτας κακῶς, συντίθεται Αθηναίοισι προδοσίην
Αἰγίνης, φράσας ἐν τῇ τε ἡμέρῃ ἐπιχειρήσει καὶ ἐκείνους
ἐς τὴν ἥκειν δεήσει βοηθέοντας. μετὰ ταῦτα καταλαμ- 89
βάνει μὲν κατὰ τὰ συνεθήκατο Αθηναίοισι ὁ Νικόδρομος
τὴν παλαιὴν καλεομένην πόλιν, Αθηναῖοι δὲ οὐ παραγί
νονται ἐς δέον· οὐ γὰρ ἔτυχον ἐοῦσαι νέες σφι ἀξιόμαχοι
τῇσι Αἰγινητέων συμβαλεῖν· ἐν ᾧ ὧν Κορινθίων ἐδέοντο 5
χρῆσαι σφίσι νέας, ἐν τούτῳ διεφθάρη τὰ πρήγματα.
οἱ δὲ Κορίνθιοι, ἦσαν γάρ σφι τοῦτον τὸν χρόνον φίλοι
ἐς τὰ μάλιστα, Αθηναίοισι διδοῦσι δεομένοισι εἴκοσι
νέας, διδοῦσι δὲ πενταδράχμους ἀποδόμενοι· δωρεὴν γὰρ
ἐν τῷ νόμῳ οὐκ ἐξῆν δοῦναι. ταύτας τε δὴ λαβόντες οἱ 10
Αθηναῖοι καὶ τὰς σφετέρας, πληρώσαντες ἑβδομήκοντα
νέας τὰς ἁπάσας, ἔπλεον ἐπὶ τὴν Αἴγιναν καὶ ὑστέρησαν
44
HERODOTUS.
εν
90 ἡμέρῃ μιῇ τῆς συγκειμένης. Νικόδρομος δέ, ὡς οἱ
Αθηναῖοι ἐς τὸν καιρὸν οὐ παρεγίνοντο, ἐς πλοῖον ἐσ-
βὰς ἐκδιδρήσκει ἐκ τῆς Αἰγίνης· σὺν δέ οἱ καὶ ἄλλοι
ἐκ τῶν Αἰγινητέων εἵποντο, τοῖσι ᾿Αθηναῖοι Σούνιον
5 οἰκῆσαι ἔδοσαν. ἐνθεῦτεν δὲ οὗτοι ὁρμεόμενοι ἔφερόν
91 τε καὶ ἦγον τοὺς ἐν τῇ νήσῳ Αἰγινήτας. ταῦτα μὲν δὴ
ὕστερον ἐγίνετο. Αἰγινητέων δὲ οἱ παχέες ἐπαναστάν
τος τοῦ δήμου σφι ἅμα Νικοδρόμῳ ἐπεκράτησαν, καὶ
ἔπειτα σφεας χειρωσάμενοι ἐξῆγον ἀπολέοντες. ἀπὸ
5 τούτου δὲ καὶ ἄγος σφι ἐγένετο, τὸ ἐκθύσασθαι οὐκ οἷοί
τε ἐγένοντο ἐπιμηχανεόμενοι, ἀλλ᾽ ἔφθησαν ἐκπεσόντες
πρότερον ἐκ τῆς νήσου ἤ σφι ἵλεον γενέσθαι τὴν θεόν.
ἑπτακοσίους γὰρ δὴ τοῦ δήμου ζωγρήσαντες ἐξῆγον ὡς
ἀπολέοντες, εἷς δέ τις τούτων ἐκφυγὼν τὰ δεσμὰ κατα-
10 φεύγει προς πρόθυρα Δήμητρος θεσμοφόρου, ἐπιλαβό-
μενος δὲ τῶν ἐπισπαστήρων εἴχετο· οἱ δὲ ἐπείτε μιν
ἀποσπάσαι οὐκ οἷοί τε ἀπέλκοντες ἐγίνοντο, ἀποκό-
ψαντες αὐτοῦ τὰς χεῖρας ἦγον οὕτω, αἱ χεῖρες δὲ ἐκεῖναι
92 ἐμπεφυκυῖαι ἦσαν τοῖσι ἐπισπάστροισι. ταῦτα μέν νυν
σφέας αὐτοὺς οἱ Αἰγινῆται ἐργάσαντο, Αθηναίοισι δὲ
ἥκουσι ἐναυμάχησαν νηυσὶ ἑβδομήκοντα, ἑσσωθέντες δὲ
τῇ ναυμαχίῃ ἐπεκαλέοντο τοὺς αὐτοὺς τοὺς καὶ πρότερον,
5 Αργείους. καὶ δή σφι οὗτοι μὲν οὐκέτι βοηθέουσι,
μεμφόμενοι ὅτι Αἰγιναῖαι νέες ἀνάγκῃ λαμφθεῖσαι ὑπὸ
Κλεομένεος ἔσχον τε ἐς τὴν Αργολίδα χώρην καὶ συναπ
έβησαν Λακεδαιμονίοισι· συναπέβησαν δὲ καὶ ἀπὸ
Σικυωνιέων νεῶν ἄνδρες τῇ αὐτῇ ταύτῃ ἐσβολῇ· καί
10 σφι ὑπ' Αργείων ἐπεβλήθη ζημίη χίλια τάλαντα ἐκτῖσαι,
πεντακόσια εκατέρους. Σικυώνιοι μέν νυν συγγνόντες
ἀδικῆσαι ὡμολόγησαν ἑκατὸν τάλαντα ἐκτίσαντες ἀζή.
μιοι εἶναι, Αἰγινῆται δὲ οὔτε συνεγινώσκοντο ἦσάν τε
BOOK VI.
45
αὐθαδέστεροι. διὰ δὴ ὦν σφι ταῦτα δεομένοισι ἀπὸ
μὲν τοῦ δημοσίου οὐδεὶς Αργείων ἔτι ἐβοήθεε, ἐθελονταὶ 15
δὲ ἐς χιλίους· ἦγε δὲ αὐτοὺς στρατηγὸς ἀνὴρ τῷ οὔνομα
Εὐρυβάτης, πεντάεθλον ἐπασκήσας. τούτων οἱ πλευνες
οὐκ ἀπενόστησαν ὀπίσω, ἀλλ᾽ ἐτελεύτησαν ὑπ᾽ Αθηναί-
· ων ἐν Αἰγίνῃ· αὐτὸς δὲ ὁ στρατηγὸς Εὐρυβάτης μουνο-
μαχίην ἐπασκέων τρεῖς μὲν ἄνδρας τρόπῳ τοιούτῳ 20
κτείνει, ὑπὸ δὲ τοῦ τετάρτου Σωφάνεος τοῦ Δεκελέος
ἀποθνήσκει. Αἰγινῆται δὲ ἐοῦσι ἀτάκτοισι τοῖσι 93
Αθηναίοισι συμβαλόντες τῇσι νηυσὶ ἐνίκησαν, και
σφεων νέας τέσσερας αὐτοῖσι τοῖσι ἀνδράσι εἷλον.
παρ
Ο

Expedition of Datis and Artaphernes through the Aegean.
Αθηναίοισι μὲν δὴ πόλεμος συνῆπτο πρὸς Αιγινή-94
ὁ δὲ Πέρσης τὸ ἑωυτοῦ ἐποίεε, ὥστε ἀναμιμνή-
σκοντός τε αἰεὶ τοῦ θεράποντος μεμνῆσθαί μιν τῶν
Αθηναίων, καὶ Πεισιστρατιδέων προσκατημένων καὶ
διαβαλλόντων Αθηναίους, ἅμα δὲ βουλόμενος ὁ Δαρεῖος 5
ταύτης ἐχόμενος τῆς προφάσιος καταστρέφεσθαι τῆς
Ἑλλάδος τοὺς μὴ δόντας αὐτῷ γῆν τε καὶ ὕδωρ. Μαρ-
δόνιον μὲν δὴ φλαύρως πρήξαντα τῷ στόλῳ παραλύει
τῆς στρατηγίης, ἄλλους δὲ στρατηγοὺς ἀποδέξας ἀπέ-
στείλε ἐπί τε Ερέτριαν καὶ ᾿Αθήνας, Δᾶτίν τε ἐόντα 10
Μῆδον γένος καὶ ᾿Αρταφέρνεα τὸν ᾿Αρταφέρνεος παῖδα,
ἀδελφιδέον ἑωυτοῦ· ἐντειλάμενος δὲ ἀπέπεμπε ἐξανδρα-
ποδίσαντας ᾿Αθήνας και Ερέτριαν ἀνάγειν ἑωυτῷ ἐς
ὄψιν τὰ ἀνδράποδα. ὡς δὲ οἱ στρατηγοὶ οὗτοι οἱ 95
ἀποδεχθέντες πορευόμενοι παρὰ βασιλέος ἀπίκοντο τῆς
Κιλικίης ἐς τὸ ᾿Αλήιον πεδίον, ἅμα ἀγόμενοι πεζόν
στρατὸν πολλόν τε καὶ εὖ ἐσκευασμένον, ἐνθαῦτα στρα-
τοπεδευομένοισι ἐπῆλθε μὲν ὁ ναυτικὸς πᾶς στρατὸς ὁ 5
ó
46
HERODOTUS.
ἐπιταχθεὶς ἑκάστοισι, παρεγένοντο δὲ καὶ αἱ ἱππαγωγοί
νέες, τὰς τῷ προτέρῳ ἔτεϊ προεῖπε τοῖσι ἑωυτοῦ δασμο
φόροισι Δαρεῖος ἑτοιμάζειν. ἐσβαλόμενοι δὲ τοὺς ἵπ-
πους ἐς ταύτας καὶ τὸν πεζὸν στρατὸν ἐσβιβάσαντες ἐς
10 τὰς νέας, ἔπλεον ἑξακοσίῃσι τριήρεσι ἐς τὴν Ἰωνίην.
ἐνθεῦτεν δὲ οὐ παρὰ τὴν ἤπειρον εἶχον τὰς νέας ἰθὺ
τοῦ τε Ἑλλησπόντου καὶ τῆς Θρηίκης, ἀλλ᾽ ἐκ Σάμου
ὁρμεόμενοι παρά τε Ικάριον καὶ διὰ νήσων τὸν πλόον
ἐποιεῦντο, ὡς μὲν ἐμοὶ δοκέειν, δείσαντες μάλιστα τὸν
15 περίπλοον τοῦ ᾿Αθω, ὅτι τῷ προτέρῳ ἔτεϊ ποιεύμενοι
ταύτῃ τὴν κομιδὴν μεγάλως προσέπταισαν· πρὸς δὲ καὶ
96 ἡ Νάξος σφέας ἠνάγκαζε πρότερον οὐκ ἁλοῦσα. ἐπεὶ
* δὲ ἐκ τοῦ Ἰκαρίου πελάγεος προσφερόμενοι προσέμιξαν
τῇ Νάξῳ, ἐπὶ ταύτην γὰρ δὴ πρώτην ἐπεῖχον στρατεύεσ
θαι οἱ Πέρσαι, μεμνημένοι τῶν πρότερον οἱ Νάξιοι προς
5 τὰ ὄρεα οἴχοντο φεύγοντες οὐδὲ ὑπέμειναν. οἱ δὲ Πέρσαι
ἀνδραποδισάμενοι τοὺς κατέλαβον αὐτῶν, ἐνέπρησαν καὶ
τὰ ἱρὰ καὶ τὴν πόλιν. ταῦτα δὲ ποιήσαντες ἐπὶ τὰς
ἄλλας νήσους ἀνήγοντο.
97
Delos Respected; an Earthquake.
Ἐν ᾧ δὲ οὗτοι ταῦτα ἐποίευν, οἱ Δήλιοι ἐκλιπόντες
καὶ αὐτοὶ τὴν Δῆλον οἴχοντο φεύγοντες ἐς Τῆνον. ἢ τῆς
δὲ στρατιῆς καταπλεούσης ὁ Δᾶτις προπλώσας οὐκ ἔα
τὰς νέας πρὸς τὴν Δῆλον προσορμίζεσθαι, ἀλλὰ πέρην
5 ἐν τῇ Ρηναίῃ· αὐτὸς δὲ πυθόμενος ἵνα ἦσαν οἱ Δήλιοι,
πέμπων κήρυκα ἠγόρευέ σφι τάδε· “ ἄνδρες ἱροί, τί
φεύγοντες οἴχεσθε, οὐκ ἐπιτήδεα καταγνόντες κατ' ἐμεῦ ;
ἐγὼ γὰρ καὶ αὐτὸς ἐπὶ τοσοῦτό γε φρονέω καί μοι ἐκ
βασιλέος ὧδε ἐπέσταλται, ἐν τῇ χώρῃ οἱ δύο θεοὶ ἐγέ
10 νοντο, ταύτην μηδὲν σίνεσθαι, μήτε αὐτὴν τὴν χώρην
BOOK VI,
47
μήτε τοὺς οἰκήτορας αὐτῆς. νῦν ὧν καὶ ἄπιτε ἐπὶ τὰ
ὑμέτερα αὐτῶν καὶ τὴν νῆσον νέμεσθε.” ταῦτα μὲν
ἐπεκηρυκεύσατο τοῖσι Δηλίοισι, μετὰ δὲ λιβανωτοῦ
τριηκόσια τάλαντα κατανήσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βωμοῦ ἐθυμίησε.
Δᾶτις μὲν δὴ ταῦτα ποιήσας ἔπλεε ἅμα τῷ στρατῷ ἐπὶ 98
τὴν Ερέτριαν πρῶτα, ἅμα ἀγόμενος καὶ Ἴωνας καὶ
Αἰολέας· μετὰ δὲ τοῦτον ἐνθεῦτεν ἐξαναχθέντα Δῆλος
ἐκινήθη, ὡς ἔλεγον Δήλιοι, καὶ πρῶτα καὶ ὕστατα μέχρι
ἐμεῦ σεισθεῖσα. καὶ τοῦτο μέν κου τέρας ἀνθρώποισι 5
τῶν μελλόντων ἔσεσθαι κακῶν ἔφαινε ὁ θεός. ἐπὶ γὰρ
Δαρείου τοῦ Ὑστάσπεος καὶ Ξέρξεω τοῦ Δαρείου καὶ
Αρταξέρξεω τοῦ Ξέρξεω, τριῶν τουτέων ἐπεξῆς γενεέων,
ἐγένετο πλέω κακὰ τῇ Ἑλλάδι ἢ ἐπὶ εἴκοσι ἄλλας
γενεὰς τὰς πρὸ Δαρείου γενομένας, τὰ μὲν ἀπὸ τῶν 10
Περσέων αὐτῇ γενόμενα, τὰ δὲ ἀπ' αὐτῶν τῶν κορυφαίων
περὶ τῆς ἀρχῆς πολεμεόντων. οὕτω οὐδὲν ἦν ἀεικὶς
κινηθῆναι Δῆλον τὸ πρὶν ἐοῦσαν ἀκίνητον. [καὶ ἐν
χρησμῷ ἦν γεγραμμένον περὶ αὐτῆς ὧδε·
κινήσω καὶ Δῆλον ἀκίνητόν περ ἐοῦσαν.]
δύναται δὲ κατὰ Ἑλλάδα γλῶσσαν ταῦτα τὰ οὐνόματα,
Δαρεῖος ἐρξείης, Ξέρξης ἀρήιος, 'Αρταξέρξης μέγας
ἀρήιος. τούτους μὲν δὴ τοὺς βασιλέας ὧδε ἂν ὀρθῶς
κατὰ γλῶσσαν τὴν σφετέρην Ἕλληνες καλέοιεν.
The Persians at Carystus and Eretria.
15
Οἱ δὲ βάρβαροι ὡς ἀπήειραν ἐκ τῆς Δήλου, προσ-99
ῖσχον πρὸς τὰς νήσους, ἐνθεῦτεν δὲ στρατιήν τε παρε-
λάμβανον καὶ ὁμήρους τῶν νησιωτέων παῖδας ἐλάμβανον.
ὡς δὲ περιπλέοντες τὰς νήσους προσέσχον καὶ ἐς Κάρυσ
τον, οὐ γὰρ δή σφι οἱ Καρύστιοι οὔτε ὁμήρους ἐδίδοσαν 5
οὔτε ἔφασαν ἐπὶ πόλιας ἀστυγείτονας στρατεύεσθαι,
48
HERODOTUS.
λέγοντες Ερέτριάν τε καὶ ᾿Αθήνας, ἐνθαῦτα τούτους
ἐπολιόρκεόν τε καὶ τὴν γῆν σφεων ἔκειρον, ἐς ὃ καὶ οἱ
Καρύστιοι παρέστησαν ἐς τῶν Περσέων τὴν γνώμην.
100 Ερετριέες δὲ πυνθανόμενοι τὴν στρατιὴν τὴν Περσικὴν
ἐπὶ σφέας ἐπιπλέουσαν 'Αθηναίων ἐδεήθησαν σφίσι
βοηθοὺς γενέσθαι. 'Αθηναῖοι δὲ οὐκ ἀπείπαντο τὴν
ἐπικουρίην, ἀλλὰ τοὺς τετρακισχιλίους τοὺς κληρουχέ
5οντας τῶν ἱπποβοτέων Χαλκιδέων τὴν χώρην, τουτους
σφι διδούσι τιμωρούς. τῶν δὲ Ερετριέων ἦν ἄρα οὐδὲν
ὑγιὲς βούλευμα, οἳ μετεπέμποντο μὲν 'Αθηναίους, ἐφρό-
νεον δὲ διφασίας ἰδέας. οἱ μὲν γὰρ αὐτῶν ἐβουλεύοντο
ἐκλιπεῖν τὴν πόλιν ἐς τὰ ἄκρα τῆς Εὐβοίης, ἄλλοι δὲ
10 αὐτῶν ἴδια κέρδεα προσδεκόμενοι παρὰ τοῦ Πέρσεω
οἴσεσθαι προδοσίην ἐσκευάζοντο. μαθὼν δὲ τούτων
ἑκάτερα ὡς εἶχε Αἰσχίνης ὁ Νόθωνος, ἐὼν τῶν Ἐρε-
τριέων τὰ πρῶτα, φράζει τοῖσι ἥκουσι Αθηναίων πάντα
τὰ παρεόντα σφι πρήγματα, προσεδέετό τε ἀπαλλάσσε
15 σθαί σφεας ἐς τὴν σφετέρην, ἵνα μὴ προσαπόλωνται.
οἱ δὲ Αθηναῖοι ταῦτα Αἰσχίνῃ συμβουλεύσαντι πείθον-
101 ται. καὶ οὗτοι μὲν διαβάντες ἐς Ωρωπὸν ἔσωζον σφέας
αὐτούς· οἱ δὲ Πέρσαι πλέοντες κατέσχον τὰς νέας τῆς
Ἐρετρικής χώρης κατὰ Τέμενος καὶ Χοιρέας καὶ Αἰγίλεα,
κατασχόντες δὲ ταῦτα τὰ χωρία αὐτίκα ἵππους τε ἐξ-
5 εβάλλοντο καὶ παρεσκευάζοντο ὡς προσοισόμενοι τοῖσι
ἐχθροῖσι. οἱ δὲ Ἐρετριέες ἐπεξελθεῖν μὲν καὶ μαχέσα-
σθαι οὐκ ἐποιεῦντο βουλήν, εἴ κως δὲ διαφυλάξαιεν τὰ
τείχεα, τούτου σφι πέρι ἔμελε, ἐπείτε ἐνίκα μὴ ἐκλιπεῖν
τὴν πόλιν. προσβολῆς δὲ γινομένης καρτερῆς πρὸς τὸ
10 τεῖχος ἔπιπτον ἐπὶ ἓξ ἡμέρας πολλοὶ μὲν ἀμφοτέρων·
τῇ δὲ ἑβδόμῃ Εὔφορβός τε ὁ ᾿Αλκιμάχου καὶ Φίλαγρος
ὁ Κυνέου, ἄνδρες τῶν ἀστῶν δόκιμοι, προδιδοῦσι τοῖσι
>
οι
Τ
Bishop.
49
BOOK VI.
Εν
Πέρσῃσι. οἱ δὲ ἐσελθόντες ἐς τὴν πόλιν τοῦτο μὲν τὰ
ἱρὰ συλήσαντες ἐνέπρησαν, ἀποτινύμενοι τῶν ἐν Σάρδισι
κατακαυθέντων ἱρῶν, τοῦτο δὲ τοὺς ἀνθρώπους ἀνδραπο- 15
δίσαντο κατὰ τὰς Δαρείου ἐντολάς.
Ο
Landing at Marathon; Miltiades and his Family.
Χειρωσάμενοι δὲ τὴν Ἐρέτριαν καὶ ἐπισχόντες ὀλί-102
γας ἡμέρας ἔπλεον ἐς γῆν τὴν ᾿Αττικήν, κατέργοντές τε
πολλὸν καὶ δοκέοντες ταὐτὰ τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους ποιήσειν
τὰ καὶ τοὺς Ἐρετριέας ἐποίησαν. καὶ ἦν γὰρ ὁ Μαρα
θὼν ἐπιτηδεότατον χωρίον τῆς ᾿Αττικῆς ἐνιππεῦσαι καὶ τ
ἀγχοτάτω τῆς Ἐρετρίης, ἐς τοῦτό σφι κατηγέετο Ἱππίης
ὁ Πεισιστράτου. Αθηναῖοι δὲ ὡς ἐπύθοντο ταῦτα, 10
ἐβοήθεον καὶ αὐτοὶ ἐς τὸν Μαραθῶνα. ἦγον δέ σφεας
στρατηγοὶ δέκα, τῶν ὁ δέκατος ἦν Μιλτιάδης, τοῦ τὸν
πατέρα Κίμωνα τον Στησαγόρεω κατέλαβε φυγεῖν ἐξ
Αθηνέων Πεισίστρατον τὸν Ἱπποκράτεος. καὶ αὐτῷ ὁ
φεύγοντι Ολυμπιάδα ἀνελέσθαι τεθρίππῳ συνέβη, καὶ
ταύτην μὲν τὴν νίκην ἀνελόμενόν μιν τὠυτὸ ἐξενείκα-
σθαι τῷ ὁμομητρίῳ ἀδελφεῷ Μιλτιάδῃ. μετὰ δὲ τῇ
ὑστέρῃ Ὀλυμπιάδι τῇσι αὐτῇσι ἵπποισι νικῶν παραδι-
δοῦ Πεισιστράτῳ ἀνακηρυχθῆναι, καὶ τὴν νίκην παρεὶς 10
τούτῳ κατῆλθε ἐπὶ τὰ ἑωυτοῦ ὑπόσπονδος. καί μιν
ἀνελόμενον τῇσι αὐτῇσι ἵπποισι ἄλλην Ὀλυμπιάδα
κατέλαβε ἀποθανεῖν ὑπὸ τῶν Πεισιστράτου παίδων,
οὐκέτι περιεόντος αὐτοῦ Πεισιστράτου· κτείνουσι δὲ
οὗτοί μιν κατὰ τὸ πρυτανήιον νυκτὸς ὑπείσαντες ἄνδρας. 15
τέθαπται δὲ Κίμων πρὸ τοῦ ἄστεος πέρην τῆς διὰ Κοίλης
καλεομένης ὁδοῦ· καταντίον δ᾽ αὐτοῦ αἱ ἵπποι τεθάφαται
αὗται αἱ τρεῖς Ὀλυμπιάδας ἀνελόμεναι. ἐποίησαν δὲ
καὶ ἄλλαι ἵπποι ἤδη τώυτὸ τοῦτο Εὐαγόρεω Λάκωνος,
3
50
HERODOTUS.
0
Ο
20 πλέω δὲ τουτέων οὐδαμαί. ὁ μὲν δὴ πρεσβύτερος τῶν
παίδων τῷ Κίμωνι Στησαγόρης ἦν τηνικαῦτα παρὰ τῷ
πάτρῳ Μιλτιάδῃ τρεφόμενος ἐν τῇ Χερσονήσῳ, ὁ δὲ
νεώτερος παρ' αὐτῷ Κίμωνι ἐν ᾿Αθήνῃσι, οὔνομα ἔχων
ἀπὸ τοῦ οἰκιστέω τῆς Χερσονήσου Μιλτιάδεω Μιλτι-
104 άδης. οὗτος δὴ ὦν τότε ὁ Μιλτιάδης ἥκων ἐκ τῆς
Χερσονήσου καὶ ἐκπεφευγὼς διπλόον θάνατον ἐστρα-
πήγες Αθηναίων. ἅμα μὲν γὰρ οἱ Φοίνικες αὐτὸν οἱ
ἐπιδιώξαντες μέχρι Ἴμβρου περὶ πολλοῦ ἐποιεῦντο λα-
5 βεῖν τε καὶ ἀναγαγεῖν παρὰ βασιλέα· ἅμα δὲ ἐκφυγόντα
τε τούτους καὶ ἀπικόμενον ἐς τὴν ἑωυτοῦ δοκέοντά τε
εἶναι ἐν σωτηρίῃ ἤδη, τὸ ἐνθεῦτέν μιν οἱ ἐχθροὶ ὑπο-
δεξάμενοι ὑπὸ δικαστήριον αὐτὸν ἀγαγόντες ἐδίωξαν
τυραννίδος τῆς ἐν Χερσονήσῳ. ἀποφυγὼν δὲ καὶ τού
10 τους στρατηγὸς οὕτω Αθηναίων ἀπεδέχθη, αἱρεθεὶς ὑπὸ
τοῦ δήμου.
Ο
Phidippides Sent to Sparta for Aid.
105 Καὶ πρῶτα μὲν ἐόντες ἔτι ἐν τῷ ἄστεῖ οἱ στρατηγοί
ἀποπέμπουσι ἐς Σπάρτην κήρυκα Φειδιππίδην ᾿Αθη
ναῖον μὲν ἄνδρα, ἄλλως δὲ ἡμεροδρόμην τε καὶ τοῦτο
μελετῶντα· τῷ δή, ὡς αὐτός τε ἔλεγε Φειδιππίδης καὶ
5' Αθηναίοισι ἀπήγγελλε, περὶ τὸ Παρθένιον ὄρος τὸ ὑπὲρ
τό
Τεγέης ὁ Πὰν περιπίπτει. βώσαντα δὲ τὸ οὔνομα τοῦ
Φειδιππίδεω τὸν Πᾶνα 'Αθηναίοισι κελεῦσαι ἀπαγ
γεῖλαι, δι' ὅ τι ἑωυτοῦ οὐδεμίαν ἐπιμελείην ποιεῦνται
ἐόντος εὐνόου Αθηναίοισι καὶ πολλαχῇ γενομένου σφι
10 ἤδη χρησίμου, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι καὶ ἐσομένου. καὶ ταῦτα μὲν
Αθηναίοι, καταστάντων σφι εὖ ἤδη τῶν πρηγμάτων,
πιστεύσαντες εἶναι ἀληθέα ἱδρύσαντο ὑπὸ τῇ ἀκροπόλι
Πανὸς ἱρόν, καὶ αὐτὸν ἀπὸ ταύτης τῆς ἀγγελίης θυσίῃσι
TO
BOOK VI.
51
ἐπετείοισι καὶ λαμπάδι ἱλάσκονται. τότε δὲ πεμφθείς 106
ὑπὸ τῶν στρατηγῶν ὁ Φειδιππίδης οὗτος, ὅτε πέρ οἱ ἔφη
καὶ τὸν Πᾶνα φανῆναι, δευτεραῖος ἐκ τοῦ ᾿Αθηναίων
ἄστεος ἦν ἐν Σπάρτῃ, ἀπικόμενος δὲ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἄρχοντας
ἔλεγε· “ ὦ Λακεδαιμόνιοι, Αθηναῖοι ὑμέων δέονται σφίσι 5
βοηθῆσαι καὶ μὴ περιιδεῖν πόλιν ἀρχαιοτάτην ἐν τοῖσι
Ἕλλησι δουλοσύνῃ περιπεσοῦσαν πρὸς ἀνδρῶν βαρ
βάρων· καὶ γὰρ νῦν Ερέτριά τε ἠνδραπόδισται καὶ
πόλι λογίμῳ ἡ Ἑλλὰς γέγονε ἀσθενεστέρη.” ὁ μὲν δή
σφι τὰ ἐντεταλμένα ἀπήγγελλε, τοῖσι δὲ ἕαδε μὲν βοη- 10
θέειν 'Αθηναίοισι, ἀδύνατα δέ σφι ἦν τὸ παραυτίκα
ποιέειν ταῦτα, οὐ βουλομένοισι λύειν τὸν νόμον· ἦν γὰρ
ἱσταμένου τοῦ μηνὸς εἰνάτη, εἰνάτῃ δὲ οὐκ ἐξελεύσεσθαι
ἔφασαν μὴ οὐ πλήρεος ἐόντος τοῦ κύκλου.
Hippias at Marathon.
Οὗτοι μέν νυν τὴν πανσέληνον ἔμενον. τοῖσι δὲ βαρ- 107
βάροισι κατηγέετο Ιππίης ὁ Πεισιστράτου ἐς τὸν Μα
ραθῶνα, τῆς παροιχομένης νυκτὸς ὄψιν ἰδὼν ἐν τῷ
ὕπνῳ τοιήνδε· ἐδόκεε ὁ Ἱππίης τῇ μητρὶ τῇ ἑωυτοῦ
συνευνηθῆναι. συνεβάλετο ὧν ἐκ τοῦ ὀνείρου κατελθὼν 5
ἐς τὰς ᾿Αθήνας καὶ ἀνασωσάμενος τὴν ἀρχὴν τελευτή-
σειν ἐν τῇ ἑωυτοῦ γηραιός. ἐκ μὲν δὴ τῆς ὄψιος συν-
εβάλετο ταῦτα, τότε δὲ κατηγεόμενος τοῦτο μὲν τὰ ἀν
δράποδα τὰ ἐξ Ερετρίης ἀπέβησε ἐς τὴν νῆσον τὴν
Στυρέων, καλεομένην δὲ Αἰγλείην, τοῦτο δὲ καταγομένας 10
ἐς τὸν Μαραθῶνα τὰς νέας ὅρμιζε οὗτος, ἐκβάντας τε
ἐς γῆν τοὺς βαρβάρους διέτασσε. καί οἱ ταῦτα διέποντι
ἐπῆλθε πταρεῖν τε καὶ βῆξαι μεζόνως ἢ ὡς ἐώθεε. οἷα
δέ οἱ πρεσβυτέρῳ ἐόντι τῶν ὀδόντων οἱ πλεῦνες ἐσεί-
οντο,
τούτων ὧν ἕνα τῶν ὀδόντων ἐκβάλλει ὑπὸ βίης 15
52
HERODOTUS.
οι
βήξας· ἐκπεσόντος δὲ ἐς τὴν ψάμμον αὐτοῦ ἐποιέετο
πολλὴν σπουδὴν ἐξευρεῖν. ὡς δὲ οὐκ ἐφαίνετό οἱ ὁ
ὀδών, ἀναστενάξας εἶπε πρὸς τοὺς παραστάτας· “ ἡ γῆ
ἥδε οὐκ ἡμετέρη ἐστί, οὐδέ μιν δυνησόμεθα ὑποχειρίην
20 ποιήσασθαι· ὁκόσον δέ τι μοι μέρος μετῆν, ὁ ἰδὼν
μετέχει.”.
108
The Plataeans March to the Assistance of the Athenians.
ή
Ἱππίης μὲν δὴ ταύτῃ τὴν ὄψιν συνεβάλετο ἐξεληλυ
θέναι. Αθηναίοισι δὲ τεταγμένοισι ἐν τεμένεϊ Ηρακλέος
ἐπῆλθον βοηθέοντες Πλαταιέες πανδημεί· καὶ γὰρ καὶ
ἐδεδώκεσαν σφέας αὐτοὺς τοῖσι Αθηναίοισι οἱ Πλα-
5 ταιέες, καὶ πόνους ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι συχνούς
ἤδη ἀναιρέοντο· ἔδοσαν δὲ ὧδε. πιεζεύμενοι ὑπὸ Θη-
βαίων οἱ Πλαταιέες ἐδίδοσαν πρῶτα παρατυχοῦσι Κλεο-
μένει τε τῷ ᾿Αναξανδρίδεω καὶ Λακεδαιμονίοισι σφέας
αὐτούς. οἱ δὲ οὐ δεκόμενοι ἔλεγόν σφι τάδε· “ ἡμεῖς
10 μὲν ἑκαστέρω τε οἰκέομεν, καὶ ὑμῖν τοιήδε τις γίνοιτ' ἂν
ἐπικουρίη ψυχρή· φθαίητε γὰρ ἂν πολλάκις ἐξανδραπο
δισθέντες ἤ τινα πυθέσθαι ἡμέων. συμβουλεύομεν δὲ
ὑμῖν δοῦναι ὑμέας αὐτοὺς ᾿Αθηναίοισι, πλησιοχώροισί
τε ἀνδράσι καὶ τιμωρέειν ἐοῦσι οὐ κακοῖσι.” ταῦτα
15 συνεβούλευον οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι οὐ κατὰ τὴν εὐνοίην
οὕτω τῶν Πλαταιέων ὡς βουλόμενοι τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους
ἔχειν πόνους συνεστεῶτας Βοιωτοῖσι. Λακεδαιμόνιοι
μέν νυν Πλαταιεῦσι ταῦτα συνεβούλευον, οἱ δὲ οὐκ
ἠπίστησαν, ἀλλ᾽ Αθηναίων ἱρὰ ποιεύντων τοῖσι δυώδεκα
20 θεοῖσι, ἱκέται ἱζόμενοι ἐπὶ τὸν βωμὸν ἐδίδοσαν σφέας
αὐτούς. Θηβαῖοι δὲ πυθόμενοι ταῦτα ἐστρατεύοντο
ἐπὶ τοὺς Πλαταιέας, Αθηναῖοι δέ σφι ἐβοήθεον. μελ-
λέντων δὲ συνάπτειν μάχην Κορίνθιοι οὐ περιεῖδον,
W..
BOOK VI.
53
παρατυχόντες δὲ καὶ καταλλάξαντες ἐπιτρεψάντων
ἀμφοτέρων οὔρισαν τὴν χώρην ἐπὶ τοισίδε, ἐᾶν Θηβαί-25
ους Βοιωτῶν τοὺς μὴ βουλομένους ἐς Βοιωτούς τελέειν.
Κορίνθιοι μὲν δὴ ταῦτα γνόντες ἀπαλλάσσοντο, ᾿Αθη-
ναίοισι δὲ ἀπιοῦσι ἐπεθήκαντο Βοιωτοί, ἐπιθέμενοι δὲ
ἑσσώθησαν τῇ μάχῃ. ὑπερβάντες δὲ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι τοὺς
οἱ Κορίνθιοι ἔθηκαν Πλαταιεῦσι εἶναι οὔρους, τούτους 30
ὑπερβάντες τὸν ᾿Ασωπὸν αὐτὸν ἐποιήσαντο οὗρον
Θηβαίοισι πρὸς Πλαταιέας εἶναι καὶ Ὑσιάς. ἔδοσαν
μὲν δὴ οἱ Πλαταιέες σφέας αὐτοὺς ᾿Αθηναίοισι τρόπῳ
τῷ εἰρημένῳ, ἧκον δὲ τότε ἐς Μαραθῶνα βοηθέοντες.
Miltiades and Callimachus.
Τοῖσι δὲ ᾽Αθηναίων στρατηγοῖσι ἐγίνοντο δίχα αἱ 109
γνῶμαι, τῶν μὲν οὐκ ἐώντων συμβαλεῖν (ὀλίγους γὰρ
εἶναι στρατιῇ τῇ Μήδων συμβάλλειν), τῶν δὲ καὶ Μιλ
τιάδεω κελευόντων. ὡς δὲ δίχα τε ἐγίνοντο καὶ ἐνίκα
ἡ χείρων τῶν γνωμέων, ἐνθαῦτα, ἦν γὰρ ἑνδέκατος 5
ψηφιδοφόρος ὁ τῷ κυάμῳ λαχὼν ᾿Αθηναίων πολεμαρ
χέειν (τὸ παλαιὸν γὰρ 'Αθηναῖοι ὁμόψηφον τὸν πολέ
μαρχον ἐποιεῦντο τοῖσι στρατηγοῖσι), ἦν δὲ τότε πολέ
μαρχος Καλλίμαχος Αφιδναῖος· πρὸς τοῦτον ἐλθὼν
Μιλτιάδης ἔλεγε τάδε· “ ἐν σοὶ νῦν, Καλλίμαχε, ἐστὶ ἢ 10
καταδουλῶσαι ᾿Αθήνας ἢ ἐλευθέρας ποιήσαντα μνημό
συνα λιπέσθαι ἐς τὸν ἅπαντα ἀνθρώπων βίον οἷα οὐδὲ
Αρμόδιός τε καὶ ᾿Αριστογείτων [λείπουσι]. νῦν γὰρ δὴ
ἐξ οὗ ἐγένοντο 'Αθηναῖοι ἐς κίνδυνον ἥκουσι μέγιστον,
καὶ ἢν μέν γε ὑποκύψωσι τοῖσι Μήδοισι, δέδοκται τὰ 15
πείσονται παραδεδομένοι Ἱππίῃ, ἢν δὲ περιγένηται αὕτη
ἡ πόλις, οἵη τε ἐστὶ πρώτη τῶν Ἑλληνίδων πολίων
γενέσθαι. κῶς ὧν δὴ ταῦτα οἷά τε ἐστὶ γενέσθαι, καὶ
54
HERODOTUS.
κῶς ἐς σέ τοι τούτων ἀνήκει τῶν πρηγμάτων τὸ κῦρος
20 ἔχειν, νῦν ἔρχομαι φράσων. ἡμέων τῶν στρατηγῶν ἐόν-
των δέκα δίχα γίνονται αἱ γνῶμαι, τῶν μὲν κελευόντων,
τῶν δὲ οὔ, συμβάλλειν. ἢν μέν νυν μὴ συμβάλωμεν,
ἔλπομαί τινα στάσιν μεγάλην διασείσειν ἐμπεσοῦσαν
τὰ ᾿Αθηναίων φρονήματα ὥστε μηδίσαι· ἦν δὲ συμ-
25 βάλωμεν πρίν τι καὶ σαθρὸν ᾿Αθηναίων μετεξετέροισι
ἐγγενέσθαι, θεῶν τὰ ἴσα νεμόντων οἷοί τε εἰμὲν περι-
γενέσθαι τῇ συμβολῇ. ταῦτα ὦν πάντα ἐς σὲ νῦν
τείνει καὶ ἐκ σέο ἤρτηται. ἦν γὰρ σὺ γνώμῃ τῇ ἐμῇ
προσθῇ, ἔστι τοι πατρίς τε ἐλευθέρη καὶ πόλις πρώτη
30 τῶν ἐν τῇ Ἑλλάδι· ἢν δὲ τῶν ἀποσπευδόντων τὴν συμ-
βολὴν ὅλῃ, ὑπάρξει τοι τῶν ἐγὼ κατέλεξα ἀγαθῶν τὰ
110 ἐναντία.” ταῦτα λέγων ὁ Μιλτιάδης προσκτᾶται τὸν
Καλλίμαχον· προσγενομένης δὲ τοῦ πολεμάρχου τῆς
γνώμης ἐκεκύρωτο συμβάλλειν. μετὰ δὲ οἱ στρατηγοί
τῶν ἡ γνώμη ἔφερε συμβάλλειν, ὡς ἑκάστου αὐτῶν
5 ἐγίνετο πρυτανηίη τῆς ἡμέρης, Μιλτιάδῃ παρεδίδοσαν
ὁ δὲ δεκόμενος οὔτι κω συμβολὴν ἐποιέετο, πρίν γε δὴ
αὐτοῦ πρυτανηίη ἐγένετο.
111
0
του
Preparations for Engagement; Battle of Marathon.
Ὡς δὲ ἐς ἐκεῖνον περιῆλθε, ἐνθαῦτα δὴ ἐτάσσοντο
ὧδε οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ὡς συμβαλέοντες. τοῦ μὲν δεξιοῦ
κέρεος ἡγέετο ὁ πολέμαρχος Καλλίμαχος· ὁ γὰρ νόμος
τότε εἶχε οὕτω τοῖσι Αθηναίοισι, τὸν πολέμαρχον ἔχειν
5 κέρας τὸ δεξιόν· ἡγεομένου δὲ τούτου ἐξεδέκοντο ὡς
ἀριθμέοντο αι φυλαί ἐχόμεναι ἀλληλέων, τελευταῖοι δὲ
ἐτάσσοντο ἔχοντες τὸ εὐώνυμον κέρας Πλαταιέες. ἀπὸ
ταύτης γάρ σφι τῆς μάχης, Αθηναίων θυσίας ἀναγόν
των ἐς τὰς πανηγύριας τὰς ἐν τῇσι πεντετηρίσι γινο-
BOOK VI.
55
1
Ο
μένας, κατεύχεται ὁ κῆρυξ ὁ ᾿Αθηναῖος ἅμα τε ᾿Αθηναί- 10
οισι λέγων γίνεσθαι τὰ ἀγαθὰ καὶ Πλαταιεῦσι. τότε δὲ
τασσομένων τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ἐν τῷ Μαραθῶνι ἐγένετο
τοιόνδε τι· τὸ στρατόπεδον ἐξισούμενον τῷ Μηδικῷ
στρατοπέδῳ, τὸ μὲν αὐτοῦ μέσον ἐγίνετο ἐπὶ τάξιας
ὀλίγας, καὶ ταύτῃ ἦν ἀσθενέστατον τὸ στρατόπεδον, τὸ 15
δὲ κέρας ἑκάτερον ἔρρωτο πλήθεϊ. ὡς δέ σφι διετέτακτο 112
καὶ τὰ σφάγια ἐγίνετο καλά, ἐνθαῦτα ὡς ἀπείθησαν οἱ
Αθηναῖοι, δρόμῳ ἵεντο ἐς τοὺς βαρβάρους. ἦσαν δὲ
στάδιοι οὐκ ἐλάσσονες τὸ μεταίχμιον αὐτῶν ἢ ὀκτώ.
οἱ δὲ Πέρσαι ὁρέοντες δρόμῳ ἐπιόντας παρεσκευάζοντο 5
ὡς δεξόμενοι, μανίην τε τοῖσι Αθηναίοισι ἐπέφερον καὶ
πάγχυ ὀλεθρίην, ὁρέοντες αὐτοὺς ὀλίγους καὶ τούτους
δρόμῳ ἐπειγομένους, οὔτε ἵππου ὑπαρχούσης σφι οὔτε
τοξευμάτων. ταῦτα μέν νυν οἱ βάρβαροι κατείκαζον·
Αθηναῖοι δὲ ἐπείτε ἀθρόοι προσέμιξαν τοῖσι βαρβάροι- 10
σι, ἐμάχοντο ἀξίως λόγου. πρῶτοι μὲν γὰρ Ἑλλήνων
πάντων τῶν ἡμεῖς ἴδμεν δρόμῳ ἐς πολεμίους ἐχρήσαντο,
πρῶτοι δὲ ἀνέσχοντο ἐσθῆτά τε Μηδικὴν ὁρέοντες καὶ
τοὺς ἄνδρας ταύτην ἠσθημένους· τέως δὲ ἦν τοῖσι Ελ-
λησι καὶ τὸ οὔνομα τὸ Μήδων φόβος ἀκοῦσαι. μαχομέ- 118
νων δὲ ἐν τῷ Μαραθῶνι χρόνος ἐγίνετο πολλός. καὶ τὸ
μὲν μέσον τοῦ στρατοπέδου ἐνίκων οἱ βάρβαροι, τῇ
Πέρσαι τε αὐτοὶ καὶ Σάκαι ἐτετάχατο· κατὰ τοῦτο μὲν
δὴ ἐνίκων οἱ βάρβαροι καὶ ῥήξαντες ἐδίωκον ἐς τὴν 5
μεσόγαιαν, τὸ δὲ κέρας ἑκάτερον ἐνίκων ᾿Αθηναῖοί τε
και Πλαταιέες. νικῶντες δὲ τὸ μὲν τετραμμένον τῶν
βαρβάρων φεύγειν ἔων, τοῖσι δὲ τὸ μέσον ῥήξασι αὐτῶν
συναγαγόντες τὰ κέρεα ἀμφότερα ἐμάχοντο, καὶ ἐνίκων
Αθηναῖοι. φεύγουσι δὲ τοῖσι Πέρσῃσι εἵποντο κόπτον- 10
τες, ἐς ὃ ἐς τὴν θάλασσαν ἀπικόμενοι πῦρ τε αἴτεον καὶ
παν
56
HERODOTUS.
114 ἐπελαμβάνοντο τῶν νεῶν. καὶ τοῦτο μὲν ἐν τούτῳ τῷ
πόνῳ ὁ πολέμαρχος Καλλίμαχος διαφθείρεται, ἀνὴρ γενό-
μενος ἀγαθός, ἀπὸ δ᾽ ἔθανε τῶν στρατηγῶν Στησίλεως ἑ
Θρασύλεω· τοῦτο δὲ Κυνέγειρος ὁ Εὐφορίωνος ἐνθαῦτα
ὃ ἐπιλαμβανόμενος τῶν ἀφλάστων νεός, τὴν χεῖρα ἀποκο-
πεὶς πελέκει πίπτει, τοῦτο δὲ ἄλλοι 'Αθηναίων πολλοί
τε καὶ ὀνομαστοί.
115
Persian Fleet before Athens; Prodigies.
ΤΟ
Ἑπτὰ μὲν δὴ τῶν νεῶν ἐπεκράτησαν τρόπῳ τοιῷδε
Αθηναῖοι· τῇσι δὲ λοιπῇσι οἱ βάρβαροι ἐξανακρουσά-
μενοι, καὶ ἀναλαβόντες ἐκ τῆς νήσου ἐν τῇ ἔλιπον τὰ
ἐξ Ερετρίης ἀνδράποδα, περιέπλεον Σούνιον, βουλόμενοι
5 φθῆναι τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους ἀπικόμενοι ἐς τὸ ἄστυ. αἰτίην
δὲ ἔσχε 'Αθηναίοισι ἐξ ᾿Αλκμεωνιδέων μηχανῆς αὐτοὺς
ταῦτα ἐπινοηθῆναι· τούτους γὰρ συνθεμένους τοῖσι
Πέρσῃσι ἀναδέξαι ἀσπίδα ἐοῦσι ἤδη ἐν τῇσι νηυσί.
116 οὗτοι μὲν δὴ περιέπλεον Σούνιον· 'Αθηναῖοι δὲ ὡς ποδῶν
εἶχον τάχιστα ἐβοήθεον ἐς τὸ ἄστυ, καὶ ἔφθησάν τε
ἀπικόμενοι πρὶν ἢ τοὺς βαρβάρους ἥκειν, καὶ ἐστρατο-
πεδεύσαντο ἀπιγμένοι ἐξ Ηρακλείου τοῦ ἐν Μαραθῶνι
5 ἐν ἄλλῳ Ηρακλείῳ τῷ ἐν Κυνοσάργεϊ. οἱ δὲ βάρβαροι
τῇσι νηυσὶ ὑπεραιωρηθέντες Φαλήρου, τοῦτο γὰρ ἦν
ἐπίνειον τότε τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, ὑπὲρ τούτου ανακωχεύ.
σαντες τὰς νέας ἀπέπλεον ὀπίσω ἐς τὴν Ασίην.
117 Ἐν ταύτῃ τῇ ἐν Μαραθῶνι μάχῃ ἀπέθανον τῶν βαρ-
βάρων κατὰ ἑξακισχιλίους καὶ τετρακοσίους ἄνδρας,
Αθηναίων δὲ ἑκατὸν καὶ ἐνενήκοντα καὶ δύο. ἔπεσον
μὲν ἀμφοτέρων τοσοῦτοι. συνήνεικε δὲ αὐτόθι θῶυμα
5 γενέσθαι τοιόνδε, Αθηναῖον ἄνδρα Επίζηλον τὸν Κου
φαγόρεω ἐν τῇ συστάσι μαχόμενόν τε καὶ ἄνδρα γινό-
BOOK VI.
57
& told a story
μενον ἀγαθὸν τῶν ὀμμάτων στερηθῆναι οὔτε πληγέντα
οὐδὲν τοῦ σώματος οὔτε βληθέντα, καὶ τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς
ζόης διατελέειν ἀπὸ τούτου τοῦ χρόνου ἐόντα τυφλόν.
λέγειν δὲ αὐτὸν περὶ τοῦ πάθεος ἤκουσα τοιόνδε τινὰ 10
λόγον, ἄνδρα οἱ δοκέειν ὁπλίτην ἀντιστῆναι μέγαν, τοῦ
τὸ γένειον τὴν ἀσπίδα πᾶσαν σκιάζειν· τὸ δὲ φάσμα
τοῦτο ἑωυτὸν μὲν παρεξελθεῖν, τὸν δὲ ἑωυτοῦ παρα-
στάτην ἀποκτεῖναι. ταῦτα μὲν δὴ Ἐπίζηλον ἐπυθόμην
λέγειν.
Datis Returns to Asia; Fate of the Eretrians.
τό
Anfe
15
Δᾶτις δὲ πορευόμενος ἅμα τῷ στρατῷ ἐς τὴν ᾿Ασίην, 118
ἐπείτε ἐγένετο ἐν Μυκόνῳ, εἶδε ὄψιν ἐν τῷ ὕπνῳ. καὶ
ἥτις μὲν ἦν ἡ ὄψις, οὐ λέγεται· ὁ δέ, ὡς ἡμέρη τάχιστα
ἐπέλαμψε, ζήτησιν ἐποιέετο τῶν νεῶν, εὑρὼν δὲ ἐν νηὶ
Φοινίσσῃ ἄγαλμα Απόλλωνος κεχρυσωμένον ἐπυνθάνε- 5
το ὁκόθεν σεσυλημένον εἴη, πυθόμενος δὲ ἐξ οὗ ἦν ἱροῦ,
ἔπλεε τῇ ἑωυτοῦ νηὶ ἐς Δῆλον· καὶ ἀπίκατο γὰρ τήνι
καῦτα οἱ Δήλιοι ὀπίσω ἐς τὴν νῆσον, κατατίθεταί τε ἐς
τὸ ἱρὸν τὸ ἄγαλμα καὶ ἐντέλλεται τοῖσι Δ., Χίοισι ἀπα
γαγεῖν τὸ ἄγαλμα ἐς Δήλιον τὸ Θηβαίων· τὸ δ᾽ ἔστι 10
ἐπὶ θαλάσσῃ Χαλκίδος καταντίον. Δᾶτις, μὲν δὴ ταῦτα
ἐντειλάμενος ἀπέπλεε, τὸν δὲ ἀνδριάντα τοῦτον Δήλιοι
οὐκ ἀπήγαγον, ἀλλά μιν δι' ἐτέων εἴκοσι Θηβαῖοι αὐτοὶ
ἐκ θεοπροπίου ἐκομίσαντο ἐπὶ Δήλιον. τοὺς δὲ τῶν 119
Ερετριέων ἀνδραποδισμένους Δᾶτίς τε καὶ ᾿Αρταφέρνης,
ὡς προσέσχον ἐς τὴν ᾿Ασίην πλέοντες, ἀνήγαγον ἐς
Σοῦσα. βασιλεὺς δὲ Δαρεῖος, πρὶν μὲν αἰχμαλώτους
γενέσθαι τοὺς Ερετριέας, ἐνεῖχέ σφι δεινὸν χόλον, οἷα 5
ἀρξάντων ἀδικίης προτέρων τῶν Ἐρετριέων· ἐπείτε δὲ
εἶδέ σφεας ἀπαχθέντας παρ' ἑωυτὸν καὶ ἑωυτῷ ὑποχει
Sealy dick
3*
58
HERODOTUS.
ρίους ἐόντας, ἐποίησε κακὸν ἄλλο οὐδέν, ἀλλά σφεας
τῆς Κισσίης χώρης κατοίκισε ἐν σταθμῷ ἑωι·οῦ τῷ
10 οὔνομά ἐστι Αρδέρικκα, ἀπὸ μὲν Σούσων δέκα καὶ
διηκοσίους σταδίους ἀπέχοντι, τεσσεράκοντα δὲ ἀπὸ
τοῦ φρέατος τὸ παρέχεται τριφασίας ἰδέας· καὶ γὰρ
ἄσφαλτον καὶ ἅλας καὶ ἔλαιον ἀρύσσονται ἐξ αὐτοῦ
τρόπῳ τοιῷδε. ἀντλέεται μὲν κηλωνηίῳ, ἀντὶ δὲ γαυλοῦ
15 ἥμισυ ἀσκοῦ οἱ προσδέδεται· ὑποτύψας δὲ τούτῳ
ἀντλέει καὶ ἔπειτα ἐγχέει ἐς δεξαμενήν· ἐκ δὲ ταύτης ἐς
ἄλλο διαχεόμενον τράπεται τριφασίας ὁδούς. καὶ ἡ
μὲν ἄσφαλτος καὶ οἱ ἅλες πήγνυνται παραυτίκα· τὸ δὲ
ἔλαιον οἱ Πέρσαι καλέουσι τοῦτο ῥαδινάκην· ἔστι δὲ
20 μέλαν καὶ ὀδμὴν παρεχόμενον βαρέαν. ἐνθαῦτα τοὺς
Ἐρετριέας κατοίκισε βασιλεὺς Δαρεῖος, οἳ καὶ μέχρι
ἐμέο εἶχον τὴν χώρην ταύτην, φυλάσσοντες τὴν ἀρχαίην
γλῶσσαν. τὰ μὲν δὴ περὶ Ἐρετριέας ἔσχε οὕτω.
Spartans at Athens; Charges against the Alcmaeonidae.
120 Λακεδαιμονίων δὲ ἧκον ἐς τὰς ᾿Αθήνας δισχίλιοι μετὰ
τὴν πανσέληνον, ἔχοντες σπουδὴν πολλὴν καταλαβεῖν,
οὕτω ὥστε τριταῖοι ἐκ Σπάρτης ἐγένοντο ἐν τῇ ᾿Αττικῇ.
ὕστεροι δὲ ἀπικόμενοι τῆς συμβολῆς ἱμείροντο ὅμως
5 θεήσασθαι τοὺς Μήδους· ἐλθόντες δὲ ἐς τὸν Μαραθῶνα
ἐθεήσαντο. μετὰ δὲ αἰνέοντες ᾿Αθηναίους καὶ τὸ ἔργον
αὐτῶν ἀπαλλάσσοντο ὀπίσω.
121 Θδυμα δέ μοι καὶ οὐκ ἐνδέκομαι τὸν λέγον, Αλκμε-
ωνίδας ἄν κοτε ἀναδέξαι Πέρσῃσι ἐκ συνθήματος ἀσπί-
δα, βουλομένους ὑπὸ βαρβάροισί τε εἶναι ᾿Αθηναίους
καὶ ὑπὸ Ἱππίῃ· οἵτινες μᾶλλον ἢ ὁμοίως Καλλίῃ τῷ
ἡ Φαινίππου, Ἱππονίκου δὲ πατρί, φαίνονται μισοτύραννοι
εύντες. Καλλίης τε γὰρ μοῦνος Αθηναίων ἁπάντων
BOOK VI.
59
ἐτόλμα, ὅκως Πεισίστρατος ἐκπέσοι ἐκ τῶν ᾿Αθηνέων,
τὰ χρήματα αὐτοῦ κηρυσσόμενα ὑπὸ τοῦ δημοσίου
ὠνέεσθαι, καὶ τἆλλα τὰ ἔχθιστα ἐς αὐτὸν πάντα ἐμη-
χανατο· [Καλλίεω δὲ τούτου ἄξιον πολλαχοῦ μνήμην 122
ἐστὶ πάντα τινὰ ἔχειν. τοῦτο μὲν γὰρ τὰ προλελεγμέ-
να, ὡς ἀνὴρ ἄκρος ἐλευθερῶν τὴν πατρίδα· τοῦτο δὲ τὰ
ἐν Ὀλυμπίῃ ἐποίησε· ἵππῳ νικήσας, τεθρίππῳ δὲ δεύ-
τερος γενόμενος, Πύθια δὲ πρότερον ἀνελόμενος, ἐφανε- 5
ρώθη ἐς τοὺς Ἕλληνας πάντας δαπάνῃσι μεγίστῃσι.
τοῦτο δὲ κατὰ τὰς ἑωυτοῦ θυγατέρας εούσας τρεῖς οἷός
τις ἀνὴρ ἐγένετο· ἐπειδὴ γὰρ ἐγίνοντο γάμου ὡραῖαι,
ἔδωκέ σφι δωρεὴν μεγαλοπρεπεστάτην ἐκείνῃσί τε ἐχα-
ρίσατο· ἐκ γὰρ πάντων τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων τὸν ἑκάστη 10
ἐθέλοι ἄνδρα ἑωυτῇ ἐκλέξασθαι, ἔδωκε τούτῳ τῷ ἀνδρί.]
καὶ οἱ ᾿Αλκμεωνίδαι ὁμοίως ἢ οὐδὲν ἧσσον τούτου ἦσαν 123
μισοτύραννοι. θῶυμα ὧν μοι καὶ οὐ προσίεμαι τὴν
διαβολὴν τούτους γε ἀναδέξαι ἀσπίδα, οἵτινες ἔφευγόν
τε τὸν πάντα χρόνον τοὺς τυράννους, ἐκ μηχανῆς τε τῆς
τούτων ἐξέλιπον Πεισιστρατίδαι τὴν τυραννίδα. καὶ 5
οὕτω τὰς ᾿Αθήνας οὗτοι ἦσαν οἱ ἐλευθερώσαντες πολλῷ
μᾶλλον ἢ περ ῾Αρμόδιός τε καὶ ᾿Αριστογείτων, ὡς ἐγὼ
κρίνω. οἱ μὲν γὰρ ἐξηγρίωσαν τοὺς ὑπολοίπους Πεισι-
στρατιδέων Ιππαρχον ἀποκτείναντες, οὐδέ τι μᾶλλον
ἔπαυσαν [τοὺς λοιποὺς] τυραννεύοντας· Αλκμεωνίδαι 10
δὲ ἐμφανέως ἠλευθέρωσαν, εἰ δὴ οὗτοί γε ἀληθέως ἦσαν
οἱ τὴν Πυθίην ἀναπείσαντες προσημαίνειν Λακεδαι-
μονίοισι ἐλευθεροῦν τὰς ᾿Αθήνας, ὥς μοι πρότερον δεδή-
λωται. ἀλλὰ γὰρ ἴσως τι ἐπιμεμφόμενοι Αθηναίων τῷ 124
δήμῳ προεδίδοσαν τὴν πατρίδα. οὐ μὲν ὢν ἦσαν σφεων
ἄλλοι δοκιμώτεροι ἔν γε Αθηναίοισι ἄνδρες, οὐδ᾽ οἳ
μᾶλλον ἐτετιμέατο. οὕτω οὐδὲ λόγος αἱρέει ἀναδεχθῆναι
GO
HERODOTUS.
5 ἔκ γε ἂν τούτων ἀσπίδα ἐπὶ τοιούτῳ λόγῳ. ἀνεδέχθη
μὲν γὰρ ἀσπίς, καὶ τοῦτο οὐκ ἔστι ἄλλως εἰπεῖν· ἐγένετο
γάρ· ὃς μέντοι ἦν ὁ ἀναδέξας, οὐκ ἔχω προσωτέρω εἰπεῖν
τούτων.
Ο
How Alcmaeon Became Wealthy.
125 Οἱ δὲ 'Αλκμεωνίδαι ἦσαν μὲν καὶ τὰ ἀνέκαθεν λαμ
προὶ ἐν τῇσι ᾿Αθήνῃσι, ἀπὸ δὲ ᾿Αλκμέωνος καὶ αὖτις
Μεγακλέος ἐγένοντο καὶ κάρτα λαμπροί. τοῦτο μὲν
γὰρ ᾿Αλκμέων ὁ Μεγακλέος τοῖσι ἐκ Σαρδίων Λυδοῖσι
5 παρὰ Κροίσου ἀπικνεομένοισι ἐπὶ τὸ χρηστήριον τὸ ἐν
Δελφοῖσι συμπρήκτωρ τε ἐγίνετο καὶ συνελάμβανε προ-
θύμως, καί μιν Κροῖσος πυθόμενος τῶν Λυδῶν τῶν ἐς τὰ
χρηστήρια φοιτεόντων ἑωυτὸν εὖ ποιέειν μεταπέμπεται
ἐς Σάρδις, ἀπικόμενον δὲ δωρέεται χρυσῷ τὸν ἂν δύνηται
10 τῷ ἑωυτοῦ σώματι ἐξενείκασθαι ἐσάπαξ. ὁ δὲ Αλκμέων
πρὸς τὴν δωρεὴν ἐοῦσαν τοιαύτην τοιάδε ἐπιτηδεύσας
προσέφερε. ἐνδὺς κιθῶνα μέγαν καὶ κόλπον βαθὺν και
ταλιπόμενος τοῦ κιθῶνος, κοθόρνους τοὺς εὕρισκε εύρυ-
τάτους ἐόντας ὑποδησάμενος, ἤιε ἐς τὸν θησαυρὸν ἐς τόν
15 οἱ κατηγέοντο. ἐσπεσὼν δὲ ἐς σωρὸν ψήγματος πρῶτον
μὲν παρέσαξε παρὰ τὰς κνήμας τοῦ χρυσοῦ ὅσον ἐχώρεον
οἱ κόθορνοι, μετὰ δὲ τὸν κόλπον πάντα πλησάμενος τοῦ
χρυσοῦ καὶ ἐς τὰς τρίχας τῆς κεφαλῆς διαπάσας τοῦ
ψήγματος, καὶ ἄλλο λαβὼν ἐς τὸ στόμα, ἐξήιε ἐκ τοῦ
20 θησαυροῦ ἕλκων μὲν μόγις τοὺς κοθόρνους, παντὶ δέ
τε
οἰκὼς μᾶλλον ἢ ἀνθρώπῳ· τοῦ τό τε στόμα ἐβέβυστο
καὶ πάντα ἐξώγκωτο. ἰδόντα δὲ τὸν Κροῖσον γέλως
ἐσῆλθε, καί οἱ πάντα τε ἐκεῖνα διδοῖ καὶ πρὸς ἑτέροισι
μιν δωρέεται οὐκ ἐλάσσοσι ἐκείνων. οὕτω μὲν ἐπλού.
25 τησε ἡ οἰκίη αὕτη μεγάλως, καὶ ὁ ᾿Αλκμέων οὗτος οὕτω
τεθριπποτροφήσας Ολυμπιάδα ἀναιρέεται.
0
BOOK VI.
61
Ο
The Wooing of Agarista.
Μετὰ δὲ γενεῇ δευτέρῃ ὕστερον Κλεισθένης μιν ὁ 126
Σικυώνιος τύραννος ἐξήειρε, ὥστε πολλῷ ὀνομαστοτέρην
γενέσθαι ἐν τοῖσι "Ελλησι ἢ πρότερον ἦν. Κλεισθένεϊ
γὰρ τῷ ᾿Αριστωνύμου τοῦ Μύρωνος τοῦ ᾿Ανδρέω γίνεται
θυγάτηρ τῇ οὔνομα ἦν ᾿Αγαρίστη. ταύτην ἠθέλησε, 5
Ἑλλήνων ἁπάντων ἐξευρὼν τὸν ἄριστον, τούτῳ γυναῖκα
προσθεῖναι. Ὀλυμπίων ὧν ἐόντων καὶ νικῶν ἐν αὐτοῖσι
τεθρίππῳ ὁ Κλεισθένης κήρυγμα ἐποιήσατο, ὅστις Ελ-
λήνων ἑωυτὸν ἀξιοῖ Κλεισθένεος γαμβρόν γενέσθαι,
ἥκειν ἐς ἑξηκοστὴν ἡμέρην ἢ καὶ πρότερον ἐς Σικυώνα 10
ὡς κυρώσοντος Κλεισθένεος τὸν γάμον ἐν ἐνιαυτῷ, ἀπὸ
τῆς ἑξηκοστῆς ἀρξαμένου ἡμέρης. ἐνθαῦτα Ἑλλήνων
ὅσοι σφίσι τε αὐτοῖσι ἦσαν καὶ πάτρῃ ἐξωγκωμένοι,
ἐφοίτεον μνηστήρες· τοῖσι Κλεισθένης καὶ δρόμον καὶ
παλαίστρην ποιησάμενος ἐπ᾿ αὐτῷ τούτῳ εἶχε. ἀπὸ 127
μὲν δὴ Ἰταλίης ἦλθε Σμινδυρίδης ὁ Ἱπποκράτεος Συ
βαρίτης, ὃς ἐπὶ πλεῖστον δὴ χλιδῆς εἰς ἀνὴρ ἀπίκετο
(ἡ δὲ Σύβαρις ήκμαζε τοῦτον τὸν χρόνον μάλιστα), καὶ
Σιρίτης Δάμασος ᾿Αμύριος τοῦ σοφοῦ λεγομένου παῖς. 5
οὗτοι μὲν ἀπὸ Ἰταλίης ἦλθον, ἐκ δὲ τοῦ κόλπου τοῦ
Ιονίου Αμφίμνηστος Ἐπιστρόφου Ἐπιδάμνιος· οὗτος
δὲ ἐκ τοῦ Ἰονίου κόλπου. Αἰτωλὸς δὲ ἦλθε Τιτόρμου
τοῦ ὑπερφύντος τε Ἕλληνας ἰσχύι καὶ φυγόντος ἀνθρώ-
πους ἐς τὰς ἐσχατιὰς τῆς Αἰτωλίδος χώρης, τούτου τοῦ 10
Τιτόρμου ἀδελφὸς Μάλης. ἀπὸ δὲ Πελοποννήσου
Φείδωνος τοῦ ᾿Αργείων τυράννου παῖς Λεωκήδης, Φεί-
δωνος δὲ τοῦ τὰ μέτρα ποιήσαντος Πελοποννησίοισι καὶ
ὑβρίσαντος μέγιστα δὴ Ἑλλήνων ἁπάντων, ὃς ἐξανα-
στήσας τοὺς Ηλείων ἀγωνοθέτας αὐτὸς τὸν ἐν Ὀλυμπίῃ 15
62
HERODOTUS.
ἀγῶνα ἔθηκε· τούτου τε δὴ παῖς καὶ ᾿Αμίαντος Λυκούρ
γου Αρκὰς ἐκ Τραπεζοῦντος, καὶ Αζὴν ἐκ Παίου πόλιος
Λαφάνης Εὐφορίωνος τοῦ δεξαμένου τε, ὡς λόγος ἐν
'Αρκαδίῃ λέγεται, τοὺς Διοσκούρους οἰκίοισι καὶ ἀπὸ
20 τούτου ξεινοδοκέοντος πάντας ἀνθρώπους, καὶ Ἠλειος
Ονόμαστος ᾿Αγαίου. οὗτοι μὲν δὴ ἐξ αὐτῆς Πελοπον·
νήσου ἦλθον, ἐκ δὲ ᾽Αθηνέων ἀπίκοντο Μεγακλέης τε ὁ
Αλκμέωνος τούτου τοῦ παρὰ Κροῖσον ἀπικομένου, καὶ
ἄλλος Ιπποκλείδης Τισάνδρου, πλούτῳ καὶ εἴδεϊ προφέ
25 ρων Αθηναίων, ἀπὸ δὲ Ἐρετρίης ἀνθεύσης τοῦτον τὸν
χρόνον Λυσανίης· οὗτος δὲ ἀπ᾿ Εὐβοίης μοῦνος. ἐκ δὲ
Θεσσαλίης ἦλθε τῶν Σκοπαδέων Διακτορίδης Κραννώ
128 νιος, ἐκ δὲ Μολοσσῶν ῎Αλκων. τοσοῦτοι μὲν ἐγένοντο
οἱ μνηστήρες. ἀπικομένων δὲ τούτων ἐς τὴν προειρημέ
νην ἡμέρην, ὁ Κλεισθένης πρῶτα μὲν τὰς πάτρας τε
αὐτῶν ἀνεπύθετο καὶ γένος ἑκάστου, μετὰ δὲ κατέχων
5 ἐνιαυτὸν διεπειρᾶτο αὐτῶν τῆς τε ἀνδραγαθίης καὶ τῆς
ὀργῆς καὶ παιδεύσιός τε καὶ τρόπου, καὶ ἑνὶ ἑκάστῳ ἰὼν
ἐς συνουσίην καὶ συνάπασι· καὶ ἐς γυμνάσιά τε ἐξαγινέ
ων ὅσοι ἦσαν αὐτῶν νεώτεροι, καὶ τό γε μέγιστον, ἐν τῇ
συνεστίῃ διεπειρᾶτο· ὅσον γὰρ κατεῖχε χρόνον αὐτούς,
10 τοῦτον πάντα ἐποίες καὶ ἅμα ἐξείνιζε μεγαλοπρεπέως.
καὶ δή κου μάλιστα τῶν μνηστήρων ἠρέσκοντο οἱ ἀπ᾿
Αθηνέων ἀπιγμένοι, καὶ τούτων μᾶλλον Ιπποκλείδης ὁ
Τισάνδρου καὶ κατ᾽ ἀνδραγαθίην ἐκρίνετο καὶ ὅτι τὸ ἀνέ
129 καθεν τοῖσι ἐν Κορίνθῳ Κυψελίδῃσι ἦν προσήκων. ὡς
δὲ ἡ κυρίη ἐγένετο τῶν ἡμερέων τῆς τε κατακλίσιος τοῦ
γάμου καὶ ἐκφάσιος αὐτοῦ Κλεισθένεος τὸν κρίνοι ἐκ
πάντων, θύσας βοὺς ἑκατὸν ὁ Κλεισθένης εὐώχεε αὐτούς
5 τε τοὺς μνηστῆρας καὶ Σικυωνίους πάντας. ὡς δὲ ἀπὸ
δείπνου ἐγίνοντο, οἱ μνηστῆρες ἔριν εἶχον ἀμφί τε μου
BOOK VI.
63
Ο
Ο
σικῇ καὶ τῷ λεγομένῳ ἐς τὸ μέσον. προϊούσης δὲ τῆς
πόσιος κατέχων πολλὸν τοὺς ἄλλους ὁ Ἱπποκλείδης
ἐκέλευσέ οἱ τὸν αὐλητὴν αὐλῆσαι ἐμμελείην, πειθομένου
δὲ τοῦ αὐλητέῳ ὠρχήσατο. καί κως ἑωυτῷ μὲν ἀρεσ-10
τῶς ὠρχέετο, ὁ Κλεισθένης δὲ ὁρέων ὅλον τὸ πρήγμα
ὑπώπτευε. μετὰ δὲ ἐπισχὼν ὁ Ἱπποκλείδης χρόνον
ἐκέλευσέ τινα τράπεζαν ἐσενεῖκαι, ἐσελθούσης δὲ τῆς
τραπέζης πρῶτα μὲν ἐπ' αὐτῆς ὠρχήσατο Λακωνικὰ
σχημάτια, μετὰ δὲ ἄλλα Αττικά, τὸ τρίτον δὲ τὴν κεφα- 15
λὴν ἐρείσας ἐπὶ τὴν τράπεζαν τοῖσι σκέλεσι ἐχειρονό-
μησε. Κλεισθένης δὲ τὰ μὲν πρῶτα καὶ τὰ δεύτερα
ὀρχεομένου, ἀποστυγέων γαμβρὸν ἄν οἱ ἔτι γενέσθαι
Ἱπποκλείδεα διὰ τήν τε ὄρχησιν καὶ τὴν ἀναιδείην,
κατεῖχε ἑωυτόν, οὐ βουλόμενος ἐκραγῆναι ἐς αὐτόν· ὡς 20
δὲ εἶδε τοῖσι σκέλεσι χειρονομήσαντα, οὐκέτι κατέχειν
δυνάμενος εἶπε, “ ὦ παῖ Τισάνδρου, ἀπωρχήσαό γε μὲν
τὸν γάμον.” ὁ δὲ Ἱπποκλείδης ὑπολαβὼν εἶπε, “ οὐ
φροντὶς Ιπποκλείδῃ.” ἀπὸ τούτου μὲν τοῦτο όνομά-130
ζεται, Κλεισθένης δὲ σιγὴν ποιησάμενος ἔλεξε ἐς μέσον
τάδε· “ ἄνδρες παιδὸς τῆς ἐμῆς μνηστήρες, ἐγὼ καὶ
πάντας ὑμέας ἐπαινέω καὶ πᾶσι ὑμῖν, εἰ οἷόν τε εἴη,
χαριζοίμην ἄν, μήτ' ἕνα ὑμέων ἐξαίρετον ἀποκρίνων 5
μήτε τοὺς λοιποὺς ἀποδοκιμάζων. ἀλλ᾽ οὐ γὰρ οἱά τε
ἐστὶ μιῆς πέρι παρθένου βουλεύοντα πᾶσι κατὰ νόον
ποιέειν, τοῖσι μὲν ὑμέων ἀπελαυνομένοισι τοῦδε τοῦ γά-
μου τάλαντον ἀργυρίου ἑκάστῳ δωρεὴν δίδωμι τῆς ἀξιώ-
σιος εἵνεκα τῆς ἐξ ἐμεῦ γῆμαι καὶ τῆς ἐξ οἴκου ἀποδη-10
μίης, τῷ δὲ ᾿Αλκμέωνος Μεγακλέϊ ἐγγυῶ παῖδα τὴν
ἐμὴν ᾿Αγαρίστην νόμοισι τοῖσι Αθηναίων.” φαμένου
δὲ ἐγγυᾶσθαι Μεγακλέος ἐκεκύρωτο ὁ γάμος Κλεισθένει.
64
HERODOTUS.
Famous Descendants of Megacles and Agarista.
131 ᾿Αμφὶ μὲν κρίσιος τῶν μνηστήρων τοσαῦτα ἐγένετο,
καὶ οὕτω ᾿Αλκμεωνίδαι ἐβώσθησαν ἀνὰ τὴν Ἑλλάδα.
τούτων δὲ συνοικησάντων γίνεται Κλεισθένης τε ὁ τὰς
φυλὰς καὶ τὴν δημοκρατίην ᾿Αθηναίοισι καταστήσας,
5 ἔχων τὸ οὔνομα ἀπὸ τοῦ μητροπάτορος τοῦ Σικυωνίου·
οὗτός τε δὴ γίνεται Μεγακλέϊ καὶ Ἱπποκράτης, ἐκ δὲ
Ιπποκράτεος Μεγακλέης τε ἄλλος καὶ ᾿Αγαρίστη ἄλλη
ἀπὸ τῆς Κλεισθένεος ᾿Αγαρίστης ἔχουσα τὸ οὔνομα· ἡ
συνοικήσασά τε Ξανθίππῳ τῷ ᾿Αρίφρονος καὶ ἔγκυος
10 ἐοῦσα εἶδε ὄψιν ἐν τῷ ὕπνῳ, ἐδόκεε δὲ λέοντα τεκεῖν,
καὶ μετ᾿ ὀλίγας ἡμέρας τίκτει Περικλέα Ξανθίππῳ.
ΤΟ
Miltiades and the Parians; his Unhappy End.
132 Μετὰ δὲ τὸ ἐν Μαραθῶνι τρῶμα γενόμενον Μιλτιάδης,
καὶ πρότερον εὐδοκιμέων παρὰ ᾿Αθηναίοισι, τότε μᾶλλον
αὔξετο. αἰτήσας δὲ νέας ἑβδομήκοντα καὶ στρατιήν τε
καὶ χρήματα Αθηναίους, οὐ φράσας σφι ἐπ᾽ ἣν ἐπιστρα-
5 τεύεται χώρην, ἀλλὰ φὰς αὐτοὺς καταπλουτιεῖν ἤν οἱ
ἕπωνται· ἐπὶ γὰρ χώρην τοιαύτην δή τινα ἄξειν ὅθεν
χρυσὸν εὐπετέως ἄφθονον οἴσονται· λέγων τοιαῦτα
αἴτεε τὰς νέας. Αθηναῖοι δὲ τούτοισι ἐπαερθέντες
133 παρέδοσαν. παραλαβὼν δὲ ὁ Μιλτιάδης τὴν στρατιὴν
ἔπλεε ἐπὶ Πάρον, πρόφασιν ἔχων ὡς οἱ Πάριοι ὑπῆρξαν
πρότεροι στρατευόμενοι τριήρεσι ἐς Μαραθῶνα ἅμα τῷ
Πέρσῃ. τοῦτο μὲν δὴ πρόσχημα λόγων ἦν, ἀτάρ τινα
5 καὶ ἔγκοτον εἶχε τοῖσι Παρίοισι διὰ Λυσαγόρεα τὸν
Τισίεω, εόντα γένος Πάριον, διαβαλόντα μιν πρὸς
Υδάρνεα τὸν Πέρσην. ἀπικόμενος δὲ ἐς τὴν ἔπλεε ὁ
Μιλτιάδης τῇ στρατιῇ ἐπολιόρκεε Παρίους κατειλημέ
BOOK VI.
65
νους ἐντὸς τείχεος, καὶ ἐσπέμπων κήρυκα αἴτεε ἑκατὸν
τάλαντα, φάς, ἣν μὲν οὐ δῶσι, οὐκ ἀπονοστήσειν τὴν 10
στρατιὴν πρὶν ἢ ἐξέλῃ σφέας. οἱ δὲ Πάριοι ὅκως μέν
τι δώσουσι Μιλτιάδῃ ἀργυρίου οὐδὲν διενοεῦντο, οἱ δὲ
ὅκως διαφυλάξουσι τὴν πόλιν τοῦτο ἐμηχανέοντο, ἄλλα
τε ἐπιφραζόμενοι καὶ τῇ μάλιστα ἔσκε ἑκάστοτε ἐπίμα-
χον τοῦ τείχεος, τοῦτο ἅμα νυκτὶ ἐξηείρετο διπλήσιον 15
τοῦ ἀρχαίου. ἐς μὲν δὴ τοσοῦτο τοῦ λόγου οἱ πάντες 134
Ελληνες λέγουσι, τὸ ἐνθεῦτεν δὲ αὐτοὶ Πάριοι γενέσθαι
ὧδε λέγουσι. Μιλτιάδῃ ἀπορέοντι ἐλθεῖν ἐς λόγους
αἰχμάλωτον γυναῖκα, ἐοῦσαν μὲν Παρίην γένος, οὔνομα
δέ οἱ εἶναι Τιμοῦν, εἶναι δὲ ὑποζάκορον τῶν χθονίων 5
θεῶν. ταύτην ἐλθοῦσαν ἐς ὄψιν Μιλτιάδεω συμβουλευ
σαι, εἰ περὶ πολλοῦ ποιέεται Πάρον ἑλεῖν, τὰ ἂν αὐτὴ
ὑποθῆται, ταῦτα ποιέειν. μετὰ δὲ τὴν μὲν ὑποθέσθαι,
τὸν δὲ διερχόμενον ἐπὶ τὸν κολωνὸν τὸν πρὸ τῆς πόλιος
ἐόντα ἕρκος θεσμοφόρου Δήμητρος ὑπερθορεῖν, οὐ δυνά- 10
μενον τὰς θύρας ἀνοῖξαι, ὑπερθορόντα δὲ ἰέναι ἐπὶ τὸ
μέγαρον ὅ τι δὴ ποιήσοντα ἐντός, εἴτε κινήσοντά τι τῶν
ἀκινήτων εἴτε ὅ τι δή κοτε πρήξοντα· πρὸς τῇσι θύρῃσί
τε γενέσθαι καὶ πρόκατε φρίκης αὐτὸν ὑπελθούσης
ὀπίσω τὴν αὐτὴν ὁδὸν ἵεσθαι, καταθρώσκοντα δὲ τὴν 15
αἱμασιὴν τὸν μηρὸν σπασθῆναι· οἱ δὲ αὐτὸν τὸ γόνυ
προσπταῖσαι λέγουσι. Μιλτιάδης μέν νυν φλαύρως 135
ἔχων ἀπέπλεε ὀπίσω, οὔτε χρήματα ᾿Αθηναίοισι ἄγων
οὔτε Πάρον προσκτησάμενος, ἀλλὰ πολιορκήσας τε ἓξ
καὶ εἴκοσι ἡμέρας καὶ δηιώσας τὴν νῆσον. Πάριοι δὲ
πυθόμενοι ὡς ἡ ὑποζάκορος τῶν θεῶν Τιμὼ Μιλτιάδη 5
κατηγήσατο, βουλόμενοί μιν ἀντὶ τούτων τιμωρήσασθαι,
θεοπρόπους πέμπουσι ἐς Δελφούς, ὥς σφεας ἡσυχίη τῆς
πολιορκίης ἔσχε· ἔπεμπον δὲ ἐπειρησομένους εἰ κατα-
0
66
HERODOTUS.
Ο
χρήσωνται τὴν ὑποζάκορον τῶν θεῶν ὡς ἐξηγησαμένην
10 τοῖσι ἐχθροῖσι τῆς πατρίδος ἅλωσιν καὶ τὰ ἐς ἔρσενα
γόνον ἄρρητα ἱρὶ ἐκφήνασαν Μιλτιάδῃ. ἡ δὲ Πυθίη
οὐκ ἔα, φᾶσα οὐ Τιμοῦν εἶναι τὴν αἰτίην τούτων, ἀλλὰ
δεῖν γὰρ Μιλτιάδεα τελευτἂν μὴ εὖ, φανῆναί οἱ τῶν
136 κακών κατηγεμόνα. Παρίοισι μὲν δὴ ταῦτα ἡ Πυθίη
ἔχρησε· 'Αθηναῖοι δὲ ἐκ Πάρου Μιλτιάδεα ἀπονο-
στήσαντα ἔσχον ἐν στόμασι οἵ τε ἄλλοι καὶ μάλιστα
Ξάνθιππος ὁ ᾿Αρίφρονος, ὃς θανάτου ὑπαγαγὼν ὑπὸ
5 τὸν δῆμον Μιλτιάδεα ἐδίωκε τῆς ᾿Αθηναίων ἀπάτης εἵ-
νεκεν. Μιλτιάδης δὲ αὐτὸς μὲν παρεὼν οὐκ ἀπελογέετο·
ἦν γὰρ ἀδύνατος ὥστε σηπομένου τοῦ μηροῦ· προκει-
μένου δὲ αὐτοῦ ἐν κλίνῃ ὑπεραπελογέοντο οἱ φίλοι, τῆς
μάχης τε τῆς ἐν Μαραθῶνι γενομένης πολλὰ ἐπιμεμνη-
10 μένοι καὶ τὴν Λήμνου αἵρεσιν, ὡς ἑλὼν Λημνόν τε
καὶ τισάμενος τοὺς Πελασγοὺς παρέδωκε Αθηναίοισι.
προσγενομένου δὲ τοῦ δήμου αὐτῷ κατὰ τὴν ἀπόλυσιν
τοῦ θανάτου, ζημιώσαντος δὲ κατὰ τὴν ἀδικίην πεντή
κοντα ταλάντοισι, Μιλτιάδης μὲν μετὰ ταῦτα σφακελί
15 σαντός τε τοῦ μηροῦ καὶ σαπέντος τελευτᾷ, τὰ δὲ πεντή-
κοντα τάλαντα ἐξέτισε ὁ παῖς αὐτοῦ Κίμων.
Pelasgians Expelled from Attica. Λήμνια ἔργα.
137 Λήμνον δὲ Μιλτιάδης ὁ Κίμωνος ὧδε ἔσχε. Πελα-
σγοὶ ἐπείτε ἐκ τῆς Ἀττικῆς ὑπὸ Αθηναίων ἐξεβλήθησαν,
εἴτε ὧν δὴ δικαίως εἴτε ἀδίκως· τοῦτο γὰρ οὐκ ἔχω
φράσαι, πλὴν τὰ λεγόμενα, ὅτι Ἑκαταῖος μὲν ὁ Ἡγη-
5 σάνδρου ἔφησε ἐν τοῖσι λόγοισι λέγων ἀδίκως· ἐπείτε
γὰρ ἰδεῖν τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους τὴν χώρην, τὴν σφίσι αὐτοῖσι
ὑπὸ τὸν Ὑμησσὸν ἐοῦσαν ἔδοσαν Πελασγοῖσι οἰκῆσαι
μισθὸν τοῦ τείχεος τοῦ περὶ τὴν ἀκρόπολίν κοτε ἐληλα-
BOOK VI.
67
μένου, ταύτην ὡς ἰδεῖν τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους ἐξεργασμένην
εὖ, τὴν πρότερον εἶναι κακήν τε καὶ τοῦ μηδενὸς ἀξίην, 10
λαβεῖν φθόνον τε καὶ ἵμερον τῆς γῆς, καὶ οὕτω ἐξελαύνειν
αὐτοὺς οὐδεμίαν ἄλλην πρόφασιν προϊσχομένους τοὺς
Αθηναίους. ὡς δὲ αὐτοὶ ᾿Αθηναῖοι λέγουσι, δικαίως
ἐξελάσαι. κατοικημένους γὰρ τοὺς Πελασγοὺς ὑπὸ τῷ
Ὑμησσῷ, ἐνθεῦτεν ὁρμεομένους ἀδικέειν τάδε. φοιτᾶν 15
γὰρ αἰεὶ τὰς σφετέρας θυγατέρας τε καὶ τοὺς παῖδας
ἐπ᾽ ὕδωρ ἐπὶ τὴν Ἐννεάκρουνον· οὐ γὰρ εἶναι τοῦτον
τὸν χρόνον σφίσι κω οὐδὲ τοῖσι ἄλλοισι Ἕλλησι οἰκέ
τας· ὅκως δὲ ἔλθοιεν αὗται, τοὺς Πελασγοὺς ὑπὸ ὕβριός
τε καὶ ὀλιγωρίης βιασθαί σφεας. καὶ ταῦτα μέντοι σφι 20
οὐκ ἀποχρᾶν ποιέειν, ἀλλὰ τέλος καὶ ἐπιβουλεύοντας
ἐπιχείρησιν φανῆναι ἐπ᾿ αὐτοφώρῳ. ἑωυτοὺς δὲ γενέ-
σθαι τοσούτῳ ἐκείνων ἄνδρας ἀμείνονας, ὅσῳ παρεὸν
ἑωυτοῖσι ἀποκτεῖναι τοὺς Πελασγούς, ἐπεί σφεας ἔλα
βον ἐπιβουλεύοντας, οὐκ ἐθελῆσαι, ἀλλά σφι προειπείν 25
ἐκ τῆς γῆς ἐξιέναι. τοὺς δὲ οὕτω δὴ ἐκχωρήσαντας
ἄλλα τε σχεῖν χωρία καὶ δὴ καὶ Λήμνον. ἐκεῖνα μὲν
δὴ Ἑκαταῖος ἔλεξε, ταῦτα δὲ 'Αθηναῖοι λέγουσι. οἱ δὲ 138
Πελασγοί οὗτοι Λῆμνον τότε νεμόμενοι καὶ βουλόμενοι
τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους τιμωρήσασθαι, εὖ τε ἐξεπιστάμενοι τὰς
Αθηναίων ὁρτάς, πεντηκοντέρους κτησάμενοι ἐλόχησαν
Αρτέμιδι ἐν Βραυρώνι ἀγούσας· ὁρτὴν τὰς τῶν Αθηναί- 5
ων γυναῖκας, ἐνθεῦτεν δὲ ἁρπάσαντες τουτέων πολλὰς
οἴχοντο ἀποπλέοντες, καί σφεας ἐς Λῆμνον ἀγαγόντες
παλλακὰς εἶχον. ὡς δὲ τέκνων αὗται αἱ γυναῖκες ὑπε-
πλήσθησαν, γλῶσσάν τε τὴν ᾿Αττικὴν καὶ τρόπους τοὺς
Αθηναίων ἐδίδασκον τοὺς παῖδας. οἱ δὲ οὔτε συμμίσ-10
γεσθαι τοῖσι ἐκ τῶν Πελασγίδων γυναικῶν παισὶ ἤθελον,
εἴ τε τύπτοιτό τις αὐτῶν ὑπ' ἐκείνων τινός, ἐβοήθεόν τε
68
HERODOTUS.
πάντες καὶ ἐτιμώρεον ἀλλήλοισι· καὶ δὴ καὶ ἄρχειν τε
τῶν παίδων οἱ παῖδες ἐδικαίευν καὶ πολλῷ ἐπεκράτεον.
15 μαθόντες δὲ ταῦτα οἱ Πελασγοὶ ἑωυτοῖσι λόγους ἐδίδο-
σαν· καί σφι βουλευομένοισι δεινόν τι ἐσέδυνε, εἰ δὴ
διαγινώσκοιεν σφίσι τε βοηθέειν οἱ παῖδες πρὸς τῶν
κουριδιέων γυναικῶν τοὺς παῖδας καὶ τούτων αὐτίκα
ἄρχειν πειρῴατο, τί δὴ ἀνδρωθέντες δῆθεν ποιήσουσι.
20 ἐνθαῦτα ἔδοξέ σφι κτείνειν τοὺς παῖδας τοὺς ἐκ τῶν
Αττικέων γυναικῶν. ποιεῦσι δὴ ταῦτα, προσαπολλύ
ουσι δέ σφεων καὶ τὰς μητέρας. ἀπὸ τούτου δὲ τοῦ
ἔργου καὶ τοῦ προτέρου τούτων, τὸ ἐργάσαντο αἱ γυναῖ
κες τοὺς ἅμα Θόαντι ἄνδρας σφετέρους ἀποκτείνασαι,
25 νενόμισται ἀνὰ τὴν Ἑλλάδα τὰ σχέτλια ἔργα πάντα
Λήμνια καλέεσθαι.
How Lemnos was Won for Athens by Miltiades.
139 Αποκτείνασι δὲ τοῖσι Πελασγοῖσι τοὺς σφετέρους
παιδάς τε καὶ γυναῖκας οὔτε γῆ καρπὸν ἔφερε οὔτε
γυναικές τε καὶ ποῖμναι ὁμοίως ἔτικτον καὶ πρὸ τοῦ.
πιεζόμενοι δὲ λιμῷ καὶ ἀπαιδίῃ ἐς Δελφοὺς ἔπεμπον
5 λύσιν τινὰ αἰτησόμενοι τῶν παρεόντων κακῶν. ἡ δὲ
Πυθίη σφέας ἐκέλευε 'Αθηναίοισι δίκας διδόναι ταύτας
τὰς ἂν αὐτοὶ 'Αθηναῖοι δικάσωσι. ἦλθόν τε δὴ ἐς τὰς
᾿Αθήνας οἱ Πελασγοί καὶ δίκας ἐπαγγέλλοντο βουλό-
μενοι διδόναι παντὸς τοῦ ἀδικήματος. ᾿Αθηναῖοι δὲ ἐν
10 τῷ πρυτανηίῳ κλίνην στρώσαντες ὡς εἶχον κάλλιστα
καὶ τράπεζαν ἐπιπλέην ἀγαθῶν πάντων παραθέντες,
ἐκέλευον τοὺς Πελασγοὺς τὴν χώρην σφίσι παραδιδόναι
οὕτω ἔχουσαν. οἱ δὲ Πελασγοὶ ὑπολαβόντες εἶπαν,
ἐπεὰν βορέῃ ἀνέμῳ αὐτημερὸν ἐξανύσῃ νηῦς ἐκ τῆς
15 ὑμετέρης ἐς τὴν ἡμετέρην, τότε παραδώσομεν,” ἐπιστά-
BOOK VI.
69
μενοι τοῦτο εἶναι ἀδύνατον γενέσθαι· ἡ γὰρ Αττική
πρὸς νότον κέεται πολλὸν τῆς Λήμνου. τότε μὲν τοιαΰ- 140
τα· ἔτεσι δὲ κάρτα πολλοῖσι ὕστερον τούτων, ὡς ἡ
Χερσόνησος ἡ ἐπ᾽ Ἑλλησπόντῳ ἐγένετο ὑπὸ ᾿Αθηναί-
οισι, Μιλτιάδης ὁ Κίμωνος ἐτησιέων ἀνέμων κατεστηκό-
των νηὶ κατανύσας ἐξ Ἐλαιοῦντος τοῦ ἐν Χερσονήσῳ 5
ἐς Λήμνον προηγόρευε ἐξιέναι ἐκ τῆς νήσου τοῖσι Πελασ
γοῖσι, ἀναμιμνήσκων σφέας τὸ χρηστήριον, τὸ οὐδαμὰ
ἤλπισαν σφίσι οἱ Πελασγοὶ ἐπιτελέεσθαι. Ηφαιστιέες
μέν νυν ἐπείθοντο, Μυριναῖοι δὲ οὐ συγγινωσκόμενοι
εἶναι τὴν Χερσόνησον ᾿Αττικὴν ἐπολιορκέοντο, ἐς ὃ καὶ 10
οὗτοι παρέστησαν. οὕτω δὴ τὴν Λῆμνον ἔσχον Αθη-
ναῖοί τε καὶ Μιλτιάδης.
1
BOOK VII.
Darius Prepares for a Second Expedition against Greece.
Ἐπεὶ δὲ ἀγγελίη ἀπίκετο περὶ τῆς μάχης τῆς ἐν
Μαραθῶνι γενομένης παρὰ βασιλέα Δαρεῖον τὸν Ὑστά-
σπεος, καὶ πρὶν μεγάλως κεχαραγμένον τοῖσι Αθηναί-
οισι διὰ τὴν ἐς Σάρδις ἐσβολήν, καὶ δὴ καὶ τότε πολλῷ
5 τε δεινότερα ἐποίεε καὶ μᾶλλον ὥρμητο στρατεύεσθαι
ἐπὶ τὴν Ἑλλάδα. καὶ αὐτίκα μὲν ἐπηγγέλλετο πέμπων
ἀγγέλους κατὰ πόλις ἑτοιμάζειν στρατιήν, πολλῷ πλέω
ἐπιτάσσων ἑκάστοισι ἢ πρότερον παρέχειν, καὶ νέας τε
καὶ ἵππους καὶ σῖτον καὶ πλοῖα. τούτων δὲ περιαγγελ.
10 λομένων ἡ ᾿Ασίη ἐδονέετο ἐπὶ τρία ἔτεα, καταλεγομένων
τε τῶν ἀρίστων ὡς ἐπὶ τὴν Ἑλλάδα στρατευσομένων
καὶ παρασκευαζομένων. τετάρτῳ δὲ ἔτει Αἰγύπτιοι
ὑπὸ Καμβύσεω δουλωθέντες ἀπέστησαν ἀπὸ Περσέων.
ἐνθαῦτα δὴ καὶ μᾶλλον ὥρμητο καὶ ἐπ᾽ ἀμφοτέρους
15 στρατεύεσθαι.
Contest between Darius's Sons touching the Succession;
his Death.
2 Στελλομένου δὲ Δαρείου ἐπ᾽ Αἴγυπτον καὶ ᾿Αθήνας,
τῶν παίδων αὐτοῦ στάσις ἐγένετο μεγάλη περὶ τῆς
ἡγεμονίης, ὡς δεῖ μιν ἀποδέξαντα βασιλέα κατὰ τὸν
Περσέων νόμον οὕτω στρατεύεσθαι. ἦσαν γὰρ Δαρείῳ
5 καὶ πρότερον ή βασιλεῦσαι γεγονότες τρεῖς παῖδες ἐκ
τῆς προτέρης γυναικός, Γοβρύεω θυγατρός, καὶ βασι-
BOOK VII.
71
Ο
λεύσαντι ἐξ ᾿Ατόσσης τῆς Κύρου ἕτεροι τέσσερες. τῶν
μὲν δὴ προτέρων ἐπρέσβευε ᾿Αρταβαζάνης, τῶν δὲ ἐπι-
γενομένων Ξέρξης. ἐόντες δὲ μητρὸς οὐ τῆς αὐτῆς ἐστα-
σίαζον, ὁ μὲν ᾿Αρταβαζάνης κατότι πρεσβύτατός τε εἴη 10
παντὸς τοῦ γόνου καὶ ὅτι νομιζόμενον εἴη πρὸς πάντων
ἀνθρώπων τὸν πρεσβύτατον τὴν ἀρχὴν ἔχειν, Ξέρξης δὲ
ὡς Ατόσσης τε παῖς εἴη τῆς Κύρου θυγατρὸς καὶ ὅτι
Κῦρος εἴη ὁ κτησάμενος τοῖσι Πέρσῃσι τὴν ἐλευθερίην.
Δαρείου δὲ οὐκ ἀποδεικνυμένου κω γνώμην, ἐτύγχανε 3
κατὰ τὠυτὸ τούτοισι καὶ Δημάρητος ὁ ᾿Αρίστωνος ἀνα-
βεβηκὼς ἐς Σούσα, ἐστερημένος τε τῆς ἐν Σπάρτῃ βασι-
ληίης καὶ φυγὴν ἐπιβαλὼν ἑωυτῷ ἐκ Λακεδαίμονος.
οὗτος ὧνὴρ πυθόμενος τῶν Δαρείου παίδων τὴν δια- 5
φορήν, ἐλθών, ὡς ἡ φάτις μιν ἔχει, Ξέρξη συνεβούλευε
λέγειν πρὸς τοῖσι ἔλεγε ἔπεσι, ὡς αὐτὸς μὲν γένοιτο
Δαρείῳ ἤδη βασιλεύοντι καὶ ἔχοντι τὸ Περσέων κρά-
τος, Αρταβαζάνης δὲ ἔτι ἰδιώτῃ ἐόντι Δαρείῳ. οὔκων
οὔτε οἰκὸς εἴη οὔτε δίκαιον ἄλλον τινὰ τὸ γέρας ἔχειν 10
πρὸ ἑωυτοῦ· ἐπεί γε καὶ ἐν Σπάρτῃ ἔφη ὁ Δημάρητος
ὑποτιθέμενος οὕτω νομίζεσθαι, ἢν οἱ μὲν προγεγονότες
ἔωσι πρὶν ἢ τὸν πατέρα σφέων βασιλεῦσαι, ὁ δὲ βασι-
λεύοντι ὀψίγονος ἐπιγένηται, τοῦ ἐπιγενομένου τὴν ἔκδε-
ξιν τῆς βασιληίης γίνεσθαι. χρησαμένου δὲ Ξέρξεω τῇ 15
Δημαρήτου ὑποθήκῃ, γνοὺς ὁ Δαρεῖος ὡς λέγοι δίκαια
βασιλέα μιν ἀπέδεξε. δοκέει δέ μοι καὶ ἄνευ ταύτης
τῆς ὑποθήκης βασιλεῦσαι ἂν Ξέρξης· ἡ γὰρ Ατοσσα
εἶχε τὸ πᾶν κράτος. ἀποδέξας δὲ βασιλέα Πέρσῃσι 4
Ξέρξεα Δαρείος ὁρμᾶτο στρατεύεσθαι. ἀλλὰ γὰρ μετὰ
ταῦτά τε καὶ Αἰγύπτου ἀπόστασιν τῷ ὑστέρῳ ἔτει
παρασκευαζόμενον συνήνεικε αὐτὸν Δαρεῖον, βασιλεύ
σαντα τὰ πάντα ἕξ τε καὶ τριήκοντα ἔτεα, ἀποθανεῖν, 5
72
HERODOTUS.
οὐδέ οἱ ἐξεγένετο οὔτε τοὺς ἀπεστεῶτας Αἰγυπτίους
οὔτε ᾿Αθηναίους τιμωρήσασθαι.
Xerxes Succeeds to the Throne; is Persuaded to Carry out
his Father's Plans.
5. Αποθανόντος δὲ Δαρείου ἡ βασιληίη ἀνεχώρησε ἐς
τὸν παῖδα τὸν ἐκείνου Ξέρξην. ὁ τοίνυν Ξέρξης ἐπὶ μὲν
τὴν Ἑλλάδα οὐδαμῶς πρόθυμος ἦν κατ᾿ ἀρχὰς στρα-
τεύεσθαι, ἐπὶ δὲ Αἴγυπτον ἐποιέετο στρατιῆς ἄγερσιν.
5 παρεὼν δὲ καὶ δυνάμενος παρ' αὐτῷ μέγιστον Περσέων
Μαρδόνιος ὁ Γοβρύεω, ὃς ἦν Ξέρξῃ μὲν ἀνεψιὸς Δαρείου
δὲ ἀδελφῆς παῖς, τοιούτου λόγου εἴχετο, λέγων, “ δέσπο-
τα, οὐκ οἰκός ἐστι 'Αθηναίους έργασαμένους πολλὰ δὴ
κακὰ Πέρσας μὴ οὐ δοῦναι δίκην τῶν ἐποίησαν. ἀλλ᾽
10 εἰ τὸ μὲν νῦν ταῦτα πρήσσοις τά περ ἐν χερσὶ ἔχεις·
ἡμερώσας δὲ Αἴγυπτον τὴν ἐξυβρίσασαν στρατηλάτες
ἐπὶ τὰς Αθήνας, ἵνα λόγος τέ σε ἔχῃ πρὸς ἀνθρώπων
ἀγαθός, καί τις ὕστερον φυλάσσηται ἐπὶ γῆν τὴν σὴν
στρατεύεσθαι.” οὗτος μέν οἱ ὁ λόγος ἦν τιμωρός· τοῦδε
15 δὲ τοῦ λόγου παρενθήκην ποιεέσκετο τήνδε, ὡς ἡ Εὐρώπη
περικαλλής εἴη χώρη, καὶ δένδρεα παντοῖα φέρει τὰ
ἥμερα, ἀρετήν τε ἄκρη, βασιλέι τε μούνῳ θνητῶν ἀξίη
6 ἐκτῆσθαι. ταῦτα ἔλεγε οἷα νεωτέρων ἔργων ἐπιθυμητὴς
ἐὼν καὶ θέλων αὐτὸς τῆς Ἑλλάδος ὕπαρχος εἶναι.
χρόνῳ δὲ κατεργάσατό τε καὶ ἀνέπεισε ὥστε ποιέειν
ταῦτα Ξέρξην· συνέλαβε γὰρ καὶ ἄλλα οἱ σύμμαχα
5 γενόμενα ἐς τὸ πείθεσθαι Ξέρξην. τοῦτο μὲν ἀπὸ τῆς
Θεσσαλίης παρὰ τῶν ᾿Αλευαδέων ἀπιγμένοι ἄγγελοι
ἐπεκαλέοντο βασιλέα πᾶσαν προθυμίην παρεχόμενοι
ἐπὶ τὴν Ἑλλάδα· οἱ δὲ ᾿Αλευάδαι οὗτοι ἦσαν Θεσσα-
λίης βασιλέες· τοῦτο δὲ Πεισιστρατιδέων οἱ ἀναβεβη-
0
BOOK VII.
73
κότες ἐς Σοῦσα, τῶν τε αὐτῶν λόγων ἐχόμενοι τῶν καὶ 10
οἱ Αλευάδαι, καὶ δή τι πρὸς τούτοισι ἔτι πλέον προσωρέ-
γοντό οἱ. ἔχοντες Ὀνομάκριτον, ἄνδρα 'Αθηναῖον χρησ-
μολόγον τε καὶ διαθέτην χρησμῶν τῶν Μουσαίου, ἀνα-
βεβήκεσαν, τὴν ἔχθρην προκαταλυσάμενοι· ἐξηλάθη
γὰρ ὑπὸ Ἱππάρχου τοῦ Πεισιστράτου ὁ Ὀνομάκριτος 15
ἐξ Αθηνέων, ἐπ᾿ αὐτοφώρῳ ἁλοὺς ὑπὸ Λάσου τοῦ
Ερμιονέος ἐμποιέων ἐς τὰ Μουσαίου χρησμόν, ὡς αἱ
ἐπὶ Λήμνῳ ἐπικείμεναι νῆσοι ἀφανιζοίατο κατὰ τῆς
θαλάσσης. διὸ ἐξήλασέ μιν ὁ Ιππαρχος, πρότερον
χρεόμενος τὰ μάλιστα. τότε δὲ συναναβὰς ὅκως ἀπί- 20
κοιτο ἐς ὄψιν τὴν βασιλέος, λεγόντων τῶν Πεισιστρα-
τιδέων περὶ αὐτοῦ σεμνοὺς λόγους, κατέλεγε τῶν χρησ-
μῶν· εἰ μέν τι ἐνέοι σφάλμα φέρον τῷ βαρβάρῳ, τῶν
μὲν ἔλεγε οὐδέν, ὁ δὲ τὰ εὐτυχέστατα ἐκλεγόμενος ἔλεγε,
τόν τε Ελλήσποντον ὡς ζευχθῆναι χρεὸν εἴη ὑπ' ἀνδρὸς 20
Πέρσεω, τήν τε ἔλασιν ἐξηγεόμενος. οὗτός τε δὴ
μῳδέων προσεφέρετο, καὶ οἵ τε Πεισιστρατίδαι καὶ οἱ
Αλευάδαι γνώμας ἀποδεικνύμενοι.
χρησ-
Ως δὲ ἀνεγνώσθη Ξέρξης στρατεύεσθαι ἐπὶ τὴν Ἑλ.
λάδα, ἐνθαῦτα δευτέρῳ μὲν ἔτεϊ μετὰ τὸν θάνατον τὸν
Δαρείου πρῶτα στρατιὴν ποιέεται ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀπεστεῶτας.
τούτους μέν νυν καταστρεψάμενος καὶ Αἴγυπτον πᾶσαν
πολλὸν δουλοτέρην ποιήσας ἢ ἐπὶ Δαρείου ἦν, ἐπιτρά. 5
πει 'Αχαιμένει ἀδελφεῷ μὲν ἑωυτοῦ Δαρείου δὲ παιδί.
Αχαιμένεα μέν νυν ἐπιτροπεύοντα Αἰγύπτου χρόνῳ
μετέπειτα ἐφόνευσε Ινάρως ὁ Ψαμμητιχου ἀνὴρ Λίβυς.
Council of the Persians; Xerxes' Speech.
Ξέρξης δὲ μετὰ Αἰγύπτου ἅλωσιν ὡς ἔμελλε ἐς χεῖρας 8
ἄξεσθαι τὸ στράτευμα τὸ ἐπὶ τὰς ᾿Αθήνας, σύλλογον
4
74
HERODOTUS.
ἐπίκλητον Περσέων τῶν ἀρίστων ἐποιέετο, ἵνα γνώμας
τε πύθηταί σφεων καὶ αὐτὸς ἐν πᾶσι εἴπῃ τὰ θέλει.
5 ὡς δὲ συνελέχθησαν, ἔλεξε Ξέρξης τάδε·
66
ἄνδρες Πέρσαι, οὔτ᾽ “ άνδρες Πέρσαι, οὔτ᾽ αὐτὸς
αὐτὸς κατηγήσομαι νόμον καθηγήσομαι νόμον τόνδ' ἐν ὑμῖν
τόνδε ἐν ὑμῖν τιθείς, παρα- τιθείς, παραδεξάμενός τε αὐτῷ
δεξάμενός τε αὐτῷ χρήσο-
10 μαι. ὡς γὰρ ἐγὼ πυνθά- χρήσομαι. ὡς γὰρ ἐγὼ πυνθά
λόντος Αστυάγην. ἀλλὰ θεός
τε οὕτως ἐνάγει, καὶ αὐτοῖς ἡμῖν
πολλὰ ἐπιοῦσι συμφέρεται ἐπὶ τὸ
ἄμεινον. ἃ μὲν δὴ Κυρός τε καὶ
Καμβύσης πατήρ τε ὁ ἐμὸς Δα-
νομαι τῶν πρεσβυτέρων, νομαι τῶν πρεσβυτέρων, οὐδένα
οὐδαμά κω ἠτρεμίσαμεν, χρόνον ἠτρεμήσαμεν, ἐξ οὗ παρε-
ἐπείτε παρελάβομεν τὴν λάβομεν τὴν ἡγεμονίαν τήνδε
ἡγεμονίην τήνδε παρὰ Μή- παρὰ τῶν Μήδων, Κύρου καθε
15 δων, Κύρου κατελόντος Ασ.
τυάγεα. ἀλλὰ θεός τε οὕτω
ἄγει καὶ αὐτοῖσι ἡμῖν πολ.
λὰ ἐπέπουσι συμφέρεται
ἐπὶ τὸ ἄμεινον. τὰ μέν νυν
20 Κυρός τε καὶ Καμβύσης
πατήρ τε ἐμὸς Δαρείος και
τεργάσαντο καὶ προσεκτή
σαντο ἔθνεα, ἐπισταμένοισι
εὖ οὐκ ἄν τις λέγοι. ἐγὼ δὲ
25 ἐπείτε παρέλαβον τὸν θρό-
νον τοῦτον, ἐφρόντιζον ὅκως
μὴ λείψομαι τῶν πρότερον τερον γενομένων ἐν τῇ τιμῇ τῇδε
γενομένων ἐν τιμῇ τῇδε μηδὲ
1
ρεῖος κατειργάσαντο καὶ προσε-
κτήσαντο ἔθνη, ἐπισταμένοις οὐκ
ἄν τις λέγοι. ἐγὼ δ', ἐπειδὴ παρέ-
λαβον τὸν θρόνον, τούτου ἐφρόν-
τιζον ὅπως μὴ λείψωμαι τῶν πρό-
ἐλάσσω προσκτήσομαι δύ- μηδ' ἐλάσσω προσκτήσωμαι δύ-
30 ναμιν Πέρσῃσι· φροντίζων ναμιν Πέρσαις· φροντίζων δὲ
δὲ εὑρίσκω ἅμα μὲν κῦδος εὑρίσκω ἅμα μὲν κῦδος ἡμῖν
ἡμῖν τε προσγινόμενον χώ- προσγινόμενον χώραν τε ἧς νῦν
ρην τε τῆς νῦν ἐκτήμεθα οὐκ κεκτήμεθα οὐκ ἐλάσσονα οὐδὲ
BOOK VII.
75
ἐλάσσονα οὐδὲ φλαυροτέ- φαυλοτέραν παμφορωτέραν τε,
ρην παμφορωτέρην τε, ἅμα ἅμα δὲ τιμωρίαν καὶ τίσιν γινο- 35
δὲ τιμωρίην τε καὶ τίσιν
va
ζεύξας τὸν Ἑλλήσποντον ελαύ- 40
επι
νειν στρατὸν διὰ τῆς Εὐρώπης ἐπὶ
τὴν ῾Ελλάδα, ἵνα Αθηναίους τι
μωρήσωμαι ὅσα δὴ πεποιήκασι
Πέρσας τε καὶ πατέρα τὸν ἐμόν. 45
ὁρᾶτε μὲν δὴ καὶ πατέρα τὸν ἐμὸν
γινομένην. διὸ ὑμέας νῦν μένην. διὰ δὴ ταῦτα νῦν ὑμᾶς
ἐγὼ συνέλεξα, ἵνα τὸ νοέω ἐγὼ συνέλεξα, ἵνα ἃ διανοοῦμαι
πρήσσειν ὑπερθέωμαι ὑμῖν. πράττειν ὑποθῶ ὑμῖν. μέλλω
μέλλω ζεύξας τὸν Ἑλλήσε
ποντον ἐλᾶν στρατὸν διὰ
τῆς Εὐρώπης ἐπὶ τὴν Ἑλ-
λάδα, ἵνα 'Αθηναίους τιμω-
ρήσωμαι ὅσα δὴ πεποιήκασι
Πέρσας τε καὶ πατέρα τὸν
ἐμόν. ὁρᾶτε μέν νυν καὶ
πατέρα τὸν ἐμὸν Δαρεῖον
ἰθύοντα στρατεύεσθαι ἐπὶ Δαρεῖον προθυμούμενον στρατεύ
τοὺς ἄνδρας τούτους. ἀλλ᾽ εσθαι ἐπὶ τοὺς ἄνδρας τούτους.
ὁ μὲν τετελεύτηκε καὶ οὐκ ἀλλ' ὁ μὲν τετελεύτηκε, καὶ οὐκ 50
ἐξεγένετο αὐτῷ τιμωρήσασ·
θαι· ἐγὼ δὲ ὑπέρ τε ἐκείνου
καὶ τῶν ἄλλων Περσέων οὐ
πρότερον παύσομαι πρὶν ἢ
ἔλω τε καὶ πυρώσω τὰς
᾿Αθήνας, οἵ γε ἐμὲ καὶ πα
τέρα τὸν ἐμὸν ὑπῆρξαν ἄδι-
κα ποιεῦντες. πρῶτα μὲν
ἐξεγένετ᾽ αὐτῷ τιμωρήσασθαι·
Τ
ἐγὼ δ' ὑπέρ τ᾽ ἐκείνου καὶ τῶν ἄλ-
λων Περσῶν οὐ πρότερον παύσο-
μαι πρὶν ἕλω τε καὶ πυρώσω τὰς 55
᾿Αθήνας, οἵ γε ἐμέ τε καὶ πατέρα
τὸν ἐμὸν ὑπῆρξαν ἄδικα ποιοῦντες,
ἐς Σάρδις ἐλθόντες ἅμα πρῶτα μὲν εἰς Σάρδεις ἐλθόντες
Αρισταγόρῃ τῷ Μιλησίῳ, ἅμα 'Αρισταγόρᾳ τῷ Μιλησίῳ, 60
δούλῳ δὲ ἡμετέρῳ, ἀπικό-
μενοι ἐνέπρησαν τά τε ἄλ. δούλῳ δὲ ἡμετέρῳ, ἐνέπρησαν τά
σεα καὶ τὰ ἱρά· δεύτερα δὲ τε ἄλση καὶ τὰ ἱερά· δεύτερα δὲ,
ἡμέας οἷα ἔρξαν ἐς τὴν ὑμᾶς οἷα ἔδρασαν εἰς τὴν γῆν τὴν
76
HERODOTUS.
ἐπίστασθέ που πάντες. τούτων
Επ
65 σφετέρην ἀποβάντας, ὅτε σφετέραν ἀποβάντας, ὅτε Δᾶτίς
Δᾶτίς τε καὶ ᾿Αρταφέρνης τε καὶ ᾿Αρταφέρνης ἐστρατήγουν,
ἐστρατήγεον, τὰ ἐπίστασθέ
κου πάντες, τούτων μέντοι
εἵνεκα ἀνάρτημαι ἐπ' αὐ. μέντοι ἕνεκα ἀνώρμημαι ἐπ' αὐτ
70 τοὺς στρατεύεσθαι, ἀγαθὰ τοὺς στρατεύεσθαι, ἀγαθὰ δ᾽ ἐν
δὲ ἐν αὐτοῖσι τοσάδε άνευ αὐτοῖς τοσάδε ανευρίσκω λογιζύ-
ρίσκω λογιζόμενος· εἰ τού- μενος· εἰ τούτους τε καὶ τοὺς τού-
τους τε καὶ τοὺς τούτοισι
πλησιοχώρους καταστρε
75ψόμεθα, οἳ Πέλοπος τοῦ μεθα, οἳ Πέλοπος τοῦ Φρυγὸς
Φρυγὸς νέμονται χώρην, νέμονται χώραν, γῆν τε τὴν Περ-
γῆν τὴν Περσίδα ἀποδέξο- σίδα ἀποδείξομεν τῷ Διὸς αιθέρι
μεν τῷ Διὸς αἰθέρι ὁμουρέ- ὅμορον οὖσαν· οὐ γὰρ δὴ χώραν
ουσαν· οὐ γὰρ δὴ χώρην γε
γε οὐδὲ μίαν κατόψεται ὁ ἥλιος
80 οὐδεμίαν κατόψεται ἥλιος
τοις πλησιοχώρους καταστρεψό
ὁμουρέουσαν τῇ ἡμετέρῃ, ὅμορον οὖσαν τῇ ἡμετέρᾳ, ἀλλ᾽
ἀλλά σφεας πάσας ἐγὼ αὐτὰς ἁπάσας ἐγὼ ἅμα ὑμῖν μίαν
ἅμα ὑμῖν μίαν χώρην θήσω, χώραν θήσω, διὰ πάσης ἐξελ-
διὰ πάσης διεξελθὼν τῆς θὼν τῆς Εὐρώπης. πυνθάνομαι
85 Εὐρώπης. πυνθάνομαι γὰρ
ὧδε ἔχειν, οὔτε τινὰ πόλιν γὰρ ὧδε ἔχειν, οὔτε τινὰ πόλιν
ἀνδρῶν οὐδεμίαν οὔτε ἔθνος αὐτῶν οὐδεμίαν οὔτε ἔθνος ἀν-
οὐδὲν ἀνθρώπων, ὑπολεί- θρώπων οὐδὲν ὑπολείπεσθαι
πεσθαι, τὸ ἡμῖν οἷόν τε ἔσ- ἡμῖν, ὃ οἷόν τε ἔσται ἐλθεῖν εἰς
90 ται ἐλθεῖν ἐς μάχην, τούτων μάχην, τούτων ὧν ἔλεξα ὑπεξῃ-
τῶν κατέλεξα ὑπεξαραιρη-
μένων. οὕτω οἵ τε ἡμῖν
αἴτιοι ἕξουσι δούλιον ζυγὸν
οἵ τε ἀναίτιοι. ὑμεῖς δ᾽ ἄν
ρημένων. οὕτως οἵ τε ἡμῖν
ἀντίοι ἕξουσι δούλιον ξυγὸν οἱ
τε Αθηναῖοι. ὑμεῖς δ᾽ ἄν μοι
95 μοι τάδε ποιέοντες χαρί- τάδε ποιοῦντες χαρίζεσθε· ἐπει·
BOOK VII.
77
ζοισθε· ἐπεὰν ὑμῖν σημήνω δὰν ὑμῖν σημήνω τὸν χρόνον εἰς
τὸν χρόνον ἐς τὸν ἥκειν δεῖ,
προθύμως πάντα τινὰ ὑμέων
χρήσει παρεῖναι· ὃς ἂν δὲ
ὃν ἡμῖν ἥκειν δοκεῖ, προθύμως
ὑμᾶς ἅπαντας δεῖ παρεῖναι· ὃς
ἔχων ἥκῃ παρεσκευασμένον δ᾽ ἂν ἔλθοι ἔχων κατεσκευασμέ- 100
στρατὸν κάλλιστα, δώσω οἱ νον στρατὸν κάλλιστα, δώσω
δῶρα τὰ τιμιώτατα νομί- αὐτῷ δωρεαν ἤδη τιμιωτάτην ἢ
ζεται εἶναι ἐν ἡμετέρου.
"
ποιητέα μέν νυν ταῦτά ἐστι νομίζεται ἐν ἡμετέρᾳ. ποιητέα
οὕτω· ἵνα δὲ μὴ ἰδιοβου- μὲν δὴ ταῦτ᾽ ἔστιν οὕτως· ἵνα 105
λεύειν ὑμῖν δοκέω, τίθημι δὲ μὴ ἰδιοβουλεύειν ὑμῖν δοκῶ,
τὸ πρῆγμα ἐς μέσον, γνώμην τίθημι τὸ πρᾶγμα ἐς μέσον,
κελεύων ὑμέων τὸν βουλό- τίθημι τὸ πρᾶγμα ἐς μέσον,
μενον ἀποφαίνεσθαι.” ταῦ. γνώμην κελεύων ὑμῶν τὸν βου-
τα εἴπας ἐπαύετο.
λόμενον ἀποφαίνεσθαι.”
ΤΟ
110
Mardonius Speaks in Support of the Expedition.
Μετ' αὐτὸν δὲ Μαρδόνιος ἔλεγε· “ ὦ δέσποτα, οὐ 9
μοῦνον εἰς τῶν γενομένων Περσέων ἄριστος ἀλλὰ καὶ
τῶν ἐσομένων, ὃς τά τε ἄλλα λέγων ἐπίκεο ἄριστα καὶ
ἀληθέστατα, καὶ Ἴωνας τοὺς ἐν τῇ Εὐρώπῃ κατοικημέ
νους οὐκ ἐάσεις καταγελάσαι ἡμῖν ἐόντας ἀναξίους. 5
καὶ γὰρ δεινὸν ἂν εἴη πρῆγμα, εἰ Σάκας μὲν καὶ Ἰνδοὺς
καὶ Αἰθίοπάς τε καὶ ᾿Ασσυρίους ἄλλα τε ἔθνεα πολλὰ
καὶ μεγάλα ἀδικήσαντα Πέρσας οὐδέν, ἀλλὰ δύναμιν
προσκτᾶσθαι βουλόμενοι, καταστρεψάμενοι δούλους
ἔχομεν, Έλληνας δὲ ὑπάρξαντας ἀδικίης οὐ τιμωρησό-10
μεθα. τί δείσαντες ; κοίην πλήθεος συστροφήν; κοίην
δὲ χρημάτων δύναμιν; τῶν ἐπιστάμεθα μὲν τὴν μάχην,
ἐπιστάμεθα δὲ τὴν δύναμιν ἐοῦσαν ἀσθενέα· ἔχομεν
δὲ αὐτῶν παῖδας καταστρεψάμενοι, τούτους οἳ ἐν τῇ
78
HERODOTUS.
πι
15 ἡμετέρῃ κατοικημένοι Ιωνές τε καὶ Αἰολέες καὶ Δωριέες
καλέονται. ἐπειρήθην δὲ καὶ αὐτὸς ἤδη ἐπελαύνων ἐπὶ
τοὺς ἄνδρας τούτους ὑπὸ πατρὸς τοῦ σοῦ κελευσθείς,
καί μοι μέχρι Μακεδονίης ἐλάσαντι καὶ ὀλίγον ἀπολι-
πόντι ἐς αὐτὰς Αθήνας ἀπικέσθαι οὐδεὶς ἠντιώθη ἐς
20 μάχην. καίτοι γε ἐώθασι Ἕλληνες, ὡς πυνθάνομαι,
ἀβουλότατα πολέμους ἵστασθαι ὑπό τε ἀγνωμοσύνης
καὶ σκαιότητος. ἐπεὰν γὰρ ἀλλήλοισι πόλεμον προεί-
πωσι, ἐξευρόντες τὸ κάλλιστον χωρίον καὶ λειότατον,
ἐς τοῦτο κατιόντες μάχονται, ὥστε σὺν κακῷ μεγάλῳ
25 οἱ νικῶντες ἀπαλλάσσονται· περὶ δὲ τῶν ἑσσουμένων
οὐδὲ λέγω ἀρχήν, ἐξώλεις γὰρ δὴ γίνονται. τοὺς χρῆν
ἐόντας ὁμογλώσσους κήρυξί τε διαχρεομένους καὶ ἀγγέ-
λοισι καταλαμβάνειν τὰς διαφορὰς καὶ παντὶ μᾶλλον ἢ
μάχῃσι· εἰ δὲ πάντως ἔδεε πολεμέειν πρὸς ἀλλήλους,
30 ἐξευρίσκειν χρῆν τῇ ἑκάτεροί εἰσι δυσχερωτότατοι, καὶ
ταύτῃ πειρᾶν. τρόπῳ τοίνυν οὐ χρηστῷ Ἕλληνες δια-
χρεόμενοι, ἐμέο ἐλάσαντος μέχρι Μακεδονίης γῆς, οὐκ
ἦλθον ἐς τούτου λόγον ὥστε μάχεσθαι. σοὶ δὲ δὴ μέλλει
τίς, ὦ βασιλεῦ, ἀντιώσεσθαι πόλεμον προφέρων, ἄγοντι
35 καὶ πλῆθος τὸ ἐκ τῆς ᾿Ασίης καὶ νέας τὰς ἁπάσας;
ὡς μὲν ἐγὼ δοκέω, οὐκ ἐς τοῦτο θράσεις ἀνήκει τὰ Ἑλ.
λήνων πρήγματα· εἰ δὲ ἄρα ἔγωγε ψευσθείην γνώμῃ
καὶ ἐκεῖνοι ἐπαερθέντες ἀβουλίῃ ἔλθοιεν ἡμῖν ἐς μάχην,
μάθοιεν ἂν ὡς εἰμὲν ἀνθρώπων ἄριστοι τὰ πολέμια.
40 ἔστω δ᾽ ὦν μηδὲν ἀπείρητον· αὐτόματον γὰρ οὐδέν, ἀλλ᾽
ἀπὸ πείρης πάντα ἀνθρώποισι φιλέει γίνεσθαι.
Artabanus Opposes the Expedition.
39
10 Μαρδόνιος μὲν τοσαῦτα ἐπιλεήνας τὴν Ξέρξεω γνώ-
μην ἐπέπαυτο· σιωπώντων δὲ τῶν ἄλλων Περσέων καὶ
BOOK VII.
79
Ο
οὐ τολμώντων γνώμην ἀποδείκνυσθαι ἀντίην τῇ προ-
κειμένῃ, Αρτάβανος ὁ Ὑστάσπεος, πάτρως ἐὼν Ξέρξη,
τῷ δὴ καὶ πίσυνος ἐὼν ἔλεγε τάδε· “ ὦ βασιλεῦ, μὴ 5
λεχθεισέων μὲν γνωμέων ἀντιέων ἀλλήλῃσι οὐκ ἔστι
τὴν ἀμείνω αἱρεόμενον ἑλέσθαι, ἀλλὰ δεῖ τῇ εἰρημένῃ
χράσθαι, λεχθεισέων δὲ ἔστι, ὥσπερ τὸν χρυσὸν τὸν
ἀκήρατον αὐτὸν μὲν ἐπ᾽ ἑωυτοῦ οὐ διαγινώσκομεν, ἐπεὰν
δὲ παρατρίψωμεν ἄλλῳ χρυσῷ, διαγινώσκομεν τὸν 10
ἀμείνω. ἐγὼ δὲ καὶ πατρὶ τῷ σῷ, ἀδελφεῷ δὲ ἐμῷ,
Δαρείῳ ἠγόρευον μὴ στρατεύεσθαι ἐπὶ Σκύθας, ἄνδρας
οὐδαμόθι γῆς ἄστυ νέμοντας. ὁ δὲ ἐλπίζων Σκύθας
τοὺς νομάδας καταστρέψεσθαι ἐμοί τε οὐκ ἐπείθετο,
στρατευσάμενός τε πολλοὺς καὶ ἀγαθοὺς τῆς στρατιῆς 15
ἀποβαλὼν ἀπῆλθε. σὺ δέ, ὦ βασιλεῦ, μέλλεις ἐπ᾽ ἄνδρας
στρατεύεσθαι πολλὸν ἀμείνονας ἢ Σκύθας, οἳ κατὰ θά-
λασσάν τε ἄριστοι καὶ κατὰ γῆν λέγονται εἶναι. τὸ δὲ
αὐτοῖσι ἔνεστι δεινόν, ἐμὲ σοὶ δίκαιόν ἐστι φράζειν.
ζεύξας φῂς τὸν Ἑλλήσποντον ἐλᾶν στρατὸν διὰ τῆς 20
Εὐρώπης ἐς τὴν Ἑλλάδα. καὶ δὴ καὶ συνήνεικέ σε
ἤτοι κατὰ γῆν ἢ καὶ κατὰ θάλασσαν ἑσσωθῆναι, ἢ καὶ
κατ' ἀμφότερα· οἱ γὰρ ἄνδρες λέγονται εἶναι ἄλκιμοι,
πάρεστι δὲ καὶ σταθμώσασθαι, εἰ στρατιήν γε τοσαύτην
σὺν Δάτι καὶ 'Αρταφέρνει ἐλθοῦσαν ἐς τὴν ᾿Αττικήν 25
χώρην μοῦνοι 'Αθηναῖοι διέφθειραν. οὔκων ἀμφοτέρῃ
σφι ἐχώρησε· ἀλλ᾽ ἢν τῇσι νηυσὶ ἐμβάλωσι καὶ νική-
σαντες ναυμαχίῃ πλέωσι ἐς τὸν Ἑλλήσποντον καὶ ἔπειτα
λύσωσι τὴν γέφυραν, τοῦτο δή, βασιλεῦ, γίνεται δεινόν.
ἐγὼ δὲ οὐδεμιῇ σοφίῃ οἰκηίῃ αὐτὸς ταῦτα συμβάλλομαι, 30
ἀλλ᾽ οἷόν κοτε ἡμέας ὀλίγου ἐδέησε καταλαβεῖν πάθος,
ὅτε πατὴρ σὸς ζεύξας Βόσπορον τὸν Θρηίκιον, γεφυρώσας
δὲ ποταμὸν Ἴστρον διέβη ἐπὶ Σκύθας. τότε παντοίοι
T
80
HERODOTUS.
ΤΟ
Ο
ἐγένοντο Σκύθαι δεόμενοι Ἰώνων λῦσαι τὸν πόρον, τοῖσι
35 ἐπετέτραπτο ἡ φυλακὴ τῶν γεφυρέων τοῦ Ἴστρου. καὶ
τότε γε Ιστιαῖος ὁ Μιλήτου τύραννος εἰ ἐπέσπετο τῶν
ἄλλων τυράννων τῇ γνώμῃ μηδὲ ἠναντιώθη, διέργαστο
ἂν τὰ Περσέων πρήγματα. καίτοι καὶ λόγῳ ἀκοῦσαι
δεινόν, ἐπ᾽ ἀνδρί γε ἑνὶ πάντα τὰ βασιλέος πρήγματα
40 γεγενῆσθαι. σὺ ἂν μὴ βουλεύεο ἐς κίνδυνον μηδένα
τοιοῦτον ἀπικέσθαι μηδεμιῆς ἀνάγκης ἐούσης, ἀλλὰ ἐμοὶ
πείθευ. νῦν μὲν τὸν σύλλογον τόνδε διάλυσον· αὖτις δέ,
ὅταν τοι δοκέῃ, προσκεψάμενος ἐπὶ σεωυτοῦ προαγόρευε
τά τοι δοκέει εἶναι ἄριστα. τὸ γὰρ εὖ βουλεύεσθαι κέρ-
45 δος μέγιστον εὑρίσκω ἐόν· εἰ γὰρ καὶ ἐναντιωθῆναί τι
ἐθέλει, βεβούλευται μὲν οὐδὲν ἧσσον εὖ, ἕσσωται δὲ ὑπὸ
τῆς τύχης τὸ βούλευμα· ὁ δὲ βουλευσάμενος αἰσχρῶς,
εἴ οἱ ἡ τύχη ἐπίσποιτο, εὕρημα εὕρηκε, ἧσσον δὲ οὐδέν
οἱ κακῶς βεβούλευται. ὁρᾷς τὰ ὑπερέχοντα ζῷα ὡς
50 κεραυνοῖ ὁ θεὸς οὐδὲ ἐᾷ φαντάζεσθαι, τὰ δὲ σμικρὰ οὐδέν
μιν κνίζει· ὁρᾷς δὲ ὡς ἐς οἰκήματα τὰ μέγιστα αἰεὶ καὶ
δένδρεα τὰ τοιαῦτα ἀποσκήπτει τὰ βέλεα· φιλέει γὰρ
ὁ θεὸς τὰ ὑπερέχοντα πάντα κολούειν. οὕτω δὲ καὶ
στρατὸς πολλὸς ὑπὸ ὀλίγου διαφθείρεται κατὰ τοιόνδε·
55 ἐπεάν σφι ὁ θεὸς φθονήσας φόβον ἐμβάλῃ ἢ βροντήν,
δι' ὧν ἐφθάρησαν ἀναξίως ἑωυτῶν. οὐ γὰρ ἐᾷ φρονέειν
μέγα ὁ θεὸς ἄλλον ἢ ἑωυτόν. ἐπειχθῆναι μέν νυν πᾶν
πρῆγμα τίκτει σφάλματα, ἐκ τῶν ζημίαι μεγάλαι φιλέ-
ουσι γίνεσθαι· ἐν δὲ τῷ ἐπισχεῖν ἔνεστι ἀγαθά, εἰ μὴ
60 παραυτίκα δοκέοντα εἶναι, ἀλλ᾽ ἀνὰ χρόνον ἐξεύροι τις
ἄν. σοὶ μὲν δὴ ταῦτα, ὦ βασιλεῦ, συμβουλεύω· σὺ δέ,
ὦ παί Γοβρύεω Μαρδόνιε, παῦσαι λέγων λόγους ματαί
ους περὶ Ἑλλήνων οὐκ ἐόντων ἀξίων φλαύρως ἀκούειν.
Ἕλληνας γὰρ διαβάλλων ἐπαείρεις αὐτὸν βασιλέα
0
BOOK VII.
81
Ο
Ο
0
στρατεύεσθαι· αὐτοῦ δὲ τούτου εἵνεκα δοκέεις μοι πά- 65
σαν προθυμίην ἐκτείνειν. μή νυν οὕτω γένηται. διαβολή
γάρ ἐστι δεινότατον· ἐν τῇ δύο μέν εἰσι οἱ ἀδικέοντες,
εἷς δὲ ὁ ἀδικεόμενος. ὁ μὲν γὰρ διαβάλλων αδικέει οὐ
παρεόντι κατηγορέων, ὁ δὲ ἀδικέει ἀναπειθόμενος πρὶν
ἢ ἀτρεκέως ἐκμάθῃ· ὁ δὲ δὴ ἀπεὼν τοῦ λόγου τάδε ἐν 70
αὐτοῖσι ἀδικέεται, διαβληθείς τε ὑπὸ τοῦ ἑτέρου καὶ
νομισθεὶς πρὸς τοῦ ἑτέρου κακὸς εἶναι. ἀλλ᾽ εἰ δὴ δεῖ
γε πάντως ἐπὶ τοὺς ἄνδρας τούτους στρατεύεσθαι, φέρε,
βασιλεὺς μὲν αὐτὸς ἐν ἤθεσι τοῖσι Περσέων μενέτω,
ἡμέων δὲ ἀμφοτέρων παραβαλλομένων τὰ τέκνα, στρα- 75
τηλάτεε αὐτὸς σὺ ἐπιλεξάμενός τε ἄνδρας τοὺς ἐθέλεις
καὶ λαβὼν στρατιὴν ὁκόσην τινὰ βούλεαι. καὶ ἢν μὲν
τῇ σὺ λέγεις ἀναβαίνῃ βασιλέι τὰ πρήγματα, κτεινέσθων
οἱ ἐμοὶ παῖδες, πρὸς δὲ αὐτοῖσι καὶ ἐγώ· ἦν δὲ τῇ ἐγὼ
προλέγω, οἱ σοὶ ταῦτα πασχόντων, σὺν δέ σφι καὶ σύ,80
ἣν ἀπονοστήσῃς. εἰ δὲ ταῦτα μὲν ὑποδύνειν οὐκ ἐθελή-
σεις, σὺ δὲ πάντως στράτευμα ἀνάξεις ἐπὶ τὴν Ἑλλάδα,
ἀκούσεσθαί τινά φημι τῶν αὐτοῦ τῇδε ὑπολειπομένων
Μαρδόνιον, μέγα τι κακὸν ἐξεργασμένον Πέρσας, ὑπὸ
κυνῶν τε καὶ ὀρνίθων διαφορεύμενον ἤ κου ἐν γῇ τῇ 85
Αθηναίων ἢ σέ γε ἐν τῇ Λακεδαιμονίων, εἰ μὴ ἄρα καὶ
πρότερον κατ᾿ ὁδόν, γνόντα ἐπ᾽ οἵους ἄνδρας ἀναγινώ-
σκεις στρατεύεσθαι βασιλέα.”
Xerxes Retorts Angrily.
Αρτάβανος μὲν ταῦτα ἔλεξε, Ξέρξης δὲ θυμωθείς 11
ἀμείβεται τοισίδε· “Αρτάβανε, πατρὸς εἰς τοῦ ἐμοῦ
ἀδελφεός· τοῦτό σε ῥύσεται μηδένα ἄξιον μισθὸν λαβεῖν
ἐπέων ματαίων. καί τοι ταύτην τὴν ἀτιμίην προστί
θημι ἐόντι κακῷ καὶ ἀθύμῳ, μήτε συστρατεύεσθαι ἔμοιγε 5
4*
82
HERODOTUS.
ἐπὶ τὴν Ἑλλάδα αὐτοῦ τε μένειν ἅμα τῇσι γυναιξί· ἐγὼ
δὲ καὶ ἄνευ σέο ὅσα περ εἶπα ἐπιτελέα ποιήσω. μὴ γὰρ
εἴην ἐκ Δαρείου τοῦ Ὑστάσπεος τοῦ ᾿Αρσάμεος τοῦ
Αριαράμνεω τοῦ Τεΐσπεος τοῦ Κύρου τοῦ Καμβύσεω
10 τοῦ Τεΐσπεος τοῦ ᾿Αχαιμένεος γεγονώς, μὴ τιμωρησά-
μενος Αθηναίους, εὖ ἐπιστάμενος ὅτι εἰ ἡμεῖς ἡσυχίην
ἄξομεν, ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἐκεῖνοι, ἀλλὰ καὶ μάλα στρατεύσονται
ἐπὶ τὴν ἡμετέρην, εἰ χρὴ σταθμώσασθαι τοῖσι ὑπαρηγμέ
νοισι ἐξ ἐκείνων, οἳ Σάρδις τε ἐνέπρησαν καὶ ἤλασαν ἐς
15 τὴν Ασίην. οὔκων ἐξαναχωρέειν οὐδετέροισι δυνατῶς
ἔχει, ἀλλὰ ποιέειν ἢ παθεῖν προκέεται ἀγών, ἵνα ἢ τάδε
πάντα ὑπὸ Ἕλλησι ἢ ἐκεῖνα πάντα ὑπὸ Πέρσῃσι γένη-
ται· τὸ γὰρ μέσον οὐδὲν τῆς ἔχθρης ἐστί. καλὸν ὧν
προπεπονθότας ἡμέας τιμωρέειν ἤδη γίνεται, ἵνα καὶ τὸ
20 δεινὸν τὸ πείσομαι τοῦτο μάθω, ἐλάσας ἐπ᾽ ἄνδρας τού-
τους, τούς γε καὶ Πέλοψ ὁ Φρύξ, ἐὼν πατέρων τῶν ἐμῶν
δοῦλος, κατεστρέψατο οὕτω ὡς καὶ ἐς τόδε αὐτοί τε
ἄνθρωποι καὶ ἡ γῆ αὐτῶν ἐπώνυμοι τοῦ καταστρεψα
μένου καλέονται.”
Xerxes' Dream, and Change of Plan.
12 Ταῦτα μὲν ἐπὶ τοσοῦτο ἐλέγετο, μετὰ δὲ εὐφρόνη τε
ἐγίνετο καὶ Ξέρξην ἔκνιζε ἡ ᾿Αρταβάνου γνώμη· νυκτὶ
δὲ βουλὴν διδοὺς πάγχυ εὕρισκέ οἱ οὐ πρῆγμα εἶναι
στρατεύεσθαι ἐπὶ τὴν Ἑλλάδα. δεδογμένων δέ οἱ αὖτις
5 τούτων κατύπνωσε, καὶ δή κου ἐν τῇ νυκτὶ εἶδε ὄψιν
τοιήνδε, ὡς λέγεται ὑπὸ Περσέων. ἐδόκεε ὁ Ξέρξης ἄν
δρα οἱ ἐπιστάντα μέγαν τε καὶ εὐειδέα εἰπεῖν, “ μετὰ δὴ
βουλεύεαι, ὦ Πέρσα, στράτευμα μὴ ἄγειν ἐπὶ τὴν Ἑλλά-
δα, προείπας ἁλίζειν Πέρσας στρατόν; οὔτε ὧν μετα-
10 βουλευόμενος ποιέεις εὖ, οὔτε ὁ συγγνωσόμενος τοι πάρα
Ο
αν
BOOK VII.
83
ἀλλ᾿ ὥσπερ τῆς ἡμέρης ἐβουλεύσαο ποιέειν, ταύτην ἔθι
τῶν ὁδῶν.” τὸν μὲν ταῦτα εἰπόντα ἐδόκεε ὁ Ξέρξης 13
ἀποπτάσθαι, ἡμέρης δὲ ἐπιλαμψάσης ὀνείρου μὲν τούτου
λόγον οὐδένα ἐποιέετο, ὁ δὲ Περσέων συναλίσας τοὺς
καὶ πρότερον συνέλεξε, ἔλεξέ σφι τάδε· “ ἄνδρες Πέρ-
σαι, συγγνώμην μοι ἔχετε ὅτι ἀγχίστροφα βουλεύομαι· 5
φρενῶν τε γὰρ ἐς τὰ ἐμεωυτοῦ πρῶτα οὔκω ἀνήκω, καὶ
οἱ παρηγορεόμενοι ἐκεῖνα ποιέειν οὐδένα χρόνον μεν
ἀπέχονται. ἀκούσαντι μέντοι μοι τῆς ᾿Αρταβάνου
γνώμης παραυτίκα μὲν ἡ νεότης ἐπέζεσε, ὥστε ἀεικέ-
στερα ἀπορρίψαι ἔπεα ἐς ἄνδρα πρεσβύτερον ἢ χρεόν· 10
νῦν μέντοι συγγνοὺς χρήσομαι τῇ ἐκείνου γνώμῃ. ὡς
ὧν μεταδεδογμένον μοι μὴ στρατεύεσθαι ἐπὶ τὴν Ἑλλά
δα, ἥσυχοι ἔστε.”
Xerxes has a Second Dream, which he Communicates to
Artabanus.
ע:
Πέρσαι μὲν ὡς ἤκουσαν ταῦτα, κεχαρηκότες προσεκύ- 14
νεον. νυκτὸς δὲ γενομένης αὐτις τὠυτὸ ὄνειρον τῷ Ξέρξη
κατυπνωμένῳ ἔλεγε ἐπιστάν, “ ὦ παῖ Δαρείου, καὶ δὴ
φαίνεαι ἐν Πέρσῃσί τε ἀπειπάμενος τὴν στρατηλασίην
καὶ τὰ ἐμὰ ἔπεα ἐν οὐδενὶ ποιησάμενος λόγῳ ὡς παρ' 5
οὐδενὸς ἀκούσας ; εὖ νυν τόδ᾽ ἴσθι. ἤν περ μὴ αὐτίκα
στρατηλατέῃς, τάδε τοι ἐξ αὐτῶν ἀνασχήσει· ὡς καὶ
μέγας καὶ πολλὸς ἐγένεο ἐν ὀλίγῳ χρόνῳ, οὕτω καὶ
ταπεινὸς ὀπίσω κατὰ τάχος ἔσεαι.” Ξέρξης μὲν περι- 15
δεὴς γενόμενος τῇ ὄψι ἀνά τε ἔδραμε ἐκ τῆς κοίτης καὶ
πέμπει ἄγγελον ἐπὶ ᾿Αρτάβανον καλέοντα· ἀπικομένῳ
δέ οἱ ἔλεγε Ξέρξης τάδε· “Αρτάβανε, ἐγὼ τὸ παραυ-
τίκα μὲν οὐκ ἐσωφρόνεον εἴπας ἐς σὲ μάταια ἔπεα 5
χρηστῆς εἵνεκα συμβουλίης· μετὰ μέντοι οὐ πολλὸν
84
HERODOTUS.
Ο
χρόνον μετέγνων, ἔγνων δὲ ταῦτά μοι ποιητέα ἐόντα τὰ
σὺ ὑπεθήκαο. οὔκων δυνατός τοι εἰμὶ ταῦτα βουλόμε-
νος ποιέειν· τετραμμένῳ γὰρ δὴ καὶ μετεγνωκότι ἐπι-
10 φοιτέον ὄνειρον φαντάζεταί μοι οὐδαμῶς συνεπαινέον
ποιέειν με ταῦτα· νῦν δὲ καὶ διαπειλῆσαν οἴχεται. εἰ
ὧν θεός ἐστι ὁ ἐπιπέμπων καί οἱ πάντως ἐν ἡδονῇ ἐστι
γενέσθαι στρατηλασίην ἐπὶ τὴν Ἑλλάδα, ἐπιπτήσεται
καὶ σοὶ τὠυτὸ τοῦτο ὄνειρον, ὁμοίως καὶ ἐμοὶ ἐντελλό
15 μενον. εὑρίσκω δὲ ὧδε ἂν γινόμενα ταῦτα, εἰ λάβοις
τὴν ἐμὴν σκευὴν πᾶσαν, καὶ ἐνδὺς μετὰ τοῦτο ἵζοιο ἐς
τὸν ἐμὸν θρόνον καὶ ἔπειτα ἐν κοίτῃ τῇ ἐμῇ κατυπνώ
σειας.”
Artabanus's Philosophy of Dreams.
16 Ξέρξης μὲν ταῦτά οἱ ἔλεγε· ᾿Αρτάβανος δὲ οὐ πρώτῳ
κελεύσματι πειθόμενος, οἷα οὐκ ἀξιεύμενος ἐς τὸν βασι-
λήιον θρόνον ίζεσθαι, τέλος ὡς ἠναγκάζετο εἴπας τάδε
ἐποίεε τὸ κελευόμενον· “ ἴσον ἐκεῖνο, ὦ βασιλεῦ, παρ'
5 ἐμοὶ κέκριται, φρονέειν τε εὖ καὶ τῷ λέγοντι χρηστὰ
ἐθέλειν πείθεσθαι· τά σε καὶ ἀμφότερα περιήκοντα
ἀνθρώπων κακῶν ὁμιλίαι σφάλλουσι, κατά περ τὴν
πάντων χρησιμωτάτην ἀνθρώποισι θάλασσαν πνεύματά
φασι ἀνέμων ἐμπίπτοντα οὐ περιορᾶν φύσι τῇ ἑωυτῆς
10 χρᾶσθαι. ἐμὲ δὲ ἀκούσαντα πρὸς σεῦ κακῶς οὐ τοσοῦτο
ἔδακε λύπη, ὅσον γνωμέων δύο προκειμενέων Πέρσῃσι,
τῆς μὲν ὕβριν αὐξανούσης, τῆς δὲ καταπαυούσης καὶ
λεγούσης ὡς κακὸν εἴη διδάσκειν τὴν ψυχὴν πλέον τι
δίζησθαι αἰεὶ ἔχειν τοῦ παρεόντος, τοιουτέων προκει-
15 μενέων γνωμέων ὅτι τὴν σφαλερωτέρην σεωυτῷ τε καὶ
Πέρσῃσι ἀναιρέο. νῦν ὦν, ἐπειδὴ τέτραψαι ἐπὶ τὴν
ἀμείνω, φῄς τοι μετιέντι τὸν ἐπ᾽ Ἕλληνας στόλον ἐπι·
BOOK VII.
85
φοιτᾶν ὄνειρον θεοῦ τινος πομπῇ, οὐκ ἐῶντά σε κατα-
λύειν τον στόλον. ἀλλ᾽ οὐδὲ ταῦτά ἐστι, ὦ παῖ, θεῖα.
ἐνύπνια γὰρ τὰ ἐς ἀνθρώπους πεπλανημένα τοιαῦτά 20
ἐστι οἷά σε ἐγὼ διδάξω, ἔτεσι σεῦ πολλοῖσι πρεσβύτερος
ἐών. πεπλανῆσθαι αὗται μάλιστα ἐώθασι αἱ ὄψιες τῶν
ὀνειράτων, τά τις ἡμέρης φροντίζει· ἡμεῖς δὲ τὰς πρὸ
τοῦ ἡμέρας ταύτην τὴν στρατηλασίην καὶ τὸ κάρτα
εἴχομεν μετὰ χεῖρας. εἰ δὲ ἄρα μή ἐστι τοῦτο τοιοῦτο 25
οἷον ἐγὼ διαιρέω, ἀλλά τι τοῦ θεοῦ μετέχον, σὺ πᾶν
αὐτὸ συλλαβὼν εἴρηκας· φανήτω γὰρ δὴ καὶ ἐμοί, ὡς
καὶ σοί, διακελευόμενον· φανῆναι δὲ οὐδὲν μᾶλλόν μοι
ὀφείλει ἔχοντι τὴν σὴν ἐσθῆτα ἢ οὐ καὶ τὴν ἐμήν, οὐδέ
τι μᾶλλον ἐν κοίτῃ τῇ σῇ ἀναπαυομένῳ ἢ οὐ καὶ ἐν τῇ 30
ἐμῇ, εἴ πέρ γε καὶ ἄλλως θέλει φανῆναι. οὐ γὰρ δὴ ἐς
τοσοῦτό γε εὐηθείης ἀνήκει τοῦτο, ὅ τι δή κοτέ ἐστι τὸ
ἐπιψαινόμενόν τοι ἐν τῷ ὕπνῳ, ὥστε δόξει ἐμὲ ὁρέον σὲ
εἶναι, τῇ σῇ ἐσθῆτι τεκμαιρόμενον. εἰ δὲ ἐμὲ μὲν ἐν
οὐξενὶ λόγῳ ποιήσεται οὐδὲ ἀξιώσει ἐπιφανῆναι, οὔτε 35
ὴν τὴν ἐμὴν ἐσθῆτα ἔχω οὔτε ἢν τὴν σήν, οὐδὲ ἐπιφοι-
τήνει, τοῦτο ἤδη μαθητέον ἔσται· εἰ γὰρ δὴ ἐπιφοιτήσει
γε συνεχέως, φαίην ἂν καὶ αὐτὸς θεῖον εἶναι. εἰ δέ τοι
οὕτω δεδόκηται γίνεσθαι καὶ οὐκ οἷά τε αὐτὸ παρατρέ
ψα, ἀλλ᾽ ἤδη δεῖ ἐμὲ ἐν κοίτῃ τῇ σῇ κατυπνῶσαι, φέρε, 40
τούτων ἐξ ἐμεῦ ἐπιτελευμένων φανήτω καὶ ἐμοί. μέχρι
δὲ τούτου τῇ παρεούσῃ γνώμῃ χρήσομαι.”
The Dream Visits Artabanus; he Assents to the Expedition.
Τοσαῦτα εἴπας Αρτάβανος, ἐλπίζων Ξέρξην ἀποδέ- 17
ξειν λέγοντα οὐδέν, ἐποίεε τὸ κελευόμενον. ἐνδὺς δὲ τὴν
Ξέρξεω ἐσθῆτα καὶ ἱζόμενος ἐς τὸν βασιλήιον θρόνον
ὡς μετὰ ταῦτα κοῖτον ἐποιέετο, ἦλθέ οἱ κατυπνωμένῳ
86
HERODOTUS.
**
<<
5 τὠυτὸ ὄνειρον τὸ καὶ παρὰ Ξέρξην ἐφοίτα, ὑπερστὰν δὲ
τοῦ ᾿Αρταβάνου εἶπε τάδε· “ ἆρα σὺ δὴ κεῖνος εἷς ὁ
ἀποσπεύδων Ξέρξην στρατεύεσθαι ἐπὶ τὴν Ἑλλάδα ὡς
δὴ κηδόμενος αὐτοῦ; ἀλλ᾽ οὔτε ἐς τὸ μετέπειτα οὔτε ἐς
τὸ παραυτίκα νῦν καταπροΐξεαι ἀποτράπων τὸ χρεὸν
10 γενέσθαι. Ξέρξην δὲ τὰ δεῖ ἀνηκουστέοντα παθεῖν,
18 αὐτῷ ἐκείνῳ δεδήλωται.” ταῦτά τε ἐδόκεε ᾿Αρτάβανος
τὸ ὄνειρον ἀπειλέειν, καὶ θερμοῖσι σιδηρίοισι ἐκκαίειν
αὐτοῦ μέλλειν τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς. καὶ ὃς ἀμβώσας μέγα
ἀναθρώσκει, καὶ παριζόμενος Ξέρξῃ, ὡς τὴν ὄψιν οἱ τοῦ
5 ἐνυπνίου διεξῆλθε ἀπηγεόμενος, δεύτερά οἱ λέγει τάδε·
· ἐγὼ μέν, ὦ βασιλεῦ, οἷα ἄνθρωπος ἰδὼν ἤδη πολλά τε
&
καὶ μεγάλα πεσόντα πρήγματα ὑπὸ ἡσσόνων, οὐκ ἔων
σε τὰ πάντα τῇ ἡλικίῃ εἴκειν, ἐπιστάμενος ὡς κακὸν εἴη
τὸ πολλῶν ἐπιθυμέειν, μεμνημένος μὲν τὸν ἐπὶ Μασσα-
10 γέτας Κύρου στόλον ὡς ἔπρηξε, μεμνημένος δὲ καὶ τὸν
ἐπ' Αιθίοπας τὸν Καμβύσεω, συστρατευόμενος δὲ καὶ
Δαρείῳ ἐπὶ Σκύθας. ἐπιστάμενος ταῦτα γνώμην εἶχον
ἀτρεμίζοντά σε μακαριστὸν εἶναι πρὸς πάντων ἀνθρώ
πων. ἐπεὶ δὲ δαιμονίη τις γίνεται ὁρμή, καὶ Ἕλληνας,
15 ὡς οἶκε, φθορή τις καταλαμβάνει θεήλατος, ἐγὼ μὲν καὶ
αὐτὸς τράπομαι καὶ τὴν γνώμην μετατίθεμαι, σὺ δὲ
σήμηνον μὲν Πέρσῃσι τὰ ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ πεμπόμενα, χρᾶ-
σθαι δὲ κέλευε τοῖσι ἐκ σέο πρώτοισι προειρημένοισι ἐς
τὴν παρασκευήν, ποίεε δὲ οὕτω ὅκως τοῦ θεοῦ παρα-
20 διδόντος τῶν σῶν ἐνδεήσει μηδέν.” τούτων δὲ λεχθέν.
των, ἐνθαῦτα ἐπαερθέντες τῇ ὄψι, ὡς ἡμέρη ἐγένετο
τάχιστα, Ξέρξης τε ὑπερετίθετο ταῦτα Πέρσῃσι, καὶ
Αρτάβανος, ὃς πρότερον ἀποσπεύδων μοῦνος ἐφαίνετο,
τότε ἐπισπεύδων φανερὸς ἦν.
1-
BOOK VII.
87
Xerxes' Third Dream; Preparations of Unexampled Mag-
nitude.
Ο
Ορμημένῳ δὲ Ξέρξη στρατηλατέειν μετὰ ταῦτα τρίτη 19
ὄψις ἐν τῷ ὕπνῳ ἐγένετο, τὴν οἱ Μάγοι ἔκριναν ἀκού-
σαντες φέρειν τε ἐπὶ πᾶσαν γῆν δουλεύσειν τέ οἱ πάντας
ἀνθρώπους. ἡ δὲ ὄψις ἦν ἥδε· ἐδόκεε ὁ Ξέρξης ἐστε-
φανῶσθαι ἐλαίης θαλλῷ, ἀπὸ δὲ τῆς ἐλαίης τοὺς κλά- 5
δους γῆν πᾶσαν ἐπισχεῖν, μετὰ δὲ ἀφανισθῆναι περὶ τῇ
κεφαλῇ κείμενον τὸν στέφανον. κρινάντων δὲ ταῦτα
τῶν Μάγων, Περσέων τε τῶν συλλεχθέντων αὐτίκα πᾶς
ἀνὴρ ἐς τὴν ἀρχὴν τὴν ἑωυτοῦ ἀπελάσας είχε προθυμίην
πᾶσαν ἐπὶ τοῖσι εἰρημένοισι, θέλων αὐτὸς ἕκαστος τὰ 10
προκείμενα δῶρα λαβεῖν, καὶ Ξέρξης τοῦ στρατοῦ οὕτω
ἐπάγερσιν ποιέεται, χῶρον πάντα ἐρευνῶν τῆς ἠπείρου.
ἀπὸ γὰρ Αἰγύπτου ἁλώσιος ἐπὶ μὲν τέσσερα ἔτεα πλήρεα 20
παραρτέετο στρατιήν τε καὶ τὰ πρόσφορα τῇ στρατιῇ,
πέμπτῳ δὲ ἔτεῖ ἀνομένῳ ἐστρατηλάτες χειρὶ μεγάλῃ
πλήθεος. στόλων γὰρ τῶν ἡμεῖς ἴδμεν πολλῷ δὴ μέ-
γιστος οὗτος ἐγένετο, ὥστε μήτε τὸν Δαρείου τὸν ἐπὶ 5
Σκύθας παρὰ τοῦτον μηδένα φαίνεσθαι, μήτε τὸν Σκυ
θικόν, ὅτε Σκύθαι Κιμμερίους διώκοντες ἐς τὴν Μηδικὴν
χώρην ἐσβαλόντες σχεδόν πάντα τὰ ἄνω τῆς Ασίης
καταστρεψάμενοι ἐνέμοντο, τῶν εἵνεκεν ὕστερον Δαρείος
ἐτιμωρέετο, μήτε κατὰ τὰ λεγόμενα τὸν ᾿Ατρειδέων ἐς 10
Ἴλιον, μήτε τὸν Μυσῶν τε καὶ Τευκρῶν τὸν πρὸ τῶν
Τρωικῶν γενόμενον, οἳ διαβάντες ἐς τὴν Εὐρώπην κατὰ
Βόσπορον τούς τε Θρήικας κατεστρέψαντο πάντας καὶ
ἐπὶ τὸν Ιόνιον πόντον κατέβησαν, μέχρι τε Πηνειοῦ
ποταμοῦ τὸ πρὸς μεσαμβρίης ἤλασαν. αὗται αἱ πᾶσαι 21
οὐδ᾽ εἰ ἕτεραι πρὸς ταύτῃσι γενόμεναι στρατηλασίαι
88
HERODOTUS.
22
μιῆς τῆσδε οὐκ ἄξιαι. τί γὰρ οὐκ ἤγαγε ἐκ τῆς ᾿Ασιης
ἔθνος ἐπὶ τὴν Ἑλλάδα Ξέρξης; κοῖον δὲ πινόμενόν μιν
5 ὕδωρ οὐκ ἐπέλιπε, πλὴν τῶν μεγάλων ποταμῶν; οἱ μὲν
γὰρ νέας παρείχοντο, οἱ δὲ ἐς πεζὸν ἐτετάχατο, τοῖσι δὲ
ἵππος προσετέτακτο, τοῖσι δὲ ἱππαγωγὰ πλοῖα ἅμα
στρατευομένοισι, τοῖσι δὲ ἐς τὰς γεφύρας μακρὰς νέας
παρέχειν, τοῖσι δὲ σῖτά τε καὶ νέας.
The Canal at Athos.
Καὶ τοῦτο μέν, ὡς προσπταισάντων τῶν πρώτων περι-
πλεόντων περὶ τὸν "Αθων, προετοιμάζετο ἐκ τριῶν ἐτέων
κου μάλιστα τὰ ἐς τὸν Αθων. ἐν γὰρ Ἐλαιοῦντι τῆς
Χερσονήσου ὅρμεον τριήρεες· ἐνθεῦτεν δὲ ὁρμεόμενοι
5 ὤρυσσον ὑπὸ μαστίγων παντοδαποὶ τῆς στρατιῆς, διά-
δοχοι δ᾽ ἐφοίτεον· ὤρυσσον δὲ καὶ οἱ περὶ τὸν ᾿Αθων
κατοικημένοι. Βουβάρης δὲ ὁ Μεγαβάζου καὶ ᾿Αρτα-
χαίης ὁ ᾿Αρταίου ἄνδρες Πέρσαι ἐπέστασαν τοῦ ἔργου.
ὁ γὰρ Αθως ἐστὶ ὄρος μέγα τε καὶ ὀνομαστόν, ἐς θάλασ
10 σαν κατήκον, οἰκημένον ὑπὸ ἀνθρώπων. τῇ δὲ τελευτᾷ
ἐς τὴν ἤπειρον τὸ ὄρος, χερσονησοειδές τε ἐστὶ καὶ
ἰσθμὸς ὡς δυώδεκα σταδίων· πεδίον δὲ τοῦτο καὶ κολω-
νοὶ οὐ μεγάλοι ἐκ θαλάσσης τῆς ᾿Ακανθίων ἐπὶ θάλασ
σαν τὴν ἀντίον Τορώνης. ἐν δὲ τῷ ἰσθμῷ τούτῳ, ἐς τὸν
15 τελευτᾷ ὁ Αθως, Σάνη πόλις Ἑλλὰς οἴκηται, αἱ δὲ ἐκτὸς
Σάνης, ἔσω δὲ τοῦ ᾿Αθω οἰκημέναι, τὰς τότε ὁ Πέρσης
νησιώτιδας ἀντὶ ἠπειρωτίδων ὥρμητο ποιέειν· εἰσὶ δὲ
αἵδε, Δῖον, Ολόφυξος, ᾿Ακρόθῳον, Θύσσος, Κλεωναί.
23 πόλιες μὲν αὗται αἳ τὸν Αθων νέμονται, ὤρυσσον δὲ
ὧδε δασάμενοι τὸν χῶρον οἱ βάρβαροι κατὰ ἔθνεα·
κατὰ Σάνην πόλιν σχοινοτενὲς ποιησάμενοι, ἐπείτε ἐγί-
νετο βαθέα ἡ διώρυξ, οἱ μὲν κατώτατα ἑστεῶτες ὤρυσσον,
BOOK VII.
89
ἕτεροι δὲ παρεδίδοσαν τὸν αἰεὶ ἐξορυσσόμενον χοῦν ἄλ- 5
λοισι κατύπερθε ἑστεῶσι ἐπὶ βάθρων, οἱ δ᾽ αὖ ἐκδεκό-
μενοι ἑτέροισι, ἕως ἀπίκοντο ἐς τοὺς ἀνωτάτω· οὗτοι δὲ
ἐξεφόρεόν τε καὶ ἐξέβαλλον. τοῖσι μέν νυν ἄλλοισι
πλὴν Φοινίκων καταρρηγνύμενοι οἱ κρημνοὶ τοῦ ὀρύγμα-
τος πόνον διπλήσιον παρεῖχον· ἅτε γὰρ τοῦ τε ἄνω 10
στόματος καὶ τοῦ κάτω τὰ αὐτὰ μέτρα ποιευμένων,
ἔμελλέ σφι τοιοῦτο ἀποβήσεσθαι. οἱ δὲ Φοίνικες σου
φίην ἔν τε τοῖσι ἄλλοισι ἔργοισι ἀποδείκνυνται καὶ δὴ
καὶ ἐν ἐκείνῳ. ἀπολαχόντες γὰρ μόριον ὅσον αὐτοῖσι
ἐπέβαλλε, ὤρυσσον τὸ μὲν ἄνω στόμα τῆς διώρυχος 15
ποιεῦντες διπλήσιον ἢ ὅσον ἔδεε αὐτὴν τὴν διώρυχα
γενέσθαι, προβαίνοντος δὲ τοῦ ἔργου συνῆγον αἰεί·
κάτω τε δὴ ἐγίνετο καὶ ἐξισοῦτο τοῖσι ἄλλοισι τὸ ἔργον.
ἐνθαῦτα λειμών ἐστι, ἵνα σφι ἀγορή τε ἐγίνετο καὶ
πρητήριον· σῖτος δέ σφι πολλὸς ἐφοίτα ἐκ τῆς ᾿Ασίης 20
ἀληλεσμένος. ὡς μὲν ἐμὲ συμβαλλόμενον εὑρίσκειν, 24
μεγαλοφροσύνης εἵνεκεν αὐτὸ Ξέρξης ὀρύσσειν ἐκέλευε,
ἐθέλων τε δύναμιν ἀποδείκνυσθαι καὶ μνημόσυνα λιπέ
σθαι· παρεὸν γὰρ μηδένα πόνον λαβόντας τὸν ἰσθμὸν
τὰς νέας διειρύσαι, ὀρύσσειν ἐκέλευε διώρυχα τῇ θαλάσ. 5
σῃ εὖρος ὡς δύο τριήρεας πλέειν ὁμοῦ ἐλαστρεομένας.
τοῖσι δὲ αὐτοῖσι τούτοισι, τοϊσί περ καὶ τὸ ὄρυγμα,
προσετέτακτο καὶ τὸν Στρυμόνα ποταμὸν ζεύξαντας
γεφυρώσαι.
Cables for the Bridges; Deposit of Stores.
Ταῦτα μέν νυν οὕτω ἐποίεε, παρεσκευάζετο δὲ καὶ 25
ὅπλα ἐς τὰς γεφύρας βύβλινά τε καὶ λευκολίνου, ἐπι-
τάξας Φοίνιξί τε καὶ Αἰγυπτίοισι, καὶ σιτία τῇ στρα-
τιῇ καταβάλλειν, ἵνα μὴ λιμήνειε ἡ στρατιὴ μηδὲ τὰ
90
HERODOTUS.
5 ὑποζύγια ἐλαυνόμενα ἐπὶ τὴν Ἑλλάδα· ἀναπυθόμενος
δὲ τοὺς χώρους καταβάλλειν ἐκέλευε ἵνα ἐπιτηδεότατον
εἴη, ἄλλα ἄλλῃ ἀγινέοντας ὁλκάσι τε καὶ πορθμηίοισι
ἐκ τῆς ᾿Ασίης πανταχόθεν. τὸν δὲ ὧν σῖτον ἐς Λευκὴν
ἀκτὴν καλεομένην τῆς Θρηίκης ἀγίνεον, οἱ δὲ ἐς Τυρό
10 διζαν τὴν Περινθίων, οἱ δὲ ἐς Δορίσκον, οἱ δὲ ἐς Ἠιόνα
τὴν ἐπὶ Στρυμόνι, οἱ δὲ ἐς Μακεδονίην διατεταγμένοι.
March of the Host to Celaenae; Pythius's Wealth.
26 Ἐν ᾧ δὲ οὗτοι τὸν προκείμενον πόνον ἐργάζοντο, ἐν
τούτῳ ὁ πεζὸς ἅπας συλλελεγμένος ἅμα Ξέρξῃ ἐπο-
ρεύετο ἐς Σάρδις, ἐκ Κριτάλλων ὁρμηθεὶς τῶν ἐν Καπ-
παδοκίῃ· ἐνθαῦτα γὰρ εἴρητο συλλέγεσθαι πάντα τὸν
5 κατ᾽ ἤπειρον μέλλοντα ἅμα αὐτῷ Ξέρξῃ πορεύεσθαι
στρατόν. ὃς μέν νυν τῶν ὑπάρχων στρατὸν κάλλιστα
ἐσταλμένον ἀγαγὼν τὰ προκείμενα παρὰ βασιλέος ἔλαβε
δῶρα, οὐκ ἔχω φράσαι· οὐδὲ γὰρ ἀρχὴν ἐς κρίσιν τού-
του πέρι ἐλθόντας οἶδα. οἱ δὲ ἐπείτε διαβάντες τὸν
10 Αλυν ποταμὸν ὡμίλησαν τῇ Φρυγίῃ, δι' αὐτῆς πορευό-
μενοι ἀπίκοντο ἐς Κελαινάς, ἵνα πηγαὶ ἀναδιδούσι
Μαιάνδρου ποταμοῦ καὶ ἑτέρου οὐκ ἐλάσσονος ἢ Μαι-
άνδρου, τῷ οὔνομα τυγχάνει ἐὸν Καταρρήκτης, ὃς ἐξ
αὐτῆς τῆς ἀγορᾶς τῆς Κελαινέων ἀνατέλλων ἐς τὸν
15 Μαίανδρον ἐκδιδοῖ· ἐν τῇ καὶ ὁ τοῦ Σιληνοῦ Μαρσύεω
ἀσκὸς ἀνακρέμαται, τὸν ὑπὸ Φρυγών λόγος ἔχει ὑπὸ
27 Απόλλωνος ἐκδαρέντα ἀνακρεμασθῆναι. ἐν ταύτῃ τῇ
πόλι ὑποκατήμενος Πύθιος ὁ Ατυος ἀνὴρ Λυδὸς ἐξείνισε
τὴν βασιλέος στρατιὴν πᾶσαν ξεινίοισι μεγίστοισι καὶ
αὐτὸν Ξέρξην, χρήματά τε ἐπαγγέλλετο βουλόμενος ἐς
5 τὸν πόλεμον παρέχειν. ἐπαγγελλομένου δὲ χρήματα
Πυθίου, εἴρετο Ξέρξης Περσέων τοὺς παρεόντας τίς τε
0
Ο
BOOK VII.
91
T
ἐὼν ἀνδρῶν Πύθιος καὶ κόσα χρήματα ἐκτημένος ἐπαγ-
γέλλοιτο ταῦτα. οἱ δὲ εἶπαν, “ ὦ βασιλεῦ, οὗτός ἐστι
ὅς τοι τὸν πατέρα Δαρεῖον ἐδωρήσατο τῇ πλατανίστῳ
τῇ χρυσέῃ καὶ τῇ ἀμπέλῳ· ὃς καὶ νῦν ἐστι πρῶτος 10
ἀνθρώπων πλούτῳ τῶν ἡμεῖς ἴδμεν μετὰ σέ.” θωυμά- 28
σας δὲ τῶν ἐπέων τὸ τελευταῖον Ξέρξης αὐτὸς δεύτερα
εἴρετο Πύθιον ὁκόσα οἱ εἴη χρήματα. ὁ δὲ εἶπε, “ ὦ
βασιλεῦ, οὔτε σε ἀποκρύψω οὔτε σκήψομαι τὸ μὴ εἰδέ
ναι τὴν ἐμεωυτοῦ οὐσίην, ἀλλ᾽ ἐπιστάμενός τοι ἀτρεκέως 5
καταλέξω. ἐπείτε γὰρ τάχιστά σε ἐπυθόμην ἐπὶ θάλασ
σαν καταβαίνοντα τὴν Ἑλληνίδα, βουλόμενός τοι δοῦναι
ἐς τὸν πόλεμον χρήματα ἐξέμαθον, καὶ εὗρον λογιζόμε-
νος ἀργυρίου μὲν δύο χιλιάδας ἐούσας μοι ταλάντων,
χρυσοῦ δὲ τετρακοσίας μυριάδας στατήρων Δαρεικών 10
ἐπιδεούσας ἑπτὰ χιλιάδων. καὶ τούτοισί σε ἐγὼ δωρέο-
μαι· αὐτῷ δέ μοι ἀπὸ ἀνδραπόδων τε καὶ γεωπέδων
ἀρκέων ἐστὶ βίος.” ὁ μὲν ταῦτα ἔλεγε, Ξέρξης δὲ ἡσθεὶς 29
τοῖσι εἰρημένοισι εἶπε, “ ξεῖνε Λυδέ, ἐγὼ ἐπείτε ἐξῆλθον
τὴν Περσίδα χώρην, οὐδενὶ ἀνδρὶ συνέμιξα ἐς τόδε ὅστις
ἠθέλησε ξείνια προθεῖναι στρατῷ τῷ ἐμῷ, οὐδὲ ὅστις ἐς
ὄψιν τὴν ἐμὴν καταστὰς αὐτεπάγγελτος ἐς τὸν πόλεμον 5
ἐμοὶ ἠθέλησε συμβαλέσθαι χρήματα, ἔξω σεῦ. σὺ δὲ
καὶ ἐξείνισας μεγάλως στρατὸν τὸν ἐμὸν καὶ χρήματα
μεγάλα ἐπαγγέλλεαι. σοὶ ὢν ἐγὼ ἀντὶ αὐτῶν γέρεα
τοιάδε δίδωμι· ξεινόν τέ σε ποιεῦμαι ἐμὸν καὶ τὰς
τετρακοσίας μυριάδας τοι τῶν στατήρων ἀποπλήσω 10
παρ' ἐμεωυτοῦ δοὺς τὰς ἑπτὰ χιλιάδας, ἵνα μή τοι ἐπι-
δεέες ἔωσι αἱ τετρακόσιαι μυριάδες ἑπτὰ χιλιάδων, ἀλλὰ
ᾖ τοι ἀπαρτιλογίη ὑπ' ἐμέο πεπληρωμένη. ἔκτησό τε
αὐτὸς τά περ αὐτὸς ἐκτήσαο, ἐπίστασό τε εἶναι αἰεὶ
τοιοῦτος· οὐ γάρ τοι ταῦτα ποιεῦντι οὔτε ἐς τὸ παρεὸν 15
οὔτε ἐς χρόνον μεταμελήσει.”
Τ
92
HERODOTUS.
30
Xerxes Proceeds to Sardis; Sends Heralds into Greece.
رد
πι
Ταῦτα δὲ εἴπας καὶ ἐπιτελέα ποιήσας ἐπορεύετο αἰεὶ
τὸ πρόσω. Ανανα δὲ καλεομένην Φρυγῶν πόλιν παρα-
μειβόμενος καὶ λίμνην ἐκ τῆς ἅλες γίνονται, ἀπίκετο ἐς
Κολοσσὰς πόλιν μεγάλην Φρυγίης· ἐν τῇ Λύκος ποτα-
5 μὸς ἐς χάσμα γῆς ἐσβάλλων ἀφανίζεται, ἔπειτα διὰ
σταδίων ὡς πέντε μάλιστά κῃ ἀναφαινόμενος ἐκδιδοῖ
καὶ οὗτος ἐς τὸν Μαίανδρον. ἐκ δὲ Κολοσσέων ὁ
στρατὸς ὁρμεόμενος ἐπὶ τοὺς οὔρους τῶν Φρυγῶν καὶ
Λυδῶν ἀπίκετο ἐς Κύδραρα πόλιν, ἔνθα στήλη κατα-
10 πεπηγυία, σταθεῖσα δὲ ὑπὸ Κροίσου, καταμηνύει διὰ
31 γραμμάτων τοὺς οὔρους. ὡς δὲ ἐκ τῆς Φρυγίης ἐσέβαλε
ἐς τὴν Λυδίην, σχιζομένης τῆς ὁδοῦ καὶ τῆς μὲν ἐς
ἀριστερὴν ἐπὶ Καρίης φερούσης τῆς δὲ ἐς δεξιὴν ἐς
Σάρδις, τῇ καὶ πορευομένῳ διαβῆναι τὸν Μαίανδρον
5 ποταμὸν πᾶσα ἀνάγκη γίνεται καὶ ἰέναι παρὰ Καλλά
τηβον πόλιν, ἐν τῇ ἄνδρες δημιουργοὶ μέλι ἐκ μυρίκης τε
καὶ πυροῦ ποιεῦσι, ταύτην ἰὼν ὁ Ξέρξης τὴν ὁδὸν εὗρε
πλατάνιστον, τὴν κάλλεος εἵνεκα δωρησάμενος κόσμῳ
χρυσέῳ καὶ μελεδωνῷ ἀθανάτῳ ἀνδρὶ ἐπιτρέψας δευτέρῃ
32 ἡμέρῃ ἀπίκετο ἐς τῶν Λυδῶν τὸ ἄστυ. ἀπικόμενος δὲ
ἐς Σάρδις πρῶτα μὲν ἀπέπεμπε κήρυκας ἐς τὴν Ἑλλάδα
αἰτήσοντας γῆν τε καὶ ὕδωρ καὶ προερέοντας δεῖπνα
βασιλέι παρασκευάζειν· πλὴν οὔτε ἐς ᾿Αθήνας οὔτε ἐς
5 Λακεδαίμονα ἀπέπεμπε ἐπὶ γῆς αἴτησιν, τῇ δὲ ἄλλῃ
πάντῃ. τῶνδε δὲ εἵνεκα τὸ δεύτερον ἀπέπεμπε ἐπὶ γῆν
τε καὶ ὕδωρ· ὅσοι πρότερον οὐκ ἔδοσαν Δαρείῳ πέμ-
ψαντι, τούτους πάγχυ ἐδόκεε τότε δείσαντας δώσειν·
βουλόμενος ὢν αὐτὸ τοῦτο ἐκμαθεῖν ἀκριβέως ἔπεμπε.
BOOK VII.
93
The Bridges of the Hellespont.
Μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα παρεσκευάζετο ὡς ἐλῶν ἐς Αβυδον. 33
οἱ δὲ ἐν τούτῳ τὸν Ἑλλήσποντον ἐζεύγνυσαν ἐκ τῆς
Ασίης ἐς τὴν Εὐρώπην. ἔστι δὲ τῆς Χερσονήσου τῆς
ἐν Ἑλλησπόντῳ, Σηστοῦ τε πόλιος μεταξὺ καὶ Μαδύ
του, ἀκτὴ παχέα ἐς θάλασσαν κατήκουσα ᾿Αβύδῳ και 5
ταντίον· ἔνθα μετὰ ταῦτα, χρόνῳ ὕστερον οὐ πολλῷ,
ἐπὶ Ξανθίππου τοῦ ᾿Αρίφρονος στρατηγοῦ ᾿Αθηναῖοι
Αρταύκτην ἄνδρα Πέρσην λαβόντες Σηστοῦ ὕπαρχον
ζῶντα πρὸς σανίδα διεπασσάλευσαν, ὃς καὶ ἐς τοῦ
Πρωτεσίλεω τὸ ἱρὸν ἐς Ἐλαιοῦντα ἀγινεόμενος γυναίκας 10
ἀθέμιστα ἔρδεσκε. ἐς ταύτην ὧν τὴν ἀκτὴν ἐξ ᾿Αβύ-34
δου ὁρμεόμενοι ἐγεφύρουν τοῖσι προσεκέετο, τὴν μὲν
λευκολίνου Φοίνικες, τὴν δ᾽ ἑτέρην τὴν βυβλίνην Αἰ
γύπτιοι. ἔστι δὲ ἑπτὰ στάδιοι ἐξ ᾿Αβύδου ἐς τὴν
ἀπαντίον. καὶ δὴ ἐζευγμένου τοῦ πόρου ἐπιγενόμενος 5
χειμὼν μέγας συνέκοψέ τε ἐκεῖνα πάντα καὶ διέλυσε.
ὡς δ' ἐπύθετο Ξέρξης, δεινὰ ποιεύμενος τὸν Ἑλλήσπον. 35
τον ἐκέλευσε τριηκοσίας ἐπικέσθαι μάστιγι πληγὰς καὶ
κατεῖναι ἐς τὸ πέλαγος πεδέων ζεῦγος. ἤδη δὲ ἤκουσα
ὡς καὶ στιγέας ἅμα τούτοισι ἀπέπεμψε στίξοντας τὸν
Ἑλλήσποντον. ἐνετέλλετο δὲ ὧν ῥαπίζοντας λέγειν 5
βάρβαρά τε καὶ ἀτάσθαλα, “ ὦ πικρὸν ὕδωρ, δεσπότης
τοι δίκην ἐπιτιθεῖ τήνδε, ὅτι μιν ἠδίκησας οὐδὲν πρὸς
ἐκείνου ἄδικον παθόν. καὶ βασιλεὺς μὲν Ξέρξης διαβή
σεταί σε, ἤν τε σύ γε βούλῃ ἤν τε μή· σοὶ δὲ κατὰ
δίκην ἄρα οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων θύει ὡς ἐόντι καὶ θολερῷ 10
καὶ ἁλμυρῷ ποταμῷ.” τήν τε δὴ θάλασσαν ἐνετέλλετο
τούτοισι ζημιοῦν, καὶ τῶν ἐπεστεώτων τῇ ζεύξι του
Ἑλλησπόντου ἀποταμεῖν τὰς κεφαλάς. καὶ οἱ μὲν 36
σε
94
HERODOTUS.
ταῦτα ἐποίεον, τοῖσι προσέκειτο αὕτη ἡ ἄχαρις τιμή,
τὰς δὲ ἄλλοι ἀρχιτέκτονες ἐζεύγνυσαν· ἐζεύγνυσαν δὲ
ὧδε· πεντηκοντέρους καὶ τριήρεας συνθέντες, ὑπὸ μὲν
5 τὴν πρὸς τοῦ Εὐξείνου πόντου ἑξήκοντά τε καὶ τριηκο-
σίας, ὑπὸ δὲ τὴν ἑτέρην τεσσερεσκαίδεκα καὶ τριηκοσίας,
τοῦ μὲν Πόντου ἐπικαρσίας τοῦ δὲ Ἑλλησπόντου κατὰ
ῥόον, ἵνα ἀνακωχεύῃ τὸν τόνον τῶν ὅπλων· συνθέντες
δὲ ἀγκύρας κατῆκαν περιμήκεας, τὰς μὲν πρὸς τοῦ Πόν-
10 του τῆς ἑτέρης τῶν ἀνέμων εἵνεκεν τῶν ἔσωθεν ἐκπνεόν-
των, τῆς δὲ ἑτέρης πρὸς ἑσπέρης τε καὶ τοῦ Αἰγαίου
ζεφύρου τε καὶ νότου εἵνεκεν. διέκπλοον δὲ ὑπόφανσιν
κατέλιπον τῶν πεντηκοντέρων καὶ τριηρέων, ἵνα καὶ ἐς
τὸν Πόντον ἔχῃ ὁ βουλόμενος πλέειν πλοίοισι λεπτοῖσι
15 καὶ ἐκ τοῦ Πόντου ἔξω. ταῦτα δὲ ποιήσαντες κατέτεινον
ἐκ γῆς στρεβλοῦντες ὄνοισι ξυλίνοισι τὰ ὅπλα, οὐκέτι
χωρὶς ἑκάτερα τάξαντες, ἀλλὰ δύο μὲν λευκολίνου δασά-
μενοι ἐς ἑκατέρην, τέσσερα δὲ τῶν βυβλίνων. παχύτης
μὲν ἡ αὐτὴ καὶ καλλονή, κατὰ λόγον δὲ ἐμβριθέστερα
20 ἦν τὰ λίνεα, τοῦ τάλαντον ὁ πήχυς εἷλκε. ἐπειδὴ δὲ
ἐγεφυρώθη ὁ πόρος, κορμοὺς ξύλων καταπρίσαντες καὶ
ποιήσαντες ἴσους τῆς σχεδίης τῷ εὐρεϊ κόσμῳ ἐπετίθεσαν
κατύπερθε τῶν ὅπλων τοῦ τόνου, θέντες δὲ ἐπεξῆς ἐν
θαῦτα αὖτις ἐπεζεύγνυον. ποιήσαντες δὲ ταῦτα ὕλην
25 ἐπεφόρησαν, κόσμῳ δὲ θέντες καὶ τὴν ὕλην γῆν ἐπεφό-
ρησαν, κατανάξαντες δὲ καὶ τὴν γῆν φραγμὸν παρείρυσαν
ἔνθεν καὶ ἔνθεν, ἵνα μὴ φοβέηται τὰ ὑποζύγια τὴν θά
λασσαν ὑπερορέοντα καὶ οἱ ἵπποι.
37
3
An Eclipse; Pythius's Petition and its Reception.
Ὡς δὲ τά τε τῶν γεφυρέων κατεσκεύαστο καὶ τὰ περὶ
τὸν "Αθων, οἵ τε χυτοὶ περὶ τὰ στόματα τῆς διώρυχος,
BOOK VII.
95
0
Ο
οἳ τῆς ῥηχίης εἵνεκεν ἐποιήθησαν, ἵνα μὴ πίμπληται τὰ
στόματα τοῦ ὀρύγματος, καὶ αὐτὴ ἡ διώρυξ παντελέως
πεποιημένη ἀγγέλλετο, ἐνθαῦτα χειμερίσας, ἅμα τῷ ἔαρι 5
παρεσκευασμένος ὁ στρατὸς ἐκ τῶν Σαρδίων ὁρμᾶτο
ἐλῶν ἐς Αβυδον· ὁρμημένῳ δέ οἱ ὁ ἥλιος ἐκλιπὼν τὴν
ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ἕδρην ἀφανὴς ἦν οὔτ᾽ ἐπινεφέλων ἐόντων
αἰθρίης τε τὰ μάλιστα, ἀντὶ ἡμέρης τε νὺξ ἐγένετο.
ἰδόντι δὲ καὶ μαθόντι τοῦτο τῷ Ξέρξῃ ἐπιμελὲς ἐγένετο, 10
καὶ εἴρετο τοὺς Μάγους τὸ θέλει προφαίνειν τὸ φάσμα.
οἱ δὲ ἔφραζον ὡς Ἕλλησι προδεικνύει ὁ θεὸς ἔκλειψιν
τῶν πολίων, λέγοντες ἥλιον εἶναι Ἑλλήνων προδέκτορα,
σελήνην δὲ σφέων. ταῦτα πυθόμενος ὁ Ξέρξης περι-
χαρὴς ἐὼν ἐποιέετο τὴν ἔλασιν. ὡς δ᾽ ἐξήλαυνε τὴν 38
στρατιήν, Πύθιος ὁ Λυδός καταρρωδήσας τὸ ἐκ τοῦ
οὐρανοῦ φάσμα ἐπαερθείς τε τοῖσι δωρήμασι, ἐλθὼν
παρὰ Ξέρξεα ἔλεγε τάδε· “ ὦ δέσποτα, χρηίσας ἄν τι
σεῦ βουλοίμην τυχεῖν, τὸ σοὶ μὲν ἐλαφρὸν τυγχάνει ἐὸν 5
ὑπουργῆσαι, ἐμοὶ δὲ μέγα γενόμενον.” Ξέρξης δὲ πᾶν
μᾶλλον δοκέων μιν χρηίσειν ἢ τὸ ἐδεήθη, ἔφη τε ὑπουρ
τό
γήσειν καὶ δὴ ἀγορεύειν ἐκέλευε ὅτευ δέοιτο. ὁ δὲ ἐπείτε
ταῦτα ἤκουσε, ἔλεγε θαρσήσας τάδε· “ ὦ δέσποτα, τυγ-
χάνουσί μοι παῖδες ἐόντες πέντε, καί σφεας καταλαμ- 10
βάνει πάντας ἅμα σοὶ στρατεύεσθαι ἐπὶ τὴν Ἑλλάδα.
σὺ δέ, ὦ βασιλεῦ, ἐμὲ ἐς τόδε ἡλικίης ἥκοντα οἰκτείρας
τῶν μοι παίδων ἕνα παράλυσον τῆς στρατιῆς τὸν πρεσ-
βύτατον, ἵνα αὐτοῦ τε ἐμεῦ καὶ τῶν χρημάτων ᾖ μελε-
δωνός· τοὺς δὲ τέσσερας ἄγευ ἅμα σεωυτῷ, καὶ πρήξας 15
τὰ νοέεις νοστήσειας ὀπίσω.” κάρτα τε ἐθυμώθη ὁ 39
Ξέρξης καὶ ἀμείβετο τοισίδε· “ ὦ κακὲ ἄνθρωπε, σὺ
ἐτόλμησας, ἐμεῦ στρατευομένου αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τὴν Ἑλλάδα
καὶ ἄγοντος παῖδας ἐμοὺς καὶ ἀδελφεοὺς καὶ οἰκηίους
96
HERODOTUS.
5 καὶ φίλους, μνήσασθαι περὶ σέο παιδός, ἐὼν ἐμὸς δοῦλος,
τὸν χρῆν πανοικίῃ αὐτῇ τῇ γυναικὶ συνέπεσθαι; εὖ νυν
τόδ' ἐξεπίστασο, ὡς ἐν τοῖσι ὠσὶ τῶν ἀνθρώπων οἰκέει
ὁ θυμός, ὃς χρηστὰ μὲν ἀκούσας τέρψιος ἐμπιπλεῖ τὸ
σῶμα, ὑπεναντία δὲ τούτοισι ἀκούσας ἀνοιδέει. ὅτε
10 μέν νυν χρηστὰ ποιήσας ἕτερα τοιαῦτα ἐπηγγέλλει,
εὐεργεσίῃσι βασιλέα οὐ καυχήσεαι ὑπερβαλέσθαι·
ἐπείτε δὲ ἐς τὸ ἀναιδέστερον ἐτράπευ, τὴν μὲν ἀξίην οὐ
λάμψεαι, ἐλάσσω δὲ τῆς ἀξίης. σὲ μὲν γὰρ καὶ τοὺς
τέσσερας τῶν παίδων ῥύεται τὰ ξείνια· τοῦ δὲ ἑνός, τοῦ
15 περιέχεαι μάλιστα, τῇ ψυχῇ ζημιώσεαι.” ὡς δὲ ταῦτα
ὑπεκρίνατο, αὐτίκα ἐκέλευε τοῖσι προσετέτακτο ταῦτα
πρήσσειν, τῶν Πυθίου παίδων ἐξευρόντας τὸν πρεσβύ-
τατον μέσον διαταμεῖν, διαταμόντας δὲ τὰ ἡμίτομα δια-
θεῖναι τὸ μὲν ἐπὶ δεξιὰ τῆς ὁδοῦ τὸ δ' ἐπ᾽ ἀριστερά, καὶ
20 ταύτῃ διεξιέναι τὸν στρατόν.
T
Order of March.
40 Ποιησάντων δὲ τούτων τοῦτο, μετὰ ταῦτα διεξήιε ὁ
στρατός. ἡγέοντο δὲ πρῶτοι μὲν οἱ σκευοφόροι τε καὶ
τὰ ὑποζύγια, μετὰ δὲ τούτους σύμμικτος στρατὸς παν-
τοίων ἐθνέων ἀναμίξ, οὐ διακεκριμένοι· τῇ δὲ ὑπερημί-
5 σεες ἦσαν, ἐνθαῦτα διελέλειπτο, καὶ οὐ συνέμισγον οὗτοι
βασιλέι. προηγεῦντο μὲν γὰρ ἱππόται χίλιοι, ἐκ Περ-
σέων πάντων ἀπολελεγμένοι· μετὰ δὲ αἰχμοφόροι χίλιοι
καὶ οὗτοι ἐκ πάντων ἀπολελεγμένοι, τὰς λόγχας κάτω
ἐς τὴν γῆν τρέψαντες· μετὰ δὲ ἱροὶ Νησαῖοι καλεόμενοι
10 ἵπποι δέκα κεκοσμημένοι ὡς κάλλιστα. Νησαῖοι δὲ
καλέονται ἵπποι ἐπὶ τοῦδε· ἔστι πεδίον μέγα τῆς Μηδι-
κῆς τῷ οὔνομά ἐστι Νήσαιον· τοὺς ὧν δὴ ἵππους τοὺς
μεγάλους φέρει τὸ πεδίον τοῦτο. ὄπισθε δὲ τούτων τῶν
BOOK VII.
97
δέκα ἵππων ἅρμα Διὸς ἱρὸν ἐπετέτακτο, τὸ ἵπποι μὲν
εἷλκον λευκοὶ ὀκτώ, ὄπισθε δὲ αὖ τῶν ἵππων εἵπετο 15
πεζῇ ἡνίοχος ἐχόμενος τῶν χαλινῶν· οὐδεὶς γὰρ δὴ ἐπὶ
τοῦτον τὸν θρόνον ἀνθρώπων ἐπιβαίνει.
τούτου δὲ
ὄπισθε αὐτὸς Ξέρξης ἐπ᾽ ἅρματος ἵππων Νησαίων
παρεβεβήκεε δέ οἱ ἡνίοχος τῷ οὔνομα ἦν Πατιράμφης,
Οτάνεω ἀνδρὸς Πέρσεω παῖς. ἐξήλασε μὲν οὕτω ἐκ 41
Σαρδίων Ξέρξης, μετεκβαίνεσκε δέ, ὅκως μιν λόγος
αἱρέοι, ἐκ τοῦ ἅρματος ἐς ἁρμάμαξαν. αὐτοῦ δὲ ὄπισθε
αἰχμοφόροι Περσέων οἱ ἄριστοί τε καὶ γενναιότατοι,
χίλιοι, κατὰ νόμον τὰς λόγχας ἔχοντες, μετὰ δὲ ἵππος 5
ἄλλη χιλίη ἐκ Περσέων ἀπολελεγμένη, μετὰ δὲ τὴν
ἵππον ἐκ τῶν λοιπῶν Περσέων ἀπολελεγμένοι μύριοι.
οὗτος πεζὸς ἦν· καὶ τούτων χίλιοι μὲν ἐπὶ τοῖσι δόρασι
ἀντὶ τῶν σαυρωτήρων ῥοιὰς εἶχον χρυσέας καὶ πέριξ
συνεκλήιον τοὺς ἄλλους, οἱ δὲ εἶνακισχίλιοι ἐντὸς τού- 10
των ἐόντες ἀργυρέας ῥοιὰς εἶχον· εἶχον δὲ χρυσέας ῥοιὰς
καὶ οἱ ἐς τὴν γῆν τράποντες τὰς λόγχας, καὶ μῆλα οἱ
ἄγχιστα ἑπόμενοι Ξέρξῃ. τοῖσι δὲ μυρίοισι ἐπετέτακτο
ἵππος Περσέων μυρίη. μετὰ δὲ τὴν ἵππον διέλειπε καὶ
δύο σταδίους, καὶ ἔπειτα ὁ λοιπὸς ὅμιλος ἤιε ἀναμίξ.
Ο
March to Ilium and Abydus.
¿
15
Ἐποιέετο δὲ τὴν ὁδὸν ἐκ τῆς Λυδίης ὁ στρατὸς ἐπί τε 42
ποταμὸν Κάικον καὶ γῆν τὴν Μυσίην, ἀπὸ δὲ Καΐκου
ὁρμεόμενος, Κάνης ὄρος ἔχων ἐν ἀριστερῇ, διὰ τοῦ
Αταρνέος ἐς Καρήνην πόλιν. ἀπὸ δὲ ταύτης διὰ Θήβης
πεδίου ἐπορεύετο, Αδραμύττειόν τε πόλιν καὶ ῎Ανταν- 5
δρον τὴν Πελασγίδα παραμειβόμενος. τὴν Ἴδην δὲ
λαβὼν ἐς ἀριστερὴν χεῖρα ἤιε ἐς τὴν Ἰλιάδα γῆν. καὶ
πρῶτα μέν οἱ ὑπὸ τῇ Ἴδῃ νύκτα ἀναμείναντι βρονταί τε
5
98
HERODOTUS.
καὶ πρηστήρες ἐπεσπίπτουσι, καί τινα αὐτοῦ ταύτῃ
43 συχνὸν ὅμιλον διέφθειραν. ἀπικομένου δὲ τοῦ στρατοῦ
ἐπὶ ποταμὸν Σκάμανδρον, ὃς πρῶτος ποταμῶν, ἐπείτε
ἐκ Σαρδίων ὁρμηθέντες ἐπεχείρησαν τῇ ὁδῷ, ἐπέλιπε τὸ
ῥέεθρον οὐδ᾽ ἀπέχρησε τῇ στρατιῇ τε καὶ τοῖσι κτήνεσι
5 πινόμενος, ἐπὶ τοῦτον δὴ τὸν ποταμὸν ὡς ἀπίκετο
Ξέρξης, ἐς τὸ Πριάμου πέργαμον ἀνέβη ἵμερον ἔχων
θεήσασθαι· θεησάμενος δὲ καὶ πυθόμενος ἐκείνων ἕκασ
τα τῇ ᾿Αθηναίῃ τῇ Ἰλιάδι ἔθυσε βοῦς χιλίας, χοὰς δὲ οἱ
Μάγοι τοῖσι ἥρωσι ἐχέαντο. ταῦτα δὲ ποιησαμένοισι
10 νυκτὸς φόβος ἐς τὸ στρατόπεδον ἐνέπεσε. ἅμα ἡμέρῃ
δὲ ἐπορεύετο ἐνθεῦτεν, ἐν ἀριστερῇ μὲν ἀπέργων Ροίτιον
πόλιν καὶ Ὀφρύνειον καὶ Δάρδανον, ἥ περ δὴ ᾿Αβύδο
ὅμουρός ἐστι, ἐν δεξιῇ δὲ Γέργιθας Τευκρούς.
Xerxes Views the Host with Conflicting Emotions.
44 Ἐπεὶ δ᾽ ἐγένετο ἐν ᾿Αβύδῳ μέσῃ, ἠθέλησε Ξέρξης
ἰδέσθαι πάντα τὸν στρατόν· καὶ προεπεποίητο γὰρ ἐπὶ
κολωνοῦ ἐπίτηδες αὐτῷ ταύτῃ προεξέδρη λίθου λευκοῦ,
ἐποίησαν δὲ Αβυδηνοὶ ἐντειλαμένου πρότερον βασιλέος.
5 ἐνθαῦτα ὡς ἕζετο, κατορέων ἐπὶ τῆς ἠιόνος ἐθηεῖτο καὶ
τὸν πεζὸν καὶ τὰς νέας, θηεύμενος δὲ ἱμέρθη τῶν νεῶν
ἅμιλλαν γινομένην ἰδέσθαι. ἐπεὶ δὲ ἐγένετό τε καὶ ἐνί-
κων Φοίνικες Σιδώνιοι, ἤσθη τε τῇ ἁμίλλῃ καὶ τῇ στρα-
45 τιῇ. ὡς δὲ ὥρα πάντα μὲν τὸν Ἑλλήσποντον ὑπὸ τῶν
νεῶν ἀποκεκρυμμένον, πάσας δὲ τὰς ἀκτὰς καὶ τὰ
᾿Αβυδηνῶν πεδία ἐπίπλεα ἀνθρώπων, ἐνθαῦτα ὁ Ξέρξης
ἑωυτὸν ἐμακάρισε, μετὰ δὲ τοῦτο ἐδάκρυσε.
Conversation between Artabanus and Xerxes.
46 Μαθών δέ μιν ᾿Αρτάβανος ὁ πάτρως, ὃς τὸ πρῶτον
γνώμην ἀπεδέξατο ἐλευθέρως οὐ συμβουλεύων Ξέρξη
BOOK VII.
99
Ο
Ο
στρατεύεσθαι ἐπὶ τὴν Ἑλλάδα, οὗτος ωνὴρ φρασθεὶς
Ξέρξεα δακρύσαντα εἴρετο τάδε· “ ὦ βασιλεῦ, ὡς πολ-
λὸν ἀλλήλων κεχωρισμένα ἐργάσαο νῦν τε καὶ ὀλίγῳ 5
πρότερον· μακαρίσας γὰρ σεωυτὸν δακρύεις.” ὁ δὲ εἶπε,
“ ἐσῆλθε γάρ με λογισάμενον κατοικτεῖραι ὡς βραχὺς
εἴη ὁ πᾶς ἀνθρώπινος βίος, εἰ τούτων γε ἐόντων τοσού-
των οὐδεὶς ἐς ἑκατοστὸν ἔτος περιέσται.” ὁ δὲ ἀμείβετο
λέγων, " ἕτερα τούτου παρὰ τὴν ζόην πεπόνθαμεν οἰκτρό- 10
τερα.
ἐν γὰρ οὕτω βραχέι βίῳ οὐδεὶς οὕτω ἄνθρωπος
ἐὼν εὐδαίμων πέφυκε, οὔτε τούτων οὔτε τῶν ἄλλων, τῷ
οὐ παραστήσεται πολλάκις καὶ οὐκὶ ἅπαξ τεθνάναι βού-
λεσθαι μᾶλλον ἢ ζώειν. αἵ τε γὰρ συμφοραὶ προσπί-
πτουσαι καὶ αἱ νοῦσοι συνταράσσουσαι καὶ βραχὺν ἐόν- 15
τα μακρὸν δοκέειν εἶναι ποιεῦσι τὸν βίον. οὕτω ὁ μὲν
θάνατος μοχθηρῆς ἐούσης τῆς ζόης καταφυγὴ αἱρετωτάτη
τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ γέγονε· ὁ δὲ θεὸς γλυκὺν γεύσας τὸν αἰῶ
να φθονερὸς ἐν αὐτῷ εὑρίσκεται ἐών.” Ξέρξης δὲ ἀμεί-4
βετο λέγων, “Αρτάβανε, βιοτῆς μέν νυν ἀνθρωπηίης
πέρι, ἐούσης τοιαύτης οἵην περ σὺ διαιρέαι εἶναι, παυσώ-
μεθα, μηδὲ κακῶν μεμνώμεθα χρηστὰ ἔχοντες πρήγματα
ἐν χερσί· φράσον δέ μοι τόδε· εἴ τοι ἡ ὄψις τοῦ 5
ἐνυπνίου μὴ ἐναργὴς οὕτω ἐφάνη, εἶχες ἂν τὴν ἀρχαίην
γνώμην, οὐκ ἐῶν με στρατεύεσθαι ἐπὶ τὴν Ἑλλάδα, ἢ
μετέστης ἄν; φέρε τοῦτό μοι ἀτρεκέως εἰπέ.” ὁ δὲ ἀμεί-
βετο λέγων, “ ὦ βασιλεῦ, ὄψις μὲν ἡ ἐπιφανεῖσα τοῦ
ὀνείρου, ὡς βουλόμεθα ἀμφότεροι, τελευτήσειε, ἐγὼ δ' 10
ἔτι καὶ ἐς τόδε δείματός εἰμι ὑπόπλεος οὐδ᾽ ἐντὸς ἐμεων-
τοῦ, ἄλλα τε πολλὰ ἐπιλεγόμενος καὶ δὴ καὶ ὁρέων του
δύο τὰ μέγιστα πάντων ἐόντα πολεμιώτατα.” Ξέρξης 48
δὲ πρὸς ταῦτα ἀμείβετο τοισίδε· “ δαιμόνιε ἀνδρῶν,
κολα ταῦτα λέγεις εἶναι δύο μοι πολεμιώτατα; κότερα
100
HERODOTUS.
ο
او
το
ΤΟ
τοι ὁ πεζός μεμπτὸς κατὰ πλῆθός ἐστι, καὶ τὸ Ἑλληνι
5 κὸν στράτευμα φαίνεται πολλαπλήσιον ἔσεσθαι τοῦ
ἡμετέρου, ἢ τὸ ναυτικὸν τὸ ἡμέτερον λείψεσθαι τοῦ
ἐκείνων, ἢ καὶ συναμφότερα ταῦτα; εἰ γάρ τοι ταύτῃ
φαίνεται ἐνδεέστερα εἶναι τὰ ἡμέτερα πρήγματα, στρα-
τοῦ ἂν ἄλλου τις τὴν ταχίστην ἄγερσιν ποιέοιτο.”
49 ὁ δ᾽ ἀμείβετο λέγων, “ ὦ βασιλεῦ, οὔτε στρατὸν τοῦτον,
ὅστις γε σύνεσιν ἔχει, μέμφοιτ᾽ ἂν οὔτε τῶν νεῶν τὸ
πλῆθος· ἤν τε πλεῦνας συλλέξῃς, τὰ δύο τοι τὰ λέγω
πολλῷ ἔτι πολεμιώτερα γίνεται. τὰ δὲ δύο ταῦτα ἐστὶ
5 γῆ τε καὶ θάλασσα. οὔτε γὰρ τῆς θαλάσσης ἐστὶ λιμὴν
τοσοῦτος οὐδαμόθι, ὡς ἐγὼ εἰκάζω, ὅστις ἐγειρομένου
χειμῶνος δεξάμενός σευ τοῦτο τὸ ναυτικὸν φερέγγυος
ἔσται διασώσαι τὰς νέας. καίτοι οὐκὶ ἕνα αὐτὸν δεῖ
εἶναι τὸν λιμένα, ἀλλὰ παρὰ πᾶσαν τὴν ἤπειρον παρ᾽ ἣν
10 δὴ κομίζεαι. οὔκων δὴ ἐόντων τοι λιμένων ὑποδεξίων,
μάθε ὅτι αἱ συμφοραὶ τῶν ἀνθρώπων ἄρχουσι καὶ οὐκὶ
ἄνθρωποι τῶν συμφορέων. καὶ δὴ τῶν δύο τοι τοῦ ἑτέ-
ρου εἰρημένου τὸ ἕτερον ἔρχομαι ἐρέων. γῆ δὲ πολεμίη
τῇδέ τοι κατίσταται· εἰ θέλει τοι μηδὲν ἀντίξοον και
15 ταστῆναι, τοσούτῳ τοι γίνεται πολεμιωτέρη ὅσῳ ἂν
προβαίνῃς ἑκαστέρω, τὸ πρόσω αἰεὶ κλεπτόμενος· εὐ
πρηξίης δὲ οὐκ ἔστι ἀνθρώποισι οὐδεμία πληθώρη.
καὶ δή τοι, ὡς οὐδενὸς ἐναντιευμένου, λέγω τὴν χώρην
πλεῦνα ἐν πλέονι χρόνῳ γινομένην λιμὸν τέξεσθαι. ἀνὴρ
20 δὲ οὕτω ἂν εἴη ἄριστος, εἰ βουλευόμενος μὲν ἀρρωδέοι,
πᾶν ἐπιλεγόμενος πείσεσθαι χρῆμα, ἐν δὲ τῷ ἔργῳ θρα-
50 σὺς εἴη.” ἀμείβεται Ξέρξης τοισίδε· “Αρτάβανε,
οἰκότως μὲν σύ γε τούτων ἕκαστα διαιρέαι. ατάρ μήτε
πάντα φοβέο μήτε πᾶν ὁμοίως ἐπιλέγει. εἰ γὰρ δὴ
βούλοιο ἐπὶ τῷ αἰεὶ ἐπεσφερομένῳ πρήγματι τὸ πᾶν
Εν
COOK VII.
101
ὁμοίως ἐπιλέγεσθαι, ποιήσειας ἂν οὐδαμὰ οὐδέν· κρέσ. 5
σον δὲ πάντα θαρσέοντα ἥμισυ τῶν δεινῶν πάσχειν
μᾶλλον ἢ πᾶν χρῆμα προδειμαίνοντα μηδαμὰ μηδὲν
παθεῖν. εἰ δὲ ἐρίζων πρὸς πᾶν τὸ λεγόμενον μὴ τὸ βέ-
βαιον ἀποδέξῃς, σφάλλεσθαι ὀφείλεις ἐν αὐτοῖσι ὁμοίως
καὶ ὁ ὑπεναντία τούτοισι λέξας. τοῦτο μέν νυν ἐπ᾽ ἴσης 10
ἔχει· εἰδέναι δὲ ἄνθρωπον ἐόντα κῶς χρὴ τὸ βέβαιον ;
δοκέω μὲν οὐδαμῶς. τοῖσι τοίνυν βουλομένοισι ποιέειν
ὡς τὸ ἐπίπαν φιλέει γίνεσθαι τὰ κέρδεα, τοῖσι δὲ ἐπιλε-
γομένοισί τε πάντα καὶ ὀκνέουσι οὐ μάλα ἐθέλει. ὁρᾷς
τὰ Περσέων πρήγματα ἐς ὃ δυνάμιος προκεχώρηκε. εἰ 15
τοίνυν ἐκεῖνοι οἱ πρὸ ἐμεῦ γενόμενοι βασιλέες γνώμῃσι
ἐχρέοντο ὁμοίῃσι καὶ σύ, ἢ μὴ χρεόμενοι γνώμῃσι τοιαύ-
τῃσι ἄλλους συμβούλους εἶχον τοιούτους, οὐκ ἄν κοτε
εἶδες αὐτὰ ἐς τοῦτο προελθόντα· νῦν δὲ κινδύνους ἀναρ-
ριπτέοντες ἐς τοῦτό σφεα προηγάγοντο. μεγάλα γὰρ 20
πρήγματα μεγάλοισι κινδύνοισι ἐθέλει καταιρέεσθαι.
ἡμεῖς τοίνυν ὁμοιεύμενοι ἐκείνοισι ὥρην τε τοῦ ἔτεος
καλλίστην πορευόμεθα, καὶ καταστρεψάμενοι πᾶσαν
τὴν Εὐρώπην νοστήσομεν ὀπίσω, οὔτε λιμῷ ἐντυχόντες
οὐδαμόθι οὔτε ἄλλο ἄχαρι οὐδὲν παθόντες. τοῦτο μὲν 25
γὰρ αὐτοὶ πολλὴν φορβὴν φερόμενοι πορευόμεθα, τοῦτο
δέ, τῶν ἄν κου ἐπιβέωμεν γῆν καὶ ἔθνος, τούτων τὸν σῖτον
ἕξομεν· ἐπ᾿ ἀροτῆρας δὲ καὶ οὐ νομάδας στρατευόμεθα
ἄνδρας.” λέγει ᾿Αρτάβανος μετὰ ταῦτα, “ ὦ βασιλεύ, 51
ἐπείτε ἀρρωδέειν οὐδὲν ἐᾷς πρῆγμα, σὺ δέ μευ συμβου-
λίην ἔνδεξαι· ἀναγκαίως γὰρ ἔχει περὶ πολλῶν πρηγμά
των πλεῦνα λόγον ἐκτεῖναι. Κῦρος ὁ Καμβύσεω Ἰωνίην
πᾶσαν πλὴν Αθηναίων κατεστρέψατο δασμοφόρον εἶναι 5
Πέρσῃσι. τούτους ὦν τοὺς ἄνδρας συμβουλεύω τοι
μηδεμιῇ μηχανῇ ἄγειν ἐπὶ τοὺς πατέρας· καὶ γὰρ ἄνευ
102
HERODOTUS.
ΤΟ
τούτων οἷοί τε εἰμὲν τῶν ἐχθρῶν κατυπέρτεροι γίνεσθαι.
ή γάρ σφεας, ἣν ἕπωνται, δεῖ ἀδικωτάτους γίνεσθαι
10 καταδουλουμένους τὴν μητρόπολιν, ἢ δικαιοτάτους συνε-
λευθεροῦντας. ἀδικώτατοι μέν νυν γινόμενοι οὐδὲν κέρ-
δος μέγα ἡμῖν προσβάλλουσι, δικαιότατοι δὲ γινόμενοι
οἷοί τε δηλήσασθαι μεγάλως τὴν σὴν στρατιὴν γίνονται.
ἐς θυμὸν ὦν βαλεῦ καὶ τὸ παλαιὸν ἔπος, ὡς εὖ εἴρηται,
52 τὸ μὴ ἅμα ἀρχῇ πᾶν τέλος καταφαίνεσθαι.” ἀμείβεται
πρὸς ταῦτα Ξέρξης, “Αρτάβανε, τῶν ἀπεφήναο γνωμέων
σφάλλεαι κατὰ ταύτην δὴ μάλιστα, ὃς Ἴωνας φοβέαι
μὴ μεταβάλωσι, τῶν ἔχομεν γνῶμα μέγιστον, τῶν σύ τε
5 μάρτυς γίνεαι καὶ οἱ συστρατευσάμενοι Δαρείῳ ἄλλο
ἐπὶ Σκύθας, ὅτι ἐπὶ τούτοισι ἡ πᾶσα Περσικὴ στρατιή
ἐγένετο διαφθεῖραι ἢ περιποιῆσαι· οἱ δὲ δικαιοσύνην
καὶ πιστότητα ἐνέδωκαν, ἄχαρι δὲ οὐδέν. πάρεξ δὲ τού-
του, ἐν τῇ ἡμετέρῃ καταλιπόντας τέκνα καὶ γυναῖκας
10 καὶ χρήματα οὐδ᾽ ἐπιλέγεσθαι χρὴ νεώτερόν τι ποιήσειν.
οὕτω μηδὲ τοῦτο φοβέο, ἀλλὰ θυμὸν ἔχων ἀγαθὸν σῶζε
οἶκόν τε τὸν ἐμὸν καὶ τυραννίδα τὴν ἐμήν· σοὶ γὰρ ἐγὼ
μούνῳ ἐκ πάντων σκῆπτρα τὰ ἐμὰ ἐπιτράπω.”
53
Xerxes Exhorts the Persians; Sacrifices; Crossing the
Bridge.
Ταῦτα εἴπας καὶ ᾿Αρτάβανον ἀποστείλας ἐς Σούσα
δεύτερα μετεπέμψατο Ξέρξης Περσέων τοὺς δοκιμωτά-
τους· ἐπεὶ δέ οἱ παρῆσαν, ἔλεγέ σφι τάδε· “ ὦ Πέρσαι,
τῶνδ᾽ ἐγὼ ὑμέων χρηίζων συνέλεξα, ἄνδρας τε γίνεσθαι
5 ἀγαθοὺς καὶ μὴ καταισχύνειν τὰ πρόσθε ἐργασμένα
Πέρσῃσι, ἐόντα μεγάλα τε καὶ πολλοῦ ἄξια, ἀλλ' εἷς τε
ἕκαστος καὶ οἱ σύμπαντες προθυμίην ἔχωμεν· ξυνὸν
γὰρ τοῦτο πᾶσι ἀγαθὸν σπεύδεται. τῶνδε δὲ εἵνεκα
BOOK VII.
103
προαγορεύω ἀντέχεσθαι τοῦ πολέμου ἐντεταμένως· ὡς
γὰρ ἐγὼ πυνθάνομαι, ἐπ' ἄνδρας στρατευόμεθα ἀγαθούς, 10
τῶν ἢν κρατήσωμεν, οὐ μή τις ἡμῖν ἄλλος στρατὸς ἀντ-
ιστῇ κοτε ἀνθρώπων. νῦν δὲ διαβαίνωμεν ἐπευξάμενοι
τοῖσι θεοῖσι οἳ Πέρσας λελόγχασι.”
Ο
Ταύτην μὲν τὴν ἡμέρην παρεσκευάζοντο ἐς τὴν διά- 54
βασιν· τῇ δὲ ὑστεραίῃ ἀνέμενον τὸν ἥλιον ἐθέλοντες
ἰδέσθαι ἀνίσχοντα, θυμιήματά τε παντοῖα ἐπὶ τῶν γε-
φυρέων καταγίζοντες καὶ μυρσίνῃσι στορνύντες τὴν ὁδόν.
ὡς δ᾽ ἐπανέτελλε ὁ ἥλιος, σπένδων ἐκ χρυσέης φιάλης 5
Ξέρξης ἐς τὴν θάλασσαν εὔχετο πρὸς τὸν ἥλιον μηδε
μίαν οἱ συντυχίην τοιαύτην γενέσθαι, ἥ μιν παύσει και
ταστρέψασθαι τὴν Εὐρώπην πρότερον ἢ ἐπὶ τέρμασι
τοῖσι ἐκείνης γένηται. εὐξάμενος δὲ ἐσέβαλε τὴν φιάλην
ἐς τὸν Ἑλλήσποντον καὶ χρύσεον κρητῆρα καὶ Περσικὸν 10
ξίφος, τὸν ἀκινάκην καλέουσι. ταῦτα οὐκ ἔχω ἀτρεκέως
διακρῖναι οὔτε εἰ τῷ ἡλίῳ ἀνατιθεὶς κατῆκε ἐς τὸ πέλα-
γος, οὔτε εἰ μετεμέλησέ οἱ τὸν Ἑλλήσποντον μαστιγώ
σαντι καὶ ἀντὶ τούτων τὴν θάλασσαν ἐδωρέετο. ὡς δὲ 55
ταῦτά οἱ ἐπεποίητο, διέβαινον κατὰ μὲν τὴν ἑτέρην τῶν
γεφυρέων τὴν πρὸς τοῦ Πόντου ὁ πεζός τε καὶ ἡ ἵππος
ἅπασα, κατὰ δὲ τὴν πρὸς τὸ Αἰγαῖον τὰ ὑποζύγια και
ἡ θεραπηίη. ἡγέοντο δὲ πρῶτα μὲν οἱ μύριοι Πέρσαι 5
ἐστεφανωμένοι πάντες, μετὰ δὲ τούτους ὁ σύμμικτος
στρατὸς παντοίων ἐθνέων. ταύτην μὲν τὴν ἡμέρην
οὗτοι, τῇ δὲ ὑστεραίῃ πρῶτοι μὲν οἵ τε ἱππόται καὶ οἱ
τὰς λόγχας κάτω τράποντες· ἐστεφάνωντο δὲ καὶ οὗτοι.
μετὰ δὲ οἵ τε ἵπποι οἱ ἱροὶ καὶ τὸ ἅρμα τὸ ἱρόν, ἐπὶ δὲ 10
αυτός τε Ξέρξης καὶ οἱ αἰχμοφόροι καὶ οἱ ἱππόται οἱ
χίλιοι, ἐπὶ δὲ τούτοισι ὁ ἄλλος στρατός. καὶ αἱ νέες
ἅμα ἀνήγοντο ἐς τὴν ἀπεναντίον. ἤδη δὲ ἤκουσα καὶ
ὕστατον διαβῆναι βασιλέα πάντων.
104
HERODOTUS.
Xerxes the Zeus of the Persians; Prodigies; Fleet Sets Sail.
0
56 Ξέρξης δὲ ἐπεὶ διέβη ἐς τὴν Εὐρώπην, ἐθηεῖτο τὸν
στρατὸν ὑπὸ μαστίγων διαβαίνοντα· διέβη δὲ ὁ στρατὸς
αὐτοῦ ἐν ἑπτὰ ἡμέρῃσι καὶ ἐν ἑπτὰ εὐφρόνῃσι, ἐλινύσας
οὐδένα χρόνον. ἐνθαῦτα λέγεται, Ξέρξεω ἤδη διαβεβη-
5 κότος τὸν Ἑλλήσποντον, ἄνδρα εἰπεῖν Ἑλλησπόντιον,
ὦ Ζεῦ, τί δὴ ἀνδρὶ εἰδόμενος Πέρσῃ καὶ οὔνομα ἀντὶ
Διὸς Ξέρξεα θέμενος ἀνάστατον τὴν Ἑλλάδα θέλεις
ποιῆσαι, ἄγων πάντας ἀνθρώπους; καὶ γὰρ ἄνευ τούτων
ἐξῆν τοι ποιέειν ταῦτα.”
66
Εν
57 Ως δὲ διέβησαν πάντες, ἐς ὁδὸν ὁρμημένοισι τέρας
σφι ἐφάνη μέγα, τὸ Ξέρξης ἐν οὐδενὶ λόγῳ ἐποιήσατο
καίπερ εὐσύμβλητον ἐόν· ἵππος γὰρ ἔτεκε λαγόν. εὐ.
σύμβλητον ὧν τῇδε τοῦτο ἐγένετο, ὅτι ἔμελλε μὲν ἐλᾶν
5 στρατιὴν ἐπὶ τὴν Ἑλλάδα Ξέρξης ἀγαυρότατά τε καὶ
μεγαλοπρεπέστατα, ὀπίσω δὲ περὶ ἑωυτοῦ τρέχων ἥξειν
ἐς τὸν αὐτὸν χῶρον. ἐγένετο δὲ καὶ ἕτερον αὐτῷ τέρας
ἐόντι ἐν Σάρδισι· ἡμίονος γὰρ ἔτεκε ἡμίονον διξὰ ἔχου
σαν αἰδοῖα, τὰ μὲν ἔρσενος τὰ δὲ θηλέης· κατύπερθε
10 δὲ ἦν τὰ τοῦ ἔρσενος. τῶν ἀμφοτέρων λόγον οὐδένα
ποιησάμενος τὸ πρόσω ἐπορεύετο, σὺν δέ οἱ ὁ πεζὸς
58 στρατός. ὁ δὲ ναυτικὸς ἔξω τὸν Ἑλλήσποντον πλέων
παρὰ γῆν ἐκομίζετο, τὰ ἔμπαλιν πρήσσων τοῦ πεζοῦ.
ὁ μὲν γὰρ πρὸς ἑσπέρην ἔπλεε, ἐπὶ Σαρπηδονίης ἄκρης
ποιεύμενος τὴν ἄπιξιν, ἐς τὴν αὐτῷ προείρητο ἀπικο-
5 μένῳ περιμένειν· ὁ δὲ κατ᾽ ἤπειρον στρατὸς πρὸς ἠῶ
τε καὶ ἡλίου ἀνατολὰς ἐποιέετο τὴν ὁδὸν διὰ τῆς Χερ-
σονήσου, ἐν δεξιῇ μὲν ἔχων τὸν Ἕλλης τάφον τῆς ᾿Αθά
μαντος, ἐν ἀριστερῇ δὲ Καρδίην πόλιν, διὰ μέσης δὲ
πορευόμενος πόλιος τῇ οὔνομα τυγχάνει ἐὸν ᾿Αγορή.
εν
BOOK VII.
105
ἐνθεῦτεν δὲ κάμπτων τὸν κόλπον τὸν Μέλανα καλεό-10
μενον, καὶ Μέλανα ποταμόν, οὐκ ἀντισχόντα τότε τῇ
στρατιῇ τὸ ῥέεθρον ἀλλ᾽ ἐπιλιπόντα, τοῦτον τὸν ποτα-
μὸν διαβάς, ἐπ᾽ οὗ καὶ ὁ κόλπος οὗτος τὴν ἐπωνυμίην
ἔχει, ἤιε πρὸς ἑσπέρην, Αἶνόν τε πόλιν Αἰολίδα καὶ
Στεντορίδα λίμνην παρεξιών, ἐς ὃ ἀπίκετο ἐς Δορίσκον. 15
0
Ο
Review and Muster of the Army at Doriscus.
ΤΟ
Ὁ δὲ Δορίσκος ἐστὶ τῆς Θρηίκης αἰγιαλός τε καὶ 59
πεδίον μέγα, διὰ δὲ αὐτοῦ ῥέει ποταμὸς μέγας Ἕβρος •
ἐν τῷ τεῖχός τε ἐδέδμητο βασιλήιον τοῦτο τὸ δὴ Δορίσ
κος κέκληται, καὶ Περσέων φρουρὴ ἐν αὐτῷ κατεστήκεε
ὑπὸ Δαρείου ἐξ ἐκείνου τοῦ χρόνου ἐπείτε ἐπὶ Σκύθας 5
ἐστρατεύετο. ἔδοξε ὢν τῷ Ξέρξῃ ὁ χῶρος εἶναι ἐπιτή-
δεος ἐνδιατάξαι τε καὶ ἐξαριθμῆσαι τὸν στρατόν, καὶ
ἐποίεε ταῦτα, τὰς μὲν δὴ νέας τὰς πάσας ἀπικομένας
ἐς Δορίσκον οἱ ναύαρχοι κελεύσαντος Ξέρξεω ἐς τὸν
αἰγιαλὸν τὸν προσεχέα Δορίσκῳ ἐκόμισαν, ἐν τῷ Σάλη 10
τε Σαμοθρηικίη πεπόλισται πόλις καὶ Ζώνη, τελευτᾷ δὲ
αὐτοῦ Σέρρειον ἄκρη ὀνομαστή. ὁ δὲ χῶρος οὗτος τὸ
παλαιὸν ἦν Κικόνων. ἐς τοῦτον τὸν αἰγιαλὸν κατα-
σχόντες τὰς νέας ἀνέψυχον ἀνελκύσαντες. ὁ δὲ ἐν τῷ
Δορίσκῳ τοῦτον τὸν χρόνον τῆς στρατιῆς ἀριθμὸν 15
ἐποιέετο. ὅσον μέν νυν ἕκαστοι παρεῖχον πλῆθος ἐς 60
ἀριθμόν, οὐκ ἔχω εἰπεῖν τὸ ἀτρεκές· οὐ γὰρ λέγεται
πρὸς οὐδαμῶν ἀνθρώπων· σύμπαντος δὲ τοῦ στρατοῦ
τοῦ πεζοῦ τὸ πλῆθος ἐφάνη ἑβδομήκοντα καὶ ἑκατὸν
μυριάδες. ἐξηρίθμησαν δὲ τόνδε τὸν τρόπον· συνήγαγον 5
τε ἐς ἕνα χῶρον μυριάδα ἀνθρώπων, καὶ συννάξαντες
ταύτην ὡς μάλιστα εἶχον περιέγραψαν ἔξωθεν κύκλον·
περιγράψαντες δὲ καὶ ἀπέντες τοὺς μυρίους αἱμασιὴν
ΤΟ
5*
106
HERODOTUS.
περιέβαλον κατὰ τὸν κύκλον, ὕψος ἀνήκουσαν ἀνδρὶ ἐς
10 τὸν ὀμφαλόν· ταύτην δὲ ποιήσαντες ἄλλους ἐσεβίβαζον
ἐς τὸ περιοικοδομημένον, μέχρι οὗ πάντας τούτῳ τῷ
τρόπῳ ἐξηρίθμησαν. ἀριθμήσαντες δὲ κατὰ ἔθνεα διέ-
τασσον.
Catalogue and Equipment of the Several Nations.
Persians, Medes, Assyrians.
61 Οἱ δὲ στρατευόμενοι οἵδε ἦσαν, Πέρσαι μὲν ὧδε
ἐσκευασμένοι. περὶ μὲν τῇσι κεφαλῇσι εἶχον τιάρας
καλεομένους πίλους ἀπαγέας, περὶ δὲ τὸ σῶμα κιθῶνας
χειριδωτοὺς ποικίλους, . . . λεπίδος σιδηρέης ὄψιν
5 ἰχθυοειδέος, περὶ δὲ τὰ σκέλεα ἀναξυρίδας, ἀντὶ δὲ
ἀσπίδων γέρρα· ὑπὸ δὲ φαρετρεῶνες ἐκρέμαντο· αἰχμὰς
δὲ βραχέας εἶχον, τόξα δὲ μεγάλα, ὀιστοὺς δὲ καλαμί
νους, πρὸς δὲ ἐγχειρίδια παρὰ τὸν δεξιὸν μηρὸν παραίω.
ρεύμενα ἐκ τῆς ζώνης. καὶ ἄρχοντα παρείχοντο Ὀτάνεα
10 τὸν ᾿Αμήτριος πατέρα τῆς Ξέρξεω γυναικός, ἐκαλέοντο
δὲ πάλαι ὑπὸ μὲν Ἑλλήνων Κηφῆνες, ὑπὸ μέντοι σφέων
αὐτῶν καὶ τῶν περιοίκων Αρταῖοι. ἐπεὶ δὲ Περσεὺς ὁ
Δανάης τε καὶ Διὸς ἀπίκετο παρὰ Κηφέα τον Βήλου
καὶ ἔσχε αὐτοῦ τὴν θυγατέρα Ανδρομέδην, γίνεται αὐτῷ
15 παῖς τῷ οὔνομα ἔθετο Πέρσην, τοῦτον δὲ αὐτοῦ κατα-
λείπει· ἐτύγχανε γὰρ ἄπαις ἐὼν ὁ Κηφεὺς ἔρσενός
62 γόνου· ἐπὶ τούτου δὴ τὴν ἐπωνυμίην ἔσχον. Μήδοι
δὲ τὴν αὐτὴν ταύτην ἐσταλμένοι ἐστρατεύοντο· Μηδική
γὰρ αὕτη ἡ σκευή ἐστι καὶ οὐ Περσική· οἱ δὲ Μῆδοι
ἄρχοντα μὲν παρείχοντο Τιγράνην ἄνδρα Αχαιμενίδην,
5 ἐκαλέοντο δὲ πάλαι πρὸς πάντων Αριοι, ἀπικομένης
δὲ Μηδείης τῆς Κολχίδος ἐξ ᾿Αθηνέων ἐς τοὺς ᾿Αρίους
τούτους μετέβαλον καὶ οὗτοι τὸ οὔνομα. αὐτοὶ περὶ
BOOK VII.
107
σφέων ὧδε λέγουσι Μῆδοι. Κίσσιοι δὲ στρατευόμενοι
τὰ μὲν ἄλλα κατά περ Πέρσαι ἐσκευάδατο, ἀντὶ δὲ τῶν
πίλων μιτρηφόροι ἦσαν. Κισσίων δὲ ἦρχε ᾽Ανάφης ὁ 10
Οτάνεω. Υρκάνιοι δὲ κατά περ Πέρσαι ἐσεσάχατο,
ἡγεμόνα παρεχόμενοι Μεγάπανον τὸν Βαβυλῶνος ὕστε
ρον τούτων ἐπιτροπεύσαντα. Ασσύριοι δὲ στρατευό- 63
μενοι περὶ μὲν τῇσι κεφαλῇσι εἶχον χάλκεά τε κράνεα
καὶ πεπλεγμένα τρόπον τινὰ βάρβαρον οὐκ εὐαπήγητον,
ἀσπίδας δὲ καὶ αἰχμὰς καὶ ἐγχειρίδια παραπλήσια τῇσι
Αἰγυπτίῃσι εἶχον, πρὸς δὲ ῥόπαλα ξύλων τετυλωμένα 5
σιδήρῳ, καὶ λινέους θώρηκας. οὗτοι δὲ ὑπὸ μὲν Ἑλ
λήνων καλέονται Σύριοι, ὑπὸ δὲ τῶν βαρβάρων ᾿Ασσύ
ριοι ἐκλήθησαν. [τούτων δὲ μεταξὺ Χαλδαῖοι.] ἦρχε
δέ σφεων Ὀτάσπης ὁ ᾿Αρταχαίεω.
Tribes Northeast and East of Media and Persia.
Βάκτριοι δὲ περὶ μὲν τῇσι κεφαλῇσι ἀγχοτάτω των 64
Μηδικῶν ἔχοντες ἐστρατεύοντο, τόξα δὲ καλάμινα ἐπι-
χώρια καὶ αἰχμὰς βραχέας. Σάκαι δὲ οἱ Σκύθαι περὶ
μὲν τῇσι κεφαλῇσι κυρβασίας ἐς ὀξὺ ἀπηγμένας ὀρθὰς
εἶχον πεπηγυίας, ἀναξυρίδας δὲ ἐνεδεδύκεσαν, τόξα δὲ 5
ἐπιχώρια καὶ ἐγχειρίδια, πρὸς δὲ καὶ ἀξίνας σαγάρις
εἶχον. τούτους δὲ ἐόντας Σκύθας ᾿Αμυργίους Σάκας
ἐκάλεον· οἱ γὰρ Πέρσαι πάντας τοὺς Σκύθας καλέουσι
Σάκας. Βακτρίων δὲ καὶ Σακέων ἦρχε Υστάσπης ὁ
Δαρείου τε καὶ ᾿Ατόσσης τῆς Κύρου. Ἰνδοὶ δὲ εἵματα 65
μὲν ἐνδεδυκότες ἀπὸ ξύλων πεποιημένα, τόξα δὲ καλά-
μινα εἶχον καὶ ὀιστοὺς καλαμίνους· ἐπὶ δὲ σίδηρος ἦν.
ἐσταλμένοι μὲν δὴ ἦσαν οὕτω Ἰνδοί, προσετετάχατο δὲ
συστρατευόμενοι Φαρναζάθρῃ τῷ ᾿Αρταβάτεω. "Αριοι 66
δὲ τόξοισι μὲν ἐσκευασμένοι ἦσαν Μηδικοῖσι, τὰ δὲ
Ο
108
HERODOTUS.
Ο
Ο
ἄλλα κατά περ Βάκτριοι. Αρίων δὲ ἦρχε Σισάμνης ὁ
Υδάρνεος. Πάρθοι δὲ καὶ Χοράσμιοι καὶ Σόγδοι τε καὶ
5 Γανδάριοι καὶ Δαδίκαι τὴν αὐτὴν σκευὴν ἔχοντες τὴν
καὶ Βάκτριοι ἐστρατεύοντο. τούτων δὲ ἦρχον οἵδε,
Πάρθων μὲν καὶ Χορασμίων Αρτάβαζος ὁ Φαρνάκεος,
Σόγδων δὲ 'Αζάνης ὁ ᾿Αρταίου, Γανδαρίων δὲ καὶ Δα-
67 δικέων Αρτύφιος ὁ ᾿Αρταβάνου. Κάσπιοι δὲ σισύρνας
τε ἐνδεδυκότες καὶ τόξα ἐπιχώρια καλάμινα ἔχοντες καὶ
ἀκινάκας ἐστρατεύοντο. οὗτοι μὲν οὕτω ἐσκευάδατο,
ἡγεμόνα παρεχόμενοι Αριόμαρδον τὸν ᾿Αρτυφίου ἀδελ-
5 φεόν, Σαράγγαι δὲ εἵματα μὲν βεβαμμένα ἐνέπρεπον
ἔχοντες, πέδιλα δὲ ἐς γόνυ ἀνατείνοντα εἶχον, τόξα δὲ
καὶ αἰχμὰς Μηδικάς. Σαραγγέων δὲ ἦρχε Φερενδάτης
ὁ Μεγαβάζου. Πάκτυες δὲ σισυρνοφόροι τε ἦσαν καὶ
τόξα ἐπιχώρια είχον καὶ ἐγχειρίδια. Πάκτυες δὲ ἄρ-
68 χοντα παρείχοντο Αρταύντην τὸν Ἰθαμίτρεω. Οὔτιοι
δὲ καὶ Μύκοι τε καὶ Παρικάνιοι ἐσκευασμένοι ἦσαν
κατά περ Πάκτυες. τούτων δὲ ἦρχον οἵδε, Οὐτίων μὲν
καὶ Μύκων ᾿Αρσαμένης ὁ Δαρείου, Παρικανίων δὲ
5 Σιρομίτρης ὁ Οἰοβάζου.
Arabians, Ethiopians, and Libyans.
69 Αράβιοι δὲ ζειρὰς ὑπεζωσμένοι ἦσαν, τόξα δὲ παλίν
τονα εἶχον πρὸς δεξιά, μακρά. Αἰθίοπες δὲ παρδαλέας
τε καὶ λεοντέας ἐναμμένοι, τόξα δὲ εἶχον ἐκ φοίνικος
σπάθης πεποιημένα, μακρά, τετραπηχέων οὐκ ἐλάσσω,
5 ἐπὶ δὲ καλαμίνους ὀιστοὺς σμικρούς· ἀντὶ δὲ σιδήρου
ἐπῆν λίθος ὀξὺς πεποιημένος, τῷ καὶ τὰς σφρηγίδας
γλύφουσι· πρὸς δὲ αἰχμὰς εἶχον, ἐπὶ δὲ κέρας δορκάδος
ἐπὴν ὀξὺ πεποιημένον τρόπον λόγχης· εἶχον δὲ καὶ
ρόπαλα τυλωτά, τοῦ δὲ σώματος τὸ μὲν ἥμισυ ἐξηλεί
ΤΟ
BOOK VII.
109
Ο
φοντο γύψῳ ἰόντες ἐς μάχην, τὸ δὲ ἄλλο ἥμισυ μίλτῳ. 10
᾿Αραβίων δὲ καὶ Αἰθιόπων τῶν ὑπὲρ Αἰγύπτου οἰκημέ-
νων ἦρχε ᾿Αρσάμης ὁ Δαρείου καὶ ᾿Αρτυστώνης τῆς
Κύρου θυγατρός, τὴν μάλιστα στέρξας τῶν γυναικών
Δαρείος εἰκὼ χρυσέην σφυρήλατον ἐποιήσατο. τῶν μὲν 70
δὴ ὑπὲρ Αἰγύπτου Αἰθιόπων καὶ ᾿Αραβίων ἦρχε 'Αρ-
σάμης, οἱ δὲ ἀπὸ ἡλίου ἀνατολέων Αἰθίοπες (διξοὶ γὰρ
δὴ ἐστρατεύοντο προσετετάχατο τοῖσι Ἰνδοῖσι, διαλ-
λάσσοντες εἶδος μὲν οὐδὲν τοῖσι ἑτέροισι, φωνὴν δὲ καὶ 5
τρίχωμα μοῦνον· οἱ μὲν γὰρ ἀπὸ ἡλίου Αἰθίοπες ἰθύτρι
χές εἰσι, οἱ δ᾽ ἐκ τῆς Λιβύης οὐλότατον τρίχωμα ἔχουσι
πάντων ἀνθρώπων. οὗτοι δὲ οἱ ἐκ τῆς ᾿Ασίης Αἰθίοπες
τὰ μὲν πλέω κατά περ Ἰνδοὶ ἐσεσάχατο, προμετωπίδια
δὲ ἵππων εἶχον ἐπὶ τῇσι κεφαλῇσι σύν τε τοῖσι ὠσὶ10
ἐκδεδαρμένα καὶ τῇ λοφιῇ· καὶ ἀντὶ μὲν λόφου ἡ λοφιὴ
κατέχρα, τὰ δὲ ὦτα τῶν ἵππων ὀρθὰ πεπηγότα εἶχον·
προβλήματα δὲ ἀντ᾽ ἀσπίδων ἐποιεῦντο γεράνων δοράς.
Λίβυες δὲ σκευὴν μὲν σκυτίνην ἤισαν ἔχοντες, ἀκοντίοισι 71
δὲ ἐπικαύτοισι χρεόμενοι. ἄρχοντα δὲ παρείχοντο Μασ
σάγην τὸν Ὀαρίζου.
Tribes of Asia Minor and Vicinity.
Παφλαγόνες δὲ ἐστρατεύοντο ἐπὶ μὲν τῇσι κεφαλῇσι 2
κράνεα πεπλεγμένα ἔχοντες, ἀσπίδας τε σμικράς, αἰχμὰς
δὲ οὐ μεγάλας, πρὸς δὲ ἀκόντια καὶ ἐγχειρίδια, περὶ δὲ
τοὺς πόδας πέδιλα ἐπιχώρια ἐς μέσην κνήμην ἀνατεί-
νοντα. Λίγυες δὲ καὶ Ματιηνοὶ καὶ Μαριανδυνοί τε καὶ 5
Σύριοι τὴν αὐτὴν ἔχοντες Παφλαγόσι ἐστρατεύοντο· οἱ
δὲ Σύριοι οὗτοι ὑπὸ Περσέων Καππαδόκαι καλέονται.
Παφλαγόνων μέν νυν καὶ Ματιηνῶν Δῶτος ὁ Μεγασί.
δρου ήρχε, Μαριανδυνῶν δὲ καὶ Λιγύων καὶ Συρίων
110
HERODOTUS.
3 Γοβρύης ὁ Δαρείου τε καὶ ᾿Αρτυστώνης. Φρύγες δὲ
ἀγχοτάτω τῆς Παφλαγονικῆς σκευὴν εἶχον, ὀλίγον
παραλλάσσοντες. οἱ δὲ Φρύγες, ὡς Μακεδόνες λέγουσι,
ἐκαλέοντο Βρίγες χρόνον ὅσον Εὐρωπήιοι ἐόντες σύνοικοι
5 ἦσαν Μακεδόσι, μεταβάντες δὲ ἐς τὴν ᾿Ασίην ἅμα τῇ
χώρῃ καὶ τὸ οὔνομα μετέβαλον ἐς Φρύγας. ᾿Αρμένιοι
δὲ κατά περ Φρύγες ἐσεσάχατο, ἐόντες Φρυγῶν ἄποικοι.
τούτων συναμφοτέρων ἦρχε Αρτόχμης Δαρείου ἔχων
* 4 θυγατέρα. Λυδοὶ δὲ ἀγχοτάτω τῶν Ἑλληνικῶν εἶχον
ὅπλα. οἱ δὲ Λυδοί Μηίονες ἐκαλεῦντο πάλαι, ἐπὶ δὲ
Λυδοῦ τοῦ Ατυος ἔσχον τὴν ἐπωνυμίην, μεταβαλόντες
τὸ οὔνομα. Μυσοὶ δὲ ἐπὶ μὲν τῇσι κεφαλῇσι εἶχον
5 κράνεα επιχώρια, ἀσπίδας δὲ σμικράς, ἀκοντίοισι δὲ
ἐχρέοντο ἐπικαύτοισι. οὗτοι δὲ εἰσὶ Λυδῶν ἄποικοι,
ἀπ' Ὀλύμπου δὲ ὄρεος καλέονται Ολυμπιηνοί. Λυδῶν
δὲ καὶ Μυσῶν ἦρχε ᾿Αρταφέρνης ὁ ᾿Αρταφέρνεος ὃς ἐς
*5 Μαραθῶνα ἐσέβαλε ἅμα Δάτι. Θρήικες δὲ ἐπὶ μὲν
τῇσι κεφαλῇσι ἀλωπεκέας ἔχοντες ἐστρατεύοντο, περὶ
δὲ τὸ σῶμα κιθῶνας, ἐπὶ δὲ ζειρὰς περιβεβλημένοι ποι-
κίλας, περὶ δὲ τοὺς πόδας τε καὶ τὰς κνήμας πέδιλα
5 νεβρῶν, πρὸς δὲ ἀκόντιά τε καὶ πέλτας καὶ ἐγχειρίδια
σμικρά. οὗτοι δὲ διαβάντες μὲν ἐς τὴν ᾿Ασίην ἐκλή-
θησαν Βιθυνοί, τὸ δὲ πρότερον ἐκαλέοντο, ὡς αὐτοὶ
λέγουσι, Στρυμόνιοι, οἰκέοντες ἐπὶ Στρυμόνι· ἐξαναστῆ
ναι δέ φασι ἐξ ἠθέων ὑπὸ Τευκρῶν τε καὶ Μυσῶν.
10 Θρηίκων δὲ τῶν ἐν τῇ ᾿Ασίῃ ἦρχε Βασσάκης ὁ ᾿Αρτα-
76 Bávov. ἀσπίδας δὲ ὠμοβοΐνας εἶχον σμικράς, καὶ
προβόλους δύο λυκιοεργέας ἕκαστος εἶχε, ἐπὶ δὲ τῇσι
κεφαλῇσι κράνεα χάλκεα· πρὸς δὲ τοῖσι κράνεσι ὦτά
τε καὶ κέρεα προσὴν βοὺς χάλκεα, ἐπῆσαν δὲ καὶ λόφοι
5 τὰς δὲ κνήμας ῥάκεσι φοινικέοισι κατειλίχατο. ἐν τού
Ο
BOOK VII.
111
τοισι τοῖσι ἀνδράσι Αρεός ἐστι χρηστήριον. Καβηλέες
δὲ οἱ Μηίονες, Λασόνιοι δὲ καλεύμενοι, τὴν αὐτὴν Κίλιξι
εἶχον σκευήν, τὴν ἐγώ, ἐπεὰν κατὰ τὴν Κιλίκων τάξιν
διεξιών γένωμαι, τότε σημανέω. Μιλύαι δὲ αἰχμάς τε
βραχέας εἶχον καὶ εἵματα ἐνεπεπορπέατο· εἶχον δὲ 5
αὐτῶν τόξα μετεξέτεροι Λύκια, περὶ δὲ τῇσι κεφαλῇσι
ἐκ διφθερέων πεποιημένας κυνέας. τούτων πάντων
ἦρχε Βάδρης ὁ Ὑστάνεος.
Tribes of Colchis and the Persian Gulf.
ó
Μόσχοι δὲ περὶ μὲν τῇσι κεφαλῇσι κυνέας ξυλίνας 8
εἶχον, ἀσπίδας δὲ καὶ αἰχμὰς σμικράς· λόγχαι δὲ ἐπῆσαν
μεγάλαι. Τιβαρηνοὶ δὲ καὶ Μάκρωνες καὶ Μοσσύνοικοι
κατά περ Μόσχοι ἐσκευασμένοι ἐστρατεύοντο. τούτους
δὲ συνέτασσον ἄρχοντες οἵδε· Μόσχους μὲν καὶ Τιβα- 5
ρηνοὺς ᾿Αριόμαρδος ὁ Δαρείου τε παῖς καὶ Πάρμυος τῆς
Σμέρδιος τοῦ Κύρου, Μάκρωνας δὲ καὶ Μοσσυνοίκους
Αρταύκτης ὁ Χεράσμιος, ὃς Σηστὸν τὴν ἐν Ἑλλησπόντῳ
ἐπετρόπευε. Μᾶρες δὲ ἐπὶ μὲν τῇσι κεφαλῇσι κράνεα 79
ἐπιχώρια πλεκτὰ εἶχον, ἀσπίδας δὲ δερματίνας σμικρὰς
καὶ ἀκόντια. Κόλχοι δὲ περὶ μὲν τῇσι κεφαλῇσι κράνεα
ξύλινα, ἀσπίδας δὲ ὠμοβοΐνας σμικρὰς αἰχμάς τε βρα-
χέας, πρὸς δὲ μαχαίρας εἶχον. Μαρῶν δὲ καὶ Κόλχων 5
ἦρχε Φαρανδάτης ὁ Τεάσπιος. Αλαρόδιοι δὲ καὶ Σάσ
πειρες κατά περ Κόλχοι ὡπλισμένοι ἐστρατεύοντο.
τούτων δὲ Μασίστιος ὁ Σιρομίτρεω ἦρχε. τὰ δὲ νησιω- 80
τικὰ ἔθνεα τὰ ἐκ τῆς Ἐρυθρης θαλάσσης ἑπόμενα,
νήσων δὲ ἐν τῇσι τοὺς ἀνασπάστους καλεομένους κατοι-
κίζει βασιλεύς, ἀγχοτάτω τῶν Μηδικῶν εἶχον ἐσθῆτά
τε καὶ ὅπλα. τούτων δὲ τῶν νησιωτέων ἦρχε Μαρδόν- 5
της ὁ Βαγαίου, ὃς ἐν Μυκάλῃ στρατηγέων δευτέρῳ ἔτεϊ
τούτων ἐτελεύτησε ἐν τῇ μάχῃ.
112
HERODOTUS.
81
The Supreme Commanders; the Immortals.
Ταῦτα ἦν τὰ κατ᾽ ἤπειρον στρατευόμενά τε ἔθνεα
καὶ τεταγμένα ἐς τὸν πεζόν. τούτου ὢν τοῦ στρατοῦ
ἦρχον μὲν οὗτοι οἱ εἰρέαται, καὶ οἱ διατάξαντες καὶ
ἐξαριθμήσαντες οὗτοι ἦσαν καὶ χιλιάρχας τε καὶ μυ
5 ριάρχας ἀποδέξαντες, ἑκατοντάρχας δὲ καὶ δεκάρχας οἱ
μυριάρχαι. τελέων δὲ καὶ ἐθνέων ἦσαν ἄλλοι σημάν
82 τορες. ἦσαν μὲν δὴ οὗτοι οἵ περ εἰρέαται ἄρχοντες,
ἐστρατήγεον δὲ τούτων τε καὶ τοῦ σύμπαντος στρατοῦ
τοῦ πεζοῦ Μαρδόνιος τε ὁ Γοβρύεω καὶ Τριτανταίχμης
ὁ ᾿Αρταβάνου τοῦ γνώμην θεμένου μὴ στρατεύεσθαι
5 ἐπὶ τὴν Ἑλλάδα καὶ Σμερδομένης ὁ Ὀτάνεω, Δαρείου
ἀμφότεροι οὗτοι ἀδελφεῶν παῖδες, Ξέρξῃ δὲ ἐγίνοντο
ἀνεψιοί, καὶ Μασίστης ὁ Δαρείου τε καὶ ᾿Ατόσσης
παῖς καὶ Γέργις ὁ ᾿Αριάζου καὶ Μεγάβυζος ὁ Ζωπύρου.
83 οὗτοι ἦσαν στρατηγοὶ τοῦ σύμπαντος πεζοῦ χωρὶς τῶν
μυρίων· τῶν δὲ μυρίων τούτων Περσέων τῶν ἀπολε-
λεγμένων ἐστρατήγεε μὲν Υδάρνης ὁ Ὑδάρνεος, ἐκα-
λέοντο δὲ ἀθάνατοι οἱ Πέρσαι οὗτοι ἐπὶ τοῦδε· εἴ τις
5 αὐτῶν ἐξέλιπε τὸν ἀριθμὸν ἢ θανάτῳ βιηθεὶς ἢ νούσῳ,
ἄλλος ἀνὴρ ἀραίρητο, καὶ ἐγίνοντο οὐδαμὰ οὔτε πλεῦνες
μυρίων οὔτε ἐλάσσονες. κόσμον δὲ πλεῖστον παρείχοντο
διὰ πάντων Πέρσαι, καὶ αὐτοὶ ἄριστοι ἦσαν. σκευὴν
μὲν τοιαύτην εἶχον ἥ περ εἴρηται, χωρὶς δὲ χρυσόν τε
10 πολλὸν καὶ ἄφθονον ἔχοντες ἐνέπρεπον, ἁρμαμάξας τε
ἅμα ἤγοντο, ἐν δὲ παλλακὰς καὶ θεραπηίην πολλήν τε
καὶ εὖ ἐσκευασμένην· σῖτα δέ σφι, χωρὶς τῶν ἄλλων
στρατιωτέων, κάμηλοί τε καὶ ὑποζύγια ἦγον.
Εν
BOOK VII.
113
Ο
The Cavalry, and their Commanders; Pharnuches' Mishap.
Ἱππεύει δὲ ταῦτα τὰ ἔθνεα· πλὴν οὐ πάντα παρεί- 84
χετο ἵππον, ἀλλὰ τοσάδε μοῦνα, Πέρσαι μὲν τὴν αὐτὴν
ἐσκευασμένοι καὶ ὁ πεζὸς αὐτῶν· πλὴν ἐπὶ τῇσι κεφα-
λῇσι εἶχον ἔνιοι αὐτῶν καὶ χάλκεα καὶ σιδήρεα ἐξεληλα-
μένα ποιήματα. εἰσὶ δέ τινες νομάδες ἄνθρωποι Σα- 85
γάρτιοι καλεόμενοι, ἔθνος μὲν Περσικὸν καὶ φωνῇ,
σκευὴν δὲ μεταξὺ ἔχουσι πεποιημένην τῆς τε Περσικῆς
καὶ τῆς Πακτυϊκῆς· οἳ παρείχοντο μὲν ἵππον ὀκτα-
κισχιλίην, ὅπλα δὲ οὐ νομίζουσι ἔχειν οὔτε χάλκεα 5
οὔτε σιδήρεα ἔξω ἐγχειριδίων, χρέονται δὲ σειρῇσι
πεπλεγμένῃσι ἐξ ἱμάντων. ταύτῃσι πίσυνοι ἔρχονται
ἐς πόλεμον· ἡ δὲ μάχη τούτων τῶν ἀνδρῶν ἥδε· ἐπεὰν
συμμίσγωσι τοῖσι πολεμίοισι, βάλλουσι τὰς σειρὰς ἐπ'
ἄκρῳ βρόχους ἐχούσας· ὅτευ δ᾽ ἂν τύχῃ, ἤν τε ἵππου 10
ἤν τε ἀνθρώπου, ἐπ᾽ ἑωυτὸν ἕλκει· οἱ δὲ ἐν ἕρκεσι
ἐμπαλασσόμενοι διαφθείρονται. τούτων μὲν αὕτη ἡ 86
μάχη, καὶ ἐπετετάχατο ἐς τοὺς Πέρσας. Μῆδοι δὲ τήν
περ ἐν τῷ πεζῷ εἶχον σκευήν, καὶ Κίσσιοι ὡσαύτως.
Ἰνδοὶ δὲ σκευῇ μὲν ἐσεσάχατο τῇ αὐτῇ καὶ ἐν τῷ πεζῷ,
ἤλαυνον δὲ κέλητας καὶ ἅρματα· ὑπὸ δὲ τοῖσι ἅρμασι 5
ὑπῆσαν ἵπποι καὶ ὄνοι ἄγριοι. Βάκτριοι δὲ ἐσκευάδατο
ὡσαύτως καὶ ἐν τῷ πεζῷ, καὶ Κάσπιοι ὁμοίως. Λίβυες
δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ κατά περ ἐν τῷ πεζῷ· ἤλαυνον δὲ καὶ
οὗτοι πάντες ἅρματα. ως δ' αὕτως Κάσπιοι καὶ Παρι-
κάνιοι ἐσεσάχατο ὁμοίως καὶ ἐν τῷ πεζῷ. Αράβιοι δὲ 10
σκευὴν μὲν εἶχον τὴν αὐτὴν καὶ ἐν τῷ πεζῷ, ἤλαυνον δὲ
πάντες καμήλους ταχυτῆτα οὐ λειπομένας ἵππων.
ΕΠ
Ταῦτα τὰ ἔθνεα μοῦνα ἱππεύει. ἀριθμὸς δὲ τῆς 8
ἵππου ἐγένετο ὀκτὼ μυριάδες, πάρεξ τῶν καμήλων καὶ
114
HERODOTUS.
τῶν ἁρμάτων. οἱ μέν νυν ἄλλοι ἱππέες ἐτετάχατο κατὰ
τέλεα, ᾿Αράβιοι δὲ ἔσχατοι ἐπετετάχατο· ἅτε γὰρ τῶν
5 ἵππων οὔτι ἀνεχομένων τὰς καμήλους, ὕστεροι έτετά-
88 χατο, ἵνα μὴ φοβέοιτο τὸ ἱππικόν. ἵππαρχοι δὲ ἦσαν
Αρμαμίθρης τε καὶ Τίθαιος Δάτιος παῖδες. ὁ δὲ τρί-
τος σφι συνίππαρχος Φαρνούχης κατελέλειπτο ἐν Σάρ-
δισι νοσέων. ὡς γὰρ ὡρμέοντο ἐκ Σαρδίων, ἐπὶ συμ-
5 φορὴν περιέπεσε ἀνεθέλητον· ἐλαύνοντι γάρ οἱ ὑπὸ
τοὺς πόδας τοῦ ἵππου ὑπέδραμε κύων, καὶ ὁ ἵππος οὐ
προϊδὼν ἐφοβήθη τε καὶ στὰς ὀρθὸς ἀπεσείσατο τὸν
Φαρνούχεα, πεσὼν δὲ αἷμά τε ἤμες καὶ ἐς φθίσιν
περιῆλθε ἡ νοῦσος. τὸν δὲ ἵππον αὐτίκα κατ᾽ ἀρχὰς
10 ἐποίησαν ὡς ἐκέλευε· ἀπαγαγόντες οἱ οἰκέται ἐς τὸν
χῶρον ἐν τῷ περ κατέβαλε τὸν δεσπότην, ἐν τοῖσι γού
νασι ἀπέταμον τὰ σκέλεα. Φαρνούχης μὲν οὕτω παρε-
λύθη τῆς ἡγεμονίης.
ע:
0
The Fleet; Phoenicians, Egyptians, Cypriotes, Cilicians,
Lycians, Dorians, Ionians, Aeolians.
89 Τῶν δὲ τριηρέων ἀριθμὸς μὲν ἐγένετο ἑπτὰ καὶ διηκό-
σιαι καὶ χίλιαι, παρείχοντο δὲ αὐτὰς οἵδε, Φοίνικες μὲν
σὺν Σύροισι τοῖσι ἐν τῇ Παλαιστίνῃ τριηκοσίας, ὧδε
ἐσκευασμένοι· περὶ μὲν τῇσι κεφαλῇσι κυνέας εἶχον
5 ἀγχοτάτω πεποιημένας τρόπον τὸν Ἑλληνικόν, ἐνδεδυ-
κότες δὲ θώρηκας λινέους, ἀσπίδας δὲ ἴτυς οὐκ ἐχούσας
εἶχον καὶ ἀκόντια. οὗτοι δὲ οἱ Φοίνικες τὸ παλαιὸν
οἴκεον, ὡς αὐτοὶ λέγουσι, ἐπὶ τῇ Ἐρυθρῇ θαλάσσῃ, ἐν-
θεῦτεν δὲ ὑπερβάντες τῆς Συρίης οἰκέουσι τὸ παρὰ
10 θάλασσαν· τῆς δὲ Συρίης τοῦτο τὸ χωρίον καὶ τὸ μέχρι
Αἰγύπτου πᾶν Παλαιστίνη καλέεται. Αἰγύπτιοι δὲ
νέας παρείχοντο διηκοσίας. οὗτοι δὲ εἶχον περὶ μὲν
BOOK VII.
115
τῇσι κεφαλῇσι κράνεα χηλευτά, ἀσπίδας δὲ κοίλας, τὰς
ἴτυς μεγάλας ἐχούσας, καὶ δούρατά τε ναύμαχα καὶ
τύχους μεγάλους. τὸ δὲ πλῆθος αὐτῶν θωρηκοφόροι 15
ἦσαν, μαχαίρας δὲ μεγάλας εἶχον. οὗτοι μὲν οὕτω 90
ἐστάλατο, Κύπριοι δὲ παρείχοντο νέας πεντήκοντα καὶ
ἑκατόν, ἐσκευασμένοι ὧδε· τὰς μὲν κεφαλὰς ειλίχατο
μίτρῃσι οἱ βασιλέες αὐτῶν, οἱ δὲ ἄλλοι εἶχον κιθῶνας,
τὰ δὲ ἄλλα κατά περ Ἕλληνες. τούτων δὲ τοσάδε 5
ἔθνεά εἰσι, οἱ μὲν ἀπὸ Σαλαμῖνος καὶ ᾿Αθηνέων, οἱ δὲ
ἀπ᾽ Αρκαδίης, οἱ δὲ ἀπὸ Κύθνου, οἱ δὲ ἀπὸ Φοινίκης, οἱ
δὲ ἀπὸ Αἰθιοπίης, ὡς αὐτοὶ Κύπριοι λέγουσι. Κίλικες 91
δὲ ἑκατὸν παρείχοντο νέας. οὗτοι δ᾽ αὖ περὶ μὲν τῇσι
κεφαλῇσι κράνεα ἐπιχώρια, λαισήιά τε εἶχον ἀντ᾽
ἀσπίδων, ὠμοβοέης πεποιημένα, καὶ κιθῶνας εἰρινέους
ἐνδεδυκότες· δύο δὲ ἀκόντια ἕκαστος καὶ ξίφος εἶχον, 5
ἀγχοτάτω τῇσι Αἰγυπτίῃσι μαχαίρῃσι πεποιημένα.
οὗτοι μὲν τὸ παλαιὸν Ὑπαχαιοὶ ἐκαλέοντο, ἐπὶ δὲ Κίλι-
κος τοῦ ᾿Αγήνορος ἀνδρὸς Φοίνικος ἔσχον τὴν ἐπωνυμίην.
Πάμφυλοι δὲ τριήκοντα παρείχοντο νέας Ελληνικοῖσι
ὅπλοισι ἐσκευασμένοι· οἱ δὲ Πάμφυλοι οὗτοι εἰσὶ τῶν 10
ἐκ Τροίης ἀποσκεδασθέντων ἅμα ᾿Αμφιλόχῳ καὶ Κάλ
χαντι. Λύκιοι δὲ παρείχοντο νέας πεντήκοντα θωρηκο- 92
φόροι τε ἐόντες καὶ κνημιδοφόροι, εἶχον δὲ τόξα κρανέινα
καὶ ὀιστοὺς καλαμίνους ἀπτέρους καὶ ἀκόντια, ἐπὶ δὲ
αἰγὸς δέρμα περὶ τοὺς ὤμους αἰωρεύμενον, περὶ δὲ τῇσι
κεφαλῇσι πίλους πτεροῖσι περιεστεφανωμένους· ἐγχει- 5
ρίδια δὲ καὶ δρέπανα εἶχον. Λύκιοι δὲ Τερμίλαι έκα-
λέοντο ἐκ Κρήτης γεγονότες, ἐπὶ δὲ Λύκου τοῦ Πανδίονος
ἀνδρὸς 'Αθηναίου ἔσχον τὴν ἐπωνυμίην. Δωριέες δὲ οἱ 93
ἐκ τῆς ᾿Ασίης τριήκοντα παρείχοντο νέας, ἔχοντές τε
Ἑλληνικὰ ὅπλα καὶ γεγονότες ἀπὸ Πελοποννήσου.
οι
116
HERODOTUS.
Κᾶρες δὲ ἑβδομήκοντα παρείχοντο νέας, τὰ μὲν ἄλλα
5 κατά περ Ἕλληνες ἐσταλμένοι, εἶχον δὲ καὶ δρέπανα
καὶ ἐγχειρίδια. οὗτοι δὲ οἵτινες πρότερον ἐκαλέοντο, ἐν
94 τοῖσι πρώτοισι τῶν λόγων εἴρηται. Ἴωνες δὲ ἑκατὸν
νέας παρείχοντο ἐσκευασμένοι ὡς Ἕλληνες. Ἴωνες δὲ
ὅσον μὲν χρόνον ἐν Πελοποννήσῳ οἴκεον τὴν νῦν καλεο-
μένην 'Αχαιίην, καὶ πρὶν ἢ Δαναόν τε καὶ Ξοῦθον ἀπι-
5 κέσθαι ἐς Πελοπόννησον, ὡς Ἕλληνες λέγουσι, ἐκαλέοντο
Πελασγοί Αἰγιαλέες, ἐπὶ δὲ Ἴωνος τοῦ Ξούθου Ἴωνες.
95 νησιῶται δὲ ἑπτακαίδεκα παρείχοντο νέας, ὡπλισμένοι
ὡς Ἕλληνες, καὶ τοῦτο Πελασγικὸν ἔθνος, ὕστερον δὲ
Ἰωνικὸν ἐκλήθη κατὰ τὸν αὐτὸν λόγον καὶ οἱ δυωδεκα-
πόλιες Ἴωνες οἱ ἀπ᾿ Αθηνέων. Αἰολέες δὲ ἑξήκοντα
5 νέας παρείχοντο, ἐσκευασμένοι τε ὡς Ἕλληνες καὶ τὸ
πάλαι καλεόμενοι Πελασγοί, ὡς Ἑλλήνων λόγος. Ελ.
λησπόντιοι δὲ πλὴν ᾿Αβυδηνῶν (Αβυδηνοῖσι γὰρ προσε-
τέτακτο ἐκ βασιλέος κατὰ χώρην μένουσι φύλακας
εἶναι τῶν γεφυρέων) οἱ δὲ λοιποὶ οἱ ἐκ τοῦ Πόντου
10 στρατευόμενοι παρείχοντο μὲν ἑκατὸν νέας, ἐσκευασμέ
νοι δὲ ἦσαν ὡς Ἕλληνες. οὗτοι δὲ Ἰώνων καὶ Δωριέων
ἄποικοι.
Commanders and Noted Men in the Fleet.
96 Επεβάτευον δὲ ἐπὶ πασέων τῶν νεῶν Πέρσαι καὶ
Μῆδοι καὶ Σάκαι. τούτων δὲ ἄριστα πλεούσας παρεί-
χοντο νέας Φοίνικες καὶ Φοινίκων Σιδώνιοι. τούτοισι
πᾶσι καὶ τοῖσι ἐς τὸν πεζὸν τεταγμένοισι αὐτῶν ἐπῆ
5 σαν ἑκάστοισι ἐπιχώριοι ἡγεμόνες, τῶν ἐγώ, οὐ γὰρ
ἀναγκαίῃ ἐξέργομαι ἐς ἱστορίης λόγον, οὐ παραμέμνη-
μαι· οὔτε γὰρ ἔθνεος ἑκάστου ἐπάξιοι ἦσαν οἱ ἡγεμό
νες, ἔν τε ἔθνεῖ ἑκάστῳ ὅσαι περ πόλιες τοσοῦτοι καὶ
BOOK VII.
117
ἡγεμόνες ἦσαν. εἵποντο δὲ ὡς οὐ στρατηγοὶ ἀλλ᾿ ὥσπερ
οἱ ἄλλοι στρατευόμενοι δοῦλοι, ἐπεὶ στρατηγοί γε οἱ τὸ 10
πᾶν ἔχοντες κράτος καὶ ἄρχοντες τῶν ἐθνέων ἑκάστων,
ὅσοι αὐτῶν ἦσαν Πέρσαι, εἰρέαταί μοι. τοῦ δὲ ναυ-97
τικοῦ ἐστρατήγεον οἵδε, Αριαβίγνης τε ὁ Δαρείου καὶ
Πρηξάσπης ὁ ᾿Ασπαθίνεω καὶ Μεγάβαζος ὁ Μεγαβά
τεω καὶ ᾿Αχαιμένης ὁ Δαρείου, τῆς μὲν Ἰάδος τε καὶ
Καρικῆς στρατιῆς ᾿Αριαβίγνης ὁ Δαρείου τε παῖς καὶ 5
τῆς Γοβρύεω θυγατρός· Αἰγυπτίων δὲ ἐστρατήγεε
Αχαιμένης Ξέρξεω ἐὼν ἀπ᾽ ἀμφοτέρων ἀδελφεός, τῆς
δὲ ἄλλης στρατιῆς ἐστρατήγεον οἱ δύο. τριηκόντεροι
δὲ καὶ πεντηκόντεροι καὶ κέρκουροι καὶ ἱππαγωγὰ πλοῖα
μακρὰ συνελθόντα ἐς τὸν ἀριθμὸν ἐφάνη τρισχίλια. 10
τῶν δὲ ἐπιπλεόντων μετά γε τοὺς στρατηγοὺς οἵδε ἦσαν 98
ὀνομαστότατοι, Σιδώνιος Τετράμνηστος ᾿Ανύσου, καὶ
Τύριος Ματτὴν Σιρώμου, καὶ ᾿Αράδιος Μέρβαλος Αγ.
βάλου, καὶ Κίλιξ Συέννεσις Ωρομέδοντος, καὶ Λύκιος
Κυβερνίσκος Σίκα, καὶ Κύπριοι Γόργος τε ὁ Χέρσιος 5
καὶ Τιμῶναξ ὁ Τιμαγόρεω, καὶ Καρῶν Ἱστιαῖός τε
Τύμνεω καὶ Πίγρης ὁ Ὑσσελδώμου καὶ Δαμασίθυμος ὁ
Κανδαύλεω.
Artemisia; Xerxes Inspects the Host.
Τῶν μέν νυν ἄλλων οὐ παραμέμνημαι ταξιαρχέων ὡς 99
οὐκ ἀναγκαζόμενος, Αρτεμισίης δέ, τῆς μάλιστα θῶυμα
ποιεῦμαι ἐπὶ τὴν Ἑλλάδα στρατευσαμένης γυναικός,
ἥτις ἀποθανόντος τοῦ ἀνδρὸς αὐτή τε ἔχουσα τὴν τυραν
νίδα καὶ παιδὸς ὑπάρχοντος νεηνίεω ὑπὸ λήματός τε 5
καὶ ἀνδρηίης ἐστρατεύετο, οὐδεμιᾶς ἐούσης ἀναγκαίης.
οὔνομα μὲν δὴ ἦν αὐτῇ ᾿Αρτεμισίη, θυγάτηρ δὲ ἦν
Λυγδάμιος, γένος δὲ ἐξ ῾Αλικαρνησσοῦ τὰ πρὸς πατρός,
118
HERODOTUS.
τὰ μητρόθεν δὲ Κρῆσσα. ἡγεμόνευε δὲ ῾Αλικαρνησσέων
10τε καὶ Κῴων καὶ Νισυρίων τε καὶ Καλυδνίων, πέντε
νέας παρεχομένη. καὶ συναπάσης τῆς στρατιῆς, μετά
γε τὰς Σιδωνίων, νέας εὐδοξοτάτας παρείχετο, πάντων
τε τῶν συμμάχων γνώμας ἀρίστας βασιλέι ἀπεδέξατο.
τῶν δὲ κατέλεξα πολίων ἡγεμονεύειν αυτήν, τὸ ἔθνος
15 ἀποφαίνω πᾶν ἐὸν Δωρικόν, Αλικαρνησσέας μὲν Τροι-
ζηνίους, τοὺς δὲ ἄλλους Επιδαυρίους. ἐς μὲν τοσόνδε
ὁ ναυτικὸς στρατὸς εἴρηται.
100 Ξέρξης δέ, ἐπεὶ ἠριθμήθη τε καὶ διετάχθη ὁ στρατός,
0 ó
ἐπεθύμησε αὐτός σφεας διεξελάσας θεήσασθαι. μετὰ
δὲ ἐποίεε ταῦτα, καὶ διεξελαύνων ἐπὶ ἅρματος παρὰ
ἔθνος ἓν ἕκαστον ἐπυνθάνετο, καὶ ἀπέγραφον οἱ γραμ
5 ματισταί, ἕως ἐξ ἐσχάτων ἐς ἔσχατα ἀπίκετο καὶ τῆς
ἵππου καὶ τοῦ πεζοῦ, ὡς δὲ ταῦτά οἱ ἐπεποίητο, τῶν
νεῶν κατελκυσθεισέων ἐς θάλασσαν, ἐνθαῦτα ὁ Ξέρξης
μετεκβὰς ἐκ τοῦ ἅρματος ἐς νέα Σιδωνίην ἵζετο ὑπὸ
σκηνῇ χρυσέῃ καὶ παρέπλεε παρὰ τὰς πρώρας τῶν
10 νεῶν, ἐπειρωτέων τε ἑκάστας ὁμοίως καὶ τὸν πεζὸν καὶ
ἀπογραφόμενος. τὰς δὲ νέας οἱ ναύαρχοι ἀναγαγόντες
ὅσον τε τέσσερα πλέθρα ἀπὸ τοῦ αἰγιαλοῦ ἀνεκώχευον,
τὰς πρώρας ἐς γῆν τρέψαντες πάντες μετωπηδόν, καὶ
ἐξοπλίσαντες τοὺς ἐπιβάτας ὡς ἐς πόλεμον. ὁ δ᾽ ἐντὸς
15 τῶν πρωρέων πλέων ἐθηεῖτο καὶ τοῦ αἰγιαλοῦ.
101
Xerxes Confers with Demaratus.
Ο
Ὡς δὲ καὶ ταύτας διεξέπλωσε καὶ ἐξέβη ἐκ τῆς νεός,
μετεπέμψατο Δημάρητον τὸν ᾿Αρίστωνος συστρατευό
μενον αὐτῷ ἐπὶ τὴν Ἑλλάδα, καλέσας δ᾽ αὐτὸν εἴρετο
τάδε· “ Δημάρητε, νῦν μοι σὲ ἡδύ τι ἐστὶ εἴρεσθαι τὰ
σε
5 θέλω. σὺ εἰς Ἕλλην τε, καὶ ὡς ἐγὼ πυνθάνομαι σε
BOOK VII.
119
Ο
Ο
τε καὶ τῶν ἄλλων Ελλήνων τῶν ἐμοὶ ἐς λόγους ἀπικνεο-
μένων, πόλιος οὔτ᾽ ἐλαχίστης οὔτ᾽ ἀσθενεστάτης. νῦν
ὦν μοι τόδε φράσον, εἰ Ἕλληνες ὑπομενέουσι χεῖρας
ἐμοὶ ἀνταειρόμενοι. οὐ γάρ, ὡς ἐγὼ δοκέω, οὐδ᾽ εἰ πάντες
Ἕλληνες καὶ οἱ λοιποὶ οἱ πρὸς ἑσπέρης οἰκέοντες ἄν-10
θρωποι συλλεχθείησαν, οὐκ ἀξιόμαχοί εἰσι ἐμὲ ἐπιόντα
ὑπομεῖναι, μὴ ἐόντες ἄρθμιοι. θέλω μέντοι καὶ τὸ ἀπὸ
σεῦ, ὁκοῖόν τι λέγεις περὶ αὐτῶν, πυθέσθαι.” ὁ μὲν
ταῦτα εἰρώτα, ὁ δὲ ὑπολαβὼν ἔφη, “ βασιλεῦ, κότερα
ἀληθείῃ χρήσωμαι πρὸς σὲ ἢ ἡδονῇ ;” ὁ δέ μιν ἀληθείῃ 15
χρήσασθαι ἐκέλευε, φὰς οὐδέν οἱ ἀηδέστερον ἔσεσθαι
ἢ πρότερον ἦν. ὡς δὲ ταῦτα ἤκουσε Δημάρητος, ἔλεγε 102
τάδε· “ βασιλεῦ, ἐπειδὴ ἀληθείῃ διαχρήσασθαι πάντως
κελεύεις ταῦτα λέγοντα τὰ μὴ ψευδόμενός τις ὕστερον
ὑπὸ σεῦ ἁλώσεται, τῇ Ἑλλάδι πενίη μὲν αἰεί κοτε
σύντροφός ἐστι, ἀρετὴ δὲ ἔπακτός ἐστι, ἀπό τε σοφίης 5
κατεργασμένη καὶ νόμου ἰσχυροῦ· τῇ διαχρεομένη ἡ
Ἑλλὰς τήν τε πενίην ἀπαμύνεται καὶ τὴν δεσποσύνην.
αἰνέω μέν νυν πάντας Ἕλληνας τοὺς περὶ ἐκείνους τοὺς
Δωρικούς χώρους οἰκημένους, ἔρχομαι δὲ λέξων οὐ περὶ
πάντων τούσδε τοὺς λόγους ἀλλὰ περὶ Λακεδαιμονίων 10
μούνων, πρῶτα μὲν ὅτι οὐκ ἔστι ὅκως κοτὲ σοὺς δέξονται
λόγους δουλοσύνην φέροντας τῇ Ἑλλάδι, αὖτις δὲ ὡς
ἀντιώσονταί τοι ἐς μάχην καὶ ἢν οἱ ἄλλοι Ἕλληνες
πάντες τὰ σὰ φρονέωσι. ἀριθμοῦ δὲ πέρι, μὴ πύθῃ
ὅσοι τινὲς ἐόντες ταῦτα ποιέειν οἷοί τε εἰσί· ἤν τε γὰρ 15
τύχωσι ἐξεστρατευμένοι χίλιοι, οὗτοι μαχήσονταί τοι,
ἤν τε ἐλάσσονες τούτων, ἤν τε καὶ πλεῦνες.” ταῦτα 103
ἀκούσας Ξέρξης γελάσας ἔφη, “ Δημάρητε, οἷον ἐφθέγξαο
ἔπος, ἄνδρας χιλίους στρατιῇ τοσῇδε μαχήσεσθαι. ἄγε
εἰπέ μοι· σὺ φῂς τούτων τῶν ἀνδρῶν βασιλεὺς αὐτὸς
120
HERODOTUS.
5 γενέσθαι· σὺ ἦν ἐθελήσεις αὐτίκα μάλα πρὸς ἄνδρας
δέκα μάχεσθαι; καίτοι εἰ τὸ πολιτικὸν ὑμῖν πᾶν ἐστι
τοιοῦτον οἷον σὺ διαιρέεις, σέ γε τὸν κείνων βασιλέα
πρέπει πρὸς τὸ διπλήσιον ἀντιτάσσεσθαι κατὰ νόμους
τοὺς ὑμετέρους. εἰ γὰρ κείνων ἕκαστος δέκα ἀνδρῶν
10 τῆς στρατιῆς τῆς ἐμῆς ἀντάξιός ἐστι, σὲ δέ γε δίζημαι
εἴκοσι εἶναι ἀντάξιον. καὶ οὕτω μὲν ὀρθοῖτ᾽ ἂν ὁ λόγος
ὁ παρὰ σέο λεγόμενος· εἰ δὲ τοιοῦτοί τε ἐόντες καὶ
μεγάθεα τοσοῦτοι, ὅσοι σύ τε καὶ οἳ παρ᾽ ἐμὲ φοιτέουσι
Ἑλλήνων ἐς λόγους, αὐχέετε τοσοῦτον, ὅρα μὴ μάτην
15 κόμπος ὁ λόγος οὗτος εἰρημένος ᾖ. ἐπεὶ φέρε ἴδω παντὶ
τῷ οἰκότι· κῶς ἂν δυναίατο χίλιοι ἢ καὶ μύριοι ἢ καὶ
πεντακισμύριοι, ἐόντες γε ἐλεύθεροι πάντες ὁμοίως καὶ
μὴ ὑπ᾽ ἑνὸς ἀρχόμενοι, στρατῷ τοσῷδε ἀντιστῆναι ;
ἐπεί τοι πλευνες περὶ ἕνα ἕκαστον γινόμεθα ἢ χίλιοι,
20 ἐόντων ἐκείνων πέντε χιλιάδων. ὑπὸ μὲν γὰρ ἑνὸς
ἀρχόμενοι κατὰ τρόπον τὸν ἡμέτερον γενοίατ᾽ ἄν, δει-
μαίνοντες τοῦτον, καὶ παρὰ τὴν ἑωυτῶν φύσιν ἀμείνονες,
καὶ ἴοιεν ἀναγκαζόμενοι μάστιγι ἐς πλεῦνας ἐλάσσονες
ἐόντες· ἀνειμένοι δὲ ἐς τὸ ἐλεύθερον οὐκ ἂν ποιέοιεν
25 τούτων οὐδέτερα. δοκέω δὲ ἔγωγε καὶ ἀνισωθέντας
πλήθει χαλεπῶς ἂν Ἕλληνας Πέρσῃσι μούνοισι μά
χεσθαι. ἀλλὰ παρ' ἡμῖν μὲν μούνοισι τοῦτό ἐστι τὸ
σὺ λέγεις, ἔστι γε μὲν οὐ πολλὸν ἀλλὰ σπάνιον· εἰσὶ
γὰρ Περσέων τῶν ἐμῶν αἰχμοφόρων οἳ ἐθελήσουσι
30 Ελλήνων ἀνδράσι τρισὶ ὁμοῦ μάχεσθαι· τῶν σὺ ἐὼν
104 ἄπειρος πολλὰ φλυηρέεις.” πρὸς ταῦτα Δημάρητος
λέγει, “ ὦ βασιλεῦ, ἀρχῆθεν ήπιστάμην ὅτι ἀληθείῃ
χρεόμενος οὐ φίλα τοι ἐρέω. σὺ δ᾽ ἐπεὶ ἠνάγκασας
λέγειν τῶν λόγων τοὺς ἀληθεστάτους, ἔλεγον τὰ κατή-
5 κοντα Σπαρτιήτῃσι. καίτοι ὡς ἐγὼ τυγχάνω τὰ νῦν
σε
BOOK VII.
121
Ο
τάδε ἐστοργὼς, ἐκείνους . . ., αὐτὸς μάλιστα ἐξεπίστεαι,
οἵ με τιμήν τε καὶ γέρεα ἀπελόμενοι πατρώια ἄπολίν τε
καὶ φυγάδα πεποιήκασι, πατὴρ δὲ σὸς ὑποδεξάμενος
βίον τέ μοι καὶ οἶκον ἔδωκε. οὔκων οἰκός ἐστι ἄνδρα
τὸν σώφρονα εὐνοίην φαινομένην διωθέεσθαι, ἀλλὰ 10
στέργειν μάλιστα. ἐγὼ δὲ οὔτε δέκα ἀνδράσι ὑπίσχο-
μαι οἷός τε εἶναι μάχεσθαι οὔτε δυοῖσι, ἑκών τε εἶναι
οὐδ᾽ ἂν μουνομαχέοιμι. εἰ δὲ ἀναγκαίη εἴη ἢ μέγας τις
ὁ ἐποτρύνων ἀγών, μαχοίμην ἂν πάντων ἥδιστα ἑνὶ τού-
των τῶν ἀνδρῶν οἳ Ἑλλήνων ἕκαστος φησι τριῶν ἄξιος 15
εἶναι. ὡς δὲ καὶ Λακεδαιμόνιοι κατὰ μὲν ἕνα μαχό
μενοι οὐδαμῶν εἰσι κακίονες ἀνδρῶν, ἁλέες δὲ ἄριστοι
ἀνδρῶν ἁπάντων. ἐλεύθεροι γὰρ ἐόντες οὐ πάντα ἐλεύ
θεροί εἰσι· ἔπεστι γάρ σφι δεσπότης νόμος, τὸν ὑποδει-
μαίνουσι πολλῷ ἔτι μᾶλλον ἢ οἱ σοὶ σέ. ποιεῦσι γῶν 20
τὰ ἂν ἐκεῖνος ἀνώγῃ· ἀνώγει δὲ τὠυτὸ αἰεί, οὐκ ἐῶν
φεύγειν οὐδὲν πλῆθος ἀνθρώπων ἐκ μάχης, ἀλλὰ μένον
τας ἐν τῇ τάξι ἐπικρατέειν ἢ ἀπόλλυσθαι. σοὶ δὲ εἰ
φαίνομαι ταῦτα λέγων φλυηρέειν, τἆλλα σιγᾶν θέλω τὸ
λοιπόν· νῦν τε ἀναγκασθεὶς ἔλεξα. γένοιτο μέντοι 25
κατὰ νόον τοι, βασιλεῦ.”
ار
Mascames and Boges.
Ὁ μὲν δὴ ταῦτα ἀμείψατο, Ξέρξης δὲ ἐς γέλωτά τε 105
ἔτρεψε καὶ οὐκ ἐποιήσατο ὀργὴν οὐδεμίαν, ἀλλ᾽ ἐπίως
αὐτὸν ἀπεπέμψατο. τούτῳ δὲ ἐς λόγους ἐλθὼν Ξέρξης,
καὶ ὕπαρχον ἐν τῷ Δορίσκῳ τούτῳ καταστήσας Μασ
κάμην τὸν Μεγαδόστεω, τὸν δὲ ὑπὸ Δαρείου σταθέντα 5
καταπαύσας, ἐξήλαυνε τὸν στρατὸν διὰ τῆς Θρηίκης
ἐπὶ τὴν Ἑλλάδα. κατέλιπε δὲ ἄνδρα τοιόνδε Μασκά - 106
μην γενόμενον, τῷ μούνῳ Ξέρξης δῶρα πέμπεσκε ὡς
του
6
122
HERODOTUS.
Εν
ἀριστεύοντι πάντων ὅσους αὐτὸς κατέστησε ἢ Δαρείος
ὑπάρχους, πέμπεσκε δὲ ἀνὰ πᾶν ἔτος· ὡς δὲ καὶ ᾿Αρτα-
5 ξέρξης ὁ Ξέρξεω τοῖσι Μασκαμείοισι ἐκγόνοισι. κατέ-
στασαν γὰρ ἔτι πρότερον ταύτης τῆς ἐλάσιος ὕπαρχοι
ἐν τῇ Θρηίκῃ καὶ τοῦ Ἑλλησπόντου πανταχῇ. οὗτοι
ὢν πάντες οἵ τε ἐκ Θρηίκης καὶ τοῦ Ἑλλησπόντου,
πλὴν τοῦ ἐν Δορίσκῳ, ὑπὸ Ἑλλήνων ὕστερον ταύτης
10 τῆς στρατηλασίης ἐξαιρέθησαν· τὸν δὲ ἐν Δορίσκῳ
Μασκάμην οὐδαμοί κω ἐδυνάσθησαν ἐξελεῖν, πολλῶν
πειρησαμένων. διὰ τοῦτο δέ οἱ τὰ δῶρα πέμπεται παρὰ
10% τοῦ βασιλεύοντος αἰεὶ ἐν Πέρσῃσι, τῶν δὲ ἐξαιρεθέντων
ὑπὸ Ἑλλήνων οὐδένα βασιλεὺς Ξέρξης ἐνόμισε εἶναι
ἄνδρα ἀγαθὸν εἰ μὴ Βόγην μοῦνον τὸν ἐξ Ηιόνος. τοῦ-
τον δὲ αἰνέων οὐκ ἐπαύετο, καὶ τοὺς περιεόντας αὐτοῦ
5 ἐν Πέρσῃσι παῖδας ἐτίμα μάλιστα, ἐπεὶ καὶ ἄξιος αἴνου
μεγάλου ἐγένετο Βύγης· ὃς ἐπειδὴ ἐπολιορκέετο ὑπὸ
Αθηναίων και Κίμωνος τοῦ Μιλτιάδεω, παρεὸν αὐτῷ
ὑπόσπονδον ἐξελθεῖν καὶ νοστῆσαι ἐς τὴν ᾿Ασίην, οὐκ
ἠθέλησε, μὴ δειλίῃ δόξειε περιεῖναι βασιλέι, ἀλλὰ διε-
10 καρτέρεε ἐς τὸ ἔσχατον. ὡς δ᾽ οὐδὲν ἔτι φορβῆς ἐνῆν
ἐν τῷ τείχει, συννήσας πυρὴν μεγάλην ἔσφαξε τὰ τέκνα
καὶ τὴν γυναῖκα καὶ τὰς παλλακὰς καὶ τοὺς οἰκέτας καὶ
ἔπειτα ἐσέβαλε ἐς τὸ πῦρ, μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα τὸν χρυσὸν
ἅπαντα τὸν ἐκ τοῦ ἄστεος καὶ τὸν ἄργυρον ἔσπειρε ἀπὸ
15 τοῦ τείχεος ἐς τὸν Στρυμόνα, ποιήσας δὲ ταῦτα ἑωυτὸν
ἐσέβαλε ἐς τὸ πῦρ. οὕτω μὲν οὗτος δικαίως αἰνέεται
ἔτι καὶ ἐς τόδε ὑπὸ Περσέων.
The Army Marches Westward through Thrace.
108 Ξέρξης δὲ ἐκ τοῦ Δορίσκου ἐπορεύετο ἐπὶ τὴν Ἑλ.
λάδα, τοὺς δὲ αἰεὶ γινομένους ἐμποδὼν συστρατεύεσθαι
BOOK VII.
123
ἠνάγκαζε· ἐδεδούλωτο γάρ, ὡς καὶ πρότερόν μοι δεδή-
λωται, ἡ μέχρι Θεσσαλίης πᾶσα καὶ ἦν ὑπὸ βασιλέα
δασμοφόρος, Μεγαβάζου τε καταστρεψαμένου καὶ ὕστε- 5
ρον Μαρδονίου. παραμείβετο δὲ πορευόμενος ἐκ Δορί-
σκου πρῶτα μὲν τὰ Σαμοθρηίκια τείχεα, τῶν ἐσχάτη
πεπόλισται πρὸς ἑσπέρης πόλις τῇ οὔνομά ἐστι Με-
σαμβρίη. ἔχεται δὲ ταύτης Θασίων πόλις Στρύμη,
διὰ δέ σφεων τοῦ μέσου Λίσος ποταμὸς διαρρέει, ὃς 10
τότε οὐκ ἀντέσχε τὸ ὕδωρ παρέχων τῷ Ξέρξεω στρατῷ
ἀλλ᾽ ἐπέλιπε. ἡ δὲ χώρη αὕτη πάλαι μὲν ἐκαλέετα
Γαλλαϊκή, νῦν δὲ Βριαντική· ἔστι μέντοι τῷ δικαιοτάτῳ
τῶν λόγων καὶ αὕτη Κικόνων. διαβὰς δὲ τοῦ Λίσου 109
ποταμοῦ τὸ ῥέεθρον ἀπεξηρασμένον πόλιας Ἑλληνίδας
τάσδε παραμείβετο, Μαρώνειαν, Δίκαιαν, "Αβδηρα. ταύ
τας τε δὴ παρεξήιε καὶ κατὰ ταύτας λίμνας ὀνομαστὰς
τάσδε, Μαρωνείης μὲν μεταξὺ καὶ Στρύμης κειμένην 5
Ισμαρίδα, κατὰ δὲ Δίκαιαν Βιστονίδα, ἐς τὴν ποταμοὶ
δύο ἐσιεῖσι τὸ ὕδωρ, Τρανός τε καὶ Κόμψαντος. κατὰ
δὲ Αβδηρα λίμνην μὲν οὐδεμίαν ἐοῦσαν ὀνομαστὴν
παραμείψατο Ξέρξης, ποταμὸν δὲ Νέστον ῥέοντα ἐς
θάλασσαν. μετὰ δὲ ταύτας τὰς χώρας ἰὼν τὰς ἠπει-10
ρώτιδας πόλις παρήιε, τῶν ἐν μιῇ λίμνη ἐοῦσα τυγχά
νει ὡσεὶ τριήκοντα σταδίων μάλιστά κῃ τὴν περίοδον,
ιχθυώδης τε καὶ κάρτα ἁλμυρή· ταύτην τὰ ὑποζύγια
μοῦνα ἀρδόμενα ἀνεξήρηνε. τῇ δὲ πόλι ταύτῃ οὔνομά
ἐστι Πίστυρος. ταύτας μὲν δὴ τὰς πόλιας τὰς παραθα- 110
λασσίας τε καὶ Ἑλληνίδας ἐξ εὐωνύμου χειρὸς ἀπέργων
παρεξήιε. ἔθνεα δὲ Θρηίκων δι᾽ ὧν τῆς χώρης ὁδὸν
ἐποιέετο τοσάδε, Παῖτοι, Κίκονες, Βίστονες, Σαπαίοι,
Δερσαῖοι, Ηδωνοὶ, Σάτραι. τούτων οἱ μὲν παρὰ θάλασ- 5
σαν κατοικημένοι ἐν τῇσι νηυσὶ εἵποντο· οἱ δὲ αὐτῶν
ΤΟ
124
HERODOTUS.
τὴν μεσόγαιαν οἰκέοντες καταλεχθέντες τε ὑπ' ἐμεῦ,
πλὴν Σατρέων, οἱ ἄλλοι πάντες πεζῇ ἀναγκαζόμενοι
111 εἵποντο. Σάτραι δὲ οὐδενός κω ἀνθρώπων ὑπήκοοι
ἐγένοντο, ὅσον ἡμεῖς ἴδμεν, ἀλλὰ διατελεῦσι τὸ μέχρι
ἐμεῦ αἰεὶ ἐόντες ἐλεύθεροι μοῦνοι Θρηίκων· οἰκέουσί τε
γὰρ ὄρεα ὑψηλά, ἴδῃσί τε παντοίῃσι καὶ χιόνι συνηρε-
5 φέα, καὶ εἰσὶ τὰ πολέμια ἄκροι. οὗτοι οἱ τοῦ Διονύσου
τὸ μαντήιόν εἰσι ἐκτημένοι· τὸ δὲ μαντήιον τοῦτο ἔστι
μὲν ἐπὶ τῶν ὀρέων τῶν ὑψηλοτάτων, Βησσοὶ δὲ τῶν
Σατρέων εἰσὶ οἱ προφητεύοντες τοῦ ἱροῦ, πρόμαντις δὲ
ἡ χρέουσα κατά περ ἐν Δελφοῖσι, καὶ οὐδὲν ποικιλώ-
10 τερον.
Advance to the Strymon.
112 Παραμειψάμενος δὲ ὁ Ξέρξης τὴν εἰρημένην, δεύ-
τερα τούτων παραμείβετο τείχεα τὰ Πιέρων, τῶν ἑνὶ
Φάγρης ἐστὶ οὔνομα καὶ ἑτέρῳ Πέργαμος, ταύτῃ μὲν
δὴ παρ' αὐτὰ τὰ τείχεα τὴν ὁδὸν ἐποιέετο, ἐκ δεξιῆς
5 χειρὸς τὸ Πάγγαιον ὄρος ἀπέργων, ἐὸν μέγα τε καὶ
ὑψηλόν, ἐν τῷ χρύσεά τε καὶ ἀργύρεα ἔνι μέταλλα, τὰ
νέμονται Πιερές τε καὶ Ὀδόμαντοι καὶ μάλιστα Σάτραι.
113 ὑπεροικέοντας δὲ τὸ Πάγγαιον πρὸς βορέω ἀνέμου Παίο-
νας Δόβηράς τε καὶ Παιόπλας παρεξιὼν ἤιε πρὸς ἑσπέ
ρην, ἐς ὃ ἀπίκετο ἐπὶ ποταμόν τε Στρυμόνα καὶ πόλιν
Ἠιόνα, τῆς ἔτι ζωὸς ἐὼν ἦρχε Βύγης τοῦ περ ὀλίγῳ
5 πρότερον τούτων λόγον ἐποιεύμην. ἡ δὲ γῆ αὕτη ἡ περὶ
τὸ Πάγγαιον ὄρος καλέεται Φυλλίς, κατατείνουσα τὰ
μὲν πρὸς ἑσπέρην ἐπὶ ποταμὸν ᾿Αγγίτην ἐκδιδόντα ἐς
τὸν Στρυμόνα, τὰ δὲ πρὸς μεσαμβρίην τείνουσα ἐς αὐτὸν
τὸν Στρυμόνα· ἐς τὸν οἱ Μάγοι ἐκαλλιερέοντο σφάζοντες
114 ἵππους λευκούς. φαρμακεύσαντες δὲ ταῦτα ἐς τὸν ποτα-
του
BOOK VII.
125
μὸν καὶ ἄλλα πολλὰ πρὸς τούτοισι ἐν Ἐννέα ὁδοῖσι
τῇσι Ἠδωνῶν ἐπορεύοντο κατὰ τὰς γεφύρας, τον Στρυ
μόνα εὑρόντες ἐζευγμένον. Εννέα δὲ ὁδοὺς πυνθανόμενοι
τὸν χῶρον τοῦτον καλέεσθαι, τοσούτους ἐν αὐτῷ παϊδάς 5
τε καὶ παρθένους ἀνδρῶν τῶν ἐπιχωρίων ζώοντας κατώ
ρυσσον. Περσικὸν δὲ τὸ ζώοντας κατορύσσειν, ἐπεὶ καὶ
Αμηστριν τὴν Ξέρξεω γυναῖκα πυνθάνομαι γηράσασαν
δὶς ἑπτὰ Περσέων παῖδας ἐόντων ἐπιφανέων ἀνδρῶν
ὑπὲρ ἑωυτῆς τῷ ὑπὸ γῆν λεγομένῳ εἶναι θεῷ ἀντιχαρί- 10
ζεσθαι κατορύσσουσαν.
At Acanthus; Artachaees.
Ὡς δὲ ἀπὸ τοῦ Στρυμόνος ἐπορεύετο ὁ στρατός, ἐν- 115
θαῦτα πρὸς ἡλίου δυσμέων ἐστὶ αἰγιαλὸς ἐν τῷ οἰκη-
μένην "Αργιλον πόλιν Ελλάδα παρεξήιε· αὕτη δὲ καὶ
ἡ κατύπερθε ταύτης καλέεται Βισαλτίη. ἐνθεῦτεν δὲ
κόλπον τὸν ἐπὶ Ποσιδηίου ἐξ ἀριστερῆς χειρὸς ἔχων ἤιε 5
διὰ Συλέος πεδίου καλεομένου, Στάγειρον πόλιν Ἑλλάδα
παραμειβόμενος, καὶ ἀπίκετο ἐς Ακανθον, ἅμα ἀγόμενος
τούτων ἕκαστον τῶν ἐθνέων καὶ τῶν περὶ τὸ Παγγαιον
ὄρος οἰκεόντων, ὁμοίως καὶ τῶν πρότερον κατέλεξα, τοὺς
μὲν παρὰ θάλασσαν ἔχων οἰκημένους ἐν νηυσὶ στρατευο-10
μένους, τοὺς δ᾽ ὑπὲρ θαλάσσης πεζῇ ἑπομένους. τὴν δὲ
ὁδὸν ταύτην, τῇ βασιλεὺς Ξέρξης τὸν στρατὸν ἤλασε,
οὔτε συγχέουσι Θρήικες οὔτ᾽ ἐπισπείρουσι, σέβονταί τε
μεγάλως τὸ μέχρι ἐμεῦ. ὡς δὲ ἄρα ἐς τὴν ᾿Ακανθον 116
ἀπίκετο, ξεινίην τε ὁ Ξέρξης τοῖσι ᾿Ακανθίοισι προεῖπε
καὶ ἐδωρήσατό σφεας ἐσθῆτι Μηδικῇ ἐπαίνεέ τε, ὁρέων
καὶ προθύμους ἐόντας ἐς τὸν πόλεμον καὶ τὸ ὄρυγμα
ἀκούων. ἐν ᾿Ακάνθῳ δὲ ἐόντος Ξέρξεω συνήνεικε ὑπὸ 11
νούσου ἀποθανεῖν τὸν ἐπεστεῶτα τῆς διώρυχος ᾿Αρτα-
Ο
126
HERODOTUS.
χαίην, δόκιμον ἐόντα παρὰ Ξέρξῃ καὶ γένος ᾿Αχαιμενί-
δην, μεγάθει τε μέγιστον ἐόντα Περσέων (ἀπὸ γὰρ πέντε
5 πηχέων βασιληίων ἀπέλειπε τέσσερας δακτύλους) φω-
νέοντά τε μέγιστον ἀνθρώπων, ὥστε Ξέρξην συμφορὴν
ποιησάμενον μεγάλην ἐξενεῖκαί τε αὐτὸν κάλλιστα καὶ
θάψαι· ἐτυμβοχόεε δὲ πᾶσα ἡ στρατιή. τούτῳ δὲ τῷ
Αρταχαίῃ θύουσι ᾿Ακάνθιοι ἐκ θεοπροπίου ὡς ἥρωι,
10 ἐπονομάζοντες τὸ οὔνομα.
118
How the Army was Fed.
Εν
Βασιλεὺς μὲν δὴ Ξέρξης ἀπολομένου 'Αρταχαίεω
ἐποιέετο συμφορήν. οἱ δὲ ὑποδεκόμενοι Ελλήνων τὴν
στρατιὴν καὶ δειπνίζοντες Ξέρξην ἐς πᾶν κακοῦ ἀπί-
κατο, οὕτω ὥστε ἀνάστατοι ἐκ τῶν οἴκων ἐγίνοντο·
5 ὅκου Θασίοισι ὑπὲρ τῶν ἐν τῇ ἠπείρῳ πολίων τῶν
σφετερέων δεξαμένοισι τὴν Ξέρξεω στρατιὴν καὶ δειπνί-
σασι ᾿Αντίπατρος ὁ Ὀργέος ἀραιρημένος, τῶν ἀστῶν
ἀνὴρ δόκιμος ὅμοια τῷ μάλιστα, ἀπέδεξε ἐς τὸ δεῖπνον
119 τετρακόσια τάλαντα ἀργυρίου τετελεσμένα. ὡς δὲ
παραπλησίως καὶ ἐν τῇσι ἄλλῃσι πόλισι οἱ ἐπεστεῶ-
τες ἀπεδείκνυσαν τὸν λόγον. τὸ γὰρ δεῖπνον τοιόνδε τι
ἐγίνετο, οἷα ἐκ πολλοῦ χρόνου προειρημένον καὶ περὶ
5 πολλοῦ ποιευμένων. τοῦτο μέν, ὡς ἐπύθοντο τάχιστα
τῶν κηρύκων τῶν περιαγγελλόντων, δασάμενοι σῖτον ἐν
τῇσι πόλισι οἱ ἀστοὶ, ἄλευρά τε καὶ ἄλφιτα ἐποίευν
πάντες ἐπὶ μῆνας συχνούς· τοῦτο δὲ κτήνεα ἐσίτευον
ἐξευρίσκοντες τιμῆς τὰ κάλλιστα, ἔτρεφόν τε ὄρνιθας
10 χερσαίους καὶ λιμναίους ἔν τε οἰκήμασι καὶ λάκκοισι,
ἐς ὑποδοχὰς τοῦ στρατοῦ· τοῦτο δὲ χρύσεά τε καὶ
ἀργύρεα ποτήριά τε καὶ κρητῆρας ἐποιεῦντο καὶ τἆλλα
ὅσα ἐπὶ τράπεζαν τιθέαται πάντα. ταῦτα μὲν αὐτῷ τε
BOOK VII.
127
βασιλέι καὶ τοῖσι ὁμοσίτοισι μετ' ἐκείνου ἐπεποίητο,
τῇ δὲ ἄλλῃ στρατιῇ τὰ ἐς φορβὴν μοῦνα τασσόμενα. 15
ὅκως δὲ ἀπίκοιτο ἡ στρατιή, σκηνὴ μὲν ἔσκε πεπηγυία
ἑτοίμη ἐς τὴν αὐτὸς σταθμὸν ποιεέσκετο Ξέρξης, ἡ δὲ
ἄλλη στρατιὴ ἔσκε ὑπαίθριος. ὡς δὲ δείπνου γίνοιτο
ὥρη, οἱ μὲν δεκόμενοι ἔχεσκον πόνον, οἱ δὲ ὅκως πλησ
θέντες νύκτα αὐτοῦ ἀγάγοιεν, τῇ ὑστεραίῃ τήν τε σκηνὴν 20
ἀνασπάσαντες καὶ τὰ ἔπιπλα πάντα λαβόντες οὕτω
ἀπελαύνεσκον, λείποντες οὐδὲν ἀλλὰ φερόμενοι. ἔνθα 120
δὴ Μεγακρέοντος ἀνδρὸς ᾿Αβδηρίτεω ἔπος εὖ εἰρημένον
ἐγένετο, ὃς συνεβούλευσε Αβδηρίτῃσι πανδημεί, αὐτοὺς
καὶ γυναῖκας, ἐλθόντας ἐς τὰ σφέτερα ἱρὰ ἕζεσθαι ἱκέτας
τῶν θεῶν παραιτεομένους καὶ τὸ λοιπόν σφι ἀπαμύνειν 5
τῶν ἐπιόντων κακῶν τὰ ἡμίσεα, τῶν τε παροιχομένων
ἔχειν σφι μεγάλην χάριν, ὅτι βασιλεὺς Ξέρξης οὐ δις
ἑκάστης ἡμέρης ἐνόμισε σῖτον αἱρέεσθαι· παρέχειν γὰρ
ἂν ᾿Αβδηρίτῃσι, εἰ καὶ ἄριστον προείρητο ὅμοια τῷ
δείπνῳ παρασκευάζειν, ἢ μὴ ὑπομένειν Ξέρξην ἐπιόντα ἢ 10
καταμείναντας κάκιστα πάντων ἀνθρώπων διατριβῆναι.
The Fleet Sails to Therma.
Ο
Οἱ μὲν δὴ πιεζόμενοι ὅμως τὸ ἐπιτασσόμενον ἐπετέ- 121
λεον. Ξέρξης δὲ ἐκ τῆς ᾿Ακάνθου, ἐντειλάμενος τοῖσι
στρατηγοῖσι τὸν ναυτικὸν στρατὸν ὑπομένειν ἐν Θέρμη,
ἀπῆκε ἀπ᾽ ἑωυτοῦ πορεύεσθαι τὰς νέας, Θέρμῃ δὲ τῇ ἐν
τῷ Θερμαίῳ κόλπῳ οἰκημένῃ, ἀπ᾿ ἧς καὶ ὁ κόλπος οὗτος 5
τὴν ἐπωνυμίην ἔχει· ταύτῃ γὰρ ἐπυνθάνετο συντομώτα
τον εἶναι. μέχρι μὲν γὰρ ᾿Ακάνθου ὧδε τεταγμένος ὁ
στρατὸς ἐκ Δορίσκου τὴν ὁδὸν ἐποιέετο. τρεῖς μοίρας
ὁ Ξέρξης δασάμενος πάντα τὸν πεζόν στρατόν, μίαν
αὐτέων ἔταξε παρὰ θάλασσαν ἰέναι ὁμοῦ τῷ ναυτικῷ· 10
ó
128
HERODOTUS.
ταύτης μὲν δὴ ἐστρατήγεον Μαρδόνιός τε καὶ Μασίστης,
ἑτέρη δὲ τεταγμένη ἤιε τοῦ στρατοῦ τριτημορὶς τὴν μεσό
γαιαν, τῆς ἐστρατήγεον Τριτανταίχμης τε καὶ Γέργις.
ἡ δὲ τρίτη τῶν μοιρέων, μετ᾿ ἧς ἐπορεύετο αὐτὸς Ξέρξης,
15 ἤιε μὲν τὸ μέσον αὐτῶν, στρατηγοὺς δὲ παρείχετο Σμερ-
δομένεά τε καὶ Μεγάβυζον.
122 Ο μέν νυν ναυτικὸς στρατὸς ὡς ἀπείθη ὑπὸ Ξέρξεω
καὶ διεξέπλωσε τὴν διώρυχα τὴν ἐν τῷ Αθῳ γενομένην,
διέχουσαν δὲ ἐς κόλπον ἐν τῷ Ασσα τε πόλις καὶ Πίλω-
ρος καὶ Σίγγος καὶ Σάρτη οἴκηνται, ἐνθεῦτεν, ὡς καὶ ἐκ
5 τουτέων τῶν πολίων στρατιὴν παρέλαβε, ἔπλεε ἀπιέ-
μενος ἐς τὸν Θερμαῖον κόλπον, κάμπτων δὲ ῎Αμπελον
τὴν Τορωναίην ἄκρην παραμείβετο Ελληνίδας γε τάσδε
πόλις, ἐκ τῶν νέας τε καὶ στρατιὴν παρελάμβανε,
Τορώνην, Γαληψὸν, Σερμύλην, Μηκύβερναν, Ὄλυνθον.
123 ἡ μέν νυν χώρη αὕτη Σιθωνίη καλέεται. ὁ δὲ ναυτικὸς
στρατὸς ὁ Ξέρξεω συντάμνων ἀπ᾽ Αμπέλου ἄκρης ἐπὶ
Καναστραίην ἄκρην, τὸ δὴ πάσης τῆς Παλλήνης ἀνέχει
μάλιστα, ἐνθεῦτεν νέας τε καὶ στρατιὴν παρελάμβανε
5 ἐκ Ποτιδαίης καὶ ᾿Αφύτιος καὶ Νέης πόλιος καὶ Αἰγῆς
καὶ Θεράμβω καὶ Σκιώνης καὶ Μένδης και Σάνης· αὖ
ται γάρ εἰσι αἱ τὴν νῦν Παλλήνην πρότερον δὲ Φλέγρην
καλεομένην νεμόμεναι. παραπλέων δὲ καὶ ταύτην τὴν
χώρην ἔπλεε ἐς τὸ προειρημένον, παραλαμβάνων στρα-
10 τιὴν καὶ ἐκ τῶν προσεχέων πολίων τῇ Παλλήνῃ, ὁμου-
ρεουσέων δὲ τῷ Θερμαίῳ κόλπῳ, τῇσι οὐνόματά ἐστι
τάδε, Λίπαξος, Κώμβρεια, Λισαί, Γίγωνος, Κάμψα, Σμι-
λα, Αἴνεια· ἡ δὲ τουτέων χώρη Κροσσαίη ἔτι καὶ ἐς τόδε
καλέεται. ἀπὸ δὲ Αἰνείης, ἐς τὴν ἐτελεύτων καταλέγων
15 τὰς πόλις, ἀπὸ ταύτης ἤδη ἐς αὐτόν τε τὸν Θερμαῖον
κόλπον ἐγίνετο τῷ ναυτικῷ στρατῷ ὁ πλόος καὶ γῆν
BOOK VII.
129
T
τὴν Μυγδονίην, πλέων δὲ ἀπίκετο ἔς τε τὴν προειρημέ-
νην Θέρμην καὶ Σίνδον τε πόλιν καὶ Χαλέστρην ἐπὶ τὸν
Αξιον ποταμόν, ὃς οὐρίζει χώρην τὴν Μυγδονίην τε καὶ
Βοττιαιίδα, τῆς ἔχουσι τὸ παρὰ θάλασσαν στεινὸν 20
χωρίον πόλιες Ἴχναι τε καὶ Πέλλα.
March to Therma; Lions.
او
Ὁ μὲν δὴ ναυτικὸς στρατὸς αὐτοῦ περὶ Αξιον πο- 124
ταμὸν καὶ πόλιν Θέρμην καὶ τὰς μεταξὺ πόλιας τούτων
περιμένων βασιλέα ἐστρατοπεδεύετο, Ξέρξης δὲ καὶ ὁ
πεζὸς στρατὸς ἐπορεύετο ἐκ τῆς ᾿Ακάνθου τὴν μεσό
γαιαν τάμνων τῆς ὁδοῦ, βουλόμενος ἐς τὴν Θέρμην 5
ἀπικέσθαι. ἐπορεύετο δὲ διὰ τῆς Παιονικῆς καὶ Κρη-
στωνικῆς ἐπὶ ποταμὸν Χείδωρον, ὃς ἐκ Κρηστωναίων
ἀρξάμενος ρέει διά Μυγδονίης χώρης καὶ ἐξίει παρὰ
τὸ ἕλος τὸ ἐπ᾿ Αξίῳ ποταμῷ. πορευομένῳ δὲ ταύτῃ 125
λέοντές οἱ ἐπεθήκαντο τῇσι σιτοφόροισι καμήλοισι·
καταφοιτέοντες γὰρ οἱ λέοντες τὰς νύκτας καὶ λείποντες
τὰ σφέτερα ἤθεα ἄλλου μὲν οὐδενὸς ἅπτοντο οὔτε ὑπο-
ζυγίου οὔτε ἀνθρώπου, οἱ δὲ τὰς καμήλους ἐκεράιζον 5
μούνας. θωυμάζω δὲ τὸ αἴτιον, ὅ τι κοτὲ ἦν τῶν ἄλλων
8
τὸ ἀναγκάζον ἀπεχομένους τοὺς λέοντας τῇσι καμήλοισι
ἐπιτίθεσθαι, τὸ μήτε πρότερον ὀπώπεσαν θηρίον μήτ'
ἐπεπειρέατο αὐτοῦ. εἰσὶ δὲ κατὰ ταῦτα τὰ χωρία καὶ 126
λέοντες πολλοὶ καὶ βόες ἄγριοι, τῶν τὰ κέρεα ὑπερμεγά
θεά ἐστι τὰ ἐς Ἕλληνας φοιτέοντα. οὖρος δὲ τοῖσι
λέουσί ἐστι ὅ τε δι' ᾿Αβδήρων ῥέων ποταμὸς Νέστος
καὶ ὁ δι' ᾿Ακαρνανίης ῥέων ᾿Αχελῷος· οὔτε γὰρ τὸ 5
πρὸς τὴν ἠὼ τοῦ Νέστου οὐδαμόθι πάσης τῆς ἔμπροσθε
Εὐρώπης ἴδοι τις ἂν λέοντα, οὔτε πρὸς ἑσπέρης τοῦ
Ο
6*
130
HERODOTUS.
Αχελώου ἐν τῇ ἐπιλοίπῳ ἠπείρῳ, ἀλλ' ἐν τῇ μεταξύ
τούτων τῶν ποταμῶν γίνονται.
Encampment at Therma; Xerxes Visits Tempe.
Ο
Ο
12% Ὡς δὲ ἐς τὴν Θέρμην ἀπίκετο ὁ Ξέρξης, ἵδρυσε αὐτοῦ
τὴν στρατιήν. ἐπέσχε δὲ ὁ στρατὸς αὐτοῦ στρατοπε
δευόμενος τὴν παρὰ θάλασσαν χώρην τοσήνδε, ἀρξάμενος
ἀπὸ Θέρμης πόλιος καὶ τῆς Μυγδονίης μέχρι Λυδίεώ τε
5 ποταμοῦ καὶ ῾Αλιάκμονος, οἳ οὐρίζουσι γῆν τὴν Βοττιαι-
ίδα τε καὶ Μακεδονίδα, ἐς τὠυτὸ ῥέεθρον τὸ ὕδωρ συμ-
μίσγοντες. ἐστρατοπεδεύοντο μὲν δὴ ἐν τούτοισι τοῖσι
χωρίοισι οἱ βάρβαροι, τῶν δὲ καταλεχθέντων τούτων
ποταμῶν ἐκ Κρηστωναίων ῥέων Χείδωρος μοῦνος οὐκ
10 ἀντέχρησε τῇ στρατιῇ πινόμενος ἀλλ᾽ ἐπέλιπε.
128 Ξέρξης δὲ ὁρέων ἐκ τῆς Θέρμης ὄρεα τὰ Θεσσαλικά,
τόν τε Ὄλυμπον καὶ τὴν Ὄσσαν, μεγάθει τε ὑπερμήκεα
ἐόντα, διὰ μέσου τε αὐτῶν αὐλῶνα στεινὸν πυνθανόμενος
εἶναι δι' οὗ ῥέει ὁ Πηνειός, ἀκούων τε ταύτῃ εἶναι ὁδὸν
5 ἐς Θεσσαλίην φέρουσαν, ἐπεθύμησε πλώσας θεήσασθαι
τὴν ἐκβολὴν τοῦ Πηνειοῦ, ὅτι τὴν ἄνω ὁδὸν ἔμελλε ἐλᾶν
διὰ Μακεδόνων τῶν κατύπερθε οἰκημένων ἔστε Περραι
βοὺς παρὰ Γόννον πόλιν· ταύτῃ γὰρ ἀσφαλέστατον
ἐπυνθάνετο εἶναι. ὡς δὲ ἐπεθύμησε, καὶ ἐποίεε ταῦτα·
10 ἐσβὰς ἐς Σιδωνίην νέα, ἐς τήν περ ἐσέβαινε αἰεὶ ὅκως
τι ἐθέλοι τοιοῦτο ποιῆσαι, ἀνέδεξε σημήιον καὶ τοῖσι
ἄλλοισι ἀνάγεσθαι, καταλιπὼν αὐτοῦ τὸν πεζὸν στρατόν.
ἐπεὶ δὲ ἀπίκετο καὶ ἐθεήσατο Ξέρξης τὴν ἐκβολὴν τοῦ
Πηνειοῦ, ἐν θώυματι μεγάλῳ ἐνέσχετο, καλέσας δὲ τοὺς
15 κατηγεμόνας τῆς ὁδοῦ εἴρετο εἰ τὸν ποταμὸν ἔστι παρα
τρέψαντα ἑτέρῃ ἐς θάλασσαν ἐξαγαγεῖν.
BOOK VII.
131
Herodotus as Geologist.
ΤΟ
Τὴν δὲ Θεσσαλίην λόγος ἐστὶ τὸ παλαιὸν εἶναι λίμνην, 129
ὥστε γε συγκεκληιμένην πάντοθεν ὑπερμήκεσι ὄρεσι.
τὰ μὲν γὰρ αὐτῆς πρὸς τὴν ἠῶ ἔχοντα τό τε Πήλιον
ὄρος καὶ ἡ Όσσα ἀποκληίει συμμίσγοντα τὰς ὑπωρέας
ἀλλήλοισι, τὰ δὲ πρὸς βορέω ἀνέμου Ὄλυμπος, τὰ δὲ 5
πρὸς ἑσπέρην Πίνδος, τὰ δὲ πρὸς μεσαμβρίην τε καὶ
ἄνεμον νότον ἡ Ὄθρυς· τὸ μέσον δὲ τούτων τῶν λεχθέν
των ὀρέων ἡ Θεσσαλίη ἐστὶ ἐοῦσα κοίλη. ὥστε ὧν
ποταμῶν ἐς αὐτὴν καὶ ἄλλων συχνῶν ἐσβαλλόντων,
πέντε δὲ τῶν δοκίμων μάλιστα τῶνδε, Πηνειοῦ καὶ 10
Απιδανοῦ καὶ Ὀνοχώνου καὶ Ἐνιπέος καὶ Παμίσου, οἱ
μέν νυν ἐς τὸ πεδίον τοῦτο συλλεγόμενοι ἐκ τῶν ὀρέων
τῶν περικληιόντων τὴν Θεσσαλίην ὀνομαζόμενοι δι᾽ ἑνὸς
αὐλῶνος καὶ τούτου στεινοῦ ἔκροον ἔχουσι ἐς θάλασσαν,
προσυμμίσγοντες τὸ ὕδωρ πάντες ἐς τώυτό· ἐπεὰν δὲ 15
συμμιχθέωσι τάχιστα, ἐνθεῦτεν ἤδη ὁ Πηνειὸς τῷ οὐνό-
ματι κατακρατέων ἀνωνύμους τοὺς ἄλλους εἶναι ποιέει.
τὸ δὲ παλαιὸν λέγεται, οὐκ ἐόντος κω τοῦ αὐλῶνος καὶ
διεκρόου τούτου, τοὺς ποταμοὺς τούτους, καὶ πρὸς τοῖσι
ποταμοίσι τούτοισι τὴν Βοιβηίδα λίμνην, οὔτε ὀνομά-20
ζεσθαι κατά περ νῦν ῥέειν τε οὐδὲν ἧσσον ἢ νῦν, ῥέοντας
δὲ ποιέειν τὴν Θεσσαλίην πᾶσαν πέλαγος. αὐτοὶ μέν
νυν Θεσσαλοί φασι Ποσειδέωνα ποιῆσαι τὸν αὐλῶνα δι
οὗ ῥέει ὁ Πηνειός, οἰκότα λέγοντες. ὅστις γὰρ νομίζει
Ποσειδέωνα τὴν γῆν σείειν καὶ τὰ διεστεῶτα ὑπὸ σεισ-25
μοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ τούτου ἔργα εἶναι, κἂν ἐκεῖνο ἰδὼν φαίη
Ποσειδέωνα ποιῆσαι· ἔστι γὰρ σεισμοῦ ἔργον, ὡς ἐμοὶ
φαίνεται εἶναι, ἡ διάστασις τῶν ὀρέων.
0
132
HERODOTUS.
Xerxes Commends the Wisdom of the Thessalians.
99
130 Οἱ δὲ κατηγεόμενοι, εἰρομένου Ξέρξεω εἰ ἔστι ἄλλη
ἔξοδος ἐς θάλασσαν τῷ Πηνειῷ, ἐξεπιστάμενοι ἀτρε-
κέως εἶπον, “βασιλεῦ, ποταμῷ τούτῳ οὐκ ἔστι ἄλλη
ἐξήλυσις ἐς θάλασσαν κατήκουσα, ἀλλ' ἥδε αυτή· ὄρεσι
5 γὰρ περιεστεφάνωται πᾶσα Θεσσαλίη. Ξέρξην δὲ
λέγεται εἰπεῖν πρὸς ταῦτα, “ σοφοὶ ἄνδρες εἰσὶ Θεσσαλοί.
ταῦτ᾽ ἄρα πρὸ πολλοῦ ἐφυλάξαντο γνωσιμαχέοντες καὶ
τἆλλα καὶ ὅτι χώρην ἄρα εἶχον εὐαίρετόν τε καὶ ταχνά.
λωτον· τὸν γὰρ ποταμὸν πρῆγμα ἂν ἦν μοῦνον ἐπεῖναί
10 σφεων ἐπὶ τὴν χώρην, χώματι ἐκ τοῦ αὐλῶνος ἐκβιβά-
σαντα καὶ παρατρέψαντα δι' ὧν νῦν ῥέει ῥεέθρων, ὥστε
Θεσσαλίην πᾶσαν ἔξω τῶν ὀρέων ὑποβρυχέα γενέσθαι.”
ταῦτα δὲ ἔχοντα ἔλεγε ἐς τοὺς ᾿Αλεύεω παῖδας, ὅτι πρῶτ
τοι Ἑλλήνων ἐόντες Θεσσαλοὶ ἔδοσαν ἑωυτοὺς βασιλέι,
15 δοκέων ὁ Ξέρξης ἀπὸ παντός σφεας τοῦ ἔθνεος ἐπαγγέλ
λεσθαι φιλίην. εἴπας δὲ ταῦτα καὶ θεησάμενος ἀπέπλεε
ἐς τὴν Θέρμην.
How Xerxes' Heralds were Received.
131 Ὁ μὲν δὴ περὶ Πιερίην διέτριβε ἡμέρας συχνάς· τὸ
γὰρ δὴ ὄρος τὸ Μακεδονικὸν ἔκειρε τῆς στρατιῆς τρι-
τημορίς, ἵνα ταύτῃ διεξίῃ ἅπασα ἡ στρατιὴ ἐς Περραι
βούς· οἱ δὲ δὴ κήρυκες οἱ ἀποπεμφθέντες ἐς τὴν Ἑλ.
5 λάδα ἐπὶ γῆς αἴτησιν ἀπίκατο οἱ μὲν κεινοί, οἱ δὲ φέ-
132 ροντες γῆν τε καὶ ὕδωρ. τῶν δὲ δόντων ταῦτα ἐγένοντο
οἵδε, Θεσσαλοί, Δόλοπες, Ἐνιῆνες, Περραιβοί, Λοκροί,
Μάγνητες, Μηλιέες, Αχαιοί οἱ Φθιῶται καὶ Θηβαῖοι
καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι Βοιωτοὶ πλὴν Θεσπιέων τε καὶ Πλαταιέων.
5 ἐπὶ τούτοισι οἱ Ἕλληνες ἔταμον ὅρκιον οἱ τῷ βαρβάρῳ
οι
BOOK VII.
133
πόλεμον ἀειράμενοι· τὸ δὲ ὅρκιον ὧδε εἶχε, ὅσοι τῷ
Πέρσῃ ἔδοσαν σφέας αὐτοὺς Ἕλληνες ἐόντες μὴ ἀναγ-
κασθέντες, καταστάντων σφι εὖ τῶν πρηγμάτων, τού
τους δεκατεῦσαι τῷ ἐν Δελφοῖσι θεῷ.
Τὸ μὲν δὴ ὅρκιον ὧδε εἶχε τοῖσι Ἕλλησι. ἐς δὲ 133
᾿Αθήνας και Σπάρτην οὐκ ἀπέπεμψε Ξέρξης ἐπὶ γῆς
αἴτησιν κήρυκας τῶνδε εἵνεκα· πρότερον Δαρείου πέμ-
ψαντος ἐπ' αὐτὸ τοῦτο, οἱ μὲν αὐτῶν τοὺς αὐτέοντας ἐς
τὸ βάραθρον οἱ δ᾽ ἐς φρέαρ ἐμβαλόντες ἐκέλευον γῆν τε 5
καὶ ὕδωρ ἐκ τούτων φέρειν παρὰ βασιλέα. τούτων μὲν
εἵνεκα οὐκ ἔπεμψε Ξέρξης τοὺς αἰτήσοντας. ὅ τι δὲ
τοῖσι Αθηναίοισι ταῦτα ποιήσασι τοὺς κήρυκας συνή
νεικε ἀνεθέλητον γενέσθαι, οὐκ ἔχω εἶπαί τι, πλὴν ὅτι
σφέων ἡ χώρη καὶ ἡ πόλις ἐδηιώθη. ἀλλὰ τοῦτο οὐ 10
διὰ ταύτην τὴν αἰτίην δοκέω γενέσθαι.
Sperthias and Bulis.
a
Τοῖσι δὲ ὧν Λακεδαιμονίοισι μῆνις κατέσκηψε Ταλ. 134
θυβίου τοῦ ᾿Αγαμέμνονος κήρυκος. ἐν γὰρ Σπάρτη
ἐστὶ Ταλθυβίου ἱρόν, εἰσὶ δὲ καὶ ἀπόγονοι Ταλθυβίου
Ταλθυβιάδαι καλεόμενοι, τοῖσι αἱ κηρυκηίαι αἱ ἐκ Σπάρ
της πᾶσαι γέρας δέδονται. μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα τοῖσι Σπαρ- 5
τιήτῃσι καλλιερῆσαι θυομένοισι οὐκ ἐδύνατο· τοῦτο δ᾽
ἐπὶ χρόνον συχνὸν ἦν σφι. ἀχθομένων δὲ καὶ συμφορῇ
χρεομένων Λακεδαιμονίων, ἁλίης τε πολλάκις συλλεγο-
μένης καὶ κήρυγμα τοιόνδε ποιευμένων, εἴ τις βούλοιτο
Λακεδαιμονίων πρὸ τῆς Σπάρτης ἀποθνήσκειν, Σπερ- 10
θίης τε ὁ ᾿Ανηρίστου καὶ Βοῦλις ὁ Νικόλεω, ἄνδρες
Σπαρτιήται φύσι τε γεγονότες εὖ καὶ χρήμασι ἀνήκοντες
ἐς τὰ πρῶτα, ἐθελονταὶ ὑπέδυσαν ποινὴν τῖσαι Ξέρξη
τῶν Δαρείου κηρύκων τῶν ἐν Σπάρτῃ ἀπολομένων.
134
HERODOTUS.
αν
15 οὕτω Σπαρτιήται τούτους ὡς ἀποθανευμένους ἐς Μήδους
135 ἀπέπεμψαν. αὕτη τε ἡ τόλμα τούτων τῶν ἀνδρῶν
θώυματος ἀξίη καὶ τάδε πρὸς τούτοισι τὰ ἔπεα. πορευ-
όμενοι γὰρ ἐς Σοῦσα ἀπικνέονται παρὰ Ὑδάρνεα. ὁ δὲ
Υδάρνης ἦν μὲν γένος Πέρσης, στρατηγὸς δὲ τῶν παρα-
5 θαλασσίων ἀνθρώπων τῶν ἐν τῇ Ασίῃ· ὅς σφεας ξείνια
προθέμενος ἱστία, ξεινίζων δὲ εἴρετο τάδε· “ ἄνδρες
Λακεδαιμόνιοι, τί δὴ φεύγετε βασιλέι φίλοι γενέσθαι;
ὁρᾶτε γὰρ ὡς ἐπίσταται βασιλεὺς ἄνδρας ἀγαθοὺς τιμᾶν,
ἐς ἐμέ τε καὶ τὰ ἐμὰ πρήγματα ἀποβλέποντες. οὕτω δὲ
10 καὶ ὑμεῖς εἰ δοίητε ὑμέας αὐτοὺς βασιλέι, δεδόξωσθε
γὰρ πρὸς αὐτοῦ ἄνδρες εἶναι ἀγαθοί, ἕκαστος ἂν ὑμέων
ἄρχοι γῆς Ἑλλάδος δόντος βασιλέος.” πρὸς ταῦτα
ὑπεκρίναντο τάδε· “Υδαρνες, οὐκ ἐξ ἴσου γίνεται ἡ
συμβουλίη ἡ ἐς ἡμέας τείνουσα. τοῦ μὲν γὰρ πεπειρη-
15 μένος συμβουλεύεις, τοῦ δὲ ἄπειρος ἐών· τὸ μὲν γὰρ
δοῦλος εἶναι ἐξεπίστεαι, ἐλευθερίης δὲ οὔκω ἐπειρήθης,
οὔτ᾽ εἰ ἔστι γλυκὺ οὔτ᾽ εἰ μή. εἰ γὰρ αὐτῆς πειρήσαιο,
οὐκ ἂν δόρασι συμβουλεύοις ἡμῖν περὶ αὐτῆς μάχεσθαι,
136 ἀλλὰ καὶ πελέκεσι.” ταῦτα μὲν Υδάρνεα αμείψαντο.
ἐνθεῦτεν δὲ ὡς ἀνέβησαν ἐς Σοῦσα καὶ βασιλέι ἐς ὄψιν
ἦλθον, πρῶτα μὲν τῶν δορυφόρων κελευόντων καὶ ἀνάγ
κην σφι προσφερόντων προσκυνέειν βασιλέα προσπίπ-
5 τοντας, οὐκ ἔφασαν ὠθεόμενοι ὑπ᾽ αὐτῶν ἐπὶ κεφαλὴν
ποιήσειν ταῦτα οὐδαμά· οὔτε γὰρ σφίσι ἐν νόμῳ εἶναι
ἄνθρωπον προσκυνέειν οὔτε κατὰ ταῦτα ἥκειν. ὡς δὲ
ἀπεμαχέσαντο τοῦτο, δεύτερά σφι λέγουσι τάδε καὶ
λόγου τοιοῦδε ἐχόμενα, “ὦ βασιλεῦ Μήδων, ἔπεμψαν
10 ἡμέας Λακεδαιμόνιοι ἀντὶ τῶν ἐν Σπάρτῃ ἀπολομένων
κηρύκων ποινὴν ἐκείνων τίσοντας,” λέγουσι δὲ αὐτοῖσι
ταῦτα Ξέρξης ὑπὸ μεγαλοφροσύνης οὐκ ἔφη ὅμοιος
BOOK VII.
135
-
ἔσεσθαι Λακεδαιμονίοισι· κείνους μὲν γὰρ συγχέαι τὰ
πάντων ἀνθρώπων νόμιμα ἀποκτείναντας κήρυκας, αὐ
τὸς δὲ τὰ ἐκείνοισι ἐπιπλήσσει ταῦτα οὐ ποιήσειν, οὐδὲ 15
ἀνταποκτείνας ἐκείνους ἀπολύσειν Λακεδαιμονίους τῆς
αἰτίης. οὕτω ἡ Ταλθυβίου μῆνις καὶ ταῦτα ποιησάν- 13
των Σπαρτιητέων ἐπαύσατο τὸ παραυτίκα, καίπερ
ἀπονοστησάντων ἐς Σπάρτην Σπερθίεώ τε καὶ Βού
λιος. χρόνῳ δὲ μετέπειτα πολλῷ ἐπηγέρθη κατὰ τὸν
Πελοποννησίων καὶ ᾿Αθηναίων πόλεμον, ὡς λέγουσι 5
Λακεδαιμόνιοι. τοῦτό μοι ἐν τοῖσι θειότατον φαίνε
ται γενέσθαι. ὅτι μὲν γὰρ κατέσκηψε ἐς ἀγγέλους ἡ
Ταλθυβίου μῆνις οὐδὲ ἐπαύσατο πρὶν ἢ ἐξῆλθε, τὸ
δίκαιον οὕτω ἔφερε· τὸ δὲ συμπεσεῖν ἐς τοὺς παῖδας
τῶν ἀνδρῶν τούτων τῶν ἀναβάντων πρὸς βασιλέα διὰ 10
τὴν μῆνιν, ἐς Νικόλαν τε τὸν Βούλιος καὶ ἐς ᾿Ανήριστον
τὸν Σπερθίεω, ὃς εἷλε ῾Αλιέας τοὺς ἐκ Τίρυνθος ὁλκάδι
καταπλώσας πλήρει ἀνδρῶν, δῆλον ὦν μοι ὅτι θεῖον
ἐγένετο τὸ πρῆγμα ἐκ τῆς μήνιος. οἱ γὰρ πεμφθέντες
ὑπὸ Λακεδαιμονίων ἄγγελοι ἐς τὴν ᾿Ασίην, προδοθέντες 15
δὲ ὑπὸ Σιτάλκεω τοῦ Τήρεω Θρηίκων βασιλέος καὶ
Νυμφοδώρου τοῦ Πύθεω ἀνδρὸς ᾿Αβδηρίτεω, ἥλωσαν
κατὰ Βισάνθην τὴν ἐν Ἑλλησπόντῳ, καὶ ἀπαχθέντες ἐς
τὴν ᾿Αττικὴν ἀπέθανον ὑπὸ ᾿Αθηναίων, μετὰ δὲ αὐτῶν
καὶ ᾿Αριστέας ὁ ᾿Αδειμάντου Κορίνθιος ἀνήρ. ταῦτα 20
μέν νυν πολλοῖσι ἔτεσι ὕστερον ἐγένετο τοῦ βασιλέος
στόλου, ἐπάνειμι δὲ ἐπὶ τὸν πρότερον λόγον.
Public Sentiment in Greece; Athens the Savior of Hellas.
Ἡ δὲ στρατηλασίη ἡ βασιλέος οὔνομα μὲν εἶχε ὡς 138
ἐπ᾿ ᾿Αθήνας ἐλαύνει, κατίετο δὲ ἐς πᾶσαν τὴν Ἑλλάδα.
πυνθανόμενοι δὲ ταῦτα πρὸ πολλοῦ οἱ Ἕλληνες οὐκ ἐν
136
HERODOTUS.
οι
ὁμοίῳ πάντες ἐποιεῦντο. οἱ μὲν γὰρ αὐτῶν δόντες γῆν
5 καὶ ὕδωρ τῷ Πέρσῃ εἶχον θάρσος ὡς οὐδὲν πεισόμενο!
ἄχαρι πρὸς τοῦ βαρβάρου· οἱ δὲ οὐ δόντες ἐν δείματι
μεγάλῳ κατέστασαν, ἅτε οὔτε νεῶν ἐουσέων ἐν τῇ Ἑλ-
λάδι ἀριθμὸν ἀξιομάχων δέκεσθαι τὸν ἐπιόντα, οὔτε
βουλομένων τῶν πολλῶν ἀντάπτεσθαι τοῦ πολέμου,
139 μηδιζόντων δὲ προθύμως. ἐνθαῦτα ἀναγκαίῃ ἐξέρχομαι
γνώμην ἀποδέξασθαι ἐπίφθονον μὲν πρὸς τῶν πλεόνων
ἀνθρώπων, ὅμως δὲ τῇ γέ μοι φαίνεται εἶναι ἀληθὲς οὐκ
ἐπισχήσω. εἰ Αθηναῖοι καταρρωδήσαντες τὸν ἐπιόντα
5 κίνδυνον ἐξέλιπον τὴν σφετέρην, ἢ καὶ μὴ ἐκλιπόντες
ἀλλὰ μείναντες ἔδοσαν σφέας αὐτοὺς Ξέρξη, κατὰ τὴν
θάλασσαν οὐδαμοὶ ἂν ἐπειρῶντο ἀντιούμενοι βασιλέι.
εἰ τοίνυν κατὰ τὴν θάλασσαν μηδεὶς ἠντιοῦτο Ξέρξη,
κατά γε ἂν τὴν ἤπειρον τοιάδε ἐγίνετο. εἰ καὶ πολλοὶ
10 τειχέων κιθῶνες ἦσαν ἐληλαμένοι διὰ τοῦ Ἰσθμοῦ Πελο-
ποννησίοισι, προδοθέντες ἂν Λακεδαιμόνιοι ὑπὸ τῶν
συμμάχων οὐκ ἑκόντων ἀλλ᾽ ὑπ᾽ ἀναγκαίης, κατὰ πόλις
ἁλισκομένων ὑπὸ τοῦ ναυτικοῦ στρατοῦ τοῦ βαρβάρου,
ἐμουνώθησαν, μουνωθέντες δὲ ἂν καὶ ἀποδεξάμενοι ἔργα
15 μεγάλα ἀπέθανον γενναίως. ἢ ταῦτα ἂν ἔπαθον, ἢ πρὸ
τοῦ ὁρέοντες ἂν καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους "Ελληνας μηδίζοντας
ὁμολογίῃ ἂν ἐχρήσαντο πρὸς Ξέρξεα. καὶ οὕτω ἂν ἐπ᾽
ἀμφότερα ἡ Ἑλλὰς ἐγίνετο ὑπὸ Πέρσῃσι. τὴν γὰρ
ὠφελίην τὴν τῶν τειχέων τῶν διὰ τοῦ Ἰσθμοῦ ἐληλα-
20 μένων οὐ δύναμαι πυθέσθαι ἥτις ἂν ἦν, βασιλέος ἐπι-
κρατέοντος τῆς θαλάσσης. νῦν δὲ ᾽Αθηναίους ἄν τις
λέγων σωτῆρας γενέσθαι τῆς Ἑλλάδος οὐκ ἂν ἁμαρτά-
νοι τὸ ἀληθές. οὗτοι γὰρ ἐπὶ ὁκότερα τῶν πρηγμάτων
ἐτράποντο, ταῦτα ῥέψειν ἔμελλε· ἑλόμενοι δὲ τὴν Ἑλ-
25 λάδα περιεῖναι ἐλευθέρην, τοῦτο τὸ Ἑλληνικὸν πᾶν τὸ
BOOK VII,
137
λοιπόν, ὅσον μὴ ἐμήδισε, αὐτοὶ οὗτοι ἦσαν οἱ ἐπεγείραντες
και βασιλέα μετά γε θεοὺς ἀνωσάμενοι. οὐδέ σφεας
χρηστήρια φοβερὰ ἐλθόντα ἐκ Δελφῶν καὶ ἐς δεῖμα
βαλόντα ἔπεισε ἐκλιπεῖν τὴν Ἑλλάδα, ἀλλὰ καταμεί
ναντες ἀνέσχοντο τὸν ἐπιόντα ἐπὶ τὴν χώρην δέξασθαι. 30
Oracles Delivered to the Athenians.
Πέμψαντες γὰρ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐς Δελφοὺς θεοπρόπους 140
χρηστηριάζεσθαι ἦσαν ἕτοιμοι· καί σφι ποιήσασι περὶ
τὸ ἱρὸν τὰ νομιζόμενα, ὡς ἐς τὸ μέγαρον ἐσελθόντες
ἵζοντο, χρᾷ ἡ Πυθίη, τῇ οὔνομα ἦν ᾿Αριστονίκη, τάδε·
5
10
ὦ μέλεοι, τί κάθησθε; λιπών φευγ᾽ ἔσχατα γαίης
δώματα καὶ πόλιος τροχοειδέος ἄκρα κάρηνα.
οὔτε γὰρ ἡ κεφαλὴ μένει ἔμπεδον οὔτε τὸ σῶμα,
οὔτε πόδες νέατοι οὔτ᾽ ὧν χέρες, οὔτε τι μέσσης
λείπεται, ἀλλ᾽ ἄζηλα πέλει· κατὰ γάρ μιν ἐρείπει
πῦρ τε καὶ ὀξὺς Αρης, Συριηγενές ἅρμα διώκων.
πολλὰ δὲ καλλ᾽ ἀπολεῖ πυργώματα, κοὐ τὸ σὸν οἶον
πολλοὺς δ᾽ ἀθανάτων νηοὺς μαλερῷ πυρὶ δώσει,
οἵ που νῦν ἱδρῶτι ῥεούμενοι ἑστήκασι,
δείματι παλλόμενοι, κατὰ δ᾽ ἀκροτάτοις ὀρόφοισι
αἷμα μέλαν κέχυται, προϊδὸν κακότητος ἀνάγκας.
ἀλλ᾽ ἴτον ἐξ ἀδύτοιο, κακοῖς δ᾽ ἐπικίδνατε θυμόν.
ταῦτα ἀκούσαντες οἱ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων θεοπρόποι συμφο- 141
ρῇ τῇ μεγίστῃ ἐχρέοντο. προβάλλουσι δὲ σφέας αὐτοὺς
ὑπὸ τοῦ κακοῦ τοῦ κεχρησμένου Τίμων ὁ ᾿Ανδροβούλου,
τῶν Δελφῶν ἀνὴρ δόκιμος ὅμοια τῷ μάλιστα, συνεβού
λευέ σφι ἱκετηρίην λαβοῦσι δεύτερα αὖτις ἐλθόντας 5
χρᾶσθαι τῷ χρηστηρίῳ ὡς ἱκέτας. πειθομένοισι δὲ
ταῦτα τοῖσι Αθηναίοισι καὶ λέγουσι, “ ὦναξ, χρῆσον
ἡμῖν ἄμεινόν τι περὶ τῆς πατρίδος, αἰδεσθεὶς τὰς ἱκε
Ο
15
138
HERODOTUS.
τηρίας τάσδε τάς τοι ἥκομεν φέροντες· ἢ οὔ τοι ἄπιμεν
10 ἐκ τοῦ ἀδύτου, ἀλλ᾽ αὐτοῦ τῇδε μενέομεν ἔστ᾽ ἂν καὶ
τελευτήσωμεν,” ταῦτα δὲ λέγουσι ἡ πρόμαντις χρᾷ
δεύτερα τάδε·
15
20
οὐ δύναται Παλλάς Δί' Ολύμπιον ἐξιλάσασθαι
λισσομένη πολλοῖσι λόγοις καὶ μήτιδι πυκνῇ.
σοὶ δὲ τόδ' αὖτις ἔπος ἐρέω ἀδάμαντι πελάσσας.
τῶν ἄλλων γὰρ ἁλισκομένων ὅσα Κέκροπος οὖρος
ἐντὸς ἔχει κευθμών τε Κιθαιρώνος ζαθέοιο,
τεῖχος Τριτογενεῖ ξύλινον διδοῖ εὐρύοπα Ζεύς
μοῦνον ἀπόρθητον τελέθειν, τὸ σὲ τέκνα τ' ὀνήσει.
μηδὲ σύ γ' ἱπποσύνην τε μένειν καὶ πεζὸν ἰόντα
πολλὸν ἀπ' ἠπείρου στρατὸν ἥσυχος, ἀλλ᾽ ὑποχωρεῖν
νῶτον ἐπιστρέψας· ἔτι τοί ποτε κἀντίος ἔσσῃ.
او
ὦ θείη Σαλαμίς, ἀπολεῖς δὲ σὺ τέκνα γυναικών
ἤ που σκιδναμένης Δημήτερος ἢ συνιούσης.
Meaning of the Wooden Wall; Themistocles.
142 Ταῦτά σφι ήπιώτερα γὰρ τῶν προτέρων καὶ ἦν καὶ
ἐδόκεε εἶναι, συγγραψάμενοι ἀπαλλάσσοντο ἐς τὰς
᾿Αθήνας. ὡς δὲ ἀπελθόντες οἱ θεοπρόποι ἀπήγγελλον
ἐς τὸν δῆμον, γνῶμαι καὶ ἄλλαι πολλαὶ γίνονται διζη-
5 μένων τὸ μαντήιον καὶ αἵδε συνεστηκυῖαι μάλιστα·
τῶν πρεσβυτέρων ἔλεγον μετεξέτεροι δοκέειν σφίσι τὸν
θεὸν τὴν ἀκρόπολιν χρῆσαι περιέσεσθαι· ἡ γὰρ ἀκρό-
πολις τὸ πάλαι τῶν Αθηναίων ῥηχῷ ἐπέφρακτο. οἱ μὲν
δὴ κατὰ τὸν φραγμὸν συνεβάλλοντο τοῦτο τὸ ξύλινον
10 τεῖχος εἶναι, οἱ δ᾽ αὖ ἔλεγον τὰς νέας σημαίνειν τὸν θεόν,
ΤΟ
καὶ ταύτας παραρτέεσθαι ἐκέλευον τὰ ἄλλα ἀπέντας.
τοὺς ὢν δὴ τὰς νέας λέγοντας εἶναι τὸ ξύλινον τεῖχος
ἔσφαλλε τὰ δύο τὰ τελευταῖα ῥηθέντα ὑπὸ τῆς Πυθίης,
BOOK VII.
139
ὦ θείη Σαλαμίς, ἀπολεῖς δὲ σὺ τέκνα γυναικών
ἤ που σκιδναμένης Δημήτερος ἢ συνιούσης.
η
15
κατὰ ταῦτα τὰ ἔπεα συνεχέοντο αἱ γνῶμαι τῶν φαμέ
νων τὰς νέας τὸ ξύλινον τεῖχος εἶναι· οἱ γὰρ χρησμο-
λόγοι ταύτῃ ταῦτα ἐλάμβανον, ὡς ἀμφὶ Σαλαμῖνα δεῖ
σφεας ἑσσωθῆναι ναυμαχίην παρασκευασαμένους. ἦν 143
δὲ τῶν τις 'Αθηναίων ἀνὴρ ἐς πρώτους νεωστὶ παριών,
τῷ οὔνομα μὲν ἦν Θεμιστοκλέης, παῖς δὲ Νεοκλέος
ἐκαλέετο. οὗτος ὧνὴρ οὐκ ἔφη πᾶν ὀρθῶς τοὺς χρη-
σμολόγους συμβάλλεσθαι, λέγων τοιάδε· εἰ ἐς Αθηναί- 5
ους εἶχε τὸ ἔπος εἰρημένον ἐόντως, οὐκ ἂν οὕτω μιν
δοκέειν ἠπίως χρησθῆναι, ἀλλὰ ὧδε, “ ὦ σχετλίη Σαλα
μίς,” ἀντὶ τοῦ “ ὦ θείη Σαλαμίς,” εἴ πέρ γε ἔμελλον
οἱ οἰκήτορες ἀμφ' αὐτῇ τελευτήσειν· ἀλλὰ γὰρ ἐς τοὺς
πολεμίους τῷ θεῷ εἰρῆσθαι τὸ χρηστήριον συλλαμβά- 10
νοντι κατὰ τὸ ὀρθόν, ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἐς ᾿Αθηναίους· παρα-
σκευάζεσθαι ὧν αὐτοὺς ὡς ναυμαχήσοντας συνεβού
λευε, ὡς τούτου ἐόντος τοῦ ξυλίνου τείχεος. ταύτῃ
Θεμιστοκλέος ἀποφαινομένου ᾿Αθηναῖοι ταῦτα σφίσι
ἔγνωσαν αἱρετώτερα εἶναι μᾶλλον ἢ τὰ τῶν χρησμολό- 15
γων, οἳ οὐκ ἔων ναυμαχίην ἀρτέεσθαι, τὸ δὲ σύμπαν
εἶναι οὐδὲ χεῖρας ἀνταείρεσθαι, ἀλλὰ ἐκλιπόντας χώρην
τὴν ᾿Αττικὴν ἄλλην τινὰ οἰκίζειν. ἑτέρη τε Θεμιστο- 144
κλέι γνώμη ἔμπροσθε ταύτης ἐς καιρὸν ἠρίστευσε, ὅτε
Αθηναίοισι γενομένων χρημάτων μεγάλων ἐν τῷ κοινῷ,
τὰ ἐκ τῶν μετάλλων σφι προσῆλθε τῶν ἀπὸ Λαυρείου,
ἔμελλον λάξεσθαι ὀρχηδὸν ἕκαστος δέκα δραχμάς. 5
τότε Θεμιστοκλέης ἀνέγνωσε Αθηναίους τῆς διαιρέσιος
ταύτης παυσαμένους νέας τούτων τῶν χρημάτων ποιή-
σασθαι διηκοσίας ἐς τὸν πόλεμον, τὸν πρὸς Αἰγινήτας
λέγων· οὗτος γὰρ ὁ πόλεμος συστὰς ἔσωσε ἐς τὸ τότε
140
HERODOTUS.
10 τὴν Ἑλλάδα, ἀναγκάσας θαλασσίους γενέσθαι Αθηναί
ους. αἱ δὲ ἐς τὸ μὲν ἐποιήθησαν, οὐκ ἐχρήσθησαν, ἐς
δέον δὲ οὕτω τῇ Ἑλλάδι ἐγένοντο. αὗταί τε δὴ αἱ νέες
τοῖσι Αθηναίοισι προποιηθεῖσαι ὑπῆρχον, ἑτέρας τε
ἔδες προσναυπηγέεσθαι. ἔδοξέ τέ σφι μετὰ τὸ χρηστή
15 ριον βουλευομένοισι ἐπιόντα ἐπὶ τὴν Ἑλλάδα τὸν βάρ
βαρον δέκεσθαι τῇσι νηυσὶ πανδημεί, τῷ θεῷ πειθο
μένους, ἅμα Ελλήνων τοῖσι βουλομένοισι.
Federal Congress; Spies Sent to Sardis.
145 Τὰ μὲν δὴ χρηστήρια ταῦτα τοῖσι Αθηναίοισι έγε-
γόνεε. συλλεγομένων δὲ ἐς τὠυτὸ τῶν περὶ τὴν Ἑλλά-
δα Ἑλλήνων τῶν τὰ ἀμείνω φρονεόντων καὶ διδόντων
σφίσι λόγον καὶ πίστιν, ἐνθαῦτα ἐδόκεε βουλευομένοισι
5 αὐτοῖσι πρῶτον μὲν χρημάτων πάντων καταλλάσσεσ-
θαι τάς τε ἔχθρας καὶ τοὺς κατ᾽ ἀλλήλους ἐόντας πολέ
μους· ἦσαν δὲ πρός τινας καὶ ἄλλους ἐγκεχρημένοι, ὁ
δὲ ὧν μέγιστος ᾿Αθηναίοισί τε καὶ Αἰγινήτῃσι. μετὰ δὲ
πυνθανόμενοι Ξέρξην σὺν τῷ στρατῷ εἶναι ἐν Σάρδισι,
10 ἐβουλεύσαντο κατασκόπους πέμπειν ἐς τὴν ᾿Ασίην τῶν
βασιλέος πρηγμάτων, ἐς Αργος τε ἀγγέλους ὁμαιχμίην
συνθησομένους πρὸς τὸν Πέρσην, καὶ ἐς Σικελίην ἄλ-
λους πέμπειν παρὰ Γέλωνα τὸν Δεινομένεος, ἔς τε
Κέρκυραν, κελεύσοντας βοηθέειν τῇ Ἑλλάδι, καὶ ἐς
15 Κρήτην ἄλλους, φρονήσαντες εἴ κως ἕν τε γένοιτο τὸ
Ἑλληνικὸν καὶ εἰ συγκύψαντες τὠυτὸ πρήσσοιεν πάν-
τες, ὡς δεινῶν ἐπιόντων ὁμοίως πᾶσι Ἕλλησι. τὰ δὲ
Γέλωνος πρήγματα μεγάλα ἐλέγετο εἶναι, οὐδαμῶν Ἑλ
ληνικῶν τῶν οὐ πολλὸν μέζω.
ΤΟ
146 Ὡς δὲ ταῦτά σφι ἔδοξε, καταλυσάμενοι τὰς ἔχθρας
πρῶτα μὲν κατασκόπους πέμπουσι ἐς τὴν Ασίην ἄνδρας
BOOK VII.
141
οι
τρεῖς. οἱ δὲ ἀπικόμενοί τε ἐς Σάρδις καὶ καταμαθόντες
τὴν βασιλέος στρατιήν, ὡς ἐπάιστοι ἐγένοντο, βασανιστ
θέντες ὑπὸ τῶν στρατηγῶν τοῦ πεζοῦ στρατοῦ ἀπήγον. 5
το ὡς ἀπολεόμενοι. καὶ τοῖσι μὲν κατεκέκριτο θάνατος,
Ξέρξης δὲ ὡς ἐπύθετο ταῦτα, μεμφθεὶς τῶν στρατηγῶν
τὴν γνώμην πέμπει τῶν τινας δορυφόρων, ἐντειλάμενος,
ἢν καταλάβωσι τοὺς κατασκόπους ζῶντας, ἄγειν παρ'
ἑωυτόν. ὡς δὲ ἔτι περιεόντας αὐτοὺς κατέλαβον καὶ 10
ἦγον ἐς ὄψιν τὴν βασιλέος, τὸ ἐνθεῦτεν πυθόμενος ἐπ᾽
οἷσι ἦλθον, ἐκέλευέ σφεας τοὺς δορυφόρους περιάγοντας
ἐπιδείκνυσθαι πάντα τε τὸν πεζὸν στρατὸν καὶ τὴν
ἵππον, ἐπεὰν δὲ ταῦτα θηεύμενοι ἔωσι πλήρεες, ἀπο-
πέμπειν ἐς τὴν ἂν αὐτοὶ ἐθέλωσι χώρην ἀσινέας. 15
ἐπιλέγων δὲ τὸν λόγον τόνδε ταῦτα ἐνετέλλετο, ὡς εἰ 14
μὲν ἀπώλοντο οἱ κατάσκοποι, οὔτ᾽ ἂν τὰ ἑωυτοῦ πρήγ
ματα προεπύθοντο οἱ Ἕλληνες ἐόντα λόγου μέζω, οὔτ᾽
ἄν τι τοὺς πολεμίους μέγα ἐσίναντο, ἄνδρας τρεῖς
ἀπολέσαντες· νοστησάντων δὲ τούτων ἐς τὴν Ἑλλάδα 5
δοκέειν ἔφη ἀκούσαντας τοὺς Ἕλληνας τὰ ἑωυτοῦ
πρήγματα πρὸ τοῦ στόλου τοῦ γινομένου παραδώσειν
σφέας τὴν ἰδίην ἐλευθερίην, καὶ οὕτω οὐδὲ δεήσειν ἐπ᾽
αὐτοὺς στρατηλατέοντας πρήγματα ἔχειν. οἶκε δὲ
αὐτοῦ αὕτη ἡ γνώμη τῇ γε ἄλλῃ. ἐὼν γὰρ ἐν ᾿Αβύδῳ 10
ὁ Ξέρξης είδε πλοῖα ἐκ τοῦ Πόντου σιταγωγά διεκ
πλώοντα τὸν Ἑλλήσποντον, ἔς τε Αἴγιναν καὶ Πελο-
πόννησον κομιζόμενα. οἱ μὲν δὴ πάρεδροι αὐτοῦ ὡς
ἐπύθοντο πολέμια εἶναι τὰ πλοῖα, ἕτοιμοι ἦσαν αἱρέειν
αὐτά, ἐσβλέποντες ἐς τὸν βασιλέα ὁκότε παραγγελέει. 15
ὁ δὲ Ξέρξης εἴρετο αὐτοὺς ὅκῃ πλέοιεν· οἱ δὲ εἶπαν, “ ἐς
τοὺς σοὺς πολεμίους, ὦ δέσποτα, σῖτον ἄγοντες.” ὁ δὲ
ὑπολαβὼν ἔφη, “ οὐκῶν καὶ ἡμεῖς ἐκεῖ πλέομεν ἔνθα
Ο
142
HERODOTUS.
περ οὗτοι, τοϊσί τε ἄλλοισι ἐξηρτυμένοι καὶ σίτῳ; τὸ
20 δῆτα ἀδικέουσι οὗτοι ἡμῖν σιτία παρακομίζοντες;”
The Argives Refuse to Join the Confederacy.
148 Οἱ μέν νυν κατάσκοποι οὕτω θεησάμενοί τε καὶ
ἀποπεμφθέντες ἐνόστησαν ἐς τὴν Εὐρώπην, οἱ δὲ συν-
ωμόται Ἑλλήνων ἐπὶ τῷ Πέρσῃ μετὰ τὴν ἀπόπεμψιν
τῶν κατασκόπων δεύτερα ἔπεμπον ἐς Αργος ἀγγέλους.
5 Αργεῖοι δὲ λέγουσι τὰ κατ᾽ ἑωυτοὺς γενέσθαι ὧδε·
πυθέσθαι γὰρ αὐτίκα κατ᾿ ἀρχὰς τὰ ἐκ τοῦ βαρβάρου
ἐγειρόμενα ἐπὶ τὴν Ἑλλάδα, πυθόμενοι δέ, καὶ μαθόντες
ὡς σφέας οἱ Ἕλληνες πειρήσονται παραλαμβάνοντες
ἐπὶ τὸν Πέρσην, πέμψαι θεοπρόπους ἐς Δελφοὺς τὸν
10 θεὸν ἐπειρησομένους ὥς σφι μέλλει ἄριστον ποιέουσι
γενέσθαι· νεωστὶ γὰρ σφέων τεθνάναι ἑξακισχιλίους
ὑπὸ Λακεδαιμονίων καὶ Κλεομένεος τοῦ ᾿Αναξανδρί-
δεω· τῶν δὴ εἵνεκα πέμπειν. τὴν δὲ Πυθίην ἐπειρωτῶσι
αὐτοῖσι ἀνελεῖν τάδε·
15
ἐχθρὲ περικτιόνεσσι, φίλ᾽ ἀθανάτοισι θεοῖσιν,
εἴσω τὸν προβόλαιον ἔχων πεφυλαγμένος ἦσο
καὶ κεφαλὴν πεφύλαξα· κάρη δὲ τὸ σῶμα σαώσει.
ταῦτα μὲν τὴν Πυθίην χρῆσαι πρότερον. μετὰ δὲ ὡς
ἐλθεῖν τοὺς ἀγγέλους ἐς δὴ τὸ ῎Αργος, ἐπελθεῖν ἐπὶ τὸ
20 βουλευτήριον καὶ λέγειν τὰ ἐντεταλμένα. τοὺς δὲ πρὸς
τὰ λεγόμενα ὑποκρίνασθαι ὡς ἕτοιμοί εἰσι Αργείοι
ποιέειν ταῦτα, τριήκοντα ἔτεα εἰρήνην σπεισάμενοι
Λακεδαιμονίοισι καὶ ἡγεόμενοι κατὰ τὸ ἥμισυ πάσης
τῆς συμμαχίης· καίτοι κατά γε τὸ δίκαιον γίνεσθαι
25 τὴν ἡγεμονίην ἑωυτῶν, ἀλλ᾽ ὅμως σφίσι ἀποχρᾶν κατὰ
149 τὸ ἥμισυ ἡγεομένοισι. ταῦτα μὲν λέγουσι τὴν βουλὴν
ὑποκρίνασθαι, καίπερ ἀπαγορεύοντός σφι τοῦ χρηστη
BOOK VII.
143
ρίου μὴ ποιέεσθαι τὴν πρὸς τοὺς Ἕλληνας συμμαχίην·
σπουδὴν δὲ ἔχειν σπονδὰς γενέσθαι τριηκοντοέτιδας
καίπερ τὸ χρηστήριον φοβεόμενοι, ἵνα δή σφι οἱ παῖδες 5
ἀνδρωθέωσι ἐν τούτοισι τοῖσι ἔτεσι· μὴ δὲ σπονδέων
ἐουσέων ἐπιλέγεσθαι, ἢν ἄρα σφέας καταλάβῃ πρὸς τῷ
γεγονότι κακῷ ἄλλο πταῖσμα πρὸς τὸν Πέρσην, μὴ τὸ
λοιπὸν ἔωσι Λακεδαιμονίων ὑπήκοοι. τῶν δὲ ἀγγέλων
τοὺς ἀπὸ τῆς Σπάρτης πρὸς τὰ ῥηθέντα ἐκ τῆς βουλής 10
ἀμείψασθαι τοισίδε· περὶ μὲν σπονδέων ἀνοίσειν ἐς
τοὺς πλεῦνας, περὶ δὲ ἡγεμονίης αὐτοῖσι ἐντετάλθαι
ὑποκρίνασθαι, καὶ δὴ λέγειν, σφίσι μὲν εἶναι δύο βασι-
λέας, 'Αργείοισι δὲ ἕνα· οὔκων δυνατὸν εἶναι τῶν ἐκ
Σπάρτης οὐδέτερον παῦσαι τῆς ἡγεμονίης, μετὰ δὲ δύο 15
τῶν σφετέρων ὁμόψηφον τὸν ᾿Αργεῖον εἶναι κωλύειν
οὐδέν. οὕτω δὴ οἱ Αργεῖοί φασι οὐκ ἀνασχέσθαι τῶν
Σπαρτιητέων τὴν πλεονεξίην, ἀλλ᾽ ἑλέσθαι μᾶλλον ὑπὸ
τῶν βαρβάρων ἄρχεσθαι ἤ τι ὑπεῖξαι Λακεδαιμονίοισι,
προειπείν τε τοῖσι ἀγγέλοισι πρὸ δύντος ἡλίου ἀπαλ-20
λάσσεσθαι ἐκ τῆς ᾿Αργείων χώρης, εἰ δὲ μή, περιέψεσ
θαι ὡς πολεμίους.
Argive Alliance with Persia.
Αὐτοὶ μὲν ᾿Αργεῖοι τοσαῦτα τούτων πέρι λέγουσι · 150
ἔστι δὲ ἄλλος λόγος λεγόμενος ἀνὰ τὴν Ἑλλάδα, ὡς
Ξέρξης έπεμψε κήρυκα ἐς ῎Αργος πρότερον ἤ περ ὁρ-
μῆσαι στρατεύεσθαι ἐπὶ τὴν Ἑλλάδα· ἐλθόντα δὲ τοῦ
τον λέγεται εἰπεῖν, “ ἄνδρες ᾿Αργεῖοι, βασιλεὺς Ξέρξης 5
τάδε ὑμῖν λέγει· ἡμεῖς νομίζομεν Πέρσην εἶναι, ἀπ᾽ οὗ
ἡμεῖς γεγόναμεν, παῖδα Περσέος τοῦ Δανάης, γεγονότα
ἐκ τῆς Κηφέος θυγατρὸς ᾿Ανδρομέδης. οὕτω ἂν ὧν
εἴημεν ὑμέτεροι ἀπόγονοι. οὔτε ὧν ἡμέας οἰκὸς ἐπὶ
144
HERODOTUS.
10 τοὺς ἡμετέρους προγόνους εκστρατεύεσθαι, οὔτε ὑμέας
ἄλλοισι τιμωρέοντας ἡμῖν ἀντιξόους γίνεσθαι, ἀλλὰ
παρ' ὑμῖν αὐτοῖσι ἡσυχίην ἔχοντας κατῆσθαι. ἦν γὰρ
ἐμοὶ γένηται κατὰ νόον, οὐδαμοὺς μέζονας ὑμέων ἄξω.”
ταῦτα ἀκούσαντας 'Αργείους λέγεται πρῆγμα ποιήσασ
15 θαι, καὶ παραχρῆμα μὲν οὐδὲν ἐπαγγελλομένους μεται-
τέειν, ἐπεὶ δέ σφεας παραλαμβάνειν τοὺς Ἕλληνας,
οὕτω δὴ ἐπισταμένους ὅτι οὐ μεταδώσουσι τῆς ἀρχῆς
Λακεδαιμόνιοι μεταιτέειν, ἵνα ἐπὶ προφάσιος ἡσυχίην
151 ἄγωσι. συμπεσεῖν δὲ τούτοισι καὶ τόνδε τον λόγον
λέγουσι τινες Ελλήνων, πολλοῖσι ἔτεσι ὕστερον γενό-
μενον τούτων. τυχεῖν ἐν Σούσοισι τοῖσι Μεμνονίοισι
ἐόντας ἑτέρου πρήγματος εἵνεκα ἀγγέλους Αθηναίων,
5 Καλλίην τε τὸν Ἱππονίκου καὶ τοὺς μετὰ τούτου ἀνα-
βάντας, Αργείους δὲ τὸν αὐτὸν τοῦτον χρόνον πέμψαν-
τας καὶ τούτους ἐς Σοῦσα ἀγγέλους εἰρωτᾶν Αρταξέρξεα
τὸν Ξέρξεω εἴ σφι ἔτι ἐμμένει ἐθέλουσι τὴν πρὸς Ξέρξην
φιλίην συνεκεράσαντο, ἢ νομιζοίατο πρὸς αὐτοῦ εἶναι
10 πολέμιοι· βασιλέα δὲ ᾿Αρταξέρξεα μάλιστα ἐμμένειν
φάναι, καὶ οὐδεμίαν νομίζειν πόλιν "Αργεος φιλιωτέρην.
152 εἰ μέν νυν Ξέρξης τε ἀπέπεμψε ταῦτα λέγοντα κήρυκα
ἐς 'Αργος καὶ 'Αργείων ἄγγελοι ἀναβάντες ἐς Σούσα
ἐπειρώτεον ᾿Αρταξέρξεα περὶ φιλίης, οὐκ ἔχω ἀτρεκέως
εἰπεῖν, οὐδέ τινα γνώμην περὶ αὐτῶν ἀποφαίνομαι ἄλλην
5 γε ἢ τήν περ αὐτοὶ ᾿Αργεῖοι λέγουσι· ἐπίσταμαι δὲ
τοσοῦτο, ὅτι εἰ πάντες ἄνθρωποι τὰ οἰκήια κακὰ ἐς
μέσον συνενείκαιεν ἀλλάξασθαι βουλόμενοι τοῖσι πλη-
σίοισι, ἐγκύψαντες ἂν ἐς τὰ τῶν πέλας κακὰ ἀσπασίως
ἕκαστοι αὐτῶν ἀποφεροίατο ὀπίσω τὰ ἐσηνείκαντο.
10 οὕτω δὴ οὐκ ᾿Αργείοισι αἴσχιστα πεποίηται. ἐγὼ δὲ
ὀφείλω λέγειν τὰ λεγόμενα, πείθεσθαι γε μὲν οὐ παντά-
BOOK VII.
145
ΤΟ
πασι ὀφείλω, καί μοι τοῦτο τὸ ἔπος ἐχέτω ἐς πάντα τὸν
λόγον· ἐπεὶ καὶ ταῦτα λέγεται, ὡς ἄρα 'Αργεῖοι ἦσαν
οἱ ἐπικαλεσάμενοι τὸν Πέρσην ἐπὶ τὴν Ἑλλάδα, ἐπειδή
σφι πρὸς τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους κακῶς ἡ αἰχμὴ ἑστήκεε, 15
πᾶν δὴ βουλόμενοι σφίσι εἶναι πρὸ τῆς παρεούσης λύπης.
Ancestors of Gelon in Sicily.
Τὰ μὲν περὶ ᾿Αργείων εἴρηται. ἐς δὲ τὴν Σικελίην 153
ἄλλοι τε ἀπίκατο ἄγγελοι ἀπὸ τῶν συμμάχων συμμί-
ξοντες Γέλωνι καὶ δὴ καὶ ἀπὸ Λακεδαιμονίων Σύαγρος.
τοῦ δὲ Γέλωνος τούτου πρόγονος, οἰκήτωρ ὁ ἐν Γέλῃ,
ἦν ἐκ νήσου Τήλου τῆς ἐπὶ Τριοπίῳ κειμένης· ὃς 5
κτιζομένης Γέλης ὑπὸ Λινδίων τε τῶν ἐκ Ρόδου καὶ
᾿Αντιφήμου οὐκ ἐλείφθη. ἀνὰ χρόνον δὲ αὐτοῦ οἱ ἀπό-
γονοι γενόμενοι ἱροφάνται τῶν χθονίων θεῶν διετέλεον
ἐόντες, Τηλίνεω ἑνός τευ τῶν προγόνων κτησαμένου
τρόπῳ τοιῷδε. ἐς Μακτώριον πόλιν τὴν ὑπὲρ Γέλης 10
οἰκημένην ἔφυγον ἄνδρες Γελφων στάσι εσσωθέντες·
τούτους ὦν ὁ Τηλίνης κατήγαγε ἐς Γέλην, ἔχων οὐδεμίαν
ἀνδρῶν δύναμιν ἀλλὰ ἱρὰ τούτων τῶν θεῶν. ὅθεν δὲ
αὐτὰ ἔλαβε ἢ αὐτὸς ἐκτήσατο, τοῦτο δὲ οὐκ ἔχω εἰπεῖν·
τούτοισι δ᾽ ὦν πίσυνος ἐὼν κατήγαγε, ἐπ᾽ ᾧ τε οἱ ἀπό- 15
γονοι αὐτοῦ ἱροφάνται τῶν θεῶν ἔσονται. θωυμά μοι
ὢν καὶ τοῦτο γέγονε πρὸς τὰ πυνθάνομαι, κατεργάσασ-
θαι Τηλίνην ἔργον τοσοῦτον· τὰ τοιαῦτα γὰρ ἔργα οὐ
πρὸς τοῦ ἅπαντος ἀνδρὸς νενόμικα γίνεσθαι, ἀλλὰ πρὸς
ψυχῆς τε ἀγαθῆς καὶ ῥώμης ἀνδρηίης· ὁ δὲ λέγεται 20
πρὸς τῆς Σικελίης τῶν οἰκητόρων τὰ ὑπεναντία τούτων
πεφυκέναι θηλυδρίης τε καὶ μαλακώτερος ἀνήρ. οὗτος 154
μέν νυν ἐκτήσατο τοῦτο τὸ γέρας· Κλεάνδρου δὲ τοῦ
Παντάρεις τελευτήσαντος τὸν βίον, ὃς ἐτυράννευσε μὲν
7
146
HERODOTUS.
Ο
Γέλης ἑπτὰ ἔτεα, ἀπέθανε δὲ ὑπὸ Σαβύλλου ἀνδρὸς
5 Γελώου, ἐνθαῦτα ἀναλαμβάνει τὴν μουναρχίην Ιππο-
κράτης Κλεάνδρου ἐὼν ἀδελφεός. ἔχοντος δὲ Ἱπποκράτ
τεος τὴν τυραννίδα, ὁ Γέλων ἐὼν Τηλίνεω τοῦ ἱροφάν-
τεω ἀπόγονος, πολλῶν τε μετ᾿ ἄλλων καὶ Αἰνησιδήμου
τοῦ Παταίκου . . . ὸς ἦν δορυφόρος Ἱπποκράτεος, μετὰ
10 δὲ οὐ πολλὸν χρόνον δι' ἀρετὴν ἀπεδέχθη πάσης τῆς
ἵππου είναι ἵππαρχος· πολιορκέοντος γὰρ Ιπποκράτεος
Καλλιπολίτας τε καὶ Ναξίους καὶ Ζαγκλαίους τε καὶ
Λεοντίνους καὶ πρὸς Συρηκοσίους τε καὶ τῶν βαρβάρων
συχνούς, ἀνὴρ ἐφαίνετο ἐν τούτοισι τοῖσι πολέμοισι
15 ἐὼν ὁ Γέλων λαμπρότατος. τῶν δὲ εἶπον πολίων,
τουτέων πλὴν Συρηκουσέων οὐδεμία πέφευγε δουλοσύ
νην πρὸς Ιπποκράτεος· Συρηκοσίους δὲ Κορίνθιοί τε
καὶ Κερκυραῖοι ἐρρύσαντο μάχῃ ἑσσωθέντας ἐπὶ ποτα-
μῷ Ἐλώρῳ, ἐρρύσαντο δὲ οὗτοι ἐπὶ τοισίδε καταλλά-
20 ξαντες, ἐπ᾽ ᾧ τε Ιπποκράτεϊ Καμάριναν Συρηκοσίους
παραδοῦναι· Συρηκοσίων δὲ ἦν Καμάρινα τὸ ἀρχαῖον.
Gelon Becomes Tyrant.
155 Ὡς δὲ καὶ Ἱπποκράτεα τυραννεύσαντα ἴσα ἔτεα τῷ
ἀδελφε Κλεάνδρῳ κατέλαβε ἀποθανεῖν πρὸς πόλι
Υβλῃ στρατευσάμενον ἐπὶ τοὺς Σικελούς, οὕτω δὴ ὁ
Γέλων τῷ λόγῳ τιμωρέων τοῖσι Ιπποκράτεος παισὶ
5 Εὐκλείδῃ τε καὶ Κλεάνδρῳ, οὐ βουλομένων τῶν πολιη-
τέων κατηκόων ἔτι εἶναι, τῷ ἔργῳ, ὡς ἐπεκράτησε μάχη
τῶν Γελώων, ἦρχε αὐτὸς ἀποστερήσας τοὺς Ἱπποκρά
τεος παῖδας. μετὰ δὲ τοῦτο τὸ εὕρημα τοὺς γαμόρους
καλεομένους τῶν Συρηκοσίων ἐκπεσόντας ὑπό τε τοῦ
10 δήμου καὶ τῶν σφετέρων δούλων, καλεομένων δὲ Κυλ-
λυρίων, ὁ Γέλων καταγαγὼν τούτους ἐκ Κασμένης πόλι-
0
BOOK VIIΙ.
147
a
Τ
Ο
ος ἐς τὰς Συρηκούσας ἔσχε καὶ ταύτας· ὁ γὰρ δῆμος ὁ
τῶν Συρηκοσίων ἐπιόντι Γέλωνι παραδιδοῖ τὴν πόλιν
καὶ ἑωυτόν. ὁ δὲ ἐπείτε παρέλαβε τὰς Συρηκούσας, 156
Γέλης μὲν ἐπικρατέων λόγον ἐλάσσω ἐποιέετο, ἐπιτρέ-
ψας αὐτὴν Ιέρωνι ἀδελφεῷ ἑωυτοῦ· ὁ δὲ τὰς Συρη-
κούσας ἐκράτυνε, καὶ ἦσάν οἱ πάντα αἱ Συρήκουσαι.
αἱ δὲ παραυτίκα ἀνά τ᾽ ἔδραμον καὶ ἔβλαστον. τοῦτο 5
μὲν γὰρ Καμαριναίους ἅπαντας ἐς τὰς Συρηκούσας
ἀγαγὼν πολιήτας ἐποίησε, Καμαρίνης δὲ τὸ ἄστυ και
τέσκαψε, τοῦτο δὲ Γελῴων ὑπερημίσεας τῶν ἀστῶν
τὠυτὸ τοῖσι Καμαριναίοισι ἐποίησε Μεγαρέας τε τοὺς
ἐν Σικελίῃ, ὡς πολιορκεόμενοι ἐς ὁμολογίην προσεχώ- 10
ρησαν, τοὺς μὲν αὐτῶν παχέας, ἀειραμένους τε πόλεμον
αὐτῷ καὶ προσδοκῶντας ἀπολέεσθαι διὰ τοῦτο, ἀγαγὼν
ἐς τὰς Συρηκούσας πολιήτας ἐποίησε, τὸν δὲ δῆμον τῶν
Μεγαρέων οὐκ ἐόντα μεταίτιον τοῦ πολέμου τούτου
οὐδὲ προσδεκόμενον κακὸν οὐδὲν πείσεσθαι, ἀγαγὼν καὶ 15
τούτους ἐς τὰς Συρηκούσας ἀπέδοτο ἐπ᾿ ἐξαγωγῇ ἐκ
Σικελίης. τώυτὸ δὲ τοῦτο καὶ Εὐβοέας τοὺς ἐν Σικελίῃ
ἐποίησε διακρίνας. ἐποίες δὲ ταῦτα τούτους ἀμφοτέ-
ρους νομίσας δῆμον εἶναι συνοίκημα ἀχαριτώτατον.
Interview between the Envoys and Gelon.
Τοιούτῳ μὲν τρόπῳ τύραννος ἐγεγόνεε μέγας ὁ Γέλων 15%
τότε δ᾽ ὡς οἱ ἄγγελοι τῶν Ἑλλήνων ἀπίκατο ἐς τὰς
Συρηκούσας, ἐλθόντες αὐτῷ ἐς λόγους ἔλεγον τάδε·
“ἔπεμψαν ἡμέας Λακεδαιμόνιοι καὶ οἱ τούτων σύμμα
χοι παραλαμψομένους σε πρὸς τὸν βάρβαρον· τὸν γὰρ 5
ἐπιόντα ἐπὶ τὴν Ἑλλάδα πάντως κου πυνθάνεαι, ὅτι
Πέρσης ἀνὴρ μέλλει, ζεύξας τὸν Ἑλλήσποντον καὶ
ἐπάγων πάντα τὸν ἠῷον στρατὸν ἐκ τῆς ᾿Ασίης, στρατη
143
HERODOTUS.
λατήσειν ἐπὶ τὴν Ἑλλάδα, πρόσχημα μὲν ποιεύμενος
10 ὡς ἐπ᾽ Αθήνας ἐλαύνει, ἐν νόῳ δὲ ἔχων πᾶσαν τὴν
Ἑλλάδα ὑπ᾽ ἑωυτῷ ποιήσασθαι. σὺ δὲ δυνάμιός τε
γὰρ ἥκεις μεγάλως, καὶ μοῖρά τοι τῆς Ἑλλάδος οὐκ
ἐλαχίστη μέτα ἄρχοντί γε Σικελίης, βοήθεέ τε τοῖσι
ἐλευθεροῦσι τὴν Ἑλλάδα καὶ συνελευθέρου. ἁλὴς μὲν
15 γὰρ γενομένη πᾶσα ἡ Ἑλλὰς χεὶρ μεγάλη συνάγεται,
καὶ ἀξιόμαχοι γινόμεθα τοῖσι ἐπιοῦσι· ἦν δὲ ἡμέων οἱ
μὲν καταπροδιδῶσι οἱ δὲ μὴ θέλωσι τιμωρέειν, τὸ δὲ
ὑγιαῖνον τῆς Ἑλλάδος ᾖ ὀλίγον, τοῦτο δὲ ἤδη δεινὸν
γίνεται μὴ πέσῃ πᾶσα ἡ Ἑλλάς. μὴ γὰρ ἐλπίσῃς, ἢν
20 ἡμέας καταστρέψηται ὁ Πέρσης μάχῃ κρατήσας, ὡς
οὐκὶ ἥξει παρὰ σέ γε, ἀλλὰ πρὸ τούτου φύλαξαι. βοη-
θέων γὰρ ἡμῖν σεωυτῷ τιμωρέεις· τῷ δὲ εὖ βουλευθέντι
πρήγματι τελευτὴ ὡς τὸ ἐπίπαν χρηστὴ ἐθέλει ἐπιγί-
158 νεσθαι.” οἱ μὲν ταῦτα ἔλεγον, Γέλων δὲ πολλὸς ἐνέκειτο
λέγων τοιάδε· “ ἄνδρες Ἕλληνες, λόγον ἔχοντες πλεο-
νέκτην ἐτολμήσατε ἐμὲ σύμμαχον ἐπὶ τὸν βάρβαρον
παρακαλέοντες ἐλθεῖν· αὐτοὶ δὲ ἐμεῦ πρότερον δεηθέν-
5 τος βαρβαρικοῦ στρατοῦ συνεπάψασθαι, ὅτε μοι πρὸς
Καρχηδονίους νεῖκος συνῆπτο, ἐπισκήπτοντός τε τὸν
Δωριέος τοῦ ᾿Αναξανδρίδεω πρὸς Εγεσταίων φόνον
ἐκπρήξασθαι, ὑποτείνοντός τε τὰ ἐμπόρια συνελευθε
ροῦν ἀπ᾽ ὧν ὑμῖν μεγάλαι ὠφελίαι τε καὶ ἐπαυρήσιες
10 γεγόνασι, οὔτε ἐμεῦ εἵνεκα ἤλθετε βοηθήσοντες οὔτε
τὸν Δωριέος φόνον ἐκπρηξόμενοι, τό τε κατ' ὑμέας τάδε
ἅπαντα ὑπὸ βαρβάροισι νέμεται. ἀλλὰ εὖ γὰρ ἡμῖν
καὶ ἐπὶ τὸ ἄμεινον κατέστη. νῦν δὲ ἐπειδὴ περιελήλυθε
ὁ πόλεμος καὶ ἀπῖκται ἐς ὑμέας, οὕτω δὴ Γέλωνος
15 μνῆστις γέγονε. ἀτιμίης δὲ πρὸς ὑμέων κυρήσας οὐκ
ὁμοιώσομαι ὑμῖν, ἀλλ᾽ ἕτοιμός εἰμι βοηθέειν παρεχό
-
BOOK VII.
149
Ο
μενος διηκοσίας τε τριήρεας καὶ δισμυρίους ὁπλίτας καὶ
δισχιλίην ἵππον καὶ δισχιλίους τοξότας καὶ δισχιλίους
σφενδονήτας καὶ δισχιλίους ἱπποδρόμους ψιλούς· σῖτόν
τε ἁπάσῃ τῇ Ἑλλήνων στρατιῇ, ἔστ᾽ ἂν διαπολεμήσω- 20
μεν, ὑποδέκομαι παρέξειν. ἐπὶ δὲ λόγῳ τοιῷδε τάδε
ὑπισχομαι, ἐπ᾽ ᾧ στρατηγός τε καὶ ἡγεμὼν τῶν Ἑλ
λήνων ἔσομαι πρὸς τὸν βάρβαρον. ἐπ' ἄλλῳ δὲ λόγῳ
οὔτ᾽ ἂν αὐτὸς ἔλθοιμι οὔτ᾽ ἂν ἄλλους πέμψαιμι.”
ταῦτα ἀκούσας οὔτε ἠνέσχετο ὁ Σύαγρος εἶπέ τε τάδε· 159
" ή με μέγ' οιμώξειε ὁ Πελοπίδης Αγαμέμνων πυθόμε
νος Σπαρτιήτας τὴν ἡγεμονίην ἀπαραιρῆσθαι ὑπὸ Γέ-
λωνός τε καὶ Συρηκοσίων. ἀλλὰ τούτου μὲν τοῦ λόγου
μηκέτι μνησθῇς, ὅκως τὴν ἡγεμονίην τοι παραδώσομεν, 5
ἀλλ᾽ εἰ μὲν βούλεαι βοηθέειν τῇ Ἑλλάδι, ἴσθι ἀρξόμε-
νος ὑπὸ Λακεδαιμονίων· εἰ δ᾽ ἄρα μὴ δικαιοῖς ἄρχεσθαι,
σὺ δὲ μηδὲ βοήθεε.” πρὸς ταῦτα ὁ Γέλων, ἐπειδὴ ὥρα 160
ἀπεστραμμένους τοὺς λόγους τοῦ Συάγρου, τὸν τελευ-
ταῖόν σφι τόνδε ἐξέφαινε λόγον· “ ὦ ξεῖνε Σπαρτιῆτα,
ὀνείδεα κατιόντα ἀνθρώπῳ φιλέει ἐπανάγειν τὸν θυμόν·
σὺ μέντοι ἀποδεξάμενος ὑβρίσματα ἐν τῷ λόγῳ οὔ
πείσεις ἀσχήμονα ἐν τῇ ἀμοιβῇ γενέσθαι. ὅκου δὲ
ὑμεῖς οὕτω περιέχεσθε τῆς ἡγεμονίης, οἰκὸς καὶ ἐμὲ
μᾶλλον ὑμέων περιέχεσθαι, στρατιῆς τε ἐόντα πολλα-
πλησίης ἡγεμόνα καὶ νεῶν πολλὸν πλεύνων. ἀλλ᾽
ἐπείτε ὑμῖν ὁ λόγος οὕτω προσάντης κατίσταται, ἡμεῖς 10
τι ὑπείξομεν τοῦ ἀρχαίου λόγου. εἰ τοῦ μὲν πεζοῦ
ὑμεῖς ἡγέοισθε, τοῦ δὲ ναυτικοῦ ἐγώ· εἰ δὲ ὑμῖν ἡδονὴ
τοῦ κατὰ θάλασσαν ἡγεμονεύειν, τοῦ πεζοὺ ἐγὼ θέλω.
καὶ ἢ τούτοισι ὑμέας χρεόν ἐστι ἀρέσκεσθαι ἢ ἀπιέναι
συμμάχων τοιῶνδε ἐρήμους.” Γέλων μὲν δὴ ταῦτα 161
προετείνετο, φθάσας δὲ ὁ ᾿Αθηναίων ἄγγελος τὸν Λακε-
اد
0
Ο
με
5
150
HERODOTUS.
•
δαιμονίων ἀμείβετό μιν τοισίδε· “ ὦ βασιλεῦ Συρηκο-
σίων, οὐκ ἡγεμόνος δεομένη ἡ Ἑλλὰς ἀπέπεμψε ἡμέας
5 πρὸς σέ, ἀλλὰ στρατιῆς. · σὺ δὲ ὅκως μὲν στρατιὴν
πέμψεις μὴ ἡγεύμενος τῆς Ἑλλάδος, οὐ προφαίνεις, ὡς
δὲ στρατηγήσεις αὐτῆς, γλίχεαι. ὅσον μέν νυν παντὸς
τοῦ Ἑλλήνων στρατοῦ ἐδέου ἡγέεσθαι, ἐξήρκες ἡμῖν
τοῖσι Αθηναίοισι ἡσυχίην ἄγειν, ἐπισταμένοισι ὡς ὁ
10 Λάκων ἱκανός τοι ἔμελλε ἔσεσθαι καὶ ὑπὲρ ἀμφοτέρων
Ο
0
ἀπολογεύμενος· ἐπείτε δὲ ἁπάσης ἀπελαυνόμενος δέεαι
τῆς ναυτικῆς ἄρχειν, οὕτω ἔχει τοι. οὐδ᾽ ἣν ὁ Λάκων
ἐπίῃ τοι ἄρχειν αὐτῆς, ἡμεῖς ἐπήσομεν· ἡμετέρη γάρ
ἐστι αὕτη γε μὴ αὐτῶν βουλομένων Λακεδαιμονίων.
15 τούτοισι μὲν ὧν ἡγέεσθαι βουλομένοισι οὐκ ἀντιτείνο-
μεν, ἄλλῳ δὲ παρήσομεν οὐδενὶ ναυαρχέειν. μάτην γὰρ
ἂν ὧδε πάραλον Ἑλλήνων στρατὸν πλεῖστον εἴημεν
ἐκτημένοι, εἰ Συρηκοσίοισι ἐόντες ᾿Αθηναῖοι συγχωρή-
σομεν τῆς ἡγεμονίης, ἀρχαιότατον μὲν ἔθνος παρεχόμε
20 νοι, μοῦνοι δὲ ἐόντες οὐ μετανάσται Ἑλλήνων· τῶν καὶ
Ὅμηρος ὁ ἐποποιὸς ἄνδρα ἄριστον ἔφησε ἐς Ἴλιον
ἀπικέσθαι τάξαι τε καὶ διακοσμῆσαι στρατόν. οὕτω
162 οὐκ ὄνειδος οὐδὲν ἡμῖν ἐστι λέγειν ταῦτα.” ἀμείβετο
Γέλων τοισίδε· “ ξεῖνε Αθηναῖε, ὑμεῖς οἴκατε τοὺς ἄρ-
χοντας ἔχειν, τοὺς δὲ ἀρξομένους οὐκ ἕξειν. ἐπεὶ τοίνυν
οὐδὲν ὑπιέντες ἔχειν τὸ πᾶν ἐθέλετε, οὐκ ἂν φθάνοιτε
5 τὴν ταχίστην ὀπίσω ἀπαλλασσόμενοι καὶ ἀγγέλλοντες
τῇ Ἑλλάδι ὅτι ἐκ τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ τὸ ἔαρ αὐτῇ ἐξαραίρη-
ται.” οὗτος δὲ ὁ νέος τοῦ ῥήματος [τὸ ἐθέλει λέγειν].
δῆλα γὰρ ὡς ἐν τῷ ἐνιαυτῷ ἐστὶ τὸ ἔαρ δοκιμώτατον,
τῆς δὲ τῶν Ἑλλήνων στρατιῆς τὴν ἑωυτοῦ στρατιήν·
10 στερισκομένην ὧν τὴν Ἑλλάδα τῆς ἑωυτοῦ συμμαχίης
εἴκαζε ὡς εἰ τὸ ἔαρ ἐκ τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ ἐξαραιρημένον εἴη.
BOOK VII.
151
Gelon Sends Cadmus to Delphi.
0
Ο
αν
Οἱ μὲν δὴ τῶν Ἑλλήνων ἄγγελοι τοιαῦτα τῷ Γέ- 163
λωνι χρηματισάμενοι ἀπέπλεον· Γέλων δὲ πρὸς ταῦτα
δείσας μὲν περὶ τοῖσι Ἕλλησι μὴ οὐ δύνωνται τὸν
βάρβαρον ὑπερβαλέσθαι, δεινὸν δὲ καὶ οὐκ ἀνασχετόν
ποιησάμενος ἐλθὼν ἐς Πελοπόννησον ἄρχεσθαι ὑπὸ 5
Λακεδαιμονίων ἐὼν Σικελίης τύραννος, ταύτην μὲν τὴν
ὁδὸν ἠμέλησε, ὁ δὲ ἄλλης εἴχετο. ἐπείτε γὰρ τάχιστα
ἐπύθετο τὸν Πέρσην διαβεβηκότα τὸν Ἑλλήσποντον,
πέμπει πεντηκοντέροισι τρισὶ Κάδμον τὸν Σκύθεω ἄν-
δρα Κρον ἐς Δελφούς, ἔχοντα χρήματα πολλὰ καὶ φι- 10
λίους λόγους, καραδοκήσοντα τὴν μάχην τῇ πεσέεται,
καὶ ἢν μὲν ὁ βάρβαρος νικᾷ, τά τε χρήματα αὐτῷ
διδόναι καὶ γῆν τε καὶ ὕδωρ τῶν ἄρχει ὁ Γέλων, ἣν δὲ
οἱ Ἕλληνες, ὀπίσω ἀπάγειν. ὁ δὲ Κάδμος οὗτος πρό- 164
τερον τούτων παραδεξάμενος παρὰ πατρὸς τυραννίδα
Κῴων εὖ βεβηκυῖαν, ἑκών τε εἶναι καὶ δεινοῦ ἐπιόντος
οὐδενὸς ἀλλὰ ἀπὸ δικαιοσύνης ἐς μέσον Κώοισι κατα-
θεὶς τὴν ἀρχήν, οἴχετο ἐς Σικελίην, ἔνθα παρὰ Σαμίων 5
ἔσχε τε καὶ κατοίκησε πόλιν Ζάγκλην τὴν ἐς Μεσσήνην
μεταβαλοῦσαν τὸ οὔνομα. τοῦτον δὴ ὁ Γέλων τὸν
Κάδμον καὶ τοιούτῳ τρόπῳ ἀπικόμενον διὰ δικαιοσύνην,
τήν οἱ αὐτὸς ἄλλην συνῄδεε ἐοῦσαν, ἔπεμπε· ὃς ἐπὶ
τοῖσι ἄλλοισι δικαίοισι τοῖσι ἐξ ἑωυτοῦ ἐργασμένοισι 10
καὶ τόδε οὐκ ἐλάχιστον τούτων ἐλίπετο. κρατήσας
[γὰρ] μεγάλων χρημάτων τῶν οἱ Γέλων ἐπετράπετο,
παρεὸν κατασχέσθαι οὐκ ἠθέλησε, ἀλλ᾽ ἐπεὶ οἱ Ἕλ
ληνες ἐπεκράτησαν τῇ ναυμαχίῃ καὶ Ξέρξης οἰχώκεε
ἀπελαύνων, καὶ δὴ καὶ ἐκεῖνος ἀπίκετο ἐς τὴν Σικελίην 15
ἀπὸ πάντα τὰ χρήματα ἄγων.
ΤΟ
152
HERODOTUS.
Carthaginians Defeated by Gelon.
Ο
165 Λέγεται δὲ καὶ τάδε ὑπὸ τῶν ἐν τῇ Σικελίῃ οἰκημέ.
νων, ὡς ὅμως καὶ μέλλων ἄρχεσθαι ὑπὸ Λακεδαιμονίων
ὁ Γέλων ἐβοήθησε ἂν τοῖσι Ἕλλησι, εἰ μὴ ὑπὸ Θήρωνος
τοῦ Αἰνησιδήμου Ακραγαντίνων μουνάρχου ἐξελασθεὶς
5 ἐξ Ιμέρης Τήριλλος ὁ Κρινίππου τύραννος ἐὼν ἡμέρης
ἐπῆγε ὑπ' αὐτὸν τὸν χρόνον τοῦτον Φοινίκων καὶ Λιβύ
ων καὶ Ἰβήρων καὶ Λιγύων καὶ Ἐλισύκων καὶ Σαρδο-
νίων καὶ Κυρνίων τριήκοντα μυριάδας καὶ στρατηγὸν
αὐτῶν ᾿Αμίλκαν τὸν ῎Αννωνος, Καρχηδονίων ἐόντα
10 βασιλέα, κατὰ ξεινίην τε τὴν ἑωυτοῦ ὁ Τήριλλος άνα-
γνώσας καὶ μάλιστα διὰ τὴν ᾿Αναξίλεω τοῦ Κρητίνεω
προθυμίην, ὃς Ρηγίου ἐὼν τύραννος τὰ ἑωυτοῦ τέκνα
δοὺς ὁμήρους Αμίλκᾳ ἐπῆγε ἐπὶ τὴν Σικελίην τιμωρέων
τῷ πενθερῷ· Τηρίλλου γὰρ εἶχε θυγατέρα Αναξίλεως,
15 τῇ οὔνομα ἦν Κυδίππη. οὕτω δὴ οὐκ οἷόν τε γενόμενον
βοηθέειν τὸν Γέλωνα τοῖσι Ἕλλησι ἀποπέμπειν ἐς
166 Δελφοὺς τὰ χρήματα. πρὸς δὲ καὶ τάδε λέγουσι, ὡς
συνέβη τῆς αὐτῆς ἡμέρης ἔν τε τῇ Σικελίῃ Γέλωνα
καὶ Θήρωνα νικᾶν ᾿Αμίλκαν τὸν Καρχηδόνιον καὶ ἐν
Σαλαμίνι τοὺς Ἕλληνας τὸν Πέρσην, τὸν δὲ ᾿Αμίλκαν
5 Καρχηδόνιον ἐόντα πρὸς πατρός, μητρόθεν δὲ Συρηκό-
σιον, βασιλεύσαντά τε κατ᾽ ἀνδραγαθίην Καρχηδονίων,
ὡς ἡ συμβολή τε ἐγίνετο καὶ ὡς ἑσσοῦτο τῇ μάχη,
ἀφανισθῆναι πυνθάνομαι· οὔτε γὰρ ζῶντα οὔτε ἀποθα
νόντα φανῆναι οὐδαμοῦ γῆς· τὸ πᾶν γὰρ ἐπεξελθεῖν
16 διζήμενον Γέλωνα. ἔστι δὲ ὑπ' αὐτῶν Καρχηδονίων
ὅδε λόγος λεγόμενος, οἰκότι χρεομένων, ὡς οἱ μὲν βάρο
βαροι τοῖσι Ἕλλησι ἐν τῇ Σικελίῃ ἐμάχοντο ἐξ ἠους
ἀρξάμενοι μέχρι δείλης ὀψίης (ἐπὶ τοσοῦτο γὰρ λέγεται
BOOK VII.
153
ἑλκύσαι τὴν σύστασιν), ὁ δὲ ᾿Αμίλκας ἐν τούτῳ τῷ 5
χρόνῳ μένων ἐν τῷ στρατοπέδῳ ἐθύετο καὶ ἐκαλλιερέετο
ἐπὶ πυρῆς μεγάλης σώματα ὅλα καταγίζων, ἰδὼν δὲ
τροπὴν τῶν ἑωυτοῦ γινομένην, ὡς ἔτυχε ἐπισπένδων
τοῖσι ἱροῖσι, ὦσε ἑωυτὸν ἐς τὸ πῦρ· οὕτω δὴ κατακαυ-
θέντα ἀφανισθῆναι. ἀφανισθέντι δὲ ᾿Αμίλκα τρόπῳ 10
εἴτε τοιούτῳ, ὡς Φοίνικες λέγουσι, εἴτε ἑτέρῳ, [ ὡς
Καρχηδόνιοι καὶ Συρηκόσιοι,] τοῦτο μέν οἱ θύουσι,
τοῦτο δὲ μνήματα ἐποίησαν ἐν πάσῃσι τῇσι πόλισι τῶν
ἀποικίδων, ἐν αὐτῇ τε μέγιστον Καρχηδόνι.
Action of the Ccrcyraeans.
Τὰ μὲν ἀπὸ Σικελίης τοσαῦτα. Κερκυραῖοι δὲ τάδε 168
ὑποκρινάμενοι τοῖσι ἀγγέλοισι τοιάδε ἐποίησαν· καὶ
γὰρ τούτους παρελάμβανον οἱ αὐτοὶ οἵ περ ἐς Σικελίην
ἀπίκοντο, λέγοντες τοὺς αὐτοὺς λόγους τοὺς καὶ πρὸς
Γέλωνα ἔλεγον· οἱ δὲ παραυτίκα μὲν ὑπίσχοντο πέμ- 5
ψεῖν τε καὶ ἀμυνέειν, φράζοντες ὡς οὔ σφι περιοπτέη
ἐστὶ ἡ Ἑλλὰς ἀπολλυμένη· ἦν γὰρ σφαλῇ, σφεῖς γε
οὐδὲν ἄλλο ἢ δουλεύσουσι τῇ πρώτῃ τῶν ἡμερέων· ἀλλὰ
τιμωρητέον εἴη ἐς τὸ δυνατώτατον. ὑπεκρίναντο μὲν
οὕτω εὐπρόσωπα· ἐπεὶ δὲ ἔδει βοηθέειν, ἄλλα νοέοντες 10
ἐπλήρωσαν νέας ἑξήκοντα, μόγις δὲ ἀναχθέντες προσ-
έμιξαν τῇ Πελοποννήσῳ, καὶ περὶ Πύλον καὶ Ταίναρον
γῆς τῆς Λακεδαιμονίων ἀνεκώχευον τὰς νέας, καραδο
κέοντες καὶ οὗτοι τὸν πόλεμον τῇ πεσέεται, ἀελπτέοντες
μὲν τοὺς Ἕλληνας ὑπερβαλέεσθαι, δοκέοντες δὲ τὸν 15
Πέρσην κατακρατήσαντα πολλὸν ἄρξειν πάσης τῆς
Ελλάδος. ἐποίευν ὧν ἐπίτηδες, ἵνα ἔχωσι πρὸς τὸν
Πέρσην λέγειν τοιάδε· “ ὦ βασιλεῦ, ἡμεῖς, παραλαμ-
βανόντων τῶν Ἑλλήνων ἡμέας ἐς τὸν πόλεμον τοῦτον,
154
HERODOTUS.
αν
20 ἔχοντες δύναμιν οὐκ ἐλαχίστην οὐδὲ νέας ἐλαχίστας
παρασχόντες ἂν ἀλλὰ πλείστας μετά γε 'Αθηναίους,
οὐκ ἠθελήσαμέν τοι ἐναντιοῦσθαι οὐδέ τι ἀποθύμιον
ποιῆσαι.” τοιαῦτα λέγοντες ἤλπιζον πλέον τι τῶν
ἄλλων οἴσεσθαι· τά περ ἂν καὶ ἐγένετο, ὡς ἐμοὶ δοκέει.
25 πρὸς δὲ τοὺς Ἕλληνάς σφι σκῆψις ἐπεποίητο, τῇ περ
δὴ καὶ ἐχρήσαντο. αἰτιωμένων γὰρ τῶν Ἑλλήνων ὅτι
οὐκ ἐβοήθεον, ἔφασαν πληρῶσαι μὲν ἑξήκοντα τριήρεας,
ὑπὸ δὲ ἐτησιέων ἀνέμων ὑπερβαλεῖν Μαλέην οὐκ οἶοί
τε γενέσθαι· οὕτω οὐκ ἀπικέσθαι ἐς Σαλαμῖνα, καὶ
30 οὐδεμιῇ κακότητι λειφθῆναι τῆς ναυμαχίης.
169
The Cretans Refuse Assistance.
Οὗτοι μὲν οὕτω διεκρούσαντο τοὺς Ἕλληνας. Κρή
τες δέ, ἐπείτε σφέας παρελάμβανον οἱ ἐπὶ τούτοισι
ταχθέντες Ελλήνων, ἐποίησαν τοιόνδε· πέμψαντες
κοινῇ θεοπρόπους ἐς Δελφοὺς τὸν θεὸν ἐπειρώτεον εἴ
5 σφι ἄμεινον τιμωρέουσι γίνεται τῇ Ἑλλάδι. ἡ δὲ
Πυθίη ὑπεκρίνατο, “ ὦ νήπιοι, ἐπιμέμφεσθε ὅσα ὑμῖν
ἐκ τῶν Μενέλεῳ τιμωρημάτων Μίνως ἔπεμψε μηνίων
δακρύματα, ὅτι οἱ μὲν οὐ συνεξεπρήξαντο αὐτῷ τὸν ἐν
Καμικῷ θάνατον γενόμενον, ὑμεῖς δὲ ἐκείνοισι τὴν ἐκ
10 Σπάρτης ἁρπασθεῖσαν ὑπ᾽ ἀνδρὸς βαρβάρου γυναῖκα.”
ταῦτα οἱ Κρῆτες ὡς ἀπενειχθέντα ἤκουσαν, ἔσχοντο
170 της τιμωρίης. λέγεται γὰρ Μίνων κατὰ ζήτησιν Δαι-
δάλου ἀπικόμενον ἐς Σικανίην τὴν νῦν Σικελίην καλευ-
μένην ἀποθανεῖν βιαίῳ θανάτῳ· ἀνὰ δὲ χρόνον Κρήτας,
θεοῦ σφι ἐποτρύναντος, πάντας πλὴν Πολιχνιτέων τε
5 καὶ Πραισίων ἀπικομένους στόλῳ μεγάλῳ ἐς Σικανίην
πολιορκέειν ἐπ᾽ ἔτεα πέντε πόλιν Καμικόν, τὴν κατ'
ἐμὲ ᾿Ακραγαντίνοι ἐνέμοντο· τέλος δὲ οὐ δυναμένους
T
BOOK VII.
155
οὔτε ἑλεῖν οὔτε παραμένειν λιμῷ συνεστεῶτας, ἀπολι-
πόντας οἴχεσθαι. ὡς δὲ κατὰ Ἰηπυγίην γενέσθαι
πλέοντας, ὑπολαβόντα σφέας χειμῶνα μέγαν ἐκβαλεῖν 10
ἐς τὴν γῆν· συναραχθέντων δὲ τῶν πλοίων, οὐδεμίαν
γάρ σφι ἔτι κομιδὴν ἐς Κρήτην φαίνεσθαι, ἐνθαῦτα
Ὑρίην πόλιν κτίσαντας καταμεῖναί τε καὶ μεταβαλόν-
τας ἀντὶ μὲν Κρητῶν γενέσθαι Ιήπυγας Μεσσαπίους,
ἀντὶ δὲ εἶναι νησιώτας ήπειρώτας. ἀπὸ δὲ Υρίης πό- 15
λιος τὰς ἄλλας οἰκῆσαι, τὰς δὴ Ταραντίνοι χρόνῳ ὕστε-
ρον πολλῷ ἐξανιστάντες προσέπταισαν μεγάλως, ὥστε
φόνος Ἑλληνικὸς μέγιστος οὗτος δὴ ἐγένετο πάντων
τῶν ἡμεῖς ἴδμεν, αὐτῶν τε Ταραντίνων καὶ Ρηγίνων, οἳ
ὑπὸ Μικύθου τοῦ Χοίρου ἀναγκαζόμενοι τῶν ἀστῶν καὶ 20
ἀπικόμενοι τιμωροί Ταραντίνοισι ἀπέθανον τρισχίλιοι
οὕτω· αὐτῶν δὲ Ταραντίνων οὐκ ἐπὴν ἀριθμός. ὁ δὲ
Μίκυθος οἰκέτης ἐὼν ᾿Αναξίλεω ἐπίτροπος Ρηγίου
καταλέλειπτο, οὗτος ὅς περ ἐκπεσὼν ἐκ Ρηγίου καὶ
Τεγέην τὴν ᾿Αρκάδων οἰκήσας ἀνέθηκε ἐν Ὀλυμπίῃ 25
τοὺς πολλοὺς ἀνδριάντας. ἀλλὰ τὰ μὲν κατὰ Ῥηγίνου 171
τε καὶ Ταραντίνους τοῦ λόγου μοι παρενθήκη γέγονε
ἐς δὲ τὴν Κρήτην ἐρημωθεῖσαν, ὡς λέγουσι Πραίσιοι,
ἐσοικίζεσθαι ἄλλους τε ἀνθρώπους καὶ μάλιστα Ελλη-
νας, τρίτῃ δὲ γενεῇ μετὰ Μίνων τελευτήσαντα γενέσθαι 5
τὰ Τρωικά, ἐν τοῖσι οὐ φλαυροτάτους φαίνεσθαι ἐόντας
Κρῆτας τιμωροὺς Μενέλεῳ. ἀπὸ τούτων δέ σφι ἀπο-
νοστήσασι ἐκ Τροίης λιμόν τε καὶ λοιμὸν γενέσθαι καὶ
αὐτοῖσι καὶ τοῖσι προβάτοισι, ἔστε τὸ δεύτερον ἐρημω-
θείσης Κρήτης μετὰ τῶν ὑπολοίπων τρίτους αὐτὴν νῦν 10
νέμεσθαι Κρῆτας. ἡ μὲν δὴ Πυθίη ὑπομνήσασα ταῦτα
ἔσχε βουλομένους τιμωρέειν τοῖσι Ἕλλησι.
156
HERODOTUS.
172
The Thessalians and the Pass of Tempe.
Θεσσαλοὶ δὲ ὑπὸ ἀναγκαίης τὸ πρῶτον ἐμήδισαν, ὡς
διέδεξαν, ὅτι οὔ σφι ἥνδανε τὰ οἱ ᾿Αλευάδαι ἐμηχα-
νέοντο. ἐπείτε γὰρ ἐπύθοντο τάχιστα μέλλοντα δια
βαίνειν τὸν Πέρσην ἐς τὴν Εὐρώπην, πέμπουσι ἐς τὸν
5 Ἰσθμὸν ἀγγέλους· ἐν δὲ τῷ Ἰσθμῷ ἦσαν ἁλισμένοι
πρόβουλοι τῆς Ἑλλάδος ἀραιρημένοι ἀπὸ τῶν πολίων
τῶν τὰ ἀμείνω φρονεουσέων περὶ τὴν Ἑλλάδα. ἀπικό-
μενοι δὲ ἐπὶ τούτους τῶν Θεσσαλῶν οἱ ἄγγελοι ἔλεγον,
δέ
ἄνδρες Ἕλληνες, δεῖ φυλάσσεσθαι τὴν ἐσβολὴν τὴν
10 Ολυμπικήν, ἵνα Θεσσαλίη τε καὶ ἡ σύμπασα ᾖ Ἑλλὰς
ἐν σκέπῃ τοῦ πολέμου. ἡμεῖς μέν νυν ἕτοιμοί εἶμεν
συμφυλάσσειν, πέμπειν δὲ χρὴ καὶ ὑμέας στρατιὴν
πολλήν, ὡς, εἰ μὴ πέμψετε, ἐπίστασθε ἡμέας ὁμολογή-
σειν τῷ Πέρσῃ· οὐ γάρ τι προκατημένους τοσοῦτο πρὸ
15 τῆς ἄλλης Ἑλλάδος μούνους πρὸ ὑμέων δεῖ ἀπολέσθαι.
βοηθέειν δὲ οὐ βουλόμενοι ἀναγκαίην ἡμῖν οὐδεμίαν
οἷοί ΤΕ ἐστὲ προσφέρειν· οὐδαμὰ γὰρ ἀδυνασίης ἀνάγκη
κρέσσων ἔφυ. ἡμεῖς δὲ πειρησόμεθα αὐτοί τινα σωτη-
173 ρίην μηχανεόμενοι.” ταῦτα ἔλεγον οἱ Θεσσαλοί. οἱ δὲ
Ἕλληνες πρὸς ταῦτα ἐβουλεύσαντο ἐς Θεσσαλίην πέμ
πειν κατὰ θάλασσαν πεζὸν στρατὸν φυλάξοντα τὴν
ἐσβολήν. ὡς δὲ συνελέχθη ὁ στρατός, ἔπλεε δι' Εὐρί-
5 που· ἀπικόμενος δὲ τῆς ᾿Αχαιίης ἐς Αλον, ἀποβὰς
ἐπορεύετο ἐς Θεσσαλίην, τὰς νέας αὐτοῦ καταλιπών,
καὶ ἀπίκετο ἐς τὰ Τέμπεα ἐς τὴν ἐσβολὴν ἥ περ ἀπὸ
Μακεδονίης τῆς κάτω ἐς Θεσσαλίην φέρει παρὰ ποτα-
μὸν Πηνειόν, μεταξὺ δὲ Ὀλύμπου τε ὄρεος [ἐόντα] καὶ
10 τῆς Ὄσσης. ἐνθαῦτα ἐστρατοπεδεύοντο τῶν Ἑλλήνων
κατὰ μυρίους οπλίτας συλλεγέντες, καί σφι προσῆν ἡ
BOOK VII.
157
Θεσσαλῶν ἵππος· ἐστρατήγεε δὲ Λακεδαιμονίων μὲν
Εὐαίνετος ὁ Καρήνου ἐκ τῶν πολεμάρχων ἀραιρημένος,
γένεος μέντοι ἐὼν οὐ τοῦ βασιληίου, Αθηναίων δὲ Θε-
μιστοκλέης ὁ Νεοκλέος. ἔμειναν δὲ ὀλίγας ἡμέρας ἐν-15
θαῦτα· ἀπικόμενοι γὰρ ἄγγελοι παρὰ ᾿Αλεξάνδρου τοῦ
᾿Αμύντεω ἀνδρὸς Μακεδόνος συνεβούλευόν σφι ἀπαλ-
λάσσεσθαι μηδὲ μένοντας ἐν τῇ ἐσβολῇ καταπατηθῆναι
ὑπὸ τοῦ στρατοῦ τοῦ ἐπιόντος, σημαίνοντες τὸ πλῆθός
τε τῆς στρατιῆς καὶ τὰς νέας. ὡς δὲ οὗτοί σφι ταῦτα 20
συνεβούλευον, χρηστὰ γὰρ ἐδόκεον συμβουλεύειν καί
σφι εὔνοος ἐφαίνετο ἐὼν ὁ Μακεδών, ἐπείθοντο. δοκέειν
δ' ἐμοί, ἀρρωδίη ἦν τὸ πεῖθον, ὡς ἐπύθοντο καὶ ἄλλην
ἐοῦσαν ἐσβολὴν ἐς Θεσσαλοὺς κατὰ τὴν ἄνω Μακε-
δονίην διὰ Περραιβῶν κατὰ Γόννον πόλιν, τῇ περ δὴ 25
καὶ ἐσέβαλε ἡ στρατιὴ ἡ Ξέρξεω. καταβάντες δὲ οἱ
Ἕλληνες ἐπὶ τὰς νέας ὀπίσω ἐπορεύοντο ἐς τὸν Ἰσθμόν.
αν
Αὕτη ἐγένετο ἡ ἐς Θεσσαλίην στρατιή, βασιλέος τε 14
μέλλοντος διαβαίνειν ἐς τὴν Εὐρώπην ἐκ τῆς ᾿Ασίης
καὶ ἐόντος ἤδη ἐν ᾿Αβύδῳ. Θεσσαλοὶ δὲ ἐρημωθέντες
συμμάχων οὕτω δὴ ἐμήδισαν προθύμως οὐδ᾽ ἔτι ἐνδοια-
στῶς, ὥστε ἐν τοῖσι πρήγμασι ἐφαίνοντο βασιλέι ἄνδρες 5
ἐόντες χρησιμώτατοι.
Artemisium and Thermopylae to be Defended by the Greeks.
Οἱ δὲ Ἕλληνες ἐπείτε ἀπίκατο ἐς τὸν Ἰσθμόν, έβου- 175
λεύοντο πρὸς τὰ λεχθέντα ἐξ ᾿Αλεξάνδρου τῇ τε στή-
σονται τὸν πόλεμον καὶ ἐν οἵοισι χώροισι. ἡ νικῶσα
δὲ γνώμη ἐγίνετο τὴν ἐν Θερμοπύλῃσι ἐσβολὴν φυλά-
ξαι· στεινοτέρη γὰρ ἐφαίνετο ἐοῦσα τῆς ἐς Θεσσαλίην 5
καὶ ἅμα ἀγχοτέρη τε τῆς ἑωυτῶν . . . τὴν δὲ ἀτραπόν,
δι᾽ ἣν ἥλωσαν οἱ ἁλόντες Ἑλλήνων ἐν Θερμοπύλῃσι,
158
HERODOTUS.
οὐδὲ ἔδεσαν ἐοῦσαν πρότερον ἤ περ ἀπικόμενοι ἐς Θερ-
μοπύλας ἐπύθοντο Τρηχινίων. ταύτην ὧν ἐβουλεύσαντο
10 φυλάσσοντες τὴν ἐσβολὴν μὴ παριέναι ἐς τὴν Ἑλλάδα
τὸν βάρβαρον, τὸν δὲ ναυτικὸν στρατὸν πλέειν γῆς τῆς
Ιστιαιώτιδος ἐπὶ ᾿Αρτεμίσιον. ταῦτα γὰρ ἀγχοῦ τε
ἀλλήλων ἐστὶ ὥστε πυνθάνεσθαι τὰ κατὰ ἑκατέρους
176 εόντα, οἵ τε χῶροι οὕτω ἔχουσι. τοῦτο μὲν τὸ ᾿Αρτε-
τό
μίσιον· ἐκ τοῦ πελάγεος τοῦ Θρηικίου ἐξ εὐρέος συνά-
γεται ἐς στεινὸν ἐόντα τὸν πόρον τὸν μεταξὺ νήσου τε
Σκιάθου καὶ ἠπείρου Μαγνησίης· ἐκ δὲ τοῦ στεινοῦ
5 τῆς Εὐβοίης ἤδη τὸ ᾿Αρτεμίσιον δέκεται αἰγιαλός, ἐν δὲ
Αρτέμιδος ἱρόν. ἡ δὲ αὖ διὰ Τρηχῖνος ἔσοδος ἐς τὴν
Ἑλλάδα ἐστί, τῇ στεινοτάτη, ἡμίπλεθρον. οὐ μέντοι
κατὰ τοῦτό γε ἐστὶ τὸ στεινότατον τῆς χώρης τῆς ἄλ-
λης, ἀλλ᾽ ἔμπροσθέ τε Θερμοπυλέων καὶ ὄπισθε, κατά
10 τε Αλπηνοὺς ὄπισθε ἐόντας ἐοῦσα ἁμαξιτὸς μούνη, καὶ
ἔμπροσθε κατὰ Φοίνικα ποταμὸν ἀγχοῦ ᾿Ανθήλης πό
λιος ἄλλη ἁμαξιτὸς μούνη. τῶν δὲ Θερμοπυλέων τὸ
μὲν πρὸς ἑσπέρης ὄρος ἄβατόν τε καὶ ἀπόκρημνον,
ὑψηλόν, ἀνατεῖνον ἐς τὴν Οἴτην· τὸ δὲ πρὸς τὴν ἠ
15 τῆς ὁδοῦ θάλασσα ὑποδέκεται καὶ τενάγεα. ἔστι δὲ ἐν
τῇ ἐσόδῳ ταύτῃ θερμὰ λουτρά, τὰ Χύτρους καλέουσι
οἱ ἐπιχώριοι, καὶ βωμὸς ἵδρυται Ἡρακλέος ἐπ' αὐτοῖσι.
ἐδέδμητο δὲ τεῖχος κατὰ ταύτας τὰς ἐσβολάς, καὶ τό γε
παλαιὸν πύλαι ἐπῆσαν. ἔδειμαν δὲ Φωκέες τὸ τεῖχος
20 δείσαντες, ἐπεὶ Θεσσαλοὶ ἦλθον ἐκ Θεσπρωτῶν οἰκή-
σοντες γῆν τὴν Αἰολίδα, τήν περ νῦν ἐκτέαται. ἅτε δὴ
πειρωμένων τῶν Θεσσαλῶν καταστρέφεσθαί σφεας,
τοῦτο προεφυλάξαντο οἱ Φωκέες, καὶ τὸ ὕδωρ τὸ θερμὸν
τότε ἐπῆκαν ἐπὶ τὴν ἔσοδον, ὡς ἂν χαραδρωθείη ὁ χῶ
25 ρος, πᾶν μηχανεόμενοι ὅκως μή σφι ἐσβάλοιεν οἱ Θεσ-
BOOK VII.
159
σαλοὶ ἐπὶ τὴν χώρην. τὸ μέν νυν τεῖχος τὸ ἀρχαῖον ἐκ
παλαιοῦ τε ἐδέδμητο καὶ τὸ πλέον αὐτοῦ ἤδη ὑπὸ χρό-
νου ἔκειτο· τοῖσι δὲ αὖτις ὀρθώσασι ἔδοξε ταύτῃ ἀπα-
μύνειν ἀπὸ τῆς Ἑλλάδος τὸν βάρβαρον. κώμη δέ ἐστι
ἀγχοτάτω τῆς ὁδοῦ, ᾿Αλπηνεὶ οὔνομα· ἐκ ταύτης δὲ 30
ἐπισιτιεῖσθαι ἐλογίζοντο οἱ Ἕλληνες.
Land and Naval Force Despatched from the Isthmus;
Oracles.
Οἱ μέν νυν χώροι οὗτοι τοῖσι Ἕλλησι εἶναι ἐφαί-177
νοντο ἐπιτήδεοι· ἅπαντα γὰρ προσκεψάμενοι καὶ ἐπιλο-
γισθέντες ὅτι οὔτε πλήθει ἕξουσι χρᾶσθαι οἱ βάρβαροι
οὔτε ἵππῳ, ταύτῃ σφι ἔδοξε δέκεσθαι τὸν ἐπιόντα ἐπὶ
τὴν Ἑλλάδα. ὡς δὲ ἐπύθοντο τὸν Πέρσην ἐόντα ἐν 5
Πιερίῃ, διαλυθέντες ἐκ τοῦ Ἰσθμοῦ ἐστρατεύοντο αὐτῶν
οἱ μὲν ἐς Θερμοπύλας πεζῇ, ἄλλοι δὲ κατὰ θάλασσαν
ἐπ' Αρτεμίσιον.
Εκ
Οἱ μὲν δὴ Ἕλληνες κατὰ τάχος ἐβοήθεον διαταχ-178
θέντες, Δελφοὶ δ᾽ ἐν τούτῳ τῷ χρόνῳ ἐχρηστηριάζοντο
τῷ θεῷ ὑπὲρ ἑωυτῶν καὶ τῆς Ἑλλάδος καταρρωδηκό-
τες, καί σφι ἐχρήσθη ἀνέμοισι εὔχεσθαι· μεγάλους γὰρ
τούτους ἔσεσθαι τῇ Ἑλλάδι συμμάχους. Δελφοὶ δὲ 5
δεξάμενοι τὸ μαντήιον πρῶτα μὲν ῾Ελλήνων τοῖσι βου-
λομένοισι εἶναι ἐλευθέροισι ἐξήγγειλαν τὰ χρησθέντα
αὐτοῖσι, καί σφι δεινῶς καταρρωδέουσι τὸν βάρβαρον
ἐξαγγείλαντες χάριν ἀθάνατον κατέθεντο· μετὰ δὲ ταῦ
τα οἱ Δελφοὶ τοῖσι ἀνέμοισι βωμόν τε ἀπέδεξαν ἐν 10
Θυίῃ, τῇ περ τῆς Κηφισοῦ θυγατρὸς Θυίης τὸ τέμενός
ἐστι, ἐπ᾿ ἧς καὶ ὁ χῶρος οὗτος τὴν ἐπωνυμίην ἔχει, καὶ
θυσίῃσί σφεας μετήισαν.
0
160
HERODOTUS.
Ten Persian Ships Advance from Therma; First Bloodshed,
179 Δελφοὶ μὲν δὴ κατὰ τὸ χρηστήριον ἔτι καὶ νῦν τοὺς
τό
ἀνέμους ἱλάσκονται. ὁ δὲ ναυτικὸς Ξέρξεω στρατὸς
ὁρμεόμενος ἐκ Θέρμης πόλιος παρέβαλε νηυσὶ τῇσι
ἄριστα πλεούσῃσι δέκα ἰθὺ Σκιάθου, ἔνθα ἦσαν προ-
5 φυλάσσουσαι νέες τρεῖς Ἑλληνίδες, Τροιζηνίη τε καὶ
Αἰγιναίη καὶ Αττική. προϊδόντες δὲ οὗτοι τὰς νέας τῶν
180 βαρβάρων ἐς φυγὴν ὥρμησαν. τὴν μὲν δὴ Τροιζηνίην,
τῆς ἦρχε Πρηξῖνος, αὐτίκα αἱρέουσι ἐπισπόμενοι οἱ
βάρβαροι, καὶ ἔπειτα τῶν ἐπιβατέων αὐτῆς τὸν καλ
λιστεύοντα ἀγαγόντες ἐπὶ τῆς πρώρης τῆς νεὸς ἔσφα
5 ξαν, διαδέξιον ποιεύμενοι τὸν εἷλον τῶν Ἑλλήνων πρῶ-
τον καὶ κάλλιστον. τῷ δὲ σφαγιασθέντι τοῦτῳ τοὔνομα
ἦν Λέων· τάχα δ᾽ ἄν τι καὶ τοῦ οὐνόματος ἐπαύροιτο.
181 ἡ δὲ Αἰγιναίη, τῆς ἐτριηράρχες Ασωνίδης, καί τινά σφι
θόρυβον παρέσχε, Πυθέω τοῦ Ἰσχενίου ἐπιβατεύοντος,
ἀνδρὸς ἀρίστου γενομένου ταύτην τὴν ἡμέρην· ὃς ἐπειδὴ
ἡ νηὓς ἡλίσκετο ἐς τοῦτο ἀντεῖχε μαχόμενος ἐς ὃ κατε-
5 κρεουργήθη ἅπας. ὡς δὲ πεσὼν οὐκ ἀπέθανε ἀλλ᾽ ἦν
ἔμπνοος, οἱ Πέρσαι, οἵ περ ἐπεβάτευον ἐπὶ τῶν νεῶν,
δι' ἀρετὴν τὴν ἐκείνου περιποιῆσαί μιν περὶ πλείστου
ἐποιήσαντο, σμύρνῃσί τε ἰώμενοι τὰ ἕλκεα καὶ σινδόνος
βυσσίνης τελαμῶσι κατειλίσσοντες· καί μιν, ὡς ὀπίσω
10 ἀπίκοντο ἐς τὸ ἑωυτῶν στρατόπεδον, ἐπεδείκνυσαν ἐκ-
παλεόμενοι πάσῃ τῇ στρατιῇ περιέποντες εὖ. τοὺς
δὲ ἄλλους τοὺς ἔλαβον ἐν τῇ νηὶ ταύτῃ, περιεῖπον ὡς
182 ανδράποδα. αἱ μὲν δὴ δύο τῶν νεῶν οὕτω ἐχειρώθησαν·
ἡ δὲ τρίτη, τῆς ἐτριηράρχες Φόρμος ἀνὴρ Αθηναῖος,
φεύγουσα ἐξακέλλει ἐς τὰς ἐκβολὰς τοῦ Πηνειοῦ, καὶ
τοῦ μὲν σκάφεος ἐκράτησαν οἱ βάρβαροι, τῶν δὲ ἀνδρῶν
BOOK VII.
161
οὔ· ὡς γὰρ δὴ τάχιστα ἐπώκειλαν τὴν νέα οἱ ᾿Αθηναΐ- 5
οι, ἀποθορόντες κατὰ Θεσσαλίην πορευόμενοι ἐκομίσε
θησαν ἐς Αθήνας.
The Entire Persian Fleet Arrives off Magnesia.
Ταῦτα οἱ Ἕλληνες οἱ ἐπ᾽ ᾿Αρτεμισίῳ στρατοπεδευό- 183
μενοι πυνθάνονται παρὰ πυρσῶν ἐκ Σκιάθου· πυθό
μενοι δὲ καὶ καταρρωδήσαντες ἀπὸ τοῦ ᾿Αρτεμισίου
μετορμίζοντο ἐς Χαλκίδα, φυλάξοντες μὲν τὸν Εὔριπον,
λείποντες δὲ ἡμεροσκόπους περὶ τὰ ὑψηλὰ τῆς Εὐβοίης. 5
τῶν δὲ δέκα νεῶν τῶν βαρβάρων τρεῖς ἐπήλασαν περὶ
τὸ ἅρμα τὸ μεταξὺ ἐὸν Σκιάθου τε καὶ Μαγνησίης,
καλεόμενον δὲ Μύρμηκα. ἐνθαῦτα οἱ βάρβαροι ἐπειδὴ
στήλην λίθου ἐπέθηκαν κομίσαντες ἐπὶ τὸ ἕρμα, ὁρμη
θέντες αὐτοὶ ἐκ Θέρμης, ὥς σφι τὸ ἐμποδὼν ἐγεγόνες 10
καθαρόν, ἐπέπλεον πάσῃσι τῇσι νηυσί, ἕνδεκα ἡμέρας
παρέντες μετὰ τὴν βασιλέος ἐξέλασιν ἐκ Θέρμης. τὸ
δὲ ἕρμα σφι κατηγήσατο ἐὸν ἐν πόρῳ μάλιστα Πάμμων
Σκύριος. πανημερὸν δὲ πλέοντες οἱ βάρβαροι ἐξανύουσι
τῆς Μαγνησίης χώρης ἐπὶ Σηπιάδα τε καὶ τὸν αἰγιαλὸν 15
τὸν μεταξὺ Κασθαναίης τε πόλιος ἐόντα καὶ Σηπιάδος
ἀκτῆς.
Estimate of Xerxes' Combined Forces at this Point.
Μέχρι μέν νυν τούτου τοῦ χώρου καὶ Θερμοπυλέων 184
ἀπαθής τε κακῶν ἦν ὁ στρατὸς καὶ πλῆθος ἦν τηνικαῦτα
ἔτι, ὡς ἐγὼ συμβαλλόμενος εὑρίσκω, τῶν μὲν ἐκ τῶν
νεῶν τῶν ἐκ τῆς ᾿Ασίης, ἐουσέων ἑπτὰ καὶ διηκοσιέων
καὶ χιλιέων, τὸν μὲν ἀρχαῖον ἑκάστων τῶν ἐθνέων ἐόντα 5
ὅμιλον τέσσερας καὶ εἴκοσι μυριάδας καὶ πρὸς χιλιάδα
τε καὶ τετρακοσίους, ὡς ἀνὰ διηκοσίους ἄνδρας λογι-
TT
162
HERODOTUS.
αν
ζομένοισι ἐν ἑκάστῃ νηί. ἐπεβάτευον δὲ ἐπὶ τουτέων
τῶν νεῶν, χωρὶς ἑκάστων τῶν ἐπιχωρίων ἐπιβατέων,
10 Περσέων τε καὶ Μήδων καὶ Σακέων τριήκοντα ἄνδρες.
οὗτος ἄλλος ὅμιλος γίνεται τρισμύριοι καὶ ἑξακισχίλιοι
καὶ πρὸς διηκόσιοί τε καὶ δέκα. προσθήσω δ᾽ ἔτι τούτῳ
καὶ τῷ προτέρῳ ἀριθμῷ τοὺς ἐκ τῶν πεντηκοντέρων,
ποιήσας, ὅ τι πλέον ἦν αὐτῶν ἢ ἔλασσον, ἀν᾿ ὀγδώκοντα
15 ἄνδρας ἐνεῖναι. συνελέχθη δὲ ταῦτα τὰ πλοῖα, ὡς καὶ
πρότερον εἰρέθη, τρισχίλια. ἤδη ὦν ἄνδρες ἂν εἶεν ἐν
αὐτοῖσι τέσσερες μυριάδες καὶ εἴκοσι. τοῦτο μὲν δὴ
τὸ ἐκ τῆς ᾿Ασίης ναυτικὸν ἦν, σύμπαν ἐὸν πεντήκοντα
μυριάδες καὶ μία, χιλιάδες δὲ ἔπεισι ἐπὶ ταύτῃσι ἑπτὰ
20 καὶ πρὸς ἑκατοντάδες ἓξ καὶ δεκάς. τοῦ δὲ πεζοῦ
ἑβδομήκοντα καὶ ἑκατὸν μυριάδες ἐγένοντο, τῶν δὲ ἱπ-
πέων ὀκτὼ μυριάδες. προσθήσω δ᾽ ἔτι τούτοισι τὰς
καμήλους τοὺς ἐλαύνοντας ᾿Αραβίους καὶ τοὺς τὰ ἅρ
ματα Λίβυας, πλῆθος ποιήσας δισμυρίους ἄνδρας. καὶ
25 δὴ τό τε ἐκ τῶν νεῶν καὶ τοῦ πεζοῦ πλῆθος συντιθέ
μενον γίνεται διηκόσιαί τε μυριάδες καὶ τριήκοντα καὶ
μία, καὶ πρὸς χιλιάδες ἑπτὰ καὶ ἑκατοντάδες ἓξ καὶ
δεκάς. τοῦτο μὲν τὸ ἐξ αὐτῆς τῆς ᾿Ασίης στράτευμα
ἐξαναχθὲν εἴρηται, ἄνευ τε τῆς θεραπηίης τῆς ἑπομένης
30 καὶ τῶν σιταγωγῶν πλοίων καὶ ὅσοι ἐνέπλεον τούτοισι.
185 τὸ δὲ δὴ ἐκ τῆς Εὐρώπης ἀγόμενον στράτευμα ἔτι
προσλογιστέα τούτῳ παντὶ τῷ ἐξηριθμημένῳ· δόκησιν
δὲ δεῖ λέγειν. νέας μέν νυν οἱ ἀπὸ Θρηίκης Ἕλληνες
καὶ ἐκ τῶν νήσων τῶν ἐπικειμενέων τῇ Θρηίκῃ παρεί-
5 χοντο εἴκοσι καὶ ἑκατόν· ἐκ μέν νυν τουτέων τῶν νεῶν
ἄνδρες τετρακισχίλιοι καὶ δισμύριοι γίνονται. πεζοῦ
δὲ τὸν Θρήικες παρείχοντο καὶ Παίονες καὶ Εορδοὶ καὶ
Βοττιαῖοι καὶ τὸ Χαλκιδικὸν γένος καὶ Βρύγοι καὶ
T
-
BOOK VII.
163
Πίερες και Μακεδόνες καὶ Περραιβοὶ καὶ Ἐνιῆνες καὶ
Δόλοπες καὶ Μάγνητες καὶ ᾿Αχαιοὶ καὶ ὅσοι τῆς Θρηίκης 10
τὴν παραλίην νέμονται, τούτων τῶν ἐθνέων τριήκοντα
μυριάδας δοκέω γενέσθαι. αὗται ὧν αἱ μυριάδες ἐκεί
νῃσι προστεθεῖσαι τῇσι ἐκ τῆς ᾿Ασίης, γίνονται αἱ
πᾶσαι ἀνδρῶν αἱ μάχιμοι μυριάδες διηκόσιαι καὶ ἑξή
κοντα καὶ τέσσερες, ἔπεισι δὲ ταύτῃσι ἑκατοντάδες εκ-15
καίδεκα καὶ δεκάς. τοῦ μαχίμου δὲ τούτου ἐόντος 186
ἀριθμὸν τοσούτου, τὴν θεραπηίην τὴν ἑπομένην τούτοισι
καὶ τοὺς ἐν τοῖσι σιταγωγοῖσι ἀκάτοισι ἐόντας καὶ
μάλα ἐν τοῖσι ἄλλοισι πλοίοισι τοῖσι ἅμα πλέουσι τῇ
στρατιῇ, τούτους τῶν μαχίμων ἀνδρῶν οὐ δοκέω εἶναι 5
ἐλάσσονας ἀλλὰ πλεύνας. και δή σφεας ποιέω ἴσους
ἐκείνοισι εἶναι καὶ οὔτε πλεῦνας οὔτε ἐλάσσονας οὐδέν·
ἐξισούμενοι δὲ οὗτοι τῷ μαχίμῳ ἐκπληροῦσι τὰς ἴσας
μυριάδας ἐκείνοισι. οὕτω πεντακοσίας τε μυριάδας
καὶ εἴκοσι καὶ ὀκτὼ καὶ χιλιάδας τρεῖς καὶ ἑκατοντάδας 10
δύο καὶ δεκάδας δύο ἀνδρῶν ἤγαγε Ξέρξης ὁ Δαρείου
μέχρι Σηπιάδος καὶ Θερμοπυλέων. οὗτος μὲν δὴ τοῦ 187
συνάπαντος τοῦ Ξέρξεω στρατεύματος ἀριθμός, γυναι-
κῶν δὲ σιτοποιῶν καὶ παλλακέων καὶ εὐνούχων οὐδεὶς
ἂν εἴποι ἀτρεκέα ἀριθμόν· οὐδ᾽ αὖ ὑποζυγίων τε καὶ
τῶν ἄλλων κτηνέων τῶν ἀχθοφόρων καὶ κυνῶν Ἰνδικῶν 5
τῶν ἑπομένων, οὐδ᾽ ἂν τούτων ὑπὸ πλήθεος οὐδεὶς ἂν
εἴποι ἀριθμόν. ὥστε οὐδέν μοι θῶυμα παρίσταται
προδοῦναι τὰ ῥέεθρα τῶν ποταμῶν ἔστι τῶν, ἀλλὰ
μᾶλλον ὅκως τὰ σιτία ἀντέχρησε θωυμά μοι μυριάσι
τοσαύτῃσι, εὑρίσκω γὰρ συμβαλλόμενος, εἰ χοίνικα 10
πυρῶν ἕκαστος τῆς ἡμέρης ἐλάμβανε καὶ μηδὲν πλέον,
ἕνδεκα μυριάδας μεδίμνων τελεομένας ἐπ᾽ ἡμέρῃ ἑκάστῃ
καὶ πρὸς τριηκοσίους τε ἄλλους μεδίμνους καὶ τεσσερά
Ο
164
HERODOTUS.
-
κοντα. . γυναιξὶ δὲ καὶ εὐνούχοισι καὶ ὑποζυγίοισι καὶ
15 κυσί οὐ λογίζομαι. ἀνδρῶν δὲ ἐουσέων τοσουτέων
μυριάδων, κάλλεός τε εἵνεκα καὶ μεγάθεος οὐδεὶς αὐτῶν
ἀξιονικότερος ἦν αὐτοῦ Ξέρξεω ἔχειν τοῦτο τὸ κράτος.
188
An Irresistible Storm; Boreas and the Athenians.
Ὁ δὲ δὴ ναυτικὸς στρατὸς ἐπείτε ὁρμηθεὶς ἔπλεε καὶ
κατέσχε τῆς Μαγνησίης χώρης ἐς τὸν αἰγιαλὸν τὸν
μεταξὺ Κασθαναίης τε πόλιος ἐόντα και Σηπιάδος
ἀκτῆς, αἱ μὲν δὴ πρῶται τῶν νεῶν ὅρμεον πρὸς γῇ,
5 ἄλλαι δ᾽ ἐπ᾽ ἐκείνῃσι ἐπ᾽ ἀγκυρέων· ἅτε γὰρ τοῦ αἰ-
γιαλοῦ ἐόντος οὐ μεγάλου, πρόκροσσαι ὁρμέοντο ἐς πόν
τον καὶ ἐπὶ ὀκτὼ νέας. ταύτην μὲν τὴν εὐφρόνην οὕτω,
ἅμα δὲ ὄρθρῳ ἐξ αἰθρίης τε καὶ νηνεμίης τῆς θαλάσσης
ζεσάσης ἐπέπεσέ σφι χειμών τε μέγας καὶ πολλὸς ἄνε-
10 μος ἀπηλιώτης, τὸν δὴ Ἑλλησποντίην καλέουσι οἱ περὶ
ταῦτα τὰ χωρία οἰκημένοι. ὅσοι μέν νυν αὐτῶν αὐξό
μενον ἔμαθον τὸν ἄνεμον, καὶ τοῖσι οὕτω εἶχε ὅρμου, οἱ
δ᾽ ἔφθησαν τὸν χειμῶνα ἀνασπάσαντες τὰς νέας, καὶ
αὐτοί τε περιῆσαν καὶ αἱ νέες αὐτῶν· ὅσας δὲ τῶν
15 νεῶν μεταρσίας ἔλαβε, τὰς μὲν ἐξέφερε πρὸς Ἴπνους
καλεομένους τοὺς ἐν Πηλίῳ, τὰς δὲ ἐς τὸν αἰγιαλόν·
αἱ δὲ περὶ αὐτὴν τὴν Σηπιάδα περιέπιπτον, αἱ δὲ ἐς
Μελίβοιαν πόλιν, αἱ δὲ ἐς Κασθαναίην ἐξεβράσσοντο.
189 ἦν τε τοῦ χειμῶνος χρῆμα ἀφόρητον. λέγεται δὲ λόγος
ὡς Αθηναῖοι τὸν Βορέην ἐκ θεοπροπίου ἐπεκαλέσαντο,
ἐλθόντος σφι ἄλλου χρηστηρίου τὸν γαμβρὸν ἐπίκουρον
καλέσασθαι. Βορέης δὲ κατὰ τὸν Ἑλλήνων λόγον ἔχει
5 γυναῖκα Αττικήν, Ωρειθυίην τὴν Ερεχθέος. κατὰ δὴ
τὸ κῆδος τοῦτο οἱ Αθηναῖοι, ὡς φάτις ὥρμηται, συμβαλ-
λόμενοι σφίσι τὸν Βορέην γαμβρὸν εἶναι, ναυλοχέοντες
οι
ον
BOOK VII.
105
τῆς Εὐβοίης ἐν Χαλκίδι ὡς ἔμαθον αὐξόμενον τὸν χει
μῶνα, ἢ καὶ πρὸ τούτου, ἐθύοντό τε καὶ ἐπεκαλέοντο
τόν τε Βορέην καὶ τὴν Ωρειθυίην τιμωρῆσαι σφίσι καὶ 10
διαφθείραι τῶν βαρβάρων τὰς νέας, ὡς καὶ πρότερον
περὶ Αθων. εἰ μέν νυν διὰ ταῦτα τοῖσι βαρβάροισι
ὁρμέουσι Βορέης ἐπέπεσε, οὐκ ἔχω εἰπεῖν· οἱ δ᾽ ὧν
Αθηναῖοι σφίσι λέγουσι βοηθήσαντα τὸν Βορέην πρό-
τερον καὶ τότε ἐκεῖνα κατεργάσασθαι, καὶ ἱρὸν ἀπελ-15
θόντες Βορέω ἱδρύσαντο παρὰ ποταμὸν Ἰλισσόν.
Persian Loss; Aminocles' Luck; Advance to Aphetae.
Ἐν τούτῳ τῷ πόνῳ νέας οἳ ἐλαχίστας λέγουσι 190
διαφθαρήναι τετρακοσιέων οὐκ ἐλάσσονας, ἄνδρας τε
ἀναριθμήτους χρημάτων τε πλῆθος ἄφθονον· ὥστε
Αμεινοκλέι τῷ Κρητίνεω ἀνδρὶ Μάγνητι γηοχέοντι
περὶ Σηπιάδα μεγάλως ἡ ναυηγίη αὕτη ἐγένετο χρηστή, 5
ὃς πολλὰ μὲν χρύσεα ποτήρια ὑστέρῳ χρόνῳ ἐκβρασσό-
μενα ανείλετο πολλὰ δὲ ἀργύρεα, θησαυρούς τε τῶν
Περσέων εὗρε, ἄλλα τε [χρύσεα] ἄφατα χρήματα περιε-
βάλετο, ἀλλ' ὁ μὲν τἆλλα οὐκ εὐτυχέων εὑρήμασι μέγα
πλούσιος ἐγένετο· ἦν γάρ τις καὶ τοῦτον ἄχαρις συμ-10
φορὴ λυποῦσα παιδοφόνος. σιταγωγῶν δὲ ὁλκάδων και 191
τῶν ἄλλων πλοίων διαφθειρομένων οὐκ ἐπῆν ἀριθμός
ὥστε δείσαντες οἱ στρατηγοὶ τοῦ ναυτικοῦ στρατοῦ μή
σφι κεκακωμένοισι ἐπιθέωνται οἱ Θεσσαλοί, ἕρκος ὑψη
λὸν ἐκ τῶν ναυηγίων περιεβάλοντο. ἡμέρας γὰρ δὴ 5
ἐχείμαζε τρεῖς· τέλος δὲ ἔντομά τε ποιεῦντες καὶ και
ταείδοντες γόησι οἱ Μάγοι τῷ ἀνέμῳ, πρός τε τούτοισι
καὶ τῇ Θέτι καὶ τῇσι Νηρηίσι θύοντες, ἔπαυσαν τετάρτῃ
ἡμέρῃ, ἢ ἄλλως κως αὐτὸς ἐθέλων ἐκόπασε. τῇ δὲ Θέτι
ἔθυον πυθόμενοι παρὰ τῶν Ἰώνων τὸν λόγον, ὡς ἐκ τοῦ 10
166
HERODOTUS.
χώρου τούτου ἁρπασθείη ὑπὸ Πηλέος, εἴη τε ἅπασα ἡ
ἀκτὴ ἡ Σηπιὰς ἐκείνης τε καὶ τῶν ἀλλέων Νηρηίδων.
192 ὁ μὲν δὴ τετάρτῃ ἡμέρῃ ἐπέπαυτο, τοῖσι δὲ Ἕλλησι οἱ
ἡμεροσκόποι ἀπὸ τῶν ἄκρων τῶν Εὐβοϊκῶν καταδρα
μόντες δευτέρῃ ἡμέρῃ, ἀπ᾿ ἧς ὁ χειμὼν ὁ πρῶτος ἐγένετο,
ἐσήμαινον πάντα τὰ γενόμενα περὶ τὴν ναυηγίην. οἱ δὲ
5 ὡς ἐπύθοντο, Ποσειδέωνι σωτῆρι εὐξάμενοι καὶ σπον-
δὰς προχέαντες τὴν ταχίστην ὀπίσω ἠπείγοντο ἐπὶ τὸ
᾿Αρτεμίσιον, ἐλπίσαντες ὀλίγας τινάς σφι αντιξόους
193 ἔσεσθαι νέας. οἱ μὲν δὴ τὸ δεύτερον ἐλθόντες περὶ τὸ
T
Αρτεμίσιον ἐναυλόχεον, Ποσειδέωνος σωτῆρος ἐπωνυ
μίην ἀπὸ τούτου ἔτι καὶ ἐς τόδε νομίζοντες· οἱ δὲ
βάρβαροι, ὡς ἐπαύσατό τε ὁ ἄνεμος καὶ τὸ κῦμα ἔστρω-
5 το, κατασπάσαντες τὰς νέας ἔπλεον παρὰ τὴν ἤπειρον,
κάμψαντες δὲ τὴν ἄκρην τῆς Μαγνησίης ἐθέαν ἔπλεον
· ἐς τὸν κόλπον τὸν ἐπὶ Παγασέων φέροντα. ἔστι δὲ
χῶρος ἐν τῷ κόλπῳ τούτῳ τῆς Μαγνησίης, ἔνθα λέγεται
τὸν Ἡρακλέα καταλειφθῆναι ὑπὸ Ἰήσονός τε καὶ τῶν
10 συνεταίρων ἐκ τῆς ᾿Αργοῦς ἐπ᾽ ὕδωρ πεμφθέντα, εὖτ᾽
ἐπὶ τὸ κῶας ἔπλεον ἐς Αἶαν τὴν Κολχίδα· ἐνθεῦτεν
γὰρ ἔμελλον ὑδρευσάμενοι ἐς τὸ πέλαγος ἀφήσειν. ἐπὶ
τούτου δὲ τῷ χώρῳ οὔνομα γέγονε Αφέται. ἐν τούτῳ
ὦν ὅρμον οἱ Ξέρξεω ἐποιεῦντο.
ΤΟ
Fifteen Triremes Captured by the Greeks.
194 Πεντεκαίδεκα δὲ τῶν νεῶν τουτέων ἔτυχόν τε ὕστα-
ται πολλὸν ἐξαναχθεῖσαι, καί κως κατεῖδον τὰς ἐπ᾿
Αρτεμισίῳ τῶν Ἑλλήνων νέας. ἔδοξάν τε δὴ τὰς σφε-
τέρας εἶναι οἱ βάρβαροι καὶ πλέοντες ἐσέπεσον ἐς τοὺς
5 πολεμίους· τῶν ἐστρατήγεε ὁ ἀπὸ Κύμης τῆς Αἰολίδος
ὕπαρχος Σανδώκης ὁ Θαμασίου, τὸν δὴ πρότερον τούτων
BOOK VII.
167
βασιλεὺς Δαρείος ἐπ᾽ αἰτίῃ τοιῇδε λαβὼν ἀνεσταύρωσε,
ἐόντα τῶν βασιληίων δικαστέων· ὁ Σανδώκης ἐπὶ χρή-
μασι ἄδικον δίκην ἐδίκασε. ἀνακρεμασθέντος ὦν αὐτοῦ,
λογιζόμενος ὁ Δαρεῖος εὑρέ οἱ πλέω ἀγαθὰ τῶν ἁμαρτη-10
μάτων πεποιημένα ἐς οἶκον τὸν βασιλήιον· εὑρὼν δὲ
τοῦτο ὁ Δαρεῖος, καὶ γνοὺς ὡς ταχύτερα αὐτὸς ἢ σοφώ-
τερα ἐργασμένος εἴη, ἔλυσε. βασιλέα μὲν δὴ Δαρείον
οὕτω διαφυγών μὴ ἀπολέσθαι περιῆν, τότε δὲ ἐς τοὺς
Έλληνας καταπλώσας ἔμελλε οὐ τὸ δεύτερον διαφυγών 15
ἔσεσθαι· ὡς γάρ σφεας εἶδον προσπλέοντας οἱ Ελ-
ληνες, μαθόντες αὐτῶν τὴν γινομένην ἁμαρτάδα, ἐπα-
ναχθέντες εὐπετέως σφέας εἷλον. ἐν τουτέων με 195
Αρίδωλις πλέων ἥλω, τύραννος Αλαβάνδων τῶν ἐν
Καρίῃ, ἐν ἑτέρῃ δὲ ὁ Πάφιος στρατηγὸς Πενθύλος ὁ
Δημονίου, ὃς ἦγε μὲν δυώδεκα νέας ἐκ Πάφου, ἀποβα-
λὼν δέ σφεων τὰς ἕνδεκα τῷ χειμῶνι τῷ γενομένῳ κατὰ 5
Σηπιάδα, μιῇ τῇ περιγενομένῃ καταπλέων ἐπ᾿ ᾿Αρτε-
μίσιον ἥλω. τούτους οἱ Ἕλληνες ἐξιστορήσαντες τὰ
ἐβούλοντο πυθέσθαι ἀπὸ τῆς Ξέρξεω στρατιῆς, ἀπο-
πέμπουσι δεδεμένους ἐς τὸν Κορινθίων ἰσθμόν.
Xerxes in Thessaly; Athamas and the Legend of Halus.
Ο
Ὁ μὲν δὴ ναυτικὸς ὁ τῶν βαρβάρων στρατός, πάρεξ 196
τῶν πεντεκαίδεκα νεῶν τῶν εἶπον Σανδώκεα στρατη-
γέειν, ἀπίκοντο ἐς Αφέτας. Ξέρξης δὲ καὶ ὁ πεζός
πορευθεὶς διὰ Θεσσαλίης καὶ ᾿Αχαιίης ἐσβεβληκὼς ἦν
καὶ δὴ τριταῖος ἐς Μηλιέας, ἐν Θεσσαλίῃ μὲν ἅμιλλαν 5
ποιησάμενος ἵππων τῶν ἑωυτοῦ, ἀποπειρώμενος καὶ
τῆς Θεσσαλίης ἵππου, πυθόμενος ὡς ἀρίστη εἴη τῶν ἐν
Ελλησι· ἔνθα δὴ αἱ Ελληνίδες ἵπποι ἐλείποντο πολ-
λόν. τῶν μέν νυν ἐν Θεσσαλίῃ ποταμῶν Ὀνόχωνος
168
HERODOTUS.
10 μοῦνος οὐκ ἀπέχρησε τῇ στρατιῇ τὸ ῥέεθρον πινόμενος
τῶν δὲ ἐν ᾿Αχαιίῃ ποταμῶν ῥεόντων οὐδὲ ὅστις μέγι
στος αὐτῶν ἐστι Ηπιδανός, οὐδὲ οὗτος ἀντέσχε εἰ μὴ
φλαύρως.
19% Ἐς Αλον δὲ τῆς ᾿Αχαιίης ἀπικομένῳ Ξέρξῃ οἱ κατη
γεμόνες τῆς ὁδοῦ βουλόμενοι τὸ πᾶν ἐξηγέεσθαι ἔλεγόν
οἱ ἐπιχώριον λόγον, τὰ περὶ τὸ ἱρὸν τοῦ Λαφυστίου
Διός, ὡς ᾿Αθάμας ὁ Αἰόλου ἐμηχανήσατο Φρίξω μόρον
5 σὺν Ἰνοῖ βουλεύσας, μετέπειτα δὲ ὡς ἐκ θεοπροπίου
᾿Αχαιοί προτιθεῖσι τοῖσι ἐκείνου ἀπογόνοισι ἀέθλους
τοιούσδε· ὃς ἂν ᾖ τοῦ γένεος τούτου πρεσβύτατος,
τούτῳ ἐπιτάξατες ἔργεσθαι τοῦ πρυτανηίου αὐτοὶ
φυλακὰς ἔχουσι· λήιτον δὲ καλέουσι τὸ πρυτανήιον οἱ
10 Αχαιοί· ἦν δὲ ἐσέλθῃ, οὐκ ἔστι ὅκως ἔξεισι πρὶν ἢ
θύσεσθαι μέλλῃ· ὥς τ᾽ ἔτι πρὸς τούτοισι πολλοὶ ἤδη
τούτων τῶν μελλόντων θύσεσθαι δείσαντες οἴχοντο
ἀποδράντες ἐς ἄλλην χώρην, χρόνου δὲ προϊόντος ὀπί-
σω κατελθόντες ἢν ἁλίσκωνται ἐστέλλοντο ἐς τὸ πρυ-
15 τανήιον· ὡς θύεταί τε ἐξηγέοντο στέμμασι πᾶς πυκα-
σθεὶς καὶ ὡς σὺν πομπῇ ἐξαχθείς. ταῦτα δὲ πάσχουσι
οἱ Κυτισσώρου τοῦ Φρίξου παιδὸς ἀπόγονοι, διότι και
θαρμὸν τῆς χώρης ποιευμένων ᾿Αχαιῶν ἐκ θεοπροπίου
᾿Αθάμαντα τὸν Αἰόλου καὶ μελλόντων μιν θύειν ἀπι-
20 κόμενος οὗτος ὁ Κυτίσσωρος ἐξ Αἴης τῆς Κολχίδος
ἐρρύσατο, ποιήσας δὲ τοῦτο τοῖσι ἐπιγενομένοισι ἐξ
ἑωυτοῦ μῆνιν τοῦ θεοῦ ἐνέβαλε. Ξέρξης δὲ ταῦτα
ἀκούσας ὡς κατὰ τὸ ἄλσος ἐγίνετο, αὐτός τε ἔργετο
αὐτοῦ καὶ τῇ στρατιῇ πάσῃ παρήγγειλε, τῶν τε 'Αθά
25 μαντος ἀπογόνων τὴν οἰκίην ὁμοίως καὶ τὸ τέμενος
ἐσέβετο.
Ο
T
THERMOPYLAI
5 English Miles
R
1
cheio
Autikyra
Dýras
་་མ་
Melas
the
time of Her
Cous
THER
Trachis
Camp of Xerxe
As op
HERAKLETA
Anthel
Salt
Spring
MAL I A
G
Kall
New York: Harper & Brothers,
5130ft
Nikaia
lpenoi
Pt.•འ.
دی

BOOK VII.
169
The Persians Encamp before the Pass of Thermopylae.
Ταῦτα μὲν τὰ ἐν Θεσσαλίῃ καὶ τὰ ἐν ᾿Αχαιίῃ· ἀπὸ 198
δὲ τούτων τῶν χώρων ἤιε ἐς τὴν Μηλίδα παρὰ κόλπον
θαλάσσης, ἐν τῷ ἄμπωτίς τε καὶ ῥηχίη ἀνὰ πᾶσαν
ἡμέρην γίνεται. περὶ δὲ τὸν κόλπον τοῦτον ἐστὶ χῶρος
πεδινός, τῇ μὲν εὐρὺς τῇ δὲ καὶ κάρτα στεινός· περὶ δὲ 5
τὸν χῶρον ὄρεα ὑψηλὰ καὶ ἄβατα περικληίει πᾶσαν
τὴν Μηλίδα γῆν, Τρηχίνιαι πέτραι καλεόμεναι. πρώτη
μέν νυν πόλις ἐστὶ ἐν τῷ κόλπῳ ἰόντι ἀπὸ ᾿Αχαιίης
Αντικύρη, παρ' ἣν Σπερχειὸς ποταμὸς ῥέων ἐξ Ενιή-
νων ἐς θάλασσαν ἐκδιδοῖ. ἀπὸ δὲ τούτου διὰ εἴκοσι 10
κου σταδίων ἄλλος ποταμὸς τῷ οὔνομα κέεται Δύρας,
τὸν βοηθέοντα τῷ Ηρακλέι καιομένῳ λόγος ἐστὶ ἀνα-
φανῆναι. ἀπὸ δὲ τούτου δι᾽ ἄλλων εἴκοσι σταδίων
ἄλλος ποταμός ἐστι ὃς καλέεται Μέλας. Τρηχὶς δὲ 199
πόλις ἀπὸ τοῦ Μέλανος τούτου ποταμοῦ πέντε στάδια
ἀπέχει. ταύτῃ δὲ καὶ εὐρύτατόν ἐστι πάσης τῆς χώρης
ταύτης ἐκ τῶν ὀρέων ἐς θάλασσαν, κατ᾽ ἃ Τρηχίς
πεπόλισται· δισχίλιά τε γὰρ καὶ δισμύρια πλέθρα 5
τοῦ πεδίου ἐστί. τοῦ δὲ ὄρεος τὸ περικληίει τὴν γῆν
τὴν Τρηχινίην ἐστὶ διασφὰξ πρὸς μεσαμβρίην Τρη-
χῖνος, διὰ δὲ τῆς διασφάγος ᾿Ασωπός ποταμὸς ῥέει
παρὰ τὴν ὑπωρέην τοῦ ὄρεος. ἔστι δὲ ἄλλος Φοίνιξ 200
ποταμὸς οὐ μέγας πρὸς μεσαμβρίην τοῦ ᾿Ασωπού, ὃς
ἐκ τῶν ὀρέων τούτων ῥέων ἐς τὸν ᾿Ασωπὸν ἐκδιδοῖ.
κατὰ δὲ τὸν Φοίνικα ποταμὸν στεινότατόν ἐστι· ἁμα
ξιτὸς γὰρ μούνη μία δέδμηται. ἀπὸ δὲ τοῦ Φοίνικος
ποταμοῦ πεντεκαίδεκα στάδιά ἐστι ἐς Θερμοπύλας.
ἐν δὲ τῷ μεταξὺ Φοίνικος ποταμοῦ καὶ Θερμοπυλέων
κώμη τε ἐστὶ τῇ οὔνομα Ανθήλη κέεται, παρ' ἣν δὴ
8
170
HERODOTUS.
0
παραρρέων ὁ ᾿Ασωπὸς ἐς θάλασσαν ἐκδιδοῖ, καὶ χῶρος
10 περὶ αὐτὴν εὐρὺς ἐν τῷ Δήμητρός τε ἱρὸν ᾿Αμφικτυονί
δος ἵδρυται καὶ ἕδραι εἰσὶ ᾿Αμφικτύοσι καὶ αὐτοῦ τοῦ
᾿Αμφικτύονος ἱρόν.
201
Ο
Βασιλεὺς μὲν δὴ Ξέρξης ἐστρατοπεδεύετο τῆς Μη
λίδος ἐν τῇ Τρηχινίῃ, οἱ δὲ δὴ Ἕλληνες ἐν τῇ διόδῳ·
καλέεται δὲ ὁ χῶρος οὗτος ὑπὸ μὲν τῶν πλεόνων Ελ-
λήνων Θερμοπύλαι, ὑπὸ δὲ τῶν ἐπιχωρίων καὶ περιοί-
5 κων Πύλαι. ἐστρατοπεδεύοντο μέν νυν ἑκάτεροι ἐν
τούτοισι τοῖσι χωρίοισι, ἐπεκράτεε δὲ ὁ μὲν τῶν πρὸς
βορέην ἄνεμον ἐχόντων πάντων μέχρι Τρηχίνος, οἱ δὲ
τῶν πρὸς νότον καὶ μεσαμβρίην φερόντων τὸ ἐπὶ ταύτης
τῆς ἠπείρου.
0
Muster Roll of Greeks at the Pass.
202 Ήσαν δὲ οἵδε Ελλήνων οἱ ὑπομένοντες τὸν Πέρσην
ἐν τούτῳ τῷ χώρῳ, Σπαρτιητέων τε τριηκόσιοι ὁπλῖται
καὶ Τεγεητέων καὶ Μαντινέων χίλιοι, ἡμίσεες ἑκατέρων,
ἐξ Ορχομενοῦ τε τῆς ᾿Αρκαδίης εἴκοσι καὶ ἑκατόν, καὶ
5 ἐκ τῆς λοιπῆς ᾿Αρκαδίης χίλιοι· τοσοῦτοι μὲν ᾿Αρκά-
δων, ἀπὸ δὲ Κορίνθου τετρακόσιοι καὶ ἀπὸ Φλιοῦντος
διηκόσιοι καὶ Μυκηναίων ὀγδώκοντα. οὗτοι μὲν ἀπὸ
Πελοποννήσου παρῆσαν, ἀπὸ δὲ Βοιωτῶν Θεσπιέων τε
203 ἑπτακόσιοι καὶ Θηβαίων τετρακόσιοι. πρὸς τούτοισι
ἐπίκλητοι ἐγένοντο Λοκροί τε οἱ Οπούντιοι πανστρα-
τιῇ καὶ Φωκέων χίλιοι. αὐτοὶ γάρ σφεας οἱ Ἕλληνες
ἐπεκαλέσαντο, λέγοντες δι' ἀγγέλων ὡς αὐτοὶ μὲν ἥκοιεν
5 πρόδρομοι τῶν ἄλλων, οἱ δὲ λοιποὶ τῶν συμμάχων
προσδόκιμοι πᾶσαν εἶεν ἡμέρην, ἡ θάλασσά τέ σφι εἴη
ἐν φυλακῇ ὑπ' Αθηναίων τε φρουρεομένη καὶ Αίγινη-
τέων καὶ τῶν ἐς τὸν ναυτικὸν στρατὸν ταχθέντων, καί
BOOK VII.
171
σφι εἴη δεινὸν οὐδέν· οὐ γὰρ θεὸν εἶναι τὸν ἐπιόντα
ἐπὶ τὴν Ἑλλάδα ἀλλ᾽ ἄνθρωπον, εἶναι δὲ θνητὸν οὐδένα 10
οὐδὲ ἔσεσθαι τῷ κακὸν ἐξ ἀρχῆς γινομένῳ οὐ συν-
εμίχθη, τοῖσι δὲ μεγίστοισι αὐτῶν μέγιστα· ὀφείλειν
ὧν καὶ τὸν ἐπελαύνοντα, ὡς ἐόντα θνητόν, ἀπὸ τῆς
δόξης πεσεῖν ἄν. οἱ δὲ ταῦτα πυνθανόμενοι ἐβοήθεον
ἐς τὴν Τρηχίνα.
Leonidas and his Spartans.
0
15
Τούτοισι ἦσαν μέν νυν καὶ ἄλλοι στρατηγοὶ κατὰ 204
πόλιας ἑκάστων, ὁ δὲ θωυμαζόμενος μάλιστα καὶ παν-
τὸς τοῦ στρατεύματος ἡγεόμενος Λακεδαιμόνιος ἦν
Λεωνίδης ὁ ᾿Αναξανδρίδεω τοῦ Λέοντος τοῦ Εὐρυκρα
τίδεω τοῦ ᾿Αναξάνδρου τοῦ Εὐρυκράτεος τοῦ Πολυδώ- 5
ρου τοῦ ᾿Αλκαμένεος τοῦ Τηλέκλου τοῦ ᾿Αρχέλεω τοῦ
Ἡγησίλεω τοῦ Δορύσσου τοῦ Λεωβώτεω τοῦ Ἐχεσ-
τράτου τοῦ Ἤγιος τοῦ Εὐρυσθένεος τοῦ ᾿Αριστοδήμου
τοῦ ᾿Αριστομάχου τοῦ Κλεοδαίου τοῦ Ὕλλου τοῦ
Ἡρακλέος, κτησάμενος τὴν βασιληίην ἐν Σπάρτῃ ἐξ 10
ἀπροσδοκήτου. διξῶν γάρ οἱ ἐόντων πρεσβυτέρων 205
ἀδελφεῶν, Κλεομένεός τε καὶ Δωριέος, ἀπελήλατο τῆς
φροντίδος περὶ τῆς βασιληίης. ἀποθανόντος δὲ Κλεο-
μένεις ἄπαιδος ἔρσενος γόνου, Δωριέος τε οὐκέτι όντος
ἀλλὰ τελευτήσαντος καὶ τούτου ἐν Σικελίῃ, οὕτω δὴ 5
ἐς Λεωνίδην ἀνέβαινε ἡ βασιληίη, καὶ διότι πρότερος
ἐγεγόνεε Κλεομβρότου (οὗτος γὰρ ἦν νεώτατος ᾿Αναξαν
δρίδεω παῖς) καὶ δὴ καὶ εἶχε Κλεομένεος θυγατέρα. ὃς
τότε ἤιε ἐς Θερμοπύλας ἐπιλεξάμενος ἄνδρας τε τοὺς
κατεστεώτας τριηκοσίους καὶ τοῖσι ἐτύγχανον παῖδες 10
ἐόντες· παραλαβὼν δὲ ἀπίκετο καὶ Θηβαίων τοὺς ἐς
τὸν ἀριθμὸν λογισάμενος εἶπον, τῶν ἐστρατήγεε Λεον
172
HERODOTUS.
τιάδης ὁ Εὐρυμάχου. τοῦδε δὲ εἵνεκα τούτους σπουδὴν
ἐποιήσατο Λεωνίδης μούνους Ελλήνων παραλαβεῖν,
15 ὅτι σφέων μεγάλως κατηγόρητο μηδίζειν· παρεκάλε
ὧν ἐς τὸν πόλεμον θέλων εἰδέναι εἴτε συμπέμψουσι εἴτε
καὶ ἀπερέουσι ἐκ τοῦ ἐμφανέος τὴν Ἑλλήνων συμμα-
χίην. οἱ δὲ ἀλλοφρονέοντες ἔπεμπον.
206
Why a Larger Force was not Sent with Leonidas.
Τούτους μὲν τοὺς ἀμφὶ Λεωνίδην πρώτους ἀπέπεμ-
ψαν Σπαρτιῆται, ἵνα τούτους ὁρέοντες οἱ ἄλλοι σύμμα
χοι στρατεύωνται μηδὲ καὶ οὗτοι μηδίσωσι, ἢν αὐτοὺς
πυνθάνωνται ὑπερβαλλομένους· μετὰ δέ, Κάρνεια γάρ
5 σφι ἦν ἐμποδών, ἔμελλον ὁρτάσαντες καὶ φυλακὰς
λιπόντες ἐν τῇ Σπάρτῃ κατὰ τάχος βοηθέειν πανδημεί.
ὡς δὲ καὶ οἱ λοιποὶ τῶν συμμάχων ἐνένωντο καὶ αὐτοὶ
ἕτερα τοιαῦτα ποιήσειν· ἦν γὰρ κατὰ τὠυτὸ Ὀλυμπιὰς
τούτοισι τοῖσι πρήγμασι συμπεσοῦσα· οὔκων δοκέοντες
10 κατὰ τάχος οὕτω διακριθήσεσθαι τὸν ἐν Θερμοπύλῃσι
20% πόλεμον ἔπεμπον τοὺς προδρόμους. οὗτοι μὲν δὴ οὕτω
διενένωντο ποιήσειν. οἱ δὲ ἐν Θερμοπύλῃσι Ελληνες,
ἐπειδὴ πέλας ἐγένετο τῆς ἐσβολῆς ὁ Πέρσης, καταρρω-
δέοντες ἐβουλεύοντο περὶ ἀπαλλαγῆς. τοῖσι μέν νυν
5 ἄλλοισι Πελοποννησίοισι ἐδόκεε ἐλθοῦσι ἐς Πελοπόν-
νησον τὸν Ἰσθμὸν ἔχειν ἐν φυλακῇ· Λεωνίδης δέ,
Φωκέων καὶ Λοκρῶν περισπερχεόντων τῇ γνώμῃ ταύτῃ,
αὐτοῦ τε μένειν ἐψηφίζετο πέμπειν τε ἀγγέλους ἐς τὰς
πόλιας κελεύοντάς σφι ἐπιβοηθέειν, ὡς ἐόντων αὐτῶν
10 ὀλίγων στρατὸν τὸν Μήδων ἀλέξασθαι.
208
What the Scout Saw; Xerxes Questions Demaratus.
Ταῦτα βουλευομένων σφέων, ἔπεμπε Ξέρξης κατά.
σκοπον ἱππέα ιδέσθαι οκόσοι εἰσὶ καὶ ὅ τι ποιέοιεν.
BOOK VII.
173
ἀκηκόεε δὲ ἔτι ἐὼν ἐν Θεσσαλίῃ ὡς ἁλισμένη εἴη ταύτῃ
στρατιὴ ὀλίγη, καὶ τοὺς ἡγεμόνας ὡς εἴησαν Λακε-
δαιμόνιοί τε καὶ Λεωνίδης ἐὼν γένος Ηρακλείδης. ὡς 5
δὲ προσήλασε ὁ ἱππεὺς πρὸς τὸ στρατόπεδον, ἐθηεῖτό
τε καὶ κατώρα πᾶν μὲν οὐ τὸ στρατόπεδον· τοὺς γὰρ
ἔσω τεταγμένους τοῦ τείχεος, τὸ ἀνορθώσαντες εἶχον ἐν
φυλακῇ, οὐκ οἷά τε ἦν κατιδέσθαι· ὁ δὲ τοὺς ἔξω
ἐμάνθανε, τοῖσι πρὸ τοῦ τείχεος τὰ ὅπλα ἔκειτο· ἔτυ-10
χον δὲ τοῦτον τὸν χρόνον Λακεδαιμόνιοι ἔξω τεταγμένοι.
τοὺς μὲν δὴ ὥρα γυμναζομένους τῶν ἀνδρῶν, τοὺς δὲ
τὰς κόμας κτενιζομένους. ταῦτα δὴ θεώμενος ἐθώυμαζε
καὶ τὸ πλῆθος ἐμάνθανε. μαθὼν δὲ πάντα ἀτρεκέως
ἀπήλαυνε ὀπίσω κατ᾽ ἡσυχίην· οὔτε γάρ τις ἐδίωκε 15
ἀλογίης τε ἐνεκύρησε πολλῆς· ἀπελθών τε ἔλεγε πρὸς
Ξέρξην τά περ οπώπεε πάντα. ἀκούων δὲ Ξέρξης οὐκ 209
εἶχε συμβαλέσθαι τὸ ἐόν, ὅτι παρασκευάζοιντο ὡς
ἀπολεόμενοί τε καὶ ἀπολέοντες κατὰ δύναμιν· ἀλλ᾽
αὐτῷ γελοῖα γὰρ ἐφαίνοντο ποιέειν, μετεπέμψατο Δη
μάρητον τὸν ᾿Αρίστωνος ἐόντα ἐν τῷ στρατοπέδῳ. ἀπι- 5
κόμενον δέ μιν εἰρώτα Ξέρξης ἕκαστα τούτων, ἐθέλων
μαθεῖν τὸ ποιεύμενον πρὸς τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων. ὁ δὲ
εἶπε, “ ἤκουσας μὲν καὶ πρότερόν μευ, εὖτε ὡρμέομεν
ἐπὶ τὴν Ἑλλάδα, περὶ τῶν ἀνδρῶν τούτων· ἀκούσας
δὲ γέλωτά με ἔθευ λέγοντα τά περ ὥρων ἐκβησόμενα 10
πρήγματα ταῦτα· ἐμοὶ γὰρ τὴν ἀληθείην ἀσκέειν ἀντία
σεν, ὦ βασιλεῦ, ἀγὼν μέγιστός ἐστι. ἄκουσον δὲ καὶ
νῦν. οἱ ἄνδρες οὗτοι ἀπίκαται μαχησόμενοι ἡμῖν περὶ
τῆς ἐσόδου, καὶ ταῦτα παρασκευάζονται. νόμος γάρ
σφι οὕτω ἔχων ἐστί· ἐπεὰν μέλλωσι κινδυνεύειν τῇ 15
ψυχῇ, τότε τὰς κεφαλὰς κοσμέονται. ἐπίστασο δέ, εἰ
τούτους γε καὶ τὸ ὑπομένον ἐν Σπάρτῃ καταστρέψεαι,
174
HERODOTUS.
ἔστι οὐδὲν ἄλλο ἔθνος ἀνθρώπων τὸ σέ, βασιλεῦ, ὑπομε
νέει χεῖρας ἀνταειρόμενον· νῦν γὰρ πρὸς βασιληίην τε
20 καὶ πόλιν καλλίστην τῶν ἐν Ἕλλησι προσφέρεαι καὶ
ἄνδρας ἀρίστους.” κάρτα τε δὴ ἄπιστα Ξέρξῃ ἐφαίνετο
τὰ λεγόμενα εἶναι, καὶ δεύτερα ἐπειρώτα ὅντινα τρόπον
τοσοῦτοι ἐόντες τῇ ἑωυτοῦ στρατιῇ μαχήσονται. ὁ δὲ
εἶπε, “ ὦ βασιλεῦ, ἐμοὶ χρᾶσθαι ὡς ἀνδρὶ ψεύστῃ, ἣν
25 μὴ ταῦτά τοι ταύτῃ ἐκβῇ τῇ ἐγὼ λέγω.”
210
σε
The Greeks Defend the Pass Successfully for Two Days.
Ταῦτα λέγων οὐκ ἔπειθε τὸν Ξέρξην. τέσσερας μὲν
δὴ παρεξῆκε ἡμέρας, ἐλπίζων αἰεί σφεας ἀποδρήσεσθαι·
πέμπτῃ δέ, ὡς οὐκ ἀπαλλάσσοντο ἀλλά οἱ ἐφαίνοντο
ἀναιδείῃ τε καὶ ἀβουλίῃ διαχρεόμενοι μένειν, πέμπει
5 ἐπ᾿ αὐτοὺς Μήδους τε καὶ Κισσίους θυμωθείς, ἐντει-
λάμενός σφεας ζωγρήσαντας ἄγειν ἐς ὄψιν τὴν ἑωυτοῦ.
ὡς δ᾽ ἐσέπεσον φερόμενοι ἐς τοὺς Ἕλληνας οἱ Μῆδοι,
ἔπιπτον πολλοί, ἄλλοι δ᾽ ἐπεσήισαν, καὶ οὐκ ἀπηλαύ-
νοντο καίπερ μεγάλως προσπταίοντες. δῆλον δ᾽ ἐποίευν
10 παντί τεῳ καὶ οὐκ ἥκιστα αὐτῷ βασιλέι, ὅτι πολλοὶ μὲν
ἄνθρωποι εἶεν, ὀλίγοι δὲ ἄνδρες. ἐγίνετο δὲ ἡ συμβολὴ
211 δι' ἡμέρης. ἐπείτε δὲ οἱ Μῆδοι τρηχέως περιείποντο,
ἐνθαῦτα οὗτοι μὲν ὑπεξήισαν, οἱ δὲ Πέρσαι ἐκδεξάμενοι
ἐπήισαν, τοὺς ἀθανάτους ἐκάλες βασιλεύς, τῶν ἦρχε
Υδάρνης, ὡς δὴ οὗτοί γε εὐπετέως κατεργασόμενοι.
5 ὡς δὲ καὶ οὗτοι συνέμισγον τοῖσι Ἕλλησι, οὐδὲν πλέον
ἐφέροντο τῆς στρατιῆς τῆς Μηδικῆς ἀλλὰ τὰ αὐτά,
ἅτε ἐν στεινοπόρῳ τε χώρῳ μαχόμενοι καὶ δόρασι
βραχυτέροισι χρεόμενοι ἤ περ οἱ Ἕλληνες, καὶ οὐκ
ἔχοντες πλήθει χρήσασθαι. Λακεδαιμόνιοι δὲ ἐμά.
10 χοντο ἀξίως λόγου, ἄλλα τε ἀποδεικνύμενοι ἐν οὐκ
οι
BOOK VII.
175
ἐπισταμένοισι μάχεσθαι ἐξεπιστάμενοι, καὶ ὅκως ἐντρέ-
ψειαν τὰ νῶτα, ἁλέες φεύγεσκον δῆθεν, οἱ δὲ βάρβαροι
ὁρέοντες φεύγοντας βοῇ τε καὶ πατάγῳ ἐπήισαν, οἱ δ᾽
ἂν καταλαμβανόμενοι ὑπέστρεφον ἀντίοι εἶναι τοῖσι
βαρβάροισι, μεταστρεφόμενοι δὲ κατέβαλλον πλήθεϊ 15
ἀναριθμήτους τῶν Περσέων· ἔπιπτον δὲ καὶ αὐτῶν τῶν
Σπαρτιητέων ἐνθαῦτα ὀλίγοι. ἐπεὶ δὲ οὐδὲν ἐδυνέατο
παραλαβεῖν οἱ Πέρσαι τῆς ἐσόδου πειρώμενοι καὶ κατὰ
τέλεα καὶ παντοίως προσβάλλοντες, ἀπήλαυνον ὀπίσω.
ἐν ταύτῃσι τῇσι προσόδοισι τῆς μάχης λέγεται βασιλέα 212
θηεύμενον τρὶς ἀναδραμεῖν ἐκ τοῦ θρόνου, δείσαντα περὶ
τῇ στρατιῇ. τότε μὲν οὕτω ἠγωνίσαντο, τῇ δ᾽ ὑστεραίῃ
οἱ βάρβαροι οὐδὲν ἄμεινον ἀέθλεον. ἅτε γὰρ ὀλίγων
ἐόντων, ἐλπίσαντές σφεας κατατετρωματίσθαι τε καὶ 5
οὐκ οἵους τε ἔσεσθαι ἔτι χεῖρας ἀνταείρεσθαι συνέ
βαλλον. οἱ δὲ Ἕλληνες κατὰ τάξις τε καὶ κατὰ ἔθνεα
κεκοσμημένοι ἦσαν, καὶ ἐν μέρει ἕκαστοι ἐμάχοντο,
πλὴν Φωκέων· οὗτοι δὲ ἐς τὸ ὄρος ετάχθησαν φυλά
ξοντες τὴν ἀτραπόν. ὡς δὲ οὐδὲν εὕρισκον ἀλλοιότερον 10
οἱ Πέρσαι ἢ τῇ προτεραίῃ ἐνώρων, ἀπήλαυνον.
Ephialtes the Traitor.
Απορέοντος δὲ βασιλέος ὅ τι χρήσηται τῷ παρεόντι 213
πρήγματι, Επιάλτης ὁ Εὐρυδήμου ἀνὴρ Μηλιεὺς ἦλθέ
οἱ ἐς λόγους, ὡς μέγα τι παρὰ βασιλέος δοκέων οἴσε-
σθαι, ἔφρασέ τε τὴν ἀτραπὸν τὴν διὰ τοῦ ὄρεος φέρου-
σαν ἐς Θερμοπύλας, καὶ διέφθειρε τοὺς ταύτῃ ὑπομεί- 5
ναντας Ελλήνων. ὕστερον δὲ δείσας Λακεδαιμονίους
ἔφυγε ἐς Θεσσαλίην, καί οἱ φυγόντι ὑπὸ τῶν Πυλαγό
ρων, τῶν ᾿Αμφικτυόνων ἐς τὴν Πυλαίην συλλεγομένων,
ἀργύριον ἐπεκηρύχθη. χρόνῳ δὲ ὕστερον, κατῆλθε γὰρ
176
HERODOTUS.
Ο
10 ἐς ᾿Αντικύρην, ἀπέθανε ὑπὸ ᾿Αθηνάδεω ἀνδρὸς Τρηχι-
νίου. ὁ δὲ ᾽Αθηνάδης οὗτος ἀπέκτεινε μὲν Ἐπιάλτεα
δι' ἄλλην αἰτίην, τὴν ἐγὼ ἐν τοῖσι ὄπισθε λόγοισι ση-
μανέω, ἐτιμήθη μέντοι ὑπὸ Λακεδαιμονίων οὐδὲν ἧσσον.
214 Επιάλτης μὲν οὕτω ὕστερον τούτων ἀπέθανε. ἔστι δὲ
ἕτερος λεγόμενος λόγος, ὡς Ὀνήτης τε ὁ Φαναγόρεω
ἀνὴρ Καρύστιος καὶ Κορυδαλλός ᾿Αντικυρεύς εἰσι οἱ
εἴπαντες πρὸς βασιλέα τούτους τοὺς λόγους καὶ περιη-
5 γησάμενοι τὸ ὄρος τοῖσι Πέρσῃσι, οὐδαμῶς ἔμοιγε πισ-
τός. τοῦτο μὲν γὰρ τῷδε χρὴ σταθμώσασθαι, ὅτι οἱ
τῶν Ἑλλήνων Πυλαγόροι ἐπεκήρυξαν οὐκ ἐπὶ Ὀνήτῃ
τε καὶ Κορυδαλλῷ ἀργύριον ἀλλ᾽ ἐπὶ Ἐπιάλτῃ τῷ
Τρηχινίῳ, πάντως κου τὸ ἀτρεκέστατον πυθόμενοι· τοῦ
τό
10 το δὲ φεύγοντα Ἐπιάλτην ταύτην τὴν αἰτίην οἴδαμεν.
εἰδείη μὲν γὰρ ἂν καὶ ἐὼν μὴ Μηλιεύς ταύτην τὴν
ἀτραπὸν Ὀνήτης, εἰ τῇ χώρῃ πολλὰ ὁμιληκὼς εἴη·
ἀλλ᾽ Ἐπιάλτης γάρ ἐστι ὁ περιηγησάμενος τὸ ὄρος
κατὰ τὴν ἀτραπόν, τοῦτον αἴτιον γράφω.
0
Hydarnes Leads the Immortals Around by the Mountain
Path.
215 Ξέρξης δέ, ἐπεὶ ἤρεσε τὰ ὑπέσχετο ὁ Ἐπιάλτης
κατεργάσασθαι, αὐτίκα περιχαρής γενόμενος ἔπεμπε
Υδάρνεα καὶ τῶν ἐστρατήγεε Ὑδάρνης· ὁρμέατο δὲ
περὶ λύχνων ἁφὰς ἐκ τοῦ στρατοπέδου. τὴν δὲ ἀτρα-
5 πὸν ταύτην ἐξεῦρον μὲν οἱ ἐπιχώριοι Μηλιέες, ἐξευρόντες
δὲ Θεσσαλοῖσι κατηγήσαντο ἐπὶ Φωκέας, τότε ὅτε οἱ
Φωκέες φράξαντες τείχει τὴν ἐσβολὴν ἦσαν ἐν σκέπῃ
τοῦ πολέμου· ἔκ τε τόσου δὴ κατεδέδεκτο ἐοῦσα οὐδὲν
216 χρηστὴ Μηλιεῦσι. ἔχει δὲ ὧδε ἡ ἀτραπὸς αὕτη, ἄρχει
ται μὲν ἀπὸ τοῦ ᾿Ασωποῦ ποταμοῦ τοῦ διὰ τῆς διασφά
BOOK VII.
177
το
ע:
γος ῥέοντος, οὔνομα δὲ τῷ ὄρεῖ τούτῳ καὶ τῇ ἀτραπῷ
τὠυτό κέεται, Ανόπαια· τείνει δὲ ἡ ᾿Ανόπαια αὕτη
κατὰ ῥάχιν τοῦ ὄρεος, λήγει δὲ κατά τε ᾿Αλπηνὸν πό- 5
λιν, πρώτην ἐοῦσαν τῶν Λοκρίδων πρὸς τῶν Μηλιέων,
καὶ κατὰ Μελάμπυγόν τε καλεόμενον λίθον καὶ κατὰ
Κερκώπων ἕδρας, τῇ καὶ τὸ στεινότατόν ἐστι. κατά 21
ταύτην δὴ τὴν ἀτραπὸν καὶ οὕτω ἔχουσαν οἱ Πέρσαι,
τὸν ᾿Ασωπόν διαβάντες, ἐπορεύοντο πᾶσαν τὴν νύκτα,
ἐν δεξιῇ μὲν ἔχοντες ὄρεα τὰ Οἰταίων, ἐν ἀριστερῇ δὲ
τὰ Τρηχινίων. ἠώς τε δὴ διέφαινε καὶ οἱ ἐγένοντο ἐπ᾽ 5
ἀκρωτηρίῳ τοῦ ὄρεος. κατὰ δὲ τοῦτο τοῦ ὄρεος ἐφύ
λασσον, ὡς καὶ πρότερόν μοι δεδήλωται, Φωκέων χίλιοι
ὁπλῖται, ῥυόμενοί τε τὴν σφετέρην χώρην καὶ φρου-
ρέοντες τὴν ἀτραπόν. ἡ μὲν γὰρ κάτω ἐσβολὴ ἐφυλάσ
σετο ὑπὸ τῶν εἴρηται· τὴν δὲ διὰ τοῦ ὄρεος ἀτραπὸν 10
ἐθελονται Φωκέες ὑποδεξάμενοι Λεωνίδῃ ἐφύλασσον.
ἔμαθον δέ σφεας οἱ Φωκέες ὧδε ἀναβεβηκότας ανα- 218
βαίνοντες γὰρ ἐλάνθανον οἱ Πέρσαι τὸ ὄρος πᾶν ἐὸν
δρυῶν ἐπίπλεον. ἦν μὲν δὴ νηνεμίη, ψόφου δὲ γινο-
μένου πολλοῦ, ὡς οἰκὸς ἦν φύλλων ὑποκεχυμένων ὑπὸ
τοῖσι ποσί, ἀνά τε ἔδραμον οἱ Φωκέες καὶ ἐνέδυνον τὰ 5
ὅπλα, καὶ αὐτίκα οἱ βάρβαροι παρῆσαν. ὡς δὲ εἶδον
ἄνδρας ἐνδυομένους ὅπλα, ἐν θώυματι ἐγένοντο· ἐλπό-
μενοι γὰρ οὐδένα σφι φανήσεσθαι ἀντίξοον ἐνεκύρησαν
στρατῷ. ἐνθαῦτα Υδάρνης καταρρωδήσας μὴ οἱ Φω-
κέες ἒωσι Λακεδαιμόνιοι, εἴρετο Ἐπιάλτην ὁποδαπός 10
εἴη ὁ στρατός, πυθόμενος δὲ ἀτρεκέως διέτασσε τοὺς
Πέρσας ὡς ἐς μάχην. οἱ δὲ Φωκέες ὡς ἐβάλλοντο
τοῖσι τοξεύμασι πολλοῖσί τε καὶ πυκνοῖσι, οἴχοντο φεύ-
γοντες ἐπὶ τοῦ ὄρεος τὸν κόρυμβον, ἐπιστάμενοι ὡς ἐπὶ
σφέας ὡρμήθησαν ἀρχήν, καὶ παρεσκευάδατο ὡς ἀπο- 15
8*
178
HERODOTUS.
219
λεόμενοι. οὗτοι μὲν δὴ ταῦτα ἐφρόνεον, οἱ δὲ ἀμφὶ
Ἐπιάλτην καὶ Ὑδάρνεα Πέρσαι Φωκέων μὲν οὐδένα
λόγον ἐποιεῦντο, οἱ δὲ κατέβαινον τὸ ὄρος κατὰ τάχος.
Leonidas Prepares to Die; Megistias the Prophet.
Τοῖσι δὲ ἐν Θερμοπύλῃσι ἐοῦσι Ελλήνων πρῶτον
μὲν ὁ μάντις Μεγιστίης, ἐσιδὼν ἐς τὰ ἱρά, ἔφρασε τὸν
μέλλοντα ἔσεσθαι ἅμα ἠοῖ σφι θάνατον, ἐπὶ δὲ καὶ
αὐτόμολοι ἦσαν οἱ ἐξαγγείλαντες τῶν Περσέων τὴν
5 περίοδον. οὗτοι μὲν ἔτι νυκτὸς ἐσήμηναν, τρίτοι δὲ οἱ
ἡμεροσκόποι καταδραμόντες ἀπὸ τῶν ἄκρων ἤδη δια-
φαινούσης ἡμέρης. ἐνθαῦτα ἐβουλεύοντο οἱ Ἕλληνες,
καί σφεων ἐσχίζοντο αἱ γνῶμαι· οἱ μὲν γὰρ οὐκ ἔων
τὴν τάξιν ἐκλιπεῖν, οἱ δὲ ἀντέτεινον. μετὰ δὲ τοῦτο
10 διακριθέντες οἱ μὲν ἀπαλλάσσοντο καὶ διασκεδασθέν-
τες κατὰ πόλις ἕκαστοι ἐτράποντο, οἱ δὲ αὐτῶν ἅμα
220 Λεωνίδη μένειν αὐτοῦ παρεσκευάδατο. λέγεται δὲ καὶ
ὡς αὐτός σφεας ἀπέπεμψε Λεωνίδης, μὴ ἀπόλωνται
κηδόμενος· αὐτῷ δὲ καὶ Σπαρτιητέων τοῖσι παρεοῦσι
οὐκ ἔχειν εὐπρεπέως ἐκλιπεῖν τὴν τάξιν ἐς τὴν ἦλθον
5 φυλάξοντες ἀρχήν. ταύτῃ καὶ μᾶλλον τῇ γνώμῃ πλεῖ-
στός είμι, Λεωνίδην, ἐπείτε ᾔσθετο τοὺς συμμάχους
ἐόντας ἀπροθύμους καὶ οὐκ ἐθέλοντας συνδιακινδυ
νεύειν, κελεῦσαί σφεας ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι, αὐτῷ δὲ ἀπιέ-
ναι οὐ καλῶς ἔχειν· μένοντι δὲ αὐτοῦ κλέος μέγα
10 ἐλείπετο, καὶ ἡ Σπάρτης εὐδαιμονίη οὐκ ἐξηλείφετο.
ἐκέχρηστο γὰρ ὑπὸ τῆς Πυθίης τοῖσι Σπαρτιήτῃσι
χρεομένοισι περὶ τοῦ πολέμου τούτου αὐτίκα κατ' ἀρχὰς
ἐγειρομένου, ἢ Λακεδαίμονα ἀνάστατον γενέσθαι ὑπὸ
τῶν βαρβάρων, ἢ τὸν βασιλέα σφέων ἀπολέσθαι. ταῦ
1* τα δέ σφι ἐν ἔπεσι ἑξαμέτροισι χρᾷ λέγοντα ὧδε·
BOOK VII.
179
ὑμῖν δ', ὦ Σπάρτης οικήτορες εὐρυχόροιο,
ἢ μέγα ἄστυ ἐρικυδὲς ὑπ' ἀνδράσι Περσείδησι
πέρθεται, ἢ τὸ μὲν ουχί, ἀφ' Ηρακλέους δὲ γενέθλης
πενθήσει βασιλῆ φθίμενον Λακεδαίμονος οὖρος.
οὐ γὰρ τὸν ταύρων σχήσει μένος οὐδὲ λεόντων
ἀντιβίην· Ζηνὸς γὰρ ἔχει μένος· οὐδέ ἑ φημί
σχήσεσθαι, πρὶν τῶνδ᾽ ἕτερον διὰ πάντα δάσηται.
20
ταῦτά τε δὴ ἐπιλεγόμενον Λεωνίδην, καὶ βουλόμενον
κλέος καταθέσθαι μοῦνον Σπαρτιητέων, ἀποπέμψαι
τοὺς συμμάχους μᾶλλον ἢ γνώμῃ διενειχθέντας οὕτω 25
ἀκόσμως οἴχεσθαι τοὺς οἰχομένους. μαρτύριον δέ μοι 221
καὶ τόδε οὐκ ἐλάχιστον τούτου πέρι γέγονε, ὅτι καὶ τὸν
μάντιν ὃς εἵπετο τῇ στρατιῇ ταύτῃ, Μεγιστίην τὸν
Ακαρνῆνα, λεγόμενον εἶναι τὰ ἀνέκαθεν ἀπὸ Μελάμ
ποδος, τοῦτον εἴπαντα ἐκ τῶν ἱρῶν τὰ μέλλοντά σφι 5
ἐκβαίνειν φανερός ἐστι Λεωνίδης ἀποπέμπων, ἵνα μὴ
συναπόληταί σφι. ὁ δὲ ἀποπεμπόμενος αὐτὸς μὲν οὐκ
ἀπέλιπε, τὸν δὲ παῖδα συστρατευόμενον, ἐόντα οἱ μου-
νογενέα, ἀπέπεμψε.
The Thespians and Thebans Remain with the Spartans.
Οἱ μέν νυν σύμμαχοι οἱ ἀποπεμπόμενοι οἴχοντό τε 222
ἀπιόντες καὶ ἐπείθοντο Λεωνίδῃ, Θεσπιέες δὲ καὶ Θη-
βαῖοι κατέμειναν μοῦνοι παρὰ Λακεδαιμονίοισι. τού-
των δὲ Θηβαῖοι μὲν ἀέκοντες ἔμενον καὶ οὐ βουλόμενοι·
κατείχε γάρ σφεας Λεωνίδης ἐν ὁμήρων λόγῳ ποιεύ- 5
μενος· Θεσπιέες δὲ ἑκόντες μάλιστα, οἳ οὐκ ἔφασαν
ἀπολιπόντες Λεωνίδην καὶ τοὺς μετ᾿ αὐτοῦ ἀπαλλάξεσ
θαι, ἀλλὰ καταμείναντες συναπέθανον. ἐστρατήγεε δὲ
αὐτῶν Δημόφιλος Διαδρόμεω.
180
HERODOTUS.
The Last Hopeless Struggle.
οι
223 Ξέρξης δὲ ἐπεὶ ἡλίου ἀνατείλαντος σπονδὰς ἐποι-
ήσατο, ἐπισχὼν χρόνον ἐς ἀγορῆς κου μάλιστα πληθώ
ρην πρόσοδον ἐποιέετο· καὶ γὰρ ἐπέσταλτο ἐξ Ἐπιάλτεω
οὕτω. ἀπὸ γὰρ τοῦ ὄρεος ἡ κατάβασις συντομωτέρη
5 τε ἐστὶ καὶ βραχύτερος ὁ χῶρος πολλὸν ἤ περ ἡ περίο-
δός τε καὶ ἀνάβασις. οἵ τε δὴ βάρβαροι οἱ ἀμφὶ Ξέρ
ξην προσήισαν, καὶ οἱ ἀμφὶ Λεωνίδην Ἕλληνες, ὡς τὴν
ἐπὶ θανάτῳ ἔξοδον ποιεύμενοι, ἤδη πολλῷ μᾶλλον ἢ
κατ' ἀρχὰς ἐπεξήισαν ἐς τὸ εὐρύτερον τοῦ αὐχένος. τὸ
10 μὲν γὰρ ἔρυμα τοῦ τείχεος ἐφυλάσσετο, οἱ δὲ ἀνὰ τὰς
προτέρας ἡμέρας ὑπεξιόντες ἐς τὰ στεινόπορα ἐμάχοντο.
τότε δὲ συμμίσγοντες ἔξω τῶν στεινῶν ἔπιπτον πλήθεϊ
πολλοὶ τῶν βαρβάρων· ὄπισθε γὰρ οἱ ἡγεμόνες τῶν
τελέων ἔχοντες μάστιγας ἐρράπιζον πάντα ἄνδρα, αἰεὶ
15 ἐς τὸ πρόσω ἐποτρύνοντες. πολλοὶ μὲν δὴ ἐσέπιπτον
αὐτῶν ἐς τὴν θάλασσαν καὶ διεφθείροντο, πολλῷ δ᾽ ἔτι
πλεύνες κατεπατέοντο ζωοὶ ὑπ᾽ ἀλλήλων· ἦν δὲ λόγος
οὐδεὶς τοῦ ἀπολλυμένου. ἅτε γὰρ ἐπιστάμενοι τὸν μέλ.
λοντα σφίσι ἔσεσθαι θάνατον ἐκ τῶν περιιόντων τὸ
20 ὄρος, ἀπεδείκνυντο ῥώμης ὅσον εἶχον μέγιστον ἐς τοὺς
224 βαρβάρους, παραχρεόμενοί τε καὶ ἀτέοντες. δόρατα
μέν νυν τοῖσι πλέοσι αὐτῶν τηνικαῦτα ἤδη ἐτύγχανε
κατεηγότα, οἱ δὲ τοῖσι ξίφεσι διεργάζοντο τοὺς Πέρσας.
καὶ Λεωνίδης τε ἐν τούτῳ τῷ πόνῳ πίπτει ἀνὴρ γενό-
5 μενος ἄριστος καὶ ἕτεροι μετ᾿ αὐτοῦ ὀνομαστοὶ Σπαρτιη-
τέων, τῶν ἐγὼ ὡς ἀνδρῶν ἀξίων γενομένων ἐπυθόμην τὰ
οὐνόματα, ἐπυθόμην δὲ καὶ ἁπάντων τῶν τριηκοσίων.
καὶ δὴ Περσέων πίπτουσι ἐνθαῦτα ἄλλοι τε πολλοὶ καὶ
ὀνομαστοί, ἐν δὲ δὴ καὶ Δαρείου δύο παῖδες ᾿Αβροκόμης
Εν
BOOK VII.
181
τε καὶ Ὑπεράνθης, ἐκ τῆς ᾿Αρτάνεω θυγατρὸς Φρατα-10
γούνης γεγονότες Δαρείῳ. ὁ δὲ ᾿Αρτάνης Δαρείου μὲν
τοῦ βασιλέος ἦν ἀδελφεός, Ὑστάσπεος δὲ τοῦ ᾿Αρσά
μεος παῖς· ὃς καὶ ἐκδιδοὺς τὴν θυγατέρα Δαρείῳ τὸν
οἶκον πάντα τὸν ἑωυτοῦ ἐπέδωκε, ὡς μούνης οἱ ἐούσης
ταύτης τέκνου. Ξέρξεω τε δὴ δύο ἀδελφεοὶ ἐνθαῦτα 225
πίπτουσι μαχόμενοι, καὶ ὑπὲρ τοῦ νεκροῦ τοῦ Λεωνίδεω
Περσέων τε καὶ Λακεδαιμονίων ὠθισμὸς ἐγίνετο πολ-
λός, ἐς ὃ τοῦτόν τε ἀρετῇ οἱ Ἕλληνες ὑπεξείρυσαν καὶ
ἐτρέψαντο τοὺς ἐναντίους τετράκις. τοῦτο δὲ συνεστή- 5
κεε μέχρι οὗ οἱ σὺν Ἐπιάλτῃ παρεγένοντο. ὡς δὲ τού-
τους ἥκειν ἐπύθοντο οἱ Ἕλληνες, ἐνθεῦτεν ἤδη ἑτεροιοῦτο
τὸ νεῖκος· ἔς τε γὰρ τὸ στεινὸν τῆς ὁδοῦ ἀνεχώρεον
ὀπίσω, καὶ παραμειψάμενοι τὸ τεῖχος ἐλθόντες ἵζοντο
ἐπὶ τὸν κολωνὸν πάντες ἁλέες οἱ ἄλλοι πλὴν Θηβαίων. 10
ὁ δὲ κολωνός ἐστι ἐν τῇ ἐσόδῳ, ὅκου νῦν ὁ λίθινος λέων
ἕστηκε ἐπὶ Λεωνίδῃ. ἐν τούτῳ σφέας τῷ χώρῳ ἀλεξο-
μένους μαχαίρῃσι, τοῖσι αὐτῶν ἐτύγχανον ἔτι περιεοῦ.
σαι, καὶ χερσὶ καὶ στόμασι κατέχωσαν οἱ βάρβαροι
βάλλοντες, οἱ μὲν ἐξ ἐναντίης ἐπισπόμενοι καὶ τὸ ἔρυμα 15
τοῦ τείχεος συγχώσαντες, οἱ δὲ περιελθόντες πάντοθεν
περισταδόν.
πι
Who Deserved the Palm for Bravery.
:
Λακεδαιμονίων δὲ καὶ Θεσπιέων τοιούτων γενομένων, 226
ὅμως λέγεται ἀνὴρ ἄριστος γενέσθαι Σπαρτιήτης Διη-
νέκης· τὸν τόδε φασὶ εἰπεῖν τὸ ἔπος πρὶν ἢ συμμίξαί
σφεας τοῖσι Μήδοισι, πυθόμενον πρός τευ τῶν Τρηχινί-
ων ὡς, ἐπεὰν οἱ βάρβαροι ἀπιέωσι τὰ τοξεύματα, τὸν 5
ἥλιον ὑπὸ τοῦ πλήθεος τῶν ὀιστῶν ἀποκρύπτουσι·
τοσοῦτο πλῆθος αὐτῶν εἶναι. τὸν δὲ οὐκ ἐκπλαγέντα
182
HERODOTUS.
τούτοισι εἰπεῖν ἐν ἀλογίῃ ποιεύμενον τὸ Μήδων πλῆθος,
ὡς πάντα σφι ἀγαθὰ ὁ Τρηχίνιος ξεῖνος ἀγγέλλοι, εἰ
10 ἀποκρυπτόντων τῶν Μήδων τὸν ἥλιον ὑπὸ σκιῇ ἔσοιτο
227 πρὸς αὐτοὺς ἡ μάχη καὶ οὐκ ἐν ἡλίῳ. ταῦτα μὲν καὶ
ἄλλα τοιουτότροπα ἔπεά φασι Διηνέκεα τὸν Λακεδαι-
μόνιον λιπέσθαι μνημόσυνα· μετὰ δὲ τοῦτον ἀριστεῦσαι
λέγονται Λακεδαιμόνιοι δύο ἀδελφεοί, ᾿Αλφεός τε καὶ
5 Μάρων Ορσιφάντου παῖδες. Θεσπιέων δὲ εὐδοκίμεε
μάλιστα τῷ οὔνομα ἦν Διθύραμβος 'Αρματίδεω.
Epitaphs Inscribed to the Fallen.
228 Θαφθεῖσι δέ σφι αὐτοῦ ταύτῃ τῇ περ ἔπεσον, καὶ
τοῖσι πρότερον τελευτήσασι ἢ ὑπὸ Λεωνίδεω ἀποπεμφ
θέντας οἴχεσθαι, ἐπιγέγραπται γράμματα λέγοντα τάδε·
5
μυριάσιν ποτὲ τῇδε τριηκοσίαις ἐμάχοντο
ἐκ Πελοποννάσου χιλιάδες τέτορες.
ταῦτα μὲν δὴ τοῖσι πᾶσι ἐπιγέγραπται, τοῖσι δὲ Σπαρ
τιήτησι ἰδίῃ,
ὦ ξεῖν, ἀγγέλλειν Λακεδαιμονίοις ὅτι τῇδε
κείμεθα τοῖς κείνων ῥήμασι πειθόμενοι.
10 Λακεδαιμονίοισι μὲν δὴ τοῦτο, τῷ δὲ μάντι τόδε·
μνῆμα τόδε κλεινοῖο Μεγιστία, ὅν ποτε Μῆδοι
Σπερχειὸν ποταμὸν κτεῖναν ἀμειψάμενοι,
μάντιος, ὃς τότε κῆρας ἐπερχομένας σάφα εἰδώς
οὐκ ἔτλη Σπάρτης ἡγεμόνα προλιπεῖν.
οι
15 ἐπιγράμμασι μέν νυν καὶ στήλῃσι, ἔξω ἢ τὸ τοῦ μάν
τιος ἐπίγραμμα, ᾿Αμφικτύονες εἰσί σφεας οἱ ἐπικοσμή
σαντες· τὸ δὲ τοῦ μάντιος Μεγιστίεω Σιμωνίδης ὁ Λεω
πρέπεός ἐστι κατὰ ξεινίην ὁ ἐπιγράψας.
BOOK VII.
183
του
Eurytus and Aristodemus.
i
Δύο δὲ τούτων τῶν τριηκοσίων λέγεται Ευρυτόν τε 229
καὶ ᾿Αριστόδημον, παρεὸν αὐτοῖσι ἀμφοτέροισι κοινῷ
λόγῳ χρησαμένοισι ἢ ἀποσωθῆναι ὁμοῦ ἐς Σπάρτην,
ὡς μεμετιμένοι γε ἦσαν ἐκ τοῦ στρατοπέδου ὑπὸ Λεω
νίδεω καὶ κατεκέατο ἐν ᾿Αλπηνοῖσι ὀφθαλμιῶντες ἐς τὸ 5
ἔσχατον, ἢ εἴ γε μὴ ἐβούλοντο νοστῆσαι, ἀποθανεῖν
ἅμα τοῖσι ἄλλοισι, παρεόν σφι τούτων τὰ ἕτερα ποιέειν,
οὐκ ἐθελῆσαι ὁμοφρονέειν, ἀλλὰ γνώμῃ διενειχθέντας
Εύρυτον μέν, πυθόμενον τῶν Περσέων τὴν περίοδον,
αἰτήσαντά τε τὰ ὅπλα καὶ ἐνδύντα ἄγειν αὐτὸν κελεύ-10
σαι τὸν εἵλωτα ἐς τοὺς μαχομένους, ὅκως δὲ αὐτὸν
ἤγαγε, τὸν μὲν ἀγαγόντα οἴχεσθαι φεύγοντα, τὸν δὲ
ἐσπεσόντα ἐς τὸν ὅμιλον διαφθαρῆναι, Αριστόδημον δὲ
λιποψυχέοντα λειφθῆναι. εἰ μέν νυν ἢ μοῦνον 'Αρι-
στόδημον ἀλγήσαντα ἀπονοστῆσαι ἐς Σπάρτην, ἢ καὶ 15
ὁμοῦ σφεων ἀμφοτέρων τὴν κομιδὴν γενέσθαι, δοκέειν
ἐμοί, οὐκ ἄν σφι Σπαρτιήτας μήνιν οὐδεμίαν προσθέ-
σθαι· νυνὶ δὲ τοῦ μὲν αὐτῶν ἀπολομένου, τοῦ δὲ τῆς
μὲν αὐτῆς ἐχομένου προφάσιος οὐκ ἐθελήσαντος δὲ
ἀποθνήσκειν, ἀναγκαίως σφι ἔχειν μηνῖσαι μεγάλως 20
Αριστοδήμῳ. οἱ μέν νυν οὕτω σωθῆναι λέγουσι 'Αρι- 230
στόδημον ἐς Σπάρτην καὶ διὰ πρόφασιν τοιήνδε, οἱ δὲ
ἄγγελον πεμφθέντα ἐκ τοῦ στρατοπέδου, ἐξεὸν αὐτῷ
καταλαβεῖν τὴν μάχην γινομένην οὐκ ἐθελῆσαι, ἀλλ᾽
ὑπομείναντα ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ περιγενέσθαι, τὸν δὲ συνάγγελον 5
αὐτοῦ ἀπικόμενον ἐς τὴν μάχην ἀποθανεῖν. ἀπονοστή - 231
σας δὲ ἐς Λακεδαίμονα ὁ ᾿Αριστόδημος ὄνειδός τε εἶχε
καὶ ἀτιμίην· πάσχων δὲ τοιάδε ἠτίμωτο· οὔτε οἱ πῦρ
οὐδεὶς ἔναυε Σπαρτιητέων οὔτε διελέγετο, ὄνειδός τε
184
HERODOTUS.
5 εἶχε ὁ τρέσας 'Αριστόδημος καλεόμενος. ἀλλ' ὁ μὲν ἐν
τῇ ἐν Πλαταιῇσι μάχῃ ἀνέλαβε πᾶσαν τὴν ἐπενειχθεῖ-
232 σαν αἰτίην· λέγεται δὲ καὶ ἄλλον ἀποπεμφθέντα ἄγγε-
λον ἐς Θεσσαλίην τῶν τριηκοσίων τούτων περιγενέσθαι,
τῷ οὔνομα εἶναι Παντίτην· νοστήσαντα δὲ τοῦτον ἐς
Σπάρτην, ὡς ἠτίμωτο, ἀπάγξασθαι.
233
Conduct of the Thebans.
Οἱ δὲ Θηβαῖοι, τῶν ὁ Λεοντιάδης ἐστρατήγεε, τέως
μὲν μετὰ τῶν Ἑλλήνων ἐόντες ἐμάχοντο ὑπ' ἀναγκαίης
ἐχόμενοι πρὸς τὴν βασιλέος στρατιήν· ὡς δὲ εἶδον
κατυπέρτερα τῶν Περσέων γινόμενα τὰ πρήγματα, οὕτω
5 δή, τῶν σὺν Λεωνίδῃ Ἑλλήνων ἐπειγομένων ἐπὶ τὸν
κολωνόν, ἀποσχισθέντες τούτων χειράς τε προέτεινον
καὶ ἤισαν ἆσσον τῶν βαρβάρων, λέγοντες τὸν ἀληθέ-
στατον τῶν λόγων, ὡς καὶ μηδίζουσι καὶ γῆν τε καὶ
ὕδωρ ἐν πρώτοισι ἔδοσαν βασιλέι, ὑπὸ δὲ ἀναγκαίης
10 ἐχόμενοι ἐς Θερμοπύλας ἀπικοίατο καὶ ἀναίτιοι εἶεν
τοῦ τρώματος τοῦ γεγονότος βασιλέι. ὥστε ταῦτα λέ-
γοντες περιεγίνοντο· εἶχον γὰρ καὶ Θεσσαλοὺς τούτων
τῶν λόγων μάρτυρας. οὐ μέντοι τά γε πάντα ευτύχη
σαν· ὡς γὰρ αὐτοὺς ἔλαβον οἱ βάρβαροι ἐλθόντας, τοὺς
15 μέν τινας καὶ ἀπέκτειναν προσιόντας, τοὺς δὲ πλευνας
αὐτῶν κελεύσαντος Ξέρξεω ἔστιζον στίγματα βασι-
λήια, ἀρξάμενοι ἀπὸ τοῦ στρατηγοῦ Λεοντιάδεω, τοῦ
τὸν παῖδα Ευρύμαχον χρόνῳ μετέπειτα ἐφόνευσαν
Πλαταιέες στρατηγήσαντα ἀνδρῶν Θηβαίων τετρακο-
20 σίων καὶ σχόντα τὸ ἄστυ τὸ Πλαταιέων.
ΤΟ
Xerxes Confers Again with Demaratus.
234 Οἱ μὲν δὴ περὶ Θερμοπύλας Ἕλληνες οὕτω ἠγωνί.
σαντο, Ξέρξης δὲ καλέσας Δημάρητον εἰρώτα ἀρξάμενος
BOOK VII.
185
66
ἐνθένδε· “ Δημάρητε, ἀνὴρ εἰς ἀγαθός. τεκμαίρομαι
δὲ τῇ ἀληθείῃ· ὅσα γὰρ εἶπας, ἅπαντα ἀπέβη οὕτω.
νῦν δέ μοι εἰπέ, κόσοι τινές εἰσι οἱ λοιποὶ Λακεδαιμό. 5
νιοι, καὶ τούτων ὁκόσοι τοιοῦτοι τὰ πολέμια, εἴτε καὶ
ἅπαντες.” ὁ δ᾽ εἶπε, “ ὦ βασιλεῦ, πλῆθος μὲν πολλὸν
πάντων τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων καὶ πόλιες πολλαί. τὸ δὲ
θέλεις ἐκμαθεῖν, εἰδήσεις. ἔστι ἐν τῇ Λακεδαίμονι
Σπάρτη πόλις ἀνδρῶν ὀκτακισχιλίων μάλιστα, καὶ 10
οὗτοι πάντες εἰσὶ ὅμοιοι τοῖσι ἐνθάδε μαχεσαμένοισι·
οἵ γε μὲν ἄλλοι Λακεδαιμόνιοι τούτοισι μὲν οὐκ ὅμοιοι,
ἀγαθοὶ δέ” εἶπε πρὸς ταῦτα Ξέρξης, “ Δημάρητε, τέῳ
τρόπῳ ἀπονητότατα τῶν ἀνδρῶν τούτων ἐπικρατήσο-
μεν; ἴθι ἐξηγέο· σὺ γὰρ ἔχεις αὐτῶν τὰς διεξόδους τῶν 15
βουλευμάτων οἷα βασιλεὺς γενόμενος.” ὁ δ᾽ ἀμείβετο, 235
· ὦ βασιλεῦ, εἰ μὲν δὴ συμβουλεύεαί μοι προθύμως,
δίκαιόν με σοί ἐστι φράζειν τὸ ἄριστον· εἰ τῆς ναυτικῆς
τό
στρατιῆς νέας τριηκοσίας ἀποστείλειας ἐπὶ τὴν Λάκαι
ναν χώρην. ἔστι δὲ ἐπ' αὐτῇ νῆσος ἐπικειμένη τῇ οὔνο- 5
μά ἐστι Κύθηρα, τὴν Χίλων ἀνὴρ παρ' ἡμῖν σοφώτατος
γενόμενος κέρδος μέζον ἂν ἔφη είναι Σπαρτιήτησι κατὰ
τῆς θαλάσσης καταδεδυκέναι μᾶλλον ἢ ὑπερέχειν, αἰεί
τι προσδοκῶν ἀπ᾿ αὐτῆς τοιοῦτο ἔσεσθαι οἷόν τοι ἐγὼ
ἐξηγέομαι, οὔτι τὸν σὸν στόλον προειδώς, ἀλλὰ πάντα 10
ὁμοίως φοβεόμενος ἀνδρῶν στόλον. ἐκ ταύτης τῆς νήσου
ὁρμεόμενοι φοβεόντων τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους. παροίκου
δὲ πολέμου σφι ἐόντος οἰκηίου, οὐδὲν δεινοὶ ἔσονταί τοι
μὴ τῆς ἄλλης Ἑλλάδος ἁλισκομένης ὑπὸ τοῦ πεζοῦ
βοηθέωσι ταύτῃ. καταδουλωθείσης δὲ τῆς ἄλλης Ελ- 15
λάδος ἀσθενὲς ἤδη τὸ Λακωνικὸν μοῦνον λείπεται, ἢν
δὲ ταῦτα μὴ ποιέῃς, τάδε τοι προσδόκα ἔσεσθαι· ἔστι
τῆς Πελοποννήσου ἰσθμὸς στεινός· ἐν τούτῳ τῷ χώρῳ
186
HERODOTUS.
πάντων Πελοποννησίων συνομοσάντων ἐπὶ σοὶ μάχας
20 ἰσχυροτέρας ἄλλας τῶν γενομενέων προσδέκεο ἔσεσθαί
ἐκεῖνο δὲ ποιήσαντι ἀμαχητὶ ὅ τε ἰσθμὸς οὗτος
καὶ αἱ πόλιες προσχωρήσουσι.”
του.
Achaemenes Opposes the Advice of Demaratus.
236 Λέγει μετὰ τοῦτον Αχαιμένης, ἀδελφεός τε ἐὼν Ξέρ
ξεω καὶ τοῦ ναυτικοῦ στρατοῦ στρατηγός, παρατυχών
τε τῷ λόγῳ καὶ δείσας μὴ ἀναγνωσθῇ Ξέρξης ποιέειν
ταῦτα, “ ὦ βασιλεῦ, ὁρέω σε ἀνδρὸς ἐνδεκόμενον λόγους
5 ὃς φθονέει τοι εὖ πρήσσοντι ἢ καὶ προδιδοῖ πρήγματα
τὰ σά. καὶ γὰρ δὴ καὶ τρόποισι τοιούτοισι χρεόμενοι
Έλληνες χαίρουσι· τοῦ τε εὐτυχέειν φθονέουσι καὶ τὸ
κρέσσον στυγέουσι. εἰ δ᾽ ἐπὶ τῇσι παρεούσῃσι τύχῃσι,
ἐκ τῶν νέες νεναυηγήκασι τετρακόσιαι, ἄλλας ἐκ τοῦ
10 στρατοπέδου τριηκοσίας ἀποπέμψεις περιπλέειν Πελο-
πόννησον, ἀξιόμαχοί τοι γίνονται οἱ ἀντίπαλοι· ἁλης
δὲ ἐὼν ὁ ναυτικὸς στρατὸς δυσμεταχείριστός τε αὐτοῖσι
γίνεται, καὶ ἀρχὴν οὐκ ἀξιόμαχοί τοι ἔσονται, καὶ πᾶς
ὁ ναυτικὸς τῷ πεζῷ ἀρήξει καὶ ὁ πεζὸς τῷ ναυτικῷ, ὁμοῦ
15 πορευόμενος· εἰ δὲ διασπάσεις, οὔτε σὺ ἔσεαι ἐκείνοισι
χρήσιμος οὔτε ἐκεῖνοι σοί. τὰ σεωυτοῦ δὲ τιθέμενος εὖ
γνώμην ἔχω τὰ τῶν ἀντιπολέμων μὴ ἐπιλέγεσθαι πρήγ
ματα, τῇ τε στήσονται τὸν πόλεμον τά τε ποιήσουσι
ὅσοι τε πλῆθός εἰσι. ἱκανοὶ γὰρ ἐκεῖνοί γε αὐτοὶ
20 ἑωυτῶν πέρι φροντίζειν εἰσί, ἡμεῖς δὲ ἡμέων ὡσαύτως.
Ο
Λακεδαιμόνιοι δὲ ὴν ἴωσι ἀντία Πέρσῃσι ἐς μάχην,
237 οὐδὲν τὸ παρεὸν τρῶμα ἀκεῦνται.” ἀμείβεται Ξέρξης
τοισίδε· “Αχαίμενες, εὖ τέ μοι δοκέεις λέγειν καὶ
ποιήσω ταῦτα. Δημάρητος δὲ λέγει μὲν τὰ ἄριστα
ἔλπεται εἶναι ἐμοί, γνώμῃ μέντοι ἑσσοῦται ὑπο σεῦ.
BOOK VII.
187
οὐ γὰρ δὴ κείνό γε ἐνδέξομαι ὅκως οὐκ εὐνοέει τοῖσι 5
ἐμοῖσι πρήγμασι, τοϊσί τε λεγομένοισι πρότερον ἐκ τού-
του σταθμώμενος καὶ τῷ ἐόντι, ὅτι πολιήτης μὲν πολιήτῃ
εὖ πρήσσοντι φθονέει καὶ ἔστι δυσμενὴς τῇ σιγῇ, οὐδ᾽
ἂν συμβουλευομένου τοῦ ἀστοῦ πολιήτης ἀνὴρ τὰ ἄρισ-
τά οἱ δοκέοντα εἶναι ὑποθέοιτο, εἰ μὴ πρόσω ἀρετῆς 10
ἀνήκοι· σπάνιοι δέ εἰσι οἱ τοιοῦτοι· ξεῖνος δὲ ξείνῳ εὖ
πρήσσοντί ἐστι εὐμενέστατον πάντων, συμβουλευομένου
τε ἂν συμβουλεύσειε τὰ ἄριστα. οὕτω ὦν περὶ κακο-
λογίης τῆς ἐς Δημάρητον, ἐόντος ἐμοὶ ξείνου πέρι, ἔχεσ-
θαί τινα τοῦ λοιποῦ κελεύω.”
15
Xerxes Treats the Body of Leonidas with Indignity.
Ταῦτα εἴπας Ξέρξης διεξήιε διὰ τῶν νεκρῶν, καὶ 238
Λεωνίδεω, ἀκηκοὼς ὅτι βασιλεύς τε ἦν καὶ στρατηγὸς
Λακεδαιμονίων, ἐκέλευσε ἀποταμόντας τὴν κεφαλὴν
ἀνασταυρῶσαι. δῆλά μοι πολλοῖσι μὲν καὶ ἄλλοισι
τεκμηρίοισι, ἐν δὲ καὶ τῷδε οὐκ ἥκιστα γέγονε, ὅτι βασι- 5
λεὺς Ξέρξης πάντων δὴ μάλιστα ἀνδρῶν ἐθυμώθη ζῶντι
Λεωνίδῃ· οὐ γὰρ ἄν κοτε ἐς τὸν νεκρὸν ταῦτα παρε-
νόμησε, ἐπεὶ τιμᾶν μάλιστα νομίζουσι τῶν ἐγὼ οἶδα
ἀνθρώπων Πέρσαι ἄνδρας ἀγαθοὺς τὰ πολέμια. οἱ μὲν
δὴ ταῦτα ἐποίευν, τοῖσι ἐπετέτακτο ποιέειν.
τό
10
The Tablets of Demaratus; Gorgo's Sagacity.
Ανειμι δὲ ἐκεῖσε τοῦ λόγου τῇ μοι τὸ πρότερον ἐξέ-239
λιπε. ἐπύθοντο Λακεδαιμόνιοι ὅτι βασιλεὺς στέλλοιτο
ἐπὶ τὴν Ἑλλάδα πρῶτοι, καὶ οὕτω δὴ ἐς τὸ χρηστήριον
τὸ ἐς Δελφοὺς ἀπέπεμψαν, ἔνθα δή σφι ἐχρήσθη τὰ
ὀλίγῳ πρότερον εἶπον· ἐπύθοντο δὲ τρόπῳ θωυμασίῳ. 5
Δημάρητος γὰρ ὁ ᾿Αρίστωνος φυγὼν ἐς Μήδους, ὡς μὲν
188
HERODOTUS.
ἐγὼ δοκέω καὶ τὸ οἰκὸς ἐμοὶ συμμάχεται, οὐκ ἦν εὔνοος
Λακεδαιμονίοισι, πάρεστι δὲ εἰκάζειν εἴτε εὐνοίῃ ταῦτα
ἐποίησε εἴτε καὶ καταχαίρων. ἐπείτε γὰρ Ξέρξῃ ἔδοξε
10 στρατηλατέειν ἐπὶ τὴν Ἑλλάδα, ἐὼν ἐν Σούσοισι ὁ
Δημάρητος καὶ πυθόμενος ταῦτα ἠθέλησε Λακεδαιμο-
νίοισι ἐξαγγείλαι. ἄλλως μὲν δὴ οὐκ εἶχε σημῆναι·
ἐπικίνδυνον γὰρ ἦν μὴ λαμφθείη· ὁ δὲ μηχανᾶται
τοιάδε· δελτίον δίπτυχον λαβὼν τὸν κηρὸν αὐτοῦ
15 ἐξέκνησε, καὶ ἔπειτα ἐν τῷ ξύλῳ τοῦ δελτίου ἔγραψε
τὴν βασιλέος γνώμην, ποιήσας δὲ ταῦτα ὀπίσω ἐπέτηξε
τὸν κηρὸν ἐπὶ τὰ γράμματα, ἵνα φερόμενον κεινὸν τὸ
δελτίον μηδὲν πρῆγμα παρέχοι πρὸς τῶν ὁδοφυλάκων.
ἐπεὶ δὲ καὶ ἀπίκετο ἐς τὴν Λακεδαίμονα, οὐκ εἶχον
20 συμβαλέσθαι οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι, πρίν γε δή σφι, ὡς ἐγὼ
πυνθάνομαι, Κλεομένεος μὲν θυγάτηρ Λεωνίδεω δὲ γυνὴ
Γοργὼ ὑπέθετο ἐπιφρασθεῖσα αὐτή, τὸν κηρὸν κνᾶν
κελεύουσα, καὶ εὑρήσειν σφέας γράμματα ἐν τῷ ξύλῳ.
πειθόμενοι δὲ εὗρον καὶ ἐπελέξαντο, ἔπειτα δὲ τοῖσι
25 ἄλλοισι Ἕλλησι ἐπέστειλαν. ταῦτα μὲν δὴ οὕτω λέ-
γεται γενέσθαι.
NOTES.
ABBREVIATIONS.
H. Hadley's Greek Grammar, revised by F. D. Allen, 1884.
G. Goodwin's Greek Grammar.
C. Curtius's Greek Grammar.
Rawl. Rawlinson's Herodotus.
S. Summary of the Herodotean Dialect. This, as well as the
"Epitome," will be found in the Introduction.
NOTES.
VI. 1.
1. 'Iwvínv åπoornoas: see Epitome, Book V.- Teλevrâ: The
historical present has scarcely taken root in Hm. and the other
Epic writers (see Phaeacians ʼn 103). Stein thinks it originated
with the early genealogists and logographers. It is common
enough in Hdt.
2. μεμετιμένος : S. 76.
3. Zápdis: S. 46.— årɩypévov: S. 3; cf. 1. 5, 3. 2, 3. 3, 5. 9, etc.
4. Susa appears in Aesch. and Hdt., as in Scripture, to be the
ordinary residence of the Persian court, removal to Ecbatana or
Persepolis occurring only for two or three of the hottest months
in summer.—πарxоs: see note on 42. 4.
5. Katà Koîóv T, "for what possible reason;" see on 73. 3.-
κατὰ κοϊόν
SOKÉOL: H. 932; G. 243; C. 523.—OUTE-TE: a common correlation,
as 9. 6, 16. 9, 30. 2, 73. 5, 92. 13, etc.
6. ělávµažé: S. 25; "went on to express his surprise at."- ús
dî@ev, “as if forsooth;" cf. 39. 6, vii. 211. 12.
8. ópéwv: S. 72.—tǹv åtpekeíŋv: "the true origin."
9. To, "look you;" ethical, as vii. 161. 12.
10. πρńyµaтa: S. 5 c.—σú: emphatic position.
VI. 2.
1. és... ëxovтa, "aimed at," "referring to." Cf. 19. 4-5, vii.
130. 13, 143. 5, 152. 12. The idiom is Homeric, but not Attic.
The figure in its origin may be seen, Hm. г 263, λ 70, and below,
95. 11, 101. 2; then the verb without object, Hm. II 378, y 182,
and below, 92. 7, 99, 2. Here the words are arrows, the Homeric
ἔπεα πτερόεντα.
2. &s, “in the belief that;" H. 978; G. 277. 6 n. 2; C. 588.
3. værò, “during;" cf. ix. 51, 58, 60. — èπed@oûσav, “that fol-
lowed."
192
HERODOTUS.
5. 8s, "since he;" H. 910. Inasmuch as the relative upon.
developing from the demonstrative assumes thereby the function
of a conjunction in addition to that of pronoun, for clearness in
translation it is often best resolved into its two components, and
especially so when the conjunction implied in it is causal. Cf.
12. 12.—rǹv µeyiorηy: the very words of Histiaeus, v. 106. The
expression in full, výowv áñaσéwv peyiorŋv, is employed i. 170, of
the same island.— katepɣáσaodai: cf. 62. 4; on vii. 134. 13.
6. ὑπέδυνε, “ sought to invest himself with.”—Ἰώνων, πολέμου :
both dependent on ἡγεμονίην ; Η. 731.
8. νεώτερα, “ revolutionary ;” euphemistic for κακά, λυπηρά: 74.
4, vii. 52. 10. The positive also occurs. A similar usage is ex-
hibited by καινός, ἄλλος, ἄλλως, ἕτερος, μὴ τοῖον, etc.
9. ék, “at the instigation of;" Hm. P. 101.
10. ὡς . . . βασιλέι: explanatory appositive to λόγον.
VI. 3.
1. ἐνθαῦτα : S. 2. εἰρωτεόμενος : S. 11, 72; cf. 1. 8.
2. kar’: as 1.5.—ovтw: S. 29; emphasized by its position after
the word it qualifies, as vii. 47. 6, 206. 10, 223. 4; cf. vi. 3. 5, 30.
12, 45. 11.— étéoteide, eïn: not uncommon change of mode; see
3. 6–8, vii. 151. 8, 208. 2, 233. 8; in reverse order, vii. 5. 16.
4. yevoμévny, "real;" cf. 37. 12, vii. 209. 2, 237. 7. Connect
αὐτοῖσι with ἐξέφαινε, as ὁ δ᾽ αὖτις τὸν αὐτόν σφι χρησμὸν ἔφαινε, i.
159; cf. vii. 160. 3, iii. 74. 11; Soph. Antig. 253; Isaeus, 5. 25;
Luc. Prom. 17. For this position, see on 41. 10.
-
5. où µáλa, “not by any means." µáλa in prose is regularly
postpositive with où, ev, avríka (vii. 103. 5); but Hm. has also
µáλ'où: see Phaeacians ʼn 32. — ó Sè: emphatic repetition of the
foregoing subject in Homeric style, quite common in Hdt., usu-
ally with preceding negative; but only sporadic in Attic prose,
as Xen. Anab. iv. 2. 6; Thuc. i. 87.1; Luc. Tim. 17; Jup. conf. 11;
Hermot. 28. See below 9. 20, 16. 6, 17. 5, etc.
8. ovdév tɩ távtws: The negative is fond of strong expressions.
Tɩ strengthens oùdév, as 86. 61, vii. 8. 86. The striking asyndeton
adds still greater emphasis.
9. édeiµátov: because such transfers of population were fre-
quent in the great Oriental empires; see below 20. 3, 119. 9. Bc-
tween the Phoenicians and Ionians, moreover, a bitter rivalry
existed, since the former had lost their field of trade in the
Aegean and the Pontus, and they saw themselves hard pressed
NOTES.-VI. 5–9.
195
7), or (B) to censure a person (cf. 23, 15); 3. to emphasize some
characteristic or quality (Hdt. i. 45; Hm. Y 371–2).
9. Aádŋv: The island Lade lay to the north of Miletus and
covered the entrance to the harbor, offering a safe anchorage by
the roadstead thus formed. Northward across the bay of Lat-
mus some three or four miles was the promontory of Mycale.
The Maeander has now filled up this bay with its alluvium and
joined the island to the mainland.
10. σμικρὴ: σμικρός is a strong form of μικρός in Ionic and old
Attic.
VI. 8.
2. vnvoì: S. 50; dat. of accompaniment in a military expres
sion; 95. 10, vii. 179. 3; also with oúv, 8. 2, 23. 13, 41. 6; and
apa, 36. 4, 43. 8, 98. 1.- oùv occurs with comparative frequency
in Hdt., but in Attic prose it is confined mainly to Xenophon.-
σφι: S. 53.
4. The fleet faced northward towards Mycale; hence the
Milesians would occupy the right wing.- eixov: for position, see
on 41. 10; cf. Aesch. Pers. 399.
5. ỏydúkovтa: S. 21.—TOúTwv: H. 738; G. 171; C. 419 b. The
order followed in enumerating the catalogue is nearly that of
geographical position from S. to N. Of the twelve Ionian cities,
Ephesus, Colophon, Lebedus, and Clazomenae furnished no con-
tingents.
9. Φωκαέες : S. 48.
13. This total exceeded that of the Greek fleet at Artemisium
(271 ships), and numbered only 25 less than the fleet at Salamis.
VI. 9.
3. ἀπίκατο : S. 66. — Μιλησίην: sc. χώρην.
5. καταρρώδησαν : S. 15. — μὴ οὐ : Η. 887 ; G. 218; C. 533.
7. οἷοί τε, ὥστε, ἔστε, ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε, and in Hdt. ἐπείτε, still show the
epic rè so often appended to particles.— µǹ oùê are used with a
partc. to express an exception to a negative statement; so 106.
14. Compare its use with the inf. 11. 12, 88. 2.
·
8. κακόν τι λαβεῖν: compare 43. 2, 94. 8, vii. 35. 13. ἐπιλεγόμε-
VOL: often in Hdt. in the sense of "deliberating with one's self,"
"weighing," as 86. 25, vii. 47. 12, 50. 3-5; then to "feel concern,"
vii. 236. 17, "fear," vii. 49. 21, 149.7; cf. vi. 73. 6.
10-11. καταλυθέντες τῶν ἀρχέων: in order to ingratiate himself
with the people of the various cities at the time of the revolt.
196
HERODOTUS.
The despots, too, were mostly strong partisans of Darius.-peu-
yov, "were in exile," a meaning for the continued tenses of this
verb already well established in Hm. See below, vi. 40. 4, 123.
3. Μήδους : used indifferently for Πέρσας by Hat.
13. συγκαλέσαντες: simply resumptive of συλλέξαντες, as syn-
onym; cf. 7. 8.
14. TISEKAσTos in line 15; so, often in exhortations and
warnings pointing indirectly to the person in question, or
phrased in language wholly general. Cf. vii. 5. 13, 8. 98, 237. 15.
Common in Hm., as B 388.- eû toiýσas pavńτw, "show himself
to be serviceable to." The time of Toñoas is coincident with
that of pavýτw. This is rare with the supplementary partc.,
except after φθάνω, λανθάνω, τυγχάνω. See vi. 49. 11, 65. 9,
106. 7, 129. 21, v. 24, 19, 91. 22; cf. viii. 118. 16, and Phaeacians
0 564.
15. οἶκον : as vii. 194. 11. — γάρ, " that is to say.”— ἕκαστος ὑμέων :
in attributive position, though not attributive, as ii. 67; Simon.
Amorg. 7. 112; Xen. Cyr. ii. 2. 6; Plat. Symp. 191 D; Arist. Poet.
4. See on 41. 10.— woλiýτas: S. 33.
16-17. ἀποσχίζων ἀπὸ: on 25. 5. ἄχαρι: on vii. 138. 6.
19. ἐμπεπρήσεται does not difer in sense from ἐμπρήσεται,
which is also read here by some MSS. Cobet maintains that
the former is the only future in use with this verb.—§ovσɩ in
this connection =ñeíσovrat: 42. 13. It is meant that they shall
experience the same mild treatment as before, and in fact up to
this time the Ionians could not complain of encroachments and
oppression.
20. οὐ: not μή, because οὐ ποιήσουσι is equivalent to a com-
pound, as if ȧpvýσovτaι: cf. 133. 10, vii. 10. 81, 16. 39. See Phae-
acians ▾ 143, and below, vii. 9. 10, 46. 9, viii. 62.6. The fut. ind.
in conditions is mainly confined to expressions that are minatory,
monitory, or equivalent to µéλw or deî, with inf. Gildersleeve.
Távτws, "at all hazards.”
21. διὰ . . . ἐλεύσονται: emphatic periphrasis for μαχήσονται.—
EπηρEάLovтes, "by way of threat;" an otherwise unusual sense.
22–5. tá teρ σþéas katégei, “ what will, in fact, befall them;" an
incidental remark not belonging to the message, but addressed
to the tyrants, and forming a dramatic touch vividly depicting
the manner of the speaker. The threat is not an idle one; see
32. 2.- περ : as ii. 116. 4, iii. 68. 6, viii. 136. 16. — ὡς, καὶ ὥς, καὶ ὡς :
impressive anaphora; 29. 8, 43. 4. — é§avdpaπodieûvтaι: fut. mid.
NOTES-VI. 9-11.
197
in passive sense; 17. 4, vii. 39. 15, 149. 21, 159. 6, 162. 3. — ès
Báκтρa: i. e. to the furthest boundaries of the empire.
VI. 10.
2. Táde: the demonstratives in -de are usually prospective, the
others retrospective; cf. 9. 13, 9. 21, 53. 1–2; 2. 1, 4. 9, 19. 12; but
they sometimes interchange, as here; cf. 1. 9, 39. 2, 98. 18, 115. 1,
vii. 3. 12, 62. 8, 99. 16.
4. Kaì, "actually ;” 23. 13, 133. 5.— ȧyvwµooúvy marks a lack of
calm and cautious self-poise, and expresses itself in insolent self-
confidence, in wilful stubbornness (as here), or in vanity and
wantonness.
VI. 11.
1. i0éws: S. 18. For such adjunct of the partc. cf. 25. 7, 105.
11, vii. 203. 11; H. 976; G. 277. 6; C. 587.
3. Koú: S. 1; "no doubt." Ionic loquacity is cleverly con-
trasted with Laconian brevity, iii. 46, where, to a long speech of
the Samians asking aid, reply is made by the Spartans that rà
μὲν πρῶτα λεχθέντα ἐπιλεληθέναι, τὰ δὲ ὕστατα οὐ συνιέναι.— καὶ ἄλ-
λoi: Kai corresponds to the following dè, here and ii. 176, v. 95,
as Tè, vi. 50. 4, 70. 12; regularly pév.
4. ǹyoρówντo: epic word and form, perhaps with covert allu-
sion to Hm. ▲ 1.—èv dè: more fully, év dè avtoîσɩ, v. 72; on 38. 1.
5. Alovúσios: In the portraiture of character Hdt., like his great
model, Homer, is almost exclusively dramatic. No elaborate de-
scriptions introduce his chief personages. Their words and
deeds paint their pictures with unsurpassed power. Dionysius
we know only from these few chapters, but we know him as the
one man for the occasion.— Èrì .
ἐπὶ . . . πρήγματα, “ since upon a ra-
zor's edge matters stand balanced for us." The words are imi-
tated from those of Nestor, Hm. K 173, where, however, toтaraι
stands for exeral.—yàp : on 5. 6. Longinus (De Subl. 22) highly
extols the art with which this hyperbaton is introduced. The
natural order he says would be, ὦ ἄνδρες Ιωνες, νῦν καιρός ἐστιν
ὑμῖν πόνους ἐπιδέχεσθαι· ἐπὶ ξυροῦ γὰρ ἀκμῆς, κ. τ. λ. : but fearing
the effect of such a proposition upon the effeminate Ionians, Di-
onysius artfully presents the pressing reason for the advice first.
6. elvai depends on the resultant idea of the preceding clause;
cf. vii. 11. 16.
78. καὶ τούτοισι, " and that, too ;” 112. 7, 61. 13. δρηπέτῃσι :
all subjects of the Persian king were regarded as slaves; vii. 7.5,
198
HERODOTUS.
8. 61. If subdued now they would be treated as runaways.-
vûv ov: not temporal, but continuative and hortatory; cf. vi. 97.
11, vii. 16. 16, 101. 7. — úµeîs: emphatic position before conjunc-
tion; 28.7, 88. 8, vii. 8. 64, 10. 36.—v: neither ẻáv nor av (con-
junction) occurs in Ionic.— Boúλnobe: H. 898; G. 223; C. 545.
10–11. ei Sɩaxpηonode, without av: this omission is very rare
in Hdt. Most editors read diaxphoeσbe. See on vii. 54. 8, vi. 82.
7.-ůµéwv: gen. objective. Note its force before vµéas.
12. μὴ οὐ : μὴ negatives the inf.; οὐ is added because of οὐδε
μίαν : G. 283. 7. Cf. Xen. Mem. ii. 6. 38.
13. ¿λλ': common in Hm., to bring the preceding thought
abruptly to its conclusion in a spirited exhortation; see Phae-
acians ◊ 389, λ 345.— ẻµoí te кaì èµoì: It is the custom of Hdt.,
when he repeats the same word, or words containing the same
component, for emphasis, to connect them by te kaí: vi. 125. 6,
vii. 23. 8.
14. θεῶν veμóvτwv, “if the gods but leave the balance
even;" the thought reverts to line 5. The lightest weight will
turn the scale against them. If the gods leave the contest free,
his counsels followed will win the day. The gods and the scales
of fate are a common figure in Homer; T 223, II 658, ℗ 69–72, L
Θ
188. There the gods take part in the contest, as they do against
the Persians in Hellas; vii. 139. 27, 189. 16, 193. 2, viii. 13. 9;
Aesch. Pers. 347-9.
16. Toλλòv, "completely;" adverbial; cf. 82. 16, 138. 14.
VI. 12.
3. ȧváywv: on 116. 6.— èπì κépas, "in column," one behind the
other. ὅκως . Xpησaιтo, "when day after day he had practised
the rowers." The optative is iterative, as 31. 5, 77. 16, 121. 7;
with iterative imperf. in conclusion, line 6; H. 914 B; G. 233; C.
558 Obs. 1.
4. Sɩékπλoov: The diekplous was the most important movement
of ancient naval tactics, and is mentioned here and viii. 9 for the
first time. It received its most complete development in the
Peloponnesian war at the hands of the Athenians. It consisted
in a ship's being driven with the full force of the oars between
two hostile vessels, to strip off the oars or otherwise put them
out of the fight. Dionysius appears to have led out his fleet in
two columns for practice.
5. éßáτas, "marines;" heavy - armed soldiers who fought
NOTES. VI. 11-12.
199
from the raised decks fore and aft. A ship's complement was
40 (15. 5; cf. vii. 184. 9–10) until more reliance was placed on
skilful manœuvring. In the Peloponnesian war each trireme
had 10. — önλíσete: see vii. 100. 14. Ordinarily it was the rule
for the crews to disembark and encamp on shore, because the
ships were very imperfectly prepared for any long stay on board.
The defeat of the Athenians at Aegospotamos resulted from this
custom.
6. exeσкe: S. 58.-"Iwo: there seems a covert allusion here to
their love of leisure; cf. ηµîv ye, line 18.
9. ola: on 5.5.—Tóνwv: H. 753 c; G. 180; C. 414 Obs.
10. ἑωυτοὺς = ἀλλήλους: Η. 686 b; G. 146 n. 3; C. 473; so vi.
42. 5, 92. 2, vii. 145. 4.
11–12. Tapaßávres, "having offended;" poetic expression; cf.
Eur. Suppl. 231; usually παραβαίνειν νόμον, ὅρκον, etc. τάδε άνα-
åva-
πíµπdaµev: SC. rà Kakά, “are we brimming the cup of these ills."
The figure is Homeric. · οἵτινες: on 2. 5. - παραφρονήσαντες :
compare vii. 47. 11.— èкπλwσaνTES... VÓov: the fondness of the
νόου:
Greeks for borrowing meanings and expressions from nautical
affairs is noticeable.
""
13–14. αλαζόνι, " braggart. ἐπιτρέψαντες ἔχομεν: a construc-
tion found as early as Hes. Op. 42, and no less a favorite with
Hdt. than with Soph. and Eur.; it adds to the simple verb the
notion of continuance or resulting condition; vi. 23. 23, 126. 15.
See the somewhat extended expression, vii. 9. 9.
15. Avµaíveraι λúµŋơi: parechesis, or repetition of the same
root in successive words; a figure often sought by the Greeks,
but which we incline to avoid; cf. 31. 7, 37. 14, and on vii. 175. 7.
- δὴ = ἤδη.
17. τώυτό: S. 27. πρό: Η. 648.
“even
18. κρέσσον: S. 10.— καὶ . . . ἄλλο, “ even anything else what-
soever."
ov: S. 22; it lends an added indefiniteness to the in-
definite relative; cf. 56. 9.
rather" (cf.
19-20. µâλλov renews the comparison like our
St. Matth. xviii. 8–9, A. V.) ; so vii. 50. 7, 143. 15, 235. 8.— Toi doi
TOû, "for the future;" Tò λouπòv (line 5), during the remain-
der.”—ñeɩ0wµeða: used with the case-construction of the synony-
mous ȧkovel. Such an influence of the synonymous verb present
before the mind explains many anomalous constructions of the
cases in Hdt.; vi. 14. 10, 98. 16, vii. 29. 2, 35. 2, 70. 5, 134. 1, 139.
23, 140. 14, 163. 7, 170. 4, 191. 7.
200
HERODOTUS.
-
22. ola, "
as if so iii. 63. 14, though more objective; cf. åre
employed subjectively, i. 123, 200, ii. 69, 115, iii. 80, iv. 64, 146, v.
66, viii. 134. This usage without the participle is to be distin-
guished from that mentioned above on 5. 5.
24. åvaπeipâolat: the technical expression for practice in na-
val tactics.
VI. 13.
1. Małóντes, "perceiving;" on vii. 37. 10.—raûTa Tà: on 103.
18.-— yivóμeva: as often, practically the passive of Toléw, which
rarely occurs; yet see 22. 3, 79. 11.-èk: on 26. 10.
2. évfaûta dǹ: succeeding adjunct of the partc.; H. 976; cf.
23. 10, 16. 9, 14. 4.
3. keívovs: S. 55.— λóyous, “propositions;" without article be-
cause of incorporation into relative clause; so, Xen. An. i. 5. 16,
Thuc. i. 85. 1, Plat. Rep. 449 D; cf. Hdt. vii. 209. 11.
5–6. oi Záμoi ŵv, "the Samians, I say." The preceding part
of the sentence which presumes édékovтo for its verb is here re-
iterated with a change of οἱ Σάμιοι των οἱ στρατηγοί, and ὁρέοντες
with its clause for μαθόντες . . . Ιώνων. — ἐοῦσαν . . . Ἰώνων,
'Iwvwv, “on
the one hand complete disorganization being produced by the
Ionians.”— ἐοῦσαν = γινόμενα, line 1.— ἅμα μὲν, ἅμα δὲ : as 104. 3,
vii. 8. 31. — ¿Sékoνto toùs λóyous: Stein suggests that it is not
without purpose that the acceptance of the propositions is hid-
den as it were among the extenuating reasons. The historian
seeks, as far as practicable, to clear his friends the Samians,
among whom he found a home at one time.
7. kateþaívetó: finite verb co-ordinate with partc., as often in
Hdt.; 19. 4, 21. 11, 25. 9, 49. 9, 70. 15, 74. 7, 128, 9, vii. 6. 11, 10.
60, 95. 3.— ådúvara: a similar use of the plural also 31. 12, 52. 31,
77. 7, 106. 11, vii. 16. 39, 120. 9, 162. 8, 185. 2, 238.4; cf. 46. 1, 33.
2, 86. 26.
9-10. εἰ ὑπερβαλοίατο: assimilation for ἣν ὑπερβάλωνται, not-
withstanding Tapéστai: H. 934; G. 247 n. 1; C. 548.--vπeрßa-
λolato: S. 65.- Tòv Aapeîov of the MSS. seems best rejected, in
preference to many emendations suggested. — teνtaπλýσlov: a
πενταπλήσιον
rhetorical exaggeration, many of which occur in our author from
his constant desire to set matters in their most striking light;
see 112. 13. Even the fleet of Xerxes numbered but 830 triremes,
apart from the Hellenic and Carian contingents.
11. ἐπιλαβόμενοι : cf. 49. 9, 91. 10, 94. 6. ἐπείτε: on 9.7.
13. ipà: S. 17; see 9. 18. This rule for the form is based on
NOTES.-VI. 12–16.
201
deductions from the MSS.; but it is to be observed that such
Ionic inscriptions as have been discovered exhibit the uncon-
tracted iepós till the fourth century B.C.
14-15. ŏTEU: Hdt., after Hm., sometimes uses the indefinite rel.
without distinction from the simple; 47. 3, vii. 196. 11.—Syloson
was brother of the famous Polycrates, tyrant of Samos.
VI. 14.
1. TÓTE v serve to resume the current of narrative.
2. kaì avtoì, “for their part also;" 103. 2, 97. 2; on 51. 3.
3. ȧyxoû ¿yívovто, "were come near;" for this usage of yívoμai
compare 77. 2, 23. 1, 43. 7, 19. 5, 129. 6.
4. tò évbeûtev, "then;" construe after oCTIVES: cf. 43. 11, vii.
146. 11.
10. ávηkovotýσavres: construed with the dat. after the analogy
of åπeiðéew: on 12. 20.
12-13. πaтρóðev: with their own names as sons of so-and-so;
an honorable distinction. Compare the words of Agamemnon
bidding Menelaus awaken the chieftains for council, Hm. K 68:
πατρόθεν ἐκ γενεῆς ὀνομάζων ἄνδρα ἕκαστον, πάντας κυδαίνων; and
the Teian inscription, Ditt. Syl. 165 30.-ws: cf. 25. 3, 30. 13.
15-16. Σαμίοισι: Η. 773 a; G. 186; C. 436.— ὣς: epic for οὕτω :
mainly with dè κaí in Hdt., as with κaí, ovd', µnd' in Attic prose;
cf. 76. 10. See Phaeacians, 【 1.—πλeûves: S. 51.
VI. 15.
1-2. περιέφθησαν τρηχύτατα, “ were treated most roughly;” 44.
12.-&s, "because, as they alleged;" cf. 15. 7.
5-9. ἐπιβατεύοντας: on 12. 5, vii. 184. 8. προδιδόντας, “ desert-
ing."-
” ἐδικαίευν : S. 74. ἐς δ: S. 56; Ionic for ἕως.
VI. 16.
4. тpwµάtwv: S. 20. The ships are personified, as viii. 18 and
Hm. § 383, where their wounds are being "healed;" cf. vii. 236.
22.-dè: in apodosis, as so often in Hm. and Hdt.; 52. 29; cf.
vii. 51. 2, 153. 14, 159. 8.
5–7. avtoû taúty: common adverbial pleonasm in Hdt.-éro-
κείλαντες, “ beaching;” cf. vii. 182. 3. — οἱ δὲ : on 3. 5. ἐκομίζοντο,
“proceeded.”—éσéßadov és : The repetition of the same or a kin-
dred preposition after the compound has but the feeblest begin-
ning in Hm.; see Phaeacians, 106. In Hdt. its development
9*
202
HERODOTUS.
is extensive; as here, 16. 10, 36. 8, 75. 20, 84. 9, 95. 8, 12. 23, 90. 2,
68. 2, 95. 9, 101. 13, 125. 15; see on 24. 1, 25. 5, 27. 12, 31. 9, 33. 5,
44. 5, 72. 7, 94. 1, 97. 7.
8–9. VUKτós: parallel with the gen. absolute, as vúkTwp kaì dopú-
βου ὄντος, Xen. Αn. iii. 4. 35. — γὰρ: on 5. 6. ἐόντων θεσμοφορίων,
"while the Thesmophoria was being celebrated;" cf. 67. 5, 87. 7,
126. 7. The Thesmophoria was a harvest festival in honor of
Demeter and Kore, celebrated at night, in the open air, in some
uninhabited portion of the territory, and without the presence
of any male person.-- évbaûra dǹ: cf. 13. 2.
ἐνθαῦτα δὴ:
11-12. πάγχυ καταδόξαντες, “ frmly convinced.”—ἰέναι ἐπὶ: ex-
pecting to carry them off and sell them.
VI. 17.
5–6. ỏ Sè: on 3. 5.— Hdt. uses idéws, less frequently iðús (evðús,
Stein) in the sense "straightway," 10ú, "straight for," iėús, adj.
"straight." Bredow, Dial. Herod. pp. 113–14. — yaúλous: mer-
γαύλους:
chant vessels, broad and roundish, named from their resemblance
to a bucket; cf. 119. 14.— kaтadúσas, “having crippled."
9. The Carthaginians and Etruscans were very powerful by
sea at this time, and carried on an extensive trade; cf. vii. 158. 8.
VI. 18.
4. Kaт' ǎкρηs: Homeric; "from citadel to lower town.". ἕκτῳ
Teï: The chronology of this period is scarcely determinable
with certainty. Stein presents the following table:
B.C. 499. Expedition against Naxos; revolt of Aristagoras.
498. Burning of Sardis; Ionians joined by Cypriotes and
Carians.
497. Cyprus reduced; death of Aristagoras; return of His-
tiaeus.
496. Miletus beleaguered; battle of Lade.
494. Miletus captured.
493. Reduction of the islands (vi. 31).
492. Expedition of Mardonius Thraceward (vi. 43).
491. Thasos captured; sending of heralds; fresh prepara-
tions (vi. 46–8).
490. Expedition of Datis; battle of Marathon (vi. 94).
6–7.
6-7. συμπεσεῖν, " tallied with.”— τῷ . . . γενομένῳ, " which had
been put forth in relation to Miletus;" cf. 13. 1, 57. 19, 75. 19.
NOTES.-VI. 16-19.
203
VI. 19.
1-2. Xpeoμévolor: S. 72. xpáw, to deliver oracle, xpáoμai, to
consult.— πeρì σwrnpíns: in the war against the Lacedaemonians
under Cleomenes, below 76-81. Note the sigmatismus in this
clause; cf. 47. 10.—ěπíkolvov, “joint.”
3–5. tò þépov és, tò ĕxov ès: on 2. 1.— expnσe : sc. ǹ IIvớín; 77.
8, vii. 140. 4, 141. 11, 148. 13; cf. 27.1; on 13. 7.—éπeàv: S. 31.—
Kaтà T. yév.: în 14. 3; cf. vii. 77. 3.— yévwμaι: H. 898; G. 232. 3;
C. 554.—TOû λóyou: partitive, limiting TOTO. Hdt. usually
names the separate divisions of his work λóyou, the whole work
λóyos: cf. 39. 8, vii. 152. 13, 213. 12; but what constituted the
separate λóyoɩ is not known. The arrangement by Books as we
have it was probably introduced by the Alexandrian grammari-
ans.
8. Kai TÓTE dý," and then too." This properly follows 77. 13.
The numerous Delphic oracles which Hdt. cites were probably
obtained from the priests of the temple there, and when metri-
cal are all but one (i. 174) in the epic metre, and phrased in
epic diction. Two (iv. 157, 159) are in the Doric dialect.-
Míλnte... ĕpywv: cf. Hm. π 418. The expression here may find
Μίλητε
its explanation in the fact that the oracle was delivered some
time after the visit of Aristagoras to Greece. It would then be
one of the many instances of the Laconizing tendency at Delphi,
as Sparta had refused to aid the Ionians.
9. Sŵpa, "rich gift;" poetic plural of excellence, as Hm. ¥ 297;
on vi. 109. 11. Longinus commends such an interchange of
numbers, as tending to adorn and enliven the narrative, and to
elevate the language (De Subl. 23); on 21. 11.
10. Koμńτaιs: The long and carefully curled hair and beard
of the Persians are conspicuous in the sculptures of Persepolis
and Behistun, and this feature is imitated in many of the archaic
statues in the Cesnola Collection from Cyprus.
11. Aidúμois: poetic for év Aidupoort, as below, line 15. Didyma
was the name of the place also called Branchidae, situated in the
territory of Miletus, about twelve miles south of the city near the
coast. It was famous for its temple of Apollo.
12. κατελάμβανε, “ befel.” ·ÓKÓTE, “since," as ii. 125.
14. ἐν . . .
• èyívovтo, "were held in the condition of slaves;" cf.
23. 23, vii. 222. 5.
15. ipòv is the whole precinct of the temple with its contents,
204
HERODOTUS.
.
statues, altars, shrines. Within this were the temple and oracle,
the latter in a different building, at the time of Strabo.
16. σvλnlévтa: H. 615; G. 138 n. 2. cf. vii. 129. 4.
17. πολλάκις . . . ἐποιησάμην: only i. 92, ii. 159, ν. 36; hence
v.
there seems something of his characteristic exaggeration; on 13.
10, 77. 14; cf. Xen. An. ii. 6. 4, i. 1. 9.
The temple had been richly endowed by Croesus, and even
Neco of Egypt had contributed to its adornment. Leading
down to the sea was a straight road bordered on either side by
statues on chairs, in the archaic style of the 6th century B.C.,
some of which are now in the British Museum, and have fur-
nished inscriptions of great value to the history of Greek epig-
raphy.
VI. 20.
2. σdeas kakòν: H. 725; G. 165; C. 402; cf. 119. 8, vii. 5. 8.
3. KaтOíkɩσe: S. 60.—'Epv0pĤ: the Persian Gulf.
4. πόλι : S. 46. παρ' ἣν : S. 56.
7. IIndaσevoi, "of Pedasa;" to the south of Miletus. —KTĤ-
olaι: S. 59; supplemental inf. of purpose; cf. 23. 24, 90. 5, 81. 2.
VI. 21.
1-2. πρòs: on 26. 10; cf. 9. 7, 45. 6, 88. 1, 106. 7, vii. 35. 7.—
τὴν ὁμοίην : sc. μοῖραν, or δίκην: cf. 62. 6-11. Laus and Scidrus
lay on the west coast of Lucania, Italy.
3-5. ἁλούσης : Β.C. 510. — ἡβηδὸν : properly with the whole body
of men capable of bearing arms; but here in the wider sense of
the entire people.— άπeкeípaνто: according to ii. 36 this was a
mourning custom common to all other nations but the Egyp-
tians; cf. vii. 208. 13, 209. 16.— πpoσedńkaνтo, “imposed on them-
selves."
6. Tóλies avta: rare omission of the
noun is usually post-positive; cf. 98. 8;
strengthens the superlative.-Sµev: S. 4.
•
article; then the pro-
vii. 8. 28, 11. 20. δὴ
7. oùdèv: asyndeton as 3. 8. The thought reverts to line 2.-
kai, "as," after opoíws and similar words of likeness; cf. vii. 15.
14, 84. 3, 50. 10-17.Αθηναῖοι Αθηναῖοι: the figure epanastro-
phe, often employed by the Greeks, and praised by their rheto-
ricians; Hermog. 286; Tib. 552; Alex. 446. See 79. 4, 106. 13.
8-9. δῆλον ἐποίησαν ἐδήλωσαν: hence construed with the
supplementary partc.—Tây ăλλŋ: the article with aλλn is Hero-
dotean, and usually local; 48. 3.
NOTES.—VI. 19–22.
205
10. Ppuvíxo: remote dat. of interest. Phrynichus was a dis-
ciple of Thespis the founder of tragedy, and somewhat the senior
of Aeschylus, though his contemporary. He began to exhibit
tragedies about 511 B.C.; in them the lyric element was still pre-
dominant.— Sɩdáğavrı: the technical expression for the produc-
tion of a play, since the poet himself did much towards training
the chorus and the players.
11. Oéŋrpov: quoted by Longinus as example of a collective
sing., equivalent to pl.; see on 19. 9.— ús represents the senti-
ments of the Athenians.
12. oikńia: Athens considered herself the mother city of Mile-
tus.
13. xpâolai: for the purpose of representation; an indication
of comparative paucity of tragedies at that time. Towards the
close of the century they were offered in such abundance that
only those of the great masters were allowed repetition.
VI. 22.
1. Μίλητος . . . ἠρήμωτο : “ New Grecian inhabitants must have
been subsequently admitted into Miletus; for it appears ever
afterwards as a Grecian town, though with diminished power
and importance." Grote.
2. toîσí ti ěxovơɩ: the well-to-do.
3. Tŵv opetépwv: the second attributive position, most formal
and stately. For the first, or most succinct (ovvróμws, Arist. Rh.
iii. 5), see below, line 7, Tòv autòv xpóvov: and for the third, same
line, Zaykλaîoι oi årò Eikeλíns. The last is a favorite with Hdt.
and his admirer Lucian, but not very common in the best Attic.
—ποιηθὲν: on 13. 1.
4. Tρivй: with inf. as usual when depending on an affirmative
primary clause; 87.2; cf. vii. 2. 5 ; on vi. 82. 7. The й is mostly
omitted in Attic, but reappears in later Greek.
6. µŋdè, “and not,” in Ionic may connect with an affirmative
clause, but in Attic prose only with a negative.
7. ἀπὸ: by a common attraction to πέμποντες: otherwise, ἐν
Σικελίῃ.
9. "Iovas: The Zanclaeans were from the Ionic Chalcis in Eu-
boea.- Kaλnv åктýν, “Fair Strand."
10. aŭтη: intruded by hyperbaton, as 27. 7, 69. 16, 92. 9, vii. 15.
14, 151.6; on 41. 10.
11–12. kaλeoµévη: on 85. 3.— Zɩkeλŵv: predicate gen. of posses-
206
HERODOTUS.
sion.—πρòs . . . Zikeλins, “and a part of Sicily facing towards
Etruria;" on the north coast.— Zukeλíns: partitive chorographic
gen.; cf. 47. 5, vii. 33. 3, 175. 11, etc.
13. ἐστάλησαν, " departed ;” sc. ἐς τὴν ἀποικίην: the passive
with middle meaning, as 35. 16; cf. 9. 14.
14. ἐν ᾧ: S. 56. -- συνήνεικε, " chanced ;” S. 12.
VI. 23.
2. Дoxpoîσi: colonized from the Locri Ozolae. Their city was
on the southern coast of Bruttium. Their famous code of laws,
framed by Zaleucus, is said to have been the first reduced to
writing among the Greeks.
3-4. Tepikaтéato: S. 67; cf. 28. 2.— Σɩkedŵv: occupying the in-
terior of the island. Rhegium was on the Italian side of the
Sicilian Straits, opposite Zancle. The name of the latter was
changed to Messana by Anaxilaus, a few years later.
5. 'Avagíλews: S. 41. He reigned 494-476 B.C. See vii. 164-
65.— BOTE: on 5.5.
6. ovµµížas, “having come to a conference with;" vii. 29. 3,
153.2.
7. åvaπeídel ús eiŋ: the historical present is a past tense in se-
quence.
8. eâv xaípeɩv, "to bid farewell to.”—σxeîv, "to take posses-
sion of;" inceptive aor., as line 9, and 25. 7, 36. 5; cf. 34. 4.
11. éwuTŵv: in this rare predicate position also ii. 26. 3, 107. 5,
ix. 33. 26, 37. 15; oftener in late Greek; see on 30. 7.— 'Iππокpά·
Tea: see vii. 154 seq. He reigned 498-491 B.C.
13. σúμμaxos: according to vii. 154, rather the supreme lord
of the city. kaì, actually;" 10. 4.
((
14. Bonbéwv: pres. partc. also 88. 9, 108. 3 and 34; on vii. 158. 10.
15. s, "on the allegation that."-ITTокрárηs: unnecessary
after 13, but see on 27. 12, 3.5; Hm. ℗ 367–8.
16. "Ivuka: probably in the neighborhood of Agrigentum.
19. eipnµévos, “agreed upon;" Hes. Op. 370; cf. Hm. ℗ 524.—-
öde: predicate; hence no article with µươlòs.
20–21. tà ýµíoea: taking gender and number from its limiting
genitive.—τῶν ἐν τῇ πόλι: ingenious separation from ἀνδραπόδων,
producing partial chiasm with following clause; cf. 25. 6, 33.
18-19.
22-23. Ιπποκράτεα: with both μεταλαβείν and λαγχάνειν: 45.
11, 57. 10.— είχε δήσας: on 12. 14.
NOTES.-VI. 22-26.
207
VI. 24.
1. μούναρχος: S. 24.— ἐκ . . . ἐκδιδρήσκει: cf. 26. 3, 90. 3, 5. 14,
12. 12, 82. 10, 86. 62, 91. 6, 121. 7, 122. 10, 125. 19, 137. 2, 137. 26,
139. 14, 140. 6; on 16.7.
2. Ιμέρην was founded from Zancle.— ἐκ ταύτης : 72. 8.
3. åvéßn: ává in composition is rarely repeated with the ac-
companying substantive, but other prepositions often define the
thought more clearly, as rapà, 24. 5, 30. 8, 32. 7, 41. 13, 104. 5;
ès, 9. 24, 30. 11, 83. 4, 94. 13, 86. 42, 109. 19, 119. 3; éπí, 28. 4, 79.
11, 96. 7; év, 14. 12; úπó, 104.8; on 16.7.
4. Sikaιóтatov: because he kept his word to return. Notable
examples to the contrary were Histiaeus, v. 107, and the physi-
cian, Democedes, iii. 135.
5. κai, "aye," "so," reiterates the preceding sentiment.
paltnσáμevos, “having asked permission of."
па-
6-7. avτis: S. 1.- Supply before ès 8, "and remained there."
Some addition of this kind is frequently needed with suchı
clauses, though it is commonly implied in a preceding imperfect;
40. 8, 75. 11.— yńpaï, “at an advanced age;” cf. ynpaiús, 107. 7.–
μéya, with ŏìẞɩos: poetic phrase; cf. vii. 190. 9.
VI. 25.
3. ús: on 14. 13.— yevóµevov, “having proved himself.”
5. åtoσtávtwv åπò: so, 9. 16, 33. 1, 81. 7, 92. 8, 119. 10; with ék,
5. 9, 14. 8, 34. 10, 45. 7, 50. 11, 61. 23, 64. 7, 99. 1, 130. 10, 136. 2;
on 16. 7.
9. προσηγάγοντο : on 13. 7.
VI. 26.
4–5. πepì . . . ĕxovra, "relating to the Hellespont;" cf. iii. 128.
περὶ
6; Xen. Hel. vii. 4. 28. xw with adverbs and adverbial expres-
sionseiµí: 17. 5, 19. 7, 31. 1.
7. προσιεμένῃ μιν, " admitting him.”
10. ἐκ, “by;” cf. Xen. An. iv. 5. 35: ἐκεκάκωτο ὑπὸ τῆς πορείας.
ex and πpós in Ionic often for iró with gen.; quite rare in Attic
prose, but reappearing in late Greek. See ek, 13. 1, 22. 2, 42. 1,
42. 12, 43. 2, 58. 1, 61. 27, 78. 5, vii. 11. 14, 16. 41, 18. 18, 148. 6,
149. 10, etc.; πрós, 2. 8, 21. 1, 38. 9, 52. 37, 57. 18, vii. 2. 11, 16. 10,
18. 13, 60. 3, 135. 11, 151. 9, 153. 19; àπó, 98. 10, vii. 102. 5; πapá,
54. 2, vii. 103. 12.
铺
​208
HERODOTUS.
VI. 27.
1. piλée: see line 10, vii. 10. 52, 236. 7; on 37. 10. Κως,
"doubtless;" 51. 5. — Herodotus's belief in dreams, omens, and
oracles is one of the most prominent traits of his character, and
strongly influenced his tone of thought and views touching the
events of history. In vi. alone prodigies are mentioned, 27. 3,
27. 6, 61, 69, 82, 98, 105, 117, 127, 134; dreams, 107, 131; oracles
given in full, 19, 77, 86, 98; referred to, 34, 66, 76, 123, 125, 135,
139. In Thucydides there occurs neither prodigy nor dream,
and the few oracles mentioned are noticed merely as historical
facts; on 61. 24.— eût'âv: general supposition; H. 894 B; G. 233 ;
C. 554. Though elision is rare in Hdt., yet it is found occasion-
ally in all MSS., as well as in Ionic inscriptions. As here also
ii. 63. 3, vii. 193. 10; cf. vii. 141. 10.
2. Kakà: The theory is laid down in the case of Polycrates
(iii. 40), that great reverses of destiny are usually portended by
an uninterrupted course of good fortune; cf. vii. 10. 52.
3. toûto µév, toûto dè (line 6): a frequent anaphora in Hdt. for
Attic Tò μév, Tò dé; 44. 3, 69. 13, 101. 13, 107. 8, 114. 1, etc. It
occurs occasionally also in Sophocles and the orators.
4. xopòv: for competition in the Pythian musical contests.
6. vñoλaßùν: language borrowed from the province of storm-
winds; vii. 170. 10; cf. vi. 75. 4.
7. ToÛTOV: as 22. 10; cf. 22. 8; a favorite position with Hdt.
when autós is the attributive, occurring some fourteen times.
8. BσTE: with ind., as 46. 12, 83. 1, vii. 9. 24, 16. 33, 118. 4, 170.
17, 187. 7, 190. 3, 191. 3; cf. 5. 10.
9. år': used for the partitive gen. with els poûvos: cf. 90. 4,
vii. 52. 13.
10. oŋunia, "as portents;" predicate acc., hence no article. H.
726; G. 166; C. 404.-πрoédeţe: deíkvvμ has the stem deк- regu-
larly in Hdt., except in pres. and imperf.; S. 10.
11. ἐς γόνυ . . . ἔβαλε: a figure from the wrestling-match. This
throw was only a partial one; for a square throw, the antagonist
must be laid out upon his back, with shoulders touched down;
cf. Aesch. Suppl. 90, Pers. 930. This Histiaeus accomplishes, ka-
τаσтρоηv (line 13), carrying on the figure.
11–12. émì . . . ÉπEyéveтO: SO, 15. 4, 34. 9, 43. 8, 62. 8, 100. 2,
132. 4; with ès, 22. 9, 85. 16; on 16. 7. — Acoßíous äywv: cf. 26.
6-10. By such repetitions the historian seems to reprobate the
NOTES.-VI. 27-30.
209
part played by the Lesbians. Compare 23. 15, 137. 6-9-13, 12.
6; on 7. 8.
VI. 28.
5. avròs: unusual for ó dé; on 3.5; cf. 97. 5; Hm. & 194.
7–8. 'Atapvéos: on 4. 2, and 11. 8.—ús: with fut. parte. of pur-
pose, as 39. 13, 50. 14.— évbeûtev takes up 'Arapvéos, in order to
introduce the fact that Histiaeus expected to extend his raid
beyond the limits of Atarneus into the plain of the Caicus,
which, with its corn, belonged to the Mysians. For the colloca-
tion of articles, tòv σîtov tòv ẻk . . . tòv tôv M., cf. vii. 18. 10. The
triple article occurs ix. 25. 13, 81. 3.
11. ảπоßávτɩ, “having disembarked."
VI. 29.
3. χώρης: chorographic gen. cf. 22. 12, 47. 5. - συνέστασαν,
"continued the conflict;" cf. vii. 225. 5.-xpóvov éπì πoddóv: this
position of the preposition between noun and adj. occurs a few
times in Hdt., mainly with xpóvov éπì; see 57. 7, 77. 2; cf. 130.7;
in Attic prose scarcely found.
5. tó ... ¿yéveto, “and so that victory was due to the cavalry ;"
cf. 120. 6.
8-9. φιλοψυχίην . . . ἀναιρέεται, " catches at some such fond
hope of life as this.”— karedaµßávero, “he was overtaken,” re-
κατελαμβάνετο,
peated in the synonymous кaтaιpeóμevos: on 7.8; cf. 31.5, 87. 9,
91. 3, 98. 5, 103. 10.
11. μereìs, “uttering," "speaking;" cf. 37. 14. The partc. is
coincident with, not prior to, кataµnvúel; cf. 21. 8, 103. 7, 123. 9,
129. 21, vii. 24. 8, 154. 19, 157. 20. This is especially common when
the partc. denotes cause or means. Phaeacians, v 58.—ws, “to
the effect that."
VI. 30.
1. åyóμevos, “when he was being led," "when on the way;"
see below, line 6. The partc. forms a picturesque addition to
the kindred verb, with parechesis; cf. vii. 10. 7, vi. 89. 9, 91. 9,
68. 9, 29.9; on vii. 175. 7, 222. 2.
2. out': elision as 86, vii. 8, 37, 101, 115, 135.— âv čπaße: unreal
supposition; H. 895; G. 222; C. 537.— Sokéelv, "as it seems;" ab-
solute inf.; vii. 173. 22, 229. 16; with &s: 95. 14; cf. vii. 24. 1.
3. ảπîкé: sudden change of subject to the king; cf. vii. 147.
4, Hm. § 112.-vûv dé, "but as it was;" on vii. 50. 19.-μv: taken
up partitively, in lines 7 and 8. See on 61. 14.
210
HERODOTUS.
;
6. λaßùv: for position, see 40. 3, 49. 2.
7. avtoû: unusual position, becoming very common in late
Greek. Still, when emphatic, or semi-reflexive as here and 111.
14, it is occasionally admitted in Attic. See Trans. Am. Philo-
log. Assoc. 1882, p. 40.- avтoû Taúry: as 16. 5. For avroû close
after avτoû, see 46. 9-10, vii. 23. 2–3, 40. 1, 184. 3-4, 188. 5.
10. According to i. 137 neither the king nor other Persian
could lawfully put any one to death without striking a balance
of his good and evil deeds and finding that the latter prepon-
derated; cf. vii. 194. 10.
12. ev: postpositive; on 3. 2; cf. 135. 13, 137. 10.
13. &s: 25. 3.—µeyáλws: for an adv. to qualify a noun without
the article is rare; cf. vii. 103. 14.
14. Eveρyéтew: see Epitome, Book IV. These benefactors re-
ceived great rewards; Hdt. viii. 85; Esther, vi.
VI. 31.
5. ὅκως λάβοι : on 12. 3.— ὡς ἑκάστην, " each separately;” so
that the entire force could be brought to bear at each place.-
és intensifies the distributive force of éкáστηy: a favorite expres-
sion with Thucydides.— aipéovтes: on 29. 9.
7–8. åvǹp åvdpòs: parechesis; on 12. 15. Construe åvdpòs with
ἁψάμενος.--- χειρός : partitive.
(C
9. διήκουσι, they extend their line.”—– Sià . . . Siépxovtai: cf.
12. 4, 125. 18, 134. 9; on 16. 7.
11–12. Katà Tavrá, “in the same way;" cf. vii. 10. 54.— oîá t':
on 13. 7.
VI. 32.
24. οὐκ...Ἴωσι: imitated from Hm. v 125: οὐδ᾽ ἐνοσίχθων λήθετ'
ἀπειλάων, τὰς ἀντιθέῳ Ὀδυσῆϊ πρῶτον ἐπηπείλησε. — οὐκ ἐψεύσαντο,
"did not belie." ἀπειλάς : see 9. 20. ἐπεκράτησαν : on 23. 8.
6. ȧvrì eîvai: Here and vii. 170. 14, i. 210 the infinitive occurs
without the article, though governed by a preposition, a tenta-
tive construction not found in Attic. The inf. with article is
rather rare in Hdt., occurring some 32 times only, and is merely
prefigured in Hm. v 52; cf. 67. 8, 86. 57, vii. 6. 5, 10. 44, 10. 59,
18. 9, 28. 4, 114. 7, 135. 15, 137. 9, 236. 7.
7–8. taûtá te dǹ èπoíeuv: compare 7. 8 and note.— auroîσi, “and
all;” H. 774; G. 188. 5; C. 441; in Hm. sometimes with σúv: so
Xen. Cyr. ii. 2. 9; Hdt. ii. 111; Eur. Ion 32; Hipp. 1213.
10. vrò Avdwv: under Croesus.- Sìs: first under Cyrus.
NOTES.-VI, 30–34.
211
VI. 33.
2. korλéovri, “as one sails in;" H. 771 b; G. 184. 5; C. 435.
ἐσπλέοντι,
The plural in this idiom is rare; see vii. 184. 8, v. 53.—TOû ‘Eλ-
Anotóvrov: to be construed with ȧptoTepà: vii. 39. 19. For the
separation, see 42. 8, 39. 7.
3-4. avтoîoi: contrasted with the naval force, consisting of
Phoenicians.- úπоɣeíριa ην yeyovóta: see 44. 7, 107. 19, 119. 7, 33.
17, and on vii. 190. 10.— кat' žπeɩpov, “by land.”—ai: sc. xôpai :
see line 11.
5–7. év...ĕvelσi: so, 38. 5, 56. 5; with és, 75. 6, 84. 5, 85. 13, 119.
16; on 16. 7.— Perinthus and Selymbria were on the north shore
of the Propontis.
9-11. čow ès: emphatic, as ii. 149, 175, iv. 34, 201, viii. 4, 18.—
Mesambria was on the east coast of Thrace, and had been
founded, like Byzantium and Calchedon, many years before from
Megara; hence oйkŋσav, “settled in.”
12-13. Пpoкóvvησov: an island in the Propontis, north of Cyzi-
cus. Artace was on the west side of the peninsula of Cyzicus.—
veíμavтes, "having consigned."
16. ěπλwσav: S. 19. — ȧpxýv: adverbial with a negative; “at
all."
19. Dascylium was the capital of Darius's third satrapy, which
comprised all northern and central Asia Minor; on 42. 4.
VI. 34.
1. Kapdíns: Cardia was on the north-west side of the Cherso-
nese, near the head of the gulf Melas.
3. Here we enter upon one of the many episodes of Herodotus,
in which, like his master Homer ('Oµýpov Šnλwrǹs yevóμevos, Dion.
Hal. Epist. ad Pomp. 3), he so excels; on vii. 171. 2.— µéxpi tóte:
a connection rarely found; Thuc. viii. 24. 3.— Miλriádŋs: the sec-
ond; see genealogical table, 38. 3.
7. 'Aчiveíwv: Thracians north of the Chersonese.
8. IIvlín: the Pythian priestess who gave utterance to the
oracles from the tripod; these were then taken down and versi-
fied by the роpîraι in attendance; on vii. 111. 8.
9. åveîde: technical term for the response of the oracle and
prophets; 69. 16.
11. ἰόντες belongs with ὁδὸν, ἤισαν with διὰ Φωκέων, so that, as
Krüger says, the expression is not parallel with 30. 1.- The
212
HERODOTUS.
Sacred Road ran from Delphi to Thebes, thence over Cithaeron
to Eleusis and Athens. It was the ordinary route for theoroi
and processions to the shrine, and these were under the protec-
tion of the god while on the way.- Pwкéwy: on vii. 176. 20.
12. κaí σpeas: Hdt. follows Hm. in his preference for placing
the enclitic pronouns close to the head of the clause, and freely
appends them to κaí, yáp, dé, and other particles, without regard
to natural order; cf. 41. 7, 50. 7–9, 61. 14, 63. 2, 69. 20, 85. 5, 92.
14, 111. 8.
VI. 35.
2. τηvɩkaûta: during the first tyranny of Pisistratus, and con-
temporaneous with Croesus, about 560 B.C.; see 37.5.
4–5. tebρittoтpópov: for contest in the great games; cf. 36. 2,
103.6. This required an ample fortune.—rà åvékalev, “in days
of yore;" adverbial, as rà veúтepa. The article is often used with
the adverb; 11. 8, 14. 4, 86. 48, 98. 13.
7. Observe the vivid picture presented to us here, and com-
pare vi. 125, 128–30, 134.
9. oùк ¿yxwpíŋv, i. e. not Athenian. — aixµàs: The custom of
wearing weapons habitually, which prevailed throughout Greece
in early days, had already fallen into disuse among the Atheni-
ans, who were the first to abandon it.-πpoσeßúσaro: S. 21.—
Herodotus well appreciates and graphically depicts the engag-
ing humanity of the Athenian character which here exhibits it-
self in such courteous hospitality, so richly rewarded.
12-13. ἐκφήναντες : on 7. 8. αὐτοῦ μιν: the subject of the inf.
is seldom expressed after déco0ai: here it shows the urgency
with which they dwell upon his accepting. See 41. 16, 100. 3
and 15.
14. ételσe ó λóyos: cf. vi. 124. 4, vii. 41. 2.
17. el molíŋ: indirect deliberative question. For the form,
see S. 71, and the Teian inscription, I. G. A. 497, A. 10.
VI. 36.
1. KEλEVOúons: imperf. partc. to picture the persistency of the
command; cf. 41. 15, vii. 149. 2, vi. 46. 3, iii. 58, i. 159, v. 82.
2. The expression 'Oλúμmia àvapaiрnkùs originates from the
Homeric déia áveλóvtes, ¥ 736, by transfer of prize to contest
itself, the prize now being insignificant compared with the glory.
See 70. 14, 103. 6, 125. 26.
3. τὸν βουλόμενον: Pisistratus must have been pleased to be
NOTES.-VI. 34–37.
213
rid of his most dangerous opponents, and Solon also is said to
have favored the undertaking.
7. ἐκ ... Πακτύην : from sea to sea.
9. εἰσὶ οὗτοι : by attraction for ἔστι τοῦτο: Η. 632; cf. 139. 6,
vii. 5. 15, ii. 29, viii. 8.
10. looμoû limits σrádio: cf. vii. 199. 6, Xen. An. 1, 10, 1: TérTA-
ρες παρασάγγαι τῆς ὁδοῦ. The expression is an inverted one.
11. čơw: cf. vii. 22. 16, vi. 44. 6.— ẻσTì: Note the accent which
Stein prefers from the MSS.; cf. 47. 5, 47. 8, 68. 5, 68. 9, 57. 13.-
στadíwv: predicate gen. of measure.
VI. 37.
3. Tŵv Xoɩπŵv: Sc. toλeµíwv; cf. v. 97.- Lampsacus was on the
opposite Asiatic coast, nearly south of Cardia.
5-6. ἦν γνώμῃ γεγονώς, “ was much in the thoughts,” “ well
known and esteemed;" only here.
8. ei Sè µý: H. 906; on 56. 5.
τὸ:
10. λóyoɩɩ, “explanations."— Tò: for or or rí. In indirect
λόγοισι,
questions and in clauses dependent on verbs of perception and
saying, Hdt. uses the simple relative very often; 124. 7, 129. 3,
132. 4, vii. 26. 6, 37. 11, 148. 10.— Oéλel: S. 55. This use of béλw
(cf. velle sibi), attributing will and choice to inanimate things, is
cited by Hermogenes (317) as a figure lending charm to style;
cf. vii. 10. 46, 16. 31, 37. 11, 50. 14, 50. 21, 157. 23, 162. 7, vi. 27. 1.
It is transferred even in Hm. from persons (N 106, 0 223) to
things (ovd³ [üdwp] ë0eλe πpopéew, Þ 366); cf. Solon. 4. 28, Hdt.
ii. 99, Eur. Hipp. 857, 862, 865. Plato and subsequent writers also
employ βούλομαι often in the same way.— ἀπείλησε : 32. 3.
11. трóπov: 31. 7; on 86. 62.— KOTÈ, “at length;" i. 116. 7, v.
80. 1.
12. τῶν τις πρεσβυτέρων : this position of τις is the usual one
in Hdt. (some 23 times), and presents the single exception of
such intrusion without an accompanying attributive, save that
of a few enclitic pronouns which fall under the principle laid
down on 34. 12. In Attic Greek an attributive must accompany
the noun which admits the intruded rìs. Later writers some-
times follow Hdt. See on 41. 11, 5.8; 75. 11, 80. 4, vii. 143. 2,
146. 8.— Tò ẻov,“the truth;” 50. 12, 3. 4.
14. πανώλεθρος ἐξαπόλλυται: on 12. 15. The real meaning of
Croesus is rather to be found in a punning allusion to the former
name of the town, Πιτυόεσσα, and of its inhabitants, Πιτυοεσσηνοί.
214
HERODOTUS.
VI. 38.
1. Sià, "by the aid of;" Hm. 0 520.-μerà: adverbial, and
thus exhibiting the final relic of that original use of the preposi-
tion which the Homeric poems present in all the different stages
of development into the proper preposition. This development,
which is there found far advanced in many phases, is practically
completed in Hdt., and occasional instances of the adv. with dé
and light tmeses with &v, dé, etc., are all that remain of the earlier
idiom; cf. 4. 1, 11. 2, 11. 4, 61. 16, 62. 8, 70. 14, 86. 21, 95. 16, 97.
13, 110. 3, 114. 3, 120. 6, 125. 17, 126. 1, 128. 4, 129. 12, 129. 15,
134. 8; Phaeacians, v 116. In Attic prose this is confined to
πρός, but the Ionic use of ἐπί and μετά appears later.
3. For the position of óµoµητpíov see on 85. 3, vii. 61. 10; cf.
vi. 103. 8. Miltiades and Cimon were sons of the same mother
but of different fathers. The following is the genealogy of the
family, × representing the common mother, name unknown :
Cypselus X Stesagoras
Miltiades I.
Cimon I.
Olorus (39. 15)
Stesagoras
?
Miltiades II. Hegesipyle.
Metiochus.
Cimon II.
4. ús vóμos: sc. Oúew. He was worshipped as a hero; cf. vii.
117.
6. ἐγγίνεται = ἔξεστι: vii. 4. 6.
7. karéλaße, “it chanced;" cf. 103. 4, 103. 13, vii. 38. 10, 155.
2, 4. 4.
9. πρυτανηίῳ: on 103. 15. προς: on 26. 10.
10. vñolepµorépov, “somewhat too ardent a one;" cf. 75. 5.
VI. 39.
2. Toode: retrospective; on 10. 2.
4. kaтadaµwóµevov: S. 14; "to take the management."
5. Пelolorpatídaɩ: emphatic and favorite position for the sub-
ject in Hdt.; cf. 4. 11, 16. 7, 26. 4, 41. 10, 96. 4. —— This event oc-
curred after the death of Pisistratus; hence between 527 and
509 B.C.
NOTES.-VI. 38-40.
215
6. µiv éπoíevv eủ, "were wont to treat him well;" cf. 9. 14.—
δῆθεν : 1. 6.
7. Kíμwvos: bracketed by Cobet and Stein as otiose after line
3, but the repetition belongs under Hermogenes' rule laid down
on 7.7 2 (a). See Hm. B 671-73, and the catalogue of Cimon's
exploits below, 103. 6-20. For the position of avroû, see on 33. 2.
8. ἄλλῳ λόγῳ, " another section;” i. e. 103; cf. 19. 5.- σημα
véw: S. 64.
tt
θ. εἶχε κατ' οἴκους: sc. ἑωυτόν, " kept himself at home.”
10. δηλαδή: like δῆθεν. ἐπι- in ἐπιτιμέων: intensive.
11-12. πυνθανόμενοι: on 7. 3. οἱ δυναστεύοντες: limiting the
application of οἱ Χερσονησῖται. -- πάντοθεν : pleonastic after ἀπὸ
Taσéwv: cf. 126. 1, vii. 17. 9, 33. 6, 36. 24.- kol σróλy, “in public
procession."
oi
:
16. 'Hynoɩmúλny: According to some authorities Hegesipyle,
after the death of Miltiades, married an Athenian of rank, from
whom was born a son, Olorus, who was the father of the histo-
rian Thucydides. This is conjecture to reconcile conflicting
statements of antiquity. Some relationship between Thucydides
and Hegesipyle, however, cannot be denied.
VI. 40.
1. OUTOS Sè: For this use of ouros, see 127. 7–26, vii. 11. 1, 63.
6. The narrative returns, after the long episode, to 34. 2. Hence
the chronological arrangement of this and the following chap-
ters refers to the approach of the Phoenician fleet as there re-
cited.— ὁ Κίμωνος Μιλτιάδης : to distinguish him from the son
of Cypselus, 34. 4; the same order, vi. 130. 11, 131. 8, ii. 44, iii.
69, 74, 75, iv. 45; Eur. Iph. Aul. 468, 663, Med. 209. νεωστὶ
éλŋλúfee, “had but just come (back)," when the Phoenicians
drove him out. His expulsion by the Scyths, which the author
has not mentioned before, he now proceeds to relate. Hdt.
several times mentions an event as if well known and then re-
counts it (cf. vii. 6. 14); but here it is awkwardly done and has
occasioned much difficulty.
34. ἄλλα: the approach of the Phoenicians. τῶν καταλαβόν-
Twv: expulsion by the Scyths. — Tρítų ěTEï: 495 B.C., about 20
years after the expedition of Darius across the Danube into
southern Russia, from which he returned ingloriously. See vii.
10, and Epitome, Book IV.
5–6. ouveσtpádnσav: cf. 6. 3. They were under three kings;
iv. 120.
216
HERODOTUS.
8-10. ἐς 8: on 24. 7. τῶν κατεχόντων: expulsion by the Phoe
nicians. Note the change of tense from кaтaλaßóvтwv, line 3.
VI. 41.
3. σrep, "just as;" i. e. with his five ships intact; Thuc. viii.
23.
4. Méλavos: the gulf on the northwest side of the Chersonese.
5. TE-Kaì, "but when-then;" Homeric co-ordination; see
Phaeacians, 0 416. In this common feature of the style of Hdt.
Tè serves often as here to connect the sentence to the preceding;
cf. 134. 14, vii. 39. 1, 135. 1.— oi, “unfortunately for him;" ethical
dat.
6–7. tŷoɩ téσoepo: the article to mark the part of a whole;
H. 664.— Téσσepoɩ: S. 52.—oi: on 34. 12, and vii. 38. 13.
9. Construe ἔτυχε ἄρχων τῆς νεός.
10-11, τῆς Ὀλόρου ἐὼν θυγατρὸς : In general, between the article
and its noun only words or expressions which are in some way
attributive to the noun are admitted. When other words like
v here are found, with the exception of the postpositive par-
.ticles µév, dé, yé, etc., and, in Ionic Greek the enclitic pronouns
(on 34. 12, 37. 12), an attributive must accompany the noun and
habitually follows the article immediately. This intrusion of
the non-attributive element, called by the rhetoricians TeρẞаTÒV
кaľ vπéρðeσw (Hermog. 287, Anonymous, 644), begins to be for-
mulated in Hm. as I 524, ¥ 585, ß 403, µ 428, occurs occasion-
ally in the lyric poets and Aesch., very frequently in Soph. (once
in 24 pp.) and Eur., but rarely in Xen., Thuc., Plat., and the early
orators. Later its use increases in prose till it becomes a com-
monplace. It serves a variety of purposes, sometimes rhetorical,
sometimes merely rhythmical. It occurs in Hdt. once in about
7 pages; cf. 3. 4, 8. 4, 9. 15, 22. 10, 27. 7, 43. 2, 63. 1, 86. 19, 126.
12, vii. 26. 7, 96. 11, 160. 3, 172. 10, 184. 5, 229. 19, 236. 17. See
Trans. Am. Philolog. Assoc. 1882, pp. 34–49.
12. μv: an instance of prolepsis; H. 878; C. 519 5 Obs. 2; cf.
79. 10, 39. 7, vii. 18. 10, 208. 4, etc.
13. xápira: only here and ix. 107 in Hdt. for xápw.
14. katabńoeodaɩ, “to lay up store of;" cf. vii. 178. 9, 220. 24,
vi. 73. 11. A claim to gratitude was protection for the future;
on 30. 10.
15. åπedé§ato,“ expressed;" S. 10.
16. Aúσavτas: the acc. of the predicate partc. is regular after
NOTES. VI. 2–5.
193
in the western sea by the competition of the Ionians. Hence
their eager participation in this war; cf. 6, 28, 33.
VI. 4.
1. Meтà: on 38. 1. — Sɩ åyyéλou moleúμevos, “acting through
an envoy."
és
2. 'ATαρνeíTew: S. 36. Atarneus was a district on the coast
over against Lesbos, and belonged to the Chians, being their re-
ward from the Persian general Mazares for surrendering Pac-
tyas, who had instigated revolt among the Lydians after their
subjugation by Cyrus (i. 160); cf. below 28. 7.-IIepσéwv: S. 38.
3. ús πpodedeoɣnveuµévwv, “in reliance upon their having al-
ready conversed with him." s exhibits the grounds upon
which Histiaeus ventured to dispatch the letters. Rawlinson is
right as against Grote. Nothing is clearer than that Hdt. be-
lieved the subject had actually been talked over between them,
either while Histiaeus was in Sardis or earlier. It was no trap to
catch Artaphernes, into which he fell. For ås, see viii. 144. 25.
—πρodeλeσxηveuμévwv: the gen. instead of dat. gives greater inde-
pendence and therefore greater weight to the clause; cf. 84. 12,
85. 7, 86. 6, 86. 64.
4. Tép: this preposition alone suffers anastrophe in prose, and
only with the gen.-Toùs: S. 56. Supply ToÚTоioi as antecedent.
διδοῖ
5. Sidoî: S. 78. Hdt. is continually paraphrasing Homeric
expressions in his prosaic idiom. With φέρων ἐνεχείρισε Αρτα-
φέρνεϊ compare φέρων ἐν χερσὶν ἔθηκεν Δημοδόκῳ, Hm. θ 482.
9. Ewutą: S. 25, 54; Artaphernes.-ToÚTwv: masc. or neut.?
1. ἐγίνετο : S. 4.
VI. 5.
4. ǎoμevoɩ: laeti.-kaì, "already;" 102. 4.
5. Sékeσbai: S. 1.—ès: S. 10.-ola, "because of," as a reality,
not a conception like &s: cf. 12. 9, 26. 9, 35. 14, 46. 5, vii. 16. 2,
119. 4, 234. 16; so are, 45. 10, vii. 23. 10, 87. 4, 138. 7;
44. 15, 52. 13, vii. 129. 2, 233. 11; H. 977; G. 277. 6
C. 587. 6. This idiom is post-Homeric.
σTE, 23. 5,
n. 2 (b):
6. yap, "since;" so best translated when, as often, its clause
for rhetorical or other reasons anticipates its logical position;
see 5. 10, 11. 5, 16. 8, etc. Of this form of hyperbaton or pro-
lepsis the rhetorician Hermogenes says (418): où µóvov ẻσtì kaλòv
σχῆμα, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἀναγκαῖον,
9
194
HERODOTUS.
7. The construction of èπepâтo with partc. instead of inf. is
seen in its inception, Hm. 8 417, 184, where infinitives may be
supplied; fully naturalized in Hdt.; rare again in Attic. Cf. vi.
9. 16, 50. 4, vii. 139. 7, 148. 8; vi. 138. 19.
8. TEU: S. 57. For position, see 63. 4, 80. 2, vii. 226. 4, iii. 3,
16, iv. 150, viii. 138; on 37. 12.
θ. ἀπωστός γίνεται άπwbéeтαι. Hdt. is fond of such peri-
ἀπωθέεται.
phrases with γίνομαι. Cf. 4. 10, 37. 6, 64. 4, 66. 4, 74. 1, etc.
These sometimes serve to supply an unusual or missing verb-
form, sometimes to make the circumstance more noticeable, often
only to vary the expression.
10. où ěπeɩde, “he did not succeed in persuading;" imperf. of
attempted action, as 2. 6, 5. 2.-σTE: nearly pleonastic; see next
clause, and vii. 6. 3.
15. πàǹν în, “except;" see 31. 11.— aùTŵv: the Ionians; 26. 2.
He doubtless hoped in this way to bring them finally to terms,
and effect his recall. Miletus would suffer most under the block-
ade, in consequence of her numerous colonies and trading sta-
tions on the Pontus.
3. πολλὸς : S. 50.
VI. 6.
3. σrparnyol: the chief of these were Artaphernes and Otanes;
v. 123.
57. περὶ ἐλάσσονος ποιησάμενοι : on vii. 138. 4. Κύπριοι νεωστὶ
Kateσтρaµµévol: see Epitome, Bk. V.
καὶ
8. Kai... Te Kaì: cf. 33. 7, 19. 15, 128. 6, vii. 1. 8, 154. 12.
VI. 7.
3. πuvlavóμevoɩ: imperf. partc. to picture the reception of the
tidings in the several cities, or by messenger after messenger, as
39. 11, 41. 1, 77. 1. — πроßοúλous: representatives of the single
προβούλους
cities to the federal diet, as vii. 172.
4. Пavióviov: on the north side of the promontory of Mycale
in the territory of Priene.- ToÚTOLOL: S. 40.
τούτοισι
6. μὴ is usual with the inf. after the impersonal δοκεῖ.— Πέρο
σησι : S. 39.
7-8. πληροῦν-πληρώσαντας δὲ: the latter is a favorite form of
epanalepsis with Hdt. to resume the thread of discourse; cf. 35.
12, 67. 15; on 29. 9. Hermogenes (412) distinguishes three uses
of epanalepsis or repetition: 1. to impress a fact, or make a state-
ment clearer (the most common in Hdt.); 2. (a) to extol (cf. 39
NOTES.-VI. 40-43.
217
δέομαι.— σχεδίην: the bridge across the Danube left by Darius
in charge of the Ionians during his Scythian expedition, to be
destroyed after 60 days in case he did not return. See Epitome,
Book IV.
19. Mηtíoxov: on 23. 15.- For this characteristic clemency of
Darius, see 20. 3, 30. 10, 119. 8, and on vii. 4. 6.
21. kekoσµéatai: S. 67; “are accounted;" like étéλeov, 53. 6,
108. 26. The plural is used with neutr. pl. subject, as often in
Hm., and occasionally in Attic, especially when the subject refers
to persons; in Xen. most frequently-some 53 times. Later
Greek reverts to the idiom.
VI. 42.
1-2. κατά, “ during.” ἐκ: on 26. 10. — οὐδὲν ἐπὶ πλέον τούτων,
"nothing further than this."— veîkos, "enmity;" a poetic word.
– þépov: 19. 3.
3-4 κάρτα: on 3. 3, 43. 4. — ἔτεος: cf. 16. 8, 46. 14. — ὕπαρχος:
equivalent to Xenophon's σarpáπηя, a Persian word which does
not occur in Hdt., and was first naturalized by Ctesias and Xeno-
phon. Hdt. employs σarрarníŋ, i. 192, iii. 89, as a foreign word.
Darius divided his kingdom into 20 satrapies, the first of which
included the coast district inhabited by Greeks from Mysia
southerly and easterly to Cilicia; the second, of which Sardis
was the capital, comprised southern Mysia, Lydia, and the moun-
tainous region eastward to Cilicia. Both these were at times
united under one satrap. Zapdíwv represents the satrapy in these
expressions; vi. 1, 30, vii. 1.
5-6. σφίσι αὐτοῖσι: on 12. 10.— δοσίδικοι, “ law-abiding.”
•
7. φέροιέν ayouev: originally of chattels and cattle, in a
foray; with personal object they equal diapπáčew: 90.5.
cle.
8-9. xarà, “by."— Toùs, "as."--rà, "each;" distributive arti-
10-11. Sǹ resumptive; "I say." xatà xúpŋv, “in place,”
"unchanged;" as adv. with exovтes: on 26. 4. It must have
been rarely, however, after the battle of Mycale that these trib-
utes were paid by the Ionian cities.
13. Tà: for karà và: on 89.5; usually ós.
VI. 43.
1–2. xaí, “now.”— kataλedvµévwv: on 41. 10; exceedingly rare
position for partc. of gen. absolute; cf. iv. 144; Dem. de Cor. 18;
Eur. Herc. F.37.
10
218
HERODOTUS.
3. Gobryas was one of the seven noble Persians who over-
threw the false Smerdis and established Darius, one of their
number, king. See Epitome, Book III. He had married a sister
of Darius from whom Mardonius was born.
11. ἐνθαῦτα . . . ἐρέω: brachylogy for ἐνθαῦτα ἐγένετο ὅπερ μ. θ.
épéw: cf. 14. 4, vii. 115. 2.
η
12–13. 'EXλńvwv Пepoéwv: chiasm; cf. 75. 22. Hdt. is fond of
the partitive gen. even where there is no occasion for a partitive
idea, especially with participles; cf. 4. 2, 5. 14, 44. 13, 129. 2; on
vii. 104. 4, 168. 8. Otanes was one of the seven, and is here in-
cluded among those whom he addresses; see Phacacians, 47;
Hdt. iii. 84. 11. According to Hdt. (iii. 80) the opinion here re-
ferred to was expressed when the seven were deliberating after
the death of Smerdis as to the form of government to be estab-
lished. It has been inferred that that part of his work, having
been published first, had provoked criticism, and had been re-
jected by many as incredible. Afterwards he inserts here what
he deems convincing proof of his earlier statement, though it
appears actually to serve no such purpose.
16-18, κατίστα: S. 77.- συνελέχθη μὲν—συνελέχθη δὲ: anaphora;
cf. 43. 4, 79. 2–4, 112. 11, vii. 9. 12, 18. 9.—xpîµа: on vii. 188. 19.
20. ÉTOρEÚονTO Sè: for this form of epanalepsis, cf. 89. 9, 31. 6,
61.10.
VI. 44.
2. Tλeíoras: transferred from antecedent to relative clause;
H. 1008.
3-4. TOûTO µÈv: on 27. 3.-xeîpas åvт.: vii. 101. 9, 143. 17, 212.
6.
5-6, πρὸς . . . προσεκτήσαντο : 45. 10, 97. 4, 99. 2, 101. 9, 125. 11 ;
és, 99. 4, 119. 3; on 16. 7. —vπáρxovσɩ: on 46. 4.
ὑπάρχουσι
- ἐντὸς : from
the Persian standpoint; easterly.
8. vñò: close “under,” in contrast with the cliffs above. The
ὑπὸ
point of view is different 116. 6.
9. It was at Acanthus that Xerxes constructed his canal
across the isthmus to avoid turning Athos; vii. 22.
11-12. Bopéns: a northeast wind, as vii. 188. 10, 189. 2.— кάρта
κάρτα
τρηχέως περιέσπε: cf. 15. 1.— πλήθεϊ πολλὰς: see similar phrases
vii. 117. 4, 128. 2.
13. kaтà, “about;" 79. 6, vii. 173. 11.
15. ὥστε: on 5. 5. - θηριωδεστάτης: usually referred to the
sharks; cf. Aesch. Pers. 577; Prom. 583; Hor. C. i. 3. 18, iii. 27.
NOTES.-VI. 43-47.
219
26, iv. 14. 47. Theophrastus has Oáλaσoa Onpiádŋs (H. P. iv. 8),
and Aristotle uses Oŋpía of sea-monsters (H. A. viii. 13).
18-19. of: S. 56.— étiσtéαto: S. 67; with inf. as vii. 211. 11.—
καὶ κατὰ τοῦτο, “ for that very reason.
VI. 45.
2. οὕτω ἔπρησσε, “thus fared;” πρήσσω in this sense usually
with an adv.; on 79. 10.
6. πpòs, "at the hands of;" as vii. 154. 17; on 21. 1.
8. πρìv й: with indic. because dependent on a negative clause,
and referring to a definite point of past time; cf. 79. 10, 82. 7.
10–11. åte: on 5. 5.— For µeɣáλws in second clause, though
belonging with the first as well, see on vii. 9. 35, vi. 23. 22, 108.
14.
ἔτεϊ:
VI. 46.
1–2. Aeutépų ĕteï: 491 B.C.; on 18. 4.—TOÚTwv: gen. after the
comparative Δευτέρῳ: vii. 80. 7, 112. 2.— Θασίους: reiterated after
the following clause by σpeas: 57. 15, 68. 2, 111. 8, vii. 147. 8.
4. Abdera was nearly opposite on the Thracian coast, which
had all been reduced by Megabazus after the return of Darius
from Scythia, and "it is probable that Abdera had been occu-
pied by a Persian garrison." Rawl.
5-6. πολιορκηθέντες—ἐουσέων: Hdt. not infrequently joins par-
ticiples differing in tense, case, or subject—a lack of proper con-
cinnity due to his fondness for co-ordination; cf. 61. 16, 94. 5,
vii. 9. 8, 99. 4, 164. 3; on 13. 7.
ἐγίνετο,
ěk—åíò:
9. èyíveto, “accrued.”— čк-åπò: mere variety; vii. 144. 4.
10. ěk: on 22. 7. Scaptesyle on the opposite Thracian coast,
together with several other towns, belonged to the Thasians and
paid them tribute. Here Thucydides owned rich mines, and
spent the 20 years of his exile engaged in writing his history.-
Tŵv xpvσéwv: Note the article repeated with the second attribu-
tive, though preceding the noun, as vii. 101. 10, 184. 4, 196. 1;
cf. vi. 57. 1, 121. 9, 28. 9, vii. 18. 11.
• •
12–13. wσte: on 27. 8.— rò èπíπav, "in general;" usually with
ὡς ; vii. 50. 13, 157. 23. ἐοῦσι åreλéσ, "while they were un-
taxed as regards their crops." Their revenue was so extensive
that no land-tax was levied.
VI. 47.
1. Kaì aỶTÒS: such declarations of personal observation our
220
HERODOTUS.
author uses also of the "Cadmeian writing" he saw in Thebes
(v. 59), of the measurements he made of the pyramid of Chephren
(ii. 127), and of the colossi he saw in Sais (ii. 131). He visited
Thasos to see the temple of Hercules founded by the Phoeni-
cians; ii. 44.
3-4. Яris: on 13. 14.—vûv, “thereupon;" changing its name
from the earlier Odonis or Aeria.- του Φοίνικος, “the son of
Phoenix."— čoxe: the aor. as vii. 61. 17, 74. 3, vi. 23. 8.
5-6. Oáσov: chorographic gen. dependent on Aivúpwv: on 29.
3. Construe μεταξύ χώρου καλ. Αἰνύρων τε καὶ (χώρου καλ.) Κοινύ-
pwv. For xúpov, repeated with the second phrase, see vii. 33. 4.
9. Baσiλéi: for the dat. cf. 21. 10. Observe the alliteration in
this sentence; on 19. 2.
10. máσas: with the article, as vii. 59. 8, to emphasize the to-
tality; on vii. 4. 4.
VI. 48.
1. ἀπεπειρᾶτο Ἑλλήνων: favorite Homeric device.
4. Táĝas, "by special assignment;" iii. 68. 26, i. 46. 9.— yîV TE
καὶ ὕδωρ: τὸ διδόναι γῆν καὶ ὕδωρ δουλεύειν ἐστίν: Arist. Rhet. ii.
23.
VI. 49.
34. προΐσχετο αιτέων, " put forward in his demands.” ἀπι
KOíαTO: H. 913; G. 233; C. 555; cf. vi. 94. 7.
7. ιθέως: on 17. 5. - ἐπεκέατο, " attacked;” 78. 7.
“ — ἐπὶ σφίσι
exovτas, "aiming at themselves," "with hostile purpose;" cf. 2.
2,74. 5. For the long-standing enmity between the Athenians
and Aeginetans see 87–93.
αν
8. ús of purpose with subj.; mostly with av in Attic prose.
See on vii. 176. 24.
9-10. ÉTTEλáẞOVTO: correlated with Soкéovтés above; on 13. 7.-
Σπáρ™ην: The importance of this appeal is generally remarked
upon by historians. Sparta had hitherto been only a leading
power in Greece; now she was acknowledged to possess a para-
mount authority, as the proper guardian of the liberties of Hel-
las.
11. TETTOLŃKOLEV: opt. in indirect discourse; 129. 3, 118. 6. The
perf. opt. does not occur at all in Hm. and very rarely in the
tragic writers; but Hdt. uses it often, Thuc. 8 times, Xen. about
60 times, mostly in the periphrastic form, and especially in in-
direct questions. Klemens.-Tрodóvтes, "to betray;" supple-
mentary partc. and coincident; on 9. 14.
NOTES.-VI. 47-52.
221
5. ἐν δὲ δὴ καὶ: as 11. 4.
VI. 50.
Κριός: see 173. 8-10.
7. χαίροντα: agreeing with αὐτὸν (Κλεομένεα ); " to his joy,”
with impunity.- For the position of μiv, see on 34. 12; cf. 50. 9,
63. 2, 69. 19.
8. ȧvayvwolévтa, "persuaded;" in this sense common in Hdt.,
but rare otherwise; cf. 75. 19, 83. 8, vii. 7. 1.
9. yap, "for else;" 68. 14, Hm. A 232, B 242, and often. The
condition is omitted.— ǎv ovλλaµßáveiv: unreal assumption, for
imperf. of direct discourse.
12-13. τὸ ἐὸν : on 37. 12.— ή δὴ: Homeric, as A 573. καταχαλ
Koû, “incase well with bronze for thy safety." Note the middle.
Crius (ram) will need to strengthen his weapons to the utmost,
as about to confront the impending evil of Cleomenes' ven-
geance. For the play upon the name see vii. 180. 7.
VI. 51.
2. The enmity arose when Cleomenes invaded Attica for the
purpose of reinstating Isagoras, and Demaratus joined the allies
in their protest against engaging in battle with the Athenians
(v. '75).
3. Kaì oυTOS, “likewise;" cf. 14. 2, 52. 30.
5. TÀU CỦ TOU: Aristodemus. κατὰ πρεσ. δέ: an independent
sentence by changed construction after µèv.— кws: on 11. 3, 27. 1.
VI. 52.
1-2. ὁμολογέοντες οὐδενὶ ποιητῇ: such expressions show the in-
timate acquaintance which Hdt. possessed with the poets, at
least of the cyclic and genealogical schools to whom he now re-
fers; cf. ii. 116. According to the ordinary tradition, Aristode-
mus died before the return of the Heraclidae, leaving two sons
under age, who in the division of the Peloponnesus obtained
Sparta as their father's portion. The local tradition of the Spar-
tans is followed also by Xen. Ages. viii. 7. Hyllus was son of
Hercules.
8-9. Polynices was son of Oedipus, banished by his brother
Eteocles from Thebes, and slain in his attempt to recover his
patrimony in the expedition of the Seven against Thebes.- Sídv-
µa: SC. Tékva: cf. adjectives similarly used 69. 27, 71. 8, 86. 61.-
èπɩdóvτa, “having lived to see.”
222
HERODOTUS.
11. Toùs tóte ẻóvTas: This may be added to distinguish them
from the Aakedayµóvior of line 1, or perhaps a contrast is intended
between the new-comers and the elder Achaeans; cf. ix. 26. 11,
26. 27, 27. 14.— Bovλevσai : as 61. 5, "determined ;" usually middle
in this sense.
βουλεῦσαι
12. oŭkwv dý, “however—not ;" another example of fondness
for co-ordination and asyndeton; vii. 10. 26, 15. 8, vi. 124. 2.
13. exeɩ, “know."—λwvraι: subjunctive in indirect deliber-
ative question; see below 19-23, 86. 46, 135. 8.—BσTE: în 5. 5.
—óμoíwv kaì ĭowv, "alike in appearance and size."
14. yvŵval, "to decide.". πρὸ τούτου : before those appointed
to settle the question had abandoned hope of a decision.
15-1%. τὴν Baσidées, "but she replied that she did not even
herself know them apart. She said this though knowing very
well indeed, but wishing to see if haply both might become
kings.”— cï κws: cf. vii. 145. 15, vi. 101. 7; H. 907; G. 226 4 n. 1.
18. ἀπορέειν, ἀπορέοντας: on 7. 8, 21. 7, 61. 24.
..
19. ὅ τι . πρńуμатι, “how they shall deal with the matter.”
8 Tɩ is cognate acc.; H. 716 b; G. 159 n. 2; C. 401.
22-6. τοῖσι Λακεδαιμονίοισι ὑποθέσθαι, ὑποθέσθαι-τοῖσι Λακε-
δαιμονίοισι : chiastic in strongly colloquial style. εἶναι : Relative,
and in Hdt. conditional, clauses occasionally have their verbs in
the inf. by assimilation when dependent on an inf. in indirect
discourse; 52. 6, 117. 12, vii. 148. 19.
29. Toùs dè: ó dé in apodosis is mainly Homeric and Herodo-
tean; it sometimes repeats emphatically the subject of the pre-
ceding clause (on 3. 5), as 30. 2; sometimes not, as here; cf. on
16. 4, vii. 159. 8.—ěžeɩv: cf. 52. 13, 69. 17, vii. 234. 15.
30-31. καὶ ἐκείνη: on 51. 3.-- δηλά: on 13. 7.
...
32. ἐπ' ἄλλην ódóv: such separation of noun from its preposi-
tion and adjunct is more familiar to poetry, but occurs occasion-
ally in prose, falling under the very comprehensive principle
that the word or phrase modified may be enclosed amid its
modification; see 58. 12, vii. 8. 84, 14. 5, 50. 28, 58. 8, 130. 15, 167.
14, 223. 2; on 41. 10.
38. Ev τw Snμooío: under the special protection of the state
and at its expense; in order to obey the oracle, by paying him
higher honor.
40. auтoús, "own;" cf. the compound avrádeλpos, as Soph..
Antig. 1.
NOTES. VI, 52–54.
223
VI. 53.
1-2. Ταύτα τάδε: on 10. 2.
34. τούτους . . . καταλεγομένους : explanatory appositive to τάδε,
แ "namely that" cf. vii. 19. 12, 36. 4, 127. 3, vi. 47. 7. — Awpiéwv
Baσidéas: the family of the Spartan kings; see line 12. The
genealogy upward (cf. 52. 3) was Hyllus, Hercules, Amphitryon,
Alcaeus, Perseus.-μèv corresponds to dè, line 11.
Θεοῦ : Zeus,
father of Perseus.— åπcóvτos, “being omitted," because as a god
he cannot be reckoned among Hellenes.— кataλeyoµévovs, “are
reckoned up," in the genealogical lists.
5. ús eioì, "to be;" cf. v. 22. 6.—"Eλλŋves: an appellation only
loosely applicable to the earliest period; properly post-Homeric
in this sense.
6. ἐτέλεον : on 41. 21.
7-8. οὐκ . . . ἔλαβον, " I did not take them further back.”
9. Αμφιτρύων: for ἡ ᾿Αμφιτρύωνος. Perseus had no reputed
mortal father as Hercules had; hence the genealogy in the male
line ends with him; but tracing back from his mother Danae to
Danaus, they were Egyptians.
10. χρεομένῳ: on 33. 2.
11-12, τοὺς . . . πατέρας αὐτῶν, " their successive progenitors
upward."
VI. 54.
2. πapà: the full expression occurs vii. 103. 12. The omission
of a participle upon which an attributive prepositional phrase
depends is not very rare; see Trans. Am. Philolog. Assoc. 1882,
p. 39. This story of the Persians differs from the Greek account
in this essential, that Perseus was originally an Assyrian, but
migrated to Greece and settled there. The Greek account made
him start from Greece in search of the Gorgon's head, and on
his return visit Cepheus, king of the Cephenes (i. e. Assyrians),
wed his daughter, and leave there his son Perses, the eponymous
hero of the Persians. Cf. vii. 61, 150.
4. οὐκ οἱ: S. 3. Supply ἦσαν Ἕλληνες.
5. Acrisius was father of Danae. ὁμολογέοντας κατ' οἰκηιότητα,
"related in kinship."
6. τούτους δὲ: emphatic resumption of τοὺς δὲ; cf. 58. 19, 61. 34,
46. 3.—eîvaɩ: change to indirect discourse dependent on λéyeral:
04. 105. 7.-κατά περ = καθάπερ, καθ᾽ ἅ περ, “ just as.”
224
HERODOTUS.
VI. 55.
1. eipnoow, "let this be said once for all;" a formulaic expres-
sion for dismissing a subject. This use of the perf. imv., express-
ing a command that something shall be decisive and final, is
confined to the third sing. pass.; G. 202 n. 1.
2. 8 Ti = di' ő ti: for what reason, though Egyptians, and for
what services.
3.
λoto: the logographers Acusilaus, Hecataeus, Pherecy-
des, etc.
4. où kateλáßovto, "have not appropriated." The aor, is often
conveniently translated by the perf.; cf. vii. 104. 25.
VI. 56.
1. Î'épeά te dǹ táde: on 23.19. The following infinitive clauses
stand as explanatory appositives to rádɛ. The prerogatives
mentioned are in the main such as had been handed down
from the Homeric age. The king is priest, general, judge.
2. Alós te Aakedaíµovos: a local deity, the lord of the Lacedae-
monian territory; Alòs oúpavíov: the supreme god of all Hellas.
3. ¿kôépeɩv, “to levy;" not the right of declaring war, at least
in the time of Thuc., for this rested with the assembly (cf. vii.
149. 11), but of determining the general course and character of a
campaign. Their powers were unlimited only after they had
passed the Spartan boundaries.-Boúλwvraι: Note the frequent
employment of the conditional generic subjunctive in this epi-
sode.
4. µndéva: µn is the regular negative with the inf. when in
apposition to τόδε οι τάδε : cf. ii. 169, i. 99, vii. 53. 4.-διακωλυτήν :
Examples of the strict observance of this law are given by Thuc.
60, 66, viii. 5.
V.
5. «i Sè µń, “otherwise;" as if an affirmative statement pre-
ceded; on 37. 8, vii. 16. 29. The μn seems due to fondness for
the negative; on 11. 12.—èv ἐνέχεσθαι, “ is held under a
curse;" on 33. 5. The évay's was banished.
•
7-9. ÉKαTòv: elsewhere this number is uniformly placed at 300;
cf. vii. 205. 10. — èπì σтpatiñs, “ upon an expedition.”
12. 18.
ŵv: on
10. тà Sépµará: The hide money at Athens went into the state
chest, and formed a considerable source of revenue.-vŵra: as
the Homeric kings; H 321, 8 65; Phaeacians, ◊ 473.
NOTES.-VI. 55–57.
225
VI. 57.
1. rà ãλλa tà eipnvaîa: 121. 9, ix. 22; Hm. 0 107, § 24-6; on 46.
10. Such repetition of the article after of λo is somewhat fre-
quent, perhaps in consequence of the formulaic nature of oi
άλλοι in Hm.
2. TOLÉηTai: by the kings who, according to Xen. (de Rep. Lac.
xv. 1), performed all the sacrifices in behalf of the state.
4. ἄρχεσθαι, the regular functionaries or servants.-διπλήσια ἢ,
"in portions twice as great as." Words in -πλýolos are construed
like comparatives; cf. 133. 15, vii. 23. 16.
5. Saltuμóveσi: Hdt. occasionally retains an epic form; 11. 4.
Xen. (de Rep. Lac. xv.) tells us that the kings received double por-
tions, not that they might eat twice as much as the rest, but
that they might be able to bestow in honor upon any one they
wished, as Agamemnon, Hm. H 321, and Menelaus, 8 65.
6. τυθέντων : Η. 73; G. 17; C. 53 b.
7. veoµnvías dè ȧvà táσas, “ and at all the new moons severally;"
at the first of each month, when sacrifice was universally offered,
and especially to Apollo. åvà: on 29. 3, vii. 184. 7. — éßdóµas:
The seventh day was sacred to Apollo, the tutelary divinity of
the Dorians, as his birthday; Hes. Op. 770.
8. The Greeks divided their months into three decades: µnv
ἱστάμενος, μεσῶν, φθίνων. The days of each decade were num-
bered in regular order, except in the last, when they were some-
times reckoned backward as among the Romans.
9. és 'Aπóλλwvos: to be sacrificed at the temple of Apollo.-
tetάptηy: compare our “quart" for quarter. Its capacity is not
known.
10. Λακωνικήν belongs also with μέδιμνον: cf. 23. 22.
11. πρoģeivous: These proxeni were appointed in Sparta itself
to receive and entertain ambassadors from foreign states, and
to act as intermediaries in their business with the magistrates.
Elsewhere, proxeni were more like our consuls. They were ap-
pointed by the state which they represented, and selected from*
among the natives of the place where the post was established.
-TOÚTOLOL πρoσкeîσbaι, "it was incumbent on them;" on 77. 3.
14. σιτεόμενοι τὰ δημόσια: cf. (Αργείων ηγήτορες) δήμια πίνουσιν,
Hm. P. 250.
15-16. μὴ ἐλθοῦσι: compare line 26.—βασιλεῦσι σφι : on 46. 1.
18. TŮUTò: cognate acc.-πpòs: on 26. 10.
10*
226
HERODOTUS.
19-20. γινομένας: on 18. 7.-συνειδέναι: 39. 6.
22. πатρоúɣoν πap¤évov, “a maiden heiress;" the eldest daugh-
ter of the family, to whom, in default of male heirs, the property
fell at the death of the father. In general the next of kin who
was unwedded could claim her hand if not disposed of by will,
but if a dispute arose it was settled by the king. Cobet
(Mnemosyne, 1884, p. 157) doubts the word; but see the Cretan
inscription, Roehl, I. G. A. 475, where the form яаτρôɣоs occurs,
probably made from πατρωιοῦχος.—πέρι: 4. 4. ἱκνέεται ἔχειν, “ it
belongs to have her to wife."
23. ἢν μή περ instead of ἤν περ μὴ seems unparalleled except
by ei µý πeρ, Aristoph. Lys. 629.
24. θετὸν ποιέεσθαι, " to adopt.”
27. τοὺς τῶν γερόντων προσήκοντας: the partitive gen. rarely
stands between the article and its participle, most commonly in
Hdt. and Thuc.; cf. 119. 1, 130. 8, vii. 110. 6, 129. 3, viii. 4, 66, 68,
129, i. 167, iv. 2, v. 77; on vii. 156. 11. See Trans. Am. Philolog.
Assoc. 1882, p. 45.
28. Súo Tibeμévovs: Thuc. states distinctly (i. 20) that each king
had but one vote, though the Greeks, he says, commonly sup-
posed that each had two, in which declaration he has been sup-
posed by many to be criticising this passage. Hdt. probably
means that only two votes were cast, one for each; but he has
expressed himself loosely; cf. 58. 4.
VI. 58.
4. λÉẞητа кρоTéovσi: compare the use of the Oriental gong,
and our tolling of bells. The beating of brass as a purification
in connection with the dead, and its use also in the Eleusinian
mysteries, are mentioned by the scholiast on Theocr. ii. 36. In
the heroic age λéßŋtes were often buried with the dead kings,
as, for instance, those discovered by Schliemann at Mycenae.
6. Kaтaμιaíveola, "to put on sackcloth and ashes;" their
mourning was in Oriental fashion sordid garments, shorn
hair, ashes thrown on head and clothing. Such defilement
was forbidden in the case of a private person. The dead king
was honored as a hero (Xen. de Rep. Lac. xv.).
9. ŵuròs kaì, “the same as;" on 21.7.
12. ἐκ πάσης δεῖ: on 52. 32.
13. Λακεδαίμονος: Laconia.
xwpis, "besides."
ἀριθμῷ, “ in
stated number."— πeρɩoíкwv: SC. Twás, which is rarely omitted
when used as subject. Krüger.
NOTES.-VI. 57–61.
227
14. kĥdos, “funeral." TOÚTWV: the Perioeci. "The three
classes of which the Lacedaemonian population consisted are
here very clearly distinguished from one another: 1. The Peri-
oeci, or free inhabitants of the country districts, the descendants
in the main of the submitted Achaeans; 2. The Helots, or serfs
who tilled the soil upon the estates of their Dorian lords, de-
scended in part from the Achaeans taken with arms in their
hands, but chiefly from the conquered Messenians; and 3. The
Spartans, or Dorian conquerors, who were the only citizens, and
who lived almost exclusively in the capital." Rawl.
16. σúμμıya, “together with;" a man and woman from each
household of each of the three classes.
18. aieì: 53. 11, vii. 23. 5. — åπoуevóμevov, "departed," "de-
ἀπογενόμενον,
ceased."
20. 8' av: rather common elision.—TOúTŲ Sè: on 16. 4.
Up to
the time of Hdt. the only certain example was that of Leonidas.
The body of Agesipolis was placed in honey and carried home
from Thrace for royal burial (Xen. Hel. v. 3. 19).
ἡμερέων:
22. åyopǹ: meeting for any business whatsoever.—ýµepéwv: gen.
of time within which.-ioTaraiyiveraι. There may be an allu-
sion, however, to the fact that the assemblies were carried on
standing.
23. ȧpxaipeσín, "meeting for election of magistrates;" so ex-
plained by most editors. According to Schweighäuser, "chosen
magistrates;" which suits ioTaTaι and ovvíle best.
VI. 59.
3. OûTOS Ó Éσlùv: cf. 34. 9-10, and on 103. 18.
5. períe: The false Smerdis proclaimed a remission of all trib-
ute for three years throughout his dominions upon his accession
(iii. 67).
VI. 60.
1. kaì, "likewise;" connect with AiyvπTíoɩ: cf. vii. 16. 19.
4. avλŋtéw: gen. of origin with yíverat, as iv. 5, Xen. An. i. 1. 1.
This is rather rare without a preposition, but appears to have
been much used by the early genealogists; see the fragments of
Acusilaus, Hecataeus, etc.
5. Kýpuкos: this was the family of the Talthybiadae; see vii.
134.—ἐπιτιθέμενοι, " applying themselves to the art ;” sc. τῇ τέχνῃ.
VI. 61.
1. TÓTE brings the narrative back to ch. 51; cf. 41. 1.
228
HERODOTUS.
3-4. προεργαζόμενον : προ-, " thus early;” so long before the
great struggle came. The striking impartiality of Herodotus is
here well exemplified. He is not a whit blinded by his usual
kindliness towards Demaratus (see vii. 3, 101, 209, 234), nor by
the dark colors with which he commonly paints Cleomenes.-
οὐκ οὕτω ὡς : cf. 108. 15-16.—φθόνῳ καὶ ἄγῃ, “jealousy and envy;"
close synonyms, to strengthen the impression.
6–7. èπíßaow, “foothold," "ground of action."—'Apíσrwvi Ba-
ἐπίβασιν,
σιλεύοντι : 574-520 B.C.
9. καὶ γὰρ : on 5. 6.-συνεγινώσκετο: see 68. 13, 92. 13, 140. 9.
10. yaµéeɩ-yaµée: this word-arrangement was called by the
rhetoricians Kúkλos, a variety of chiasm; Hermog. 171. Cf. vii. 19.
5, 29. 13.—☎de, when prospective, regularly closes its clause.
13. kaì taûta, "and that too," strengthened by μévтoɩ, as 137.
20.
14-18. μιν : the writer seems to have had φόρες of the next
sentence in mind here, unless μuv is included in тaûтa éкaσтa and
governed by palovσa, as Krüger would explain; cf. 30. 3. For
position, see on 34. 12. — ἐοῦσαν, ὁρέουσα: on 46. 6. πρὸς: on
38. 1.
19-20. åvà: on vii. 198. 3.-Therapne crowned a steep hill
(hence πepe) on the left bank of the Eurotas, nearly opposite
Sparta, and here, according to the local tradition, Menelaus and
Helen were buried, and were worshipped with divine honors to-
gether in a temple whose foundations are still visible. Opposite
in the plain was the Phoebeium, in the suburbs of the city.
21. ŏêws: on 12. 3.— rõyadµa: S. 27. Such crases are pretty
common in the sixth and fifth century inscriptions of Ionia.
24. yuvaîka: presumably Helen, now the goddess. The direct
personal interference of the deity is more rare in the mythology
of Herodotus than in that of Homer, but it is not excluded. For
examples see 69, 105, 117, 127, viii. 39, 84, 94; on 27.1.
25. kaì Tǹv: With rare exceptions (vii. 137. 14, 8. 67) the article
in Hdt. follows the usage of normal prose, its original demon-
strative force being seldom retained save with μév and dé, and
occasionally with κaí before an infinitive, which are also Attic;
H. 655; on 139. 3.
27. åπeɩpĤodaι, "it had been forbidden.”— µŋdevì: on 11. 12.
31-32. καλλιστεύσει γυναικών : cf. vii. 180. 3, 2. 8.
34. OUTOS on referring back to line 12.
:
NOTES. VI. 61–64.
229
VI. 62.
1. ěkvɩţe, “inflamed;" cf. vii. 10. 51.— apa, “you must know.”
6. appì with dat. in this sense is Homeric and Herodotean;
129. 6, vii. 143. 9.
8. ἐπὶ . . . ἐπήλασαν, " and thereto they affixed their oaths.”
Compare the expression ἐπὶ δ᾽ ὄγδοον ἤλασε χαλκόν, Hm. Η 223,
where upon the seven folds of ox-hide in Ajax's shield the
eighth and strongest of copper is overlaid.
9. δὴ : like ὦν, 12. 18.
14. τῆς .
• •
Tapaуwyn, "by the quibbling of the trick."
1-2. ἐσηγάγετο: on 41. 10.
for divorce.--oi: on 50. 7.
VI. 63.
ἀποπεμψάμενος: technical term
3. ἐλάσσονι : sc. τοῦ δικαίου. The omission of the normal
standard is common with the comparative; cf. 84. 13.- τοὺς,
"the ordinary;" cf. 69. 26.- Séka µñvas: lunar months.
5. év łóкų: Homeric for év ßovλî, as paraphrased by Pausanias,
iii. 7. 7. — ¿ò̟ópwv: the five magistrates chosen yearly by the
people and holding their sittings (at which the kings might be
present) daily in the Archeion.
8. ovμẞaλλóμevos, "reckoning up;" 65. 16, vii. 187. 10; Hm. 8
412.— εἶπε ἀπομόσας: cf. 65. 12-17, 68. 6-7.
14.
9. πρîуµа oùdèv èπoιýσaνтo, “took no account of it;" vii. 150.
12. ἐς τὰ μάλιστά, “ certainly;” with ἐνόμισε. οἱ εἶναι: cf. 65.
17, 69. 23.
15. Sià, "above;" Homeric, as vii. 83. 8.-,"quite;" cf. 68.
12, 21. 6.
16. ápǹv: Demaratus is ó ra dýµ åpnrós. See Phaeacians, ʼn 54.
VI. 64.
η
4. See, "it was fated." ἀνάπυστα: cf. Hm. 274, ἀνάπυστα
Оeoì Оéσav åveράπоiσw, of the "monstrous deed" of Jocasta wed-
ding Oedipus.
5. di'â, "for which reason," the decree of fate. See Phaea-
cians, 0 577. The MSS. here read dià rà and dià rò, but Struve
has shown that di à accords better with the usage of Hdt.
6. Sießλńon peɣáλws, "had become bitterly hated by;" on 51. 2.
230
HERODOTUS.
VI. 65.
2. oikins: that of the Eurypontidae, in which, after Theopom
pus, there was an elder reigning line, and a younger line which
came to the throne through Leotychides in the eighth genera-
tion.
3. Èπ'❖ Te, “on condition that;" here with fut. ind. as vii. 153.
15, 158. 22; more commonly the inf. as vii. 154. 20; H. 999; G.
236; C. 601; on 9. 7.
7. Xíλwvos: probably a grandson of the sage mentioned vii.
235. 6.
9. ἁρπάσας: coincident with φθάσας: cf. 65. 22, 70. 5, 91. 6, 108.
11, 116. 3; on 9. 14. The seizure of the bride was a necessary
part of a Spartan marriage.
12-13. AnμaρńTo: for the dat. instead of gen, after κará in com-
position see vii. 9. 5, 191. 7.— ikveoµévws, “rightfully;" 84. 13.
14. katwµooiŋv, "complainant's oath," with which the institu-
tion of the action began. The counter-plea of not guilty on the
part of the defendant was avτwμooía. The proper action then
began with testimony and counter - testimony. Leotychides'
proof consisted in reviving the exclamation of Ariston.
18. ἐπιβατεύων: on 61. 6.
VI. 66.
4. ȧvolotov yevoµévov ès, “the matter having been referred to;"
on 5. 9.— Èк πрovoíns, “by prearrangement."
5-7, προσποιέεται, “ wins over. μéyισTOV: SO V. 97; on vii. 5. 5.
μέγιστον so
8. åvaπeídel: See a similar case of bribing the Pythia, 123. 12.
10. ëkpɩve µǹ eivaɩ: for µǹ sec Plat. Apol. 21 A; Xen. Apol. 14,
Ages. 1.8; cf. on vii. 220. 13.
VI. 67.
4. ĥpxe ȧpxýv: the acc. is cognate.
5. σav: on 16. 8.- The Gymnopaediae, or festival of naked
youths, was one of the most important at Sparta, and celebrated
at midsummer for several days. Choruses of boys, of youths,
and of men went through their evolutions in imitation of gym-
nastic exercises, and the patriotic songs of Thaletas and Alcman
and the paeans of Dionysodotus were chanted.
η. ἐπὶ . . .
λάσθη,
λáσoŋ, “for the purpose of ridicule and insult."
Such conduct, bordering on üßpis, must needs be punished, even
if at a late day; see 72. 2.
NOTES.-VI. 65-69.
231
8. ὁκοϊόν τι : cf. 1. 5, 69. 17, 78. 2.— τὸ ἄρχειν: on 32. 6.
•
9-13. εἶπε φὰς ταῦτα εἴπας: Compare the Homeric formula
καί μιν φωνήσας ἔπεα πτερόεντα προσηύδα . . . ὡς εἰπών. While
Hm. has the aor. parte. Pwvýoas, Hdt. uniformly employs the
pres.; cf. 68. 7, 70. 2, 82. 5, 111. 11, and often; so Soph. Antig.
227, Ajax, 757; Aristoph. Av. 472, Vesp. 795; Plat. Soph. 242 A;
Demosth. De Cher. 108; on 30. 1, 63. 8, and Phaeacians, v 58.—
only the first alternative is earnestly meant; the second
forms a rhetorical contrast; vii. 8. 93, viii. 68, v. 89; Hm. I 78, x
415. κατακαλυψάμενος: cf. κατὰ κρᾶτα καλυψάμενος, Hm. θ 92; a
sign of grief occurring often in Hm.-benτpov: employed for as-
semblies, choruses, etc., but never for dramatic performances, as
at Athens.
:
VI. 68.
2. oi after unrpì is pleonastic, as vii. 167. 12, 197. 3; on 46. 1.
-σñλáyxvwv: gen. partitive. In solemn oaths it was customary
to lay the hands upon the victim, altar, or some sacred object.
4. Kaтaπтóμevos, "appealing to;" after Hm. always with gen.
The sacrifice takes place at the altar of Zeus Her eius in the
open courtyard (avλý), probably before the house proper, in
Homeric fashion. This deity was the protector of the entire en-
closure (epkos), of the house and all it comprehended, especially
the purity of the family.
6. ỏpłŵ λóyw, “in very truth;" cf. 53. 10.
9. παρὰ . . . ὀνοφορβόν: a limiting gen. between a preposition
and its case is especially common; see 64. 8, 67. 3, vii. 36. 23.
10-11. μeтéρуоua, "importune;" see 69. 2, vii. 178. 13.- Deŵv
without πpós in this construction is Homeric; ß 68, λ 66.
12. μoúvn dǹ: on 63. 15. Similar consolation to friends mourn-
ing the dead is common in tragedy, and occurs as early as Hm.
a 354.
13–14. πoλλòs, "was rife;" see 61. 9.— yàp ǎv: on 50.9.
VI. 69.
3. ès, "unto," "before;" as 86. 60, vii. 142. 2, viii. 26. This is
rare after verbs of saying, and mostly with the plural.
5. eidóμevov: Homeric, as vii. 56. 6.
8–9. ẻkeîvov: Ariston.— oùк úπtedéketo, “did not admit it."
14. The Heroum, or hero-chapel, lay on the street near the
entrance to the court.
15. Αστραβάκου: connected with ἀστραβηλάτης, muleteer. The
232
HERODOTUS.
scandal of the court gossips suggested that the pretended stable-
god was in reality a muleteer. Astrabacus was said to have be-
longed to the family of the Agidae, and with his brother to have
found the statue of Artemis brought by Iphigenia from Tauris.
Stricken with madness, he became an object of worship as a
hero.
16. τοῦτον: on 22. 10. ἀναίρεον: on 34. 9.
17. See 52. 29.
9
19-20. σe: on 50. 7.—T Sé, "but as to the fact that;" more
frequently & or ã, like quod.-катάπтоνтαι, "attack;" cf. 68. 4.
8
22. ἠγγέλθης γεγενημένος : With the exception of ἀγγέλλω, verbs
of saying are very rarely construed with the partc.; vii. 37. 5.
24. åπéppiye marks more strongly than ékßáλot, line 29, the
inconsiderate haste of Ariston.
26. étтáµnva: on 52.9. To spite Zeus and make Eurystheus
lord over Hercules, Hera caused Eurystheus to be brought forth
untimely in the seventh month; Hm. T 117.
VI. 70.
2. rŵ λóyo̟ pàs: on 67.9; 38. 9.
4. úπOTOTηlévtes, "seized with suspicion;" on 23. 8. The set-
tlement of any Heraclide in a foreign land was forbidden under
penalty of death.
-
5. κως, “ by some means.” ἔφθη διαβὰς: on 65. 9.
11. The king gave him the cities Pergamus, Teuthrania, and
Halisarna in Mysia, and they remained for long in the possession
of his descendants, one of whom was a son-in-law of Aristotle.
12-13. ἄλλα συχνά, " in several other things.” Λακεδαιμονί
olo, "in the estimation of the Lacedaemonians;" a dat. of in-
terest.
14. ἐν δὲ δὴ καὶ : 11. 4. — ἀνελόμενος : on 36. 2.
15–16. πpoσéßaλe, "assigned the victory to them;" cf. 103. 10,
vii. 51. 12.—¿v Zπápty: on 85. 3.
VI. 71.
3. Κυνίσκον, “ Whelp.” μετεξέτεροι: Ionic for ἔνιοι.
8. ἐκ τῆς : S. 56. ἔρσεν : S. 7; on 52. 9.
9. Archidamus married his aunt, Leonidas his niece Gorgo;
vii. 239.
VI. 72.
1. où pèv ovdè: µèv in this phrase = µýv: S. 8; cf. 74. 6.
NOTES.-VI. 69–74.
233
L
2. Kaтεyńρa, "reach an advanced age;” cf. Hm. 510. Leoty-
chides reigned 491-469 B.C. He was the commander of the
Greek fleet at Mycale.-Note the alliteration and parechesis in
the following clause.
3. čστρarŃynσe, "he was leader for." The dat. is rare; the
more common gen., vii. 82. 2, 161. 7. This expedition was un-
dertaken soon after the battle of Plataeae, and was intended to
punish the Aleuadae of Larissa for their medism in the Persian
war; vii. 6, 130.
4. Taρeòv, "though it was possible;" acc. absolute, as 77. 16,
82. 2, 137. 23; H. 973; G. 278 2; C. 586.
5. ἐπ' αὐτοφώρω, " in the fact;” 137. 22, vii. 6. 16. — αὐτοῦ ἐν,
"there in;" cf. 16. 5, vii. 107. 5, and still more fully auroû taúty
ἐν τῷ στρατοπέδῳ, iv. 135. αὐτοῦ is often thus more accurately
defined by a preposition and its case, especially in Hm.; see
Phacacians, ✪ 68.
...
η ὑπὸ vmax@eis: as 82. 1, 136. 4; on 16. 7. The expression
has reference to the high seat of the judges.
8. Τεγέην : in Arcadia; cf. 74. 4. ἐν ταύτῃ: 24. 2.
VI. 73.
2. údółŋ, “had been put in the right path,'
neered."— ès: on 18. 6.
""had been engi-
4. Tɩvá, "quite," "very." rìs with adjectives is mostly post-
positive and serves either to increase or weaken the notion, ac-
cording as the meaning of the word or the context demands.
See 78. 2, 108. 10, 125. 20, vii. 104. 13, 192. 7, 42. 9.—πρоπηλакιo-
µòv: see 50.5.
5. ἀμφοτέρων . . . ἡκόντων: so the Aeginetans had demanded ;
50.9.
6. ěkeîvoí: the kings.—Te, "but," as often in the correlation of
οὔτε τε: on 1. 5.
8. nyov: see line 10.-Kpɩóv: see 50.5.
10. This was an act of arbitrary violence, for personal revenge.
VI. 74.
34. ὑπεξέσχε, “he slipped away secretly.”— νεώτερα : 2. 8.
5. ènì, “against," of hostile intent; so with dat. 49. 7, 88. 2, vii.
132. 5, 148. 3.— πрoσáуwv, “laying on;" 62. 8.
7. Nonacris was in the northern part of Arcadia, to the north-
west of Pheneus.-v: co-ordinate with πpoσáywv: on 13.7.
234
HERODOTUS.
8–9. ¿§opkoûv: with acc. as oμvvμi.-To swear by the waters
of the infernal Styx was the greatest oath of the gods; Hm. E
271, O 37, e 185. The Styx of Arcadia was said to be a branch
of the infernal Styx.-èv, "in the vicinity," "near;" cf. vii. 109.
11.
11–12. σráže: "Mount Khelmos here breaks away in a vast
wall of precipitous rock many hundred feet high.... From a
notch in the mountain-side a thin stream of water falls down the
cliff on the rugged heap of rocks below. Every now and then
the stream is lifted by the wind and scattered over the face
of the cliff." Clark. The water, derived mainly from melting
snows of the higher ridges, varies greatly according to the sea-
son, and at times two streams are seen. The height of the fall,
so unusual in Hellas, and the awful grandeur of the scenery,
combined to produce an extraordinary effect upon the minds of
the Greeks.— Tò... Kúkλos, “and an irregular circle of wall runs
round the basin." This description appears based upon hearsay
rather than personal observation. At all events, it is not easy
to reconcile it with the accounts of the fall itself. Homer's
τὸ κατειβόμενον Στυγὸς ὕδωρ (Ο 37), Στυγὸς ὕδατος αἰπὰ ῥέεθρα
(Θ 369), and Hesiod's πολυώνυμον ὕδωρ ψυχρόν, ὅτ᾽ ἐκ πέτρης
KaTaλeißeTai nλißátoio vynλñs (Theog. 785), are closer.
VI. 75.
2-3. ἐπὶ τοῖσι αὐτοῖσι τοῖσι: 01 89. 5.
45. ὑπέλαβε: cf. 27. 6. μανίη νούσος, “ madness as a verita-
ble disease." The tendency of his youth, when he had been ov
φρενήρης ἀκρομανής τε (v. 42), now developed into full vigor.
ὑπομαργότερον: cf. 38. 10.— ὅκως: on 12. 3.— τεῳ: S. 5%.
69. ἐνέχρανε, “ he would dash.”— παραφρονήσαντα : cf. 12. 12.
– ξύλῳ, “ the stocks.”— φύλακον : Ionic for φύλακα. ἄλλων: gen.
of separation.
10–11. avτis, “afterwards;" S. 1; vii. 10. 42.-ès ô: on 24. 7.—
Tis: on 37. 12. He was only a helot; the same tone ix. 80, where
the helots are described as stealing some of the plunder at Pla-
taeae, and selling objects of gold to the Aeginetans, thinking they
were brass.
14. κατὰ μῆκος, " lengthwise."
15-17. Observe the vividness of portrayal in this tragic scene,
and the horrifying effect produced by the minuteness and rep-
etition of its details; cf. vii. 107. 10–16.— тaúтηv kataɣopdeúwv,
NOTES.-VI. 74–76.
235
"chopping this into mince-meat." This and vii. 181. 5 are ex-
tolled by Longinus (De Subl. 31) as examples where homely
expressions are preserved from vulgarity by their aptness and
power.
18. örɩ, “because;” as dióti (20), štɩ (21), for variety; cf. vii. 2.
10. A theory of divine retribution was common in Greece, but
it was limited to the punishment in this life of signal acts of im-
piety or other wickedness in the person of the offender or of his
descendants. This belief is a pervading force throughout the
history of Herodotus, and he seems to consider that every strik-
ing calamity must be of the nature of a visitation, and seeks to
show this sometimes even in insignificant cases; cf. 64. 4, 72. 2,
86, 87. 3, 91, 135, vii. 137. 7.
19. Aéyew: When the noun is not expressed with the article
and participle an intruded element stands next to the partc., or
at least after one or more of its adjuncts; on 41. 10; cf. vii. 111.
6, 115. 10, i. 18, 103.—yevóμeva: cf. 18. 7, 84. 17.
21-22. fe@v: Demeter and Kore. - ἐξ . . . ῎Αργου, “ from their
sanctuary of Argus."-ipoû: see 78. 8, 79. 3–9; a grove set apart
and consecrated to Argus, the eponymous hero of the land, a
grandson of Phoroneus, son of Inachus. It appears to have been
situated between Sepeia and Argos.—'Apyeíwv: for position see
on 43. 13.
VI. 76.
1. In his ambitious designs upon Argos, Cleomenes consults
the oracle, as the Spartans had done before when seeking to
subdue Arcadia (i. 66). The Argives, thus threatened, have re-
course to the same shrine (vi. 19, 77). The answers show where
the sympathies of the oracle lay.
3. ποταμὸν Ἐρασῖνον: The omission of the article with ποταμός
is frequent in Hdt., but rare in Attic prose, where, too, the ap-
positive regularly precedes πотaµós. Cf. vii. 42. 2, 58. 11, 59. 2;
24. 8, 26. 10-12.-Stymphalus was in northern Arcadia, and sep-
arated from Argolis by lofty mountains. Its subterranean outlet
has been often described. According to the ancients, it flows
two hundred stades before emerging to the light at the foot of
Mount Chaon, not far to the south of Argos, whence it runs east-
erly to the sea, and forms the southern boundary of the district
belonging to that city.
ἐνθεῦτεν
5-6. ¿davès, "pitch-dark."-rò évbeûtev dŋ, “immediately
from that point on;" vii. 123. 15.
236
HERODOTUS.
7. 8' ☎v, “but at all events,” commonly introduces a statement
for which the writer vouches, whatever may be the truth of the
preceding. So in Attic & ovv. The same collocation Hm. T 94,
but not yet settled into this sense. For the epanalepsis, see 13. 5.
8–9. éσpayıáleto: It was customary for the Spartan kings to
offer sacrifices called diaßarýpia upon passing the frontiers of
Lacedaemon with an army; Thuc. v. 54, 55, 116. The omens
were also taken often at the crossing of rivers; Aesch. Sept. 378;
Hdt. ix. 36, vii. 54, 113. Here the river god is especially invoked.
—èkadλɩépee: impersonal; "the sacrifices were favorable.”— ǎyao-
eat, "that he admired."
10. οὐδ᾽ ὣς: so in Attic prose; on 14. 16. — χαιρήσειν : as 50..
12. Thyrea was farther south in the district of Cynuria, be-
tween Argos and Laconia.—Tλoíoí: extorted from Aegina and
Sicyon; 92.6.
VI. 77.
23. ἀγχοῦ ἐγίνοντο . . . Τίρυνθος: The quasi prepositions have
considerable freedom of position, and are often separated from
their case; vii. 33. 4, 124. 2. Tiryns was near the coast, south-
east of Argos, and famous for its Cyclopean ruins, still standing.
-xúpų ev: on 29. 3.— Kéeтαɩ and its compounds are the practi-
cal passives of τίθημι and compounds; 63. 13, 57. 12.— Σήπεια is
the reading of most MSS. and editions. Its derivation from
oŋría, cuttlefish, is obvious, and the early predilection for that
creature on this coast is evinced by the numerous representations
of them stamped on the gold objects found by Schliemann in
the graves at Mycenae and elsewhere. See vii. 191. 12.- μeraíx-
μεταίχ
μlov, "interval."
μιον,
6-7. ἐς ... εἶχε: on 19. 3.— πρήγμα: i. e. δόλῳ. If the female is
to vanquish the male, the weaker the stronger, it must be by
stratagem. The female is Sparta, the male Argus. The Argives
deemed themselves the stronger (line 5), but were benumbed by
the terrifying words of the oracle, like the Athenians, vii. 141.
Later writers, wholly at variance with Herodotus, referred the
first verse to a pretended victory which the Argive women, under
the leadership of the poetess Telesilla, gained over Cleomenes
when, after the battle and burning of the grove, he attacked the
defenceless city; Paus. ii. 20. 8.
9. ¿λλ' and dé often begin oracles, as in the change of speakers
in dialogue. The answer of the deity is instant to the question.
10. κῦδος . . . ἄρηται: Homeric; Δ 95, Ρ 16.
NOTES.-VI. 76-80.
237
11. àµpidpvpéas, “rend both cheeks in grief;” Hm. B 700.
12. ὥς, “ thus.”—ἐσσομένων ἀνθρώπων is Homeric, not έπεσσο-
μένων.
13. Note the striking alliteration.—The serpent served the Ar-
gives as a military badge; Soph. Antig. 126.
14–16. taûta táνта: perhaps a loose exaggeration; cf. 19. 17,
108. 5. — δόξαν: on 72. 4. ὅκως: 12. 3.
VI. 78.
2-3. ókoîóv Tι, "everything which;" on 73. 4. — σpérepos in-
cludes the army; cf. Hm. a 397, 311.—onµývele: opt. similar
to προσημαίνοι, η. 17.
5. ἐγένετο ἐπιτελέα: on 5. 9. ἐκ: as 13. 1.
7. ἐπεκέατο: 49. 7; corresponding to the middle of ἐπιτίθημι in
this sense; on 77. 3; 83. 9, vii. 158. 1.
VI. 79.
2. πuvlavóμevos TOÚTwv, "learning from these (the names)."
4-5. ἄποινα. ἄποινα: on 21. 7; cf. 31. 6, 42. 12.-
δύο μνέαι:
about $35. — Tetayµéval . . . Èktíveι, "prescribed for each pris-
oner to pay."
6. Kaт' is used distributively. For the phrase as subject of
ἐκτίνειν see 44. 13, and for ἄνδρα αἰχμάλωτον, see αυτομόλους ἄνδρας
above, and 83. 7.
7.
", ὡς ἑκάστους: on 31. 5. — ἐκκαλεύμενος: note the frequent
epanalepsis in this chapter; on 7. 7.
10. pwv: S. 61.— oi . . . èktòs: juxtaposition for contrast.—
TOÙS ÉKTÒS: prolepsis, as 41. 12.- ŏ tɩ ëπpnσσov, "how they were
faring." phoσw in this construction, not only with adverbs (on
45. 2), but neuter adjectives and pronouns.—πрív: on 45. 8.
VI. 80.
3. ἐνέπρησε τὸ ἄλσος: Here and in the battle perished 6000
Argives (vii. 148), the greater part (78. 8) burned in this inhuman
manner. But our century may not boast. In 1845 the French
commander Pelissier, during the insurrection of one of the Arab
tribes in Algeria, heaped up burning fagots about the mouth
of a cave in which 600 of the tribe had taken refuge, and suffo-
cated them all.
6-7. ἀναστενάξας . . . ἠπάτηκας: compare the words of Homer,
T 364-6.
238
HERODOTUS.
VI. 81.
24. ἀπιέναι: on 20. 7. — Ηραιον: the famous temple of the
Argive Hera, situated between Argos and Mycenae, about five
miles from the former.
5. ò ipeùs probably some attendant then in charge. The god-
dess was habitually served here by priestesses.— åñnyópeve: Cle-
omenes had a somewhat similar experience at Athens; v. 72.—
§eivo: An inscription from Amorgos shows the same custom ex-
isting there in the temple of Hera; Ditt. Sylloge Inscr. 358. In
general, citizens only were allowed to sacrifice in the public
sanctuaries, and a stranger was represented by a proxenus or
some citizen. Ibid. 323, 376.
VI. 82.
μιν:
1-5. ὑπῆγον ὑπὸ: on 72. 7.- παρεόν: on 72. 4.
Tаρeòν: on 72. 4.-μv: referring
to Tò "Apyos: neuter also ii. 37, but otherwise only in the poets.-
οὔτε εἰ . . . οὔτε εἰ ἔχω: we should expect rather εἴτε εἴτε, οὐκ ἔχω,
ei
as 137. 3; but see vii. 54. 12, 135. 17.— ¤λe§€ þáµevos: on 67. 9.—
S' av: on 76.7.
6. ἐξεληλυθέναι, " had come to its fulfilment,” as εξήκειν, 80. 8.
The expression seems a development of the Homeric, ǹ µáλa dý
με παλαίφατα θέσφαθ᾽ ἱκάνει, ι 50%, ν 172.
•
7. πρίν
χρήσηται: The subjunctive is used after πρίν when
it looks to the future, and is dependent on a primary tense in a
negative clause; G. 240. The omission of av, as here, is common
in Hdt.; cf. 133. 11, vii. 197. 10, 8. 54, 54. 8.
10. auτòs: nom. because referring to the subject of the pri-
mary verb.
:
11. aipée the prophetic present found especially in connec-
tion with oracles; cf. vii. 6. 18, 140. 9-15, 220. 18, 8. 32.
12. αἱρέειν ἂν : on 50. 9. — κατ᾿ ἄκρης: on 18. 4.
14-16. γενέσθαι: on 13. 1. — πολλὸν: on 11. 16. — ὁ διώκων, ὁ
Þeúyou are law terms for the plaintiff and defendant respective-
ly; 65. 14, 104. 8, 136. 5.
VI. 83.
1. ¿xnpwon, “widowed;" Hm. E 642; viduasset civibus urbem,
Verg. Aen. viii. 571.- Soûλou: In Argolis as in Laconia, three
classes existed, the Argives proper corresponding to the Spar-
tiatae, the Orneatae to the Perioeci, the Gymnesii to the Helots.
The last are meant here.
NOTES.-VI. 81-85.
239
2. "Became possessed of all the power, acting as magistrates
as well as directing affairs."-oxov: on 23. 8.
3. ἐς ὅ: on 24. 7. ἐπήβησαν : 5. 3.- σφεας: the slaves.
4. ἀνακτώμενοι . . . ἑωυτούς, “ winning gradually back into their
own hands."
6. σφι . . . ἀλλήλους, " they were at unity with one another;"
cf. 13. 7, vii. 101. 12; Hm. π 427. For ès, see Solon 36. 17: eis éxa-
στον ἁρμόσας δίκην.
10. éπekpárησav: probably about the same time as the destruc-
tion of Mycenae, 468 B.C.
VI. 84.
2. Saiμovíov, "divine visitation."
5. éπeíTe éµßaλeîv: on 52. 25, and 40. 4.
6. µerà taûta: beginning the apodosis after éπeite: cf. v. 55;
Xen. An. i. 6. 7.—peμovéval: Homeric, governing ríoσaolai, but not
the infinitives that succeed. "Sparta, too, had been excited
against Persia by Scythian envoys. .; vast designs of war were
ultimately formed, according to which the Scythians were to
invade Media from the Black Sea, and the Peloponnesians to
advance into the interior from Ephesus." Curtius Hist. Gr. II.
p. 193. The influence of unmixed wine appears to have been
stronger than the fifty talents of Aristagoras; v. 51.
9–10. σþéas ... keλeúeɩ, “while they charged them, the Spar-
tans." An appositive to a personal pronoun receives the article;
86. 11, 109. 20, vii. 161. 9.— Ephesus was the usual starting-point
eastward; v. 54.
11-13. ἐς τώυτό, “ at the same place.” ἡκόντων τῶν Σκυθέων
σoɩ: on 4. 3.— μelóvws: on 63. 3; reiterated with greater fulness
in the next clause; on 7. 8.
15. ěk tóσov, “from a time so distant;" ever since then.
16. Swрóτepov: Achilles, when visited by the envoys, calls out
to Patroclus, in his hospitality, to set a larger mixer, (wpóτepov
dè kéρale (Hm. I 203). The Greeks habitually drank their wine
mixed, commonly with more than half water. A poet quoted
by Athenaeus says that if like parts of each be used it produces
lunacy; if drunk pure, paralysis.— émiσkúbiσov, "fill like a Scy-
thian ;" i. e. with pure wine.
18. τίσιν ταύτην : on 27. 10, 36. 9.
VI. 85,
1. Τελευτήσαντος Κλεομένεος is perhaps gen. absolute, for Hdt.
240
HERODOTUS.
commonly has the acc. with partc. after πvvðávoµai: but cf. ovñw
TеTÚσOŋν ПIαTρóкλolo lavóvтos, Hm. P 377; Thuc. iv. 6; Hdt. ii.
160.
3. τῶν . . . ἐχομένων: the normal order is seen in line 6; but
when the article, participle, and noun are used together, and the
participle has a modification, sometimes the participle is placed
outside, as here and 22. 11, 125. 5, 132. 1, vii. 169. 9; or the modi-
fication outside, as 70. 16, vii. 184. 23; similarly in the case of
other words with modifiers; 38. 3, vii. 13. 6, 58. 7, 61. 10, 123. 10,
124. 2, 186.9. See Trans. Am. Philolog. Assoc. 1882, p. 39.
12. ŏκws μǹ, “"see to it that they do not;" more commonly fol-
lowed by fut. ind.; H. 886; G. 217 n. 4; C. 553.
15. čoxovтo, "withheld themselves from;" vii. 169. 11, 237. 15.
VI. 86.
3–4. πpodáoias eîλкov, “kept making interminable excuses.”
Construe βασιλέας ἐόντας δύο παραθέσθαι σφέας (τοὺς ὁμήρους).
9. σuvnveíxon: see the active in this sense, 22. 14.
13-14. τά . . . πρῶτα, " in all other respects attained the first
position." ȧkoúelv äpiσta, "heard himself (was) most highly
spoken of." ǎptora is superlative of ev. This use of ἀκούω is
post - Homeric, but see Phaeacians, 184. It is practically the
passive of λέγειν.
16. ikveuµévą, “inevitable," the time that comes to all, through
the decree of fate. The act of Glaucus could not appear to the
Hellenic mind merely fortuitous; it had been long impending.
See 64. 4, 65. 13, 84. 13.
18. oi èλ¤eîv ès λóyous, “to come to speech with him;" a com-
mon idiom.
19. τῆς σῆς, Γλαῦκε, βουλόμενος δικαιοσύνης: on 41. 10; the in-
terposed vocative, as Archil. 85; Pind. I. i. 1, ii. 1; Eur. Cycl.
290, Herac. 478, Her. Fur. 278; Plat. Alc. ii. 138 A; Dem. De
Cor. 21.
20–1. åvà: as 48. 4, and often in Hm.; not Attic.—ev dè kai:
11. 4.
22. λóyos woλλós: 68. 13. Croesus says the same to Solon, i.
30.— ἐμεωυτῷ . . . ἐδίδουν, “I gave speech unto myself,” argued
with myself; the operation of the mind in thought is represented
dramatically in self-dialogue, as so often in Hm.; see Phaea-
cians, 【 200.
23. καὶ ὅτι, “both that.” αἰεί κοτε,
"forever and a day;"
NOTES.-VI. 85–86.
241
often in Thuc. and tragedy; cf. the Homeric aleì nμaта Távтa, 0
468, and many variations later.
24-26. Sióti: synonym of or preceding, for variety, as 75. 20;
in this sense occasionally in Hdt., and reappearing in late prose.
οὐδαμὰ . . . ἔχοντας,
exovras, "by no means is it possible to see the same
persons continuing to possess." Glaucus was a contemporary
of Croesus and Cyrus when matters were unstable throughout
Ionia, and especially at Miletus; cf. v. 28. Indeed, Croesus says
(i. 207), κύκλος τῶν ἀνθρωπηίων ἐστὶ πρηγμάτων, περιφερόμενος δὲ
οὐκ ἐᾷ αἰεὶ τοὺς αὐτοὺς εὐτυχέειν. ἐπιλεγομένῳ: reiterating ἐμεωυτῷ
λóy. ¿díd.— tà ηµíσea does not here, as usual (23. 20), conform to
the gender and number of its dependent noun; for the plural
cf. 33. 2, 46. 1, vii. 103. 25, 139. 23; Plat. Legg. 672 E, Rep. 535 D.
27. é§apуupwσavтa: on 41. 16; the dat. is resumed however in
ἐξεπισταμένῳ.
aieì
28. Keíμeva čoraι: on vii. 190. 10.- Note the collocation σol
σόα. σύ μοι, " for me.”
29. σúµßoda, “tokens ;" any object given to a person as his
credentials. In early days it was customary for a host and guest
at parting to break a die or some other object and preserve the
pieces as tokens of recognition.
30. årrodoûvai: inf. for imperative, as so often in Hm.; some
ten times in Hdt.; as here in connection with an hypothetical
clause, also vii. 209. 24, i. 89, iii. 35, iv. 126, v. 23.
37–8. οὔτε . . . λέγετε, “ nor does any one of those things which
you say bring me round to a knowledge of the matter." TE: on
73. 6.
μοισι
40. ἀποδοῦναι: dependent on βούλομαι.— ἀρχὴν : as 33. 16. — νό-
poiσi . • • Xpηooµai: The Greek law allowed an accused person,
with the consent of the accuser, to clear himself of a crime im-
puted to him, by taking an oath that the charge was false. See
below, lines 46–54.
41-2. ἀναβάλλομαι κυρώσειν, “I postpone settling.” The fut.
inf. as v. 49; Dem. Ol. iii. 9, where the pres. or aor. is commonly
found. G. Moods and Tenses, 27 n. 2. For the thought, see on
vii. 206. 4.
43. &s: on 2. 2.
45. χρησόμενος χρηστηρίῳ : 70. 3; on 12. 15.
467. ληίσηται : on 52. 13. μετέρχεται : 68. 10.
48. tò aútíka, “for the nonce;" 11. 8, 63. 10, 106. 11.— µè cor-
responds to aλX', line 51.
11
242
HERODOTUS.
49. Aníσoaola, "to make prize of." The Pythian versifier has
risen to an unusual pitch of solemn diction and poetic imagery
in this oracle, but his inspiration is due mainly to Hesiod; cf.
Op. 321-26.
εἰ γάρ τις καὶ χερσὶ βίῃ μέγαν ὄλβον ἕληται,
ἢ ὅγ᾽ ἀπὸ γλώσσης ληίσσεται, οἷά τε πολλὰ
γίγνεται, εὖτ᾽ ἂν δὴ κέρδος νόον ἐξαπατήσῃ
ἀνθρώπων, αἰδῶ δέ τ᾿ ἀναιδείη κατοπάζη
ῥεῖα δέ μιν μαυροῦσι θεοὶ, μινύθουσι δὲ οἶκοι
ἀνέρι τῷ, παῦρον δέ τ᾽ ἐπὶ χρόνον ὄλβος ὀπηδεῖ.
50. Cf. Hm. I 320: κάτθαν᾽ ὁμῶς ὅ τ᾽ ἀεργὸς ἀνὴρ ὅ τε πολλὰ
ȧepyòs ő
ἐοργώς.
51. öρкoυ Táιs: the spirit of vengeance born of the false oath.
In Hesiod it is the oath itself that punishes; Theogon. 231, Op.
219. ἔπι Éπεɩɩ: cf. vii. 12. 10, 112. 6, 157. 13.
52. εἰς ὅ κε : epic for ἕως ἄν.
53. There was nothing more dreaded by the ancient Greek
than the destruction of the family and the desolation of the
house, since the dead lost thereby their religious rites, the gods.
of the family their sacrifices, the hearth its flame, their ancestors
their name among the living. Müller, Dorians.
54. This line is borrowed outright from Hes. Op. 285.
55–7. ovyyvýunv toxe, "to extend pardon;" vii. 13. 5. - το
Teipηoñvai: on 32. 6. For other instances of trying the god see
i. 47, 158-9.—toov Súvaola, "had equal force."
60. ŵpµńłŋ, “was begun.”—ès: on 69. 3.
62. ἐκτέτριπταί: cf. 37. 11-14. πρόρριζος, “down to the very
root," so that there is nothing left for a shoot to spring from;
root and branch.
64. åπalteóvtwv: gen. absolute; on 4. 3.
VI. 87.
23. πρὶν δοῦναι: on 22. 4. τῶν πρότερον ἀδικημάτων: After
the defeat of the Thebans, which followed the retirement of Cle-
omenes from Attica (on 51. 2), they evoked the assistance of the
Aeginetans, who, glad of a pretext in consequence of an old
feud, began ravaging the coast of Attica without the usual proc-
lamation of war by heralds (v. 81). Their present ill-treatment
in the matter of the hostages was by no means an offset for that.
The law of retribution required still further punishment from
NOTES.-VI. 86-89.
243
them, whereas they proceeded to another act of injustice.— rŵv:
by attraction, for cognate acc.; cf. 86. 38.
4–5. ẞptσav, “had insolently committed.”— åğıoûvtes, “ claim-
ing."
7. kaì yàp: on 5. 6.--ηv: on 16. 8.— πevte™ηpìs, “a quinquen-
nial festival," in honor of Posidon, in which there was a contest
of ships; Lys. 21.5. The festival occurred once in four years,
like the Panathenaeic and Olympic; cf. 111. 9.
8. Dewpisa: the ship which carried the state envoys (Oewpoi)
to public festivals, and especially to Delos.
9. For λαβόντες after είλον, see on 29. 9.
VI. 88.
2. µǹ où: on 11. 12.— тò πâv, “everything possible.”— ¿n': on
74. 5.
3. Kvoídov kaλeóµevos: cf. 69. 15, vii. 143. 3, vi. 40. 1.
8. Nicodromus organized a revolt of the people against the
ruling oligarchy, and arranged with the Athenians the day on
which he would make the rising, and that which he deemed the
latest he would be able to hold out without their assistance.-
ἐκείνους : 11.7.
VI. 89.
3. waλaiǹv wódiv: "the portion of the town of Aegina the ear-
liest settled and the most strongly fortified. Otherwise Nicodro-
mus could scarcely have made his escape by sea (90. 2)." Rawl.
4–6. ès déov, “in due time;" cf. 90. 2, vii. 144. 12.— å§ióµaxoi ...
ovµßadeîv, “sufficient to engage in battle;" vii. 138. 8.-— év ậ
év TOUT this repetition of the preposition is regular when the
relative precedes the antecedent; but in the reverse or natural
order, the preposition is usually omitted with the relative; 42.
13, 75. 3, 77. 3, 125. 14, vii. 26. 1.— Xpñσaι, “to lend."
7. The friendship of the Corinthians continued at least to 440
B.C., but they were bitter enemies of the Athenians at the open-
ing of the Peloponnesian war, 431 B.C., to which changed rela-
tions τοῦτον τὸν χρόνον refers.
8-9. διδοῦσι διδούσι: on 43. 17. — πενταδράχμους ἀποδόμενοι,
"having sold them for five drachmas a piece," i. e. a little less
than $1. Compare our nominal price of "one dollar in hand,”
in business transactions.
12–13. тàs áráσas, "in all;" on vii. 4. 4. This shows that
the usual complement of the Athenian fleet up to this time was
244
HERODOTUS.
50 (cf. Hm. B 556), while it is 70 directly after the battle of
Marathon (vi. 132. 3), and was raised to 200 within the next ten
years (vii. 144. 8), demonstrating that the rising of Nicodromus
must have occurred shortly before the battle of Marathon (on
72. 2). The chronology of the other events of the feud cannot
be determined.— ènì, "against," of hostility; so, often with acc.
in connection with verbs of motion; on 74. 5.— kaì, “but,” as
vii. 11.4; on 73. 6.— ǹµépη: dat. of the degree of difference.
VI. 90.
2-4. és és-, èк- èк: on 16. 7.-EK Tŵv: on 27. 9.
56. οἰκῆσαι: on 20. 7.
ἔφερόν
ἦγον: on 42. 7.
VI. 91.
2. VσTEPOV: between 490 and 480 B.C.-oi maxées, "the well-
fed,"
""the wealthy;" opposed to λeπτós.
λεπτός.
4–5. xeɩpwσáμevou: epanalepsis in synonymous partc.; on 29.9.
—ảπò, “in consequence of;" as 105. 13, 138. 22.— ayos: 56. 5.
6-7, ἐκπεσόντες: on 70. 5. πρότερον : pleonastic but not un-
common after plávw; cf. 116. 3; with the infinitive as vii. 2. 5,
150. 3, following the same rule as πрív: on 22. 4, 116. 3. The
expulsion of the Aeginetans from their island occurred in 431
B.C. They were settled by the Spartans in the district of Thy-
reatis in Argolis, where they were surprised by the descent of an
Athenian fleet in 424, carried off prisoners to Athens and exe-
cuted. That Hdt. does not mention this last event, so apt for
his purpose, seems to indicate that he never lived to hear of it.
9. Els Tis: on vii. 153. 9.
13. ai xeîpes ẻkeîvaι, "those hands;" there is a grim particular-
ity in this expression like that of 75. 14-17. Compare iv. 62,
and the affecting scene in Xen. Cyr. vii. 3. 8.
14. ¿µπeÒuкvîal: cf. Hm. A 513, of Thetis at the knees of Zeus.
VI. 92.
23. σφέας αὐτοὺς: on 12. 10. νηυσὶ ἑβδομήκοντα: the ships
of the Aeginetans. The Athenians had asked the Corinthians
for 20, in order that the two fleets might be just equal in num-
bers.
4. Toùs Kai πρórepov: at some earlier period when the Atheni-
ans attempted to remove from Aegina certain statues of olive wood
claimed by both parties; v. 86:
NOTES.-VI. 89–95.
245
7. Κλεομένεος: 76. 13. — ἔσχον ἐς: on 2. 2. - συναπέβησαν,
"their men disembarked with ;" supply ävdpes, from vées.
9-11. Taúrŋ: on 22. 10. The dat. here without év is rather
poetic. ἐκτίσαι . . . ἑκατέρους: cf. 79. 5.
14. For the position of opɩ, see on 34. 12, 69. 19.
18. After the naval victory the Athenians appear to have
landed on the island and beleaguered the town.
21. Aekeλéos: the famous Attic deme, northeast of Athens.
3. αὐτοῖσι : on 32. 8.
VI. 93.
VI. 94.
1. σννĤπто πρòs: ovv- is seldom repeated, but is usually repre-
sented by πρós: 14. 7; on 16. 7.
2. ò... èπoíee, "the Persian king proceeded to carry out his
design." When tidings were brought to Darius that Sardis had
been burned, and he was told who the Athenians were that took
part in the raid, he called for his bow, and shooting an arrow
ínto the air, exclaimed, " Grant me, O Zeus, to take vengeance on
the Athenians;" then he commanded an attendant to say to him
thrice, every time dinner was laid, δέσποτα, μέμνεο τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων
(v. 105).— BOTE: on 44. 15, 5, 5.
3. Construe μιν after ἀναμιμνήσκοντός, upon which μεμνησθαί
depends.
4. Пeiσiotpatidéwv: Hippias and his sons, who since their ex-
pulsion had continually hoped to return to power at Athens by
the aid of Darius.πρоσкатηµévov, "besieging him with impor-
tunities;" see vii. 6. 9.
5. Bovλóμevos: on 46. 6. The change occasions the renewal
of the subject in ó Aapeîos.
7–8. toùs µǹ dóvtas: the reference is indefinite, and the partc.
conditional; hence µǹ: cf. 43. 12, 108. 26, 49. 4, vii. 139. 26, 138.
6, iv. 144. 10.— φλαύρως πρήξαντα : on 45. 2.
11. 'Apraþépvea: he had probably now succeeded his father
as satrap of Sardis; cf. vii. 74. Doubtless in consequence of
Artaphernes' youth, Datis appears as the real leader.
13. Athens and Eretria were the only cities of Greece that
sent aid to the Ionians.
VI. 95.
3. ³Adńiov πedíov: in the eastern part of Cilicia. Hm. mentions
it as the place where Bellerophon wandered in his melancholy,
shunning the tread of men (Z 201).
246
HERODOTUS.
5. See 48.7.
- τοῦ :
11-12. ieù, "straight on for," as they had been running since
rounding the southwest point of Asia Minor; on 17. 5.
H. 757; G. 182; C. 415.
13-14. Ικάριον : see 96. 2. - ὡς . . . δοκέειν : on 30. 2. — μὲν
modestly leaves room for other opinions in some unexpressed
correlative clause with dé: vii. 24. 1, 50. 12.
VI. 96.
2. πрoσéμižav: properly of persons, here transferred to place;
cf. vii. 26. 10, 214. 12; on vii. 22. 16.
3. πεîxov, "intended;" sc. Tòv vóov: originally the mind is re-
ἐπεῖχον,
garded as a weapon aimed at a mark; Hm. x 15; Pind. Ol. 2. 160;
on 2. 2, Phaeacians, ◊ 543, 556.
4. Пépσaι: unexpected emphasis from position; cf. 107. 11,
vii. 21. 4; on vi. 39. 5.— τŵν πρóтeрov: refers to an unsuccessful
τῶν πρότερον:
expedition led against the island by Aristagoras and the Persian
Megabates, before the Ionian revolt; v. 28–34.
5. ovdè úπtéµelvav: The addition of a negative opposite to a posi-
tive idea, or vice versa, is familiar from Hm. and a favorite with
Soph. and Hdt. For the former case see Hm. A 416; Hdt. vii.
40. 4, 46. 13, 226. 11; for the latter, T 164; Hdt. vii. 58. 12, 119.
22, 186. 6.
VI. 97.
2. kai avtoì: as well as the Naxians; on 14. 2.— Tâvov: about
13 miles north.
3. καταπλεούσης-προπλώσας : note the change of tense, and cf.
S. 19.
:
5. Pηvain the larger island, about half a mile west of Delos.
-αὐτὸς δὲ : on 28. 5.
6. πέμπων ήγόρευε : cf. 37. 7, 46. 3.— ἱροί: because of their con-
nection with the worship of Apollo.
7. . οὐκ . . . ἐμεῦ, “ having formed an unfavorable judgment
against me." With Karayivóσkw the simple gen. is usual. κατα-
is seldom repeated; cf. 101. 2; otherwise with és, 5. 2, 5. 7, 25.
2, 41. 7, 43. 16, 69. 3, 73. 11, 75. 3, 76. 11, 78. 9, 102. 6, 107. 2, 107.
5, 107. 10, 118. 8, 125. 15, 140. 5; with πрós, 16. 4, 91. 10; with
éπí, 20. 3, 43. 3, 97. 14, 103. 11; év, 119.9; on 16. 7.
t
8. ἐπὶ . . . φρονέω, “ have sense to that degree at least.”
9. Súo beoì: Apollo and Artemis, representatives of the sun and
moon, which were worshipped by the Persians.
NOTES.-VI. 95-98.
247
12. ὑμέτερα αὐτῶν: Η. 691 ; G. 147 n. 4; C. 472.
14. ráλavra, “talents' weight." The Attic talent was about
57 lbs., the Aeginetan, 82.-Ovµínoe: cf. vii. 54. 3.
VI. 98.
2. “Iwvas kai Aioλéas: added because of the writer's interest in
the Asiatic coast; cf. ii. 1, iii. 1.
3. μετὰ . . . ἐξαναχθέντα, “but after his setting sail thence.”
This substantive use of the partc. depending either with its sub-
ject, or alone, on a preposition or adverb is rarer in Greek than
is the corresponding construction in Latin and English, and oc-
curs mainly in expressions of time; i. 9, 34, 51, 170, ii. 22, iv. 44,
164, v. 50, vii. 149. 20, 171. 5, viii. 94, ix. 77.
4. λeyov: when Hdt. was in Delos; cf. 119. 21, vii. 129. 27.
5. σelodeîσa: on 29. 9. Thuc. (ii. 8) has a similar statement
with reference to an earthquake occurring just before the Pelo-
ponnesian war. Considerable ingenuity has been expended in
attempts to reconcile the two writers.—TOûTO Tépas: on 27. 10.—
κου : 27. 1.
6. è̟nì, “in the time of;" so often with names of persons in
the gen.
8. Αρταξέρξεω : This passage is thought to have been written
after Artaxerxes' death in 425 B.C. If so, it is perhaps the last
addition to his history made by the author; at least there is
no event known to be later than the decease of Artaxerxes to
which Herodotus can be shown to make clear reference. Rawl.
τουτέων γενεέων: on 21. 6.
9. èπì: on vii. 1. 10.—ekoσ: Reckoning three generations to a
century (ii. 142), we have 667 years, which from the accession of
Darius, 521 B.C., takes us back to the Troic period; cf. vii. 20. 12.
10. ảπò: less frequent than ex: on 26. 10.
11. Tŵv kopvþaíwv: Athens and Sparta in the Peloponnesian
war.
13. åkívηtov: According to the story, Delos was a floating
island until the wandering Leto entered it to give birth to
Apollo and Artemis. Then it was fixed immovable by brazen-
footed pillars rooted fast in earth.
14-15 are omitted in one class of MSS. and the remainder of
the chapter is stigmatized by some editors for its loose connec-
tion with the context.
16. Súvatal =ẻorí: hence the predicate nom.; on 12. 20.
248
HERODOTUS.
17. épteins, "Worker."— ȧpnios, "Warrior." Persian scholars
are pretty well agreed that Hdt. is wrong in his explanation of
these names, and they agree still further that they cannot cer-
tainly set him right.
18. ☎de: on 10. 2.—âv usually deserts its verb in the ind., opt.,
inf., or partc., for a preceding adverb, negative, or interrogative.
VI. 99.
2. στρατιήν παρελάμβανον, " took in troops as allies.”
4. KáρvσTOV: on the southern coast of Euboea.
7. λéyovres, "meaning;" vii. 144. 9.
9.
θ. παρέστησαν . . . γνώμην, " went over to the wishes of the
Persians;" acceded to their demands; cf. 140. 11. There is a
touch of sarcasm in the expression here.
VI. 100.
4. TOÙS KANPOνxéovтas, “who obtained by allotment." After
the retirement of Cleomenes from Attica (on 87. 3), the Atheni-
ans defeated both the Thebans and the Chalcidians in battle,
and settled 4000 colonists on the lands of the wealthy (inπoßo-
Téwv) Chalcidians; v. 77.
6-8. ǎpa, "after all;" on vii. 35. 10.-
on vii. 35. 10. — oùdèv vyɩès, “nowise
wholesome;" cf. Hm. ℗ 524.-ot: on 2. 5.- μèv, "it is true.".
ἐφρόνεον . . . ἰδέας, " but they were minded two ways.” Cf. ἀμφὶς
φρονέοντε, Hm. Ν 345; δίχα θυμὸν ἔχοντες, Υ 32; δίχα δέ σφισιν
ήνδανε βουλή, γ 150.
9. ἐκλιπεῖν ἐς: cf. 33. 9, 34. 13.
12. ékάtepa ús: prolepsis as 41. 12.
τὰ πρῶτα,
13. тà πρŵта, "one of the first;" poetic; cf. prima virorum,
Lucr. i. 86.
15. σdeas on 35. 13.
VI. 101.
1. Ὠρωπὸν: over against Eretria.
3. xúpηs: chorographic gen. limiting Téuevos. These places
were near Eretria eastward along the coast.
4-5. KATAσXÓVτes, "having gained possession of;" changed
construction and meaning from katéoxov katà just employed.—
ěžeßáλλovto: see its opposite 95.8. Euboea was noted for its
cavalry, and the Persians might expect to be confronted by it.
7. oùk... Bovλýv, "did not make their plans;" on vii. 99. 3.-
εἴ κως : on 52. 17.
NOTES.-VI. 98-103.
249
8. σo: for position see on 34. 12. — évíka, was prevailing."
It has for its subject the following inf. as viii. 9; Soph. Ant. 233;
Thuc. ii. 54; cf. below 109. 4, vii. 175. 3.
13-15. τοῦτο μὲν τοῦτο δὲ: on 27. 3.
VI. 102.
1. éπLoxóνTES, "having waited;" vii. 10. 59.
2-3. κατέργοντές τε πολλὸν καὶ, “ not only pressing the Atheni-
ans sore but." For 'A@nvaíous, postponed to the second clause,
see on 23. 22.-πoinσe: with double accusative.
5. Marathon is on the east coast of Attica, on the way from
Eretria to Sunium, and separated from Athens by the Pentelic
range. The large bay offered shelter for the entire fleet, and op-
portunity for landing without hinderance from the Athenians,
who were expecting them at Athens. From this point, too,
Hippias and his father had made their successful march upon
Athens forty-eight years earlier, and he may have hoped that he
would be joined by many of the inhabitants of that district who
had of old been adherents of his party.- èviππevσai: No men-
tion of cavalry is made at the battle-a fact that has given rise
to interminable discussion.
VI. 103.
3. Séka: When Clisthenes established his constitution after
the expulsion of the Pisistratidae, he divided the people into ten
tribes, and ordained that each tribe should elect by vote a Stra-
tegus every year to command the contingent of troops furnished
by the tribe. Later these gradually became civil as well as mili-
tary officers, and the real directors of the whole policy of Athens.
-ó Séкaтos: In the series of ten, each general appears to have
had his position determined by that of his tribe for the year as
obtained by lot; cf. 111.6.
4. κατέλαβε : 38. 7. φυγείν Πεισίστρατον: cf. 123. 5.
6. φεύγοντι : on 9. 11.— ἀνελέσθαι : 36. 2.
7. åvedóµevóv: coincident with the following verb; on 29. 11.
—TwUTò ¿§eveíkaobat, “he carried off the same honor;" 36. 2, 14.
15.
8. ὁμομητρίῳ: 38. 3. μετὰ: on 38. 1.
9. râσi immoii: In the historic period, mares were most highly
esteemed for racing; not so in Hm.; Phaeacians, v 81.—Tapadi-
Soî, "grants;" cf. 82. 8, vii. 18. 20; on 70. 15.
11*
250
HERODOTUS.
10. ἀνακηρυχθῆναι, " to be heralded victor.”παρείς: on 29. 9.
13. áπoðaveîv: after 527 B.C. when Pisistratus died.
15. πρuτavýιov: northeast of the Acropolis. Here the Prytanes
and foreign ambassadors were maintained at the public cost,
the sacred fire of the city was kept continually burning, and the
laws of Solon were preserved. Every independent Greek city
had such a town-hall; vii. 197. 9.
16-17. pò: in the suburbs. The site is now fixed on the
southwest side of the town.—teláḍatai: S. 66.
18-19. αὗται αἱ ἀνελόμεναι : for οὗτος preceding the article with
the partc. see 13. 1, 59. 3, 86. 33, vii. 180. 6, 185. 2–12; cf. 61. 35,
vii. 111. 5, 9. 14.- For the fact compare the memorial inscription
of the Spartan Damonon, Rochl, I. G. A. 79, Cauer, Delect.2 17.
—¿πoínσav ňdn, “had already done."
21. Kíμwvi becomes by its position a dat. of possession, which
is common only in pronouns; cf. 41. 7, vii. 38. 13, vi. 63. 12.
24. Μιλτιάδης : the nom. because οὔνομα ἔχων = ὀνομαζόμενος,
as v. 52, iv. 56; on 12. 20. The juxtaposition is striking.
VI. 104.
3-5. ἅμα μὲνἅμα δὲ: on 13. 6.
7. µiv vπodežáµevot, "giving him warm welcome;" ironical.
Note the vigorous asyndeton with ảyayóvτes. Asyndeton of par-
ticiples is rare in Hdt.
9–10. Tupavvidos: cf. 136.5; 39. 15.— oŭtw, “so at length,” in-
troducing the apodosis, especially after participles; often ourw
dý: cf. vii. 150. 17, 158. 14.— aipedeìs: on 103. 3, 109. 6.
ἄλλως,
VI. 105.
ἡμεροδρόμην
3. ǎλλws, "besides."—μepodpóμnv: explained by Livy xxxi.
24: Hemerodromos vocant Graeci ingens die uno cursu emetientes
spatium. As to the form Cobet (Mnemos. 1884, p. 166) says,
"Non est Graecum ἡμεροδρόμης sed ἡμεροδρόμος.” But see the
Olympic inscription (Archäol. Zeitung, xxxvii. p. 139): Baσidéws
Αλεξάνδρου ἡμεροδρόμας καὶ βηματιστής, κ.τ.λ. τοῦτο μελετῶντα,
"making a practice of that." TOûTO and Taûra in such cases re-
peat succinctly the idea of the preceding clause; 106. 12, 107. 12,
108. 14, vii. 209. 14.
4. Tε: properly appended to eλeye. In general, Hdt. treats
the position of Té rather freely; cf. 111. 10, 136. 10, vii. 8. 32,
24. 3.
NOTES.-VI. 103-106.
251
6. Teyéns: in the southeastern part of Arcadia, the haunt of
Pan.- Boavтa: S. 21.
7. Kedevσaι: easy change to indirect discourse, as 54. 6, vii.
162.9; sometimes due to a desire to shift the responsibility of
the story from the writer's own shoulders.
8-9. δι᾿ ὅ τι . . . ποιεῦνται, " (asking) for what reason they pay
him no attention."- éóvTOS: concessive.
10. Tà 8', "and in other things;" adverbial as if rà μév
had gone before, which in fact is implied in woλλaxây: cf. on
125. 3.
11. m, "directly;" on 11. 1; cf. 115. 8, vii. 219. 6; Xen. Cyr.
vii. 5. 58. It must have been very soon after Marathon, since
Miltiades consecrated the statue of Pan, as proved by the epi-
gram of Simonides below.
13. Iavòs ipóv: in a grotto on the northwest side, just below
the Propylaea, where Ion was reputed to have been born. The
cavern still exists, and at a little distance a statue of Pan (now
at Cambridge, England) has been found, which may be the one
dedicated by Miltiades on this occasion, and for which Simoni-
des wrote the following inscription:
τὸν τραγόπουν ἐμὲ Πᾶνα, τὸν ᾿Αρκάδα, τὸν κατὰ Μήδων,
τὸν μετ᾿ ᾿Αθηναίων στήσατο Μιλτιάδης.
14. λaurádı, “with a torch race." Torch races of unknown
antiquity were celebrated at Athens in honor of Prometheus,
Athena, and Hephaestus. Rival lines of trained runners were
stationed between the altar of these three gods in the outer
Ceramicus, and the Acropolis, and in each line a lighted candle
was to be carried on by each successive runner over a certain in-
terval and delivered to his successor till the goal was reached.
The line which accomplished this soonest with lamp unextin-
guished was the winner. Lucretius introduces this contest in a
noble passage to illustrate the successive generations of men (ii.
77):
Inque brevi spatio mutantur saecla animantum
Et quasi cursores vitai lampada tradunt.
VI. 106.
3. devtepaîos, “on the second day;" H. 619 a; G. 138 n. 7; cf.
120. 3, vii. 196. 5.- The distance was about one hundred and
forty miles, mainly through a mountainous region.
252
HERODOTUS.
4. ἀπικόμενος ἐπὶ: so vii. 172. 8, 148. 19. — ἄρχοντας : probably
the Ephors.
6. πepudeîv, “to permit," through the earlier sense, to over-
look; with supplementary partc. temporally coincident; on 9.
14.— åpxalotárny: compare vii. 161. 19, and their boast of au-
tochthonous origin.
11. ἀδύνατα : on 13.7.
13. ioraµévov: on 57. 7.— eivátn, eiváty: on 21. 7.
14. μὴ οὐ: on 9. 7. κύκλου: sc. τῆς σελήνης. In their calendar
of lunar months the full moon would fall on the 15th, and their
festival of the Carneia chanced to occur just at this time. This
was celebrated from the 7th to the 15th of Metageitnion (Aug-
ust-September), and their statement was probably true that they
were bound by their laws to remain at home to celebrate it.
Many, however, have deemed it only a subterfuge; cf. vii. 206.
VI. 107.
1-3. βαρβάροισι κατηγέετο: cf. 72. 3. τῆς παροιχομένης, " the
preceding;" cf. 2. 3.
4. For 'Iππíŋs repeated, see vii. 12. 6, 19. 4; cf. vi. 23. 15.
9. åréßnσe, “he landed." The transitive fut. and aor. of Baivo
are poetic and Ionic.
10-11. Σtupéwv: they inhabited the small town Styra on the
southwest coast of Euboea; off this in the channel lay Aigleia,
which was under their jurisdiction.- oûtos: on 96. 4.
13. µeĽóvws ... ¿úlee, “more forcibly than was his wont;" cf.
Hm. o 541.
P
14–16. èσeíovтo, "were loosened;" cf. Hipponax 62.— vπò ẞíns
ẞngas, "by the exertion when he coughed."- Note the allitera-
tion here and in 19-21.
18. Οδών: Attic οδούς. ἀναστενάξας : 80. 6.
VI. 108.
12. ἐξεληλυθέναι: on 82. 6. - Ἡρακλέος: The Marathonians
claimed to have introduced the worship of Hercules into Greece.
The scene of the Heraclidae of Euripides is laid here.
4. ¿dedwкeσav: in 519 B.C. according to Thuc. iii. 68; but Grote
places it with more probability in 508 B.C.
6. ňồn åvalpéovto, “had already from time to time incurred,”
during the continuous hostility of the Thebans from the event
that now follows to 490 B.C.; cf. v. 74–79.
NOTES.—VI. 106–108.
253
7–8. ¿Sídoσav,“offered;" note the tense as differing from aor.
Κλεομένει τε καὶ Λακεδαιμονίοισι: the whole is often thus con-
nected to the part, especially if that represents the leader; cf.
Hm. Τ 63, Εκτορι μὲν καὶ Τρωσὶ τὸ κέρδιον. For the reverse
order, see 109. 3, 140. 12, vii. 107. 7, 148. 12.
10–11. ÉkaσTéρw: on 63. 3.—Toinde Tis, "anything such;" as-
similated to ἐπικουρίη. ψυχρή: cf. νίκη ψυχρή, ix. 49, and Eur.
Alc. 353.— plaíηte—ñ, without πрóτeроv or πρív, is rare; 91. 6.
14–16. ẻoûơɩ: on 45. 11.— où oŭtw ús: on 61.4.
17-18. σuveσte@Tas, "waging war with;" cf. 29. 3, vii. 225. 5.
ταῦτα: cf. 107. 5-8.
20. Bwpòv: This altar was erected in the agora by Pisistratus,
a son of Hippias, while archon. It was deemed the centre of
the city, and from it the streets diverged on all sides, and dis-
tances were measured, as from the Milliarium Aureum at Rome.
22-24. μελλόντων : Η. 972 a.-παρατυχόντες: for what purpose
is not known.
25. ènì toloide, "upon these conditions;" to be closely con-
nected with kataλλážavtes: cf. vii. 154. 19.— èâv Onẞaíovs, “that
the Thebans leave unmolested."
26. τοὺς μὴ : on 94. 7. ἐς . τελέειν : on 53. 6.- The Boeotian
federation was composed of some twelve or thirteen autonymous
towns under the headship of Thebes, which was, or professed to
have been, their mother city. Plataeae the Thebans said had
been their latest foundation.
30. elval in this supplemental usage is mostly Homeric and
Herodotean; cf. 108. 32, vii. 47. 3, 154. 11, 129. 17; тòv déσav ëµ-
μεναι οὖρον αρούρης, Hm. Φ 405.— τούτους: emphatically renewing
the preceding relative, as often.
32. καὶ probably connects Πλαταιέας and Υσιάς. Hysiae was
an Attic deme (v. 74) adjoining Plataeae on the east, and the
Athenians appear to have enlarged the possessions of both these
districts northward to the Asopus at the expense of the Thebans.
Others connect 'Yoiás with 'Aσwπòv, for which cf. 35. 9.
34. Grote has well said: "If we summon up to our imagina-
tions all the circumstances of the case, we shall be sensible that
this volunteer march of the whole Plataean force to Marathon is
one of the most affecting incidents of all Grecian history."
Hist. Gr. Part. II. ch. xxxvi.
254
HERODOTUS.
VI. 109.
oùk
1-2. δίχα : on 100. 8. — τῶν μὲν οὐκ ἐώντων συμβαλεῖν, “
"some
seeking to dissuade them from engaging;" cf. 109. 30, vii. 143.
16.—¿λíyous: a positive to which the context lends the force of
a comparative, and therefore construed with the inf.; usually s
or &σte is added; vii. 207. 10.—— Their numbers are not given by
Hdt., but other authorities place them at 10,000, with, and with-
out, the Plataeans. To these are to be added the slaves who
served as their shield-bearers, and might take part in the battle
as light-armed troops. The Persian force was perhaps 200,000.
3-6. τῶν δὲ καὶ Μιλτιάδεω: on 108. 8. ἐνίκα: on 101. 8. — γὰρ :
proleptic with its clause extending into line 9.-... λaxwv:
λαχών
The nine archons, of whom the polemarch was the third, were
chosen by lot from the candidates who offered themselves. The
names of the candidates were deposited in one urn, and mixed
black and white beans in a second. As a name was drawn from
one, a bean was drawn from the other. If the bean was white,
the person named was declared elected; if black, the drawing
continued till a white one appeared again, and so on.
Strategi, however, were elected by show of hands.
The
7. Tò Taλaιòv: When Hdt. wrote, the polemarch had no mili-
tary functions, but acted as judge in the personal and family in-
terests of the metics, and foreigners in general, like the Roman
praetor peregrinus.
10. ἐν σοὶ νῦν ἐστὶ, " upon thee now it rests.”
11. µvnµóσvva: of great achievements, as the labyrinth, ii. 148,
the canal at Athos, vii. 24. 3, etc.; on 19. 9.
12. βίον, " existence;” in this sense usually αἰών, χρόνος.
13. Tε Kaì: names, and words in general, used in pairs are
commonly so connected. Harmodius and Aristogiton by slay-
ing Hipparchus were popularly accredited with the deliverance
of Athens from the Pisistratidae; cf. 123. 7-10. Callimachus
had a twofold relation to them. They were Aphidnaeans like
himself, and to them as deified heroes he had, as polemarch, to
offer the state sacrifices.
14–15. ἐξ οὗ, “ since.”— υποκύψωσι: 25. 8.
ὑποκύψωσι: 25. 8. — δέδοκται, “ it has
been determined.”
18. olá тe: on 13. 7, 9. 7.
19. és σé tol ȧvýket, "it has come to you, look you."
20. ἔρχομαι φράσων: on vii. 49, 13. — ἡμέων τῶν : on 84. 9.
NOTES.-VI. 109-111.
255
22. οὔ: sc. κελευόντων : cf. 67. 10.
24. wote µndíoai, "so that they will medise." The pres. and
aor. inf. are used after ❀σte almost exclusively, not the fut. (i. 189,
viii. 57) since the notion of destiny or obligation may belong to
the inf. at any time.
25. πρív Tɩ kai σalpòv, "before even something unsound;"
100. 7.
26. Deŵv tà ïơa: on 11. 14.— oîoí te eiµèv: the present, emphati-
cally anticipating the future; vii. 236. 11, 157. 16.
27-8. ἐς . . . ήρτηται, " tend towards thee and depend upon
thee." He is the stay to which and from which all lines of
safety extend. Cf. the words of Nestor to Agamemnon, év σoì
μὲν λήξω, σέο δ' ἄρξομαι, Hm. I 97; and ζ 197, ᾿Αλκινόοιο τοῦ δ᾽
ἐκ Φαιήκων ἔχεται κάρτος τε βίη τε.
31. ἔλῃ: sc. τὴν γνώμην.
VI. 110.
3–5. ékekúpwto, "it was determined decisively;" so the plupf.
most commonly denotes the resultant condition of a past act or
state; on vii. 119. 16; cf. vi. 22. 1, 24. 9, 111. 16, 125. 22.—πPUTα-
vnín tôs ñµépns, "command for the day." The chief command
appears to have been held for a day by each successively in the
order of their tribes (on 103. 3), reaching Miltiades on September
12th, the tenth day after their departure from the city.
VI. 111.
46. τότε: on 109. 7. — οὕτω : on vii. 15. 15. ὡς ἀριθμέοντο: on
103. 3.
8-9. ȧvayóvтwv, "conducting;" there was usually a procession
to a temple on an elevated spot, as the Acropolis.-σot points
proleptically to IIλaraιeûσi: cf. 46. 1, 68. 2; on 34. 12.—yáp: The
omitted thought is something like this: "This important posi-
tion was granted them by the Athenians out of gratitude for
their welcome assistance, and their appreciation did not end
here, for." Stein brackets yáp.-- ès, “during;" cf. Xen. Anab.
i. 7. 1, ii. 3. 25.— πEVTETηpíσi: on 87. 7; probably the Panathenaea
here.
10-11. τε: properly after 'Αθηναίοισι: on 105. 4. — λέγων: on
67. 9, 70. 2. -— тà ảyalà: the prayer also of Socrates, Xen. Mem.
i. 3. 2.
13. Tò σтρаTÓπedov éžiσoúpevov: A partc. and its subject may be
256
HERODOTUS.
in the nom., if the subject of the main verb represents at the
same time a part of the participial subject, as here. This cou-
struction is mainly confined to Hdt.; cf. Hm. I 211, K 224, ☛ 95;
on 30. 3.
—
14-15. στρατοπέδῳ, “line of battle.” — αὐτοῦ: as 30. 7. — ἐπὶ
τάξιας ὀλίγας, " few ranks deep;” vii. 188. 7. — ταύτῃ: 30.7.
16. Note the usual predicate position of ékátepov, as 113. 6;
113.9.
VI. 112.
1. Sletétakto: impersonal; cf. vii. 40. 5; on vii. 100. 6.
cf.
2. åπeíbŋoav, “were let slip," like the arrow from the bent
bow (Hm. A 51), or runners in the arena. Readers accustomed
to the elaborate descriptions of battles in our modern historians
will be disappointed with Herodotus. He is graphic rather
than precise, aiming, like Hm., to produce a series of brilliant
detached pictures, rather than a single one which can be thor-
oughly understood.
3-4. oav: attracted to the number of the nearer predicate,
στάδιοι: cf. 36. 9. μεταίχμιον: 77. 3.
6-7. ἐπέφερον, " attributed.". καὶ πάγχυ ὀλεθρίην, " completely
suicidal.”——- ¿λíyous: sc. éóvtas: such omission with verbs of per-
ception is rare, but occurs as early as Hm. E 702, a 301. It im-
parts strength and vigor.- kaì TOÚTOUS: on 11. 7.
καὶ
9–10. tožeuµátov: abstract for concrete. ταῦτα : that the
Athenians were bereft of their senses.-å@póot, "in close array;"
cf. vii. 211. 12.
11-13. πρῶτοι μὲν πρῶτοι δὲ : impressive anaphora; 43. 17.
In his desire to place the valor of the Athenians in the most
striking point of view, the historian has here made a statement
which is certainly belied by his own pages. Besides his account
of battles between Asiatic Greeks and Persians, he tells us (v.
102) that the forces of Athens and Eretria confronted the Per-
sians in battle at Ephesus on their retreat from Sardis.
Μήδων:
φόβος
14-15. réws, "till then."- MySov: on 9. 11.-póßos: cf. 120.
5. Aesch. describes the Persian leaders as poßepoì ideîv (Pers. 27),
and the host as φοβερὴν ὄψιν προσιδέσθαι (Pers. 48).
VI. 113.
4. Zákaι: these dwelt in the northeast of Bactria and were
reckoned among the best troops of the Persian armies.- KATÀ :
local, as 19. 5, 58. 3, vii. 176. 8–9-11-18, 199. 4.
NOTES.—VI. 111–116.
257
5. ἐδίωκον ἐς τὴν μεσόγαιαν : Rawlinson reasonably claims that
this is another rhetorical exaggeration; otherwise the Greek
wings when they united would have found themselves in the
rear of the Persian centre, which would have been forced to
break through them in order to reach the ships—a condition of
affairs which Hdt. does not appear to have in mind. Plutarch
does not even make the Greek centre retreat; it only has some
difficulty in defeating the enemy. Themistocles and Aristides
were posted in the centre.
11. Tûρ Tε aŬTEOV: a reminiscence of the desperate struggle of
the Trojans and Greeks at the ships, Hm. O 716–18.
VI. 114.
1. τοῦτο μὲν, τοῦτο δὲ, τοῦτο δὲ: on 27. 3; cf. 122. 2-3-, vii.
119. 5.
3. åπò d' ědave: on 38.1; cf. vii. 10. 56, 156. 5.
4. Cynegirus was a brother of the poet Aeschylus, who like-
wise took part in the battle, and is said to have prided himself
more upon his exploits there than upon his achievements in
tragedy.
5. ảþλáστwv: the ornament of the stern, often raised high over
the head of the steersman.- xeîpa: acc. of specification.
VI. 115.
1-3. τοιώδε: on 10. 2.— ἐξανακρουσάμενοι, “ having pushed off
from shore;" not by backing water, for the ships appear to have
been stationed with the stern towards shore; 114. 5.
5-6. ἀπικόμενοι: on 65. 9. — αἰτίην . . . Αθηναίοισι, “ suspicion
was aroused among the Athenians.”— čoxe: impersonal.
8. ñồŋ: on 105. 11. The long delay of nine or ten days on
the part of both Athenians and Persians before the attack was
made has been a fruitful theme for conjecture. The Persians
may have been waiting for the emissaries of Hippias to produce
a division which Miltiades knew to be fomenting (109. 23), and
if he had learned that this had reached its culmination and the
signal of the shield was to be displayed on the day of the battle
inviting the Persians to sail to the city, he would have made
the attack exactly when he did.
VI. 116.
1-2. ὡς . . . τάχιστα, " with such speed of foot as they had.”
258
HERODOTUS.
Trodov depends on és as gen. of quality; mostly with exw: cf. vii.
188. 12, 157. 11. Aristides with his tribe was left on the field of
battle to guard the prisoners and booty. The return march of
twenty-six miles was made on the afternoon of the battle, so that
when the Persians reached Phalerum they saw at daybreak the
heroes of Marathon confronting them.
3. The perfect, which кew represents, is rare after piv, the
usual tense being the aorist: as here Thuc. v. 10; Is. 7. 27.
5. év ăλλợ: this was regarded as a good omen. Cynosarges
was near the Lyceum, in the southeastern suburbs of Athens.
6. vπeρаιwρηléνTes, "having laid to over against;" generally
the ancients regarded the sea as higher than the land; hence
vπeρ-: cf. 99. 1, 97. 3, 98. 3, 107. 2, 31. 3, 12. 3; Phaeacians, ◊ 55.
-Phalerum was just east of the Piraeus, which had already
been pointed out by Themistocles as the proper place for their
harbor, and work had been begun upon it in 491 B.C., but inter-
rupted by the approach of the Persians.
7. ἀνακωχεύσαντες: on 29. 9.
VI. 117.
3. These Athenians were buried on the plain where, as Pindar
nobly says, παῖδες Αθηναίων ἐβάλοντο φαεννὰν κρηπῖδ᾽ ἐλευθερίας,
and memorials were erected to their memory. The large tumu-
lus which is still to be seen there, was supposed, from excavations
made in it by Dr. Schliemann, to be earlier by some centuries,
but this has recently been disproved.
πληγέντα,
7–8. πλnyévтa, " smitten."- Bλnlévтa, “shot," by arrow or other
weapon out of hand.
9. The blindness seems conceived as resulting from the pre-
sumptuousness of human eye gazing openly upon the working
of superhuman power; cf. Hm. e 350, κ 528; Aesch. Cho. 99;
Theoc. xxiv. 94. Epizelus should have followed the prudent ex-
ample of Telemachus in the recognition scene, Hm. π 179: été-
ρωσε βάλ᾽ ὄμματα, μὴ θεὸς εἴη. Two such phantoms were seen
when the Persians made their attempt upon Delphi (viii. 39),
and a female figure urged on the Greeks at Salamis (viii. 84).
In a picture of the battle painted on the walls of the Poecile
Stoa at Athens, not long after the event, the hero Marathon,
Theseus, Echetlus, Athena and Hercules were all represented as
taking part.
10. Aéyelv avtòv žкovσa, “I heard that he said;" the inf. is the
NOTES.-VI. 116-119.
259
imperf. and the information at second hand. "I heard him say-
ing” would be λέγοντος αὐτοῦ ἤκουσα. λέγοντα αὐτόν may inter-
change with Aéyew, but the information is more certain; vii. 10, 85.
11-12. Note the signal effect of the broken order, ăvâpa..
ὁπλίτην . . . μέγαν.— σκιάζειν : on 52. 25.
VI. 118.
2. Mukóvą: northeast of Delos, about two miles distant.
3. Tis: Relatives and demonstratives are often attracted into
the gender (and case) of the substantive with which they are
connected by the copula; on 36. 9.
ἄγαλμα,
5. ayaλua, "statue;" more distinctively, line 12.-кexpuσwpé-
vov, “gilded.”
9-10. τὸ ἄγαλμα—τὸ ἄγαλμα: the repetition emphasizes his in-
structions, and dignifies the object; on 7. 8.— Aýλɩov: on the
Boeotian coast.
13. Sử, “after;" cf. vii. 30. 5.
VI. 119.
1. τοὺς τῶν Ἐρετριέων ἀνδραποδισμένους: on 57. 27.
4-6. тpìv with inf.; on 22. 4.— èveîxé, “ cherished within him."
– σφι, ἀρξάντων : on 4. 3.- προτέρων: pleonastic with ἀρξάντων:
cf. 91. 6.
7–8. éwutòv kai wur: the repetition and juxtaposition ingeni-
ously emphasize the gratified vanity of Darius. κακόν: cf. 20.
2, 41. 19.
9. σTalμ, "resting-place." Hdt. describes the royal road,
running from Sardis to Susa, as having along its whole length,
σταθμοὶ βασιλήιοι καὶ καταλύσιες κάλλισται (v. 52). Ardericca was
on this road, just northeast of Susa. The following account ap-
pears to be that of an eye-witness, and if so this point is the
farthest east that Hdt. is known to have reached in his travels.
12. idéas, “kinds" of products.
14. knλwvniw, “sweep," such as are still seen occasionally at
wells.
16-17. åvтdéel: the collective sing., occurring especially in
descriptions of customs, employments, sacrifices, arts, etc.-ès...
¿doús, “being poured into another receptacle it turns three dif-
ferent ways;" i. e. it separates into its three components, the salt
gathering into one mass, the asphalt another, and the oil is left
by itself. Tρáжeтаι: S. 13.
260
HERODOTUS.
20. ¿Sµǹv: S. 4. The oil was a species of crude petroleum.
23. τὰ . . . οὕτω : cf. 31. 1.
VI. 120.
2–3. Kataλaßeîv, "to reach it;" vii. 230. 4. They appear to have
arrived on the day following the battle.-тρiтaîοɩ: on 106. 3.
5. θεήσασθαι τοὺς Μήδους : they were not yet buried.
VI. 121.
2. av kote åvadéğaι, "would ever display;" inf. for opt.
34. ὑπὸ τε—καὶ ὑπὸ: with τέ-καί the preposition is not re-
peated except for good reason.— oïtɩves: on 2. 5.— ǹ óµoíws, “or
equally with."
5. This family of Callias was one of the most wealthy and
noted at Athens. The names Callias and Hipponicus alternated
for several generations. Callias, son of the Hipponicus here, is
mentioned vii. 151, and belonged to the generation of Hdt., so
that the Pseudo-Plutarch (De Malig. 863) asserts that the men-
tion of him here is simply intended to curry favor with the
wealthy family.
6. Te corresponds to κaì, 123. 1.
7. 8кws: on 12. 3.- He was expelled from Athens twice.
9. τἆλλα τὰ ἔχθιστα : cf. 57. 1, and on 46. 10.— πάντα: on 88. 2.
VI. 122.
This chapter has been transmitted to us through the inferior
family of MSS. only. Stein thinks that it is not an intentional
interpolation, but was originally the fugitive and sketchy mar-
ginal note of some later reader, jotted down as the first outline
for an encomium of the schools, in the manner of the sophists of
the second to the fourth century A.D., and that it thus finally
crept into some texts. The language is a fair imitation of the
Herodotean, but betrays in several places its Hellenistic origin.
According to this view Καλλίεω — ἔχειν represents the motive
which the rhetorician intends to develop in his encomium.
2. тà πρodedeɣuéva, "what has been already mentioned;" in
this sense not classic. Supply dieλdeîv xpeóv, as often used by
the rhetors.
3. ǎkpos: SC. éyéveto, "became eminent;" cf. v. 112, vii. 5. 17.
5. Πύθια: the Pythian games were held near Delphi.— ἐφανε
púon és, "became noted among;" a late verb.
NOTES.-VI. 119–124.
261
9. Swpeǹy should be "dower," for which the ordinary word is
φερνή οι προΐξ. σφι-ἐκείνῃσί τε : incorrect.— ἐχαρίσατο, “ he in-
dulged them greatly."
10. In general, Greek ladies were not even asked to give their
consent to the match arranged for them. Parents managed
marriages often on both sides, always on that of the woman.
The husband was frequently a complete stranger until the day-
of the espousals.
αν
VI. 123.
•
35. ἀναδέξαι without ἄν harmonizes with ἦσαν μισοτύραννοι, ας
φαίνονται ἐόντες (121. 5) with ἄν κοτε ἀναδέξαι (121. 2). οἵτινες :
on 2. 5. ἔφευγόν: 103. 4. οἵτινες
τούτων.
.. TE..
When to a
relative clause a second is connected by a copulative or adversa-
tive conjunction, the relative is customarily not repeated, but is
represented by a personal or demonstrative pronoun (generally
avrós) if a change of case is necessary; cf. vii. 125. 9. oûtos is
rare, and stronger.— ToÙS TUρávvous: Pisistratus and his sons; cf.
i. 64, v. 62.
6–7. oi éλevbepúσavτes: for this use of the article and partc. as
predicate, cf. 123. 12, 124. 7, vii. 2. 14, 10. 68. —й πep, “than
even;" Homeric and Herodotean, reappearing in Hellenistic
Greek. The feelings with which the Athenians in general re-
garded Harmodius and Aristogiton may be seen from these lines
of Simonides (131): ή μέγ' Αθηναίοισι φόως γένεθ᾽ ἡνίκ᾽ ᾿Αριστο
γείτων Ιππαρχον κτεῖνε καὶ ῾Αρμόδιος.
8. ἐξηγρίωσαν: cf. v. 62: Ιππίεω ἐμπικραινομένου ᾿Αθηναίοισι διὰ
τὸν Ἱππάρχου θάνατον. — ὑπολοίπους: Hippias and Thessalus.
θ. ἀποκτείναντες: on 29. 11. οὐδέ τι μᾶλλον: on 3. 8.
11–12. ei dǹ ye: His account at v. 63 is introduced by &s 'A0ŋ-
ναῖοι λέγουσι. åvaπeíσavтes: by a bribe (v. 63); accordingly,
whenever any of the Spartans came to consult the oracle pub-
licly or privately, they were told by the Pythia that they must
free Athens from her tyrants.
VI. 124.
1. ảλλà yàp, “but still;" a case of anteoccupatio, or forestal-
ment of a possible objection; cf. vii. 214. 11.
2–3. µèv óv, “on the contrary."— ev ye: ye usually prefers the
preposition to its regimen, as regards position.
4–5. λóyos aipée, "is the statement convincing;" cf. the Home-
ric iuepos, xóλos, λýon aipeî: Shaks. Ham. i. 1: "Horatio... will
262
HERODOTUS.
not let belief take hold of him;" on 37. 10; vii. 41. 2.—ěk ye åv
ToÚTOV: for this position of av (as vii. 139. 9), compare the closely
analagous case of its intrusion between article and noun, iv. 130,
Thuc. vi. 64, Eur. Phoen. 512.- ¿πì . . . λóyw, “for any such rea-
son;" it might have been for some other purpose however.
6. toûto ǎλλws eineîv, "of that to affirm otherwise;" this seems
modelled on ἵνα σε εὖ εἴπῃ, Hm. a 302, etc.
VI. 125.
1–2. tà ávékaßev: 35. 4. The genealogy of the family so far as
known is this:
Megacles I. (Archon about 620 B.C.).
Alcmaeon (about 590 B.C.).
Clisthenes in Sicyon.
Megacles II. (about 560 B.C.).~ Agarista.
Clisthenes (about 520 B.C.).
Hippocrates.
Ariphron.
Megacles III. (about 490). Megacles IV. AgaristaXanthippus.
Deinomache
Cleinias.
Alcibiades.
Pericles.
3. τοῦτο μὲν corresponds irregularly to μετὰ δὲ, 126. 1.
4. 'Aλкµéwv: There are chronological difficulties in this epi-
sode which are irreconcilable. This Alcmaeon was leader of
the Athenians in the Cirrhaean war, 595 B.C., and seems to have
been dead before 560 B.C., when Megacles appears as the head of
the family. It is not till 556 B.C. that Croesus begins to consult
the Greek oracles. See also on 127. 14.- τοῖσι . . . ἀπικνεομέ-
volơi: on 85. 3. For the story of his trial of the oracle and his
lavish gifts, see i. 46–54.
7. μιν: subject of ποιέειν.— πυθόμενος: with inf. as 41. 1, 117.
14; cf. 41. 12, and on 117. 10, 85. 1.— Audŵv: gen. of source.
8. χρηστήρια: Delphi and Amphiaraus ; i. 49, 52. φοιτεόντων,
"kept going." When Croesus had proved the truth of the
oracles, “he took his fill of them” (i. 55).—— kwvròv: Croesus.
9. τὸν = ὅσον : cf. vii. 102. 3.
11-12. πρὸς . . . προσέφερε, “ upon the gift, since it was so rare
a one, after careful thought he brought the following device to
bear."—πρoσépepe: cf. 18. 3, and on 44. 6.
NOTES.-VI. 124–127.
263
13. karadımóμevos: by drawing it up so as to bag deeply over
the girdle.— kɩlŵvos: S. 2.— kołóρvous: high hunting-boots.-
EйρLσкe, "he anywhere found;" note the force of the imperf.
15. κατηγέοντο: cf. i. 30: Σόλωνα θεράποντες περιῆγον κατὰ τοὺς
θησαυρούς.
the most striking
"The laughter of
17. μετὰ δὲ after πρῶτον μέν, as 128. 4.
20. TEW: on 73. 4. This vivid picture is
specimen of broad humor in our historian.
Croesus at the sight is echoed by the reader, who has presented
to him a most ludicrous image hit off with wonderful effect, and
poeticized by the touch of imagination, which regards the dis-
torted form as having lost all semblance of humanity." Rawl.
For other examples of humor less broad, see vi. 1, 129, vii. 120,
162, 226.
21-3. τοῦ: on 2. 5. — ἐσῆλθε, “ entered into ;” cf. μένος ἄνδρας
ἐσέρχεται, Hm. P 157. — πρὸς, on 38. 1.
24-6. ἐπλούτησε: on 23. 8. οὗτος οὕτω : on 12. 15. τεθριππο-
τροφήσας: 35. 4.
VI. 126.
1. μετὰ δὲ ὕστερον: pleonastic; cf. vii. 17. 9, 33. 6. — δευτέρῃ,
"next;" as shown by 127. 22.-μv: the house.
4. The domination of this family of tyrants lasted longer than
that of any other in Greece—one hundred years, according to
Aristotle. Clisthenes reigned from about 600 to 570 B.C. Like
Megacles he took part in the Cirrhaean war.
6-7. τούτῳ : cf. 108. 30. προσθεῖναι, " bestow.”— ἐόντων: 16. 8.
10. es, “on;" cf. 90. 2, vii. 8. 97, vi. 86. 42, 88. 9.
12. ȧpauévov, "beginning" (to reckon it). For position, see
on 41. 10.
15. ποιησάμενος - είχε: on 12. 14. — ἐπ' αὐτῷ τούτῳ, “ for that
special purpose;" to test the physical qualities of the suitors.
VI. 127.
1-2. This narrative seems modelled upon various incidents in
the old epic, especially that of the suitors of Helen. For the
repetition of ¾à¤e, cf. Hm. ◊ 322–3, y 430-41; on 7. 8.
The fact that Hdt. begins the list with those from Italy has
been regarded as probable evidence that this episode was com-
posed at Thurii.
3–4. Sǹ: on 63. 15.—xλɩdîs: It is related that Smindyrides
was accompanied to Sicyon by a thousand fowlers and a thou-
264
HERODOTUS.
sand cooks; that it made him feel tired to see a man at work in
the field; and he complained that the rose leaves on which he
slept had creases in them.- els avǹp, " without exception;" like
unus omnium, strengthening the superlative; cf. Xen. An. i. 9,
12.- Sybaris was destroyed 510 B.C.
5. Siris was on the Tarentine Gulf near the later Heraclea,
which finally absorbed it. Like Sybaris, it was famed for its
luxury. See on vii. 143. 18.— As regards the position of λeyoµé-
vov, obscrve that it is not like that of kaλeoµévŋ, 22. 11, as the
noun (åvdpós) with which the article agrees is omitted; cf. 61.
20, vii. 155. 9, 170. 2.
6–7. OûTOɩ: note this resumptive pronoun also below, lines 7,
10, 16, 21, 26.-—μèv resumes pèv, line 2.-кóλπоυ 'Iovíoυ: the Adri-
atic Sea.
8. Tiтóρμov: Observe the striking suspension of thought on to
¿deλpeòs, since πaîs is anticipated. Titormus is said to have
lifted a stone to his shoulders that the famous athlete Milo could
scarcely move, and Milo, on seeing him, exclaimed in wonder,
"A second Hercules here!"
12-13. Þeidwvos Sè, "of that Phidon I mean;" cf. 79. 4. He
was a legitimate Heracleid, king of Argos, but is accused by
Aristotle of changing the monarchy into a tyranny. He ex-
tended his authority over the eastern half of the peninsula and
the adjacent islands, and introduced the first regular system of
weights, measures, and coins, the Aeginetan, into the Peloponne-
sus.
14. ôs: on 2. 5. The presidency of the Olympic games be-
longed originally to the Pisatans, but the Eleans obtained pos-
sesssion of it through the aid of Sparta. It was at the invitation
of the Pisatans that Phidon marched to Olympia, forcibly dispos-
sessed the Eleans, and celebrated, according to some, the eighth
Olympiad (748 B.C.), according to others, the twenty-eighth (668
B.C.). Either date seems to preclude the possibility of a son of
his being a suitor for the hand of Agarista, besides the fact that
Clisthenes was a bitter enemy of Argos. See on 125. 4.
17. Trapezus was in the southwest part of Arcadia.— 'Agǹv,
(4 an Azanian." Azania was a district in the northwest of Arca-
dia, comprising seventeen places which formed a political league
apart from the other Arcadians.
23. ᾿Αλκμέωνος τούτου: The omission of the article with a
proper name and ouros occurs occasionally, as 122. 1, i. 18, iii.
NOTES.-VI. 127–129.
265
160, iv. 150, v. 113; yet here the omission is virtually supplied by
Toù following, as Xen. Symp. 4. 37.
27-8. The Scopadae were a famous ruling family in Crannon,
as the Aleuadae in Larissa.— Moλoσσŵv: on vii. 176. 20.
VI. 128.
5-6. τε-και-και-τε καὶ : the second καὶ connects the two
pairs. Where words are connected in pairs, the article may be
used only with the first pair, as here.—opyîs, "temper," "dis-
position.”— τρóπov, "conduct," "character.”
""character."— kai évì is correla-
tive to καὶ συνάπασι.
μέγιστον
8–9. tó ye µéylotov: adverbial acc.; "what was severest;" on vii.
176. 1.— ouveσTín, "the banquet-table.”— SieπEɩρâTO: on 13. 7.
10. τοῦτον: on 108. 30, 16. 4. πάντα: on 88. 2, 121. 9.
11. Kou, "by chance;" cf. 98. 5.
13. ἐκρίνετο, “ was esteemed."— tò åvékalev: more frequently
τὰ: 125. 1.
14. Kuyedídnoɩ: Hippoclides was probably a member of the
family of Miltiades, and brother of the Cypselus mentioned 34.
5.— ἦν προσήκων: on vii. 190. 10.
VI. 129.
2. ἡ κυρίη τῶν ἡμερέων: cf. ἡ κυρίη ἡμέρη, v. 50, and on 43. 12.-
Tŵs ... yáµov, “ for the celebration of the marriage feast.".
kλíolos refers to the custom of reclining at table.
ката-
3. ékpáσios: the article is often so omitted with the second
noun when they are connected by a copulative conjunction.—
κρίνοι: on 49. 11.
☛–6. åπò Seíπvov èyívovтo, "were advancing beyond the meal,”
"the banquet was over;" on 14. 3.— ảµþí: on 62. 6.
7. tậ... µéσov: what was spoken before all, general conver-
sation. After the song of the early bard had become obsolete,
the Greeks made it a particular point at their banquets that the
conversation should be general, all listening to what any one
might have to say; cf. Theog. 495; Xenophan. 1; Plat. Symp.
176.— For és tò µéσov, cf. 130. 2, 69. 3, vii. 8. 107.
8. TóσLos: wine was not drunk by the Greeks during the meal.
—KaTeXWV, "inthralling," "enchanting," by his flow of wit; cf.
γλώσσῃ κατασχὼν δῆμον, Eur. Suppl. 425.
9. αὐλητὴν αὐλῆσαι: on 12. 15. ἐμμελείην: properly the dance
of the chorus in tragedy, as that in comedy was called kópdag,
12
266
HERODOTUS.
and in the satyr-play σikivvis. But here in a less definite sense.
None of these forms of drama had yet been originated.
11-12. ὅλον . . . υπώπτευε, “ looked with displeasure upon the
whole matter;" cf. the Homeric vπódρa idάv.
ἄλλα
15. oxnµátia, “figures.”—- ¤λλɑ has 'Attikά as its appositive,
σχημάτια,
but may be rendered " as well," "besides;" cf. 103. 19, 127. 24,
vii. 164. 9; Phaeacians, 84.
16. èxeɩpovóμnσe, "gesticulated;" usually of the pantomimic
movements of the arms in the dance.
18-19. ἀποστυγέων . . . Ἱπποκλείδεα, " though rejecting with ab-
horrence the thought that Hippoclides could still become his
son-in-law."
χειρονομήσαντα,
21. eîde xelpovoµńσavтa, "gesticulate," not "gesticulating;"
note the aor. which is here coincident; on 29. 11. Clear cases
of this after ópáw are rare (Cleobul. 1; Hermesianax, 2. 10; Eur.
Alc. 506), as likewise in the sense of priority, since the perf. is
commonly used instead; cf. 119. 7, vii. 18. 7, 46. 4, 50. 19, vi. 16.
11, 17. 3, 88. 6, 137. 9, vii. 45. 2.
22. ¿#wpxýσaó ye µèv, “at all events, thou hast danced away;"
however much thou hast been pleased with thy dancing.
VI. 130.
1. ἀπὸ . . . ὀνομάζεται, “ from this circumstance, that has become
a current proverb." It occurs as such in Lucian and other au-
thors.
3. ἄνδρες . . . μνηστήρες: imitated from Hm. a 368.
4-5. εἰ εἴη, χαριζοίμην ἂν (cf. v. 3): Lucian in a seeming parody
of this passage uses the unreal form of condition, Dial. Deor. xx.
1. μήτ' . . . ἀποκρίνων, " if I might neither decide upon one of
you by preference." pr' shows that the partc. is hypothetical.
6-7. ἀλλ᾽ οὐ γὰρ : on 5. 6.- μιῆς πέρι παρθένου: the preposition
is but rarely placed between the adjunct and its noun in prose;
vii. 15. 6, 154. 8, ii. 43, 148, iv. 32, viii. 26, 100, 112, ix. 42, 85; cf.
29.3.
-
8-10. ὑμέων: on 57. 27. — ἀπελαυνομένοισι, “ debarred.”
•
- ἑκά
στῳ: partitive appositive to τοῖσι ἀπελαυνομένοισι.— τῆς ἀξιώσιος
yîµai, “because of your condescension in wedding from my
family.” εἵνεκα is usually postpositive.— τῆς ἐξ ἐμεῦ γῆμαι stands
as attributive to åĝiéσios, as shown by the repetition of rês: cf.
Xen. Mem. i. 3. 3; Plat. Rep. 412 E; Krüger, Griech. Sp., 50,
6.9.
NOTES.-VI. 129–133.
267
11-13. τῷ ... Μεγακλέϊ: on 40. 1. — ἐκεκύρωτο : 110. 3.—ἐγγυά
oda: note the distinction between act. and mid.
VI. 131.
4. Clisthenes changed the tribes from four to ten and estab-
lished them upon a new basis. His reforms mark the epoch
from which Athens began her career of greatness. They were
made directly after the expulsion of the Pisistratidae, 509 B.C.
6. For καὶ connecting Ἱπποκράτης to οὗτός, see 35. 9, vii. 1. 12;
Hm. n 57.
10–11. This is the only place where our author mentions the
great statesman Pericles, but the few words, sublime in their
simplicity, with which it is done show plainly that he looked
upon him almost as a god. The lion was a common symbol of
royalty; and the birth of Cypselus was likewise heralded to the
Corinthians by an oracle that a lion was to be born who would
palsy the knees of many; v. 92; cf. v. 69.
VI. 132.
1. Tрŵμa: strangely from the standpoint of the Persians, as ix.
90. 2; cf. vi. 44. 6, vii. 233. 11. — yevóµevov: on 85. 3; cf. 136. 9,
vii. 1. 1.
...
3-8. αἰτήσας . . . λέγων attee: observe the anacoluthon occa-
sioned by the intervening matter; cf. 13. 1-5, 61. 14–18.—¿ßƐoµń-
κοντα: on 89. 11.— ἐπιστρατεύεται: present denoting intention, a
special phase of the progressive present.- kaтaπλouтieîv: S. 68.
VI. 133.
2-3. Пápov: famous for its marble, and at this time the most
prosperous and most powerful of the Cyclades, according to
Ephorus. It lay a short distance to the west of Naxos.—vπĤρ§av
..ès, “were the first to begin by engaging with triremes in the
expedition to;" cf. iv. 1, vii. 8. 57, vi. 99. 2.— πрóтeрoɩ: on 119. 6.
5-6. καὶ: on 10. 4.- διὰ Λυσαγόρεα διαβαλόντα: on 98. 3.
7. Hydarnes is mentioned vii. 135 as commander of the forces
along the seaboard, and is probably the leader of the Immortals
in the army of Xerxes (vii. 83, 211), and son of the Hydarnes
who was one of the Seven; on 43. 13. If he came to his com-
mand in the last year of the Ionian war he may have been influ-
enced by Lysagoras to expel Miltiades from the Chersonese (vi.
34, 41), while the absence of such influence previously will ac-
268
HERODOTUS.
count for the long immunity which Miltiades had enjoyed since
the Scythian expedition.
10–11. µèv: the implied opposite is easily conceived; cf. 95.
14. ού: on 9. 20. πρὶν ἢ ἐξέλῃ: on 82. 7. — ὅκως : Η. 885 ; G.
217; C. 553.
12–14. T, “one obol.”—oi Sè: on 3.5.—Connect Tôi Tôi Tới XEOS.
- čσke: S. 82.-ÉKάσTOTE: "each day;" when a vulnerable point
(èπíµaxov: on vii. 22. 11) was disclosed by the attacks of the be-
siegers.
15-16. ἐξηείρετο : on 13. 7. διπλήσιον τοῦ ἀρχαίου: on 5%. 4.
VI. 134.
1. Ès TOσOÛTO, “up to this point of."
+
2. λέγουσι : supply κατὰ ταὐτά, which is expressed in a similar
passage, iv. 150.
avtoì =µoûvoi, as vii. 130. 4; cf. Phaeacians,
• 207.-How the other Greeks told the remainder of the story
Hdt. does not inform us, and this serves as a fair example of the
tendency, to which he is sometimes subject, of preferring that
version of a story among several which dealt most largely in the
supernatural, or introduced his favorite doctrine of the divine
Nemesis; on 75. 18. Miltiades, intoxicated by his magnificent
victory at Marathon, and seeking to revenge himself upon a pri-
vate foe, must needs meet with fitting punishment, which is
aptly brought into connection with an attempt to commit an
act of sacrilege. The account of Hdt., however, is generally
preferred by historians to that of Ephorus, who relates that
when the Parians were on the point of surrendering they per-
ceived a fire, really accidental, on Myconus, but supposed by
both parties to be a fire-signal of the approaching Persian fleet.
They accordingly refused to abide by their agreement; and the
Athenians, fearing to be attacked by a superior force, sailed
away.
3–6. Cf. vii. 213. 1-3. ἐλθεῖν ἐς λόγους: on 86. 18. - Τιμοῦν :
S. 45. — Tŵv xlovíwv leŵv: Demeter and Persephone; cf. vii.
153.8.
*. περὶ .
IIápov: note the alliterative effect.
8. What the suggestion was Hdt. does not know. He gives a
guess in lines 12-13.
10. ρkos: the peribolus wall of the sacred precinct.-opo-
φόρου : on 16. 9.
12–13. µéyapov: usually in Hdt. the inner space of the temple
NOTES.-VI. 133-136.
269
surrounded by walls.- Tɩ dǹ, "something or other;" on 62. 9;
H. 1002 a. τῶν ἀκινήτων, “ of the objects that might not be
moved." It was deemed a sacrilege to remove objects of wor-
ship, especially statues of the gods, from the places where they
had been consecrated. It is probable that Miltiades intended
to carry off some statue whose possession was supposed to deter-
mine the safety of the city, like the Palladium of Troy.
14-15. TE- —καὶ: on 41. 5. - καταθρώσκοντα τὴν : cf. vii. 29. 3, 218.
18; Hm, a 330, ☛ 206, ¥ 85.
VI. 135.
1–2. þλaúpws exov: of sickness; cf. 94. 8; on 42. 11.
6. katηyńσato, “had given information;" cf. 135. 9, vii. 183. 13.
8-9. πολιορκίης : objective gen. ἔσχε: on 23. 8. καταχρήσων.
ται: cf. 52. 19. ἐξηγησαμένην : cf. vii. 6. 26.
10-11. ἐs: on 69. 3. ἄρρητα : on 16. 9.
12. où ... airíny: cf. Hm. T 164, of Helen; a 348 of the bard.
13-14. δεῖν: on 64. 4.— τῶν κακῶν κατηγημόνα: cf. vii. 128. 15.
VI. 136.
3. ĕoxov év σтóμaσɩ: modelled on Hm. B 250, where Odysseus
says to Thersites: τῷ οὐκ ἂν βασιλῆας ἀνὰ στόμ᾽ ἔχων ἀγορεύοις.
Here, as there, of censure, but Hdt. iii. 157. 17, of praise.
Ξάνθιππος
4. Závðiπños: cf. 131.9. He was commander of the Athenian
naval contingent at Mycale. The rivalry between the two fami-
lies, beginning as early as Megacles (on 128. 14), came into still
greater prominence in the case of Pericles and Cimon.— lavárov,
on a capital charge;" gen. of value; H. 745; G. 178. — væò :
ὑπὸ
72.7.
7-8. ὥστε: on 44. 15. ὑπεραπελογέοντο : According to the an-
cient practice of the Athenian law, parties to an action were
obliged to conduct their own cases without assistance, but if in-
capacitated by physical or mental debility from pleading, a
friend, by permission of the court, could speak in their behalf.
This practice was gradually relaxed, and in the time of the ora-
tors the principal speeches were not unfrequently made by the
advocate, though the real parties were expected to open the
case, however briefly.
9-10. πολλὰ: cognate acc. · αἵρεσιν : parallel with μάχης for
variety, both constructions being admissible after ẻmɩµeµvnµévol.
- ús, "how that."-Te: on 105. 4.
270
HERODOTUS.
1214. προσγενομένου . . . θανάτου, “ accordingly the people hav-
ing come to his aid as regards his acquittal from the capital
charge." Hdt. implies, though he does not mention, the ordi-
nary course in Attic procedure, that the first vote was taken on
the question of guilt, and this went against him. Then the ac-
cuser proposed the penalty of death, but the accused had the
privilege of imposing on himself some inferior penalty which he
was willing to undergo, as in the case of Socrates. On the sec-
ond vote the people rejected the penalty of the accuser, and ac-
cepted that proposed by Miltiades' friends, a large sum for the
time, but perhaps intended, as Nepos says, to cover the expenses
of the expedition.— karà rèv ådɩkíŋy, “because of his offence,"
årárns above; the abstract for the concrete adíkηµа.-The talent
$1056.60.
15. Later writers related that Miltiades was cast into prison
till he should pay the fine, and died there. Opposed to this
stands not only the silence of Hdt., but the usual course of Attic
justice, which allowed a fair time for the payment of fines and
admitted of security being given.
VI. 137.
1. This episode is occasioned by the mention of Lemnos above,
136. 10.
2. No proper apodosis appears for èπeíte . . . ¿§eßλńonoav, since
ἐξεβλήθησαν,
the remainder of the sentence is broken in upon by the long
parenthetic account which occupies the remainder of the chap-
ter. On resuming at 138 the construction is altered; cf. Phaea-
cians, 187.
4. πλǹν, like our "but," is sometimes used as a conjunction, as
here, sometimes as preposition with gen.—örɩ, "namely that."
μèv: opposed to Sè, line 13.-Hecataeus flourished from about 520
to 475 B.C. He was a native of Miletus, and Hdt. applauds the ad-
vice given by him to the Ionians at the time of the Revolt (v. 36,
125). He did more than any other prose writer to pave the way
for Herodotus, having composed two works, one a geography,
the other a series of genealogies, mainly mythical, but also con-
taining other material, as the present account of the Pelasgi. He
is the only prose writer Hdt. mentions by name, and then usually
to refute some statement of his, as here, and ii. 143.
5-6. ëônσe λéywv: on 67. 9.-éteíte ideîv: cf. 84. 5, vii. 150. 16;
on 52. 25.
NOTES.-VI. 136-138.
271
7. 'Yunooòv: acc. after vnò, by reason of the implied extension
over considerable space; vii. 114. 10; cf. vii. 108. 4. This thought
does not come into view below, line 14.- Hymettus was east of
Athens, with its roots stretching out nearly to the city. The
Pelasgi were given this westerly slope.
8. Much of the so-called "Cyclopean architecture" has been
assigned to the Pelasgi. Their wall about the Acropolis was
mostly destroyed by the Persians, though a portion retained the
name of “the Pelasgic wall" for centuries after. — ¿λŋdaµévov :
ἐληλαμένου
Phaeacians, 9.
9-10. ταύτην . . . ᾿Αθηναίους: resumptive. — ἐξεργασμένην: on
129. 21.— ev: 30. 12, 135. 13.
11. λaßeîr plóvov, “envy seized upon them;" cf. 135. 8, 124. 4.
12–13. Toùs 'Alŋvaíous: on 27. 12. The language is that of
Hecataeus, not of Hdt., who defends the Athenians here and
generally.
if ὡς were absent, a
For its occurrence in
14. ἐξελάσαι: dependent on λέγουσι as
common construction in Hdt.; vii. 171. 3.
Hm., see Phaeacians, v 156; cf. 54. 6, 105. 7.
17. èπ³, “after;" vii. 193. 11. See Phacacians, 20. Εννεά-
Kрouvoν: called Callirrhoe until the Pisistratidae fitted it up
with nine outlets for the delivery of the water, and changed its
name to signify that fact. It was southeast of the Acropolis,
near the Ilissus and the temple of Olympian Zeus.
18-19. oikétas, "household slaves." This statement may stand
for some indefinitely early period, but does not accord with the
testimony of Hm., who represents the heroes of the Troic period
as attended by many slaves, while the expulsion of the Pelasgi oc-
curred some two generations later, according to Hdt. iv. 145–7.—
aûraɩ: alone mentioned because the insult was offered to these.
21-22. τέλος : adverbial. φανῆναι = φανεροὺς γενέσθαι, as 4.
10; practically a passive for ëλaßov, line 24; cf. 72. 5.
27. äλλa xwpía: Samothrace, Imbros, and Plakia, and Scylace
on the Propontis, are mentioned by Hdt. as occupied by Pelas-
gians.
VI. 138.
2. TÓTE: directly after their expulsion from Attica.
4. krŋσáµevol: The Pelasgians themselves were little given to
seafaring. Brauron was on the east coast of Attica, between
Marathon and Sunium, and there, according to the common
tradition, Iphigenia deposited the statue of the Tauric Artemis
272
HERODOTUS.
on her escape from the Tauric Chersonese (for another version,
see on 69. 15). It became a centre for the worship of that god-
dess, and the Athenians celebrated a quinquennial festival there,
at which Attic girls between the ages of five and ten went in
procession, dressed in crocus-colored garments, to the sanctuary,
and there performed a rite in which they imitated bears. With-
out this rite, according to Suidas, they could not marry. Per-
haps in later days the festival was transplanted to the Brauronion
on the Acropolis, where their crocus-colored garments were con-
secrated and preserved, and are often mentioned in the inscrip-
tions which give the annual inventory of the contents of the
temples. Cf. Ancient Gr. Inscr. in Brit. Mus. 1, pp. 79–80.
5. The Athenians habitually avoided the fem. of the adj. ’A¤ŋ-
vaîos, out of deference to Athena, the solemn form of whose name
was 'Aonvaía: cf. line 21.
8. τέκνων ὑπεπλήσθησαν, " became the mothers of many chil
dren."
10-12. συμμίσγεσθαι, “ to associate with.” — τύπτοιτό: cf. on
12. 3.
13–14. kai dǹ kaì, “and above all." Since the story is intended
to show the ancient right of the Athenians to the island, it
makes these boys behave themselves already as rightful own-
ers and masters. τῶν παίδων οἱ παῖδες: juxtaposition for con-
trast.
15-16. ἑωυτοῖσι: on 12. 10. — καί σφι βουλ.: cf. 86. 22-26.
Seɩóv Tɩ, "something of anxious fear;" cf. vii. 101. 4.
17. Siayivwokolev, “they are resolved;" opt. for ind. in indirect
discourse. The sentence is a specimen of the argument a minore
ad majus; cf. vii. 46. 8, v. 97, i. 60, ix. 68, 100.—σþíσɩ: cf. line 13.
— πρὸς . . . τοὺς : on 68. 9.
-
18–19. aůtíka, “thus early."-Tí Sǹ," what pray;" sudden and
vivacious change to the direct question.-Seev, "really;" with-
out ironical tone; rarely so.
24. Toùs åµa Oóavтɩ: According to the usual story Thoas was
concealed and saved by his daughter Hypsipyle, so that ăµa
must be translated "in the days of,” in order to harmonize. To
this there can be no objection, but Hdt. may have some other
version of the tale in mind; cf. schol. ad Eur. Hec. 887. - For
ἅμα compare τοὺς ἅμα Γυλίππῳ, Thuc. vii. 57.— ἄνδρας σφετέρους :
appositive.
NOTES.-VI. 138-140.
273
VI. 139.
3. ὁμοίως καὶ: on 21. 7. - TOû: in its original demonstrative
sense, found also in Attic prose in this phrase; on 61. 25.
6. ταύτας: assimilated from ταῦτα, to which δίκας is properly
appositive; hence no article; cf. 36. 9, 84. 18, vii. 5. 15.
of édúvavтo: H. 651 a.
10. πρυτανηίῳ : on 108. 15.— ὡς εἶχον κάλλιστα, “ as handsomely
as they were able." exov enters into this phrase as a synonym
Rarely in this sense without accompany-
ing inf., and then only when it may be easily supplied from the
context; cf. 116. 2.
14. ¿§avúσy: Sc. Tòv ñλóov: absolutely also vii. 183. 14; cf. vi.
140. 5; Phaeacians, ʼn 325.
17. Todλòv: actually about 140 miles.
VI. 140.
4. ἐτησιέων ἀνέμων κατεστηκότων, " when the Etesian winds were
prevailing." The commencement of the fair season brings with
it an immutable law followed by the winds in the entire Archi-
pelago: every morning the north wind arises from the coasts
of Thrace, and passes over the whole island sea.
Often it ap-
proaches the character of a storm, but is regular enough to be
free from danger, and it subsides at sunset: then the sea becomes
calm, till, almost imperceptibly, a slight contrary wind arises
from the south, which gives opportunity for the mariner bound
northward to pass on his way by night. These Etesian winds
last throughout the year except in the short winter season.
Curt. Hist. Gr. I. p. 22.
8-9. The island had but two cities, of which Hephaestia lay
on the east side, Myrina on the west.
10-12. καὶ οὗτοι : on 51. 3.— παρέστησαν : on 99. 9. — τε καὶ : on
109.3.
12*
274
HERODOTUS.
VII. 1.
1. ἀγγελίη : S. 35. — ἀπίκετο : S. 3.— μάχης : vi. 111 seq.
2. TÒV YOTάoπeos: on vi. 14. 12. This distinction is bestowed
rather rarely upon Darius by our author; as when he is men-
tioned for the first time, i. 183, when he joins the conspirators
against the Pseudo - Smerdis, iii. 70, when he is formally an-
nounced as succeeding to the kingdom, iii. 88, and in an inscrip-
tion, iii. 88, iv. 91. Here we begin a new epoch in the great
drama and the Iliad of our history, to which all that precedes is
but the Cypria that prepares the way; cf. 32, 56.— YoтáσTEOS:
S. 42.
3. kaì πρìv, “even before."—кexapayμévov, “exasperated;" on
vi. 94. 2.
4. Σάρδις: on vi. 42. 4; cf. i. 15. 2, 15. 7, 16. 6.— καὶ δὴ καὶ τότε,
“of a truth then;" introducing the apodosis, as kaì tóte dŋ often
in Hm.; cf. below 164. 15, ix. 7, and Phaeacians, ʼn 261.
η
5. Selvóteρa éπoice, "he waxed still more angry;" the middle
is more common in this phrase; cf. 35. 1.— µâdλov épµnto, “was
more determined;" on vi. 110. 3; cf. vii. 1. 14, 19. 1.
6-7. ἐπηγγέλλετο π. ἀγγέλους: compare a similar fulness of ex-
pression vi. 48. 3–4.— wóλis: S. 46. The phrase is more compre-
hensive than that of vi. 48. 7, including all Asia under his sway;
cf. below, line 10, and 21. 3.
8. ἑκάστοισι : easily obtained from πόλις : cf. 8. 56. πρότερον :
see vi. 48. 6.—Tapéxew: in the postponed and therefore emphat-
ic position. Most editions have παρεῖχον.— καὶ . . . τε καὶ : on vi.
6.8.—véas: ships of war, mainly triremes; vi. 48. 7.
9. πλoîɑ: cf. vi. 48. 8, vii. 21. 7, 186. 4, 191. 2.
10. ¿dovéeto: in Hm. of trees and clouds agitated by the wind;
a poetic, Herodotean, and Hellenistic word. éri: lends an
added definiteness to the temporal acc., like in and per in Lat.
cf. vi. 98. 9, 101. 10, vii. 20. 1, 119. 8; πaрà, 46. 10; κaтà, 3. 2, vi.
42. 1; cf. diá, vi. 12. 7.
11-12. ús, “in the expectation of."--кal connects back to
καταλεγομένων: on vi. 131. 6.— τετάρτῳ: on 4. 3.
NOTES. VII. 1–3.
275
13. Kaµßúσew: S. 36. For the fact see Epitome, Book III.—
ἀπέστησαν ἀπὸ: on vi. 25. 5. Περσέων : S. 38.
·
14. ἐνθαῦτα: S. 2. καὶ μᾶλλον, “ still more.
καὶ μᾶλλον, “still more.” καὶ ἐπ᾽ ἀμφοτέ-
povs, “against both alike."
VII. 2.
1. Σteλλoµévov, "preparing to set out."
3. ús deî µɩv, “on the ground that it was incumbent on him;'
a clause of indirect discourse, where the more vivid pres. takes
the place of the imperf. or opt.; cf. 142. 18.- µɩv: S. 53.—åño-
δέξαντα : S. 10.
4. οὕτω: on vi. 104. 10. — ἦσαν γεγονότες : cf. vi. 37. 5, vii. 3. 12,
11. 10; on 190. 10.
βασιλεῦσαι: on vi. 23. 8.
5. πρотEρоν: on vi. 91. 7.
6-7. Γοβρύεω: on vi. 43. 3. θυγατρός : name unknown.- τέσε
σepes: Xerxes, Achaemenes (7. 6), Hystaspes (64. 9), Masistes (82.
7).—-тŵv: H. 749; G. 175. 2; C. 423; on vi. 61. 31.
10-14. κατότιὅτιὡςὅτι: on vi. 75. 18. εἴη: Causal clauses
rarely have the opt., and then only after historical tenses when
the cause is assigned emphatically on another's authority.—πpòs,
'among;" cf. 5. 12, 139. 2; a development of the original mean-
ing, “before,” “in the eyes of." In Attic, mapá with the dat. is
usual in this expression, as Xen. Mem. ii. 3. 15, iv. 4. 19–20.—¿
κτησάμενος: on vi. 123. 6.— Πέρσῃσι : S. 39.
VII. 3.
1-2. kw: S. 1.—— Katà tŵutò TOÚTOLσI, "at the same time with
these events." See the fuller expression, 206. 8, and the note on
vi. 14. 15.— twutò: S. 27.—ó ´ApíσTwvos: on 1. 2; cf. vi. 61-70.
34. Σούσα: on vi. 1. 4. — βασιληίης: S. 6. ἐπιβαλών : in con-
sequence of the insult offered him; vi. 67.
5. ώνὴρ : S. 27. παίδων limits διαφορήν : cf. 2. 2.
6-7. φάτις μιν ἔχει: on 5. 12, vi. 124. 4, 37. 10. — τοῖσι: S. 56.
9. idiary: somewhat in the same way in which Xen. calls the
younger Cyrus δοῦλος: cf. Eur. Hel. 276, τὰ βαρβάρων γὰρ δοῦλα
távтa ñλǹv évós. Darius belonged, however, to the royal family
of the Achaemenidae, and in default of heirs of Cyrus became
successor to the throne.- For the repetition of Aapeíw, see on vi.
7. 8, 23. 15. ούκων: S. 23.
10. oikòs: Ionic for eikós.—eiŋ dependent on ús, line 7.— Tò
yépas, "the kingdom;" Homeric.
276
HERODOTUS.
11. ἑωυτοῦ: S. 54. ἐν Σπάρτη: no such custom is otherwise
known there; hence Grote doubts the whole story.
12. ourw: on vi. 10. 2.— voµíčeodai, though dependent on èπei,
is thrown into the inf. by the interposition and force of ëòn,
which should be parenthetical; cf. 150. 16, vi. 52. 25, 137. 14.
13. ĕwơɩ: subjunctive in a general supposition.—πρìv î: on vi.
22. 4.
14. ὀψίγονος: poetic, and pleonastic with ἐπιγένηται. τοῦ ἐπι-
γενομένου : predicate gen. of possession after γίνεσθαι, “belongs
to;" or cf. 148. 24, vi. 67. 1.
17-18. δοκέει .
• •
Eépens: personal for impersonal construction;
Η. 944.— ἄνευ with its case supplies the condition for βασιλεῦσαι
ἂν of the unreal form."Ατοσσα . . . κράτος : like Amestris under
Xerxes (ix. 109), and Parysatis under Darius Nothus (Xen. An.
i. 1. 1).
VII. 4.
2. Eép§ea: S. 37.— ảλλà yàp : “but still;" cf. vi. 124. 1.
3. vσTéρų ĕTEï: The battle of Marathon occurred on the 12th
of September, 490 B.C. The three years of preparation (vii. 1. 10)
for the expedition were 489-8-7; revolt of Egypt (1.12), 486;
death of Darius, 485 (according to Clinton, F. H., December 23,
486); reduction of Egypt (7. 4), 484; Xerxes' four years of prep-
aration (20. 1), 484-3-2-1; Xerxes invades Greece, 480.
4. ovvývelke: cf. vi. 22. 14, 38. 7.— autòv: in contrast to his son.
Stein now brackets Δαρεῖον. βασιλεύσαντα: the aor. is regular
where a definite period is indicated; 56. 2.- rà πávra, “in all;"
πάντα,
marking an exact sum total; then râs has regularly the attribu-
tive position; vi. 89. 12.— te kaì, connecting numbers, is rare in
Attic; cf. vi. 27. 5, 36. 9, vii. 184. 7–12–26.
5. Cyrus reigned from 558 B.C. (549 according to Sayce, Hdt.
p. 438) to 529; Cambyses, 529–22; Pseudo-Smerdis, the last seven
months of 522; Darius, 521-485; Xerxes, 485-465. Darius was
buried near Persepolis in a rock-cut tomb, still to be seen, con-
taining an inscription which briefly records his exploits.
6. ovdé: on vi. 22. 6.— åteσte@tas: S. 3, 77. The characters
of Darius and Xerxes, as depicted by Hdt., have been thus brief-
ly summed up by Rawlinson: "Darius was the model Oriental
prince, brave, sagacious, astute, great in the arts both of war and
peace, the organizer and consolidator as well as the extender of
the empire, a man of kind and warm feeling, strongly attached
to his friends (vi. 30), clement and even generous towards con-
NOTES.-VII. 4–5.
277
quered foes (vi. 20, 41, 119), only severe upon system where the
well-being of the empire required an example to be made; Xerx-
es, the second and inferior form of the tyrant, weak and puerile
as well as cruel and selfish, fickle, timid, licentious, luxurious,
easily worked on by courtiers and women, superstitious, vain-
glorious, destitute of all real magnanimity, only upon occasion
ostentatiously parading a generous act when nothing had oc-
curred to ruffle his feelings."
VII. 5.
1. ȧvexúρnore, "reverted;" àv- implies to the rightful heir; 205.
6, 154. 5.
2. Ξέρξην Ξέρξης: on vi. 21. 7. — τοίνυν, " now ;” continuative.
5. μéylotov with Suváμevos: as ix. 9, Xen. An. ii. 6, 21; Lys. 30,
14; Isoc. 15. 136, 18. 23; Plat. Phaedr. 257 D; on vi. 66. 5.
6. Μαρδόνιος : vi. 43. Ξέρξη-Δαρείου : cf. 82. 5-6.
""
7. TOLOÚTOV: on vi. 10. 2; cf. 136. 9. EXETо, "kept rehears-
ing.' SéσTота: among Athenians denoting the relation of mas-
ter to slave, and gods to mortals; cf. Xen. An. iii. 2, 13.
9. кaкà Пépσas: cf. Aesch. Pers. 236; henceforward Hdt. seems
often to paraphrase that tragedy.— µǹ ov: on vi. 11. 12.—T@V :
II. 996; G. 153. 1; C. 597.— ảλλ': on vi. 11. 13.
10. ei introduces a wish implying a mild exhortation, as Hm.
II 559, O 571. This use of ei alone is poetic. Stein's assertion
that the opt. with imperative force is confined to the third per-
son is disproved by Hm. Z 164, г 407; Eur. Med. 313, Alc.
734-6, where the second person occurs as here in connection
with an imperative; cf. also Hm. 8 193; Luc. Tim. 6.— тò vûv: on
vi. 35. 4.
11. ἡμερώσας ἐξυβρίσασαν : the metaphor is borrowed from
the treatment of unruly animals.
12. ἵνα . . . ἀγαθός : a paraphrase of Hm. a 95 : ἵνα μιν κλέος
iva
iva
ἐσθλὸν ἐν ἀνθρώποισιν ἔχῃσιν: on 3. 6, vi. 4. 5.
13. καὶ
σтρаTEÚεσbaι: cf. Hm. A 186, and Ⓒ 515: iva ris
στυγέῃσι καὶ ἄλλος Τρωσὶν ἐφ᾽ ἱπποδάμοισι φέρειν πολύδακρυν "Αρηα.
-Tɩs: on vi. 9. 14.
14. oi, "of his;" on vi. 103. 21. Tμwρós, "for vengeance."
Vengeance was his chief theme, but he also set forth the practi-
cal advantages that would accrue from the subjugation of Hellas.
-Toûde: referring to the same thing as ouros, as Soph. Antig. 64,
189, 296, 673, 750, 1334.
278
HERODOTUS.
+
15. παρενθήκην : cf. 171. 2, vi. 19. 4. ποιεέσκετο : S. 58. — τήνδε :
on vi. 139. 6.
16. SévSpea: The fondness of the Persians for trees and parks
meets us frequently, and kings and satraps prided themselves on
their skill in planting them with their own hands; cf. 31.8; Xen.
Oec. 4; Cic. De Sen. 17.- For pépe after ein, see on vi. 3. 2.
17-18. ȧpeτýv: of productiveness. —äкpη: vi. 122. 3.
ἄκρη:
· ἀξίη,
"meet.". ἐκτῆσθαι
ěktĤolaι: S. 59. The middle or active is usual in this
Construction.
VII. 6.
1–2. ola: on vi. 5. 5.— üπаρxos: on vi. 42. 4.
KATEрyάσaτó, “he prevailed upon ;" cf. vi. 2. 5.— te kaì : con-
necting synonymous words as vi. 67. 7, vii. 23. 19, 130. 8, 158. 22.
-σTE: as vi. 5. 10.
4-5. "For other things also proving auxiliary co-operated with
him towards Xerxes' compliance." See vi. 125. 6 for the fulness
of expression.-ès with the article and inf. commonly denotes.
purpose; cf. Xen. Hel. vii. 1. 35, Cyr. i. 6. 22, viii. 1. 3, Rep. Lac. 4.
6, Anab. vii. 8. 20.-épŋv: regular position for the subject of
the inf. that has the article, and forming a strong close, parallel
with Ξέρξην of the preceding clause. — τοῦτο μὲν: on vi. 44. 3.
7. ètekaλéovto: cf. vi. 22.8; construed with the postponed èπì
τὴν Ἑλλάδα. πᾶσαν . . . παρεχόμενοι, " displaying the utmost zeal
(towards him)."
8. The Aleuadae were a wealthy family of princes, deriving
their pedigree from Hercules, and dwelling on the Peneus at
Larissa; under their influence Thessaly had received a common
system of national institutions, particularly an organization of its
army. They might now look upon themselves as the head of
the nation, and hope, by the aid of the Persians, to become ac-
tually what Hdt., with some exaggeration, calls them, "kings of
Thessaly;" cf. v. 63; Thuc. i. 111. They were eager patrons of
literature, and at this time were the friends of Simonides and
Pindar.
9. Baσiλées: the plural, as often in the tragedians, of all the
members of the ruling family. -- Пecolorpatidéwv: on vi. 94. 4.
Hippias either fell at Marathon, or died soon after at Lemnos.--
οἱ ἀναβεβηκότες: supply ἐπεκαλέοντο.
11. προσωρέγοντό οἱ, were urgent with him;" synonym of
πроσε éρeτо, line 27, which is resumptive after the usual manner
of our author. For co-ordination with partc. see on vi. 13. 7.
NOTES.-VII, 5-6.
279
12. Conspicuous among the measures which made the rule of
the Pisistratidae so memorable was the careful recension of the
Homeric poems. This was confided to a commission composed
of Onomacritus, Conchylus, Zopyrus, and Orpheus of Croton, who
are accordingly the first known editors of Homer. Onomacritus
was a poet of some ability, a professional expounder of oracles
Expnoμodóyos: cf. 142. 17, 143. 15), and the collector and arranger
(dialérŋs) of the oracular verses which were current under the
great but mythic names of Musaeus and Orpheus.
13–14. Movσaíov: cf. Verg. Aen., vi. 667. — rǹv: proleptic use
of the article, as if the matter were well known, followed by its
explanation; cf. on vi. 40. 1, vii. 147. 10.
15. It was to Hipparchus that the literary fame of the house
was mainly due, in consequence of his feeling and enthusiasm
for poetry and art.
16. èπ³... áλoùs cf. vi. 72. 5, 137. 22; but here it is not so
much the immediate detection in the act, as the irresistible
proofs by which Lasus demonstrated the forgeries.- Lasus of
Hermione was a lyric and dithyrambic poet of the highest re-
pute, the instructor of Pindar and rival of Simonides. He is said
to have composed poems from which σ was rigidly excluded.
17. éµmoléwv: Pausanias thought that all the poems ascribed
to Musaeus, except a hymn to Ceres, were forgeries of Onomacri-
tus. A scholiast asserts that he interpolated Hm. à 604.
18. The region about Lemnos, by reason of its volcanic nature,
was peculiarly liable to sudden upheaval and subsidence.—åþa-
višoíato: S. 65. For the tense, see on vi. 82. 11.
19. é§ýλaσé µiv: This incident is important as exhibiting the
extreme care exercised by Hipparchus for preserving the purity
of the poems gathered under his direction and superintendence,
and the jealousy with which the work of the editors was watched
by the contemporary men of letters.
20. Xpeóµevos tà µádiora, “though on intimate terms with
him.”— Tà µádιora: vi. 65. 5, 89. 8; in Hdt. chiefly with expres-
sions of friendship or enmity.— ŏkws: on vi. 12. 3.
21-3. λεγόντων σεμνούς λόγους, “speaking in reverential terms,”
as of one endowed with a divine and prophetic instinct.— σeµvoùs
is an especial attribute of gods or things divine.—xpησµŵv: par-
titive.-évéol: S. 82; opt., as in line 20.- pépov: present, as in line
17; cf. on vi. 132. 3. — rŵv: demonstrative with µèv, which is re-
sumptive of the preceding pév.
280
HERODOTUS.
-
24-8. & Sè: on vi. 3. 5. Ἑλλήσποντον, like έλασιν, to be gov.
erned by nyeóμevos, "giving information about," according to
the contents of the oracles. ἀποδεικνύμενοι: sc. προσεφέροντο.
VII. 7.
1-2. ἀνεγνώσθη : on vi. 50. 8.
δευτέρῳ ἔτεϊ: on 4. 3.
5. πολλὸν : S. 50. — ἐπὶ: on vi. 98. 6.
6. 'Axaιµévéï: on 2. 6.-The two appositives distinguish him
as the full brother of Xerxes, whose half-brothers were numer-
ous.
7-8. Xpóvų μETÉTELтa: on vi. 126. 1; cf. vii. 33. 6.-Inaros, king
of the Libyans between Egypt and Cyrene, brought about the
revolt of Egypt from the Persians, 460 B.C., and continued to
maintain his authority there till 455, being assisted by an Athe-
nian fleet of two hundred ships, which was finally destroyed by
the Persians, and the revolt subdued. It was during this period
that Hdt. is supposed by Rawl. to have visited Egypt; at all
events, he saw the battle-ground at Papremis, where Achaemenes
was defeated and slain in the first year of the revolt; iii. 12.
te
VII. 8.
2–3. oтpátevµa, "expedition," as often in Hdt.-rò ènì: on vi.
22. 3. — Èπíkλntov, "special."—ȧpíorov: the royal princes, the
Seven," the satraps and commanders in the provinces; cf. 8. 100,
19. 9, 26. 6. This council seems represented on a large amphora
in the Naples Museum, discovered in 1854, and figured in Mon.
Ined. dell' Inst. Arch. IX. L., and in part by Baehr, Hdt. vii. 3.
6. Dionysius of Halicarnassus distinguishes three distinct
styles of composition, the austere or rugged, of which Pindar,
Aeschylus, Antimachus of Colophon, Empedocles, Thucydides,
and Antiphon are deemed the exponents; the smooth, or pol-
ished, represented by Hesiod, Sappho, Anacreon, Simonides,
Euripides, and Isocrates; the middle, or mixed, represented by
Homer pre-eminently, by Stesichorus, Alcaeus, Sophocles, Herod-
otus, Demosthenes, Democritus, Plato, and Aristotle. In discuss-
ing this subject (De Vi Dic. Demosth. 41) he turns the following
speech of Xerxes entire into the Attic dialect to show that the
style of Hdt. belongs to the middle, as the happy medium which
appropriates their choicest beauties from both the others.
study in dialectology we have printed this version of Dionysius
side by side with the Herodotean text, in the right-hand column.
As a
NOTES.-VII. 6–8.
281
7–9. katnyńooμai Tibeís, "shall I be the first to establish."
vóμov Tóvde: on 5. 15. The tenor of the custom is merely hinted
in lines 12, 17, 22.— For Te after our', see on vi. 73. 6.
12-13. οὐδαμά κω,
156. 1, 211. 18.
((
never as yet." - παρελάβομεν, “won;” cf.
15-17. Αστυάγεα: king of the Medes. αὐτοῖσι ἡμῖν, “ for us
of our own choice," in addition to what the deity prompts; cf.
Hm. 277.
18–19. wodλà étéπovσɩ, “engaging in many undertakings;" cf.
Hm. § 195.— ovµpépetaɩ: impersonal; cf. 4. 4, 10. 21. — rà: rela-
tive.
21–3. èµòs: note that Dionys. has ó éµòs: see below, lines 45, 47,
5%. — κατεργάσαντο : cf. 6. 3, 211. 4. — ἐπισταμένοισι: Hm. A 365;
Aesch. Prom. 441.
25. éteite tapéλaßov: cf. line 13. The verb is repeated with
altered bearing, as often in tragedy; cf. Soph. Antig. 163–7, and
below 23. 4, 25. 6.
26–7. ¿ppóvtiĽov, "kept pondering;" cf. i. 125; Eur. Hip. 392;
Aesch. Pers. 762.— õkws...: object clause in which the fut. opt.
is rare.-Tŵv: H. 749; G. 174.
28–31. Tuuận: on vi. 21.6; cf. Aesch. Pers. 762.—eportiLov: on
vi. 7. 8.— åµa: vi. 13. 6.
προσγινόμενον,
32. Te: on vi. 105. 4. — πрoσyɩvóµevov, “is added;" supple-
mentary partc. after evpíoкw, as often. The magnificent self-
assurance of the great king is well depicted by the present
tense; cf. vroλeíTeobaι, line 88. What he has once decided
upon is as good as accomplished, as if he were a god deliver-
ing oracle; on vi. 82. 11.
33-5. Note how all this is adapted from the arguments of
Mardonius, ch. 5, as line 16 seems influenced by Onomacritus.-
TE: "but."
39–41. væreρléwμar iµîv, "I may set before you."-èλâv: the fut.
and present are used indiscriminately after µédλw; G. 202 3 n.
46-51. ὡρᾶτε : S. 61.— ἰθύοντα, “ eager.” ἐξεγένετο : 4. 6.
54. πρὶν ἢ: Attic, πρὶν ἄν, ἤ being commonly omitted after
πрív. See on vi. 82. 7.
56. For of after 'Anvas, see on 1.8.
57-8. ὑπῆρξαν ποιεῦντες : on vi. 133. 3; 119. 6. μὲν, for μὲν γάρ,
as 6. 5, 6. 23.
60-1. Aristagoras organized the expedition, but did not ac-
company it; v. 99.— åttikóµevol, “on their arrival;" omitted by
282
HERODOTUS.
Dionys., but such exuberance is characteristic of Hdt. Cf. Soph.
Ant. 897-8; Hm. § 126–7, p 539, ☛ 198, 384, 7, w 237; Hdt. vii.
135. 3.
64–7. žµéas: on vi. 11. 7. — Tà: demonstrative; rare; on vi.
61. 25.
68–71. µévrov, “therefore;" apparently for µèv dý: cf. 13.8; on
vi. 11. 13.— ȧváprηuaι, “I am bound.”—èv auToîσ, "therein;" in
the enterprise.
72-6. εἰ - καταστρεψόμεθα : on vi. 9. 20.— Πέλοπος . . . χώρην :
the Peloponnesus; on 11. 21.
78. τῷ Διὸς αἰθέρι: οἱ Πέρσαι τὸν κύκλον πάντα τοῦ οὐρανοῦ. Δία
καλέουσι, Hdt. i. 131; cf. Ζεῦ αἰθέρι ναίων, Hm. Β 412. — ὁμουρέου-
σav, “conterminous with." The sky was often conceived as a
hollow hemisphere resting upon the earth at its utmost bounds.
82-4. σpeas: rarely of things; cf. 194. 18, 195. 5, vi. 82. 3.—
Note the succession of dissyllabic words, usually avoided on the
principle of variety (Hermogenes, 291).-dià áons...: on vi.
52. 32.
86–8. tɩvà ovdeµíav, "any whatsoever;" vi. 73. 4, 91. 9.— åvSpŵv
—¿vůρúπwv: variety, rather than contrast, as 53. 10–12; cf. 210.
11.
89-91. οἷόν τε: on vi. 9. 7. ὑπεξαραιρημένων: S. 61.
92–3. ýµîv
923. ἡμῖν αἴτιοι: Homeric, as A 153. - δούλιον ζυγὸν: Aesch.
Per. 50.
94–7. åvaítioɩ: on vi. 67. 12.— és tòv: vi. 88.9.
99–101. ồs âv Sè: unusual order, as i. 138. 5; cf. iii. 72. 25;
inscription from Phrygia, Journ. Hellen. Soc. iv. p. 402; regularly
ὃς δ᾽ ἂν, as Dionys. οἱ: Homeric for αὐτῷ or τούτῳ.
102-7. τὰ . . . ἡμετέρου : ἵππον χρυσοχάλινον, στρεπτὸν χρυσοῦν,
ψέλια, ἀκινάκην χρυσοῦν, στολὴν Περσικήν, Xen. An. i. 2. 27. — ἐν
ἡμετέρου: illogical blending of two phrases, ἐν ἡμῶν, and ἐν
ἡμετέρῳ (οἴκῳ). — ποιητέα . . . δοκέω: for the tone, see 101. 8–13;
Hm. ▲ 37.—ès µéσov: vi. 129. 7.
VII. 9.
ע:
2. εἰς: S. 83. τῶν . . . ἄριστος: illogical connection of super-
lative and gen.; Phaeacians, 158. Mardonius alludes artfully
to 8. 26-28.-yevoμévwv: vi. 63. 15.
3. ὃς: vi. 2. 5.- τά . . . ἐπίκεο, “ both in speaking of the other
matters hast hit the mark;" cf. vi. 49. 7. With èπíkeo Krüger
would supply autŵv: cf. Dem. 361.— ǎptora: used adverbially.
NOTES.-VII. 8-9.
283
4. καὶ: strictly for καὶ ὅτι, dependent on λέγων : “ and in saying
that."-"Iovas: some form of this word (Javan, Yaunâ, Yunan)
was the current designation of the Greeks among the peoples of
the Orient.
5. katayedáσai: usually with gen. except in Hdt. ἐόντας
ávažíovs, “worthless as they are."
ἀναξίους,
9. Bovλóμevor: unexpected change to agreement with subject
of ἔχομεν, after ἀδικήσαντα Πέρσας: on vi. 46. 6. — καταστρεψά
μενοι . . . ἔχομεν: cf. πάντα κατέστραπται καὶ ἔχει, Dem. Phil. 1. 6 ;
on vi. 12. 14.
10. où: Even after expressions of emotion (G. 228) ei usually
takes µŋ, but sometimes becomes so completely identified with
őri as to have où: as here after dewòv âv ein, Thuc. i. 121; cf. on
16. 39, 46. 9.
11. Tí deiσAVTES: Such rhetorical questions impart greater
energy to the diction, and give to the premeditated the appear-
ance of spontaneity. Longinus, De Sublim. 18; cf. 21. 3–5.—koíŋv :
on vi. 1. 5.
12-13. χρημάτων δύναμιν : cf. 153. 13. ἐπιστάμεθα μὲν — ἐπιστά-
μela Sè: anaphora; on vi. 43. 18. — τǹv µáxny, "their mode of
τὴν μάχην,
battle;" so 85. 8; Hm. B 823.
14. Sè, "for;" Homeric co-ordination; Phaeacians, 【 6.— AŮTŵV
Taîdas: descendants from their stock; cf. 51. 7, 150. 10.— TOÚTOUS
of: cf. vi. 65. 21, 59. 3, vii. 111. 5.
16. éteɩpýłŋv èπedaúvwv: on vi. 5. 7.- For the fact, see vi. 43–5.
18. ỏλíyov åπoλITÓνTɩ: the more common expression occurs 10.
31.
20. When yɛ is not separated from xaíroɩ its force belongs to
the whole sentence, not to a single word. The connection of
thought is this: No one met me in battle, although they are
wont to fight often, and that, too, in most foolish fashion.-Stein
thinks there is an allusion to the policy of Pericles in the Pelo-
ponnesian war, which was that advocated by Mardonius, line
30; see on vi. 131. 10.
21. ioraolai, “to wage;" 175. 3, 236. 18; Hm. 1 54. — ȧyvwµo-
σúvηs: on vi. 10. 4.
24-6. Bσte: on vi. 27. 8.—åpxýv: on vi. 33. 16.
28. kataλaµßávev, "to settle." For the time represented by
the inf. after xpîv, see G. 222 n. 2. Tavri, "by every means;"
correlative to the idea of manner implied in the partc. Saxpeо-
Hévous: Phaeacians, 429.
284
HERODOTUS.
30. čkáтepoí: postponed from its logical position as subject of
¿¿evpíσkelv: cf. Eur. Med. 570. For the sentiment compare the
lines of Eur. Tem. Fr. 9 : τὸ δὲ στρατηγεῖν τοῦτ᾽ ἐγὼ κρίνω, καλῶς
γνῶναι τὸν ἐχθρὸν, ᾗ μάλισθ᾽ ἁλώσιμος.
ἐς
33. és . . . µáxeoda, "to a resolution of such a kind as to fight."
35. The attributives ἐκ τῆς ᾿Ασίης and ἁπάσας, though belong-
ing to both clauses, are distributed one to each to preserve the
balance; cf. v. 45. 10–11, vii. 10. 18; Hm. a 5.
36–7. TOûTO, “such a pitch;" cf. 16. 32.— πρýуyμaτa, “power."
39–41. ús eiµèv: the indic. after os or őr of indirect discourse
regularly follows an opt. looking to the fut.-8' ŵv: on vi. 76. 7.
- pɩλéeɩ: on vi. 27. 1.—To close a set speech with a maxim is a
favorite device, especially with Sophocles; see below 49. 21, 51.
15, 157. 23, 172. 17; Hm. A 218, г 109, 182–5, π 294, τ 13, etc.
VII. 10.
ἐπιλεήνας:
1. Tоσaûтa: cognate acc.— èπiλeńvas: The simple verb is used
of smoothing rough surfaces, Hm. ◊ 260, and of mastication by
the molar teeth, Xen. Mem. i. 4. 6; hence, to render palatable.
3–4. πpokeiµévn: on vi. 77. 3.—Artabanus is at once the Nestor
and the Theoclymenus of our Epic, whose unheeded advice and
warnings but render the ruin of Xerxes more sure and striking.
5. Tŵ ... ¿wv, “and upon this very fact being reliant;" cf. v.
92, vii. 153. 15.-μǹ: the partc. is conditional.
7-10. αἱρεόμενον: on 175. 7, vi. 30. 1. — αὐτὸν ἐπ᾽ ἑωυτοῦ: com-
mon juxtaposition for effect. παρατρίψωμεν ἄλλῳ χρυσῷ, “ when
we rub it (on the touchstone) by the side of other gold." When
fne gold was rubbed on the βάσανος oι λίθος Λυδίη, a red mark
was left (épvėpòv ideîv tpißóµevov Barávo, Theog. 450), but when
adulterate gold, a dark streak (Theog. 451). The simile is a
common one among the poets, with various application.
12–13. iv. 83.— ouauó yns: H.757; G. 182.
14. τε οὐκ : not οὔτε, because οὐκ belongs closely with ἐπείθετο :
such separation is rare, however; cf. Xen. Mem. i. 2. 4.
18-19. Te usually follows the preposition, but has its excep-
tions as early as Hm. к 68, π 140; see vii. 14. 4, 105. 1, 165. 10, 210.
5, 212. 7.— αὐτοῖσι : cf. 8. 71.
21. Kai Sǹ kai ovvývelké, "well, then, (suppose) it actually hap-
pened;" for this use of kaì dŋ, cf. Eur. Med. 386, 1107, Hel. 1059.
In thought the speaker transports himself far into the future and
conceives the misfortune as having already occurred.
NOTES.--VII. 9–10.
285
24-27. εἰ γε : on 46. 8.— οὔκων . . . ἐχώρησε, “ it did not then re-
ei
sult successfully for them on both elements;" the tense as in line
21.— tĝoɩ vyvoì èµßáλwoi, “they attack our ships;" the dat. as
viii. 84, 87, 92; cf. ναῦς ἐν νηῒ χαλκήρη στόλον ἔπαισεν, Aesch.
Pers. 408.
31. οἷόν = ἐπεὶ τοιοῦτον: on vi. 2. 5 ; or τῷ πάθει οἷον.
32. ВóσπорOν TÒòv Opηíkιov: Straits of Constantinople; iv. 85.
33–4. πavтoîoɩ éyévovтo, “tried all manner of shifts;" in word
and argument imitating the corporeal devices of Proteus (πávтa
γιγνόμενος, Hm. δ 417), or of the gods (παντοῖοι τελέθοντες, ρ 486).
36-8. 'Ioriaîos: on vi. 11. 7, vii. 43. 5. — µndè: Attic kaì µý: on
vi. 22. 6.-- διέργαστο . . . πρήγματα, “ruined would have been the
power of the Persians."
.39. ', "in the power of;" Xen. An. i. 1. 4. ye, like TE, usual-
ly after the preposition; but cf. 176. 8, vi. 124. 3.
42-3. αὖτις: on vi. 75. 10. — ἐπὶ σεωυτοῦ, “ by thyself; as
line 9.
44. Tò: on vi. 32. 6. — eù Bouλeveσ@aɩ: a common saw; 157. 22 ;
Theog. 633; see especially Dem. c. Aristoc. 113, and the use made
of it by Longinus, De Sublim. 2. Aristotle observes (Rh. ii. 21)
that age is prone to the use of maxims; a remark well exempli-
fied by Artabanus.
46. ¿0éλe exhibits thus early (cf. Theog. 447) a tendency tow-
ards development into an auxiliary of the fut., which it actually
becomes in modern Greek; see, however, on vi. 37. 10.
48. ÈπíσTOLTO —εйρηке: mixed form of conditional period; as
101. 11, i. 32. The opt. marks the more remote possibility.
49. Beẞoúλevtal: passive as above.— Loa: on vi. 41. 12.
50–52. PavtáĽeola, "to flaunt themselves."— kvílet: on vi. 62.
φαντάζεσθαι,
1.— τὰ τοιαῦτα: variety for τὰ μέγιστα.— ἀποσκήπτει, “he hurls.”
þɩdéeɩ : on vi. 27. 1. The peculiarity in the form of the Herodo-
tean notion of divine nemesis (on vi. 75. 18) consists in his re-
garding mere greatness and good fortune, apart from any impiety
or arrogance, as provoking the wrath of deity: Tò delov mâv ẻòv
þlovepóv, i. 32. Rawl. But it was a common Greek maxim
that prosperity was the mother of arrogance, üßpis: Sol. 4. 8-9,
Theog. 153; cf. Hes. Op. 214, and below on line 55, and 16. 14,
iii. 80.
55-7. φόβον: panic terror; on 43. 8. δι' ὧν ἐφθάρησαν: tmesis;
on vi. 38. 1.— ἐφθάρησαν: gnomic aor. ; Η. 840; G. 205. φρονέειν
μέγα, " to be proud ;” cf. 24. 2, and οὐχ ὑπέρφευ θνητὸν ὄντα χρὴ φρο-
286
HERODOTUS.
νεῖν. ὕβρις γὰρ ἐξανθοῦσ᾽ ἐκάρπωσε στάχυν ἄτης, ὅθεν πάγκλαυτον
¿έaµậ Oépos, Aesch. Pers. 821.
•
57-8. ἐπειχθῆναι . πρîуμа, “now, to hasten in any matter
whatsoever;" subject of Tíktel.— For πâν, see 38. 6, vi. 88. 2, 125.
20.
60. Sokéovra, ěžeúpoɩ: on vi. 13.7; cf. i. 19, ix. 5, Eur. Alc. 936.
62-3. ματαίους : vi. 68. 8. - οὐκ ἐ. ἀξίων : cf. 9. 5. - φλαύρως
ἀκούειν : on vi. 86. 14.
66. μή
yévηtaɩ: A prohibition in the second or third person
is regularly in subj. if aor.
67. SELVóratov: such neuter predicates are especially common
in maxims.
69–71. πаρeóvтɩ katηyopéwv: the dat. as 9. 5, instead of gen.—
πρiv: 8.54. Note that the negative is contained in ådɩkéeɩ.-
ἐν αὐτοῖσι : 8. 71.
72-3. ἀλλ': on vi. 11. 13. — δεῖ γε πάντως: with covert refer-
ence to 9. 29.
75. wapaßaddoµévwv tà tékva, “staking (the lives of) our chil-
dren on the issue;" the same figure in both Iliad and Odyssey.
76-8. ἐθέλεις βούλεαι: variety. ἀναβαίνῃ: cf. 234. 4.
81-2. εἰ οὐκ ἐθελήσεις: on vi. 9. 20. — σὺ δὲ : on vi. 3. 5.
83-7. αὐτοῦ τῇδε: on vi. 30. 7. — ἐξεργασμένον and γνόντα are
circumstantial participles, diapopeúμevov the supplementary with
Μαρδόνιον after ἀκούσεσθαί: on vi. 117. 10.— ὑπὸ κυνῶν τε καὶ ὀρνί-
Owv: a purely Greek sentiment; Hm. A 4, 379. Hdt. says (i.
140) that the body of a Persian is never buried until it has been
torn by a dog or bird of prey, and this is supported by the whole
tenor of the Avesta. Like his prototype, Homer, he sometimes
forgets to speak in character; Phaeacians, η 50.—σé ye: Homeric
repetition of the subject in second clause (on vi. 3. 5) with sud-
den apostrophe.
VII. 11.
n
2. πατρὸς εἰς τοῦ ἐμοῦ : cf. vi. 23. 21, 33. 18.
3. µndéva: H. 1029; G. 283. 6; C. 617; vi. 88. 2, vii. 149. 3, 194.
14.
TOL,
4. κaí, “still;" on vi. 89. 12. For the ambiguity of Kaí Toɩ, see
on 149. 6.
7-10. μὴ εἴην γεγονώς ἐκ, “ may I not prove to have been born
of;" G. Moods and Tenses, 82 R. 1; cf. i. 210. The perf. opt. in
a wish is very rare, except as an actual present. Xerxes desires
to emulate the glory of his ancestors (8. 27), but has yet to prove
NOTES.-VII. 10-11.
287
himself no degenerate scion of theirs.-It had long been sus-
pected that Hdt. had mingled both the maternal and paternal
lines in this list of Xerxes' ancestors; but it remained for the
decipherment of the inscriptions to give certainty to conjecture.
The genealogy is now stated to be as follows:
Achaemenes.
Teispes.
Cyrus I. (Hdt. i. 111).
Ariaramnes.
Cambyses I.
Arsames.
Cyrus II. (the Great).
Hystaspes.
Cambyses II.
Atossa.
1
Darius.
Xerxes.
Sayce (Hdt. p. 438) thinks it possible that while Cyrus I. and
Cambyses I. were ruling in Anzan (Susiana), Ariaramnes and
Arsames governed the more unmixed Aryan part of the popula-
tion of Persis. Cyrus the Great was king of Anzan before he set
out upon his career of conquest.— µǹ τiµwpnoάuevos, “if I take
not vengeance on;" on vi. 57. 15.
12. åλλ'oùk ékeîvoɩ, "yet will not they;" cf. Hm. A 82; Xen.
An. ii. 5. 19; only in speeches, till a late period.— kaì µála, “even
a second time;" for κaì µáλ' av, as 186. 4.
13–15. vπaрyμévolot, "undertaken." —§: on vi. 26. 10. — of,
"since they.” — Zápdis ... 'Aoíny: favorite Homeric order; cf.
Hm. 77; Phaeacians, £ 9.
T
16-17. πOLÉELV Tadeîv: cf. Goethe's "Ambos oder Hammer
sein.”— ¿yúv, “alternative;" cf. Hm. O. 502, x 65.— táde távta:
with a gesture to his surroundings, and allusion to maleîv: simi-
larly ἐκεῖνα, with allusion to ποιέειν.
18. Tò... è̟σtí, “for middle ground is there none for our en-
mity.”— кaλòṛ: emphatic position; with yívnτal.
Tôn, “
δεινὸν
19-20. on," at once."- Tò Seɩvòv ...: ironical reference to 10.
28. — τοῦτο: on vi. 108, 30 ; cf. vii. 16. 37. τούτους = τοιούτους :
so ii. 135, iv. 79, 95, 166, in each instance followed by the relative,
and standing after the noun with article omitted; on vi. 21. 6;
cf. vii. 9. 36, 102. 3. The relative tends to supply the place of
the article; on vi. 13. 3.
288
HERODOTUS.
21. ¿ Þpú§: more strictly, ó Audós: but the confusion is com
mon, especially among the poets.—ewv... Soûλos: This claim is
founded on the mythic descent of the Persians from Perseus and
Andromeda, daughter of Cepheus (vi. 54, vii. 150), while Cepheus
was brother of Ninus, who appears from i. 7 to have been con-
ceived as having extended the Assyrian kingdom to the west
coast of Asia Minor. Hence the Persian dynasty proclaimed it-
self the rightful heir to the extinct Assyrian kingdom.
23. ἐς τόδε, “ up to this time;” cf. 38. 12; εἰς τόδ᾽ ἡμέρας, Eur.
Alc. 9.
24. Note the dactylic close, as 9. 33. This, as well as a dac-
tylic beginning (8. 58), should be avoided in prose, according to
the rhetoricians; on 178. 9.
VII. 12.
1–3. ẻmì toσoûto, "to such a length.”—perà: on vi. 38. 1.—
evopóvŋ: poetic in conception and usage; 56. 3, 188. 7.
- τε καὶ :
on vi. 41. 5. ἔκνιζε: 10. 51.— νυκτὶ . . . διδοὺς, " and to the night
his counsels imparting;" making night the sharer of his coun-
sels. This poetic expression appears founded on the idea of the
proverb év vukti Bovλý. For the construction cf. Plut. Them. 26;
Pind. P. iv. 115; Ovid. Met. xiii. 15.—πáуxv: emphatic separa-
tion from eîvaɩ.— eŭpɩoké with inf. is rare; cf. on 8. 31.
5. κατύπνωσε: on vi. 23. 8.
vi. 98. 5.
καὶ δή κου, “ and then mayhap ;”
6. Eépins: for this form of epanalepsis see on vi. 107. 4.
7. étiotávta: Hm. B 20, 21. Grote remarks upon the like-
ness of this passage to the opening of the Second Iliad. The
vase mentioned on 8. 3 exhibits a figure inscribed AПATH (cf.
Aesch. Pers. 93), the ovλos "Oveɩpos of B.— µéyav te kaì eveidéa :
see Phaeacians, 【 152, 161.— μetà, “with change of purpose;" in
this sense of change, otherwise only in composition, whence the
tmesis is all the more striking; cf. 10. 56.—dǹ: in indignant
question, as 17. 6.
10. 8 σvyyvwσóμevós, "who will consent." πάρα: usually
taken for πáρeσT, and this accords with the Master's fondness
for indirect allusion (cf. Hm. A 289, x 67). Stein follows Freund
=
in making itпáрeμ. For the entire expression compare Hm.
π 45 : πάρα δ᾽ ἀνήρ, ὃς καταθήσει: on vi. 123. 7.
11–12. тaúтην....ódŵv, “continue in that path;" cf. 104. 4,
ταύτην
129. 2, and on vi. 43. 13.
vi.
NOTES.-VII. 11-15.
289
2. ἀποπτάσθαι : Hm. B 71.
VII. 13.
ὀνείρου τούτου: on vi. 27. 10.
>>
3. λόγον . . . ἐποιέετο, “ took no account.' -8 Sè: cf. 6. 24.
4. ouvédeģe, ëλegé: for this peculiar form of epanastrophe (on
vi. 21.7), with compound and simple form, see 15. 7, 60. 12; cf.
210.7-8; here heightening the contrast of meaning.
5. συγγνώμην : cf. vi. 86. 55.— ἀγχίστροφα: cognate acc.
6. φρενῶν τὰ ἐμ. πρῶτα, “ the prime of my mental powers.” For
the position of èμewuтoû, see on vi. 85. 3, vii. 143. 2. There may
be something of exaggeration here for the purpose of the excuse,
since Xerxes at this time (484 B.C.) must have been about thirty-
five years of age, having been born soon after the accession of
Darius, and the Greeks thought that a man became opóviμos at
thirty (Xen. Mem. i. 2. 35). But see 18. 8, and the words of
Darius in Aesch. Pers. 782 : Ξέρξης ὢν νέος φρονεῖ νέα.
8-10. μévτol: as 8. 68.—èπéleσe: a Cinderella word; see 188.
9. ἀεικέστερα ἢ χρεόν: the separation is made more striking by
the interposition of πρεσβύτερον.
11-12. s: on vi. 4. 3.- μeradedoyμévov: acc. absolute; on vi.
72.4.
VII. 14.
1–6. πрoσεkúvεov: on 136. 4.-ŏveLpov: the neuter is the pre-
vailing form in Hdt.— kaì dǹ 4. άπεɩπ., “really then, hast thou
openly renounced ?” τε: on 10. 18.— ἐν οὐδενὶ λόγῳ : on vi. 52.
32. For the expression see 16. 35, 57. 2, 13. 3.— oùdevòs, “ a mere
nobody."
8. μέγας καὶ πολλός: Stein points out the seeming parody of
this phrase in Aristoph. Birds, 488 (produced 414 B.C.), as also
of i. 179. 5, 179. 12, ii. 127, 136, in the same play, lines 552, 1127,
1130, 1145 respectively; while i. 4, 133, and 192 are parodied in
the Acharnians (produced 425 B.C.).
VII. 15.
2–3. ává te espaµe: cf. 10. 56.-кaλéovтa: fut. of purpose.
45. τὰ παραυτίκα : cf. vi. 86. 48. εἴπας ἐς σὲ: on vi. 69. 3.
6. eĭveka: position like that of πéρt, vi. 130. 7; even between
article and noun, Hm. π 334 (rŷs avrîs évek³ åyyedíns) and later.
8-9. οὔκων: on vi. 52. 12.— εἰμὶ: on vi. 36. 11.— τετραμμένῳ: cf.
16. 16, 18. 16, 13. 5.
12. oi ¿v ýdový ẻσTɩ, “it lies in his pleasure;" cf. 160. 12, 101. 4.
13
290
HERODOTUS.
14-15. τοῦτο: on vi. 22. 10. — ὁμοίως καὶ: on vi. 21. 7. — ¿de
seems Janus-faced; compare outœ, 19. 11, vi. 111. 4; TOûTO, 137.
6, 153. 17, 159. 4; on vi. 10. 2.— yɩvóµeva — yívoro in direct dis-
course.
=
16–17. σkeuǹv: an elaborate state dress, consisting of a mantle,
tunic, and trousers of purple, saffron-colored shoes, the distinc-
tive upright tiara, with its fillet of blue spotted with white, gold
earrings, bracelets, collar, and girdle supporting a short sword
whose sheath was of a single precious stone. According to Plu-
tarch, the entire dress was worth 10,000 talents.— Note the rhe-
torical repetition of the possessive pronoun.
VII. 16.
2–3. ola: on vi. 5. 5.— oúk ážɩeúμevos: It was deemed an offence
punishable with death for any other than the king to sit on the
royal throne.- ús . . . keλevóµevov: cf. 17. 2.
4–5. ẻkeîvo: prospective, with infinitive clause as appositive;
cf. 237. 5.— πap' èµoì kéxpitaι, "is esteemed in my judgment ;” cf.
iv. 64, v. 6. The perf. as below, 16. 20. φρονέειν . . . πείθεσθαι :
a favorite maxim; cf. Hm. I 100; Hes. Op. 293; Soph. Antig.
720; Babr. i. 13; Cic. Pro Cluent. 31; Livy, xxii. 29.
((
6–7. rá, governed by πepińkovтa, which agrees with σe the ob-
ject of σφάλλουσι. καὶ ἀμφότερα: 1. 14. — περιήκοντα, “ having
compassed," "attained;" cf. vi. 86. 14. κακῶν ὁμιλίαι: Aesch.
Pers. 753; 1 Corinth. xv. 33.— Katά TEP, even as;" on vi. 54. 6.
8-9. πάντων . . . ἀνθρώποισι: compound attributive; cf. 26. 5,
169. 10, 219. 3, vi. 98. 6.—The thought appears in Solon, Fr. 12:
ἐξ ἀνέμων δὲ θάλασσα ταράσσεται ἢν δέ τις αὐτὴν μὴ κινῇ, πάντων
ἐστὶ δικαιοτάτη.
10. ἀκούσαντα : as vi. 86. 14.— προς: on vi. 26. 10.
12-13. Observe the homoeoteleuta (rhyming clauses) so much
run after by Gorgias and his followers, so rare in Hdt., and here
without the desired balance of clauses, as if unsought; cf. 10. 27,
50. 25, 158. 24, 162. 3, 236. 7, 46. 15.
13-16. Construe the infinitives after Sidáσke in the order of
the text. For the thought see Theognis, 605–6: Hoλλ@ ToL
πλέονας λιμοῦ κόρος ὤλεσεν ἤδη ἄνδρας, ὅσοι μοίρης πλεῖον ἔχειν
ëbeλov. — TOLOVтéшν π. уν.: eрanalepsis; on vi. 7. 8.-- Connect oσov
OTI, "as because."— ȧvaɩpéo: S. 71.
ἀναιρέο:
18-19. Eοû πоμл: Hm. Z 171, € 32.— ovdè qualifies beta: cf.
52. 11, vi. 33. 16.
NOTES.-VII. 15–17.
291
20–1. πeπλavnµéva: gnomic perf., emphasized below by the
addition of ἐώθασι.— σε ἐγὼ : common juxtaposition; 28. 11, 29.
èyà:
8.— ěteσɩ . . . éúv: like Nestor, A 259; cf. Odysseus to Achilles,
Τ 219: ἐπεὶ πρότερος γενόμην καὶ πλείονα οἶδα.
ἔτεσι
22-3. avtal: assimilated from Taûra, and antecedent to rá: on
vi. 36. 9.—τà ... opovτile: For the thought, cf.:
"Stol'n away
To dreamful wastes where footless fancies dwell
Among the fragments of the golden day."
Tennyson, Maud, 18.
- πρὸ τοῦ : for πρὸ τούτου: on vi. 139. 3.
25. μeтà xeîpas: rare for ev xepoí: 5. 10, 47.5; yet, so Thuc. i.
138; Xen. Ages. 2. 14. µeтà (like πapá often) in such cases com-
bines the ideas of rest and motion; cf. Hm. T 419, P 149, B 143,
A 463.
26. Siaipéw, "explain;" so the active, 103. 7; middle, 47. 3,
50. 2.
27. ovλλaßèv, "succinctly;" referring to 15. 12-14.-- yàp is ex-
planatory, "that is to say."
28-30. οὐδὲν μᾶλλον ἢ οὐ: the second negative seens due to
the predilection of the Greek for emphasizing by repetition of
the negative; on vi. 56. 5, vii. 11. 3, etc. The idiom in this
phrase is rare; iv. 118, v. 94, Thuc. ii. 62, iii. 36; Dem. Timoth.
1198, 1200, Polycl. 126.
31–3. ãλλws, “at all;" cf. 176. 8, viii. 30.— éléλel: 37. 11, ii. 13,
14. ἐς τοσοῦτό γε εὐηθείης : 9. 36.ὅ τι δή κοτέ : vi. 134. 13, 62. 9.
-BσTE: with ind.; vi. 27. 8.
34. ei, in the sense of "whether," may be followed by où or µý.
37-8. εἰ ἐπιφοιτήσει—φαίην ἂν: cf. 161. 17-18, 10. 48.
39–41. oùк: on vi. 9. 20.—pépe: like the Homeric aye, ïo.——
: vi. 26. 10.
VII. 17.
2. oùdév: cf. 14. 6.— keλevóµevov: imperf. partc. denoting repe-
tition; 16. 4, 18. 17, 30. 6, vi. 36. 1.
3–4. ilóμevos: cf. 18. 4, vi. 5. 14, 108. 20; Phaeacians, ● 250.—
κοῖτον ἐποιέετο: periphrasis for ἐκοιμᾶτο : cf. 105. 2, 193. 14.
5. VπeρOTàν: the regular Homeric expression; cf. 12. 7.
6–7. åpa: H. 1015; G. 282; C. 607.— keîvos ô ảπoσπeúdwv: cf.
vi. 65. 21.— s dn: on vi. 1. 6.
9-10. vûv: pleonastic after rò rарavтíka: cf. vi. 126. 1.— kata-
292
HERODOTUS.
Tρot eat, "shalt thou escape scathless."-άπотрáπшν: S. 13.—Tò:
ἀποτράπων: τὸ
relative; sc. éorí.- Eépsŋv: on 10. 36.
VII. 18.
23. ἐκκαίειν . . . ὀφθαλμούς: note the strong spondaic close.
kaì ôs: demonstrative (on vi. 2. 5), as occasionally in Attic.—
ἀμβώσας : S. 21.
5. Seúтepά, "then," like ereira, after the temporal clause; 53. 2.
6–7. oîa ǎv0. idòv: cf. 46. 12, 50. 11.—πeσóvтa: on vi. 129. 21;
cf. Aesch. Prom. 957.
· · · τὸν
9-11. μεμνημένος μὲν, μεμνημένος δὲ: anaphora; on vi. 43. 18.
στόλον: on vi. 41. 12.— ὡς ἔπρηξε: on vi. 45. 2.— τὸν ἐπ᾿
Kauß.: cf. vi. 28. 8, vii. 20. 5-12; on vi. 46. 10.— σvσтρатevóμevos:
impf. partc. depicting the length of the service; cf. 209. 22, 213.
8, 237. 6.
13. åтpeμíšovтá: cf. 8. 12. —πрòs: as 16. 10; Plat. Phaedr.
ἀτρεμίζοντά:
256 C.
15. Mark the "Sophoclean irony;" Aesch. Pers. 102.-Tis: on
vi. 73. 4.
· • •
19-20. παραδιδόντος : causal ; vi. 82. 8. — τῶν undév, "on thy
part nought shall be lacking.
""
21-2. ἐνθαῦτα: cf. δεύτερά : 18. 5. ὑπερετίθετο: 8. 39.
23-4. ἀποσπεύδων — ἐπισπεύδων : paronomasia. — ἐφαίνετο, φανε-
ρὸς ἦν: variety.
VII. 19.
1-3. Ορμημένῳ: 1. 14, 22. 17. — ἔκριναν, “interpreted.” The
dream - interpreters formed a special class among the priestly
Magi. To attend to dreams and require an interpretation from
their priests was a general practice among Oriental nations.-
þépew: cf. vi. 19. 3.
47. ἐστεφανώσθαι, κείμενον τὸν στέφανον: a quasi κύκλος: on vi.
61. 10; cf. vii. 235. 13, vi. 42. 1–-4; Hm. ▲ 402. To the Greek
the dream would proclaim the triumphal march of the king
to Athens and the destruction of the sacred olive on the
Acropolis (viii. 55); following which his fortunes were at once
reversed.
8. Iepσéwv te: effective change of construction from the geni-
tive absolute.
10-11. éπì, "for the attainment of;" 146. 11.- oйTw: on 15. 15.
NOTES.-VII. 17–22.
293
VII. 20.
1-3. τέσσερα: on 4. 3.— πέμπτῳ ἔτεϊ ἀνομένῳ, “in the course of
the fifth year." The march proper is regarded as beginning
from Sardis; cf. 147. 7.— xeɩpì µ. πλńleos, “with an enormous
body of forces." xeip is used like manus, as 157. 15.
4. tŵv nµeîs ïdµev: a favorite expression with our author; cf.
27. 11, vi. 21. 6.— πodλŵ dǹ péyiσTOS: cumulation of emphasis; on
vi. 21. 6.
6. Taρà, "in comparison with."— µndéva: cf. 14. 6, 17. 2.
7. The Cimmerians had been driven from their seats about
the northern shore of the Euxine and passed southeasterly into
Asia during the seventh century B.C.; cf. i. 103–6.
8. tà ...'Aoíns: Asia from Asia Minor (rà kάtw tŷs ’Aoiŋs) to
the Indus; cf. ává in åváßaois.
9-10. ἐνέμοντο : 10. 13.— ἐτιμωρέετο, " sought to take vengeance
upon them.'
¸”— KATà Tà λeyóμeva: in the "Catalogue of the Ships,"
Hm. B 494-760.
11. The fact that such tribal movements between Asia Minor
and Europe by the Bosporus and Hellespont took place in pre-
historic times is supported by strong evidence, in kinship of
language, names, and traditions. In Homer, Priam stands at the
head of a confederacy in which the tribes of Asia Minor are
leagued with dwellers on the Thracian coast as far as Macedonia,
if not to the Peneus.
12.
15. тò πρòs μeσaußpins, "towards the south;" on 113. 6, 176.
VII. 21.
2. οὐδ᾽ = kaì où: the negative through anticipation of the fol-
lowing oйk: cf. 101. 9-11.- yevóμeval: Sc. eloí: on 190. 10.
3-4. ǎğial, “comparable."-rí: on 9. 11.-épέŋs: on vi. 96.
4.— Tivóμevóv, "when drunk of.”
6-9. Note the ingenious variety of construction.— éTETáɣATO:
S. 66. The same phrase 81. 2, 86. 2, 96. 4, 119. 15, 203. 8.— ăµa
σтpatevoµévolσi, "while serving at the same time," furnishing
troops as well.—ès . . . πapéɣew: subject clause.
VII. 22.
1-3. тOÛTO μÉv: on 6.5. It has no proper correlative, but is
reiterated in Taûta µév, 25. 1.— is, “in consideration of the
fact that.”— Tŵν πрúтшν: naturally limited to the Persians (sec
294
HERODOTUS.
vi. 44), since s embodies the thoughts of Xerxes, the implied
subject of προετοιμάζετο following. περιπλεόντων περὶ: on vi. 16.
7. Such repetition with this preposition is rare.— èk: cf. vi. 109.
14, 84. 15.— ès, “against," the mountain being personified as an
enemy; cf. vi. 95. 14, and on vi. 96. 2.—”A0wv: S. 41; H. 159.—
Kov µádiota, “ very nearly," limiting a number; also, 223. 2; more
frequently μádioтá kŋ: 30. 6, 109. 12.- Elaeus was on the Helle-
spont near the western extremity; 33. 10.
4. Xepσovýσov: on vi. 29. 3.-öpμeov, "were stationed." The
form is not Ionicized from the stem ὁρμα-, as ὁρμεόμενοι is. For
similar contrast and juxtaposition see 23. 2-3, 13. 4, 235. 11–12.
5. vñò µaotíywv: cf. 56. 2, 103. 23, 223. 14; Xen. An. iii. 4. 25.
This custom had descended to the Persians from the Assyrians.
Rawl.
7–10. 'Apтaxaíns: see 117.— Athos rises more than 6400 feet
above the sea at the extremity of the peninsula, and casts its
shadow as far as the market-place of Lemnos, eighty-seven miles
distant. It has been noted in modern days for the numerous
monasteries on its summit, where many treasures of Greek litera-
ture were early preserved and have thence found their way into
print. Traces of the canal are still visible. οἰκημ. ὑπὸ ἀνθρώπων:
in contrast with lofty mountains in general; cf. iv. 182.
11. xepoovnσoeɩdés, “a peninsular district;" adj. as subst.; 23.
3, vi. 133. 14.
12-14. τοῦτο: assimilated to πεδίον: 16. 22. θαλάσσης τῆς
'Aк.: the Strymonicus Sinus, on the east side; Tv... Topáνns:
the Singiticus Sinus, to the west.
15-16. Σάνη: a colony from the island of Andros. οἴκηται,
"dwells;" personification of the town, as in Hm. with vaíw, etc. ;
on vi. 96. 2; cf. vii. 165. 1, 23. 1, 26. 10. The perf. marks the pres-
ent resulting condition of a remote action.-ai dè: sc. ciơí.— ÈKTÒS,
čow: i. e. between Sane and the mountain proper. The stand-
point is within Sane, looking southerly. See on vi. 44. 6.
18. Aîov... Kλewvaí: asyndeton, as 110. 4, 122. 9, 123. 12; cf.
122. 4, 123. 5.
VII. 23.
2–3. katà e¤vea, "nation by nation."— Karà Závny, "near Sane;"
on 22. 4.— σχοινοτενές ποιησάμενοι, “ having drawn a straight
line;" on 22. 11.- èyíveтo, "was becoming."
5. aleì, "for the moment;" so usually in this attributive posi
tion; cf. 50. 4, vi. 58. 18, 53. 11.
NOTES.-VII. 22–25.
295
6-7. Bá0pwv: ladders, or perhaps stages or scaffolds at con-
venient intervals; Freund thinks these were cut in the sides of
the canal. — ἀπίκοντο : sc. οἱ παραδιδόντες: properly this is said
only of the soil.
10–12. åre: on vi. 5. 5.— ěµeddé, "was likely;" Homeric usage.
14–15. aútoîơi èñéßadde, “was wont to fall to them," in such
αὐτοῖσι ἐπέβαλλε,
allotments.
16–18. Siπλýolov: on vi. 57. 4.—TE... Kai: on vi. 41. 5, vii. 12. 2.
20. ρηýριoν, "bazaar;" not occurring again till late (Plu-
tarch).
21. åλnλeoμévos: for this emphatic position of the partc, sec
15. 14, 15. 3, 16. 4, 16. 28, 16. 34, 24. 6, 25. 11, 35. 8.
VII. 24.
1–2. ús... evpíσke: absolute use of inf.; on vi. 30. 2; cf. vii.
173. 22, 184. 3.— μὲν: on vi. 95. 14. μεγαλοφροσύνης: on 4. 6, 10.
55.- AUTÒ: cf. 23. 10.
3–4. Tε: retracted from dúvaµiv: on vi. 105. 4. This is espe-
cially the case when the governing verb of two clauses is placed
before both, and it imparts a characteristic emphasis by exciting
the expectation of repetition or variety which remains unfulfilled;
cf. 197. 15; Thuc. iv. 10; Xen. Mem. i. 2. 14, iii. 5. 3.— µvnµóovva :
on vi. 19. 9, 109, 11.— πаρeòν: on vi. 72. 4.
5. Sieɩpúσai: as the Greeks habitually did at the Isthmus of
Corinth. διειρύσαι, ὀρύσσειν : strong chiasm.
6. εὖρος: as if οὕτω εὐρέαν.— ὡς: of result, with inf.; ii. 7, 135,
iii. 146, iv. 184.
7. τοῖσι δὲ αὐτοῖσι τούτοισι, τοῖσί: a rather pronounced in-
stance of consecutive rhymes; cf. 26. 14, 164. 10, 186. 4, vi. 69. 14.
8. The Strymon empties into the Strymonicus Sinus, north of
Athos.— Leúğavras, “by joining the opposite banks;" coincident
partc.; vi. 29. 11.
VII. 25.
2. Búßλivá: ropes of Egyptian papyrus were known to the
Greeks as early as Hm.; & 391.—deukoλívov: gen. of the noun
λευκολίνου:
co-ordinated with adj. The adj. λevkodivýs appears later.
4. karaßáλλeiv, "the storing;" rather loosely construed after
παρεσκευάζετο, as parallel with ὅπλα: cf. 21. 9.
6. iva, “wherever;" on vi. 12. 3. For the change in sense close
after iva (4), cf. 8. 25, 23. 3.— étitydeótatov: S. 51.
8-11. dè ov: on vi. 76. 7.-— σîTov, “corn," while aλλa refers to
296
HERODOTUS.
σɩría, “provisions" in general. This is Stein's conjecture for
the MSS. Tλeîorov.-Leuce Acte was on the Propontis near the
Chersonese, and Tyrodiza probably not far distant. Doriscus,
Eion, and Therma in Macedonia were the next halting-places of
the army to the west; so 113, 127.- SiαTETаyμévoι: on 23. 21.
VII. 26.
3. Critalla, on the royal road to Susa, somewhere east of the
Halys. Otherwise not known.-Tŵv év: for position, see 11. 2,
28.7.
5. κατ' . . . πορεύεσθαι: on 16. 8. παρὰ β. ἔλαβε : on vi. 41. 10.
10–13. wµíλnoav: on 22. 16.- Kaτaρρýкτηs: Xenophon's Mar-
syas; An. i. 2. 8. Here named from its falls.
15. Silenus, originally applied as a proper name to the oldest
of the Satyrs, was used afterwards as a common appellation for
these monsters generally.
16. τὸν λόγος ἔχει = ὃς λέγεται : hence ὑπὸ Φρυγῶν : cf. 3. 6.
VII. 27.
2. útokatýμevos, “establishing himself," to await the king. He
came apparently from some town of Lydia. It has been conjec-
tured that his father Atys was a son of Croesus, whose tragic
fate is so graphically told by Hdt., i. 34-45. This would account
for his colossal wealth, much of which would have descended to
him from the private possessions of Croesus, since it was not
then customary for conquerors to sequestrate these. But any
such connection with Croesus was certainly unknown to Hdt. or
he would have taken pains to mention it; and all antiquity ap-
pears to have been equally ignorant of it. Plutarch derives the
wealth of Pythius from gold mines.
47. ἐπαγγέλλετο βουλόμενος: cf. vi. 139. 8. — τίς
Hm. a 170.
ἀνδρῶν :
9. This gold plane-tree and vine with its grapes of smaragdus
became famous as marvels of art. The artist was Theodorus of
Samos, in the reign of Croesus. Antiochus, the spleenful Arca-
dian envoy to the court of Artaxerxes Mnemon, asserted on his
return that the tree was not large enough to offer shade for a
grasshopper. It was carried off and melted down by Antigonus.
VII. 28.
2. avròs, “with his own lips," without the intervention of his
NOTES.-VII. 25-31.
297
courtiers; cf. 203. 3, iv. 1, 134, viii. 67; Hm. 0 396. Schweig-
häuser would read αὐτὸν, Krüger, αὖθις.
4-6. Construe σε ἀποκρύψω οὐσίαν. ἀτρεκέως καταλέξω: Home-
ric.
10–13. The stater was the only gold coin known to the Greeks
generally, and had various names from place of coinage, as Attic,
Doric, etc. Its value is estimated at $5.33. Hence the gold and
silver of Pythius amounted to nearly $24,000,000.— åpкéwv: on
190. 10.
VII. 29.
2—4. ¿§îλ0ov tǹv: on vi. 134. 15; cf. vii. 58. 1; after the analogy
of ἐκλείπειν : on vi. 12. 20. ἐς τόδε : 11. 22, 38. 12. — ξείνια προθεῖ-
va: for the burden which this involved, see below 118-20.
6-11. σεῦ. σὺ: on vi. 21. 7; cf. vi. 86. 28.— παρ' ἐμεωυτοῦ, “ from
my own possessions."
13-16. ἀπαρτιλογίη, " exact sum.”
ἔκτησό—ἐκτήσαο: on 8. 25,
"be wise
19.5. The tenses are strikingly contrasted.— éríoraσó,
enough.”—ès... xpóvov: cf. 17. 8.
VII. 30.
1-2. ἐπιτελέα ποιήσας: cf. 11. 7. τὸ πρόσω: 223. 15.
3. Salt is still obtained from this lake.
5. ἐς χάσμα: cf. vi. 76. 4.
διὰ: on vi. 118. 13.
μάλιστά κη:
on 22. 3. —åvaþaɩvóµevos: on 17. 3. -κal oûтos: as well as the
Marsyas; on vi. 51. 3. Such minute description of places is
specified by Aristides (440) as lending beauty to the plain style
(ὁ λόγος ὁ ἀφελής).
9-10. καταπεπηγυία, σταθεῖσα: note the difference of tenses ;
"long fixed, originally set."
VII. 31.
3–5. ènì, “towards;" vi. 34. 13.— πopevoµévų: on vi. 33. 2.-
πâσa áváyêŋ: as i. 137, ii. 35, iv. 179, v. 52; cf. vii. 10. 73.
6. Snμloepyoì, "handicraftsmen," "confectioners."
δημιουργοί,
µédɩ: ap-
parently a syrup or candy, as from the palm-tree, i. 193; “but
how this could be made from the 'tamarisk' is hard to say”
(Baehr).
8–9. πλatávioтOV: The planes of this region are still noted for
their size and beauty. κάλλεος εἵνεκα : on 5. 16. μελεδωνῷ ἀθα
vátų ȧvdpi, “to a man (to be) perpetual curator;" the office to
be continuous, and successor appointed regularly at death of
13**
298
HERODOTUS.
incumbent; cf. 83. 5. For the position of åv§pì, see Hm. ▲ 187,
§ 102, ₫ 199, w 253; but the manifest desire for chiasm is to be
considered; cf. Πέρσῃ ἀνδρὶ ἄνδρα Μακεδόνα, ν. 20.
VII. 32.
37. αιτήσοντας γῆν: on vi. 48. 4. οὔτε ἐς Αθήνας: for the rea-
son, see vii. 133. — ἐπὶ γῆς αἴτησιν: variety for αἰτήσοντας γῆν:
yês yŵv:
133. 2.— τῇ ἄλλῃ: on vi. 21. 9. — πρότερον : vi. 48.
VII. 33.
1–4. ús ¿λŵv, “with the intention of soon marching.”— oi dè:
25. 3, 34. 2.— πódios petagù: for position of μerağù, see on vi. 77.
2, 47. 5, vii. 124. 2, 183. 7, 85. 3, and Pope's, “The headlong lion-
ess between and hound sagacious on the tainted green" (Essay
on Man, 1. 7).
5. άктη Taɣéа: a hilly projection of the coast covered with
wood, the bays of Sestus and Coela on either flank.-'Aẞúdo̟ ka-
TaνTíov: the gen. is used, vi. 103. 17, 118. 11.
6-7. Xpóvo: 478 B.C., when the Athenian fleet, after the victory
at Mycale, had proceeded thither under Xanthippus.—¿πì: on
vi. 98. 6.— Eavēíππου: cf. vi. 131. 9, 136. 4.
διεπασσάλευσαν:
9-10. Sierraoσádevorav: the preposition implies, "with out-
spread hands and feet."— Protesilaus was a Thessalian chief, the
first to leap from the Achaean ships upon the shores of Troy,
thus meeting his death at the hands of a Dardanian (Hm. B 698–
702). He was afterwards worshipped as a hero on the opposite
coast, and a tumulus there still bears his name. It was opened
by Dr. Schliemann in 1882, and found to contain prehistoric re-
mains of the same age as the lower strata at Troy.
VII. 34.
24. τὴν μὲν: supply γέφυραν, from ἐγεφύρουν. — Αἰγύπτιοι :
papyrus was mostly obtained from Egypt.— čσti σtádioi: the so-
called σχῆμα Πινδαρικόν : Η. 605 ; G. 135 n. 5.
VII. 35.
1-2. δεινὰ ποιεύμενος : on 1. 5. ἐπικέσθαι, “ to visit;” construed
with double acc. after the analogy of μaστiyoûv: on vi. 12. 20.
3. réλayos: of the Hellespont at the bridges, as 54. 12; also
called θάλασσαν and ποταμῷ: 35. 11 (54. 14).— ζεῦγος, “ a pair;"
iii. 130. Aesch. Pers. 747 regards the bridges as the fetters: wé-
NOTES.-VII. 31–36.
299
δαις σφυρηλάτοις περιβαλὼν πολλὴν κέλευθον ἤνυσεν πολλῷ στρατῷ.
-non, "also;" so 55. 13, iv. 77, ix. 84.
4. The stream was to be punished as a rebellious, runaway
slave; cf. 233. 16.
5. 8è av: on vi. 76. 7. Hdt. has his doubts about the brand-
ing, although he makes Themistocles speak of it (viii. 109) as if
an assured fact. With the punishment inflicted we may com-
pare that visited upon the river Gyndes by Cyrus for drowning
one of his horses (i. 189; cf. ii. 111); while Cambyses orders the
mummy of the dead Amasis to be flogged and otherwise insulted
(iii. 16); cf. vii. 88. 11. Hermogenes (317) cites this passage as
an example of that personification of inanimate objects which
imparts a surpassing pleasure and charm to narrative.
6. åráolada: The conduct of Xerxes appears to Hdt. not child-
ishness, but presumptuous impiety against the "sacred Helles-
pont" (Aesch. Pers. 745), certain to draw down its own punish-
ment; see Phaeacians, n 58. — TIкρòν dwp: The Iranians de-
πικρὸν
spised the bitter water of the sea in comparison with the sweet
and fruitful water of springs and streams.
7–10. tývde: cf. 8. 28.—π pòs: on vi. 26.10; cf. vi. 9. 8, 45, 6, 88.
1,106. 7.— ǎpa, “after all;" correcting some erroneous impres-
sion; vi. 100. 6, vii. 130. 8.-0úel: on vi. 76. 8.
11. Tотаµ: The swiftness of the current (three knots an hour)
and its land-locked appearance make this appellation an apt
one in one point of view, and it was observed by Hm. B 845, H
86, № 545.— te dǹ, "not only then."
VII. 36.
3. τὰς δὲ : i. e. γεφύρας. — ἐζεύγνυσαν· ἐζεύγνυσαν: on vi. 21.7.
5. Tηv: yépupav. "I agree with Mr. Grote as to the construc-
tion and meaning of this difficult passage. Herodotus considers
the shore-cables to be the real bridge (34. 2–3), and the ships to
be only a support rendered necessary by the unusual width of
the channel. He has in his mind the bridges over rivers, com-
mon in Persia (Xen. An. ii. 4), which gave the idea of this grand
work, where, if the stream was narrow, the ropes passed from
shore to shore required no support at all; if it was wider, they
had to be sustained by boats, or some other contrivance. The
ships sustaining the ropes were moored (he says) parallel to the
stream of the Hellespont, and so at right angles with the Euxine,
the longest direction of which he knew to be from east to west.
300
HERODOTUS.
Triremes and penteconters were used indifferently in the work,
the greatest number in the upper bridge, either because the
channel was wider at that part, or because, to meet the full force
of the current, greater strength was required." Rawl. Many
points of this chapter are debatable, and editors are widely at
variance in their explanations.
7. Πόντου: governed by ἐπικαρσίας as Ελλησπόντου by ῥόον.—
Kaтà póον, “along the stream," whether with head down or up.
8. Iva.. ŏπλwν, "that it might relieve the tension of the
cables." The subject of the verb is ʼn oxedín (line 22), or the
structure formed by the ships placed side by side; and Tòv ...
ŏπλwv, as line 23,= Tà TeTaµéva onλa, the shore - cables when
stretched. — ovvdévres resumes from line 4, but of course each
vessel is brought into line and the anchors dropped separately.
10. τῆς ἑτέρης: sc. γεφύρης, limiting τὰς μὲν. Every ship
would be anchored both stem and stern, but as the winds had
destroyed the bridges before, the historian mentions those points
specifically from which danger was to be apprehended.
11. τῆς δὲ ἑτέρης: brachylogy for τὰς δὲ τῆς ἑτέρης.
A p
12–13. vótou: The direction of the Hellespont here is northeast
and southwest. -- διέκπλοον ὑπόφανσιν κατέλιπον, " and for a pas-
sage through they left an opening of."
16-17. ŏvoioi, “capstans." · οὐκέτι χωρὶς : as they did before.
18-20. παχύτης: sc. ἦν.— κατὰ λόγον, "in proportion.”— τάλαν-
TOV: on vi. 97. 14.
22-4. κόσμῳ: Hm. v 77. — ὅπλων: on vi. 68. 9. ἐνθαῦτα αὖτις :
on vi. 39. 12.— éπeļeúyvvov, “fastened them on" to the cables in
some way so that they should not slip from their support.-
ὕλην,
Aŋy, "brushwood," or, as some explain, "boards;" at all events,
something to cover all cracks between the planks, and prevent
the earth from escaping.
26-8. payµòv, "bulwark."— veρоρéοντα, "looking down from
above upon."
VII. 37.
2-3. XUTOì, "breakwaters;" loosely explanatory of rà πeρì.
Tepì tà, as attributive of xuroì, should have the article properly;
its omission occurs mainly with prepositional phrases after ver-
bal nouns; cf. 1. 1, 119. 14, 183. 12, 205. 3.— énxíns, “surf.”
5. πεποιημένη: on vi. 69. 22. ἔαρι: on 4. 3.
9-10. αἰθρίης: temporal gen. -- ἰδόντι, μαθόντι, synonyms; cf
46. 3, 188. 12, 208. 10, vi. 13. 1; on vi. 61. 4.
NOTES.-VII. 36–39.
301
11-14. τὸ θέλει : on vi. 37. 10.— ἥλιον . . . σφέων : note the allit-
eration. For the thought compare Quint. Curtius, iv. 10. 1, where
an eclipse of the moon alarms the soldiers of Alexander, who are
reassured by the soothsayers' declaration, Solem Graecorum, lu-
nam esse Persarum; quoties illa deficiat, ruinam stragemque illis
gentibus portendi. Among the Chaldaeans the moon took prec-
edence of the sun, though the sun was an especial object of wor-
ship to the Persians.
VII. 38.
2-5. èk, as 37. 8; on vi. 22. 7.—Tɩ σeû, with tuxeîv: acc.cognate
and gen. of source; cf. Eur. Med. 259, 338.- Tò, "in which :" acc.
cognate after ὑπουργῆσαι.
6. yevóμevov, "if obtained.".
Tâν: on 10. 57.
7-10. тò: as тɩ, line 4, but usually gen. as below. — lapońoas :
like Calchas, Hm. A 92.— катaλaµßável: on vi. 38. 7.
ἡλικίης:
12. tóde Hλlkins: on 11. 22. If the son of Atys, he must have
been about eighty years of age.
13. μo: on vi. 103. 21. For this Ionic position of the enclitic
dative between article and noun without attributive, see i. 31,
ii. 108, iii. 3, 14, 63, 129, iv. 8, v. 95, vi. 41. 7; except here, after a
conjunction; on vi. 34. 12, 41. 10.
16. Compare the prayer of Chryses for his daughter, Hm. A
18-20.
VII. 39.
1. Tε: în vi. 41. 5.— élvµółŋ: like Agamemnon, Hm. A 24–5.
5-6. σéo: the personal pronouns in the gen. regularly follow
their regimen; if emphatic they may precede (49. 7, 51. 2, 30.
10), and are usually placed before the preposition; as here, Eur.
Med. 144, Hippol. 1352.- Tavoɩkíŋ: adverbial; "with household
entire.". avtŷ: on vi. 32. 8.
—
7-8. Candaules, for a different purpose, tells Gyges (i. 8) that
the eyes are more convincing than the ears.—èµmindeî: S. 76.
10-12. ἕτερα τοιαῦτα: cf. 10. 52. ἐς . . . ἐτράπευ: cf. 16. 16.
15. πepɩéxeaɩ, “you cling to."- Inµɩwσeat: on vi. 9. 22. When
Darius was setting out upon the Scythian expedition Oeobazus
begged that one of his three sons might be left behind. Darius
tells him that all shall be left with him, and accordingly has them
all put to death (iv. 84).
18. διαταμεῖν, διαταμόντας: on vi. 7. 8; cf. vii. 43. 7, 56. 2, 60. 12.
302
HERODOTUS.
VII. 40.
1. τούτων τοῦτο, ταῦτα: strong parechesis; on vi. 12. 15.
3-4. σúµµiктos, "continuous.” — ȧvaµí§, “combined."
σύμμικτος,
ἀναμίξ, οὐ δια
kekpɩµévoɩ: on vi. 96. 5.—The contingents of the several nations
formed distinct and separate corps, but were not separated by
intervals, marching without any regular order in a single body.
Rawl.—™ŷ, “ (at a point of the line) where.”
5. Siedédelπto, “a space was left;" impersonal; cf. 41. 14, vi.
112. 1.
5-7. προηγεῦντο : before the king. ἐκ . . . ἀπολελεγμένοι: on vi.
25.5.
8. Kaì OÛTOL: on vi. 51. 3.-— káтw: in token of reverential obe-
dience to the king, as the soldiers acknowledged the authority of
Darius in the person of Bagaeus, iii. 128.
9. ipoì: sacred to the sun, Mithra; cf. Xen. Anab. iv. 5. 35.
This breed of horses was as famous in antiquity as the Arabian
in more recent times.
14. Aɩòs: Auramazda, the creator and supreme god of light.
16-17. οὐδεὶς — ἀνθρώπων: impressive separation. — θρόνον
δίφρον: cf. Ἠὼς ἐνθρονος, Hm. ζ 48, χρυσόθρονος, κ 541.
19. πаρeßeẞńkεe, "stood beside;" Homeric; A 104, 522, N 708.
"In battle and in hunting, the king and his charioteer were the
only occupants of the chariot, and stood side by side; on occa-
sions of state there was a third, an attendant who bore the royal
parasol." Rawl.
VII. 41.
2-5. μετεκβαίνεσκε : S. 58. — ὅκως : on vi. 13. 3. — ἁρμάμαξαν: Xen.
An. i. 2. 18. — αὐτοῦ ὄπισθε: on vi. 77. 2.- κατὰ νόμον : i. e. ἄνω.
7-9. púpio: the "immortals;" 83. 4. — σavpwrńpwv: spikes at
σαυρωτήρων
the butt-end.
11–12. eîxov • eîxov: on vi. 21. 7.— oi . . . tpáπovtes: 40. 8-9.
The tense changes, to introduce the notion that it was their
custom.
VII. 42.
2. Tотаμòν: on vi. 76. 3.- Kálkov: cf. vi. 28. 9.
3. Kávns ŏpos: this gen. is rare; usually the words are in ap-
position.
4–5. Ońßŋs: near the head of the Adramyttian Gulf; the na-
tive place of Andromache; Hm. Z 397. —”Avтavdpov: cf. Verg.
Aen. iii. 6.
NOTES.-VII. 40–46.
303
7. This refers to some of its spurs; the true Ida is commonly
thought to have been left considerably to the right, though Vir-
chow maintains that the words of our author may be taken
strictly.
8-10. Врovτaí: cf. 10. 55, and Iliad ℗ 75-7: avròs d' ¿§ "Idns
μεγάλ᾽ ἔκτυπε, δαιόμενον δὲ ἧκε σέλας μετὰ λαὸν Ἀχαιῶν· οἱ δὲ
ἰδόντες θάμβησαν, καὶ πάντας ὑπὸ χλωρὸν δέος εἷλεν. Horace
calls Ida, aquosa, C. iii. 20. 15.—Tiva σuxvòv, “very considerable;"
on vi. 73. 4.
VII. 43.
34. ἐπέλιπε: cf. 21. 4-5.— ῥέεθρον : acc. of specification.
5. ἐπὶ . . . Ξέρξης: the beginning of the sentence is resumed
chiastically and with changed subject and construction.
6. тò IIpiáμov téрyaμov: the acropolis of Ilium, which the ex-
cavations of Schliemann have fixed beyond cavil upon the height
of Hissarlik, about three miles from the Hellespont; see Phaea-
cians, pp. 265–6.
7-8. ékeivwv: the Trojan myths of the Iliad.-'Alŋvain: Homer
(Z 297) places her temple on the acropolis near the palace of
Priam, and in the historic period she also had a famous temple
there, in which Alexander the Great, like Xerxes, offered sacri-
fice upon landing in Asia.-xoàs: libations to the dead of the
Troic period. In such sacrifices the Persians followed the cus-
toms of the district; cf. 113. 9, 191. 7, vi. 97. 14.
11. åπépywv, "keeping;" so, 110. 2, 112. 5; usually of rivers, etc.
12. These places lay along the Hellespont.
VII. 44.
2–3. kai yàp: on vi. 5. 6.—λítov devkov: marble, as often.
5-7. So Darius sat viewing the passage of the Bosporus (iv.
88), and Xerxes, again, witnessing the battle of Salamis (viii. 90);
cf. vii. 212. 2.—aµiλλav: see 196.5.
VII. 45.
2–4, åπokekpuµµévov: on vi. 129. 21; cf. vii. 44. 7, 46. 4. ἐπί-
πλεα : sc. ἐόντα. The supplementary participle is rather rarely
omitted; on vi. 112. 7.—– édákρvore: inceptive aorist.
VII. 46.
2-3. οὐ συμβουλεύων: 16. 18, 17. 7. φρασθεὶς: on 37. 10.
4-5. In the following conversation Herodotus is regarded by
304
HERODOTUS.
Hermogenes (396) as reaching the height of sublimity in the
expression of moral sentiment and portraiture of character.— ůs
... vûv, “how much at variance with one another were your acts
just now."
((
7. yάp, "why," "yes, for."
γάρ,
· με: cf. vi. 125. 22. — κατοικτείραι,
a feeling of pity;" subject of ẻσîλ0€: cf. Eur. Med. 931: eloĥλlé
μ' οἶκτος εἰ γενήσεται τάδε.— ὡς: after λογισάμενον.
9. οὐδεὶς: When the phrase εἰ γε approaches the meaning of
"since," it has a tendency towards construction with où instead
of μή, as εἰ καὶ ν. 178, εἰ ν. 97; on 9. 10.
10. Tapà: temporal; on 1. 10.-πeтóνlaμev: gnomic perfect.
11-12. οὕτω - εὐδαίμων: for the separation see on 40. 17. τῷ:
A negative antecedent is usually followed by ooris instead of ős,
as 29. 3, 49. 2, 49. 6; but as here, 54. 7, 145. 19, 203. 11.
13. où is the regular negative in rel. clauses of result with the
indicative, especially if the antecedent is negative.— ovkì ăπağ:
on vi. 96. 5.
14-15. προσπίπτουσαι, συνταράσσουσαι: on 16. 12.- καὶ, “ even
though."
17. This melancholy view of life frequently appears through-
out Greek poetry; cf. Hm. N 525-33, Theogn. 425, Bacchil. 3,
Soph. O. T. 1186, O. C. 1225, Aj. 125, etc. The opposite view is
maintained Eur. Suppl. 195–200. The tone of Hdt. is commonly
one of cheerfulness, but at times his narrative is overcast by
gloomy shades, which imply that he was no stranger to the evils
of life and the prevailing sentiments of the age. See i. 32.—
Kaтapuуn: So the gods showed to Cleobis and Biton that it was
better to die than to live (i. 31), and the Thracian Trausae la-
mented at a birth but rejoiced at a death (v. 4).
18-19. γλυκὺν . . . αἰῶνα, “ though giving a taste of life in its
sweetness.”— yλUKÙv: observe the predicate position.— þ¤ovepòs :
10. 55. — év avt�: on 8.71. The momentary glimpse of happi-
ness vouchsafed is granted that the quick following misfortune
may be felt the more keenly: ὑποδέξας ὄλβον ὁ θεὸς προρρίζους
ἀνέτρεψε, i. 32.
VII. 47.
2-3. λέγων: on vi. 67. 9. — διαιρέαι: on 16. 26. For the form
see H. 409 D. b., and cf. 50. 2-3, 52. 3, 52. 11.— πavσúμela, “let us
have done;" cf. ii. 136. Artabanus's tone is too melancholy by
far to suit the pleasure-loving Xerxes.
4-5. peµvúpela: H. 465 a; G. 118. Note the dactylic rhythm.
NOTES.-VII, 46–50.
305
—χρηστὰ . . . χερσί: when in prosperity; cf. τὰ χρηστὰ μή σοι
λυπρὰ φαινέσθω ποτέ, μηδ᾽ εὐτυχοῦσα δυστυχής εἶναι δόκει, Eur.
Med. 601.
8. μετέστης: cf. 15. 7, 18. 16. - φέρε
φέρε . . . εἰπέ: compare the Ho-
meric, ἀλλ᾽ ἄγε μοι τόδε εἰπε, καὶ ἀτρεκέως κατάλεξον.
11-12. ἐντὸς ἐμεωυτοῦ: on vi. 12. 12.— ἐπιλεγόμενος : on vi. 9. 8.
VII. 48.
27. δαιμόνιε ἀνδρῶν: Hm. ξ 443.— κοῖα ταῦτα : Η. 1012 a. κό-
Tepá,,: disjunctive particles in direct question; H. 1017; G.
282. 5.- πολλαπλήσιον: on vi. 57. 4.— ἔσεσθαι: Η. 986.
9. τὴν ταχίστην: adverbial; not with ἄγερσιν.
VII. 49.
1. σтρаTÒV TOÛTOV: When the demonstrative is deictic, with
gesture to something close at hand, Hdt. is prone to omit the ar-
ticle with the noun; cf. 130. 3, 8. 28. See especially v. 49, where
Aristagoras is pointing out objects on a map.
5. oйre has its correlative in changed form, line 13.
7. σev: on 39.5.— pepéyyvos, “securely competent." The anx-
iety was vindicated twice, off Pelion (vii. 188), and southern
Euboea (viii. 13).
8. ěva autòv, “one only;" cf. vi. 134. 2.
ע
11. So i. 32: „âν éσтɩ åvėρwñоs σvμpopη. Contrast Tennyson,
Enid: "Man is man and master of his fate."
13. čρxoμaι épéwv: an easy, conversational development of a
common idiom, and mainly Herodotean; 102. 9, vi. 109. 20.
14-16. εἰ θέλει: 10. 45. — κλεπτόμενος, “beguiled,” by lack of
opposition.
χώρην
17-19, πληθώρη, " surfeit.” Aesch. Αg. 1331 : τὸ μὲν εὖ πράσ
σειν ἀκόρεστον ἔφυ πᾶσι βρότοισιν. καὶ δή, “ well, then.” ὡς,
"supposing that." - xúpηv... xpóvo: chiastic for closer juxta-
position of the adjectives.-xúpny, "distance," from their base
of supplies. — λɩµòv: The argument is from Aesch. Pers. 792,
where Darius says, αὐτὴ γὰρ ἡ γῆ ξύμμαχος κείνοις πέλει . . . κτεί-
νουσα λιμῷ τοὺς ὑπερπολλους ἄγαν.
20-2. OUTW: since the dangers are so great; with reference to
47.4. He closes with an aphorism; on 9. 40. — év. . . ein: cf.
Hm.
η
51.
VII. 50.
37. πάντα, πᾶν, τὸ πᾶν, πάντα, πᾶν χρῆμα: variety; on 2. 10.
306
HERODOTUS.
ἐπὶ . . . πρήγματι, " upon every successive event that occurs."
èπì, in this temporal sense, mostly poetic, Herodotean, and late
prose: 187.12.— Tolýσelas ovdév: cf. Chaucer's "Unhardy is
unseely," and "Naught assayeth, naught achieveth.”— кpéσσov —
µâdλov : on vi. 12. 19. For the thought compare Eur. Herc. F.
105: οὗτος δ᾽ ἀνὴρ ἄριστος ὅστις ἐλπίσι πέποιθεν ἀεί· τὸ δ᾽ ἀπορεῖν
ȧvôpòs kaкoû: and, "It's best to hope the best, though of the
worst affrayed" (Spens. F. Q. 4. 6).
8. Note Tabeîv after máσxav: the negative prefers the aorist.—
εἰ: ἐρίζων πρός,
ei: on vi. 11. 10.- ¿ρílwv πрòs, "objecting to."
A A
9-10. ἐν αὐτοῖσι refers to ἐρίζων: on 8. 71. ὁμοίως καὶ : on vi.
21.7.-TOUTO: the singular, as èkeîvo, 16. 4, though referring to
the two.- ions: on vi. 21. 2.
11. εἰδέναι . Béẞalov: observe the emphatic arrangement, and
see on vi. 11. 7.-xpǹ, "is it possible;" cf. 11. 13; Theoc. 15. 45.
12–13. pèv, solitarium: on vi. 95. 14.—ús Tò ÉTíπav: on vi. 46.
13.
ἐθέλει: for variety after φιλέει, as
14-15. οὐ μάλα : on vi. 3. 4.
σφεα after αὐτὰ, 19-20.— ἐς δ : cf. 9. 36.
19. προελθόντα: on vi. 129. 21. vŵv: introducing an estab-
lished fact in opposition to a mere assumption; 139. 21; on vi.
30. 3.— kɩvdúvovs åvappiπtéovtes, “by running risks," as in dicing,
"taking the dicer's risks." The simple expression κúßov ȧvap-
ριπτειν intensifies to κίνδυνον ἀναρριπτεῖν, in order to include the
hazard attending the game; then especially of the risks of war-
fare.
21-22. καταιρέεσθαι, “ to be gained.”
ὁμοιεύμενοι: S. 74.
25-27. τοῦτο τοῦτο: on vi. 27. 3. ἐπιβέωμεν : S. 7, 81.
28. où voµádas: like the Scythians; 10. 13.
VII. 51.
2. où dé: on vi. 3. 5, and vi. 16. 3; Hm. I 301.-μev: on 39. 5.
4. πλεῦνα . . . ἐκτεῖναι, “ to prolong argument to a very great
length."
5–7. 7.—
5-7. είναι: on vi. 20. 7. μηχανῇ, “ means.” πατέρας : cf. 150.
10.
10-13. μητρόπολιν : on vi. 21. 12. δηλήσασθαι: as at Mycale
(ix. 103).
14. ἐς . . . βαλεῦ: cf. ἐνὶ φρεσὶ βάλλεο σῇσιν, Hm. A 297.
15. Tò: the article to substantivize the whole following clause;
143. 8. For the thought, see Solon, 13. 65-6.
NOTES.-VII. 50–54.
307
VII. 52.
2-3. γνωμέων-ταύτην: cf. 12. 11.— ὃς : on vi. 2. 5. φοβέαι: on
47. 3.
6-7. ἐπὶ . . .
4. γνώμα, “ proof.”— τῶν, i. e. πρηγμάτων implied in γνώμα.
éyéveTo: on 10. 39. For the fact see 10. 32-35.
10. émiλéyeodai: sc. quâs. With the infinitive as 49. 21.
11. οὕτω: vi. 86. 63. μηδὲ: on 16. 19.
12-13. Note ἐμὸν, ἐμήν, ἐμὰ ἐκ πάντων : on vi. 27. 9. — σκῆπτρα:
the plural, as often in tragedy.
VII. 53.
24. δεύτερα: as 18. 5. — χρηίζων: with double genitive; cf.
38. 4.
6-8. εἰς . . . ἔχωμεν: construction altered from infinitive, for
more direct appeal. προθυμίην ἔχωμεν: periphrasis for προθυμώ
μεθα: cf. 6. 7. — ξυνὸν: S. 1. — ξυνὸν . . . σπεύδεται, “ for that is
eagerly desired as a good common to all.”—ToûTo: i. e. to acquit
themselves bravely and worthily; cf. Tyrtacus, 12. 15.
πυνθάνομαι:
10–12. πuvēávoμaι: 10. 16-25.—Tŵν: on vi. 2. 5; vii. 10. 5.—
οὐ μή: Η. 1032; G. 257. — ἀνθρώπων : cf. 8. 87.
13. deλóyxaσı, “are allotted to preside over." The allotment
of special districts to different deities is a common idea among
the Greeks from Hm. down (Hm. O 190; Aesch. Pers. 197, etc.);
its existence among the Persians is doubtful. Cf. St. George in
England, St. Denis in France, etc.
VII. 54.
μυρσί-
4. καταγίζοντες, “burning as sacrifice;” cf. vi. 97. 14.
vnoɩ... ¿dóv: When the news reached Susa that Xerxes had ar-
νησι
rived at Athens, incense was burned and the roads strewed with
myrtles (viii. 99). The myrtle was used in sacrifice also by the
Greeks; Aristoph. Wasps, 861; Eur. Alc. 172.
5. The Persians were sun-worshippers.—σπévdшv: according
to i. 132 no libations were in use among the Persians; hence
Xerxes would be following a custom of the region (on 43. 8),
and кpîtîpα (below, 10) is accounted for.
:
7–8. ň: on 46. 12.— πaúσeɩ, with inf. is rare, and marks the
hinderance as more complete than with the partс.—πρóτεрov ň:
without av, as πрìν 1, 8. 54. The preceding negative is con-
tained in undeµíav, which influences the whole sentence.
308
HERODOTUS.
11. Tòv: attracted in gender to the predicate noun.
VII. 55.
3-4. πρÒS TOÙ-Tρòs Tò: mere variety; see 36. 9-11. The gen.
is less common.
8. ταύτην .
οὗτοι : cf. 188. 7.
13. ἀνήγοντο . . . ἀπεναντίον, “ set sail for the opposite shore.”.
йon: on 35. 3.
VII, 56.
6. Zeû: Longinus (De Subl. 3. 2) censures Gorgias as unpardon-
ably turgid in using the expression Ξέρξης ὁ τῶν Περσῶν Ζεύς:
see below 220. 21, and contrast 203. 9.- eidóμevos: see vi. 69. 5.
8. Távтas: 9. 35, 157. 8; Aesch. Pers. 718.- kaì with ǎveu, as
51.7.
VII. 57.
23. ἐν . . . ἐποιήσατο : 14. 5, 57. 10. — λαγόν : S. 41.
5-6. ἀγαυρότατά : especially used of horses. — ὀπίσω with ἥξειν.
περὶ ἑωυτοῦ, “ for his life.” λαγὼς τὸν περὶ τῶν κρεῶν (δρόμον)
τρέχει was a Greek proverb.
8-10. He goes forth like a man, but flies back like a woman.
VII. 58.
...
14. τὸν Ἑλλήσποντον: on 29. 2. — τὰ . . . πεζον, " pursuing a
course counter to the land force." тà eµπadıv is regularly adver-
bial in Hdt.; hence supply Kéλevlov with πрńσσwv, as found in
Hm.-ěπλee: westward through the Hellespont, and then north-
ward.— ἐπὶ . . . ποιεύμενος ἄπιξιν, " making its destination at.”
Sarpedon was the promontory at the northwest extremity of
the gulf Melas.
5-6. πρὸς . . . ἀνατολὰς: after the Homeric πρὸς ἠῶ τὸ ἠέλιόν τε.
7. τάφον : near Pactye. — τῆς ᾿Αθάμαντος: for position, see on
vi. 85. 3, and for the story, vii. 197. 4.
8-9. Sià... πόλιος : on vi. 52. 32. τῇ · ... éòv: 26. 13.—'Ayopń:
so-called, probably, as Freund suggests, because it lay on the
boundary between the Chersonese and the Thracians, and be-
came a neutral market-ground; see vi. 36.
11-13. οὐκ . . . ἐπιλιπόντα: see 43. 3, vi. 96. 5.- ποταμὸν : epana-
lepsis of Méλava πотaµóv above.-π', "from;" often in Hdt. for
àπó in this phrase; 40. 11, 74. 2, 83. 4, 178. 12.
15. Στεντορίδα λίμνην : near the mouth of the Hebrus. ἐς 5:
S. 56.
NOTES.-VII. 54–61.
309
VII. 59.
3. τείχός τοῦτο τὸ : cf. 9. 14.
8. ἐποίεε, “ he proceeded to do;” 100. 3, 128. 9. τὰς πάσας :
on vi. 47. 10.
11–13. teλeutâ dè aửtoû, “and its extremity is.”—aúтoû is
- auroû is gov-
erned by the noun implied in the verb (τελευτή ἐστι).— ὀνομαστή:
in the story of Orpheus, who was here torn to pieces by Thracian
women.- τὸ παλαιὸν: Here Odysseus lands first after leaving
Ilium, Hm. 39.
L
14. ávéýuxov, “refreshed;" as if wearied and heated by the
run; a personification of the ships; cf. on vi. 16. 4.
VII. 60.
1–3. és åpilµóv, "for muster."— πρòṣ: on vi. 26. 10; cf. vii. 61.
11, 63. 7.
5–7. τрóπoν: cf. below, line 12.- ús µáλiota eixov: on vi. 139,
10.
VII. 61.
The following enumeration includes 61 tribes, and comprises
4 groups of infantry: 1, from the Tigris to the Indus (61–68);
2, those of the South (69-71); 3, those of Asia Minor and Ar-
menia (72–80); 4, those of the coast and islands of the eastern
Mediterranean (in the fleet; 89-95).
2–3. Tápas: predicate after kaλeoµévous. The tiara was a
round cap, projecting at the top a little over the brow, and
called ảπayéas, “soft," in contradistinction from the stiff up-
right tiara worn only by the king; Xen. Anab. ii. 5. 23.— kɩ0ŵvas :
S. 2.
45. λεπίδος . . . ἰχθυοειδέος, “ with the appearance of iron scales
like those of a fish." Since the kiάv is distinguished from the
Owpnέ by Hdt. (ix. 22), it is supposed that some words have
dropped out of the text before λεπίδος, perhaps ὑπὸ δὲ θώρηκας
πεποιημένους.
6. vò: under the shield when worn, as usual, around towards
the back.
8. Seğiòv: contrary to the ordinary Greek habit.
9. аρуoνта πаρeίxovTo," they proudly presented as their leader."
11. Κηφήνες: on vi. 54. 2.
16–17. ǎmais yóvov: poetic; cf. 205. 4; Eur. Suppl. 810, Alc.
735.
310
HERODOTUS.
VII. 62.
2. τὴν αὐτὴν ταύτην : sc. στολήν : so 72. 6, 84. 2.
6. After murdering her children at Corinth, Medea fled to
Athens, and became the wife of Aegeus, by whom she had a son
Medus; detected in plotting against Theseus, she escaped to
Asia with her son, who became the eponymous hero of the Medes.
Paus. ii. 3. 8.
8. de: on vi. 10. 2.— Kíσσio: these dwelt about Susa.
10-11. μιτρηφόροι: on 90. 4.— Υρκάνιοι: on the southeast coast
of the Caspian.-éσeσáxатo, "were equipped;" S. 66.
VII. 63.
3-5. εὐαπήγητον: S. 3; “ easy to be described.” — τετυλωμένα,
"knotted."
8. The Chaldaeans are called priests in i. 181, and μeragù is
strangely used for ev or μerá: hence the brackets.
VII. 64.
κυρβασίας = τιάρας, but higher
14. ἀγχοτάτω : cf. 73. 2, 80. 4.
and pointed.
6-7. σαχώρις: S. 46. Σκύθας 'Αμυρίους belong together.
VII. 65.
2. évdedukótes: cf. 89. 5, 91. 5.— ảπò ¿úλwv, "of cotton." Tà dè
δένδρεα τὰ ἄγρια αὐτόθι (India) φέρει καρπὸν εἴρια καλλονῇ τε προ-
φέροντα καὶ ἀρετῇ τῶν ἀπὸ τῶν οίων· καὶ ἐσθῆτι Ινδοὶ ἀπὸ τούτων
τῶν δενδρέων χρέονται (iii. 106).
VII. 67.
1. Káσmɩɩ: on the west coast of the Caspian Sea.— σiσúpvas,
"skins."
5. Zapáɣyaι: The writer returns again to the east of Media.
VII. 69.
1-2. Leipàs, "long cloaks.”—raλívrova: bent back when un-
strung.— πpòs değiά, "on the right side;" contrary to the usual
custom.
6–10. σppnyidas, "seals;" commonly used by the Greeks in
seal-rings, by the Ethiopians as money.—yuw・・・ µídrų: for
μίλτῳ:
contrast with their natural blackness.
NOTES.-VII. 62–80.
311
13. Tv: construed with the nearer participle; 58. 4, 146. 12,
170. 19.
14. opupýλatov: beaten out with the hammer, instead of being
cast; cf. 84.4.
VII. 70.
3-5. The historian seems to be identifying the two divisions
of the Ethiopians made by Homer (a 23), those of the setting and
those of the rising sun. A remnant of the ancient people may
be recognized in the black Brahûi of Beloochistan.-érÉPOLσL :
the dat. as ii. 16, iv. 28, where the genitive is usual.—pwrǹv,
"language."
9-13. προμετωπίδια, “ scalps.” προβλήματα, " a protection.”
VII. 73.
4–7. Whether the tradition is here reversing the real direction
of tribal movement, which many think was rather from Armenia
to Phrygia, and thence into Europe, is beginning to be doubted
by some. Sayce maintains that the Armenian tongue was not
Indo-European.
VII. 75.
2. åλwtekéas, “fox-skins." The Thracians of Europe had the
same costume according to Xen. Anab. vii. 4. 4. With the mi-
gration of these Bithynians into Asia we may compare that of
the Galatians in the third century B.C.
9. ὑπὸ Τευκρῶν: see 20. 11.
VII. 76.
1. eixov: The name of the nation has been lost. Wesseling
first conjectured "Chalybians," and most editors have followed
him. Stein suggests "Pisidians." The correspondence between
their rather unique armature and that of the warriors figured on
a vase discovered by Schliemann at Mycenae is striking (Myce-
nae, p. 133).
2. Aukioepyéas, "of Lycian manufacture;" cf. 77. 6. The Caba-
lians and the Milyans were neighbors of the Lycians.
VII. 80.
3. vńowv dè, “of the islands I mean;" resumption of voɩrikà :
121. 4, vi. 127. 13.— åvaotáσrous: cf. vi. 9. 24.
67. δευτέρῳ ἔτεϊ: 479 Β.C. — τούτων: on vi. 46. 1.
4
312
HERODOTUS.
VII. 81.
3-6. οἱ διατάξαντες οὗτοι ἦσαν : on vi. 123. 6.— ἀποδέξαντες, " ap-
pointed.” οἱ μυριάρχαι : sc. οἱ ἀποδέξαντες ἦσαν.
VII. 83.
2-6. TOÚTWV: on vi. 22. 10. — åpaípηto: S. 61. The honor of
promotion to this chosen corps was a high one, and the candi-
dates were previously designated.
8-10. διὰ: as vi. 63. 15.— αὐτοὶ: opposed to κόσμον.-- πολλὸν
kaì äþlovov, “abundant and rich;" the same collocation, Hes. Op.
118; Xen. An. v. 6. 25.
VII. 85.
2–3. kaì, “likewise;" not merely in descent.— µerağù: on 33. 4.
5–6. où "are
5-6. οὐ νομίζουσι, “ are not wont.”— σειρῇσι, " lassoes.”
8-12. μάχη: on 9. 12. τύχῃ: on vi. 119. 16.-- ἐν . . . ἐμπαλασ
σóμevoɩ, “entangled in the toils.”
VII. 86.
3–4. eîxov: belongs to principal clause (Mîdoɩ), as well as rela-
tive; cf. 190. 1.— tĤ avtĤ kaì, "the same as;" 84. 2, 86. 7-10-11.
5. vñò äpµaσi: the yoke is considered a constituent part of
the vehicle; see Phaeacians, 【 73.
9–10. is 8' aŭtws: the separation is Homeric; Phaeacians, L
166.—óμoíws: pleonastic after ☎s d'avτws: cf. 119. 1-2, vi. 62. 5–6.
VII. 87.
4–5. åte: on vi. 5. 5.— The cavalry of Croesus turned to flight
in terror when Cyrus brought up his camels to confront them (i.
80).
3. σφι: with συνίππαρχος.
VII. 88.
9; cf.
4-5. ἐπὶ . . . περιέπεσε: cf. vi. 17. 1.— ἀνεθέλητον : as 133. 9 ;
190. 10; on vi. 2. 8.
8-9. φθίσιν, “ consumption.” αὐτίκα κατ᾿ ἀρχὰς: 148. 6, 220. 12.
VII. 89.
6–8. éxoúσas eixov: cf. 129. 8; on vi. 12. 15.-'Epv0p: the Per-
sian Gulf.
13-14, κηλευτά = πλεκτά (79. 2). μεγάλας : cf. 46. 18.
NOTES.-VII. 81-99.
313
VII. 90.
4. μírpno, "turbans;" easily recognized on many statuettes
and vases of the Cesnola Collection.-oi Baoiλées: The island con-
tained several important cities, each of which had its own king.
ἀπὸ Σαλαμίνος:
6. eioɩ: on vi. 41. 21. — åπò Zaλaµîvos: led by Teucer when
banished by his father on his return from Troy. He founded a
Salamis on the east coast of Cyprus.
7. ἀπ' ᾿Αρκαδίης: Many peculiarities of the Arcadian dialect
have been discovered in the recently deciphered Cypriote in-
scriptions.
8. åñò Ailiomíns: what is meant by this is sheer conjecture.
VII. 93.
17. οἱ ἐκ: on vi. 22. 7.— οὗτοι: emphatic position. πρότερον
ÈKaλéoνTO: Leleges; i. 171.
VII. 95.
24. τοῦτο = οὗτοι : attracted to ἔθνος. — ὕστερον: in their
mother country.— ¿kλý◊ŋ: cf. 10. 60, 82. 6.—- KATà .
— κατὰ . . . λόγον, " on
the same grounds;" i. e. they came from Athens and celebrated
the Apaturian festival; i. 147.
VII. 96.
16. Ἐπεβάτευον : cf. 184. 9.
ἐξέργομαι, “I am compelled;” cf.
139. 1.— és . . . λóyov, "for the subject-matter of my history."
9. s ov: instead of ouk is, to separate dè où: cf. 229. 19, vi.
52. 14, 75. 9.
10-11. oi... κрáтоs: for such interlacement see 229. 19; on vi.
41. 10.
VII. 97.
6-8. θυγατρός: on 2. 6.— ἀπ᾽ ἀμφοτέρων, " on both sides;” fa-
ther and mother.—oi dúo, "the other two;" Prexaspes and Me-
gabazus; on vi. 41. 6.
VII. 99.
1-3. οὐ παραμέμνημαι : on vi. 41. 10.
for such circumlocutions see vi. 101. 7,
θῶυμα ποιεῦμαι (θωυμάζω):
105. 8, vii. 105. 2, 157. 9.
4. ἥτις: on vi. 2. 5. αὐτή τε ἐχούσα: on vi. 46. 6.
5. Taidos: probably Pisindelis, whose son Lygdamis was ty-
rant of Halicarnassus in the next generation, and banished He-
rodotus.
14
314
HERODOTUS.
8-9. τὰ πρὸς πατρός, " on the father's side.” τὰ μητρόθεν: cf.
tà
vi. 125. 1.
13. For these opinions of Artemisia see viii. 68–9, 101-3. While
Thuc. mentions but three women by name in the whole course
of his narrative, Hdt. seizes every opportunity to introduce por-
traits of female character, more or less carefully drawn, that of
Artemisia being the most elaborate. Elsewhere we have the
Spartan Gorgo (v. 51, vii. 239), and Nitocris (i. 185–7) the Orien-
tal, as Tomyris (i. 205–214) the barbaric, and Amestris (ix. 109–
13) the vindictive queen. For less prominent characters, see i.
10-11, 31, 110-113, ii. 134-5, iii. 124, iv. 154, v. 92.
ἀποφαίνω,
15. ȧπopaívw, “I declare;" as a Halicarnassian by birth.
VII. 100.
4. åπéypaþov: Hdt. is supposed to have had access to such
royal records in compiling the foregoing account of the nations
of the host.
on
6. ETETоíηTo: the rare plupf. after a temporal conjunction;
vi. 110. 3; cf. 55. 2, 193. 4, vi. 112. 1; Frohberger on Lys. 12. 53;
Hm. p 359.
11-12. ἀπογραφόμενος, " having it recorded.” ἀνεκώχευον: vi.
116. 7.
13-15. μετωπηδόν, “ with close front.” ἐντὸς πρωρέων καὶ αἰγια
Aoû: true for both from the standpoint of Xerxes; cf. 22. 16.
VII. 101.
2-3. Anµápηtov: see 3. 2, vi. 67–70.— kaλéσas: on vi. 29. 9.
4-5. vûv: after seeing in detail the mighty force.-Sú tɩ=
ýdový: cf. 15. 12, 160. 12, vi. 138. 16.—0éλw: below, 12-13; cf. 8.
4; Eur. Alc. 281.
7-8. vûv ☎v: on vi. 11. 7.-πoμevéovσɩ: with supplementary
partc. as 209. 19, a construction which reappears again among
the late writers.
10-12. οἱ λοιποὶ οἱ: on vi. 46. 10. συλλεχθείησαν-εἰσι: on 10.
48.-Note the weighty tripling of the negative, où . . . oùd' . . . OŮK.
—μὴ ἐόντες: conditional.— ἄρθμιοι : vi. 83. 6.— τὸ ἀπὸ σοῦ, “thy
opinion;" explained by ókoîoí.
14-16. ὑπολαβών: vi. 129. 23. — χρήσωμαι : cf. vi. 52. 19.— ἔσε
σθαι:
obai: supply aúróv referring to Demaratus. For such omission,
see Phaeacians, 0 518.
NOTES.-VII. 99-104.
315
VII. 102.
ταῦτα
34. ταῦτα . . . ἁλώσεται, “ by telling you such things as one
shall not hereafter be detected by you to be falsifying.
τὰ = τοιαῦτα οἷα : cf. 9. 36. Hence μὴ is used because the relative
involves the notion of characteristic, as i. 32, ii. 135, iv. 166. 5;
Isocr. 4. 89, and often in Soph.- After the causal clause some-
thing like aтpekéws ȧyopevσw (Hm. a 214) is desiderated, as often
in Hm.; cf. a 231.— aieí кOTE: Vi. 86. 23.
5. σúvτρodós, “inbred," "native.”— åρeτǹ ĕπактós: The princi-
σύντροφός,
ἀρετὴ ἔπακτος:
ple which Hdt. here lays down as settled was much debated by
the philosophers of his day and later; cf. Eur. Suppl. 914.— åπó:
on vi. 98. 10.
9-15. λέξων: on 49. 13. ὅτι ὡς: variety; on vi. 75. 18. λό-
yous: cf. vi. 13. 3.—rà σà opovéwoi, "accede to thy wishes;" cf.
145. 3, vi. 100. 8.- μὴ πύθῃ: on 10. 66. — ἐόντες : f. 27. 7.
VII. 103.
2. οἷον . . . ἔπος: cf the Homeric ποῖόν σε ἔπος φύγεν ἕρκος
ὀδόντων, α 64.
5-8. μάλα : on vi. 3. 5. τὸ πολιτικὸν: for the concrete οἱ πολί-
ται. τὸ διπλήσιον: with reference to the double portion of the
kings; vi. 57.
10-13. δέ: on 159. 8. δίζημαι, " I look to.”— ὀρθοῖτ᾽ ἂν, “would
be correct;" cf. vi. 68. 6.-πapà: on vi. 26. 10, 54. 2.-μeɣálea: a
rare plural.
14–16. µátŋv kóµños, "as bootless bravado;" on vi. 30. 13.—
eipnμévos fi, “may prove to have been spoken;" G. 202. 2.— ¿Teì,
"for."-idw oikór, "let me look at the matter in all reason-
ableness;" cf. 167. 2, 239. 7.
19-20. Tepì: as if each Spartan were to fight singly.-TéVTE :
see 234. 10.
22. πapà... þúσw: instead of the gen. after the comparative;
H. 648.
24-5. oùк av: av is usually not repeated after the first of a
series of co-ordinate clauses except for emphasis.— ovdéтepa: the
pl. is a favorite with neuters; vi. 86. 7-14-24, vii. 53. 2.
27-8. TOûTÓ: the bravery to fight with overpowering numbers;
102. 16.—ye μèv, "still."
VII. 104.
4–6. toùs åÀŋßeσtátous: on vi. 43. 13, 129. 2; cf. vii. 108. 13.—
316
HERODOTUS.
""
τὰ ..
Tà
tà katýkovta, “what is incumbent on."—❀s, “that.'
cσTopyùs, “to be content with my present condition here.".
ἐκείνους seems governed by something lost, as δὲ μισέων: cf.
239.8.
7. Tiμńν Te Kaì yépea, "royal rank and prerogatives;" cf. vi. 56.
9-10. βίον . . . οἶκον : cf. vi. 70. 11, 41. 20. — εὐνοίην φαινομένην,
"kindness shown."
12. ékúv te eîval, "and voluntarily;" cf. 143. 16; H. 956 a; G.
268 n.
13-17. τις: on vi. 73. 4. — οἳ Ἑλλήνων—τριῶν ἄξιος: Note this
form of juxtaposition of the contrasted words.- oî ékaσtós Pnoi:
the verb takes the number of the nearer ἕκαστος.ὡς δὲ καὶ : cf.
106. 4; on vi. 14. 16.— kaтà ĕva, "singly."— кaкíoves, “inferior."
19. ἔπεστι vóμos at iii. 38 Hdt. quotes from Pindar, vóμov
πάντων βασιλέα.
•
20-3. yŵv: S. 22.— åvúyn· åvæyeɩ: on vi. 21. 7.— oùk . . .
ἀνώγῃ· ἀνώγει: . ἀπόλο
Avoda: so Tyrtacus repeatedly enjoins; x. 15-18, 31-2, xi. 2–6,
21–28, xii. 16–20. For an example, see the conduct of Amom-
pharetus in Hdt. ix. 53; cf. vii. 220. 4.— åλλà: sc. keλeúwv: 143.
17.
•
VII. 106.
1-2. ǎvSpa TO, "having (since then) proved himself a man
of such merit that to him." The time of the participle here is
not determined by kɑrédɩme, but by the thought in the mind of
the writer who transports himself to his own day.
4-5. ȧvà: cf. vi. 57. 7.- Maσкaμeioioi: such adjectives are
poetic.
8. ék: as 107.3 and 14; on vi. 22. 7.
VII. 107.
45. αὐτοῦ ἐν Πέρσῃσι: on vi. 72. 5.
6-7. ἐπολιορκέετο : B.C. 470.— παρεόν: on vi. 72. 4.
12. Observe the effect of the repetition of the article and con-
junction, and the deliberate circumstantiality of all that follows;
cf. vi. 75. 13–17.
14-16. čσπeɩpe: to render its recovery impossible.
δικαίως :
Hdt. is ever prompt to give his praise to a noble deed, whether
of friend or foe, Hellene or Persian. In this he presents a
marked contrast to the most of his countrymen, whose contempt
for "barbarians" made them blind to their every merit.
NOTES.-VII. 104-113.
317
VII. 108.
3-4. πρóτEрóν: v. 1 seq., vi. 44–5. — irò: with acc. implying
the idea of motion in the original subjugation; usually the dat.;
on vi. 137. 7.
9-11. ἔχεται: vi. 8. 5. — σφεων: on 8. 56. ἀντέσχε: 58. 11.
14. kai aŭrη: as well as Doriscus (59. 13) and Maronia (109.
3; cf. Hm.. 197).
2-3. πόλιας
78. 5, 109. 4, 122. 8.
VII. 109.
Táode: For the omission of the article here, see
6. 'Ioμapída: named from the Ciconian town Ismarus of Hm.
L 39.
9-10. ποταμὸν: sc. διέβη, from παραμείψατο: cf. Hm. 0 107.
ἰὼν : vi. 30. 1.
• •
11-12. év, "near;" as vi. 74. 12.— wσel μάλιστά : cf. 30. 6,
and on 22. 3.
13. ixovúdns, “abounding in fish.”
27. ἀπέργων : 43. 11.
οἰκέοντες : On vi. 57. 27.
VII. 110.
δι᾽ ὧν χώρης: on vi. 68. 9. οἱ αὐτῶν
VII. 111.
2-6. Tò: on 113. 6.-tdŋơi, "forests;" hence used as proper
name of wooded hills and mountains.—ăêpoɩ: 5. 17.— oi ... Єk-
Tημévoɩ: on vi. 75. 19.— µavτýcóv: mentioned by Eur. (Hec. 1267;
Rhes. 972), and consulted by the father of Augustus (Suet. Aug.
94).
8-9. oi πρоÓηTEÚοVTES: i. e. those from whose number the
prophet of the time was chosen. The πроþýτηs expounded signs
or dreams, and arranged or versified the ecstatic utterances of
the πрóμаvтis: on vi. 34. 8.—ipoû: gen. governed by the noun
implied in προφητεύοντες. πρόμαντις: cf. 141. 11, vi. 66. 8. — χρέο
ουσα: on vi. 19. 7.— καὶ οὐδὲν ποικιλώτερον, “ and she prophesies
nothing more enigmatical." This appears intended to correct
some erroneous ideas among the Greeks in relation to this dis-
tant oracle.
VII. 113.
5. πρότερον τούτων : cf. δεύτερα τούτων, 112. 2.- λόγον,
tion."
men-
6. Tà: în vi. 35. 4. The article is used adverbially as well
318
HERODOTUS.
with prepositional phrases as with adverbs proper; 20. 15, 111.
2, 126. 5.
9. ¿kaλλiepéovтo: as 167. 6; on vi. 76. 8, vii. 43. 8.
VII. 114.
1. φαρμακεύσαντες . . . ποταμὸν, " having performed these magic
rites to propitiate the river;" cf. 191.6–7.
2. 'Evvéa colonized by the Athenians in 437 B.C., and named
Amphipolis.
7. IIepσɩкòv: Cambyses buried alive twelve noble Persians head
downward (iii. 35). Perhaps this was the fate of Orontes (Xen.
An. i. 6. 11).
10-11. 0e: Ahriman among the Persians.- ȧvrixapíšeσdai, "to
express her thanks in turn," for his forbearance; infinitive of
purpose. κατορύσσουσαν: supplementary parte. after πυνθάνομαι.
VII. 115.
1-2. Strictly the primary clause here should exchange with
the subordinate; "he advanced where;" cf. vi. 43. 11.— èv rệ:
on 69. 13.
3–5. aŭtη: sc. ǹ yî.-— ẻπì, “by," "near." Pliny mentions Po-
sidium as a town with a bay in this locality (H. N. iv. 10).
6-10. Zτáyeɩpov: birthplace of Aristotle.-ěxwv: on vi. 75. 19.
13. σvyxéovor: 225. 16.- Livy mentions this road as still used
in 185 B.C., calling it vetus via regia.
VII. 116.
2. §elvinν πpoεîme, "made proclamation of guest - friendship;"
proclaimed them his guest-friends; cf. 29. 9.
3-5. Mηdik: the official dress of the highest in rank, and be-
stowed by the king only. The Persians adopted the dress and
ceremonial of the conquered Medes.— Tò ŏpuyμa ȧkoúwv, “hearing
about the canal;" the acc. as 146. 7; Hm. a 287; Aesch. Prom.
272; usually rep toi ..
VII. 117.
4. μεγάθει τε μέγιστον: cf. vi. 44. 12. — πέντε . . .: about 8 ft. 2
in. Rawl.
6–10. þwvéovtá te µéylotov: Compare 18. 3, and the Homeric
βοὴν ἀγαθός.— ὥστε: on vi. 18. 6. συμφορὴν: vi. 61. 17. — ἐξενεῖ-
Kaí: the technical term for bearing forth with full ceremony to
the tomb.-érovoµálovтes, "invoking."
NOTES.-VII. 113–123.
319
VII. 118.
3-5. πâv, "the extremity."-BσTE: on vi. 27. 8.-ŏkov, "since."
7-9. ȧpaiρnμévos, "chosen therefor."—õμola, “equally;" ad-
verbially employed; 120. 9.-T@ µádiota: SC. dokiμg: cf. 129. 10,
141. 4.— åπédeğe: when he rendered his accounts; cf. 119. 3.-
TETEλeσµévα, "spent."
45. οἷα: on vi. 5. 5.
VII. 119.
ποιευμένων: on 138. 4. τοῦτο μέντούτο
δὲ τοῦτο δὲ : on vi. 114. 1.
8-9. ènì: on 1. 10.--Tµs, "at a high price."
16-18. ὅκως: on vi. 12. 3.— ἔσκε: S. 82.— ἔσκε πεπηγυία ἑτοίμη :
a more exact development of the plupf. with the addition of the
iterative idea.-s: rare for oкws.
VII. 120.
67. ἡμίσεα: on vi. 23. 20. τῶν . . . xápi, "and to feel ex-
ceedingly thankful to them for the past;" on vi. 125. 21.
8–11. évóμlσe, "was accustomed.'
was accustomed.”—πapéxeiv av, "it would re-
main;" impersonal use as viii. 8, 30, 75, 140.—Siaтρißñvai: cf. vi.
37. 11.
VII. 121.
34. στρατὸν: subject of ὑπομένειν. πορεύεσθαι : on vi. 20. 7.
Θέρμῃ δὲ: on 80. 3.
6. Taúτη, “in this direction;" straight to Therma.
9. Saoáμevos: with object and cognate accusative; H. 725 b; G.
164.
12-15. μεσόγαιαν, τὸ μέσον : acc. cognate.
1-3. ἀπείθη: as 121. 4.
VII. 122.
διέχουσαν, " stretching across."
4. These towns are on the west coast of the Singiticus Sinus.
5–6. åπléμevos, “now released," from following the coast.—ès,
"for."
9-10. Τορώνην . . . Ολυνθον: on 22. 18. — Σιθωνίη : between
Athos and Pallene.
VII. 123.
3. το: referring loosely to ἄκρην. ἀνέχει, “juts out.”
8–10. veμóμeval: on 22. 16.-тò πpoeɩρnµévov: i, e. Therma; cf.
line 18.— Пaλλývŋ: on vi. 85. 3.
15. nên: on vi. 76, 6.
320
HERODOTUS.
K
VII. 124.
1–2. avtoû: as 107. 4.— µetažù: on vi. 85. 3; cf. iv. 49.
3-9. ἐστρατοπεδεύετο: cf. 181. 10, 236. 10.— τὴν ¿Soû, “cut-
ting a course straight through the interior." The idiom is
strange in connecting μεσόγαιαν ὁδοῦ, instead of saying τάμνων
μέσην οδόν, οι μέσην γῆν.— ἐκ . . . ἀρξάμενος: cf. 127. 4, vi. 126. 12.
VII. 125.
5-9. οἱ δὲ: on vi. 3. 5.— ἄλλων: with ἀπεχομένους: emphatic
position. The lion has great liking for the flesh of camels.-
µTE: in conditional relative clause.- avroû: on vi. 123. 5.
VII. 126.
ἔμπροσθε: “ 211
37. φοιτέοντα : in trade. τὸ πρὸς: on 113. 6.
indication that this part of the work was written in Asia.”
Rawl.— âv is usually retracted to a negative at the head of the
clause.
VII. 127.
2-10. éπéoxe: as 19. 6. ovνµµíoyovтes: From 350 B.c. to 140
A.D. each river had a separate embouchure; now the Lydias
joins the Axius. The whole plain is alluvial.- ToÚTwv: on vi.
22. 10. — οὐκ ἀντέχρησε: 58. 11.
VII. 128.
2-4. Ossa is some seventy miles distant from Therma.- ¿dòv:
cf. 173. 7.
5-7. Tλwoɑs: So Darius took ship at the Bosporus and sailed
out to see the Pontus (iv. 85).— каTÚTEρle: about the upper val-
leys of the Haliacmon, in Elimia.-σTe: only here in Hdt. as
preposition, and otherwise rare.
14. évéσxeto: intransitive, where we should translate passively.
VII. 129.
1–3. elvaɩ: imperfect infinitive.— wσte: on vi. 5. 5.— avrîs: on
vi. 57. 27.
4-8. συμμίσγοντα: on vi. 19. 16.— ἐστὶ ἐοῦσα: cf. 89. 6, 176. 10,
iv. 47.
12. μév vvv: resumptive after the gen. absolute, as i. 85.
13. óvoμasóμevol, "with names of their own;" as separate
rivers.
NOTES.-VII. 124–133.
321
16-17. ñồŋ: on vi. 76. 6.—— elvaɩ: on vi. 20. 7.- This sentence
is involved and obscure. The writer means that five rivers of
sufficient importance to have names of their own flow from the
mountains into the plain, and are finally merged into a single
stream, which retains the name Peneus in preference to the rest.
20–1. Boißnída: northeast of Pherae, and communicating with
the Peneus.- ¿voµáleσdaι: They were then only mountain torrents
hastening to the central sea.- TE,
"but."
25-6. γῆν σείειν: hence the epithets, ἐνοσίχθων, ἐννοσίγαιος.—
τὰ διεστεῶτα, “the chasms opened.”—-κἂν = καὶ ἂν : καί in apodo-
sis, as 128.9.
VII. 130.
14. οἱ κατηγεόμενοι: cf. 128. 15, 197. 1. — τούτῳ: on 49. 1.—
avrý, “alone,” as vi. 134. 2.
9. ταῦτ' . . . ἐφυλάξαντο, " against this, then, some time before
did they take precautions;" 176. 23.-Taûr': the configuration
of their land.—ăpa: on 35. 10.- ·πρò πоλλοû, “some time be-
fore;" a rare use of ρó until a late period. Xerxes relies upon
the representations of the Aleuadae. The facts were somewhat
different; 172-3. — yvwσɩµaxéovтES, "repenting;" properly, quar-
relling with one's former opinion on a subject.
· καὶ τἆλλα,
"both for other reasons;" his own great power. —πρîуμа .
πρήγμα
μoûvov, “it would have been necessary simply;" 12. 3.
g
11-15. δι᾽ ὧν ρεέθρων = τὰ ῥέεθρα δι᾽ ὧν. — ἔξω, " except.” γε-
νέσθαι: on vi. 109. 24. ἔχοντα ἐς : on vi. 2. 2.— δοκέων ὁ Ξέρξης:
added loosely, as appositive, for greater clearness.
VII. 131.
4-5. KýρUKES: cf. 32.- Kelvoí, "empty-handed."
Φθιώται,
VII. 132.
3–8. oi Pliŵtal, "of Phthiotis," in southern Thessaly. - ẻπì,
"against" on vi. 74. 5.— kataσtávtwv odi eû: cf. vi. 105. 11.
VII. 133.
a
3-5. πρότερον: vi. 48. — οἱ μὲν: the Athenians.
οἱ μὲν: the Athenians. — βάραθρον: 2
pit at Athens into which criminals were thrown.
8-9. ταῦτα ποιήσασι τοὺς : cf. 5. 8. ἀνεθέλητον : 88. 5. — οὐκ ἔχω
elwać: Pausanias says that, as Miltiades was mainly responsible
for the act, he was the one punished in the calamities which be-
fel him and his family; on vi. 75. 18.
14*
322
HERODOTUS.
VII. 134.
1. Sè av: on vi. 76. 7.— Taλlußíov: cf. Hm. A 320.
4. kŋpukŋíaɩ: cf. vi. 60.— èk: because the public embassies to
κηρυκηίαι
foreign states are especially had in view.
5-6. ταῦτα: the murder of the heralds.- καλλιερῆσαι: vi. 76. 8.
7-8. συμφορῇ χρεομένων: 141. 2, 117. 7. During the continu-
ance of unfavorable omens public business had to be suspended.
12–13. ȧvýkoνtes: as 13. 6. Tîoal: the future inf. is regular
ἀνήκοντες:
after verbs of promising, but the aor. and pres. occasionally are
found; cf. 215. 2, vi. 2. 5.
VII. 135.
4–6. 'YSápvns: on vi. 133. 7.—opeas ioría, “entertained them.”
10-12. ὑμεῖς : as vi. 11. 7. — προς: on vi. 26. 10. — ἕκαστος : not
ékáτepos,
ÉKάTEρos, because all the Spartans are meant. - apxo, "would
hold some command in ;" an intentional exaggeration, but com-
pare the promises of Cyrus, Xen. An. i. 7. 6–7.
13. oùk è§ lσov, "not well balanced," one-sided. Hydarnes has
had experience of one only of the two phases to be considered.
14. ... Teίvovoa, "which relates to us;" cf. vi. 109. 27.
ǹ
19. kai wedékeơ, "even with the woodman's axe;" cf. 225. 14.
VII. 136.
1. ȧμeíчavтo: with double acc.; usually acc. and dat.; 161.3.
4–7. πpoσkuvéelv: This consisted in prostrating themselves be-
fore the king (προσπίπτοντας) and kissing the earth. ὠθεόμενοι
ẻπì kepadǹv, “though thrown headlong;" cf. Plat. Rep. 553 B.—
катà, "on account of;" vi. 44. 19.
9-12. ἐχόμενα : cf. 5. 7. μεγαλοφροσύνης: cf. 24. 2, and on 4. 6.
15. τὰ ἐκείνοισι ἐπιπλήσσει, “ which he stigmatizes in them.”
VII. 137.
1-2. οὕτω καὶ ταῦτα ποιησάντων: for such parallelism, cf.
•
164. 7-8, 230. 1-2.
4–6. katà, “during;" on 1. 10.— év toîσi belótaтov, “most clear-
ly by divine ordinance.” ἐν τοῖσι: as if ἐν τοῖσι γενομένοισι: 2
phrase used to strengthen the superlative, frequently in Thuc.;
H. 652.
7. άyyéλous, “heralds;" since this was the province of Talthy-
bius; but there must have been many families of the Talthy-
NOTES.-VII. 134–139.
323
biadae, so that the chances were many that the wrath would fall
elsewhere rather than on the families of Bulis and Sperthias, who
must also have been Talthybiadae, as may be seen by comparing
134.4 with 137. 15. Hence the guiding hand of Providence is
clear, in accordance with the law that children may suffer for
the father; on vi. 75. 18; cf. vii. 197. 21.
8–9. ¿§îλ0€: cf. vi. 82. 6. — ĕpepe, "tended;" cf. vi. 110. 4, 19. 3.
Note the parallelism of the constructions rò σvµñeσeîv and ŏtɩ
Katéσknye (above); hence the inf., though articular, is really past.
12. eîλe: some time between 463 and 445 B.C.-TOùs ek: Halieis
was a small seaport on the southern point of Argolis and founded
from Tiryns.
14–17. èk: causal.--oi: demonstrative; on vi. 61. 25.— reµplév-
TES: 430 B.C. Sitalces was an ally of Athens, and the Spartan
envoys strove to win him over to their own alliance, but were
unsuccessful. Nymphodorus was brother-in-law of Sitalces and
a proxenus of the Athenians.
VII. 138.
14. οὔνομα: cf. 157. 9-10. — κατίετο, “ was directed.” — πρò :
130.7.—oỷk éttoleûvto, “did not regard it;” for this sense in the
middle, arising from transference to the mental field, see vi. 6.
6, 13. 12, vii. 14. 5, 117. 7, 181. 8.— oi µèv, “some.”
5–6. &s, “in the belief that.”— ǎxapı, “untoward ;” cf. vi. 9. 17.
vii. 50. 25.
8. ἀξιομάχων: 157. 16, vi. 89. 4. τὸν ἐπιόντα: cf. 139. 30, 157. 6.
VII. 139.
1-2. ἐξέργομαι: as 96. 6.— ἐπίφθονον, “invidious.”— προς: on 2.
11.— πdeóvwv: This was written about the beginning of the Pel-
oponnesian war, when so large a part of Greece was arrayed
against Athens.
4-5. ἐπισχήσω : sc. γνώμην ἀποδέξασθαι. — ἐξέλιπον: on 143. 17.
7. ¿πeɩpôvтo: with partc., as 148. 8, 172. 18; on vi. 5. 7.
9-10. av: on vi. 124. 5. — TELɣéwv kilŵves: the wall repels the
enemy as the cloak repels the cold. The expression is poetic:
ef. λάινος χιτών, Hm. Γ 57. - ἐληλαμένοι: on vi. 137. 8. διά,
"across." This wall was built with great despatch directly after
the battle of Thermopylae (viii. 71).
11-12. προδοθέντες, " abandoned.”— κατὰ πόλις, " city after
city."
324
HERODOTUS.
15. While describing with unsparing rigor the selfishness and
duplicity of the Spartan character, Hdt. makes their martial
prowess the subject of his highest eulogy.
15-17. πρò тоû: on 16. 23.-av-av: repetition as lines 21-22.
18–19. åµþóтepa: as 10. 23.- ¿peλíŋv: prolepsis; on vi. 41. 12.
20. âv v, "it would have been;" unreal form; cf. 168. 24. For
the thought see c. 235.
21. av: appended to the most emphatic word, instead of the
partc. as usual.
22. åµaptávol with acc. is rare, but see on vi. 12. 20.
23-27. ókótepa: on vi. 86. 26, vii. 103. 24. — péveɩv, “to prepon-
derate." —µǹ: on vi. 94. 7. — OÛTOL ἐπεγείραντες: on vi. 123.
6.— μetá ye leoùs: cf. 168. 21, 144. 16, viii. 109.
• •
30. ȧvéσxoνтo, “made bold;" usually construed with partc.,
not inf.
VII. 140.
1. θεοπρόπους: sacred envoys to the oracle; θεωροί in Attic;
cf. vi. 57. 13. It may be gathered from c. 145 that this embassy
occurred about 482 B.C.
3-4. ipòv: on vi. 19. 15. - τὰ νομιζόμενα : These rites consisted
especially of purifications and sacrifices.- péyapov: also called
ådvtov (140. 16), where stood the statue of the god, and, back in
its shadowy recesses, the tripod over the fissure in the rock.—
Πυθίη : on vi. 34. 8.
5-6. ὦ μέλεοι: on vi. 19. 8.— Connect λιπών δώματα.— τροχοει
Séos referring to the circular form of the city wall.
7-8. Observe the personification of the city. - TÓDES VÉαTOL:
Hm. B 824.—our' ¿v: cf. Hm. A 115, ◊ 168.
9. ἄζηλα = ἄδηλα, " annihilated.”
κατὰ: with ἐρείπει, as adver
bial preposition, with object of verb between; often so in Hm.
10. Συριηγενές: no more than eastern.
Aesch. Pers. 84.
11-13, κοὐ — καὶ οὐ.—που: why not κου?
διώκων,
Stóкwv, "driving;"
ἱδρῶτι: Such appear-
ances foreboded ill. Here what is usually predicated of the
statues is transferred to the entire temple, and so more terri-
fying.
14. opópolo: the dat. instead of gen., as Hm. г 10, Y 282.
15. alpa: Compare the vision of Theoclymenus before the
Suitors, Hm. v 354.
16. ĭоv determines the number of the envoys; see line 5.—
kakoîs... Buµóv: oracularly vague and ambiguous; "Brood on
NOTES.-VII. 139–142.
325
the ills that await you," Rawl.; "Offer a bold heart to your ills,”
Schw. At all events, the tone of the oracle throughout is utter-
ly hopeless, and is so regarded by the envoys.
VII. 141.
25. ἐχρέοντο, “were in a state of;” cf. 134. 8. — προβάλλουσι
...auroùs, “and giving themselves up for lost;" this meaning
results from the custom of flinging one's self on the ground in de-
spair; cf. Hm. 8 538-41.-8μola: on 118. 8.- ikerŋpíŋv, “the sup-
pliant olive branch."- SeúTepа avтis: Homeric exuberance.
¿ðóvras after opt: cf. 136. 5, 95. 8.
10-11. αὐτοῦ ... τελευτήσωμεν : so Orestes declares, Eur. Iph.
Taur. 974. — Taûta dè: epanalepsis; cf. 136. 8–11.
13-14. Παλλάς: as the patron goddess of Athens. — πυκνῇ,
"firm."
15. medáσoas: SC. avtó (éπos); “bringing it nigh unto,” “mak-
ing it firm as." It is Apollo who speaks.
16-17. Κέκροπος οὖρος: Attica. κευθμών, " covert.” — ζαθέοιο :
Cithaeron was a favorite haunt of Bacchus and his followers.
18-19. Tρiтoyeveî: why Athene was so called is only conject-
ural.— eйρúoжα, "wide-voiced.”— åπópłŋtov: cf. 161. 20.
ἀπόρθητον:
20-22. μένειν: on vi. 86. 30. — τοί, " look you.” — κἀντίος
καντίος = καὶ
ἀντίος.
•
23-4. dè is in its prevailing position with an invocation or ad-
dress, especially among the poets. — ň • ovvioúons, “either per-
chance when the seed is scattered or gathered in." The battle of
Salamis occurred on the 20th of Sept., about the time of the au-
tumn sowing.- Anuńrepos: by metonomy, as Cererem corruptam
undis expediunt, Verg. Aen. i. 177.
VII. 142.
1-5. yàp on vi. 5. 6.— σvyypaþáμevoɩ: so the envoys of Croesus,
i. 48. — ἐς τὸν δῆμον : on vi. 69. 3. — διζημένων, “ inquiring into the
meaning of.”— ovveσtηkvîaι, “antagonistic;" cf. vi. 29. 3.
8-13. pnxŵ, “by a thorn hedge," like that about the courtyard
of Eumaeus (Hm. § 10). — кaтà: as 142. 16, vi. 44. 19. - Tò, "the
said;” hence its use in the predicate.— čσpaλλe, “staggered."
17-19. xpηoμoλóyou: on 6. 12.-Taúrn is prospective; on vi
- δεῖ: on 2. 3.- παρασκευασαμένους: conditional; “in case
they should..
10.2.
""
326
HERODOTUS.
VII. 143.
2. Tis: on vi. 37. 12; observe the extrusion of avèp: cf. 13. 6.
veworì: He had been archon as early as 493 B.C.; but his
father was a man of no reputation, and his mother not a native
Athenian, so that he could have obtained citizenship only through
the enfranchisement made by Clisthenes.
3–4. Sè, “but.” — Ékaλéeto, “he was usually called," according
to a common custom in Greece; on vi. 88. 3.- wvǹp: S. 27.
5–6. ei... ¿óvtws, "if the line had been spoken really with
reference to the Athenians.” εἶχε εἰρημένον nearly = εἴρητο: see
on vi. 12. 14 and 2. 2.- μiv — ÉWUTÓV.
8–9. Toi: on 51. 15.—dup: on vi. 62. 6.— ả là vào: naturally,
"but since," with rapaσkevágeodal • as apodosis; but this is
broken by the writer's return there to direct discourse.
10-11. συλλαμβάνοντι : on vi. 33. 2.— κατὰ τὸ ὀρθόν = ὀρθῶς.
15-18. yvwσav, "judged;" so usually with the infinitive.
μᾶλλον: on vi. 12. 19. οὐκ ἔων, “sought to dissuade.” τὸ σύμ-
Tav elvaι, "in short." είναι is added pleonastically as in τὴν
πρώτην εἶναι (i. 153), τὸ νῦν εἶναι: see ou 104. 12. ἀλλὰ: as 104.
22.—äλλŋv: Siris, near Heraclea, in Southern Italy, was the place
to which they were looking (viii. 62).
VII. 144.
2-4. ĕμπpoole: on vi. 89. 12.—ès κaιρòν, “opportunely," like és
Séov below; cf. vi. 89. 4.—ǹpíσtevσe, "prevailed;" cf. vi. 101. 8.-
For Αθηναίοισι instead of 'Αθηναῖοι, see on 69. 13.-- ἐν τῷ κοινῷ,
"in the public treasury."
- Tŵν ảπò: on vi. 22. 7. The silver
mines of Laurium were on the peninsula above Cape Sunium,
and belonged to the state, though farmed out to individuals for
one twenty-fourth of the income.
5. Hdt. estimates the Athenian citizens at 30,000 (v. 97), which
would make the sum about fifty talents, an amount too small to
build two hundred ships. This was probably not the annual
income from the mines, but the result of an accumulation.
*-9. χρημάτων: gen. of price. - λέγων: as vi. 99. 7. — συστὰς,
"having arisen ;" cf. vi. 87-93.— és tò tóte: merely a more reso-
nant phrase for the usual róre, swelling the alliteration.
11-13. ἐχρήσθησαν: this passive also Dem. 520. 1. — ἐγένοντο :
on vi, 13. 1.— úπnρxov, "were ready."
NOTES.-VII. 143–147.
327
VII. 145.
2–4. is tŵutò: the Isthmus (172.5), as a central point where
all the land and sea routes crossed each other. Here the depu-
ties remained assembled as a permanent council of war until
their decrees were carried into effect. περὶ τὴν Ἑλλάδα belongs
with oрoveóvтwv, as shown by 172. 7; for its position see on vi.
85.3. Normally, the article is not repeated with the partc. when
so construed, and many editors cancel it here; but rà dé
μοι παθή
µaтa тà ẻóvтa (St.), i. 207, presents a parallel.- SidóvTwv πίστιν,
"taking counsel with one another and giving pledges.”— dɩdóv-
των . . . λόγον: explained by βουλευομένοισι, as vi. 138. 16. σφίσι:
on vi. 12. 10.
5-6. πρῶτον . . . πάντων: primum omnium.— κατ᾽,
• ..
among."
7. ἦσαν . . . ἐγκεχρημένοι, " now they had been sharply pushed
in the case of some others also."-kal: intensive, as in similar
phrases; cf. 142. 4; Xen. Anab. ii. 6. 8, i. 3. 15.—èykexpnµévoɩ: cf.
vi. 75. 6.
14. Képкupav: also Kóρk., whence Corcyra; off the west coast
of Epirus.
πρήσσοιεν,
15-16. εἴ κως : on vi. 52. 17. — συγκύψαντες
"might engage in the same undertaking in concert.”
18-19. πρήγματα, “ power,” as often. οὐδαμῶν . . . μέζω, " (nay)
far greater than every Greck power." The double negative is
equivalent to an affirmative; H. 1031.- Grammatically, ovdaµŵv
is gen. by inverse attraction to rŵv, from ovdaµà ĥv: H. 1003; G.
153 4; тôv governed by µégw.— For Tŵv = Őtewv, see on 46. 12.—
μέζω : S. 10.
VII. 146.
34. καταμαθόντες, " having carefully taken note of” ἐπάιστοι:
as vi. 74. 1.— Baoaviobévtes, “having been examined;" on 10. 10.
6-8. κατεκέκριτο, " had been decreed." Tivas: on vi. 37. 12.
9-12. ζῶντας, περιεόντας: variety. — ὄψιν, " presence.” — τὸ ἐνα
beûtev: cf. vi. 14. 4.—èn', "for," of purpose; 156. 16; cf. 193. 11.
σφεας: οι 69. 13.
13–15. étideíkvvoda: as Fabricius with the spics of Pyrrhus,
and Scipio with those of Hannibal.— ảoɩéas: note the emphasis
of position.
VII. 147.
1-4. émiλéywv, "adding."-λóyou μétw, "past description."-
ẻσívavto: for change of subject, see on vi. 30. 3.
328
HERODOTUS.
7–10. Toû yɩvoµévou, "which was in preparation;" on 20. 3.-
σφέας : on vi. 46. 3. — πρήγματα ἔχειν, " to have the trouble.” τῇ:
on 6. 14.
11. ἐκ τοῦ Πόντου: The regions about the northwest coast of
the Euxine were noted in ancient as in modern days for the pro-
duction and export of grain (cf. Hdt. iv. 17), and upon this
source the Athenians especially depended for their supplies.
15. ἐσβλέποντες ὁκότε παραγγελέει : cf. πατέρα προσδέρκετο δέγμε-
vos óπtóte μvηorĥpoi xeîpas épnoel, Hm. v 385; with opt., B 794,
I 191, Σ 524.
16. eĭpeto avtoùs, "asked regarding them," the sailors; simi-
larly, 100. 10; Aesch. Prom. 226; see on 116. 4. The sailors were
not in his presence.
20. The tone is that of 8. 32; they are as good as his subjects
already.
VII. 148.
3-4. ènì: on vi. 74. 5; cf. vii. 235. 19.— Seúтepa: as 18. 5; re-
ferring to 146. 2.
6. yàp proleptic, and properly belonging after répaı...: cf.
53. 10, 162. 8.
8. σφέας παραλαμβάνοντες, “ to ally them;” cf. 150. 16, 157. 5,
168. 3, 169. 2.
10–11. ŭs: on vi. 37. 10; with Toɩéovσi, “how acting;" cf. 169.
5; Soph. Antig. 271.—veworì: about 494 B.C.; see vi. 75–82.
12-14. kai: on vi. 108. 8.- åveλeîv: as vi. 52. 22.
16. τὸν ἔχων, “ with couched spear.
guard."
· • •
πεφυλαγμένος, “ on
17. Kepalǹy: the ruling class; oŵµa: the people; on vi. 83. 1.
18-19. ús éλbeîv: on vi. 52. 25.— és dǹ tò, "to the above-men-
tioned."
20. τοὺς δὲ: the members of the council, βουλευτήριον.
22–3. oteloáμevoL: conditional.-Яyeóµevol: “Argos never for-
got her claim or relinquished her hopes of the hegemony. The
claim rested in part on the fact that Argos (Mycenae) was the
seat of government under the Achaean kings, in part on the sup-
posed choice of Argolis for his kingdom by Temenus, the eldest
of the Heraclidac. The hope determined the policy of Argos
at all periods of her history." Rawl.
VII. 149.
3–4. µǹ: on 11. 3.— oπoudǹv ěxeɩ, “they were eager.”
NOTES.-VII. 147-151.
329
6-8. μὴ δὲ: on 197. 11.— πταίσμα πρὸς : modelled after πταίειν
πрós τ: cf. vi. 45. 10.- µǹ, "lest," after miλéyeolai, "they were
apprehensive."
9. ảyyéλwv: The embassy would be composed of delegates from
Sparta, of course, and also from Athens, if not others; cf. 153. 2,
161. 2.
10-13. ἐκ, “by.” ἀνοίσειν ἐς τοὺς πλεῦνας, “they would refer
the matter to the people;" i. c. to the general assembly of the
Spartan citizens, by whom matters of peace and war were always
decided, and it was the question of leadership in war which was
now at issue.— avтoîσɩ . . . λéyew, "it had been enjoined upon
them to answer, and accordingly they reply." They had come
armed with instructions upon a point easily anticipated.
αὐτοῖσι
14-15. eva: The Temenidae had already been deprived of
their governing power, but appear to have been left in possession
of their rank and sacerdotal rights.— ovdéтepov: for the negative,
compare 11. 15, 104. 22, 170. 8.—Tаvσaι, "deprive."
20-21. SÚVTOS: on vi. 98. 3.- TepiéРeσbai: passive; on vi. 9. 23.
VII. 150.
6-9. Such attempts to show a common descent between Per-
sians and Argives were intended to put a gloss on the medizing
action of the latter, by enabling them to avail themselves of the
immense influence of mythological descent.-åπóyovoɩ: cf. 11.
21, 51.7.
ἡσυχίην ἔχοντας,
12–13. novxínv exovras, "remaining quiet."—ǎğw, “I shall
hold."
•
14-15. πρήγμα ποιήσασθαι : cf. vi. 63. 9.— παραχρῆμα: vi. 11. 8.
οὐδὲν µeтaitéeɩv, “promising nothing (in aid of the Greek
cause), they demanded nothing (for their assistance);" they
simply followed the advice of the Persians and the oracle, and
remained quiet. The negative belongs to both participle and
verb, as v. 39; a rather rare usage; cf. on 190. 1.
VII. 151.
1-2. ovμmeσeîv: as vi. 18. 6.-λóyov, “occurrence;" hence, ye-
νόμενον.
3. While rejecting the identification of Memnon as an Egyp-
tian king (ii. 106), Hdt. accepts the story that he was the founder
of Susa, and ruler of the eastern Ethiopians.
4. πρИуμаTOS: This is reasonably supposed to be the negotia-
330
HERODOTUS.
tion of the "Peace of Cimon" which followed the victories in
Cyprus, B.C. 449, by the terms of which the Asiatic Greeks were
to be free, and no Persian army was to come within a given dis-
tance of the coast. For Callias, see on vi. 121. 4. He married the
sister of Cimon.
6-7. TOûTOV: On vi. 27. 7.— kaì TOÚTOUS, "likewise;" on vi. 51. 3.
8-9. The subject of eµµével is incorporated into the relative
clause.— ééλovo, "as they desired."-vouloíaтo: on vi. 3. 2.
VII. 152.
1-10. This is a curious passage, in which our author tries to
give the Argives the benefit of a doubt, and wrap in some stud-
ied obscurity his own opinion of their guilt, which he does not
hesitate bluntly to express at viii. 73, when speaking in more
general terms of the medizing Peloponnesians; cf. vi. 13.—ei
πάντες . . . ἐσηνείκαντο : A sentiment which is attributed to Solon
by Val. Max. (vii. 2. 2), and applicable to the ordinary fortunes
of mortals (cf. Hor. S. i. 1. 15–19), is here transferred to wicked
actions, with the sharp advice to carping critics, “let him that
is without sin cast the first stone.". · ἐς μέσον : cf. 8. 107. — οὐκ
aloxɩσтa: i. e. not more shameful than the Thebans, Thessalians,
or perhaps some others whose boasts were now blatant enough.
11–13. ¿þeíλw λéyeɩv...: a statement reiterated at ii. 123, iv.
195, and all-important to remember in criticising our author.—
ye μèv: as vi. 129. 22, vii. 103. 28.-és távтa тòv λóyov, “for my
whole history."— таûта: for táde.
ταῦτα:
16. πᾶν
ὀφείλω λέγειν
•
..
πρò: cf. vi. 12. 17-18.
VII. 153.
Τριοπίῳ:
2–5. ovµµížovtes: as vi. 23. 6.- Tptonio: the promontory south
of Halicarnassus, on which Cnidus was situated.
7–8. ¿λeípon,“ did not remain behind;" a medial passive; cf. vi.
22.13. Gela was founded 690 B.C.— X@ovíwv: on vi. 134. 5. The
hierophant performed the initiatory rites in the mysteries, and dis-
played the sacred vessels and statues to the view of the initiated.
9. Évós Teu: as vi. 91. 9; cf. vii. 8. 86-7, 53. 6.—Tрoyóvwv: a re-
turn to Gelon in thought.
τούτοισι .
•
14-17. After supply el from őƉev.— TOûTO dè: on vi. 16. 4.-
ὅθεν. τοῦτο δὲ:
Kaτńуaуe: compare the way in which Pisistratus re-
turned to Athens; i. 60.-t' ♣ te • ἔσονται· 21 vi. 65. 3.-
τοῦτο: on 15. 15.
NOTES.-VII. 151-156.
331
19-21. πρὸς : on vi. 26. 10.— γίνεσθαι : on vi. 13. 1. πρὸς τῆς Σ.
Tŵv: on vi. 68. 9.
VII. 154.
34. ἐτυράννευσε: for the tense see 4. 4. ἑπτὰ: 505498 B.C.
8-9. For the position of μer', see on vi. 130. 7.-...òs: the la-
cuna is to be filled by Θήρωνος δὲ πατρὸς or simply υἱέος.
12-13. Καλλιπολίτας Συρηκοσίους : inhabitants of towns on
the eastern coast of Sicily.- каì πрòs, " and furthermore."
16. TOUTEWV: epanaleptic after the attracted relative; cf. vi.
108. 30. — πÉÞEuye: probably wrong reading for diépuye: vi.
45. 6.
19. KataλλáğavTes: coincident participle, as 157. 20, 161. 2; on
vi. 29. 11.
VII. 155.
1-2. τυραννεύσαντα: 498–491 Β.C. — κατέλαβε : as vi. 38. 7; cf.
vii. 4. 4.
8-9. Evρnμа: as 10. 48.- yaμópovs, "landholders." In Samos
also the highest class of citizens were so called. At Athens the
Geomori were a middle class. ἐκπεσόντας: as passive of ἐκβάλ-
λω.
10. Kuλλupíwv: originally native Sicels, probably, and on the
same footing in the state as the Helots of Lacedaemon.
12. čoxe, "became possessed." He ruled here from 485 to 478
B.C.
VII. 156.
12. παρέλαβε: on 8. 13. — ἐπικρατέων: supplementary parte.
depending on the phrase λóyov èλáσow ¿toléeTo: cf. Eur. Med. 454.
3-4. ὁ δὲ : on vi. 3. 5. πάντα, “ all in all.”
5. ἀνά τ' ἔδραμον, “sprang up;” on vi. 114. 3. τοῦτο μὲν : vi.
27. 3.
τοῖσι
8-10. Tŵv ảσt@v, "his fellow-citizens."-TŴUTÒ TOîσi: on vi. 14.
15.- Meyapéas: see the construction of pwv, vi. 30. 3.
– és óµodo-
yiŋv πрoσexwpnσav: compare the various phrases, vi. 99. 9, vii.
139. 17, 172. 13.
11. auтŵv: the partitive genitive between article and adjec-
tive, as i. 53, 177, iii. 113, iv. 167; on vi. 57. 27.-raxéas: as vi.
91. 2.
15-16. καὶ τούτους: as 151. 7. - ἀπέδοτο, “ he sold."
sold."-T': as
146. 11.
18-19. διακρίνας: the people from the aristocracy. συνοίκημα,
"fellowship;" abstract for concrete.
332
HERODOTUS.
VII. 157.
5-6. παραλαμψομένους: 148. 8. ἐπιόντα: proleptic; on vi. 41. 12.
8-9. πάντα ...: 9. 35. πρόσχημα: on 138. 1.
11. Suváμlós: gen. of quality with μeyáλws: so with other ad-
verbs construed with кw: i. 30, 149; on vi. 116. 1.
12. yàp, “since.”
13-19. μέτα = μέτεστι: on vi. 86. 51. — ἁλής, “ united.”
χεὶρ :
20. 3. τὸ ὑγιαῖνον, “ the sound part;” cf. vi. 100. 7. — τοῦτο δὲ :
on vi. 16. 4. —ñồn, “at once."— deɩvòv: as 10. 29. —yívetal: on
vi. 109. 26.—¿λríoys: on 10. 66.
21-23. βοηθέων . . . τιμωρέεις : chiasm.
τιμωρέεις : chiasm. εὖ βουλευθέντι: 10. 44.
—ÉS TÒ ÈTÍTAV: as 50. 13. For the maxim here, see on 9. 40.
VII. 158.
1. TOλλÒS ÉVÉKELTO, "attacked them sharply;" on vi. 78. 7.
•
-
2–4. πλeovéktηy, "selfish.”—avtoì: unusually emphatic position.
πλεονέκτην,
5–8. ovveπáyaodai, "with your assistance to attack." Note
the succession of participial clauses, which are broken by 8тe . . .
for variety. —πρòs συνῆπτο: on vi. 94. 1. — ἐπισκήπτοντός,
"pressing upon you."-Dorieus, disappointed and chagrined at
his failure when expecting to succeed to the kingdom at Sparta
through the incapacity of his elder brother Cleomenes (on vi.
75. 4), led an expedition into Libya, and afterwards to Sicily,
where he met his death at the hands of the Egestaeans.- ĚKπρý-
ξασθαι, “to avenge.” ὑποτείνοντός, “promising.” τὰ ἐμπόρια:
the ports of western Sicily, which were then in the hands of the
Carthaginians, but appear to have been freed of them by these
efforts of Gelon.
10. Bonenσovtes: Hdt. more commonly has the pres. partc. of
Boneéw in this construction; on vi. 23. 14.
11-12. TÓ TE Kат' vµéas, "but so far as you are concerned."
τάδε ἅπαντα : as 11. 16. νέμεται : as 23. 1. ἀλλὰ γὰρ : as 4. 2.
13-16. kal is corrective; "nay, even."— oùк
tone, 136. 12.
• •
•
vµîv: Xerxes'
18-19. Note the effect of the anaphora and polysyndeton.—
inπоdρóμous λoús, "light horsemen," Rawl.; or, "light infantry
interspersed with the cavalry," in order to support them, like
those described by Caesar B. G. i. 48, and the aμinπо of Thuc. v.
57; Xen. Hel. vii. 5. 23; so Arnold, Stein, Abicht. The word is
not used elsewhere.
NOTES.-VII. 157-162.
333
20-4. Siaπodeµńowμev: observe the force of the preposition.-
Táde: out”
: retrospective.— oỡr' . . . Téµaiui: a close with exact loó-
κωλα and ὁμοιοτέλευτα, admirably conceived in sound and sense.
πέμψαιμι:
VII. 159.
1-2. ἠνέσχετο: double augment, as in Attic. ή ... Αγαμέμ
vwv: imitation of Nestor's exclamation, Hm. H 125. In what
does it fail of being an hexameter line?
=
5. μνησθῇς, “ mention.” Oκwss: this is mainly Herodo-
tean and dependent on a negative assertion; 161. 5, 237. 5.
8. où dè: on 10. 82. For the construction of these conditional
alternatives compare 103. 8-14, 160. 11–13, 163. 12–14, vi. 52. 29,
109.15-26.
VII. 160.
.
ơɩ
2-3. ἀπεστραμμένους, “ hostile.”— τὸν Aóyov, "gave utter-
ance to this final proposition to them." For the position of opɩ
¿§épaɩe, see on vi. 41. 10.— tóvde: intruded as i. 212, ix. 60.
45. ονείδεα .
...: compare 39. 79. — κατιόντα - ἐπανάγειν: ob-
serve the contrasted prepositions. — ἀποδεξάμενος: from ἀποδεί-
κνυμι.
6-8. ἀσχήμονα: for, ὀργῇ δὲ φαύλῃ πόλλ᾽ ἔνεστ᾽ ἀσχήμονα (Eur.
Fr. 261).—őkov: as 118. 5.-Tepιéxeσde: 39. 15.—Construe µâd-
λον υμέων together.
10. προσάντης: like ἀπεστραμμένους, but with different figure.
VII. 161.
6-7. οὐ προφαίνεις: after the analogy of οὔ φημι. — ὡς, with
finite mode, instead of infinitive alone, after yλíxeodai, deîodai,
Boúλeolai, is rare. ooov: temporal.
9-11. Toîσɩ: on vi. 84. 10. ἀπολογούμενος: supplementary
partc. after the phrase ikavós ἔσεσθαι, analogous to ἀρκέσει.
12-13. οὕτω ἔχει τοι : as vi. 1. 9. ἐπίῃ: S. 76.
•
—
17-19. εἴημεν-συγχωρήσομεν : on 16. 37. — παρεχόμενοι : on 61. 9.
20. où μetaváσtat: their common claim of autochthonous origin.
21. Ομηρος ἔφησε: Β 552, of Mnestheus. Connect τῶν ἄνδρα
ǎplσTOV Tážal, “a hero of whose, the best to array."
VII. 162.
4-5. οὐκ . . . ἀπαλλασσόμενοι, “ you could not be too quick in
departing home again with all speed."
6–7, ẻk toû...: Pericles, in a funeral oration, applied the same
334
HERODOTUS.
expression to the youth of the state who had fallen in war
(Arist. Rh. i. 7, iii. 10).— oûtos: prospective. Many commenta-
tors bracket all the rest of the chapter from oûtos, as unworthy
of Hdt. Stein is satisfied with all but rò éléλel déyelv (cf. vi. 37.
10, iv. 131).
8-9. yàp on 148. 6.-σтрaτinv: Sc. elvai: on vi. 105. 7.
10-11. στερισκομένην . eïkale ŵs ei, “accordingly he thought
Hellas deprived of his force the same as if." The more usual
idiom is εἰκάζειν τί τινι.
VII. 163.
2-3. πρὸς ταῦτα, “in consequence of this.” μὴ οὐ: as vi.
9. 5.
7. 68òv: this rare acc. after quéλnoe also Eur. Ion, 439; after
the analogy of elaσe: on vi. 12. 20.— ô dè: as 156. 3.
9. Σkúlew: probably the same Scythes whose expulsion from
Zancle by the Samians and sojourn at the Persian court are de-
tailed vi. 23–4. He appears to have been made ruler of Cos by
Darius, but afterwards to have withdrawn in favor of his son,
who in time followed his father's example in laying down his
authority there, and, having emigrated to Sicily, succeeded in
recovering Zancle from the Samians. Scythes' journey to Sicily
(vi. 24) may have been made for the purpose of assisting Cadmus
in this undertaking.
10. és Aeλþoús: because the oracle inclined towards submission
to Xerxes, as may be seen from its utterances at this time; 140,
170, 220.— þıλíovs: to Xerxes, with whom he might be expected
to have influence from the friendship of their fathers (vi. 24).
13. Tŵv, “(in behalf of those) over whom."
VII. 164.
-
3. εὖ βεβηκυίαν, “ firmly established.” ἑκών τε είναι: as 104. 12.
6. ĕoxe: as vi. 23. 8. — katoíkŋσe, "recolonized." Anaxilaus
(vi. 23. 5) played the important part in this according to Thuc.
(vi. 4), who does not even mention Cadmus. The latter was
probably soon removed by Anaxilaus, or he would not have
been employed by Gelon, the declared enemy of the tyrant of
Rhegium (165. 11).
9-11, τήν ẻoûơav, “which he personally knew to be his,
otherwise."— avtòs ãλdŋv: from his personal knowledge of him
in Sicily.-éì, "in addition."— τοῖσι . τοῖσι: on 24. 7.-- ἐλί-
TETO: cf. vi. 109. 12.
.
NOTES.-VII. 162–167.
335
13–15. πapeòv: acc. absolute as vi. 72. 4.— oùк žléλŋσe: com-
pare the conduct of the Spartan Glaucus, vi. 86.— kaì Sǹ kaì: as
1. 4.
16. åπò: with ǎywv: the only case in Hdt. of wide tmesis; on
vi. 114. 3.
VII. 165.
2. uws emphasizes kaì by its presence as well as by its posi-
tion, which is usually after the partc.; cf. vi. 120. 4; Eur. Med.
280, Alc. 936.
6-8. ὑπ' : as vi. 2. 3.— αὐτὸν . . . τοῦτον : note the unusual order ;
on vi. 27. 7.-'Iẞńpwv... Kupvíav: Iberians of Spain, Ligurians
of northwest Italy, Helisuci of southern Gaul, Sardinians, Corsi-
cans.
..
10. Baorλéa: i. e. Suffes, habitually called Bariλeús by the
Greeks. They were probably two, and elected for life from the
noblest families.— κarà EwUTOû, "both through his own hos-
pitable relations with Hamilcar.”— Týpɩλλos åvayváσas: an epa-
Τήριλλος
nalepsis which enables the author to prolong one of the longest
sentences he attempts; cf. vi. 13. 1–13, vii. 158. 2–12.
16. τὸν Γέλωνα ἀποπέμπειν : dependent on λέγεται, but witl
changed construction, as 167. 10.
VII. 166.
3-9. The alliance of Gelon and Theron was cemented by mar-
riage, Gelon having wedded Theron's daughter Demarete, and
Theron Gelon's niece. πρὸς πατρός, μητρόθεν : as 99. 8-9. οὔτε
ζῶντα: cf. the stories of Empedocles' death. — τὸ πᾶν . . . διζήμενον :
cf. Ἡρακλέα δίζησθαι πάντα τῆς χώρης ἐπεξελθόντα, iv. 9.
VII. 167.
2-5. οἰκότι: sc. λόγῳ, as found iii. 111. -- ἑλκύσαι, “ dragged
on;" intransitive.
ὅλα:
6-7. ¿xαλλɩeрéeтo, "kept seeking favorable omens."
With the Phoenicians as with the Jews it was originally cus-
tomary to burn the entire body of the victim; but later, as with
the Greeks, this was reserved for great occasions.
10. åþaviodévτi: on 39. 18. According to Diodorus, Hamilcar
was slain by the cavalry of Gelon at the beginning of the battle.
11-14. ὡς ... Συρηκόσιοι: bracketed as incorrect, since the
Carthaginians are the same as the Phoenicians, and the Syracu-
sans did not know the manner of his death (166. 8).— TOûTO µÉv :
336
HERODOTUS.
as 156. 5.—oi: on vi. 46. 1; cf. vii. 197. 3.—Qúovo: such hero-
worship was unknown to the Phoenicians. Movers conjectures
that this statement arose from a confusion of the names A-milkar
and Melkarth, the Phoenician deity whose worship was wide-
spread among the colonies.- ¿v avrî ... Kapxŋdóvɩ: on vi. 52. 32.
VII. 168.
1. ȧrò nearly equals repì, but involves the idea of motion;
195. 8.
6-8. οὔ σφι περιοπτέη ἐστὶ ἀπολλυμένη, " must not be suffered by
them to perish.”— σφεῖς . . . δουλεύσουσι, “ nothing remains but
that they shall themselves be slaves;" sc. yíveral.—σpeîs: the in-
direct reflexive in emphatic position; on vi. 11. 7.-μepéwv: on
vi. 43. 13.
11-16. μόγις, " after much ado. προσέμιξαν: on 26. 10. καὶ
οὗτοι: as well as Gelon; 163. 11.— κατακρατήσαντα πολλὸν: vi.
11. 16.
18. πapadaµßavóvтwv: conative, as 168. 3, 169. 2, 150. 16.
•
21. mapaoxóvtes av, "though we could have furnished;" H.
987 b; G. 211; C. 595. 2.— μeтά ye: as 139. 27.
22-4. áπolúμιov: Homeric, as E 261.
οἴσεσθαι: 213. 3.
25-30. ἐπεποίητο, " had been prepared.” ἐτησιέων: on vi. 140.
4. Malea was from the earliest times proverbially difficult to
weather. The Etesians are at their highest from the last of July
to the end of September, on the 20th of which month the battle
of Salamis was fought.-λepîvaɩ: on 153. 7.
λειφθῆναι:
VII. 169.
1. οὗτοι οὕτω : on 40. 1. — διεκρούσαντο, “ eluded.”
κοινῇ:
2-5. ènì: as 146. 11. KOL: The island was divided into a
number of independent states.- τιμωρέουσι : cf. ποιέουσι, 148. 10.
6-8. ἐπιμέμφεσθε ὅσα δακρύματα, “ye complain of the tears
which.”—Èk ... τιμωρημάτων, “ in consequence of your liberal
assistance to Menelaus." For the plural, see on vi. 19. 9.-Mevé-
dew: the dat. in attributive position with implied participle, as
Soph. O. C. 1026; Pind. Isth. i. 14; similarly a prepositional
phrase, Hdt. vi. 54. 2, vii. 158. 7.— Mívws... Sakрúμатa: for the
δακρύματα:
iambic line, see on 178. 9.— µŋvíwv: especially of the wrath of
gods and heroes.— oi µèv: Menelaus and followers.
9–10. yevóμevov: for position, see on vi. 85. 3.— Sè, “ while.”—___
ἐκ . . . βαρβάρου: on 16. 8.
NOTES.-VII. 167-170.
337
11. ταῦτα . . . ἤκουσαν : as i. 66, 158, 160, ν. 89. — ἔσχοντο,
"withheld themselves from." They understood the oracle to
declare that they would be punished now as before for aiding
the Greeks of the mainland.
VII. 170.
1-3. Aaιdáλov: cf. Verg. Aen. vi. 14 seq. Oaváry: Daedalus
θανάτῳ:
had taken refuge with the Sicanian king Cocalus in Camicus,
where Minos was hospitably entertained by the king, but mur-
dered at the bath by the king's daughters, who had become par-
tisans of Daedalus. Sophocles made this the subject of a play,
now lost.
4–5. The people of Polichna and Praesus probably belonged
to the primitive pre-IIellenic population of the island, and natu-
rally took no concern in avenging Minos.
6-8. κατ' ἐμὲ, “in my time;" cf. vi. 42. 12, 119. 21. συνεστεῶ-
τας, "hard pressed;" cf. vi. 29. 3.
9-10. 'Inπvyíŋv: southeastern part of Italy.- yevéolai: on vi.
14. 3.— ὑπολαβόντα : cf. vi. 27. 6.
12-13. κομιδὴν, " conveyance.” — μεταβαλόντας: sc. τὸ οὔνομα:
164. 7.
15-16.
on 69. 13.
ντὶ εἶναι: on vi. 32. 6. — ήπειρώτας: cf. 22. 17. — Tàs:
19–22. avtŵv... explains 'Eλλnvikòs with greater particularity
and admits the introduction of the Rhegians. οἳ . . . οὕτω,
Since those of the citizens who were compelled by Micythus,
son of Choerus, and came as allies to the Tarentines, perished,
3000 in number, so." Resolve of into ereì and the article oi to
be construed with the participles, the relative being more closely
connected with these than with the verb; on 69. 13, 171. 9.—
OUT: emphatic in its rare position at the end of a sentence; as
here 223. 4; Hm. σ 222; cf. o&tos, vi. 107. 11.— oùк èπîv åpɩеós,
no numbering was possible;" so 191. 2.-The battle took place
in 473 B.C.
CC
24–6. èkteσwv: This does not agree with Diodorus, who says
that after nine years' regency (476-467 B.C.) he was called to an
account by the heirs, but acquitted himself so honorably that they
begged him to continue his guardianship. He refused, however,
and withdrew to Tegea.— oikýσas: as vi. 33. 11.-Toùs: the well-
known. Fifteen of these are named by Pausanias as still stand-
ing (about 150 A.D.) at Olympia, others having been removed to
15
338
HERODOTUS.
Rome by Nero. They were dedicated in payment of a vow for
the recovery of a son who was ill with a wasting malady.
Among the fifteen, besides other deities, Aesculapius and Hygeia
were represented, as well as Homer, Hesiod, and Orpheus. Frag-
ments of the bases of two of these dedications, with the remains
of their inscriptions, were discovered in the recent excavations at
Olympia. Arch. Zeitung, xxxvi. p. 139, xxxvii. p. 149, seq.; Roehl,
I. G. A. 532, 533.
VII. 171.
2. παρενθήκη, " episode;" cf. iv. 30 : προσθήκας γὰρ δή μοι ὁ λόγος
ἐξ ἀρχῆς ἐδίζητο.
4. ăλλous: for the acc. see on vi. 137. 14, 54. 6, 105. 7.
5. TρíTη: on vi. 126. 1. Idomeneus, who led the Cretans to
Troy, was grandson of Minos; Hm. N 451, T 178.— Teλeutýσaνta:
on vi. 98. 3.
7-8. ἀπὸ τούτων, " in consequence of this.” λιμόν τε καὶ λοιμὸν :
an alliterative phrase from Hesiod, Works, 243. For the fact,
see Verg. Aen. iii. 137-9.
9. σTe belongs in thought mainly with the partc. (on 69. 13,
170. 19, 190. 9); until Crete was deserted a second time, and now
a third Cretan people, etc.
VII. 172.
1–2. væò åvaykaíns, "under compulsion." Contrast 174. 4.—
ὡς διέδεξαν, " as they clearly showed.”— Αλευάδαι: 6. 8.
5. åλiσµévoɩ: on 145. 2. No Attic classic but Xenophon uses
this word; Rehdantz on Anab. ii. 4. 3.
9-11. φυλάσσεσθαι τὴν ἐσβολὴν, " that the pass be guarded ;"
223. 10, vi. 52. 36; Xen. Mem. iii. 6. 11.—†: on vi. 41. 10. —— ẻv
σкéπê, “under safe shelter from;" cf. Hm. 210.
13. &s, "since." εἰ πέμψετε: on vi. 9. 20. — ἐπίστασθε, “ rest
assured;" in this sense often construed with acc. and inf. in Hdt.,
though rarely in Attic.
16–18. For où with Bouλóuevo, though conditional, see on 10.
81.—ȧvaykaínv: compulsion (cf. 132. 5) to resist the enemy single-
handed.-- ovdaµà . . . ĕþv, “for never is compulsion stronger than
inability;" cf. viii. 111; Theog. 140.- equ: gnomic; on 10.56.
VII. 173.
2. πρòs τаûта, “in view of these representations;" 160.1.
4-5. Evρírov: the strait between Euboea and Boeotia. —
NOTES.-VII. 170–176.
339
'Axaɩíns: in southern Thessaly.- Halus was on the west shore
of the Pagasaèus Sinus; mentioned by Hm. as one of the cities
of Achilles (B 682).
8. káтw: along the coast, as opposed to the interior, line 24.
11. katà: on vi. 44. 13.— The Spartans, in the time of Xen.,
had six polemarchs, the highest officers in the army next to the
kings; on vi. 109. 4–7.
15–16. ỏλíyas, “only a few."-'Aλeğávdpov: king of Macedon
and a proxenus (on vi. 57. 11) of the Athenians, to whom he was
sent as envoy by Mardonius after the retreat of Xerxes, when he
urged much the same arguments as here (viii. 140). He also
gave the Athenians warning of the determination of Mardonius
to join battle at Plataeae on the following day (ix. 45).
18-19. μηδὲ = καὶ μή.— σημαίνοντες, “recounting.”
22-5. Sokéeɩv: on 24. 1. — Tóvvov: just behind Tempe, to the
west.— rŷn πep dǹ kaì, “by which very route actually;" cf. 168. 25.
VII. 175.
2-3. στήσονται: on 9. 21. νικῶσα : cf. vi. 101. 8.
•
6. ἀγχοτέρη . EwUTOV, "both nearer to their own land."
The lacuna assumes that some epithet with Kai correlative to Te
has fallen out of the text. Some editors bracket re.
πρότερον ἤ : 2. 5.
7. Note the alliteration.-λwoav oi åλóvtes: cf. 10. 7, 220. 26;
Xen. Mem. i. 6. 6, ii. 2. 9; Plat. Phaedr. 253 C; on vi. 12. 15.
8. οὐδὲ ᾔδεσαν : like the pass behind Tempe.
10-12. maρiéval, "to let pass."— Iotiaiútidos: in northern Eu-
boea, not in Thessaly. The gen. is chorographic.—Taûta: Dep-
μοπύλαι καὶ ᾿Αρτεμίσιον.
13-14. τὰ . . . ἐόντα, “ what was taking place in the vicinity of
either force.”—ourw: prospective.
VII. 176.
1. TOûTO µèv: as vi. 27. 3, but with Sè av as correlative in line
6.— тò 'Apreµíolov," as to Artemisium;" used in careless summa-
tion of the following description, like the common tekµýpiov dé,
Tò dè µéyiotov (cf. vi. 128. 8), etc.; cf. Dem. Phil. i. 28.
2. Opnikίov: the northern part of the Aegean.-: repeated
with the attributive for effect in contrast to σTELòv, something
like the article duplicated with attributives, ix. 25, 81. A com-
plete parallel is Plat. Rep. ix. 578 A: év åvdpì dè ñyeî tà tolaûTA
ἐν ἄλλῳ τινὶ πλείω εἶναι. — συνάγεται has πέλαγος as subject.
340
HERODOTUS.
5. Εὐβοίης: chorographic gen. with τὸ ᾿Αρτεμίσιον.— ἤδη, " at
once." déketat, “receives you;" as you come from the strait of
Sciathus. For this use of dékoμaι, see line 15, and expressions
such as vi. 33. 2.— aiyɩadós, “ a coast district.”—The region takes
its name from a temple of Artemis; there was no town.
6-7. Tpnxîvos: about the head of the Maliacus Sinus.— ýµí-
πλεθρον: ffty feet.
δ. κατὰ τοῦτό, “ in that place.” τῆς χώρης τῆς ἄλλης, “ of the
whole region;" cf. 199. 3. See Phaeacians, 158, and compare
Shaks. Mids.-Night's Dream, v. 1: "This is the greatest error of
all the rest."
10. ŏmiσle: as one stands at the defile and faces westerly.—
ἐόντας ἐοῦσα: on 129. 8. ἐοῦσα ἁμαξιτός: appositive to το στεινό-
TаTоν, the partc. agreeing with the predicate.
τατον,
12-13. τῶν . . . ἑσπέρης, " to the west of Thermopylae:” on 20.
15. Hdt. makes the mistake of supposing the coast to run north
and south as usual, instead of east and west, as it does here.
15. Oáλaσσa kaì тeváуea: an Homeric hysteron proteron. The
marshes were formed by the alluvium of the Sperchius and oth-
er streams, which have produced such changes since then that
the Malian coast has been advanced some four miles eastward,
the other streams have become tributaries of the Sperchius,
and the mouth of this river has been thrown from the north-
western to the southern shore of the gulf, and advanced some
eight miles from its old position. Over this marshy, new-made
ground it is practicable in summer to cross into northern Greece,
avoiding the Pass altogether.
16. θερμά: hence Θερμο - πύλαι.- Χύτρους, “ the Caldrons;” so
called not only from the shape of their basins, but because in
cool weather a strong vapor arises from the water, which is hot
to the hand, and salt.
17. è', "near." Hot baths in general were sacred to Her-
cules, for whose refreshment they were said by the myth to have
been produced by Athena. This region, too, was the scene of
his sufferings and death, and Sophocles localizes his play of the
Trachiniae at Trachis.
20. Ocσπрwτŵv: The name of the people is frequent for the
country; cf. 173. 25, 196. 5, 198. 9, vi. 34. 12. Thesprotia was in
Epirus. The tribal movements here referred to occurred some
sixty years after the Trojan war, according to Thuc. i. 12. The
Thessalians, passing over Pindus, drove the Boeotians southward
NOTES.-VII. 176–179.
341
into Boeotia, and settled in the district thenceforward called
after them.
21. Aloλída: Thessaly.— éкTéαtal: S. 59.—åte: on vi. 5. 5.
234. τοῦτο: on 130. 7.— ἂν after ὡς, ὅπως (ὄφρα), with opt. in
final clauses, is rare and mainly confined to Hm. and Hdt. As
here, also i. 152, v. 37, ix. 22, 51. P. Weber (Entw. der Absichts-
sätze, s. 131–2) gives the following statistics of the use of the con-
junctions of purpose in Hdt.: iva, 107 times, 78 with subj., 24
with opt., 5 with both; okws, 12 times, 7 subj., 5 opt.; oκws av,
5 times, 1 subj., 4 opt.; &s, 16 times, 10 subj., 5 opt., once both;
ås av, 11 times, 6 subj., 5 opt.
26-8. Èk: on 22. 2.-EKELTO, "lay prostrate."
VII. 177.
προσκεψάμενοι :
1-2. OUTO: Artemisium and Thermopylae.
The writer probably had eßovλeúσavto in mind when beginning
this clause, but changed to σɩ edoge in line 4, producing an
anacoluthon; cf. viii. 87; Xen. Anab. iii. 2. 12, Cyrop. iv. 2. 3, etc.
VII. 178.
1-2. SiaTaxoévtes, "in two divisions."— Aeλpoì: perhaps some
of the more patriotic citizens, like Timon (141. 3; cf. 189.2); on
163. 10.
9. ἐξαγγείλαντες . . . KaтébeνTO: a complete hexameter, which
Stein imagines to be due to a reminiscence of some poetic ac-
count of the event. But as Cicero says (Or. 56), "Versus saepe
in oratione per imprudentiam dicimus (quod vehementer est
vitiosum: sed non attendimus, neque exaudimus nosmet ipsos):
senarios vero, et Hipponacteos effugere vix possumus." And Her-
mogenes (395) says of Hdt.: οἱ πλεῖστοι τῶν ῥυθμῶν αὐτῷ κατά
τε τὰς συνθήκας καὶ τὰς βάσεις δακτυλικοί τέ εἰσι καὶ ἀναπαιστικοί,
σπονδειακοί τε καὶ ὅλως σεμνοί. Cf. on 11. 24.
11. The position of the place Thyia is unknown. The heroine
Thyia first established the orgies of Dionysus and gave her name
to the Thyiades. The connection of the name with Oúw, Oveλλa,
suggests the reason for their choosing this glebe for the altar.
12–13. èπ': on vi. 47. 3.— µetýcσav: cf. vi. 69. 2, 68. 10.
VII. 179.
2–5. 8 σTPATÒS: somewhat loosely expressed; only ten vessels
start out till the passage is reported clear; 183. 10.—ieù: on vi.
342
HERODOTUS.
17.5.-evea: not to be taken strictly; they were probably some
distance to the north of Sciathus.-Troezene was in Argolis.
• • •
VII. 180.
5-6. διαδέξιον káλλɩσtov, “deeming it a good omen that
the first of the Greeks that they took was also very handsome."
Sacrifice of prisoners of war was common among the Phoenicians,
and these were Phoenician ships (96. 2, viii. 92). Cf. Tac. Ger. 10.
7. Táxa..., “and perhaps he might in some measure have his
name also to thank for it" (besides his beauty, if we could get at
the truth of the matter); i. e. as Aéwv, he received the fate of a
lion when captured. The Greeks were fond of such play upon
names, and were extremely superstitious about them; cf. vi. 50.
14, ix. 91; Longin. De Subl. 4. 3; Cic. De Div. i. 45; Tac. Hist.
iv. 53, Aesch. Theb. 578, Eur. Phoen. 639.
1-2. Tɩvá: on 42. 9.
vi. 12. 5.
VII. 181.
ÉπIẞаTEÚονTOS, "serving as marine;" on
4-5. ÈS TOûTO Ès ô: an emphatic és ô, in its temporal sense.—
Katekρeovρyý◊η aras, "he was all chopped to pieces," as meat by
a butcher (κpeoυpyós); on vi. 75. 17.
8–9. oɩvdóvos Buoσívns: sometimes used of cotton, but Hdt. ap-
plies the term to the mummy cloths of Egypt, which have been
proved by the microscope to be fine linen.
10–11. ékπayλeóµevoɩ, “with great admiration."
περιέποντες :
vi. 44. 12. Pythes was recaptured by the Greeks at Salamis, and
returned in safety to Aegina (viii. 92).
1-3. ai: on vi. 41. 6.
VII. 182.
Πηνειού : If they were as far north as
this at the start (which seems improbable) there is no difficulty.
The passage has given much trouble and does not seem free
from objections in any view.
5. ou: as vi. 67. 10.
VII. 183.
5. Яμepoσкóπous, "watchmen." As often in poetry, one part of
the compound has little force.
7. Tò Eppa, "the sunken rock," just below the surface, and now
known to the Greek sailors as Leftari. -μeTagù: for position,
see on 124. 2.
NOTES.-VII. 179–184.
343
8–9. Múρµŋкa, “The Ant."-- кoµíσavτes, “having brought it,”
on purpose. This was the main reason for sending this division
in advance.
10-11. αὐτοὶ, “the main body.” — ὥς
καθαρόν, " since the
obstacle (to their advance) was out of the way."
12-13. παρέντες: cf. 175. 10. — ἐξέλασιν : see 128. 6.— κατηγήσατο :
on vi. 135. 6.— ¿v tópw µádiota, “exactly in the strait.”
14–16. é§avúovσɩ: on vi. 139. 14. The distance is above one
hundred miles.— τὸν μεταξὺ : as 188. 3. Sepias promontory
is the southern extremity of Magnesia.
• ..
VII. 184.
1. At this point, just before the first catastrophe to Xerxes,
the writer checks the flow of his narrative with consummate art,
in order to picture still more vividly to the reader the immensi-
ty of the host that seems certain to tread Hellas under foot by
sheer force of numbers. The effect of the impression is greatly
enhanced by the prolix method with which he expresses his
numbers.
πλῆθος
2–6. кaì πλñlos..., “and, as I find by computation, was then
still, as regards the number of those on board the ships from
Asia, which were 1207—(I find, I say) the original contingent of
the several nations to be," etc. The sentence is confused and
irregular. Tv μèv is opposed to Toû Tehov, line 20.-κ: on vi.
22. 7.— At ròv µèv åpxaîov the construction is changed so as to
depend on evρioкw; see on vi. 137. 13.— ȧpxaîov indicates the na-
tive crew of each ship originally furnished before the Persian
and other marines were placed on board; see 89. 2 seq., 96. 1.—
¿óvтa: on 8. 32; for its position, see on vi. 41. 10.—πрòs: adver-
bial, as often below.
7-8. ús, “on
on the supposition that." —åvà, "severally;" used
distributively with numbers, as line 14; here emphasized by ev
ἑκάστῃ νηί; cf. 187. 11. — λογιζομένοισι: on vi. 33. 2.
10–11. тpɩýkovтa: see on vi. 12. 5. The number of native
marines is not known; cf. ix. 32.— oùтos: on vi. 21. 6.
τι
14. ŏ Tɩ... λaσσov, “whatever there was more or less of them."
16. πρότερον : 97. 10. — ἤδη ὤν, “ consequently then ;” vi. 53. 9,
ii. 144.- av elev: cf. on 180. 7.
23. καμήλους: on vi. 85. 3. — τοὺς τὰ ἅρματα: supply the pre-
ceding partc.
28–9. ToUTo, “ herein;” H. 695 a.—Ėjavaxèv: on vì. 85. 3.
ἐξαναχθὲν:
344
HERODOTUS.
VII. 185.
2-4. προσλογιστέα: for the plural, see on vi. 13. 7. — δόκησιν
Aéyeɩ, "make a guess.”— årò -èk: variety; on vi. 46. 9.
7-11. Ilaíoves-Makedóves: tribes belonging to Macedonia;
Περραιβοὶ — Αχαιοί, to Thessaly.— ἐθνέων, resumes πεζού.
ai
13-14. αἱ πᾶσαι . . . μυριάδες: fuller explanation of the preced
ing μvpɩádes. —For the repetition of the article with attributive,
see vi. 46. 10. The sum total is composed as follows: on the
triremes, 241,400; marines, 36,210; on the penteconters, 240,000;
infantry, 1,700,000; horse, 80,000; camel - drivers etc., 20,000;
Thracian naval force, 24,000; Thracian foot, 300,000. These
numbers, as well as the following, are supposed to be much
exaggerated.
VII. 186.
36. καὶ μάλα: as 11. 12.— ἅμα τῇ: on 124. 2. οὐ . . . ἀλλὰ: on
vi. 96. 5.- kai dń: on 10. 21.
8-11. ἴσας — ἐκείνοισι: on vi. 85. 3. - Ξέρξης ὁ Δαρείου: on vi.
ò
14. 13.
VII. 187.
1-6. τοῦ — τοῦ: as 185. 14. — οὐδ᾽ ἂν - οὐδεὶς ἂν: the repeated
av emphasizes the repeated negative; 139. 16.
-9. Ρώυμα - θωυμά: rhetorical reiteration. — παρίσταται: cf.
46. 13.— προδοῦναι: cf. 21. 5. ἔστι τῶν, “ some;” Η. 998; G. 152
2; C. 603.
10-11. xoívika, "quart."-Ts pépns, "per day;" temporal
gen., varied below in ἐπ' ἡμέρῃ ἑκάστῃ.
12. The medimnus contained forty-eight choenices; hence Hdt.
has made a mistake in his calculation; for 5,283,220 ÷ 48
110,067. Our author was not much of a mathematician; at
all events, in his text we find many errors of calculation. In
this connection, the following remark is interesting from a criti-
cism on
"The Register of the Bishop of Durham, 1314–16," in
The London Academy, Dec. 12, 1874: "In a minute inventory of
effects the adding up of the money is faulty in more places than
This is frequently the case in mediæval accounts, and it is
marvellous that with so pretentious an assumption of minute ac-
curacy there should be so many blunders in documents of this
kind."-T': on 50. 4.
one.
16. kάλλeós te kaì µeɣábeos: cf. 12. 7; and for such estimate of
beauty, see vi. 61. 17, vii. 180. 3, 31. 8.
NOTES.-VII. 185–189.
345
17. ȧğLoviкóτepos, "more worthy as victor (in a contest for
beauty);" cf. ix. 26, 27. The Greek mind loved to dwell upon
contests.
VII. 188.
2-5. κατέσχε ἐς: cf. vi. 101. 2, 99. 4. — ὅρμεον: on 22. 4. - πρὸς
Yn," on shore."- n': as 176. 17. ἐπ᾽ ἀγκυρέων, “ at anchor.”
6. πρόκροσσαι, " in rows.”— ὁρμέοντο : mere variety for the ac-
tive above.
7. ἐπὶ: as vi. 111. 14. — εὐφρόνην : 12. 1. — ταύτην . . . οὕτω : cf.
55. 7, vi. 140. 1.
8-10. Observe the strong sigmatismus. For this reason Leσáons
is selected for censure by Longinus (De Subl. 43. 1) as diminish-
ing the sublimity of the description (dɩà tò kakóσtoμov). On the
contrary, it may be said that the phrase τῆς θαλάσσης ζεσάσης
was purposely chosen to contrast with the soft liquids and vow-
els preceding. For (éew of the sea in commotion, see Apol.
Rhod. iv. 953, and compare Verg. G. i. 327; Job xli. 31. Hermog-
enes (221) quotes Aristides' description of the storm at the bat-
tle of Arginusae: ἄρτι μὲν γὰρ συνιούσης τῆς ναυμαχίας ὤδινεν ἡ
θάλασσα καὶ κατέβαινεν Ελλησποντίας λαμπρός. ἀπηλιώτης, like
ἀντήλιος, ἱππαρμοστής, λεύκιππος, etc., does not aspirate even in
Attic. It is Boreas to the Athenians; 189; on vi. 44. 11.
12-15. οὕτω ὅρμου: cf. vi. 116. 2.— οἱ δ' : cf. vi. 16. 4.— ἀναστά
σaνTES: on vi. 65. 9.—”Iπvoυs, " Ovens."
18-19. Meλíßolav: a city of Philoctetes (Hm. B 717); cf. Verg.
Aen. v. 251. — Xpôµа: H. 729 g; used periphrastically to denote
conspicuous magnitude; vi. 43. 18.
VII. 189.
3. ăλλov: besides those of 140, 141.
69. κήδος, “ marriage.” ὥρμηται, " runs.
ὥρμηται, “ runs.”
ἢ καὶ πρὸ τούτου:
cf. vi. 52. 14.— ¿lúovτó, “strove to propitiate by sacrifices.”
11-13. πρότερον: vi. 44. — εἰ ... εἰπεῖν: for the sentiment, cf.
129. 24-7, 191. 8-9. Contrast Xen. An. iv. 5. 4. — 8' av: on vi.
76. 7.
15. ipòv: in Plato's time it was only an altar (Plato, Phaedr.
229). — åteλ¤óvτes: cf. vi. 105. 11.-It was beside the Ilissus,
which runs just south of Athens, that Orithyia was carried off
by Boreas as she was plucking flowers in spring-time. See this
subject exquisitely engraved on a signet-ring from Curium in the
Cesnola Collection.
15*
346
HERODOTUS.
VII. 190.
1. nóvo, "struggle," with the winds; cf. vi. 114. 2.— λéyovoɩ be-
longs with the principal, as well as subordinate clause; cf. 150. 15.
5-7. μεγάλως – χρηστή: emphatic separation. - θησαυρούς,
"treasure-chests."
-
9. ¿λλ' belongs rather to the partc. where the main thought
lies; on 171. 9. The thought runs, "But though he became very
rich by his finds, he was not fortunate in other respects;" cf. 233.
13.-péya: as vi. 24. 7.
10–11. v Auπevoa: for such periphrases, see vi. 86. 24-28, 128.
14, vii. 16. 26, 28. 13, 150. 2, 209. 15, 214. 2, 235. 5; with aor.
partc., 206. 9; with perfect partc., vi. 33. 4, 44. 7, vii. 119. 16,
196. 4.-kai тOÛTOV: as well as the rest of mankind. "There is
a skeleton in every closet;" on 46. 17.-Taidopóvos, "of killing
his son;" the word is poetic and somewhat vague, but seems to
intimate that Aminocles had unwittingly killed his son. The
whole conception here is imitated by Dion. Hal. Arch. iii. 21,
Horatius who slew his own sister. Cf. Hdt. i. 35.
VII. 191.
24. ἐπῆν: on 170. 22. κεκακωμένοισι: vi. 26. 10.
of
6-7. καταείδοντες γόησι, "singing incantations by the aid of
conjurers." For such attempts to control the wind, see Hm. 8
360-473; Aesch. Ag. 1417; Empedocles, in Diog. Laer. viii. 2;
Xen. Anab. iv. 5. 3; Verg. Aen. ii. 116.
66
9. Ekówασe: Longinus (De Subl. 43) stigmatizes this word as
undignified and low; as if we should say, was quite beat;"
this is from the standpoint of the Attic purist.
11. åρπaσdeíŋ úíò IIŋdéos: to become his bride. Among the
Protean forms she took to escape his grasp was that of the cuttle-
fish, whence the name of the promontory; on vi. 77. 3. The
story is related by Apollodorus, iii. 13. 4, Ovid Metamorph. xi.
229-65, and is a frequent subject in vase paintings.
VII. 192.
3–7. ô xelµàv ô πрŵтоs naturally means "the first storm," as if
each day were regarded as a separate storm, or the author were
thinking of the later storm which also brought disaster to the
Persian fleet (viii. 12, 13); but тò πрâтоv would be more natural.
—ὀλίγας τινάς: on vi. 73. 4.
NOTES.-VII. 190–196.
347
VII. 193.
3-4. voµížovтes, " employing."-Note is followed by both aor.
and plupf.; cf. Thuc. iii. 98. 1; Lysias xii. 53, xiii. 5; Plat. Prot.
310 C; on 100. 6.
6–7. ǎkpηv: not Sepias, but farther west, near the entrance to
the gulf. It was sometimes called Tisaion.— èπì: 31. 3.
9. Pherecydes says that Hercules was left at Aphetae, because
the Argo declared that she could not bear his weight. Accord-
ing to the prevailing legend he was left in Mysia, as he was
searching for his friend Hylas, who had been carried off by the
nymphs.
11–12. èπì, “for;" vi. 16. 12.—Tò: the golden.— åþýσeiv: S. 3.
VII. 194.
2-5. κws, "by chance."- Kúµns: sometimes Cyme, sometimes
Magnesia, is mentioned as the capital of the first or Ionian sa-
trapy; on vi. 42. 4.
8. For a similar charge Cambyses put Sisamnes to death,
flayed off his skin, and had it stretched upon the judge's seat;
then he appointed Sisamnes' son judge in his place and told him
to remember the seat he sat on (v. 25). The Persians taught
their children three things only (i. 136), iππevei kaì to§evei kai
ἀληθίζεσθαι: cf. i. 138.
9-12. ἄδικον δίκην ἐδίκασε: noticeable parechesis. λογιζόμενος :
on vi. 30, 10.-— тaxúтepа ǹ σopúτepa: when the two objects of
comparison are adjectives both are put in the comparative; H.
645.
14–16. µǹ: cf. 11. 3. The more usual expression is seen vi. 45.
6. ἔμελλε : for the sentiment see iii. 43: ἐκκομίσαι ἀδύνατον εἴη
ἀνθρώπῳ ἄνθρωπον ἐκ τοῦ μέλλοντος γίνεσθαι πρήγματος.- διαφυγών
čσeolar: a poetic periphrasis for the future perf. of attainment;
cf. Soph. Antig. 1067, O. T. 1146; on 190. 10.
VII. 195.
4-8. Пádov: in western Cyprus.-ràs: on vi. 41. 6.- årò: on
168.1.
VII. 196.
•
1-5. ὁὁ: on 185. 13. καὶ δὴ = ἤδη τριταίος, " on the third
day," after entering Thessaly; on vi. 106.3.—Mnλiéas: on 176.20.
10-11. πινόμενος: 21. 4. ὅστις: on vi. 13. 14.
348
HERODOTUS.
VII. 197.
3. oi after Zép§n: as 167. 12.-Aaþvoríov, “gluttonous," an
epithet derived from the human sacrifices demanded by his wor-
ship.
4. Athamas, king of Boeotian Thebes, had two children,
Phrixus and Helle, by his first wife, Nephele, whom he at length
divorced in order to marry Ino. The stepmother became jealous
of the elder children, and, in order to get rid of them, produced
a famine in the land by having the seed-corn secretly parched
before sowing, and then contrived to procure an oracle that the
god must be appeased by the sacrifice of Phrixus and Helle.
This was prevented by their being supplied by Nephele with the
golden-fleeced ram, which conveyed Phrixus safely to Colchis,
Helle having fallen on the way and perished in the Hellespont.
Later, Athamas removed to Thessalian Achaea, and was de-
manded as a sacrifice and purification of the land from plague
by the Laphystian Zeus, but was rescued by a son of Phrixus,
just arrived from Colchis, where his father had married and
prospered. The wrath of the god is mollified, and the political
death (ἔργεσθαι τοῦ πρυτανηίου) of the eldest of the ruling family
is substituted, under certain conditions, instead of actual death.
Such seems to be the meaning of the following obscure account.
5-6. &s, "how;" as lines 4, 11, 15, 16.— åélλovs, “ tasks.”
8-11. πρυτανήιου: on vi. 103. 15. ὅκως ἔξεισι : cf. 102. 11.
πρìv ǹ: on vi. 82. 7.— s r': for similar ambiguity see κaí Toɩ, 11.
4, μὴ δέ, 149. 6.
12. oĭXOVтo: No doubt their escape would be connived at. At
Athens the defendant in a murder case before the Areiopagus
could withdraw into banishment after the first speech.
14-15. Kateλ@óvτes, "in case they returned." The outlawed
often so returned after a lapse of time, relying upon various
hopes; cf. 213. 9.— ẻσtéλλovto, "they were conducted.”—¿§nyé-
ἐστέλλοντο,
οντο resumes ἔλεγόν, line 2.
16. ¿§ax¤eís: sc. Overaι. This seems the simplest way of re-
solving this perplexed passage.
22–25. évéßade: on 137. 7.—ãλơos: the ipòv of line 3.- óµoíws
kai: as 86. 10.
VII. 198.
1–4. Taûta tà: cf. vi. 13. 1, 123. 6. — ǎµπwτís, "ebb." The
word is derived from some such idea as that of Charybdis, Hm.
NOTES.—VII. 197–203.
349
μ 105-6: τρὶς μὲν γάρ τ' ἀνίησιν ἐπ᾽ ἤματι, τρὶς δ᾽ ἀναραβδεῖ δεινόν.
The tides in the Mediterranean seldom rise more than one or
two feet. The flatness of the coast in this region would make
them unusually perceptible.—åvà nâσav ηµépny, "every day;" cf.
184. 7, vi. 61. 19.
5. Tŷ µèv: about Trachis.— r dè: at Thermopylae.
8-11. lóvrɩ: on vi. 33. 2.- Sià: as 30. 5.- KÉЄTaɩ: on vi. 77. 3.
12. kaloμévo: with the poisoned Nessus robe sent him by De-
ianira.
VII. 199.
2–7. TOÚTOV: on vi. 22. 10.—kat': cf. 176. 8.— πλé¤pa: square
measure seems intended here, in which measurement the pleth-
rum is a little less than a quarter of an acre.—
— πρὸς μεσαμβρίην :
on 176. 13.
VII. 200.
10-11. The most celebrated of the Amphictyonies, or religious
leagues, met here every autumn (it has been commonly supposed)
under the protection of Demeter, and in the spring at Delphi
under that of Apollo. Some doubt has been thrown upon the
exactness of this statement. Under the supremacy of the Aeto-
lian League, the meetings were held at Delphi both spring and
autumn. (Cf. Bull. Corr. Hellénique, 1883, p. 413.) The league
comprised twelve tribes, and each state sent deputies, called pyla-
gori and hieromnemones. The pylagori formed the regular as-
sembly; the hieromnemones appear to have been a sort of stand-
ing committee, specially charged with the execution of decrees
and the care of the temples. Cf. 213. 8. Amphictyon is the epony-
mous hero of the league.
VII. 201.
5-8. The natives use the shorter word.-éxóvтwv—þepóvтwv :
variety, as vi. 19. 3–5.— tò ẻπì: on 113. 6.
VII. 203.
2-9. éπíkλntol: cf. 8. 3.—avroì, "independently;" without ap-
peal to the council at the Isthmus; see on 28. 2.—"Eλλnves: at
Thermopylae. —Sɩ': as vi. 4. 1. — πpoodókiμoɩ: vi. 6. 3. — πâσav
μépηv: as 198. 3, where the addition of åvà renders the expres-
sion more exact.-oo: the Locrians and Phocians.— ev quλaký:
ἐν φυλακῇ:
cf. 172. 11, 208. 9.— où leòv: the construction changes to the acc.
with the inf.; cf. 220. 3. For the thought, cf. Soph. Antig. 459;
Hm. ▲ 510; Hdt. vii. 56. 6.
350
HERODOTUS.
11-14. Tộ: on 46. 12.—kakòv, “misfortune;” cf. 46. 12, 49. 17
- ἐξ ἀρχῆς: on vi. 11. 1.— γινομένῳ: Hm. Y 128, η 198. μέγιστα :
10. 51. ὀφείλειν ἄν = ὀφείλοι ἄν, “it would be necessary;” cf.
150. 9.
VII. 204.
4-9. This is the genealogy of the elder house of kings (vi. 51);
that of the younger is given viii. 131, when Leotychides takes
command of the fleet. For its introduction here, see on vi. 14.
13.
VII. 205.
1-3. διξῶν : S. 1. ἀπελήλατο: cf. vi. 130. 8.
4. ἄπαιδος, “heirless;” cf. 61. 16; Hm. η
158. 7.
περὶ: on 37. 2.
64. - Δωριέος: on
8. καὶ δὴ καὶ after διότι is a change to the independent con-
struction; cf. 214. 10, vi. 123. 5, and Rehdantz Anab. vi. 5. 31.-—-
θυγατέρα: 239. 21.
10–12. KαTEσTEŵras, "the customary;" the king's bodyguard;
în vi. 56. 7.— Taîdes éóvtes: So that no family might altogether
perish; on vi. 86. 61.— ès . . . λoyiσáµevos, “when I reckoned up
λογισάμενος,
the entire number;" cf. 60. 1, 97. 10.
4.—ŐTL
13-15. σπουδήν : cf. 149. 4. ὅτι . . . μηδίζειν, " because medlism
was loudly charged against them;" cf. Thuc. i. 95. 3.
17. ἀπερέουσι: 14. 4.— ἐκ τοῦ ἐμφανέος, “openly.”
VII. 206.
34. καὶ οὗτοι : as vi. 51. 3. úñepßadλoµévovs, "delaying;" a
common Spartan failing; cf. vi. 86. 41, 106. 11.- Kápvela: the
great national Dorian festival in honor of Apollo, occupying nine
days in the latter part of August.-yáp: proleptic.
9. ὡς δὲ καὶκαὶ αὐτοὶ ἕτερα τοιαῦτα: strongly pleonastic; cf.
119. 1. — ἐνένωντο : S. 21. καὶ αὐτοὶ: as vi. 14. 2. - κατὰ τὠυτό
τούτοισι τοῖσι πρήγμασι : cf. 3. 2.— ἦν συμπεσοῦσα: on 190. 10.
VII. 207.
3-10. πέλας τῆς ἐσβολῆς: on vi. 77. 2. περισπερχεόντων, " be-
ing indignant."— ¿λíywv: as vi. 109. 2.
VII. 208.
24. εἰσὶ — ποιέοιεν : on vi. 3. 2. - ἡγεμόνας : proleptic; on vi
41. 12.
7-13. oû: with accent because postpositive and strongly em-
NOTES. VII. 203–212.
351
phasized; so especially in contrasts with μέν and δέ. - ἔσω-τοῦ
τείχεος : cf. 183. 7.— ἐμάνθανε: on 37. 10. — τὰς κόμας: The Spar-
tans had worn long hair ever since the battle of Thyrea, accord-
ing to i. 82.
2-3. Tò cóv: as vi. 50. 12.
Hm. ▲ 451, and on 237.13.
VII. 209.
ἀπολεόμενοί τε καὶ ἀπολέοντες : cf.
λέγοντα,
-8. ποιεύμενον: on vi. 13. 1.—πρότερόν: 101 seq.
10–12. yéλwrά, "a laughing-stock;" 105. 1.-λéyovтa, “when
telling about."-Construe as if тaûта тà πρηyμата тá πeρ: on vi.
13. 3.—¿µoì yàp : cf. 101. 15.-ȧywv, " effort," "endeavor."
14-15. ταῦτα: on vi. 105. 3.— ἔχων ἐστί: on 190. 10.
18-23. ὑπομενέει χεῖρας ἀντ.: on 101. 8.— καλλίστην: also with
Baoiλnínv: on vi. 45. 11.—TOσOÛTol, "so few;" often so, as if µó-
vov were in mind; cf. 173. 15.
24-5. χρᾶσθαι: on vi. 86. 30.— ἤν . . . λέγω : note the allitera-
tive effect.
VII. 210.
-11. ἐσέπεσον ἔπιπτον: on 13. 4. φερόμενοι, “ charging.
ἐπεσήισαν, “ took their places.”- μεγάλως προσπταίοντες: cf. vi.
45. 10.— ἄνθρωποι-ἄνδρες: on 8. 87.
VII. 211.
1-6. τρηχέως περιείποντο : cf. vi. 44. 12. — ἀθανάτους: cf. 83. 4.
is Sn, "expecting of course."— OûTOί Ye emphasize the irony more
οὗτοί
cuttingly. ἐφέροντο : 168. 23.
10-13. ἀξίως λόγου: on 139. 15. μάχεσθαι ἐξεπιστάμενοι, “ that
they knew well how to fight.”—ŏкws: on vi. 12. 3.— åλées .
- ὅκως:
Sneev, "they would all make a pretended flight."— For deúye-
δῆθεν,
σκον parallel with ἀποδεικνύμενοι, see ou vi. 13. 7. δῆθεν : on vi.
1.6.
14–18. âv: with the imperf. of repeated action; H. 835; G.
206; C. 494.- катаλаµßaνóμevoL, "when overtaken."- Construe
οὐδὲν τῆς ἐσόδου.— πειρώμενοι, " with all their efforts.”
VII. 212.
2. ȧvadρaμeîv EK тоû Oρóvov: imitated from Hm. Y 61, where
Aides is terrified at the earthquake produced by Posidon in
the theomachy, fearing lest the earth should yawn and disclose
his own hateful regions: δείσας δ᾽ ἐκ θρόνου ἆλτο καὶ ἴαχε μή οἱ
ὕπερθεν γαῖαν ἀναρρήξειε Ποσειδάων ἐνοσίχθων.
352
HERODOTUS.
VII. 213.
1. Απορέοντος: cf. vi. 134. 3.— ὅ τι χρήσηται : as vi. 52. 19.
3. ὡς δοκέων οἴσεσθαι: pleonastic for δοκέων οἴσεσθαι, οι ὡς
oiσóμevos: cf. Hm. V 430; Aristoph. Thes. 185.
•
·
6–9. Aakedaiμovíous: as the most prominent of the states and
of the Amphictyons; see 213. 13, and on vi. 72. 3.— IIvλayópwv :
on 200. 10. The word is usually first decl. in sing., second decl.
in pl.; cf. Strab. 420, ἑκάστη δ᾽ ἔπεμπε Πυλαγόραν
ἔθυον δὲ τῇ
Δήμητρι οἱ Πυλαγόροι. — Πυλαίην: sc. ἐκκλησίην. — συλλεγομένων :
cf. 145. 2, and on vi. 7. 3.— oi ȧpyúριov éπeкηpúxon, "a price was set
upon his head by proclamation." The preposition is repeated
with the phrase below, 214. 7.
12. ¿v toîσi ŏπtode λóyotσɩ: This promise has not been fulfilled.
•
VII. 214.
1-9. ἔστι .
λóyos: as 150. 2.- Kaρúσrios: cf. vi. 99. 5.— oi
εἴπαντες: on vi. 123. 6. — περιηγησάμενοι τὸ ὄρος τοῖσι Πέρσῃσι :
tò
the acc. is governed by the preposition, the dat. by the verb as
215. 6. At iv. 180 two accusatives are used.—Toûтo µèv: cor-
relative to τοῦτο δὲ. — τὸ ἀτρεκέστατον: cf. vi. 1. 8.
11. yàp implies: Yet there is nothing inherently improbable
in the other account, "for."-un: we should expect où here,
since Hdt. asserts that Onetes was a Carystian; but the whole
sentence is a sheer supposition in which ev bears a conditional
force; cf. ii. 35. 22.
12. ei... eïŋ, “in case he should prove (on investigation) to
have had much familiarity with the region." For the rare perf.
in protasis, see G. 202. 2; and for wµɩληêòs, Hdt. vii. 26. 10.
VII. 215.
2-4. κατεργάσασθαι : for the tense, see on 134. 13. περιχαρής :
cf. 14. 1.— τῶν ἐστρατήγεε: the Immortals; 83. περὶ λύχνων αφάς,
"about lamplight;" like our phrase, "early candlelight." For
position of λúxvwv, see on vi. 68. 9.
6-9. τότε: see 176. 19.— ἐν σκέπῃ: as 172. 11.-- ἔκ τε τόσου : on
vi. 84. 15. κατεδέδεκτο . Μηλιεῦσι, “ it had proved to be nowise
serviceable to the Malians;" i. e. they had not been able to gain
profit from their knowledge of the path by disclosing it to an
invading army. Stein would make the subject, ʼn éσßoλý.
NOTES.-VII. 213–220.
353
VII. 216.
4–8. 'Avóraιa: called by others Callidromus. — Aokpldwv: sc.
πολίων. — Μελάμπυγόν: originally an uncouth designation of
Hercules as the stoutest of heroes, roùs yàp daσeîs tàs πvyàs åv-
δρείους ἐνόμιζον. Κερκώπων: mischievous, monkeyish creatures,
dwarfish, thievish, and tricky, always found in connection with
Hercules, to whose genial helpfulness to humanity they stand as
counterfoil. Once happening upon him asleep by the Pass they
stole his weapons and paraded up and down in mimicry of the
hero. When he awoke he caught and tied them head down-
ward over a pole, which he slung over his back, and set out upon
his travels. In this position they had opportunity to observe his
characteristic of μeλáµñvyos, and were reminded of a prophecy
which warned them to beware of a person of this complexion.
They burst out laughing so loudly that Hercules inquired the
reason, and was himself so diverted by it that he released them
at once. This scene was carved upon the metope of the archaic
temple of Selinus in Sicily, and a poem attributed to Homer de-
scribed the pranks of the Cercopes.
5, τε .
VII. 217.
kaì: co-ordination; on vi. 41. 5.—oi: demonstrative;
on vi. 61. 25.—¿yévovтo: on vi. 14. 3.
11. vπodežάμevoɩ Aewvídŋ, “having given their promise to
Leonidas."
VII. 218.
1-5. ȧvaẞaívovTES Tò ŏpos: Construction as below, line 18; on
vi. 134. 15.—vnveµín: a common characteristic of dawn.— þúλ-
Awv of previous years.—åvá Te: as 156.5.
τε:
10-14, ὁποδαπός: S. 1.— ἐπιστάμενοι, “ believing.
16–18. oi dè: on vi. 3. 5. — katéßaivov тò õpos: cf. Hm. σ 206,
a 330.
VII. 219.
2–11. tòv . . . Bávarov: on 16. 8. — èπì Sè, "and besides."
TρíTο, "in the third place;" on vi. 106. 3.— oùk ëwv: cf. 143. 16.
·Kaтà móλis, “to their several cities."
VII. 220.
3–6. kndóµevos, “being distressed.”— exa: changed construc-
tion, as 203. 9. ἐκλιπεῖν: on 104. 22. — ταύτῃ . . . εἰμι, “ nay,
• “nay,
·
354
HERODOTUS.
rather this way do I incline most in my opinion, namely."
Taútη: as 143, 13, but prospective. TλEîσTÓs: as i. 120; cf.
158. 1.
9–10. µévovti Sè aỷтoû, “but for him in case he stayed there."
- kλéos péya ¿deíTETO: compare the following epitaph by Simon-
ides (95) composed for the dead at Thermopylae:
Εἰ τὸ καλῶς θνήσκειν ἀρετῆς μέρος ἐστὶ μέγιστον,
ἡμῖν ἐκ πάντων τοῦτ᾽ ἀπένειμε τύχη·
Ελλάδι γὰρ σπεύδοντες ἐλευθερίην περιθεῖναι
κείμεθ᾽ ἀγηράντῳ χρώμενοι εὐλογίῃ.
-λeíπETO: The construction draws close to direct discourse rep-
resenting the thoughts of Leonidas, but the impf. stands for the
present of actual soliloquy; for such a present, see 235. 16, vi.
109.26-9.
12. αὐτίκα κατ' ἀρχὰς: as 88. 9; for this with ἐγειρομένου, see
203. 11.
13. ἀνάστατον: 118. 4, 56. 7. - γενέσθαι: The aor. after a verb
signifying to give an oracular response occurs occasionally, as
after verbs of commanding.
16–18. 8': on vi. 77. 9.— eúpvxópolo: Hm. v 414.— ǎotu épikudès :
the synizesis is so unprecedented that many write 'pikudès.
Περσείδῃσι : cf. 150. 6.- πέρθεται: on vi. 82. 11.— τὸ μὲν : sc. πέρ-
θεται.
او
αν
19–22. Baorλî: poetic contraction.— oùpos: cf. 141. 16.— tòv :
sc. Πέρσην. — ἀντιβίην: Hm. Φ 226. Ζηνός: cf. 56. 6. — σχήσεσθαι,
πρίν: Hm. P 503. πρὶν without ὤν: on vi. 82. 7. τῶνδ' . . . δά-
σηται, “ ]
"he shall have divided in twain the one or the other of
these completely."-Távra: with repov: cf. 197. 15, Hm. 21.
There is reference to Leonidas, 238. 3; but the city also is per-
sonified, as 140. 7.
23–26. taûtá te émɩdeyóµevov : It is probable that Leonidas had
determined upon sacrificing himself for his country before leav-
ing Sparta; cf. 205. 10. According to Plutarch (De Malig. Hdt.
32), he gave his wife instructions for her conduct in widowhood,
and funeral games were celebrated in his honor before his de-
parture.— åñoñéµa: return to indirect discourse dependent on
πλεῖστός εἰμι. — διενειχθέντας, “ differing.” οἴχεσθαι τοὺς οἰχομέ-
vous: on 175. 7.
VII. 221.
3. Ôs ELTETO: Armies were habitually accompanied by profession-
NOTES.-VII. 220–223.
355
al soothsayers; even Mardonius had a renegade Greek to deter-
mine the omens (ix. 37); cf. ix. 33, 94; Xen. Anab. i. 7. 18, Cyr. i. 6. 2.
4-6. тà ávékalev: vi. 35. 4.- Melampus was a famous seer, who
won the hand of Pero, the sister of Nestor, for his brother, as re-
lated by Hm.. 225 seq.—TOûTOV: epanalepsis.-άπожéµπwν: im-
ἀποπέμπων:
perf. partc. of attempted action.
VII. 222.
1–2. oixovtó te ȧTLÓνTES: the partc. describes the manner of de-
parture; vi. 97. 2, vii. 218. 13, 228. 3.
4-6. ἀέκοντες καὶ οὐ βουλόμενοι: on vi. 96. 5. — ἐν ὁμήρων λόγῳ
TOLEúμevos: cf. vi. 19. 14. "Plutarch (De Malig. Hdt. 33) severe-
ly criticises this statement of Herodotus, and on very plausible
grounds. It seems probable that the Thebans remained, but re-
mained by their own offer-being citizens of the anti-Persian
party, as Diodorus represents them to have been, or perhaps be-
cause it may have been hardly less dangerous for them to retire
with the Peloponnesians than to remain, suspected as they were
of medism. But when the moment of actual crisis arrived, their
courage not standing so firm as that of the Spartans and Thes-
pians, they endeavored to save their lives by taking credit for
medism, and pretending to have been forcibly detained by Leoni-
das." Grote, Hist. Greece, Part II. Chap. XL. The Thespians
here play the same part as the Plataeans at Marathon; vi. 108.
-
VII. 223.
14. ἡλίου: cf. 54. 5. — ἀγορῆς πληθώρην: usually πλήθουσαν
ȧyopáv, in Attic; the time from 9 to 12 A.M. nearly. For the
position of κov µádíσta, see on vi. 52. 32.— σvvтoµwтépη, “more
direct."
8-11. ἐπὶ: cf. 146. 11. — ἐς τὸ εὐρύτερον: probably where the
pass opens towards Trachis.—Tò µÈv . . . ɵáXOVTO, "for the ram-
μὲν ἐμάχοντο,
part formed by the wall was habitually under guard, while those
who went forth during each of the preceding days into the nar-
rows fought there."
12–21. wλýteï woλλoì: as vi. 44. 12.-The change of subject is
sudden and unexpected; cf. line 18 aud vi. 30. 3.— úπ' åλλýλwv :
by their own comrades. There is no proper reciprocity here,
any more than in the aλλŋλopɑyín of iii. 25; cf. Thuc. ii. 70, and
Donaldson, New Cratyl. § 174. — παραχρεόμενοί τε καὶ ἀτέοντες,
“with reckless and frantic desperation.”— åtéOVTES: Hm. Y 332.
356
HERODOTUS.
VII. 224.
7. Forty years later the remains of Leonidas were removed
to Sparta and buried near the agora. Upon the tomb was
erected a pillar upon which was inscribed the names of all the
three hundred, where they were still to be read in the time of
Pausanias (iii. 14. 1).
9-14. ἐν δὲ δὴ καὶ: as vi. 11. 4. — οίκον: property. — ἐπέδωκε,
"he gave in dowry;" Hm. I 148.— µoúvns: constructio ad sensum,
as þíλe tékvov, Hm. o 509; cf. Eur. Suppl. 13, Tro. 735; Hm. ( 157.
VII. 225.
3-9. καὶ Λακεδαιμονίων . . . πολλός: Note the hexameter line;
on 178. 9.— σuveotýkee: on vi. 29. 3, 108. 17.—µéxpɩ oû, “until.”
·évleûtev ňồn: cf. vi. 76. 5.—thovтo, "they posted themselves;"
ἵζοντο,
cf. vi. 5. 14.
11. Aéwv: Simonides composed the following epitaph for this
monument:
Θηρῶν μὲν κάρτιστος ἐγώ, θνατῶν δ᾽, ὃν ἐγὼ νῦν
φρουρῶ, τῷδε τάφῳ λάϊνος ἐμβεβαώς.
[ἀλλ᾽ εἰ μὴ θυμόν γε Λέων ἐμὸν οὔνομά τ᾽ εἶχεν,
οὐκ ἂν ἐγὼ τύμβῳ τῷδ᾽ ἐπέθηκα πόδας.]
12-14. ènì, "in honor of;" cf. 146. 11.— σþéas: on vi. 52. 32.—
ἐτύγχανον: sc. αἱ μάχαιραι. — χερσὶ καὶ στόμασι : Longinus (De Subl.
38) regards this as an extravagant hyperbole, but commends it
as springing naturally from the circumstances. Yet it is doubt-
ful if Hdt. is hyperbolical here. Cicero says of the Spartan youth
(Tusc. Disp. v. 27), adolescentium greges Lacedaemone vidimus ipsi
incredibili contentione certantes pugnis, calcibus, unguibus, morsu
denique. See also Livy, on the battle of Cannae, xxii. 51.
16-17. περιελθόντες περισταδόν: only stronger than such ex-
pressions as 22. 2.
VII. 226.
3-4. Tòv daoì, "and they say that he." πρὶν ἢ συμμίξαί: on
2.5.- TEU: on vi. 5. 8.
7-11. Tòv dè: resuming line 3.
ἀλογίῃ: 208. 16.
πάντα,
“nothing but.”— kaì oỷk:
on vi. 96. 5.
VII. 228.
1. Capleîσi: for the initial aspirate, cf. vi. 103. 17. — avtov
NOTES.—VII. 224–228.
357
Taúry: on the hillock, to which all the other dead were also
brought by order of Xerxes, according to viii. 25.
3. уρáµµата, “an epitaph." Hdt. appears to have wrongly re-
ypáµµata,
garded this inscription as erected to the dead there, since he says
(viii. 25) that they were four thousand. This the inscription does
not say, and only three thousand one hundred, exclusive of He-
lots, came from the Peloponnesus originally (202).
4-5. These lines are in the elegiac verse habitually used for
epitaphs, and consist of a dactylic hexameter alternating with
the so-called elegiac pentameter, composed of two feet, either
dactyls or spondees, and a long syllable, followed by two dactyls
and a long syllable. This is an early modification of the hex-
ameter, and the vehicle of much of the gnomic poetry of the
Lyric Period, and imitated by Tibullus, Propertius, and Ovid.-
μυριάσιν τριηκοσίαις: an exaggeration even of the numbers given
by Hdt. for the fighting force on land and sea.— Πελοποννάσου,
TÉTOPES: Doric forms.
8-9. This is the most famous of the epitaphs, and has been
often translated. — §ńµaσi, “behests."
ῥήμασι, "behests." Later authors give the
reading Telóμevoɩ voμíμois, which is translated by Cicero (Tusc.
πειθόμενοι νομίμοις,
Disp. i. 42):
Dic, hospes, Spartae nos te hic vidisse jacentes,
Dum sanctis patriae legibus obsequimur.
11-14. Meyloría: Doric genitive. — oùk ětλŋ, “did not deign."
15-16, ἔξω ἢ = πλὴν ἤ: cf. vi. 5. 15. ἐπίγραμμα limits ἐπικοσ-
μnσavтes as cognate accusative, in rather free construction.
17. Simonides of Ceos (556-468 B.C.) was the poet-laureate of
the time, composer in a great variety of measures, and an inti-
mate at the courts of the Pisistratidae, Aleuadae, Scopadae, and
Hiero of Syracuse. He was the author not only of the three epi-
taphs here cited, but of other noble tributes to the heroes of
these wars. The following ode of his composition is unsur-
passed for grandeur of diction and elevation of sentiment:
Τῶν ἐν Θερμοπύλαις θανόντων
εὐκλεὴς μὲν ἁ τύχα, καλὸς δ᾽ ὁ πότμος,
βωμὸς δ᾽ ὁ τάφος, πρὸ γόων δὲ μνάστις, ὁ δ᾽ οἶκτος ἔπαινος·
ἐντάφιον δὲ τοιοῦτον οὔτ᾽ εὐρώς
οὔθ᾽ ὁ πανδαμάτωρ ἀμαυρώσει χρόνος.
ἀνδρῶν δ᾽ ἀγαθῶν ὅδε σηκὸς οἰκέταν εὐδοξίαν
358
HERODOTUS.
Ἑλλάδος εἵλετο· μαρτυρεῖ δὲ καὶ Λεωνίδας
ὁ Σπάρτας βασιλεύς, ἀρετᾶς μέγαν λελοιπώς
κόσμον ἀέναόν τε κλέος.
VII. 229.
24. παρεόν : cf. 230. 3 ; on vi. 82. 2.— κοινῷ λόγῳ χρησαμένοισι:
synonymous with ὁμοφρονήσασι : cf. line 8. ἀποσωθῆναι ἐς Σπάρτ
™ηv, "to return in safety to Sparta ;" cf. 230. 1.— µeµetiµévoɩ: as
vi. 1. 2.
-8. παρεόν . epanalepsis. SieveLxlévтas: as 220. 25.
10–12. avròv: Eurytus.— Tòv €ïdwra: Greek heavy armed men
were regularly accompanied by one slave at least. How many
followed the Spartans here is unknown (cf. viii. 25); at Platacae
each was attended by seven.-- TòV µèv
τὸν μὲν . . . φεύγοντα: on vi. 75. 11.
13-14. ἐσπεσόντα: as middle of ἐκβάλλω : on vi. 22. 13. λιπο-
ʊxéovτa, “being faint-hearted;" in this sense also Soph. Fr. 440.
—λειφθῆναι: on 153. 7.
-
15. ἀλγήσαντα : i. e. ὀφθαλμιεῦντα. ἀλγήσαντα is the reading
of almost all editors. Stein's advocacy of åλoyńσavra is desper-
ate, as shown by his altered explanations in the various editions.
For the acc. after ei, see on vi. 52. 25.
16–17. Tv Kouồn”, “the return.”—Sokéev: on 24. 1. Upon
this the remainder of the sentence depends.-#рoσléolai: cf.
11. 4.
•
L
18–19. vuvì: the single example of the deictic in Hdt.— Toû
δὲ . πpopáσios, “but the other availing himself of the same
pretext," which Eurytus had but scorned. For the sense of
èxoµévou, see vi. 94. 6; and for its position, vi. 41. 10.— oùk—§è :
on 96. 9.
VII. 231.
3–6. ¿tɩµíŋy, “infamy." Atimia at Athens was a forfeiture of
the protection of the laws and almost all the rights of a citizen.
At Sparta the punishment was dependent upon public opinion
rather than law, and is here described for this particular case.-
ýτíμwTo: on vi. 110. 3.— ô τpéσas," the craven." The feeling with
which this was regarded at Sparta is summed up in the line of
Tyrtaeus (11. 14), τρεσσάντων δ᾽ ἀνδρῶν πᾶσ᾽ ἀπόλωλ' ἀρετή. Yet
in the case of Aristodemus, Vergil's aphorism was true, Quondam
etiam victis redit in praecordia virtus (Aen. ii. 367).—åvéλaße,
"effaced." He died after performing the most desperate deeds
of valor, but received no public honors after his death, because
NOTES.-VII. 228–235.
359
the Spartans said that he manifestly courted death in his desire
to efface the stain upon him (ix, 71).
VII. 233.
8-13. τῶν λόγων: as 104. 4.
μηδίζουσι-ἀπικοίατο: on vi. 3. 2.
μετέπειτα : at the
The Thebans were
—ὥστε: on vi. 5. 5. οὐ μέντοι : cf. 190. 9.
16-18. σтíɣμата: acc. cognate; cf. 35. 2.
opening of the Peloponnesian war, B.C. 431.
introduced by night into Plataeae through the agency of a citizen
of the place for the purpose of revenge on some of his enemies
but the Plataeans, rallying to arms during the night, slew nearly
all the party (Thuc. ii. 2 seq.).
VII. 234.
34. τεκμαίρομαι δὲ τῇ ἀληθείῃ, “ and I judge by thy truthful-
ness.'
""
7-8. Observe the alliteration.
15-16. où
their counsels."
βουλευμάτων, “ for thou knowest the results of
VII. 235.
;
34. ei áπooteíλelas may be construed as 5. 10, or may be re-
garded as an answer to the question of 234. 13.
5–6. čoti étikelµévn: on 190. 10. Cythera is off the southern
coast.— Chilo was included among the Seven Wise Men, and the
maxims, γνῶθι σεαυτόν and μηδὲν ἄγαν, were accredited to him.
He was contemporary with the father of Pisistratus (i. 59). His
fear in relation to Cythera was realized in the Peloponnesian
war when the island was seized by the Athenians under Nicias,
and the Lacedemonians were so harassed by continual incur-
sions that they were glad to conclude the peace of Nicias in 421
B.C.
8. μᾶλλον: as 50. 7.
ὑπερέχειν : cf. Hm. v 93.
12–13. poßeóvтwv: active imperative, with subject to be sup-
plied from véas, line 4. Note the contrast with poßeóµevos pre-
ceding, and see on 22. 4, 237. 13. παροίκου . . . οἰκηίου, “ if they
have a war of their own close by their doors;" on 19. 5.— Selvoì
Govτaí: proleptic personal construction for the impersonal, as i.
155; cf. vii. 157. 18.
2.
16. йon, "at once."- μoûvov, "by itself."
17-20. προσδόκα-προσδέκεο: variety.— συνομοσάντων : cf. 148.
360
HERODOTUS.
VII. 236.
6–11. kai yàp dǹ kaì: cf. vi. 108. 3.— xaípovoɩ: on vi. 27. 1.—
plovéovoɩ—σtuyéovoɩ: on 16. 12. For the thought, see peóvos
ἀρχῆθεν ἐμφύεται ἀνθρώπῳ, iii. 80; Thuc. iii. 84. εἰ ἀποπέμψεις :
on vi. 9. 20.—yívovтaι: on vi. 109. 26.
12-13. δυσμεταχείριστός: cf. 9. 30. ἀρχὴν: on 9. 26.
17-18. γνώμην ἔχω μὴ ἐπιλέγεσθαι, “ I hold to the purpose not
to concern myself about;" for the thought, see 50. 3.-éπidéye-
σθαι: on vi. 41. 10. στήσονται : 9. 21.
19–22. avtoì éwUTôv: a frequent parechesis, here ingeniously
made by the postponement of πέρι: cf. 49. 19.— ἀκεῦνται = ἀκέ-
σονται : it sustains the figure in τρώμα: cf. vi. 16. 4.
VII. 237.
5-12. κεῖνό: on 16. 4.— ὅκως: on 159. 5.— ἐκ, “by.”— τῷ ἐόντι,
"by the fact.”— rân σɩyî, “by his silence," when he ought to ad-
vise and warn.— åσтoû: for variety; cf. Eur. Med. 223-4.- €ử • • •
ei .
ávýkoɩ, “unless he should have attained to an exalted pitch of
virtue;" a very Aristides; cf. 9. 36, vi. 86. 14.
12-15. εὐμενέστατον: on 10. 67. συμβουλευομένου-συμβουλεύ-
σELE: the active is to give advice, the middle to ask it. For
such juxtaposition of contrasted voices, see 209. 3, 235. 11-12.-
πepì... Keλeúw, "as regards evil-speaking against Demaratus,
περὶ κελεύω,
touching one who is my guest-friend (I mean), I charge every
one for the future to refrain." For Tép in this sense, see 102.
14. The second clause enlarges upon the first epanaleptically;
but there is great variety of reading here.— ěxeσdaí: cf. vi. 85. 15.
-Tuva: on vi. 9. 14.— Tôn XotTou; on vi. 12. 20.
VII. 238.
48. δηλά: on vi. 13. 7.— ἐν δὲ καὶ : vi. 11. 4. οὐ γὰρ ἄν: on vi.
50.9.— Cambyses had the body of Amasis exhumed, flogged,
goaded, and burned; and Artaxerxes had the head and hand of
Cyrus the younger cut off, and the body crucified.-Tuâv: cf.
181, 106.
VII. 239.
1. "Avelμ: cf. 137. 22.- ¿keîσe: i. e. 220. 10.— è§éλɩπe, “it broke
off."
79. τὸ οἰκὸς: cf. 103. 16. — συμμάχεται: on 187. 17, vi. 37. 10.
κатaɣaíρwv, "in derision;" compare the conduct of his own
enemy, vi. 67. 7.
NOTES.-VII. 236-239.
361
14. The writing-tablet was called Seλtíöv Síπruxov because of
its shape, and its having two leaves that were folded together so
that the wax within would not be harmed.
17-18. κεινὸν, " blank.” πρήγμα: cf. 147. 9.
22–4. ¿πippaoleioa avrý: See v. 51 for another example of her
quickness and sagacity at the early age of eight or nine, when
she prevented her father from being bribed by Aristagoras.—
avτý: Phaeacians, ŋ 73.—-étedé§avto, “read.”
16
GREEK INDEX.
ἀκούω : vi. 117. 10.
ἀκούω ἄριστα: vi. 86. 13.
ἀλλά: vi. 77. 9.
ἄλλος: vi. 129. 15.
åµà: vi. 138. 24.
ἀμελέω: vii. 163. 7.
ἀμφί: vi. 62. 6.
av: vi. 82. 7, 98. 18, 124. 4, vii.
103. 24, 126. 7, 139. 16, 139.
21, 176. 23, 211. 14.
ává: vi. 24. 3, vii. 184. 7.
|
εἰ δὲ μή : vi. 56. 5.
அ
εἴ κως: vi. 52. 15.
εἴρομαι: vii. 147. 16.
ék: vi. 24. 1, 26. 10.
ἑκών τε εἶναι: vii. 104. 12.
év: vi. 33. 5, 74. 8.
ἐπείτε : vi. 9. 7.
éπí: vi. 27. 11, 74. 5, 89. 12, 98.
6, 111. 14, vii. 1. 10, 10. 39, 50.
7, 146. 9, 193. 11, 225. 12.
ἐπιβάτης: vi. 12. 5.
από: vi. 25. 5, 26. 10, 27. 9, 91. 4, ἐπιλέγομαι: vi. 9. 8.
vii. 168. 1.
apa: vii. 35. 10.
ἀρχήν: vi. 33. 16.
äte: vi. 5. 5.
αὖτις : vi. 75. 10.
aúrós: vi. 52. 40, vii. 28. 1.
αὐτοῦ : vi. 30. 7, 72. 5.
αὐτοῦ ταύτῃ: vi. 16. 5.
βοηθέω: vii. 158. 10.
yáp: vi. 5. 6, 50. 9.
yé: vi. 124. 2, vii. 9. 20.
ἐπίπαν: vi. 46. 12.
ἐπίσταμαι: vii. 172. 13.
ἐπ᾽ ᾧ τε: vi. 65. 3.
és : vi. 16. 7, 69. 3, vii. 6. 4, 144. 2.
és ő: vi. 24. 6.
ἔστε: vii. 128. 7.
ἐστί: vi. 36. 11.
cow ès: vi. 33. 9.
exo: vi. 2. 1, 12. 13, 26. 4, 52. 13,
139. 10.
hồn: vi. 76. 5, 105. 11.
ἥκω: vii. 157. 11.
γίνομαι: vi. 5. 9, 13. 1, 14. 3, 18. ἢν μή περ: vi. 57. 23.
6, 25. 3, 33. 3, 60. 4.
dé: vi. 16. 4, vii. 141. 23.
δείκνυμι : vi. 27. 10.
δῆθεν : vi. 1. 6.
diá: vi. 31. 9, 38. 1, 63. 15, 118.
13.
διαβατήρια: vi. 76. 8.
διότι: vi. 86. 24.
d' av: vi. 76. 7.
Béλw: vi. 37. 10, vii. 10. 46.
ἰθέως: vi. 17. 5.
ισόκωλα: vii. 158. 20.
kai: vi. 5. 4, 21. 7, 24. 5, vii. 145.
7, 158. 13.
καὶ δή: vii. 10. 21.
kai ős: vii. 18. 2.
364
GREEK INDEX.
Kåv: vii. 129. 26.
KATά: vi. 79. 6, 97. 7, 113. 4.
κείμαι: vi. 7.2.
κύκλος : vi. 61. 10.
λόγος : vi. 19. 3.
λόγος αἱρέει : vi. 124. 4.
µáλa: vi. 3. 5, vii. 11. 12.
μᾶλλον: vi. 12. 19.
μέγιστον: vi. 66. 5.
μév: vi. 95. 13.
μέντοι : vii. 8. 68.
μerá: vi. 38. 1, vii. 12. 7, 16. 25.
μεταξύ : vii. 33. 1.
µý: vi. 56. 4, 66. 10, 94. 7, vii.
102. 3, 214. 11.
μηδέ: vi. 22. 6.
μὴ δέ: vii. 149. 6.
μὴ
µǹ où: vi. 9. 5, 9. 7, 11. 12.
μív: vi. 82. 1.
νεώτερα : vi. 2. 8.
vûv: vii. 50. 19.
vuví: vii. 229. 18.
ó dé: vi. 3. 5, 52. 29.
ola: vi. 5. 5, 12. 22.
οἱ ἄλλοι : vi. 57. 1.
οἷός τε : vi. 9. 7.
οὔτε : vi. 1. 5, 73. 6.
OûTOS: vi. 22. 10, 27. 3, 27. 7, 40.
1, 51.3, 108. 30, 127. 6, 127. 23,
vii. 5. 14, 11. 19.
Tаρá: vi. 26. 10, vii. 20. 6.
πâs: vi. 47. 10, vii. 50. 3, 226. 7.
πατροῦχος: vi. 57. 22.
πειράομαι: vi. 5. 7.
πέρι: vi. 4. 4.
πλήν : vi. 137.4.
πρήσσω : vi. 45. 2.
πрív: vi. 22. 4, 45. 8, 82. 7, vii. 8.
54.
πρὸ πολλοῦ: vii. 130. 7.
| πρós: vi. 26. 10, 44. 5, 45. 6, vii.
2. 10, 35. 7.
πротεроν: vi. 91. 6, vii. 54. 7.
πυνθάνομαι : vi. 85. 1.
σúv: vi. 8. 2, 94. 1.
Té: vi. 1. 5, 105. 4, vii. 4. 4, 10.
14, 10. 18, 24. 3.
Tìs: vi. 5. 8, 9. 14, 37. 12, 73. 4.
ὕπαρχος: vi. 42. 3.
ὑπό : vi. 44. 8, 72. 7.
χράω : vi. 19. 1.
őkws: vi. 12. 3, 85. 12, vii. 159. 5. xpnμa: vii. 188. 18.
ὅμως: vii. 165. 2.
ős: vi. 2. 5, vii. 18. 2.
ὧδε : vi. 61. 10.
os av dé: vii. 8. 99; C. I. A. iii. &s: vi. 14. 15.
73. 29, 74. 14.
où: vi. 9. 20, vii. 9. 10, 16. 28, 46.
9, 46. 13, 101. 10.
o: vii. 208. 7.
ås: vi. 2. 2, 4. 3, 28. 7, 31. 5, 49.
8, vii. 24. 1, 24. 6, 119. 16, 161.
6, 193. 3.
☎σTE: vi. 5. 5, 5. 10, 9. 7, 27. 8.
ENGLISH INDEX.
Absolute, infinitive, vi. 30. 2
accusative, 72. 4.
Adjunct of participle, vi. 11. 1;
when article precedes, 85. 3.
Aeschylus, vi. 1. 4, 8. 4, 11. 14,
27. 11, 44. 15, 76. 8, 112. 14,
114. 4, vii. 5. 9, 8. 6, 8. 21, 8. |
26, 8. 28, 8. 92, 10. 24, 10. 55,
12. 7, 13. 6, 16. 6, 18. 6, 18. 15,
35. 3, 35. 6, 49. 17, 56. 8, 116.
3, 140. 10, 147. 16, 191. 6.
Alliteration, vi. 47. 9, 72. 2, 77.
13, 107. 14, vii. 37. 11, 175. 7,
209. 24, 234. 7.
Ambiguity, vii. 197. 8.
|
|
predicate, 123. 6; proleptic
use of, vii. 6. 13; with prepo-
sitional phrases, 113. 6; in
predicate, 142. 8.
Assimilation of mode, vi. 52. 22.
Asyndleton, vi. 3. 8, 21. 7, 52. 12.
Atarneus, vi. 4. 2.
Athamas, story of, vii. 197. 4.
Atimia, vii. 231. 3.
Attraction, vi. 22. 7, 36. 9, 118. 3,
vii. 145. 18.
Attributive, position of, vi. 22.
3; compound, vii. 16. 8; in
predicate position, 37. 2.
Amphictyonic council, vii. 200. Blindness produced by seeing a
10.
Anacoluthon, vii. 177. 1.
phantom, vi. 117. 9.
Brauronian festival, vi. 138. 4.
Anaphora, vi. 9. 22, 43. 16, vii. 9. Burial among Persians, vii. 10,
12, 18. 9, 158. 18.
Anteoccupatio, vi. 124. 1.
Aorist, inceptive, vi. 23. 8; of
a definite period, vii. 4. 4;
gnomic, 10. 55; after a verb
signifying to give oracle, 220.
13.
Apodosis with dé: vi. 52. 29.
Appositive to personal pronoun,
vi. 84. 9.
Archons, how chosen, vi. 109. 3.
Article, omitted, vi. 21. 6, 127.
23; triple, 28. 7; with ad-
verbs, 35. 4; repeated be-
fore noun, 46. 10, 57. 1; as
demonstrative, 61. 25; and
partc. with ouтos, 103. 18; as
|
83.
Case-construction influenced by
synonym, vi. 12. 19.
Causal clauses, vii. 2. 10.
Cercopes, vii. 216. 4.
Chorographic genitivc,vi. 22.11.
Coincident partc., vi. 9. 14, 29.
11, 65. 9.
Composition, three styles of, vii.
8. 6.
Conditional alternatives, vii.
159. 8.
Constructio ad sensum, vii. 224.
9.
Contests, love of Greeks for, vii.
187. 17.
366
ENGLISH INDEX.
Contrast, and juxtaposition, vii. | Final clauses, construction of,
22. 4; of tenses, 29. 13; of
prepositions, 160. 4.
Co-ordination, vi. 41. 5, 46. 5.
Crasis, vi. 61. 21.
Cuttle-fish, vi. 77. 2.
Dactylic close, vii. 11. 24;
rhythm, 47. 4.
Darius, character of, vii. 4. 6.
Dative, of possessor, vi. 103. 21;
in attributive position, vii.
169. 6.
Delphic oracle, vi. 19. 8; in-
spired by Hesiod, 86. 49; in-
clining towards Xerxes, vii.
163. 10.
Demonstrative, prospective and
retrospective, vi. 10. 2; deictic
without article, vii. 49. 1.
Diekplous, vi. 12. 4.
Dionysius distinguishes three
styles of composition, vii. 8. 6. |
Elegiac verse, vii. 228. 4.
Elision, vi. 27. 1.
Emphasis, from post-position,
vi. 3. 2; by position before
conjunction, 11. 8; by posi-!
tion, 39. 5.
Enclitic pronouns gravitate tow-
ards beginning of clause, vi.
34. 12.
Envy, prevalence of, vii. 236. 6.
Epanalepsis, vi. 7. 7, 43. 20, 79.7.
Epanastrophe, vi. 21. 7, vii. 13.
4.
Euripides, vi. 12. 11, 12. 13, 37.
10, 40. 1, 41. 10, 43. 1, 86. 19,
108. 10, 117. 9, 124. 4, 129. 8,
129. 21, 138. 24, vii. 3. 9, 5. 10,
8. 6, 8. 26, 9. 30, 10. 21, 10. 60,
11. 22, 38. 2, 39. 5, 46. 7, 46. 17,
47. 4, 50. 3, 54. 4, 61. 16, 101.
4, 102. 5, 111. 2, 141. 10, 156.
1, 160. 6, 163. 7, 165. 2, 224. 9,
237.5.
in Hdt., vii. 176. 23.
Finite verb co-ordinate with
partc., vi. 13. 7.
Future in conditions, vi. 9. 20.
Genitive absolute for greater
independence, vi. 4. 3; rare
position of partc., 43. 1.
Genitive, between preposition
and its case, vi. 68. 9; parti-
tive, between article and ad-
jective, vii. 156. 11.
Gnomic, aorist, vii. 10. 55, 172.
16; perfect, 16. 20.
Gorgo, her sagacity, vii. 239. 22.
Grain from the Pontus, vii. 147.
11.
Hermogenes, vi. 5. 6, 7. 7, 21. 7,
37. 10, 39. 7, 61. 10, vii. 8. 82,
35. 5, 46. 4, 178. 9, 188. 8.
Herodotus, in portraiture of
character, dramatic, vi. 11. 5;
apologizes for the Samians,
13. 5; rhetorical exaggera-
tion of, 13. 9, 112. 11; di-
vision of his history, 19. 3;
his belief in dreams, 27. 1;
seeks episodes, 34. 3; his
impartiality, 61. 3; belief in
divine retribution, 75. 18;
graphic rather than precise,
112. 2; his humor, 125. 20;
exuberance of expression, vii.
8. 60; forgets to speak in
character, 10. 83; parodied
by Aristophanes, 14. 8; usu-
ally cheerful, 46. 17; often in-
troduces female characters,
99. 13; ready to praise bar-
barians, 107. 14; hesitates to
express his opinion, 152. 1;
important principle in criti-
cising him, 152. 11; mistakes
of, in arithmetic, 187. 12; does
not fulfil a promise, 213. 12.
ENGLISH INDEX.
367
Hipparchus, his extreme care in
preserving the purity of the
poems gathered under his di-
rection, vii. 6. 19.
170. 24, 171. 5, 172. 9, 173. 4,
176. 23, 188. 18, 191. 6, 203. 9,
203. 11, 205. 4, 209. 2, 212. 2,
213. 3, 218. 16, 220. 16, 220. 19,
221. 4, 223, 12, 224. 9, 235. 8.
Hyperbaton, vi. 5. 6, 11. 5, 22.
10.
Homer, vi. 1. 1, 2. 1, 2. 9, 3. 5, 4.
5, 5. 5, 5. 7, 7. 7, 9. 10, 9. 14,
11. 4, 11. 5, 11. 13, 11. 14, 13.
14, 14. 12, 16. 4, 16. 5, 18. 4,
19. 9, 23. 15, 28. 5, 32. 2, 32. 6,
32. 7, 34. 3, 34. 12, 36. 2, 37.
10, 38. 1, 39. 7, 41. 5, 41. 10,
41. 21, 48. 1, 49. 11, 50. 9, 50.
12, 52. 29, 56. 10, 57. 1, 57. 5,
57. 14, 61. 24, 62. 6, 62. 8, 63.
5, 63. 8, 63. 15, 64. 4, 67. 9, 68.
4, 68. 10, 68. 12, 69. 5, 69. 26,
72. 2, 72. 5, 74. 8, 74. 11, 76. 7,
77. 10, 77. 11, 77. 12, 78. 2, 80.
6, 82. 6, 83. 1, 84. 6, 84. 16, 85.
1, 86. 13, 86. 20, 86. 22, 86. 23,
86. 30, 86. 50, 89. 12, 91. 14, 95.
3, 96. 3, 96. 5, 100. 6, 103. 9,
107. 13, 108. 7, 108. 30, 109. 27,
111. 13, 112. 2, 112. 6, 113. 11,
117. 9, 123. 6, 124. 4, 124. 6,
125. 21, 127. 1, 129. 11, 130. 3,
134. 14, 135. 12, 136. 3, 137. 14,
137. 18, vii. 1. 4, 1. 10, 3. 10, 5.
10, 5. 12, 5. 13, 6. 12, 6. 17, 8.
6, 8. 15, 8. 18, 8. 21, 8. 60, 8. 78,
8. 92, 8. 99, 8. 102, 9. 12, 9. 14,
9. 21, 9. 35, 9. 39, 10. 1, 10. 18,
10. 33, 10. 75, 10. 83, 11. 12, 11.
13, 11. 16, 12. 7, 12. 10, 13. 2,
15. 6, 16. 4, 16. 18, 16, 20, 16.
25, 16. 39, 17. 5, 19. 4, 20. 11,
22. 15, 23. 10, 25. 2, 27. 4, 28.
2, 28. 4, 31. 8, 35. 11, 36. 22, 38.
7, 38. 16, 39. 1, 40. 16, 40. 19,
42. 4, 42. 8, 43. 7, 46. 17, 47. 8,
48. 2, 49. 20, 51. 2, 51. 14, 53.
13, 58. 1, 58. 5, 59. 11, 70. 3, 86.
9. 102. 3, 103. 2, 108. 14, 109.
6, 109. 9, 116. 3, 117. 6, 134. 1,
139. 9, 140. 7, 140. 9, 140. 14,
140. 15, 141. 2, 142. 8, 147. 15,
159. 1, 161. 21, 168. 22, 170. 19, Marriage in Greece, vi. 122. 10.
Illogical blending of two
phrases, vii. 8. 102; connec-
tion of superlative and geni-
tive, 9. 2.
Imperfect of repeated action
with av, vii. 211. 14.
Incorporated noun without ar-
ticle, vi. 13. 3.
Infinitive, absolute, vi. 30. 2;
without article governed by
preposition, 32. 6; with arti-
cle, 32. 6; for imv., 86. 30;
change to, 105. 7; supple-
mentary, 108. 30; after a posi-
tive, 109. 1; tense used after
BOTE, 109. 24; after verbs of
promising, vii. 134. 13; artic-
ular, past, 137. 8.
Inscriptions, vi. 13. 13, 14. 12,
35. 17, 57. 22, 61. 21, 81. 5, 103.
18, 105. 3, 138. 4, vii. 90. 7,
170. 24, 224. 7.
Intrusion of alien element, vi.
22. 10, 37. 12, 41. 10, 43. 1, 50.
7, 75. 19, 86. 19.
Ionic position of dative, vii. 38.
13.
Juxtaposition of contrasted
voices, vii. 237. 13.
Kings in Argos, vii. 149. 14.
Lade, vi. 7. 9.
Longinus, vi. 11. 5, 19. 9, 21. 11,
75. 15, vii. 9. 11, 10. 44, 56. 6,
188. 8, 191. 9, 225. 12.
368
ENGLISH INDEX.
Maxim used to close a speech, | Participle, used substantively
vii. 9. 39.
Medial passive, vii. 153. 7.
Memnon founder of Susa, vii.
151.3.
Metrical lines in prose, vii. 178.
9, 225. 3.
Micythus, inscriptions of, vii.
170. 24.
Middle in passive sense, vi. 9. 22.
Mixed form of condition, vii.
10. 48.
Mode, shifted, vi. 3. 2, 54. 6; as-
similated, 52. 22.
Modifier postponed to second
clause, vi. 45. 10.
Months, division of, vi. 57. 8.
Mythological descent, influence
of, vii. 150. 6.
Name of people for country, vii.
176. 20; superstition about
names, 180. 7.
Nautical affairs, meanings bor-
rowed from, vi. 12, 11.
Negative, fond of strong expres.
sions, vi. 3. 8; double, 56. 5;
opposite added to positive,
96. 5; belonging to both
parte. and verb, vii. 150. 14.
Neuters in maxims, vii. 10. 67.
Omission, of av, vi. 11. 10; of |
normal standard, 63. 3.
Onomacritus, editor of Homer,
vii. 6. 12.
Optative as imperative, vii. 5.
10.
Oracles, vi. 19. 8.
Paraphrasing Homer, vi. 4. 5.
Parechesis, vi. 12. 15, 31. 7, 72.
2, vii. 40. 1, 236. 19.
Participle, imperfect, vi. 7. 3, 36.
1; coincident, 9. 14, 29. 11,
vii. 154. 19; present, 23. 14;
omitted, 54. 2.
with prep., vi. 98. 3; omitted
after verbs of perception, 112.
6; in emphatic position, vii.
23. 21.
Partitive gen., vi. 43. 12; rarely
between article and partc.,
57.27.
Passive as middle, vi. 22. 13.
Perfect, opt., vi. 49. 11, vii. 11.7;
imperative, vi. 55. 1; infin.
after πрív, 116. 3.
Periphrasis of partc. and verb,
vii. 190. 10, 194. 14.
Persian teaching, vii. 194. 8.
Personification, of ships, vi. 16.
4, 37. 10; of mountain, vii. 22.
1; of town, 22. 15.
Phoenicians, sacrifices of, vii.
167.6; no hero worship, 167.
11; sacrifice of prisoners,
180. 5.
Phrynichus, vi. 21. 10.
Pindar, vi. 117. 3, vii. 6. 16, 8. 6,
104. 19, 169. 6.
Pleonasm, vi. 39. 11, 44. 11;
with eiva, vii. 143. 15, 206. 7,
213. 3.
Pluperfect, vi. 110. 3, vii. 100. 6.
Plural, adjectives, vi. 13. 7; of
excellence, 19. 9; verb with
neutr. pl. subject, 41. 21.
Position, vi. 1. 10, 3. 2, 3. 5, 4. 4,
5. 8, 9. 15, 22. 10, 23. 11, 23. 20,
27. 3, 27. 7, 29. 3, 30. 7, 30. 12,
33. 2, 34. 12, 38. 3, 39. 5, 40. 1,
41. 10, 41. 12, 43. 1, 43. 12, 43.
16, 44. 2, 45. 10, 46. 1, 46. 10,
47. 5, 47. 10, 50. 7, 57. 1, 57.
27, 61. 10, 68. 9, 73. 4, 75. 19,
76. 3, 77. 2, 85. 3, 86. 28, 89. 4,
96. 4, 98. 18, 103. 18, 105. 4,
108. 34, 111. 16, 119. 7, 124. 2,
124. 4, 126. 12, 127. 8, 130. 6,
130. 8, vii. 4. 4, 6. 4, 9. 35, 10.
14, 10. 18, 10. 39, 11. 19, 13. 4,
23. 5, 23. 21, 24. 3, 26. 3, 31. 8,
ENGLISH INDEX.
369
Sophocles, vi. 3. 4, 12. 13, 27. 3,
41. 10, 52. 40, 67. 9, 77. 13,101.
8, vii. 5. 14, 8. 6, 8. 25, 8. 60, 9.
39, 16. 4, 18. 15, 46. 17, 102. 3,
149. 10, 169. 6, 194. 14, 203. 9,
229. 13.
37. 2, 38. 13, 39. 5, 46. 11, 46. | Sigmatismus, vi. 19. 1, vii. 188. 8.
18, 50. 11, 104. 13, 126. 3, 139. Simonides, vii. 220. 9, 225. 11,
21, 143. 2, 223. 1.
228. 17.
Preposition, repeated after com-
pound, vi. 16. 5; after noun,
29. 3; as adverb, 38. 1; and
adjunct separated from noun,
52. 32; freedom of position,
77. 2; separated from noun
by av, 124. 4; between ad-
junct and noun, 130. 6; repe-
tition of, with attributive, vii.
176. 2.
Present, historical, vi. 1. 1, 23.7;
prophetic, 82. 11; anticipat-
ing future, 109. 26.
Prohibition, vii. 10. 66.
Proxeni, vi. 57. 11.
Pythian priestess, vi. 34. 8.
Relative pronoun developed |
from demonstrative, vi. 2. 5;
indefinite for definitc, 13. 14;
for interrogative, 37. 10; not
repeated, 123. 3.
Repetition, vi. 27. 11; in sy-
nonymous participle, 29. 8; in
pronoun, 46. 1; of prep. with
relative, 89. 4; of word with
altered bearing, vii. 8. 25.
Retribution, law of, vi. 87. 2.
Rhetorical questions, vii. 9. 11.
Rhyming clauses, vii. 16. 12.
Satrapy, vi. 42. 3.
Separation, vi. 23. 20.
16*
Spondaic close, vii. 18. 2.
Subjunctive in deliberative ques-
tion, vi. 52. 13.
Superlative with ἐν τοῖσι, vii.
137.5.
Synonyms, vi. 61. 3; connected
by τὲ καί, vii. 6. 3.
Thesmophoria, vi. 16. 8.
Tides in the Mediterranean, vii.
198. 1.
Tmesis, vii. 164. 16.
Touchstone, use of, vii. 10. 7.
Transfer of population, vi. 3. 9.
Trees, fondness of Persians for,
vii. 5. 16.
Troic period, reckoning from,
vi. 98. 9.
Variety, vi. 46. 9, 75. 18, vii. 8.
82, 8. 86, 10. 50, 10. 76, 50. 3,
50. 14.
Winds stilled by enchanters,
vii. 191. 6.
Wine mixed, vi. 84. 16.
Writing-tablets, vii. 239. 14.
THE END.

:
.

UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN
3 9015 02765 9682